Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project

11 Greenway Plaza, 22nd Floor \\ Houston, Texas 77046 \\ P 713-965-0608 \\ F 713-961-4571 \\ PBKSports.com

Project Manual for Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project PBK Project No.: P2119500SP for the GONZALES INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT August 26, 2021 Request Issue for Competitive Sealed Proposals

Project Manual for Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project PBK Project No.: P2119500SP for the GONZALES INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT August 26, 2021 Request Issue for Competitive Sealed Proposals Board of Trustees Ross Hendershot III Justin Schwausch Sue Gottwald

President Vice President

Secretary Sandra Gorden Trustee Glenn Menking Josie Smith-Wright Gloria Torres

Trustee Trustee Trustee

Administration John Schumacher Superintendent Robin Trojcak Assistant Superintendent Amanda Smith Gene Kridler

Chief Financial Officer Director of Operations

PBK Sports Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project Project No. P2119500SP Gonzales Independent School District

Seals Page 00 00 01 – 1

Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals

Each specification section included herein is listed in the Project Manual Table of Contents with a letter code, indicated below, designating the Designer of Record responsible for its preparation, under whose seal and/or authority it is issued for the purpose(s) stated above. Seals and signatures do not apply to documents not included herein, nor (except as otherwise indicated) to documents prepared by the Owner or others ("O"), including but not necessarily limited to documents in Division 00, geotechnical and other reports, etc.

Architect of Record: Edmund Ramirez RA No.: 14374

August 26, 2021

PBK Sports 11 Greenway Plaza, 22nd Floor Houston, Texas 77046

Engineer of Record, Structural: John R. Kubala PE No.: 106120

Kubala Engineers Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-3709 11 Greenway Plaza, Suite 1510 Houston, Texas 77046

Engineer of Record, Civil: Henry Fred Schneider, III PE No.: 69402

August 26, 2021

PBK Sports Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-3709 11 Greenway Plaza, 22nd Floor Houston, Texas 77046


Seals Page 00 00 01 – 2

Engineer of Record, Mechanical, Electrical, & Plumbing: Donald C. Richards PE No.: 61525

Leaf Engineers Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-18672 11 Greenway Plaza, 22nd Floor Houston, Texas 77046

26August 26, 2021


TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 1

SECTION 00 00 10 - TABLE OF CONTENTS PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS Section No. Title

00 11 00 Request for Proposals 00 20 00 Instructions to Offerors 00 40 00 Proposal Form 00 40 11 Felony Conviction Notification 00 40 11.1 Contractor Background SB9 Verification 00 40 12 List of Subcontractors 00 40 13 Affidavit of Non-Discrimination Employment 00 40 14 Affidavit of Non-Asbestos, Lead, and PCB use in Project 00 40 17 Certification of Criminal History Record Information 00 40 18 Conflict of Interest Questionnaire 00 40 20 Certificate of Interested Parties Form 1295 00 45 00 Selection Criteria and Contractor Information Sheet 00 45 01 Affidavit of Non-Collusion 00 45 02 Certification of Residency 00 50 00 Texas Statutory Performance Bond 00 50 01 Texas Statutory Payment Bond 00 65 01 Proposal Evaluation Waiver 00 65 15 Statutory Lien Waivers 00 70 00 Contract Documents 00 72 00 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 73 50 Prevailing Wage Rate

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section No. Title

01 10 00 Summary of Work 01 21 00 Allowances 01 23 00 Alternates 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 29 73 Schedule of Values Example of Schedule of Values 01 31 13 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 30 Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 01 45 00 Quality Control 01 45 23 Structural Testing and Inspection Services 01 45 23.1 Testing and Inspection Services 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 13 General Source Controls

01 57 13.13 Filter Fabric Fence 01 57 13.14 Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier

01 57 13.15 Stabilized Construction Exit 01 57 26 Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal



01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Closeout Form “A” Closeout Form “B” Closeout Form “C” Closeout Form “D” 01 78 39 Project Record Documents

DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS Section No. Title

02 32 00 Geotechnical Report

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section No. Title 03 05 00 Under-Slab Vapor Retarder 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork and Accessories

03 15 13 Waterstops 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete

DIVISION 4 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Section No. Title 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry (CMU Block) 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 METALS Section No. Title 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 31 13 Steel Floor Decking 05 31 23 Steel Roof Decking 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 51 13 Pre-Engineered Steel Pan Stairs DIVISION 6 WOOD, PALSTIC, AND COMPOSITES Section No. Title 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section No. Title 07 11 00 Bituminous Damp Proofing 07 14 00 Cold-Fluid Applied Waterproofing 07 19 00 Water Repellents 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers 07 42 10 Metal Wall Panels 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 OPENINGS Section No. Title 08 11 13 Hallow Metal Doors and Frames 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 51 00 Aluminum Windows 08 80 00 Glazing DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section No. Title 09 65 13 Resilient Base 09 65 23 luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring



09 90 00 Painting and Coatings DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section No. Title 10 14 00 Graphics DIVISION 11 OUTDOOR ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT Section No. Title 11 66 46.1 Football Scoreboard

11 68 33 Outdoor Football Equipment 11 68 43 Outdoor Soccer Equipment 11 68 63 Outdoor Track & Field Equipment

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section No. Title 12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section No. Title 13 34 17 Angle Frame Bleachers 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems DIVISION 22 PLUMBING Section No. Title 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONER Section No. Title 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 22 00 Condensate Piping 23 81 13 Packaged Terminal Air – Conditioners DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Section No. Title 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination Study and Arch Flash Study 26 20 00 Enclosed Switches, Enclosed Circuit Breakers, and Motor Controllers 26 24 16 Electrical Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits 26 50 00 Interior Lighting 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 26 56 58 Exterior Athletic Lighting DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS Section No. Title 27 51 23.40 Local Sound Distribution System DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK Section No. Title

31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing



31 13 13.13 Waste Material Disposal 31 20 00 Earthwork (Under Paving and Site Appurtenances) 31 23 00 Construction of Underground Utilities 31 23 23.16 Cement Stabilized Sand Bedding and Backfill 31 32 13.19 Lime Stabilized Subgrade 31 32 13.21 Lime-Flyash Stabilized Subgrade 31 41 00 Trench Safety 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section No. Title

32 01 16.71 Milling Asphalt 32 05 19.18 PVC Geomembrane Liner for Turf Systems 32 11 23 Crushed Aggregate Base Course 32 13 13 Asphalt Seal Coat 32 11 23 Concrete Paving 32 11 23.23.3 Free Draining Stone Base for Synthetic Turf System 32 12 16 Hot Mix-Laid Asphaltic Concrete 32 17 23.13 Painted Pavement Markings 32 18 23.22.1 Nylon Synthetic Turf System Padded 32 18 23.29 Infilled Polyethylene Slit-Film Synthetic Turf System 32 18 23.30 Infilled Monofilament Synthetic Turf System 32 18 23.32 Infilled Dual Monofilament Slit-Film Synthetic Turf System 32 18 23.40 Porous Structural Spray Synthetic Track Surfacing System 32 31 13 Chain Link Fence and Gates (Galvanized) 32 18 23.25 Chain Link Fence and Gates (PVC Coated) 32 31 14 PVC Coated Chain Linked Fences and Gates 32 92 13 Hydro-Mulch Seeding 32 92 23.16 Solid Sodding Bermuda

DIVISION 33 UTILITIES Section No. Title 33 11 00 Water Distribution System PVC 33 33 13 Sanitary Sewer Lines 33 44 19 Storm Water Management 33 46 16.34 Subdrainage System for Synthetic Turf Athletic Fields SOIL BORINGS RENDERINGS DRAWINGS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


REQUEST FOR COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS

00 11 00 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 11 00 - REQUEST FOR COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS Competitive Sealed Proposals for the work identified below in accordance with Proposal Documents and addenda as may be issued prior to date of proposal opening will be received by Gonzales Independent School District, until proposal closing date and time, as identified below. Proposals from Offerors will then be opened in public and read aloud. OWNER: Gonzales Independent School District 1615 St. Louis Street Gonzales, Texas 78629 Phone: 830-672-9551 Representative: Gene Kridler PROJECT: Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project 1546 Seydler Gonzales, Texas 78629 EST. BUDGET: $1.5 Million (Base) / $2.5 Million (With Alternates) NOTICE TO PROCEED: September 30, 2021 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: Gonzales High School Synthetic Turf Field – December 07, 2021

Track D-Zone & Field Events – January 11, 2022

Sports Lighting & Site Work - January 11, 2022

Bleachers & Press Box – March 04, 2022

PREPROPOSAL Wednesday, September 08, 2021 at 11:00 a.m. (local time) CONFERENCE Representatives of the Architect, Owner will be present at this

meeting. All proposers are encouraged to attend. LOCATION: Gonzales High School Field House 1546 Seydler Gonzales, Texas 78629 PROPOSAL DUE DATE Tuesday, September 14, 2021 AND TIME: 2:00 p.m. (local time) LOCATION OF Gonzales Independent School District East Avenue Administration

Building PROPOSAL OPENING: 1615 St. Louis Street Gonzales, Texas 78629 ARCHITECT: PBK Architects, Inc. 11 Greenway Plaza Boulevard, 22nd floor Houston, Texas 77046 Phone: 713-965-0608 Fax: 713-961-4571


REQUEST FOR COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS

00 11 00 - 2

Proposal Documents are available on the Gonzales ISD website at: www.gonzalesisd.net/Page/171. The proposal documents are also available at www.civcastusa.com; search P2119500SP. Submit Proposals to the Owner no later than the date and time specified. Submit proposals in duplicate in a sealed envelope in accordance with Document 00 11 00 Instructions to Offerors with the following information on the face of the envelope.

Name of Offeror (General Contractor)

Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project Gonzales Independent School District

Attn: Gene Kridler The Owner reserves the right to reject all proposals and to waive any irregularities in the Competitive Sealed Proposal process. No proposal shall be withdrawn within 60 days after the proposal opening without the specific consent of the Owner. PAYMENT BOND AND PERFORMANCE BOND: A Payment Bond and Performance Bond, each in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum conditioned upon the faithful performance of the Contract will be required. Please note that all bonding companies presented must be acceptable to the Owner. The prevailing rates of wages are the minimums that must be paid in compliance with applicable laws of the State of Texas. Offerors submitting a proposal are encouraged to visit the site. All Offerors submitting a proposal are encouraged to attend the proposal opening. Subcontractors and Suppliers intending to submit proposals to General Construction Offerors are required to prepare proposals based on a complete set of proposal documents. If after reviewing the complete set of proposal documents, Subcontractors and Supplier Offerors desiring to purchase individual drawings and specification sections for their proposal convenience, may do so by ordering the specific drawings and specifications directly from the reproduction company. Subcontractors and Suppliers purchasing a partial set of proposal documents are responsible for determining the documents it requires and is responsible for costs associated with printing and delivery. Subcontractors and Suppliers exercising this option shall agree that 1) all documents shall be returned to the Architect, without refund, after submitting a proposal, 2) the documents shall not be used on other construction projects, and 3) that the subcontractor or supplier agrees that the Owner and the Architect have no responsibility for errors or interpretations resulting from the use of incomplete set of proposal documents. Successful Subcontractors and Supplier Offerors may retain their Proposal Documents until completion of the construction.

END OF DOCUMENT 00 11 00

PBK Sports Project No. P2119500SP


INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 00 20 00 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 20 00 - INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS

1.1 OFFEROR’S PRESENTATION

A. Each Offeror by making his Proposal represents that: 1. He has read and understands the Proposal Documents and his Proposal is made in

accordance therewith. 2. He has thoroughly familiarized themselves with Division 01 General Requirements as they

are applicable to subsequent specification sections. 3. He has visited the site, has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the work

is to be performed and has correlated his observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.

4. He agrees to comply with the requirements of the following paragraph. Any Offeror who subsequently does not agree to comply with these requirements will automatically disqualify himself from proposing or receiving award of the contract.

B. He agrees that:

1. Work on the project will begin immediately upon receipt of signed Contract or Notice to Proceed.

2. Offeror will participate as a team member in cooperation with the Project Architect, Engineers, Owner, and Owner’s agents and/or consultants.

3. The Offeror will assign a competent full-time superintendent, to the project, and that superintendent shall be maintained on the project for the duration of the project, subject only to his continuous employment.

5. If awarded, the Offeror shall furnish and pay for a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond each in the full contract amount.

6. Offeror shall carry and keep in full force for the duration of the Project, insurance coverage for builder's risk, workmen's compensation, comprehensive general liability, and automobile liability as required by the General Conditions of the Specifications.

7. Each Offeror by making his Proposal represents that his Proposal includes only material and equipment specified in the Proposal Documents and supplemented, if necessary, for a complete and operating system.

8. Where subcontract work is involved and where Acceptable Subcontractors are designated for particular sections or phases of the Work, each Offeror by making his Proposal represents that his Proposal includes only firms designated as Acceptable Subcontractors.

9. That no asbestos PCBs or lead building materials shall be used, and that each Offeror (and sub-offeror or supplier submitting a proposal to an Offeror) shall submit an affidavit at Project Close-out stating that no asbestos, PCB’s or lead building materials has been used on the Project.

1.2 PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS

A. Proposal Documents include the Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals, Instructions to Offerors,

the Proposal Form, and the proposed Contract Documents, including any Addenda issued prior to receipt of proposals.

B. Contract Documents for the work consist of the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the

Contract (General, and other Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications, and all Addenda issued prior to receipt of proposals.

1.3 PROPOSAL PROCEDURES

A. A proposal is invalid if it has not been received at the designated location prior to the time and date

for receipt of proposals indicated in the Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals, or prior to any extension thereof issued to the Offerors by Addenda.




B. All requested Alternates shall be proposed. If no change in the Base Proposal is required, enter "No

Change".

C. Prior to the receipt of Proposals, Addenda will be forwarded by the Architect and will be available for inspection wherever the proposal documents are kept available for that purpose.

D. Proposals will be received in duplicate only on the Owner's Form of Proposal for the work as indicated

by the Proposal Documents, filled in, and enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed as follows:

Name of Offeror (General Contractor) Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project

Gonzales Independent School District Attn: Gene Kridler

F. All proposals must be delivered sealed to the above address at or before the time and date set.

Proposals will be received at no other place. If Proposal is sent by U.S. Mail, it must be sent Registered Mail.

G. A proposal may be withdrawn only upon request by the Offeror or his duly authorized representative,

provided such request is received by the Owner at the place designated for receipt of proposals and prior to the time fixed for the opening of proposals. A withdrawal of a proposal shall not be effective unless a written confirmation of the withdrawal is received by the Owner at said place within 48 hours before the time fixed for the opening of proposals.

1.4 INTERPRETATION OF PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS

A. Offerors and sub-offerors requiring clarification or interpretation of the Proposal Documents shall

make a written or verbal request which shall reach the Architect at least ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of proposals.

B. Any interpretation, correction or change of the Proposal Documents will be made by Addendum.

Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Proposal Documents made in any other manner will not be binding.

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. The materials, products and equipment described in the Proposal Documents establish a standard

of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. The materials and equipment named in, and the procedures covered by these specifications have been selected as a standard because of quality, particular suitability or record of satisfactory performance. It is not intended to preclude the use of equal or better materials or equipment provided that same meets the requirements of the particular project and is approved in an addendum as a substitution prior to the submission of proposals.

B. No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of proposals unless written request for approval has

been received by the Architect at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of proposals as described in Section 01 25 13 – Products and Substitutions. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final.

C. If the Architect approves any proposed substitution prior to receipt of proposals, such approval will be

set forth in an Addendum. Offerors shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.




D. No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award.

1.6 REJECTION OF PROPOSALS

A. The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all proposals and to reject a proposal not accompanied by any required proposal security, or by other data required by the Proposal Documents, or to reject a proposal which is in any way incomplete or irregular.

B. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formalities or irregularities

and to make the award of the contract in the best interest of the Owner.

C. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposal if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such offeror fails to satisfy the Owner that such offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work therein. Award may be made to other than the low-dollar offeror and given the one offering the “best value” to the school district, in addition to the purchase price, based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation.

D. Do not submit voluntary alternates. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposal which is

accompanied by conditional or qualifying statements, or “voluntary alternates”.

1.7 INSURANCE

A. Each Offeror shall include in his proposal the complete cost and shall carry and keep in full force for the duration of the project, insurance coverage required under the General Conditions and any other contract requirements.

1.8 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

A. Each Offeror shall include in this proposal the premium costs for 100% Performance Bond and 100%

Payment Bond. These bonds shall cover the faithful performance of the contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder in such form as the Owner may prescribe. The bonding companies must be acceptable to the Owner. The selected Offeror shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than the date of execution of the Contract.

1.9 AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. The Offeror to whom the award is made will be promptly notified. If an Offeror (a) withdraws his

proposal within 30 days after the date of time fixed for the opening of proposals in the Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals, or (b) fails or refuses to execute the Agreement, or other required forms within ten (10) days after the same are presented to him for signature, or (c) fails or refuses to furnish properly executed Performance Bond and Certification of Required Insurance within 15 calendar days of execution date of the Agreement, the Owner may award the work to another Offeror or Offerors or may call for new proposals.

B. The Offeror will be required to (a) submit his Proposal (b) execute Contract and Performance and

Payment Bonds, and (c) submit Certification of required insurances, all using the Owner's own forms for such respective purposes.

1.10 NOTICE TO PROCEED

A. The Offeror shall not commence work under this Contract until he receives the written Notice to

Proceed, or the Contract is duly signed by the Owner.




1.11 COMPLETION TIME

A. Offerors shall familiarize themselves with the Owners requirements concerning the project schedule as described in Section 01 10 00 of this Project Manual.

B. Having thoroughly familiarized himself with the conditions as they exist at the building sites and

acquainted himself with the labor supply and the material market, the Offeror will state in his proposal that he agrees to be substantially complete with the work by the date stated in the proposal.

C. It is therefore expressly agreed as a part of the consideration inducing the Owner to execute this

contract that the Owner may deduct liquidated damages from the final payment made to the Contractor for each calendar day beyond the agreed date which the Contractor shall require for Substantial Completion of the work included in this contract. It is expressly understood that the said sum per day is agreed upon as a fair estimate of the pecuniary damages which will be sustained by the Owner if the work is not completed within the agreed time, or within the legally extended time, if any, otherwise provided for herein. Said sum shall be considered as liquidated damages only and in no sense shall be considered a penalty, said damage being caused by additional compensation to personnel, for loss of interest on money and other miscellaneous increased costs, all of which are difficult of exact ascertainment. Also, any disruption of Owner’s use of the existing facilities or newly completed facilities will also be subject to liquidated damages. Refer to Section 01 32 16 (if applicable) for additional requirements. Delays, disruption of use, failures to complete, and liquidated damages are fully described in the contract documents.

The definition of Substantial Completion is found in Article 9.8.1 of the AIA General Conditions and other contract documents.

1.12 FELONY CONVICTION NOTIFICATION

A. Section 44.034, of the Texas Education Code requires a person or business entity that enters into a

contract with a school district must give advance notice to the district if the person or an owner or operator of the business entity has been convicted of a felony. The notice must include a general description of the conduct resulting in the conviction of a felony. Subsection (b) states “a school district may terminate a contract with a person or business entity if the district determines that the person or business entity failed to give notice as required by Subsection (a) or misrepresented the conduct resulting in the conviction. The district must compensate the person or business entity for services performed before the termination of the contract.” Subsection (c) states “this section does not apply to a publicly held corporation.”

B. The Offeror must execute Statement of Affirmation and submit with proposal.

1.13 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

A. The Offeror shall supply a list of the following major: 1. Mechanical 2. Electrical 3. Plumbing 4. Masonry 5. Concrete 6. Steel 7. Low Voltage 8. CMU 9. Flagstone 10. Metal Wall Panels 11. Standing Seam Metal Roofing 12. Pre-engineered Metal Building




13. Synthetic Turf 14. Chain Link Fencing and Gates 15. Athletic Equipment 16. Scoreboard 17. Site Utility 18. Earthwork 19. Track Surface 20. Any other prudent subcontractor.

B. The Offeror must execute Document 00 40 12, List of Subcontractors and submit with their Proposal.

1.14 AFFIDAVIT OF NON-DISCRIMINATORY EMPLOYMENT

A. The Offeror, and sub-offerors, shall agree to refrain from discrimination in terms and conditions of employment to the basis of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin, and agrees to take affirmative action as required by Federal Statutes and Rules and Regulations issued in order to maintain and insure non-discriminatory employment practices.

B. The Offerors must execute Document 00 40 13, Affidavit of Non-Discriminatory Employment and

submit with Proposal. The sub-offerors shall execute Document 00 40 13, Affidavit of Non- Discriminatory Employment before commencing work on this Project. Offerors and sub-offerors who have not executed this document will not be eligible to work on this project.

1.15 AFFIDAVIT OF NON-ASBESTOS, LEAD, AND PCB USE IN PROJECT

A. The use of any construction process or the installation of any asbestos, lead and PCBs or material

containing asbestos, lead and PCBs is strictly prohibited for this Project.

B. Prior to submitting a proposal, Offerors shall notify the Architect, in writing, of any materials in these specifications which are known to contain or are likely to contain asbestos, lead or PCBs.

C. The Offeror, and sub-offerors shall agree to refrain from using products which are known to contain

asbestos, lead, and PCB containing materials as applicable to the project. They shall also affirm that lead or lead bearing materials have not been incorporated into potable water systems, and that lead sheet flashing used in through roof plumbing penetration applications is the only lead on the Project.

D. The Selected Offeror (Contractor) must execute Document 00 40 14, Affidavit of Non-Asbestos,

Lead, and PCB Use and submit at Project Closeout. The Subcontractors to the Contractor must execute Close-out Form “D”, attached to section 01 77 00, Subcontractors Hazardous Material Certificate and submit at Project Closeout.

E. The Offeror is reminded to refer to the Paragraph above for requirements during the Proposal period

and the following requirements during performance of the Work regarding the use of asbestos free materials, products, and systems in the Project. 1. Since many materials, products and systems are proprietary, it is not possible to know all of

the materials or components which go into producing such material, product or system without the manufacturer divulging trade secrets or patent information. Every effort has been made to specify materials, products or systems, which either as an "off the shelf" material, product or system or as a custom material, product or system do not contain asbestos.

2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to submit an affidavit from the manufacturer to ascertain that every material, product or system used in the Project does not contain asbestos. In the event the material, product or system is found to contain asbestos, the Contractor shall offer for the Architect’s consideration a substitution which he knows does not contain asbestos.

3. Even though a material, product or system is specified, or a specification is based on a particular material, product or system, the Contractor will not be relieved from the responsibility to ascertain that materials, products and systems used in the Project do not contain asbestos. Under no circumstances shall a material, product or system which is




known, suspected or found to contain asbestos be used on the Project. 4. If a material, product or system containing asbestos is used, the Contractor shall remove and

replace the material, product or system with one which is asbestos free at no additional expense to the Owner, including removal and replacement of other materials affected by the removal of the asbestos bearing material, product or system, i.e. gypsum wallboard removed, replaced, and repainted on account of insulation being removed, etc.

1.16 CRIMINAL HISTORY RECORDS

A. Prior to commencing any work on this Project, the Selected Contractor shall certify, on the form

provided herein as Document 00 40 17, that for each of its employee who will have direct contact with students, the Selected Contractor has obtained, as required by Texas Education Code Section 22.0834: 1. national criminal history record information from a law enforcement or criminal justice

agency for each employee of the Selected Contractor hired before January 1, 2008 who will have direct contact with students; and

2. national criminal history record information from the Texas Department of Safety for each employee of the Selected Contractor hired on or after January 1, 2008 who will have direct contact with students; Fingerprinting is required and shall be provided by the contractor (applicant) and administered through FAST (Fingerprint Applicant Services of Texas) which will be recorded by the District in the FACT (Fingerprint-based Applicant Clearinghouse of Texas). Currently applicant must obtain fingerprinting from L-1 Identity Solutions Company, (888) 467-2080, or schedule an appointment online at: https://tx.ibtfingerprint.com/.

B. Any personnel who will have direct contact with students must not have been convicted of an offense identified in Texas Education Code Section 22.085.

C. The Selected Contractor shall execute and submit Document 00 40 17, Certification of Criminal

History Record Information Review by Contractor-Employer along with required Schedule ‘A’ documenting proposed employees to be working on site, within 10 days after receipt of Notice To Proceed and prior to commencement of Work.

D. Furthermore, an updated Schedule ‘B’ shall be submitted weekly to the District indicating changes to

contractor personnel with accompanying certifications and criminal history records. Any fingerprinting and photographing required by the aforementioned code will be the responsibility of the Contractor- Employer.

1.17 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE

A. According to Local Government Code, Chapter 176, a person or an agent of a person who contracts

or seeks to contract for the sale or purchase of property, goods, or services with any government agency must file a completed Conflict of Interest Questionnaire with the records administrator of the local government not later than the seventh business day after the date that the person begins contract discussions or negotiations with the District or submits to the District an application, response to a request for proposals, correspondence, or another writing related to a potential agreement with the District.

B. All Offeror’s and sub-offeror’s proposing to do work with the District must execute Document 00

40 18, Conflict of Interest Questionnaire and submit to the District’s Legal Department within seven (7) days of the Proposal Date. This requirement will be waived if the Offeror or sub-offeror has previously submitted such document to the District within the last year. In such case, provide written notification and attach to the Proposal.

1.18 TEXAS ETHICS COMMISSION FORM 1295

A. Gonzales Independent School District is required to comply with the Texas Government Code




Section 2252.908, Disclosure of Interested Parties. Section 2252.908 prohibits Gonzales Independent School District from entering into a contract resulting from a RFP with a business entity unless the business entity submits a Disclosure of Interested Parties (Form 1295) to Gonzales Independent School District at the time business entity submits the signed contract. The Texas Ethics Commission has adopted rules requiring the business entity to file Form 1295 electronically with the Texas Ethics Commission.

B. All Offeror’s and sub-offeror’s proposing to do work with the District must execute Document 00

40 20, Conflict of Interest Questionnaire and submit with the Proposal.

1.19 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

A. The Offeror shall execute Document 00 45 01, Non-Collusion Affidavit and submit with the Proposal.

1.20 CERTIFICATION OF RESIDENCY

A. Chapter 2252 of the Texas Government Code relates to Resident versus Nonresidents and the

requirements governmental entities must follow when awarding contracts to Nonresidents.

B. The Offeror shall execute Document 00 45 02, Certification of Residency.

1.21 AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS

A. A serious effort has been made to select only materials that are systems that are readily available. As far as is known at proposal time all items are either available "off the shelf" or within a relatively short period of time. If during the proposal period, an Offeror becomes aware of an availability or delivery problem with any of the specified systems or materials, he should notify the Architect immediately. The Architect will promptly explore possibilities for selecting other systems or materials which would circumvent the problem and notify Offerors of any changes in an addendum, otherwise it will be understood that only specified systems and materials that are readily available are included in the proposals.

1.22 ANTI-TERRORISM VERIFICATION

A. Pursuant to Chapter 2252, Texas Government Code, [Company] represents and certifies that at

the time of execution of this Agreement neither the [Company], nor any wholly owned subsidiary, majority-owned subsidiary, parent company or affiliate of the same, is a company listed by the Texas Comptroller of Public Accounts under Section 2270.0201 or 2252.153 of the Texas Government Code.

1.23 COMPLIANCE WITH GOVERNMENT CODE 552.372

A. The requirements of the Texas Public Information Act, Chapter 552 of the Texas Government

Code, Subchapter J, may apply to this proposal or contract if it is valued at more than $1 million. The contractor or vendor agrees the contract can be terminated if the contractor or vendor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter, including the preservation of all “contracting information” (as defined in 552.003) and the provision, upon request of the governmental entity with whom you are contracting, of all contracting information. Contracting information includes, but is not limited to, records, communications and other documents related to the proposal process, contract, payments, receipts, scope of work/services, and performance.




THIS PAGE MUST BE SUBMITTED BY: TUESDAY, SEPTEMBER 14, 2021 AT 2:00 PM PROPOSAL FORM

00 40 00 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 40 00 - PROPOSAL FORM


Submitted by:

Date: Phone No.:

To: Gonzales Independent School District 1615 St. Louis Street Gonzales, Texas 78629

Having examined Proposal and Contract Documents prepared by PBK Sports, dated August 26, 2021, and having examined site conditions, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, equipment and materials and perform all work for the completion of the above-named project for the sum indicated below.

In submitting his Proposal, the undersigned agrees to the following:

1. Hold proposal open for acceptance 60 days after the date on which proposals are opened. 2. Accept right of Owner to reject any or all proposals, to waive formalities and to accept proposal

which Owner considers most advantageous. 3. Enter into and execute the contract, if awarded, for the Base Proposal and accepted Alternate

Proposals. 4. Complete work in accordance with the Contract Documents within the stipulated contract time. 5. By signing, the undersigned affirms that, to the best of his knowledge, the Proposals have been

arrived at independently and is submitted without collusion with anyone to obtain information or gain any favoritism that would in any way limit competition or give an unfair advantage over respondents in the award of this proposal.

I. BASE PROPOSAL

A. Base Proposal A: Undersigned agrees to complete the Work for the lump sum amount of:

Dollars $ (Amount written in words governs) (Amount in figures)

B. Base B Proposal No.1: AstroTurf Rhino SF 46 rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf system:

Undersigned agrees to complete the Work for the lump sum amount of:

Dollars $ (Amount written in words governs) (Amount in figures) C. Base C Proposal No.2: AstroTurf Rhino Blend rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf

system:






00 40 00 - 2

D. Base D Proposal No.3: AstroTurf 3D3 Rootzone rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf system:


Dollars $ (Amount written in words governs) (Amount in figures) E. Base E Proposal No.4: FieldTurf XD rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf system:



F. Base F Proposal No.5: FieldTurf Classic HD rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf system:


Dollars $ (Amount written in words governs) (Amount in figures) G. Base G Proposal No.6: FieldTurf Vertex Prime rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf

system:


Dollars $ (Amount written in words governs) (Amount in figures) H. Base H Proposal No.7: Hellas Velocity rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf system:


Dollars $ (Amount written in words governs) (Amount in figures) I. Base I Proposal No.8: Hellas Fusion rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf system:


Dollars $ (Amount written in words governs) (Amount in figures) J. Base J Proposal No.9: Hellas Matrix rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf system:






00 40 00 - 3

K. Base K Proposal No.10: Shaw Momentum rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf system:


Dollars $ (Amount written in words governs) (Amount in figures) L. Base L Proposal No.11: Shaw Powerblade Pro rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf

system:



M. Base M Proposal No.12: Shaw Legion Pro rubber-sand infilled synthetic turf system:



III. ALTERNATES

Should the Owner accept any Alternates, the undersigned agrees to modify the Base Proposal as stipulated below:

A. Alternate Proposal No. 1: Scoreboard:

Add/Deduct: Dollars $ (Amount written in words) (Amount in figures)

B. Alternate Proposal No. 2: 30’x30’ Metal Storage Building:


C. Alternate Proposal No. 3: 2.5” Mill and Overlay of Existing and Asphalt Parking Lot:


D. Alternate Proposal No. 4: Concrete Pavement in Areas by Bleachers and Baseball Field:


E. Alternate Proposal No. 5: Synthetic Lawn Turf in Areas by Bleachers and Baseball Field:





00 40 00 - 4

F. Alternate Proposal No. 6: 8-Foot Black PVC Coated Chain Link Fence at Field Event:


G. Alternate Proposal No. 7:”COME AND TAKE IT” Lettering installed along the home sideline

per rendering:


H. Alternate Proposal No. 8: BrockFill Synthetic turf infill:


I. Alternate Proposal No. 9: FieldTurf CoolPlay Synthetic turf infill:


J. Alternate Proposal No. 10: Hellas Ecothern synthetic turf infill:


K. Alternate Proposal No. 11: 17mm Brock SP17 Shock Pad:


L. Alternate Proposal No. 12: 15mm En-Plast ShockDrain 580 Shock Pad:


M. Alternate Proposal No. 13: 10mm G-MaxDrain Shock Pad:


N. Alternate Proposal No. 14: 10mm Cushdrain Shock Pad:


O. Alternate Proposal No. 15: 10mm Regupol Abzorb Shock Pad:





00 40 00 - 5

P. Alternate Proposal No. 16: 19mm SBR Rubber Elastic E-Layer:


II. ALLOWANCES

Undersigned certifies that the appropriate allowances specified in Section 01 21 00 are included in each Base Proposal Package and agrees that the unexpended balance of allowance sums will revert to Owner in the final settlement of the Contract.

III. ADDENDA

The Undersigned acknowledges receipt of Addenda Nos.

dated , 2021.

IV. CONTRACT TIME

The undersigned agrees that he has included all labor and materials to be substantially complete with the Work defined by these Contract Documents for each Phase of work listed below and associated substantial completion dates listed below. The Offeror attests and affirms that his proposal includes all necessary costs associated with overtime to substantially complete the Work by the following date(s) taking into consideration the number of days specified for each phase to be anticipated as delay days along the critical path of Work.

Undersigned agrees to begin Work upon Notice to Proceed, and to be Substantially Complete with the Work, in the various portions defined in Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work, by their respective Substantial Completion dates established therein.

V. CHANGES IN THE WORK

Undersigned understands that changes in the Work shall be performed in accordance with the terms of the Contract.




00 40 00 - 6

VI. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

Undersigned understands that liquidated damages as defined in the Contract will be included in the form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, and that the Contractor will be bound thereto.

It is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to reject any or all proposals, to accept either separate or combined Proposals, and to waive any informalities in the proposal process.

Authorized Signature

Title

Name of Contracting Firm

Type of Firm Organization

Address

Telephone

Email

Date (Seal, if a Corporation) State at right the Type of Firm Organization (Corporation, Partnership, Sole Proprietorship, etc.)


NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL FELONY CONVICTION NOTIFICATION

00 40 11 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 40 11 - FELONY CONVICTION NOTIFICATION Note: The Statement of Affirmation Must Be Notarized STATEMENT OF AFFIRMATION “The undersigned affirms that he/she is duly authorized to provide this information by the person(s) or business entity making the proposal, and the information provided below concerning felony convictions has been personally and thoroughly reviewed, and verified, and is, therefore, current, true and accurate to the best of my knowledge.” Firm’s Name:____________________________________Address:_____________________________________ a.____ My firm is a publicly held corporation, therefore, this reporting requirement is not applicable. b.____ My firm is not owned nor operated by anyone who has been convicted of a felony. c.____ My firm is owned or operated by the following individual(s) who has/have been convicted of a felony. Name of Felon(s): _____________________________________________________________________________________ Details of Conviction(s): _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ PLEASE CHECK a, b, or c ABOVE AND SIGN BELOW Offeror’s Name___________________________________Position/Title ___________________________________ Offeror’s Signature__________________________________Date________________________________________ STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________ ) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 2021. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for ________________ County, Texas



NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE EXECUTED AND SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL

Contractor Criminal Background SB9 Certification 00 40 12 - 1

DOCUMENT – 00 40 11.1 CONTRACTOR CRIMINAL BACKGROUND SB9 CERTIFICATION Contractor Criminal Background SB9 Certification Introduction: Texas Education Code Chapter 22 requires service contractors to obtain criminal history records on covered employees. Covered employees with disqualifying convictions are prohibited from serving at a school district. Contractors must certify to the district that they have complied and must obtain similar certifications from their subcontractors. For more information or to set up an account, a contractor should contact the Texas Department of Public Safety’s Crime Records Service at 512-424-2474. The district has no input to, or control of the DPS process. Definitions: Covered Employee: Employees of a contractor who have or will have continuing duties related to the service to be performed at the District and have or will have direct contact with students. The District will be the final arbiter of what constitutes continuing duties or direct contact with students. Disqualifying criminal history: (1) a conviction or other criminal history information designated by the District; or (2) one of the following offenses, if at the time of the offense, the victim was under 18 or enrolled in a public school: (a) a felony offense under Title 5, Texas Penalty Code; (b) an offense for which the defendant is required to register as a sex offender under Chapter 62, Texas Code of Criminal Procedure; (c) an equivalent offense under federal law or the laws of another state. On behalf of _______________________________ (“Contractor”), I, the undersigned authorized signatory for Contractor certify to Gonzales Independent School District (“District”) that [Check one]: [ ] None of Contractor’s employees are covered employees, as defined above. I further certify that Contractor has taken precautions or imposed conditions to ensure that its employees will not become covered employees. Contractor will maintain these precautions or conditions throughout the time the contracted services are provided. Or [ ] Some or all of Contractor’s employees are covered employees. If this box is selected, I further certify that:

1. Contractor has obtained all required criminal history record information, through the Texas Department of Public Safety, regarding its covered employees. None of the covered employees has a disqualifying criminal history.

2. If Contractor receives information that a covered employee subsequently has a reported criminal

history, Contractor will immediately remove the covered employee from contract duties and notify the District in writing within three (3) business days.

3. Upon request, Contractor will provide the District with the name and any other requested

information of covered employees so that the District may obtain criminal history record information on the covered employees.

If the District objects to the assignment of a covered employee on the basis of the covered employee’s criminal history record information, Contractor agrees to discontinue using that covered employee to provide services at the District.



Contractor Criminal Background SB9 Certification 00 40 12 - 2

I also certify to the District on behalf of Contractor that Contractor has obtained certifications from its subcontractors of compliance with Education Code, Chapter 22. Noncompliance or misrepresentation regarding this certification may be grounds for contract termination. Submitter’s Signature: ____________________________________ Date: _____________________ Submitter’s Name & Title: _________________________________ Company Name: _____________ Telephone # ( ) __________________ 800-_______________ Fax No. _________________________ Email Address: _____________________________________________________________________ Mailing Address: ____________________________________________________________________ City, State, & Zip: ___________________________________________________________________ This form is required to be completed and signed; however, only the successful Proposers will be required to comply with requirement set forth in Act of May 28, 2007, 80th Leg., R.S., S.B. 9, § 30. All related costs including background checks/fingerprinting shall be at the contractor’s expense. This sheet must be completed, signed, and returned with the Prime Contractor’s submittals

END OF DOCUMENT 00 40 11.1


NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL FORM LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

00 40 12 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 40 12 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

Project: Architect: Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf PBK Architects, Inc. And Lighting Project 1615 St. Louis 11 Greenway Plaza, 22nd Floor Gonzales, Texas 78629 Houston, Texas 77046 Gonzales Independent School District Architect’s Project No. P2119500SP Contractor: Date: ________________________ _______________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ List Subcontractors and others proposed to be employed on the Project required by the proposal documents. (To be completed by the Contractor and returned to the Architect.) Work/ Division Firm Address Phone/Fax Email Representative ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ (Provide additional sheets as required.)



NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL AFFIDAVIT OF NONDISCRIMINATORY EMPLOYMENT

00 40 13 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 40 13 - AFFIDAVIT OF NON-DISCRIMINATORY EMPLOYMENT STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________ )

AFFIDAVIT

This Company, Contractor, or Subcontractor agrees to refrain from discrimination in terms and conditions of employment to the basis of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin, and agrees to take affirmative action as required by Federal Statutes and rules and Regulations issued pursuant thereto in order to maintain and insure non-discriminatory employment practices. ______________________________________________ Company ______________________________________________ Printed Name ______________________________________________ Signature STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________ ) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 2021. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for ________________ County, Texas



NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE EXECUTED AND SUBMITTED AT PROJECT CLOSE-OUT AFFIDAVIT OF NON-ASBESTOS, LEAD AND PCB USE IN PROJECT

00 40 14 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 40 14 - AFFIDAVIT OF NONASBESTOS, LEAD, AND PCB USE IN PROJECT Upon completion of this form, return to the Architect at Project Closeout. Project: Architect: Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and PBK Architects, Inc. Lighting Project 1801 North Sarah Dewitt Drive 11 Greenway Plaza, 22nd Floor Gonzales, Texas 78629 Houston, Texas, 77046 Gonzales Independent School District Architect’s Project No. P2119500SP Contractor: _________________________ Date: ________________________ (Name, address) _________________________ _________________________

AFFIDAVIT The undersigned affirms and certifies that "to the best of their knowledge and belief asbestos, lead, and PCB containing materials have not been used or incorporated into the Work and lead or lead bearing materials have not been incorporated into potable water systems”, including, but not limited to those water systems for drinking fountains, all sinks, showers, bath tubs, residential and commercial kitchen equipment, ice machines, and hose bibbs, as applicable to the project, and that lead sheet flashing used in through roof plumbing penetration applications is the only lead on the Project. ______________________________________________ Company ______________________________________________ Printed Name ______________________________________________ Signature STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF ______________ ) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 2021. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for _____________ County, Texas



CERTIFICATION OF CRIMINAL HISTORY NOTIFICATION

00 40 17 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 40 17 - CERTIFICATION OF CRIMINAL HISTORY RECORD INFORMATION REVIEW BY CONTRACTOR-EMPLOYER Certifying Affidavit submitted to: Name of School District: Gonzales Independent School District Mailing Address: 1615 St. Louis Street, Gonzales, Texas 78629 Project: Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project

STATE OF TEXAS §

COUNTY OF ________________________ § (I) The undersigned representative, on behalf of the contracting firm identified below, swears and affirms to Gonzales Independent School District (the "District") that such firm has obtained, reviewed and verified, from a law enforcement or criminal justice agency or a private entity that is consumer reporting agency governed by the Fair Credit Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. §§ 1681 et seq.) the criminal history record information of employees prior to 1 January 2008, who (a) have or will have continuing duties related to the contracted services, and (b) have or will have direct contact with students. Such employees are identified by name on Schedule A (contractor shall provide and attach hereto). The undersigned further swears and affirms no employees who meet the requirements of (a) and (b) herein and/or identified on Schedule A have been convicted of any offense identified in Section 22.085 of the Texas Education Code. (2) The undersigned representative, on behalf of the contracting firm identified below, swears, and affirms to the District, that such firm has obtained, reviewed and verified, from the Texas Department of Public Safety criminal clearinghouse, the national criminal history record information of all employees hired on or after 1 January 2008, who (a) have or will have continuing duties related to the contracted services, and (b) have or will have direct contact with students. Such employees are identified by name on Schedule B (contractor shall provide and attach hereto). The undersigned further swears and affirms no employees who meet the requirements of (a) and (b) herein and/or identified on Schedule B have been convicted of any offense identified in Section 22.085 of the Texas Education Code. (3) The undersigned firm swears and covenants that no present or future employee will provide services to the Project that involve direct contact with students unless and until such employee's national criminal history record information has been reviewed and cleared as required by Paragraph (2) above, and an updated Certification has submitted by the contracting firm to the District with an updated Schedule B identifying such employees. In the event of an emergency, an employee who has not been previously certified may only provide services that involve direct contact with students if such employee is escorted by a District representative. (4) The undersigned firm swears and covenants that, upon receipt of information, directly or indirectly, that any employee of the contracting firm has been convicted of an offense identified in Section 22.085 of the Texas Education Code, the contracting firm will immediately remove such employee from the Project and notify the District. (5) Furthermore, if requested by the District, the name, driver's license number, and any other information required by the DPS will be submitted to the District for any person on either Schedule A or Schedule B.


CERTIFICATION OF CRIMINAL HISTORY NOTIFICATION

00 40 17 - 2

_____________________________________, being duly sworn, affirms and certifies that he/she is the

_____________________________ (position) of ______________________________(contracting firm),

and that all statements and acknowledgements contained herein are true and correct, and that he/she

has the authority to bind such firm to the covenants set out above.

_______________________________________

STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________ ) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 2021. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for ________________ County, Texas



CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE

00 40 18 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 40 18 - CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE INSTRUCTIONS According to Local Government Code, Chapter 176, a person or an agent of a person who contracts or seeks to contract for the sale or purchase of property, goods, or services with Gonzales Independent School District must file a completed Conflict of Interest Questionnaire with the District not later than the seventh business day after the date that the person begins contract discussions or negotiations with the District or submits to the District an application, response to a request for proposals, correspondence, or another writing related to a potential agreement with the District. The Conflict-of-Interest Questionnaire is required to be filed annually by September 1 as long as the person or the agent of the person continues to contract or seek to contract for the sale or purchase of property, goods, or services with the District or not later than the 7th business day after the date the originally filed questionnaire becomes incomplete or inaccurate. The completion of the Conflict-of-Interest Questionnaire is not needed if the person is an employee of a governmental entity and is acting in the employee’s official capacity. Explanation of the Conflict-of-Interest Questionnaire: 1. Name of person doing business with the District.

2. Check the box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire. 3. Describe each affiliation or business relationship with an employee or contractor of the

District who makes recommendations to a District officer with respect to expenditure of money. If no affiliation or business relationship exists, state “NONE.”

4. Examples: If your spouse, parent, or child is the District’s Director of Purchasing and a proposal is being submitted to the Purchasing Department, this relationship must be reported. If your spouse, parent, or child is the Principal at a School and your business may sell items directly to that school, this relationship must be reported. If you or your spouse, parent, or child is in business with a District employee that would be making a recommendation concerning a purchase or sales transaction involving you, the relationship must be reported. If you employ or do business with a spouse, parent, or child of a District employee that would be making a recommendation concerning a purchase or sales transaction involving you, the relationship must be reported. If you are a District employee and would be making a recommendation concerning a purchase or sales transaction involving you, the relationship must be reported. If your spouse, parent, or child is a teacher that does not make recommendations concerning purchasing or sales transactions, this relationship should not be reported. If your spouse, parent, or child is a Principal at a School and a proposal is being considered by a separate department such as Facilities Planning (Construction Department), this relationship should not be reported.



00 40 18 - 2

5. Describe each affiliation or business relationship with a person who is a District officer and who appoints or employs a District officer that is the subject of this questionnaire. If no affiliation or business relationship exists, state “NONE.” Example: If you or your spouse, parent, or child is related to, employs, or is in business with a District officer or their spouse, parent, or child, this relationship must be reported.

6. Name of District officer with whom you have an affiliation or business relationship. For each person listed under question #4, complete page 2. If answers to A, B, and C are NO, indicate the name of the District officer, but do not complete section D.

7. Describe any other affiliation or business relationship that might cause a conflict of interest. Example: If your neighbor or friend is a District employee that would be making a recommendation concerning a purchase or sales transaction involving you and you feel that your relationship with this employee could affect their recommendation, this relationship must be reported. If any other situation exists that would result in a conflict of interest, the relationship must be reported.

7. Sign and date this form.

Submit the completed form to the District. If any disclosures are indicated under questions #3 or #4, the form will be posted on the District’s website.

FILL CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE - NEXT PAGE



00 40 18 - 3



00 40 18 - 4


CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES 00 40 20 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 40 20 - CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES

CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES – FORM 1295 Certificate of Interested Parties (Form 1295): Electronically complete and submit using the Texas Ethics Commission’s online filing application. Print a copy of Form 1295, sign, and with a copy of the Certificate of Filing, attach to Document 00 40 00 Proposal. Gonzales Independent School District is required to comply with House Bill 1295, which amends the Texas Government Code by adding Section 2252.908, Disclosure of Interested Parties. Section 2252.908 prohibits Gonzales Independent School District from entering into a contract resulting from a RFP with a business entity unless the business entity submits a Disclosure of Interested Parties (Form 1295) to Gonzales Independent School District at the time business entity submits the signed contract. The Texas Ethics Commission has adopted rules requiring the business entity to file Form 1295 electronically with the Texas Ethics Commission.

Definitions: 1. Interested Party: A person:

a) who has a controlling interest in a business entity with whom Gonzales Independent School District contracts; or

b) who actively participates in facilitating the contract or negotiating the terms of the contract, including a broker, intermediary, adviser, or attorney for the business entity.

2. Business Entity: An entity recognized by law through which business is conducted, including a sole proprietorship, partnership, or corporation.

As a business entity, each vendor must electronically complete, print, sign, and submit Form 1295 and the Certification of Filing with their proposals even if no interested parties exist. File Form 1295 with the Texas Ethics Commission (TEC) using the online filing application, which can be found at https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/whatsnew/elf_info_form1295.htm. Proposers must use the filing application on the Texas Ethics Commission’s website to enter the required information on Form 1295. Proposers must print a copy of the completed form, which includes a certification of filing containing a unique certification number. Form 1295 shall be signed by an authorized agent of the business entity. Submit the completed Form 1295 with the certification of filing with Gonzales Independent School District by attaching the completed form to the vendor’s solicitation response. Gonzales] Independent School District must acknowledge the receipt of the filed Form 1295 by notifying the Texas Ethics Commission of the receipt of the filed Form 1295 no later than the 30th day after the date the contract binds the parties to the contract. After Gonzales Independent School District acknowledges the Form 1295, the Texas Ethics Commission will post the completed Form 1295 to its website within seven business days after receiving notice from Gonzales Independent School District. FILL CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE - NEXT PAGE


CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES 00 40 20 - 2



SELECTION CRITERIA AND CONTRACTOR INFORMATION SHEET 00 45 00 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 45 00 - SELECTION CRITERIA AND CONTRACTOR INFORMATION SHEET Proposals are to include the information requested in this of this Request in the sequence and format prescribed. In addition to and separate from the requested information, offerors submitting proposals may provide supplementary materials further describing their capabilities and experience.

Following the deadline for receipt, the District's staff will receive, publicly open, and read aloud the names of the offerors and, if any are required to be stated, all prices stated in the proposals. The District’s staff will recommend that the District select a construction contractor from the respondents to this Request for Proposals or reject all proposals. The recommended ranking shall be based on the data furnished by the offerors in response to the request for CSPs. The following is a list of criteria and weight for each criterion. Unless modified by addendum prior to opening of the proposals, the following listing of criteria and weight of criteria shall be utilized by the District pursuant to Texas Government Code Chapter 2269, Subchapter D: WEIGHT CRITERIA 50 % The price 20 % The offeror’s experience and reputation 20 % The quality of the offeror’s services 5 % Whether the offeror’s financial capability is appropriate to the size and scope of the

project 5 % Safety record All responses in the proposal may be used to help the District select a contractor based on these criteria. The District reserves the right to verify the accuracy and completeness of all responses by utilizing any information available to the District without regard to whether such information appears in the proposal. Please provide the following information concerning your firm: A. Offeror Information

1. Name of firm 2. Business address 3. Telephone number 4. Fax number 5. Type of organization (individual, partnership, corporation, association). 6. Number of permanent employees. (Employees hired for the duration of a specific project or

under a fixed-term contract are not considered permanent employees for purposes of this proposal). i. Home office ii. Field

7. Primary contact person for District inquiries and their email addresses. 8. Main office location (if different than above). 9. Describe any substantial changes in ownership of your firm during the past five (5) years. 10. How many years has your firm operated under its current form of business organization? 11. List all professional or industry organizations in which your firm or its principals are members. 12. In order to assist the District in determining whether any conflicts of interest exist, please describe

any business or family relationships between any member of the Magnolia ISD Board of Trustees and:

your firm; any principal of your firm; any subcontractor you are considering using to perform any portion of the project work; or any principal of such subcontractor.

13. List all Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing subcontractors that your firm intends to use for this project.



B. Personnel Information Provide brief resumes (two-page limit) for the individuals listed below:

1. Principals/ Corporate Officers: i. President ii. Vice President iii. Partners 2. Project Management Candidates i. Project Manager ii. Superintendent

For the Project Manager and Superintendent candidates, please list up to two (2) people you consider qualified for each position. Please also provide a list of the principal duties and responsibilities you anticipate assigning to the Project Manager and to the Superintendent. C. School Projects List all educational building projects your firm has completed within the past five (5) years, and for each project list the following information:

1. Project owner 2. Brief description of the project 3. Client, client contact person, and telephone number 4. Date construction completed 5. Managing Principal 6. Project Architect or Engineer

For the ten (10) largest projects please also provide the following information:

7. Original contract amount 8. Final contract amount 9. Number of change orders

D. Non-Educational Projects (Optional) List up to five (5) major non-educational building projects your firm has completed within the past five years, and for each project list:.

1. Name and location of the project 2. Brief description of the project 3. Client, client contact, and telephone number 4. Final contract amount 5. Date construction completed 6. Managing Principal 7. Project Architect or Engineer

E. Claims and Litigation

1. Identify any claims or suits, if any, brought against your firm within the last five (5) years. 2. Describe all instances in which your firm was unable to complete the work under a contract. 3. Identify any judgments, claims arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your firm or its officers. 4. Identify any lawsuits filed or arbitration requested by your firm with respect to construction contracts of your firm.

F. Current Workload

Provide the following information for the five (5) largest projects you currently have under contract:

1. Project name 2. Location



3. Owner 4. Architect 5. Current contract amount 6. Percent complete 7. Specified contract completion date

G. Financial Information

Provide the following financial information regarding your firm: 1. Total amount of work performed as general contractor for each of the past five (5) years. 2. Bonding capacity

i. Per project ii. Aggregate

3. Bank reference(s) i. Individual, title ii. Name of bank iii. Address iv. Telephone

4. Bonding company reference(s). i. Individual, title ii. Name of bonding company iii. Address iv. Telephone

5. Dunn & Bradstreet rating, if available

H. Safety Record Describe your organization’s safety program and provide your worker’s compensation experience modification factor. List any safety awards your organization has received within the past five (5) years. I. Execution The foregoing is true and correct. The District, or any authorized representative of the District, is authorized by the undersigned to contact any firm, institution, or person listed above to obtain information about our firm's services, financial condition, and any other information which the District might determine as being desirable. Offeror: __________________________________________ By: __________________________________________

(Signature) __________________________________________

(Printed Name) __________________________________________ (Title)



NOTE: THIS FORM MUST BE EXECUTED AND SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL

AFFIDAVIT OF NONCOLLUSION

00 45 01 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 45 01 - AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________)

AFFIDAVIT By submission of this proposal, the undersigned certifies that:

a. This proposal has been independently arrived at without collusion with any other offeror or with any other competitor;

b. This proposal has not been knowingly disclosed and will not be knowingly disclosed, to any other

offeror competitor or potential competitor, prior to the opening of proposals for this project; c. No attempt has been or will be made to induce any other person, partnership or corporation to

submit or not submit a proposal;

d. The undersigned certifies that he is fully informed regarding the accuracy of the statements contained in this certification, and that the penalties herein are applicable to the offeror as well as to any person signing in his behalf.

______________________________________________ Company ______________________________________________ Printed Name ______________________________________________ Signature STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ____________________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 20_____. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for ________________ County, Texas




CERTIFICATION OF RESIDENCY 00 45 02 - 1

DOCUMENT – 00 45 02 CERTIFICATION OF RESIDENCY CERTIFICATION OF RESIDENCY Chapter 2252 of the Texas Government Code relates to Resident versus Nonresidents and the requirements governmental entities must follow when awarding contracts to Nonresidents. “Resident” refers to a person whose principal place of business is in this state, including a contractor whose ultimate parent company or majority owner has its principle place of business in this state. “Nonresident” refers to a person who is not a resident. “Governmental contract” means a contract awarded by a governmental entity for general construction, an improvement, a service, or a public works project or for a purchase of supplies, materials, or equipment. “A governmental entity may not award a governmental contract to a nonresident unless the nonresident underbids the lowest bid submitted by a responsible resident by an amount that is not less than the amount by which a resident would be required to under the nonresident to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident’s principal place of business is located; or the amount by which a resident bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which a majority of the manufacturing relating to the contract will be performed.” TEX. GOV’T CODE 2252.002. Please complete the appropriate statement below:

A. I certify that _______________________________________ is a Resident of Texas as defined in (Company Name)

Texas Government Code Chapter 2252.

B. I certify that ______________________________________is a Nonresident of Texas as defined

(Company Name)

in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. Our principal place of business is: ___________________________. (City and State)

Signature:______________________________________________ Printed Name:___________________________ Date:__________________________________

END DOCUMENT– 00 45 02


TEXAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND 00 50 00 - 1

DOCUMENT 50 00 – TEXAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND

TEXAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No.: __________ (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of contract amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that:

(hereinafter called the Principal), as principal, and ____________________________________________

a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ___________________________

authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute

bonds as Surety (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto

Gonzales Independent School District (hereinafter called the Obligee)

in the amount of _______________________________________ Dollars ($_____________________) for

the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,

executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the ________ day of , 20__, for

GONZALES HIGH SCHOOL PRACTICE FIELD TURF AND LIGHTING PROJECT GONAZLES INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT

which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this Instrument this _________________ day of ______________________________, 20__. (Seal) __________________________ Principal __________________________ Surety Address By: (Seal) _________________________ Surety Surety Telephone Number By: Attorney-in-Fact



TEXAS STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND 00 50 01 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 50 01 – TEXAS STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND

TEXAS STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND Bond No.: __________ (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of contract amount)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that:

(hereinafter called the Principal), as principal, and ____________________________________________

a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ___________________________

authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute

bonds as Surety (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto

Gonzales Independent School District (hereinafter called the Obligee)

in the amount of _______________________________________ Dollars ($_____________________) for

the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,

executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the ________ day of , 20__, for

GONZALES HIGH SCHOOL PRACTICE FIELD TURF AND LIGHTING PROJECT GONAZLES INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT

which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this Instrument this day of , 20__. (Seal) Witness: Principal By: Witness: (Seal) Surety By: Attorney-in-Fact _________________________________ _________________________________ ____________________________________ Surety Address Surety Telephone Number



NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL PROPOSAL EVALUATION WAIVER

00 65 01 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 65 01 - PROPOSAL EVALUATION WAIVER

By submitting a Proposal, the proposer indicated below agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the Owner, Architect, Engineers, Consultants and their respective employees, arising out of or in connection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any proposal. The proposer further agrees the Owner reserves the right to waive any requirements under the proposal documents or the Contract Documents, with regards to acceptance or rejection of any proposals, and recommendation or award of the contract. NOTE: The Statement of Affirmation Must Be Notarized. STATEMENT OF AFFIRMATION “The undersigned affirms that he/she is duly authorized to execute this waiver by the person(s) or business entity making the proposal. Firm’s Name________________________________ Address: _________________________________ _________________________________ Proposer’s Name______________________________________ Position/Title _____________________________ Proposer’s Signature___________________________________ Date ____________________________________ STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ____________________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 20_____. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for ________________ County, Texas



STATUTORY LIEN WAIVER

00 65 15 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 65 15 - STATUTORY LIEN WAIVERS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Document Includes: Applicability and use of statutory Waiver and Release of Lien forms promulgated by the Legislature of the State of Texas for construction projects in Texas.

1.2 STATUTORY REGULATIONS

A. Texas Property Code, Chapter 53, Subchapter L, Sections 53.281 thru 53.287 (includes the standard forms attached herewith immediately following this section): 1. Form 1: Conditional Waiver for Progress Payments. 2. Form 2: Unconditional Waiver for Progress Payments. 3. Form 3: Conditional Waiver for Final Payments. 4. Form 4: Unconditional Waiver for Final Payments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SELECTION AND USE OF WAIVER AND RELEASE OF LIEN FORMS

A. Submit the applicable form, legally executed (filled out, signed, and dated) and notarized, for each occasion required. Refer to the Agreement and Section 01 29 00.

B. The wording of these forms is prescribed by the State of Texas. Questions regarding the use, execution, etc. should be directed to user's own attorney experienced in construction or lien law. This document does no render legal advice.

C. If the Contract Documents do not explicitly require submittal of Waivers and Releases of Liens for each payment, the Owner reserves the right, at its sole discretion, to require applicable Waivers and Releases of Liens, executed and notarized, for payment applications.



00 65 15 - 2

FORM 1: CONDITIONAL WAIVER FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS * * * * * * *

Project: Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project Gonzales Independent School District Project No.: P2119500SP Upon receipt by the signer of this document of a check from Gonzales Independent School District in the sum of $

payable to

(payee or payees of check) and when the check has been properly endorsed and has been paid by the bank on which it is drawn, this document becomes effective to release any mechanic's lien right, any right arising from a payment bond that complies with a state or federal statute, any common law payment bond right, any claim for payment, and any rights under any similar ordinance, rule, or statute related to claim or payment rights for persons in the signer's position that the signer has on the property of (owner) located at (location) to the following extent:

This release covers a progress payment for all labor, services, equipment, or materials furnished to the property or to (person with whom signer contracted) as indicated in the attached statement(s) or progress payment request(s), except for unpaid retention, pending modifications and changes, or other items furnished. Before any recipient of this document relies on this document, the recipient should verify evidence of payment to the signer. The signer warrants that the signer has already paid or will use the funds received from this progress payment to promptly pay in full all of the signer's laborers, subcontractors, materialmen, and suppliers for all work, materials, equipment, or services provided for or to the above referenced project in regard to the attached statement(s) or progress payment request(s). Date: (Company name) By (Signature) (Title) STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________ ) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 202_. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for ________________ County, Texas



00 65 15 - 3

FORM 2: UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS * * * * * * *

NOTICE: This document waives rights unconditionally and states that the signee has been paid for giving up those rights. It is prohibited for a person to require this document to be signed if payment has not been made as stated. If payment has not been made, execute a conditional release form. Project: Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project Gonzales Independent School District Project No.: P2119500SP The signer of this document has been paid and has received a progress payment in the sum of $_________________________________________________ for all labor, services, equipment, or materials furnished to the property or to (person with whom signer contracted) on the property of (owner) located at (location) to the following extent: (job description). The signer therefore waives and releases any mechanic's lien right, any right arising from a payment bond that complies with a state or federal statute, any common law payment bond right, any claim for payment, and any rights under any similar ordinance, rule, or statute related to claim or payment rights for persons in the signer's position that the signer has on the above referenced project to the following extent: This release covers a progress payment for all labor, services, equipment, or materials furnished to the property or to (person) with whom signer contracted) as indicated in the attached statement(s) or progress payment request(s), except for unpaid retention, pending modifications and changes, or other items furnished. The signer warrants that the signer has already paid or will use the funds received from this progress payment to promptly pay in full all of the signer's laborers, subcontractors, materialmen, and suppliers for all work, materials, equipment, or services provided for or to the above referenced project in regard to the attached statement(s) or progress payment request(s). Date: (Company name) By (Signature) (Title) STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________ ) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 202_. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for ________________ County, Texas



00 65 15 - 4

FORM 3: CONDITIONAL WAIVER FOR FINAL PAYMENT * * * * * * *

Project: Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project Gonzales Independent School District Project No.: P2119500SP On receipt by the signer of this document of a check from (maker of check) in the sum of $ payable to: (payee of check) and when the check has been properly endorsed and has been paid by the bank on which it is drawn, this document becomes effective to release any mechanic's lien right, any right arising from a payment bond that complies with a state or federal statute, any common law payment bond right, any claim for payment, and any rights under any similar ordinance, rule, or statute related to claim or payment rights for persons in the signer's position that the signer has on the property of (owner) located at (location) to the following extent: (job description) This release covers the final payment to the signer for all labor, services, equipment, or materials furnished to the property or to (person with whom signer contracted). Before any recipient of this document relies on this document, the recipient should verify evidence of payment to the signer. The signer warrants that the signer has already paid or will use the funds received from this final payment to promptly pay in full all of the signer's laborers, subcontractors, materialmen, and suppliers for all work, materials, equipment, or services provided for or to the above referenced project up to the date of this waiver and release. Date: (Company name) By (Signature) (Title) STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________ ) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 202_. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for ________________ County, Texas



00 65 15 - 5

FORM 4: UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER FOR FINAL PAYMENT * * * * * * *

Notice: This document waives rights unconditionally and states that the signee has been paid for giving up those rights. It is prohibited for a person to require you to sign this document if you have not been paid the payment amount set forth below. If you have not been paid, use a conditional release form. Project: Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project Gonzales Independent School District Project No.: P2119500SP The signer of this document has been paid in full for all labor, services, equipment, or materials furnished to the property or to (person with whom signer contracted) on the property of (owner) located at (location) to the following extent (job description). The signer therefore waives and releases any mechanic's lien right, any right arising from a payment bond that complies with a state or federal statute, any common law payment bond right, any claim for payment, and any rights under any similar ordinance, rule, or statute related to claim or payment rights for persons in the signer's position. The signer warrants that the signer has already paid or will use the funds received from this final payment to promptly pay in full all of the signer's laborers, subcontractors, materialmen, and suppliers for all work, materials, equipment, or services provided for or to the above referenced project up to the date of this waiver and release. Date: (Company name) By (Signature) (Title) STATE OF TEXAS ) COUNTY OF _______________ ) Sworn to and subscribed before me at ________________, Texas, this the _______ day of ___________________________, 202_. ________________________________________________ Notary Public in and for ________________ County, Texas



CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00 70 00 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 70 00 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS I. CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT AGREEMENT A. The contract for the construction of the project shall be executed by the successful Offeror

on the 2017 Edition of AIA Document A101 Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor as modified by the Owner. Said contract, fully executed, shall be delivered to the Owner within ten (10) days of receipt of said contract.

II. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. AIA Document A201 The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 2017 Edition

modified by Owner is made a part of the Contract Documents. B. Failure to obtain and examine the documents does not relieve the Contractor,

Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material suppliers of responsibilities incorporated into the Agreement.



PRODUCT WARRANTY VERIFICATION

00 72 00 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 72 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 2017 Edition, referenced as the General Conditions, are a part of the Contract Documents.

B. The Contractor is specifically directed, as a condition of the Contract, to acquaint itself with the Articles of the General Conditions and to notify and apprise its subcontractors and other entities of the conditions governing the Contract for Construction.

C. No contractual adjustments shall be due for failure of each entity to fully acquaint itself with the General Conditions.

D. The provisions of the General and Division 1 General Requirements apply to the work specified in each Section of the Contract Specifications and indicated on the Contract Drawings.


5/11/2020 beta.SAM.gov

https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20200146/0?index=wd&is_active=true&date_filter_index=0&date_rad_selection=date&wdType=dbra&con… 1/5

"General Decision Number: TX20200146 01/03/2020 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20190146 State: Texas Construction Type: Building County: Gonzales County in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.80 for calendar year 2020 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.80 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2020. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2020 ASBE0087-002 01/01/2018 Rates Fringes ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST INSULATOR........................$ 22.72 10.02 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BOIL0074-003 01/01/2017 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 28.00 22.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0263-019 06/01/2017 Rates Fringes Ironworker, reinforcing and structural.......................$ 23.25 7.32 ----------------------------------------------------------------



LABO0154-001 05/01/2008 Rates Fringes Laborers: (Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete).................$ 12.98 3.49 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * PLUM0142-002 08/07/2019 Rates Fringes Plumber........................$ 31.05 13.76 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2009-033 04/20/2009 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 19.67 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 13.18 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 13.27 0.00 ELECTRICIAN......................$ 20.00 3.11 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.50 0.00 LABORER: Landscape & Irrigation.......................$ 8.50 0.22 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick...$ 12.02 0.00 LABORER: Mortar Mixer...........$ 12.00 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 13.75 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 12.80 0.43 OPERATOR: Crane.................$ 21.33 0.00 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.58 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader (Front End)....$ 10.54 0.00 PAINTER: Brush, Roller and Spray............................$ 12.26 0.00 ROOFER...........................$ 13.64 1.80 SHEET METAL WORKER...............$ 17.00 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 15.00 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER.....................$ 11.24 0.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any



solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which



these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor



200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION "


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Work under separate contracts. 6. Future Work. 7. Purchase contracts. 8. Owner furnished products. 9. Owner furnished, Contractor installed products. 10. Access to site. 11. Coordination with occupants. 12. Work restrictions. 13. Specification and drawing conventions. 14. Miscellaneous provisions.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: 1. Project Location: Gonzales High School

1546 Seydler Gonzales, Texas 78629

B. Owner: 1. Owner's Representative: Gene Kridler

C. Architect: PBK Architects, Inc., Houston, Texas

D. Consultants: Additional design professionals have been retained who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: the conversion of the existing natural grass football field to synthetic turf, a new synthetic high jump apron adjacent to the existing running track, new football goal posts, new scoreboard, new LED field lighting system, new pole vault and long/triple jump runways, replacement of chain-link fencing with 8’ black PVC coated chain-link fence, new concrete sidewalks and vehicle pavement, asphalt parking lot repair, new aluminum grandstands, elevated press box, and a new storage building.


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2

B. Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under a competitive sealed proposal (CSP) contract.

1.5 WORK BY OWNER AND UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. Cooperate fully with Owner so Work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying the work or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work with Work performed by Owner.

B. The Owner reserves the right to let separate contract for Work outside of the scope of this Contract. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so Work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with Work performed under separate contracts.

C. Purchase Contracts: The Owner reserves the right to negotiate purchase contracts with suppliers of material and equipment that may be incorporated into the Work. The Owner will assign these purchase contracts to Contractor. Include costs for purchasing, receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment in the Contract Sum, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated purchase contracts,

including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final purchasing agreements.

D. Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed Products (OFCI): The Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner furnished products and making building services connections when applicable. 1. Owner Furnished Products: Coordinate with Owner.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas and areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: The drawings indicate the limits of the construction operations. 2. Driveways, Walkways, and Entrances: Keep driveways. parking areas, student drop off

and pick up points, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, the students, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

B. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform Work to prevent interference with Owner's day to day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 3

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of

the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited

Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, ensure mechanical and electrical systems are fully

operational, and required tests and inspections and start up procedures are successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.

4. Upon occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On Site Work Hours: Limit Work in the existing building to normal working hours, Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate with Owner when it is necessary to extend working hours or Work on weekends.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two weeks in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner’s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than two weeks in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Controlled Substances, Firearms, and Explosive Devices: Use of tobacco products, controlled substances, firearms, and explosive devices on the site is not permitted.

F. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 4

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of each specification section.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. The Owner has a critical need for the Work to begin upon Notice to Proceed and shall be Substantially Complete by:

Gonzales High School Synthetic Turf Field – December 07, 2021 Track D-Zone & Field Events – January 11, 2022

Sports Lighting & Site Work - January 11, 2022 Bleachers & Press Box – March 04, 2022 There will be No Extensions of Time due to weather.

END OF SECTION 01 10 00


ALLOWANCES 01 21 00 - 1

SECTION 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have

been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include 1. Lump sum allowances. 2. Unit cost allowances. 3. Quantity allowances. 4. Contingency allowances. 5. Testing and inspecting allowances.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work.

1.4 LUMP SUM, UNIT COST, AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver

unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.

1.5 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES

A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.

B. Contractor's related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.

C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.



D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order.

1.6 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES

A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results.

B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.

C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance.

D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order.

1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of

overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of Work, if any, claimed in Change Orders

related to unit cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of Work in place by independent quantity

survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost

amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of Work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher or lower priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related Work.



3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Owner’s Contingency Allowances: $100,000.00 1. Contractor shall include the amount indicated below in his Base Proposal as a contingency

to cover the cost of hidden, concealed or otherwise unforeseen conditions which develop during completion of the work. Contractor shall be allowed to recover all costs associated with the completion of work under this contingency, however, no overhead or profit will be allowed.




ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1

SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain Work defined

in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described are part of the Work when enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely integrate Work

of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Forty-eight (48) hours following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in

writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections

referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION




3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate Proposal No. 1: Scoreboard: This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to provide (furnish and install) a scoreboard as per specification.

B. Alternate Proposal No. 2: 30’x30’ Metal Storage Building:

This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals for the construction of a 30’ x 30’ Metal Storage Building.

C. Alternate Proposal No. 3: 2.5” Mill and Overlay of Existing and Asphalt Parking Lot: This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to provide a 2.5” Mill and Overlay of Existing Asphalt Parking Lot.

D. Alternate Proposal No. 4: Concrete Pavement in Areas by Bleachers and Baseball Field:

This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install concrete pavement in lieu of grass in two areas between the bleachers and the baseball field.

E. Alternate Proposal No. 5: Synthetic Lawn Turf in Areas by Bleachers and Baseball Field:

This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install synthetic lawn turf in lieu of grass in two areas between the bleachers and the baseball field.

F. Alternate Proposal No. 6: 8-Foot Black PVC Coated Chain Link Fence at Field Event

Area: This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install 8-foot black PVC coated chain link fence at field event area.

G. Alternate Proposal No. 7:”COME AND TAKE IT” Lettering:

This Alternate shall establish to install “COME AND TAKE IT” inlay lettering along the home sideline per rendering.

H. Alternate Proposal No. 8: BrockFill Synthetic turf infill:

This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install BrockFill synthetic turf infill system in lieu of standard rubber-sand infill. The total infill depth shall be maintained at 75% of the fiber height per spec.

I. Alternate Proposal No. 9: FieldTurf CoolPlay Synthetic turf infill:

This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install FieldTurf Cool Play synthetic turf infill system in lieu of standard rubber-sand infill. The total infill depth shall be maintained at 75% of the fiber height per spec.

J. Alternate Proposal No. 10: Hellas Ecothern synthetic turf infill:

This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install Ecotherm infill system in lieu of standard rubber-sand infill. The total infill depth shall be maintained at 75% of the fiber height per spec.

K. Alternate Proposal No. 11: 17mm Brock SP17 Shock Pad: This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install Brock SP17 Shock Pad beneath the new synthetic turf sports field. Include any costs related to altering grades of base due to thickness of shock pad

L. Alternate Proposal No. 12: 15mm En-Plast ShockDrain 580 Shock Pad:

This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install 15mm En-Plast ShockDrain 580 beneath the new synthetic turf sports field. Include any costs related to altering grades of base due to thickness of shock pad.




M. Alternate Proposal No. 1310mm G-MaxDrain Shock Pad: This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install 10 mm G- MaxDrain Shock Pad beneath the new synthetic turf sports field. Include any costs related to altering grades of base due to thickness of shockpad.

N. Alternate Proposal No. 14: 10mm Cushdrain Shock Pad: This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install 10 mm G- MaxDrain Shock Pad beneath the new synthetic turf sports field. Include any costs related to altering grades of base due to thickness of shockpad.

O. Alternate Proposal No. 15: 10mm Regupol Abzorb Shock Pad: This Alternate shall establish the amount to add to the Base Proposals to install 10mm Regupol Abzorb Shock Pad beneath the new synthetic turf sports field. Include any costs related to altering grades of base due to thickness of shock pad.

P. Alternate Proposal No. 16: 19mm SBR Rubber Elastic E-Layer: This alternate shall establish the amount to be added to the Base Proposals install 19mm SBR Rubber Elastic Layer beneath the new synthetic turf sports field. Include any costs related to altering grades of base due to thickness of shock pad.



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 13 - 1

SECTION 01 25 13 – PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

B. Products: Items purchased for incorporation in the Work, regardless if specifically purchased for the project or taken from the Contractor’s previously purchased stock. The term product is inclusive for “material, equipment, assembly, system” and other terms of similar intent.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, which are necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.



h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected Work as necessary to integrate Work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 30 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.



g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received prior to the Award of the Contract. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used




REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION Contract Award Date: _________________________________________________________________ To: ______________________________________________________________________________ Substitution Requested By: ____________________________________________________________ Project Name and Number: _____________________________________________________________ We submit for consideration the following product in lieu of the specified item for the above project: Drawing No. Specification Section Paragraph Specified Item _______________ _________________ _______________ ________________ Proposed Substitution: _________________________________________________________________ Request is made during ____ bidding _____ construction period. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 1. Technical data, cost, and time information relating to changes to Construction Documents re-

quired by proposed substitution. 2. Detailed comparison of proposed substitution and specified product including but not limited to

warranty, significant variations, qualifications of manufacturers, and maintenance. 3. Complete technical data, detailed shop drawings, samples, installation procedures, warranty, and

substantiating data marked to indicate equivalent quality and performance to that specified. Manufacturer sell sheets are not acceptable submittals.

Cause for Request: ___________________________________________________________________ Cost saving realized by Owner: __________________________________________________________ Does substitution affect adjacent Work, Construction Documents, cost, schedule, quality, and related submittals? Yes ____ No ____ On separate sheet, explain affects to the Work, documents, schedule, and submittals. The Contractor is responsible for associated costs and additional time of the proposed substitution includ-ing costs incurred by the Architect for evaluation of substitution and changes to the documents. Describe costs for changes to design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitu-tion. ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ Warranty: Is the warranty for the requested substitution the same or different? Same: ___ Different: ___ Explain Differences: ___________________________________________________________________



Contractor Certification: In making a request for substitution, the Contractor certifies that: 1. The proposed substitution has been thoroughly researched and evaluated and determined as

equivalent or superior to specified product or material, will fit into space provided, and is compati-ble with adjacent materials.

2. It will provide the same or better warranty for the proposed substitution at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under the Contract. Claims for additional costs related to the proposed substitution that may subsequently become apparent are waived.

4. It will assume the responsibility for delays and costs caused by the proposed substitution, if ap-proved, are accepted by the Contractor unless delays are and costs are specifically mentioned and approved in writing by the Owner and the Architect.

5. It will assume the liability for the performance of the substitution and its performance. 6. The installation of the proposed substitution is coordinated with the Work and with changes re-

quired for the Work. 7. It will reimburse the Owner and Architect for evaluation and redesign services associated with the

substitution request and, when required, by approval by authorities having jurisdiction. Submitted by: ___________________________________________________________________________________ Signature of Contractor Title ___________________________________________________________________________________ Firm Telephone Date Signature shall be by the individual authorized to legally bind the Contractor to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. FOR USE BY ARCHITECT: FOR USE BY OWNER: Accepted Accepted as Noted ____ Accepted Not Accepted Not Accepted Received Too Late By: _______________________________________ By: _________________________________ Date: ______________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Remarks: ___________________________________ Remarks: _____________________________



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1

SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. Related Work: 1. Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710 Architect's Supplemental Instructions.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop

Work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit

quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the

Work. Provide complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.



3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: When an allowance is specified, refer to Section 01 21 00 for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. 1. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Proposal

Request (CPR) on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of Work in place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. a. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the

allowance. b. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of

overhead costs and other margins claimed. c. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of Work, if any, claimed in Change

Orders related to unit cost allowances. d. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of Work in place by independent

quantity survey, measure, or count. 2. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the

allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 7 days of receipt of the Change Order authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 7 days after authorization.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will execute a Change Order also requiring signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work

and designates the method to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of Work required by the Construction Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.



PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

B. Pencil Copy: A preliminary review copy of the application for payment for review by Architect and Owner prior to submission of final copy.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with administrative forms and schedules,

including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Updated Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in updated Contractor's

construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than

seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered but must be approved by the Owner.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier.



f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment rentals. 4) General Conditions.

a. Supervisor. b. Submittals. c. Close-out. d. Field Engineering. e. Daily Clean-up. f. Final Clean-up.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on site and items stored off site. Include

evidence of insurance. 6. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.

Show line-item value of unit cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual

Work in place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Submit preliminary (pencil) copy of proposed values to Architect or Architects field representa-tive and Owner for review by 20th of month. Allow 96 district business hours for comments.

B. Once preliminary (pencil) approved, submit electronic copy of notarized originals of each appli-cation on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continua-tion Sheet for G702 or other similar form approved by the Owner.

C. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment.

D. Submit updated construction or recovery schedule with each Application for Payment.

E. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement in accordance with Document

00 73 00, Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.

F. Only materials stored on the project site shall be paid for unless the materials are stored in a bonded warehouse.

G. Substantiating Data: When Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data

justifying dollar amounts in question. Items which may be requested by the Architect or Owner to substantiate costs include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Current Record Documents as specified in Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures main-

tained.



2. Labor time sheets, purchase orders, or similar documentation. 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products.





SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 1

SECTION 01 29 73 - SCHEDULE OF VALUES CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included: Provide a detailed breakdown of the agreed Contract Sum showing values allocated to each of the various parts of the work, as specified herein and in other provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. Coordinate requirements of this Section with the requirements of the General and Supplementary

Conditions of the Contract concerning Schedule of Values. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use required means to assure arithmetical accuracy of the sums described. B. When so required by the Owner, provide copies of the subcontracts or other data acceptable to the

Owner, substantiating the sums described. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to the first Application for Payment, submit a proposed schedule of values to the Owner, as outlined below: 1. Meet with the Owner and determine additional data, if any, required to be submitted. 2. Secure the Owner's approval of the schedule of values prior to submitting first Application for

Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. The Schedule of Values shall be broken down into item costs for each specification section as a minimum. After review by the Owner, the Schedule of Values shall be broken down into further items as required. (See following list and refer to the enclosed sample.). In addition, total each Specification Division separately.

B. Schedule of Values - Items in addition to Specification Sections.

1. Mobilization 2. Clean Up 3. Building Permit 4. Bonds, Insurance 5. Misc. Mechanical Accessories 6. Demolition 7. Rough-In Labor - (Electrical) 8. Rough-In Material - (Electrical) 9. Finish Labor - (Electrical) 10. Finish Material - (Electrical) 11. Allowances (listed separately) 12. Record drawings and close-out documents 13. Submittals listed separately per mechanical, electrical and plumbing 14. Roof warranty as a line item 15. Donated items individually itemized at $0.00 (zero dollars).


SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Refer to following sample.


PBK SportsProject Number P2119500SP


Item Description of Work Scheduled Stored Total % Balance RetainageNo. Value Previous This Materials Completed To Finish

App. App.Div. 1 - General Reqs.Site Work General ConditionsSuoervisionMobilizationBonds & InsurancePermitsContractor's FeeClose-Out DocumentsDiv. 1 - Total

Div. 2 - Existing ConditionsDemolition (As applicable)Erosion ControlDiv. 2 - Total

Divs. 31, 32 and 33 - Earthwork, Exterior Improvments and UtilitiesSite Clearing & GrubbingBuilding Pad - MaterialsBuilding Pad - LaborPaving SubgradeSignage / StripingBike RacksLandscaping - MaterialsLandscaping - LaborHydro Mulch - MaterialsHydro Mulch - LaborIrrigation - MaterialsIrrigation - LaborEarthworkFinish GradingStabilization - MaterialsStabilization - LaborSite Drainage - MaterialsSite Drainage - LaborChain Link Fence-MaterialsChain Link Fence-LaborPaving - LaborPaving - MaterialsSidewalksClose-Out DocumentsDiv. 31, 32 and 33 - Total

General ConditionsMobilizationTemp. FacilitiesFinal CleaningRecord Documents/Close-out/ O&M ManualsSupervisionPermitsBondsInsuranceAllowances

Work Completed

SCHEDULE OF VALUES - SAMPLE 01 29 73 - 3

PBK SportsProject Number P2119500SP


Item Description of Work Scheduled Stored Total % Balance RetainageNo. Value Previous This Materials Completed To Finish

App. App.

Work Completed

Alternates (list)Change OrdersA. PR#B. PR#C. PR#

END OF SECTION SAMPLE 01 29 73

SCHEDULE OF VALUES - SAMPLE 01 29 73 - 4


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 13 - 1

SECTION 01 31 13 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Pre-install meetings.

B. Each Contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific Contractor.

C. Contractor shall make a reasonable attempt to interpret the Contract Documents before asking the Architect for assistance in interpretation. Requests for Information (RFI’s) will not be allowed from the Contractor. The Contractor shall arrange the necessary meeting in the field with appropriate Architect’s field representative(s) to obtain clarification as needed on items that may need interpretation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each

temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.4 COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.



2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Coordination: Each Contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other Contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each Contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other Contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate Contractors if coordination of the

Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Coordinating inspections and other jurisdictional requirements. 10. Coordinate OFCI equipment. 11. Action items and issue logs.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. Refer to the Specifications Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.

Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.



b. Coordinate the addition of trade specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple Contractors in sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and

mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate sub framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures, ductwork, piping, and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including

insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access

doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire alarm locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. e. Floor boxes.

8. Fire Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, sprinkler heads, and inspector test locations.

9. IDF/MDF Rooms: Communications and low voltage (security, data, phone, etc.) audio



10. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being

coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

11. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 01 33 00.

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating

system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using format same as file

preparation format. 3. BIM File Incorporation: Develop and incorporate coordination drawing files into Building

Information Model established for Project. a. Perform three dimensional component conflict analysis as part of preparation of

coordination drawings. Resolve component conflicts prior to submittal. Indicate where conflict resolution requires modification of design requirements by Architect.

4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Revit. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of

AIA Document C106.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Architect to prepare the meeting agenda and distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

4. Action Items: An element of work, design, research, or other task to be completed before a specific date or time, such as before a subsequent meeting of involved parties.

5. Issue logs: Documentation element of software project management and contains a list of ongoing and closed issues of the project.

B. Kick-off & Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that affect progress. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting

minutes.




C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation trade conference at site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction trades. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Engineer of Record of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Contractor to review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration.

3. Contractor to record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Contractor to distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.


D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Substantial

Completion. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. 5. Action Items: An element of work, design, research, or other task to be completed before

a specific date or time, such as before a subsequent meeting of involved parties.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each Contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.



a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

b. Six (6) week look-ahead schedules.


F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each Contractor present.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.






PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19 - 1

SECTION 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE

A. The Architect’s: 1. Scheduling of each meeting (pre-construction meeting, periodic project meetings, and

specialty called meetings throughout the progress of the Work). 2. Preparation of agenda for meetings. 3. Presiding at minutes, including all significant proceedings and decisions. 4. Recording, reproducing, and distributing copies of meeting minutes within two (2) working

days, excluding weekends and holidays, after each meeting to: a. All participants in the meeting. b. All parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.

5. Providing status report of allowance funds.

B. The Contractor’s: 1. Making physical arrangement for meetings. 2. Participation in all meetings and conferences. 3. Scheduling attendance of Job Superintendent, Project Coordinator, and other parties

affecting or affected by decisions made at meetings and conferences as their interests require.

4. Scheduling Pre-installation conferences. 5. Scheduling Pre-Closeout Meeting 6. Providing updated schedules. 7. Providing status reports/logs of CPRs, MCs, and shop drawings/submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Contractor shall contact Architect at least ten (10) days prior to commencing construction in order for Architect to schedule a pre-construction meeting with Contractor, Architect, and Owner. This meeting must occur prior to commencement of any construction.

B. Architect will:

1. Administer pre-construction conference for the establishment of communication methods, procedures and Owner requirements.

2. Administer site mobilization conference for clarification of Owner and Contractor.

C. Location: At Project site as designated by the Architect. D. Attendance:

1. Contractor or Contractor’s Representatives 2. Job Superintendent 3. Project Coordinator (Manager) 4. Owner or Owner’s Representative 5. Major subcontractors



6. Major suppliers 7. Architect’s Representative 8. Others as appropriate

E. Meeting Agenda, may include, but is not limited to:

1. Discussion on major subcontracts and suppliers and projected construction schedules. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. Discussion of long lead time items. 4. Project coordination and designation of responsible personnel. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, proposal requests, submittals, minor changes,

change orders and applications for payment. 6. Method of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 8. Use of premises, office work and storage areas, on-site parking, and Owner’s requirements. 9. Construction facilities and temporary utilities. 10. Housekeeping procedures.

3.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Architect will: 1. Schedule project meetings throughout progress of the work at weekly intervals, and specially

called meetings. 2. Set agenda and administer said meetings. 3. Preside at meetings. 4. Record meeting minutes, including all significant proceedings and decisions. 5. Reproduce and distribute copies of meeting minutes within two (2) working days, excluding

weekends and holidays, after each meeting to: a. All participants in the meeting. b. All parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.

B. Architect shall:

1. Make physical arrangements for meetings.

C. Attendance: 1. Contractor or Contractor’s Representative 2. Job Superintendent 3. Project Coordinator (Manager) 4. Owner or Owner’s Representative 5. Major subcontractors 6. Major suppliers 7. Architect’s Field Representative 8. Consultants as needed 9. Others as appropriate

D. Meeting Agenda, may include, but is not limited to: 1. Review and approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, problems, and conflicts. 4. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 5. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 6. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 7. Plan progress and schedule during succeeding work period. 8. Coordination of schedules. 9. Review submittal schedules and expedite as required. 10. Maintenance of quality standards. 11. Allowance balances.



12. Review of proposed changes and substitutions for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.

13. Status of Allowance Expenditure Authorizations (AEAs). 14. Status of Change Proposal Requests (CPRs). 15. Status of Minor Changes (MCs). 16. Status of submittals, review of submittal log. 17. Other items and critical issues affecting Work.

3.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 01 11 00, Notification of Architect Requirements, the Contractor will convene pre-installation conferences when required by individual specification Sections or as required by the Architect, prior to the Contractor commencing Work of the Section.

B. Attendance, optional:

1. General Contractor or Contractor’s Representative 2. Project Coordinator (Manager) 3. Owner or Owner’s Representative 4. Architect’s Project Manager (Project Executive)

C. Attendance, required: 1. Project Superintendent 2. Architect’s Field Representative 3. Sub-contractor’s Project Manager 4. Sub-contractor’s Foreman 5. Engineer’s Representative, as needed. 6. Manufacturer’s Representative, as needed. 7. Governing Agency Official, as required 8. Inspection Agency Representative, as required. 9. Others affecting or affected by Work.

D. Meeting Agenda, may include, but is not limited to:

1. Review of conditions of installation. 2. Preparation and installation procedures. 3. Coordination with related work 4. Review of the contract document requirements. 5. Review of code enforcement or testing requirements. 6. Questions related to work required.

3.4 PRE-CLOSEOUT MEETING

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures, the Contractor will convene a pre-closeout meeting when he considers the Work or designated portion of the Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the work for its intended use.

B. Attendance, required:

1. Owner or Owner’s Representative 2. Project Coordinator (Manager) 3. General Contractor or Contractor’s Representative 4. Project Superintendent 5. Architect’s Project Manager (Project Executive) 6. Architect’s Field Representative 7. Engineer’s Representative, as needed.



C. Meeting Agenda, may include, but is not limited to: 1. Review of the contract document requirements for Substantial Completion and Project

Closeout 2. Review of Work which remains to be completed or corrected. 3. Closeout Document review schedule and log 4. Review of closeout procedures including, but not limited to Record Drawings, Warrantees,

Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and Owner Demonstrations and Start-up. 5. Review of code enforcement or testing requirements. 6. Questions related to work required.



CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned

early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a

jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

F. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for completion of an activity as scheduled.



G. Recovery Schedule: Submittal of a revised critical path method (CPM) schedule and a written plan.

H. Look-ahead Schedule: Prepare schedule indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update.

I. Milestones: measurable and observable and serve as progress markers (flags) but, by definition, are independent of time (have zero durations) therefore no work or consumption of resources is associated with them.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Format: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup Diagram: Of size necessary to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic relationship ties for all activities.

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, labeled to comply with requirements for

submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or

actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in

ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the

Work until most recent Application for Payment.

E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

G. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

H. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

I. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.


A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at site. Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.



3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, Work stages, area separations, interim milestones, and partial Owner occupancy.

4. Review delivery dates for Owner furnished products. 5. Review schedule for Work of Owner's separate contracts, if any. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities

involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Time is of the essence to the Owner. Commence Work immediately upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed. There is a critical need for the Work to be substantially complete within the time frame identified in the Agreement.

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion and date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of schedule that shows an

early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each separate area or story as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities in terms of number of days anticipated. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and

major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 33 00 in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include number of days anticipated for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion of all conditions as in advance of date

established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include a maximum of 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

7. Inspections required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

D. Constraints: Include constraints and Work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:



a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. i. Rain days as indicated in Specification Section 01 10 00 Summary.

2. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Submittals. b. Mockups. c. Fabrication. d. Installation. e. Tests and inspections. f. Adjusting. g. Curing.

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

F. Six (6) week, lookahead schedule: Prepare schedule indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. 6. Inspections by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 7. Trade pre-installation conference.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

I. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

J. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.



2.2 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording information concerning events at the site and submit each month to Architect: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Rental equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report and contact Architect Field Representative. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents to Architect Field Representative.

D. Special Reports: Submit special reports directly to Owner within 24 hours of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. 1. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at

site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, and response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner & Architect in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule with a pencil copy of pay application. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.



2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and interested parties identified by Contractor with a need to know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 1

SECTION 01 32 16 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedules: 1. Preliminary Analysis: Within 10 (ten) days after receipt of Award of Contract, submit a

preliminary construction schedule for review by Owner and Architect. 2. Construction Schedule: Within 14 (fourteen) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit

one (1) reproducible and four (4) prints of the approved construction schedule. 1.2 RELIANCE UPON SCHEDULE

A. The construction schedule as approved by the Architect will be an integral part of the contract and will establish conditions for various activities and phases of constructions.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Diagram: Graphically show the order of all activities necessary to complete the work and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished.

B. Activities shown on the diagram shall include but not necessarily be limited to:

1. Project mobilization 2. Submittals and approvals of shop drawings and samples 3. Phasing of construction 4. Procurement of equipment and critical materials 5. Fabrication and installation of special material and equipment 6. Final clean-up 7. Final inspection and testing

C. The construction schedule shall be updated and submitted with each Application for Payment.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE LIMITATIONS

A. Work performed under this Contract shall be done in accordance with the following paragraphs: 1. All work may proceed immediately upon Notice to Proceed and continue uninterrupted. 2. The Owner has a critical need for the work to begin upon Notice to Proceed and be

Substantially Complete see 01 10 00 Summary of Work. 3. Under the Base Proposal only, the successful Offeror will be 1) entitled to certain extensions

of time and 2) subject to liquidated damages for work not completed beyond the agreed date which the Contractor shall require for Substantial Completion of the work included in this contract. Refer to Supplementary Conditions for additional requirements and liquidated damages.

4. Failure to complete and close-out project after substantial completion may result in liquidated damages. Refer to Supplementary Conditions for additional requirements and liquidated damages.

5. The Owner may at his discretion approve changes recommended by the successful Offeror to the above-mentioned schedule provided that the Owner’s use of newly completed areas are not disrupted.



Photographic Documentation 01 32 30 - 1

SECTION 01 32 30 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Arial photographs by drone. 4. Final completion construction photographs.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph or video recording. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

B. Equipment Registration: Submit federal registration for drone.

C. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the

sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.

3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation

or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

D. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within seven days of taking photographs. 1. Format: 8 inch by 10 inch (203 mm by 254 mm) smooth surface matte prints on single weight,

commercial grade photographic paper; mounted on card stock to allow a 1 inch (25 mm) wide margin punched for standard three-ring binder.

2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation

or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

E. Video Recordings: Submit video recordings within seven days of recording. 1. Submit video recordings in digital video disc format acceptable to Architect. 2. Identification: With each submittal, provide the following information:



a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date video recording was recorded. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation

or story of construction. g. Weather conditions at time of recording.

3. Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch (215 mm by 280 mm) paper, punched and bound in heavy duty, three ring, vinyl covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Drone Registration: Federal required quadcopter drone registration, registered in the name of the

School and School District. Owner will take possession of drone at substantial completion.

B. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for a minimum of 3 years.

1.4 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high resolution, digital video disc in format acceptable to Architect and Construction Manager. 1. Drone with HD Camera: Provide quadcopter drone with portable camera system including minimum

4 GB Micro SD card capable of producing images complying with requirements. a. Drone: Provide quadcopter drone with HD camera, return home function, and intelligent

orientation control (IOC). b. Camera: HD video camper with 2 MP HP video camera with 1280 x 720 resolution, 30 FPS

frame rate, c. Control System: 6 axis flight control system (3 gyroscopes and 3 accelerometers) for

positioning and control of aircraft. d. Backup Battery: Provide two back up batteries with charger unit. e. Rotor Spare Parts: Provide 2 sets of replacement rotors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC EQUIPMENT

A. Quadcopter with HD Camera Drone: Provide aerial video using a drone. At substantial completion, refurbish drone to like new condition and turn drone over to Owner with federal registration and licenses.



3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic

location.

B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site,

available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect.

C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of the work, take photographs of site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take minimum of 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting

the work. 3. Take minimum of 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately

record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures,

pavements, and improvements.

D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take minimum of 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

E. Architect Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take minimum of 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Architect will inform photographer of desired vantage points. 1. Do not include date stamp.

G. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the

following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow up when on site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Take photographs at fabrication locations away from site. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.



3.3 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. Recording: Drone mounted camera to show area and progress of construction. Display continuous running time and date. At start of each video recording, record weather conditions from local newspaper or television and the actual temperature reading at site.

B. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while or by dubbing audio narration off site after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed, recent events, and planned activities. At each change in location, describe vantage point, location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. 1. Confirm date and time at beginning and end of recording. 2. Begin each video recording with name of Project, Contractor's name, videographer's name, and

Project location.

C. Transcript: Provide a typewritten transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from video recording opposite the corresponding narration segment.

D. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before starting excavation, record video recording of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag construction limits before recording construction video recordings. 2. Show existing conditions adjacent to site before starting the work. 3. Show existing buildings either on or adjoining site to accurately record physical conditions at the

start of construction. 4. Show protection efforts by Contractor.

E. Periodic Construction Video Recordings: Record video recording weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last video recordings were recorded.

End of Section 01 32 30


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action or are for information and do not require the architect’s action.

B. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format used for representing documents in a device independent and display resolution independent fixed layout document format.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with construction schedule. Include submittals

required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

1.5 PRE-SHIPMENT SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to shipment of the synthetic turf materials to the job site, synthetic turf material from every sixth roll shall be randomly sampled and the tested by an independent testing laboratory experienced with testing synthetic turf materials. The testing laboratory shall be completely independent with no legal connections to the turf manufacturer. The testing shall include the following:



Item ASTM Property:

1. FTIR SPECTROGRAPH PILE COMPOSITION

2. D418 PILE WEIGHT

3. D418 TOTAL WEIGHT

4. D418 PILE HEIGHT

5. D418 BACKING PERFORATION DIAMETER AND SPACING

6. D1335 TUFT BIND (WITHOUT INFILL)

7. D1682 GRAB/TEAR STRENGTH.

B Copies of the test results shall be transmitted to the Owner and Engineer directly from the testing laboratory. The synthetic turf materials shall not be shipped to the site without written authorization from the Engineer after the Owner and Engineer have approved the test results. Samples of the synthetic turf material tested from every sixth roll shall also be transmitted to the Engineer for approval by the independent testing laboratory prior to shipment of the synthetic turf materials to the job site. Sample size shall be minimum 12” x 12”.

C. ALL FEES AND COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE PRE-SHIPMENT SAMPLING AND TESTING SHALL BE PAID BY THE CONTRACTOR.

1.6 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Upon request, Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the

Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Revit. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of

AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement. d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:

1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,

and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial

submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification

Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.



C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if

coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals

may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by

a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file

metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.



c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications

where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data

are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.



4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following

information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheet size indicated in specification section. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in PDF electronic file. 4. BIM File Incorporation: Develop and incorporate Shop Drawing files into Building

Information Model established for Project. a. Prepare Shop Drawings in same digital data software program, version, and

operating system as the original Drawings. b. Refer to Section 01 31 00 for requirements for coordination drawings.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic

submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.



5. Samples: Submit full size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Key Items Review Time: Submit samples to the Architect at least 30 days prior to the

date the Contractor needs the reviewed submittals returned. The Contractor shall be prepared to submit color samples on any key items in Division 09 finishes within 30 days of the award of Contract. Once samples of all key items are received, the Architect will finalize color selections.

b. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract

Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in PDF electronic file.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00.

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00.

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00.

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000.

J. Closeout Submittals required for Substantial Completion: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00.

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23.

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.



N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.



2.2 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a

written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

C. BIM File Incorporation: Incorporate delegated design drawing and data files into Building Information Model established for Project. 1. Prepare delegated design drawings in the same digital data software program, version,

and operating system as the original Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

C. Incomplete submittals are not permitted, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by the Architect without action.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality assurance and quality control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality assurance and quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality assurance and quality control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify

performance characteristics. 2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of exterior envelope erected separately from the

building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.



D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections performed on site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operations, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, experienced means having successfully completed a minimum of five years documented experience with projects similar in nature, size, and extent; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.

B. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting Work on the following systems: 1. Seismic force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the

designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by Architect.



2. Main wind force resisting system or wind resisting component listed in the wind force resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by Architect.

C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality control service.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.



5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

E. Trade Preinstallation Conferences: Meeting minutes to be Contractor provided.


A. Qualifications establish the minimum qualification levels required; refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated and sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated and with record of successful in service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose Work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the State of Texas, experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products.

I. Factory Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:



a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent

delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect. 2. Notify Architect a minimum of seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups

will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed during the construction. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting Work, fabrication, or construction.

Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockup of the exterior envelope erected separately from the

building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies shall be constructed. Mockup, if not specifically shown on the drawings, shall be minimum 8’x8’. Mockup shall include all major façade elements and at least one window minimum 2’x2’ in size. Prior to constructing mockup verify requirements with architect. Pre-installation conferences for trades involved in Integrated Exterior Mockup shall be held after mock up is completed.

M. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections.

N. Trade Preinstallation Conferences: Meeting minutes to be Contractor provided.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.



B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality control services specified and those required

by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform the quality control services. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300.

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-

control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or

approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.



6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party

involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner:

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality control procedures

and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in

the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality control

service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which

includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected

Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected Work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality control services.



REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

01 41 00 - 1

SECTION 01 41 00 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Quality Assurance. B. References Standards. C. Definitions. D. Abbreviations. E. Format and Specification Context Explanations. F. Drawing Symbols. G. General Requirements.


A. General: 1. For products or workmanship specified by a standard of an association, trade, or Federal

standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable code authorities having jurisdiction.

2. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Purchase Order should not be altered from the Purchase Order Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference standard.

3. Obtain copies of standards when required by Purchase Order Documents. 4. Maintain copy of standards at jobsite during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific

work for which the standards pertain, until the date of Substantial Completion. 5. In the absence of specific instructions in the specifications, materials, products, equipment,

and their installation shall conform to the applicable codes, regulations and standards specified therein. When a conflict exists between the applicable code, regulation and standard and that specified, the more stringent code regulation or standard shall prevail, except as authorized by applicable authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Specifications and Drawings: The Drawings and Specifications are correlative and have equal

authority and priority. Base disagreements in themselves or in each other on the most expensive combination of quantity and quality of work indicated. In the event of such disagreement bring it to the attention of the Owner (or Owner’s Representative), who will determine the appropriate method to perform the work.

C. Industry Standards: Where compliance with two (2) or more industry standards or sets of

requirements are specified and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, the most stringent requirement is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into Purchase Order Documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is to be fulfilled. Refer apparently equal-but-different requirements, and uncertainties as to which level of quality is more stringent, to the Owner for a decision before proceeding.

D. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is

intended to be the minimum for the work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with the minimum (within specified tolerances) or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with requirements, indicated



01 41 00 - 2

numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner for decision before proceeding.

E. Specialists’ Assignments: In certain instances, specification text requires (or implies) that specific

work is to be assigned to specialists, who are engaged for performance of work. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. These requirements should not be interpreted so as to conflict with applicable regulations, union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is recognized as “expert” for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of requirements remains with the Contractor.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Dates of codes, regulations and standards specified shall be the latest date of issue of that code, regulation, or standard prior to the date of issue of this Project Manual or Document, except as modified or otherwise directed by the applicable codes and their supplements and amendments adopted by the code authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Date of Issue - The “date of issue” as it appears in the statement above, means the date

which appears on the cover of the Project Manual or Document corresponding to the date of issue of the Purchase Order Documents.

2. Code Authorities: The “code authorities” as it appears in the statement above, means the authorities responsible for code enforcement.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. General Explanation: Drawings must be recognized as being diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in the Purchase Order Documents are defined in the General Conditions, and in this Section. Definitions and explanations contained in this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive but are general for this Work to the extent that they are not stated more explicitly in another element of the Purchase Order Documents. In the event of a conflict in definitions or explanations within the Purchase Order Documents or whenever there is need of clarification or interpretation of definitions within or between the Purchase Order Documents, notify the Owner immediately and proceed as directed. Except in cases where definitions are determined by code authorities having jurisdiction, the Owner’s interpretation of all definitions will take precedence.

B. General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of Division 1 - Sections apply to entire

Scope of Work and, where indicated, to other elements which are included in the Project. C. Owner (or Owner’s Representative): Wherever the term “Owner (or Owner’s Representative)” or

any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order Documents, it means PBK ARCHITECTS, INC., 11 Greenway Plaza, 22nd Floor, Houston, Texas 77046, (713) 965-0608, or their authorized representative(s).

D. Bid, Competitive Sealed Proposal (CSP), Response, Offer, etc.: Wherever the term "Bid",

"Competitive Sealed Proposal (CSP)", "Response", "Offer", "Proposal", or any derivative thereof, or similar term appears in the Purchase Order Documents, they mean one and the same, and shall mean Competitive Sealed Proposal, which by definition allows the Owner to accept the “best value” for the school district based on factors other than cost in selecting the Contractor.

E. Contractor, General Contractor, Construction Manager, etc: Wherever the term "Contractor",

"General Contractor", "Construction Manager" or any derivative thereof, or similar term appear in the Purchase Order Documents, they mean one and the same.



01 41 00 - 3

F. Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, Bidder, etc.: Wherever the term "Subcontractor", Sub-subcontractor", "Bidder", "Bidder/Vendor", "Vendor", "Installer", "Integrator", "Respondent", "Offeror", or any derivative thereof, or similar term appears in the Purchase Order Documents, they mean one and the same, and shall refer to the entity (person or firm) licensed and meeting all applicable regulations of the State of Michigan and Department of Labor to perform the Work, or their authorized representative(s).

1. Responsibilities: To avoid any misunderstanding or lack of interpretation, the responsibility for performing the Work is totally that of the entity defined above, and the resolutions proposed in his shop drawings and related documentation shall be demonstrated throughout the Work and specified warranty period.

2. In the event of a controversy involving the Purchase Order Documents or interpretation of Project requirements, the decision of the Owner will take precedence.

G. Gonzales Independent School District, Owner. H. Consultants: Wherever the term "Consultant", or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase

Order Documents, it means the following to whom that portion of the work applies. 1. Owner’s Consultants:

a. Geotechnical Consultant: TSI Laboratories Testing

J. Indicated: Wherever the term "indicated", or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order Documents, it means a cross-reference to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in the Purchase Order Documents. Where terms such as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are used in lieu of “indicated”, it is for the purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

K. Directed, Requested, Etc: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as “directed”, “requested”,

“authorized”, “selected”, “approved”, “required”, “accepted”, and “permitted” or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order Documents, it means as “directed by the Owner”, “requested by the Owner”, and similar phrases with actions taken by the Owner. However, no meaning or otherwise shall be interpreted to extend the Owner’s responsibility into Contractor’s area of construction supervision.

L. Approve: Wherever the term “Approve”, or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order

Documents, it means only the Owner, or an individual designated by him as his representative, can approve or disapprove Purchase Order actions. Even if the specifications indicate that an individual other than the Owner, such as the “Engineer” or “Consultant” will approve or disapprove an action, it is understood that only the Owner has this authority unless the individual is so designated by him in writing. Even when an individual is so designated, the Contractor may appeal the action to the Owner and the Owner’s decision will be final. In no case will “approval” by the Owner be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill requirements of the Purchase Order Documents.

M. Furnish: Wherever the term “Furnish”, or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order Documents, it means supply or deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, installing, anchoring, applying, curing, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

N. Install: Wherever the term “Install”, or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order Documents, it means performing the operations at the Project site, of unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, installing, anchoring, applying, curing, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.



01 41 00 - 4

O. Provide: Wherever the term “Provide”, or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order Documents, it means furnish and install at the Project site, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

P. Project, Site: Wherever the term “Project”, “Site”, or similar such term appears in the Purchase

Order Documents, it means the space available to the Contractor for performance of the Work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing work as part of the Project. The extent of project or site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with description of land upon which Project is to be built.

Q. Installer: Wherever the term “Installer”, or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order

Documents, it means the entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the Project, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in operations they are engaged to perform.

R. Specialist: Wherever the term “Specialist”, or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order

Documents, it means an individual or firm of established reputation (or if newly organized, whose personnel have previously established a reputation in the same field), which is regularly engaged in, and which maintains a regular force of workmen skilled in either (as applicable) manufacturing or fabricating items required by the Purchase Order, installing items required by the Purchase Order, or otherwise performing work required by the Purchase Order. Where the Purchase Order Specification requires installation by a specialist, that term shall also be deemed to mean either the manufacturer of the item or firm who will perform the work under the manufacturer’s direct supervision.

S. Testing Laboratory: Wherever the term “Testing Laboratory”, or any derivative thereof appears in

the Purchase Order Documents, it means an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at the Project site or elsewhere; and to report and (if required) interpret results of those inspections or tests.

1.5 FORMAT AND SPECIFICATION CONTEXT EXPLANATIONS

A. Underscoring: Is used strictly to assist reader of specification text in scanning text for key words (for quick recall). No emphasis on or relative importance is intended where underscoring is used.

B. Capitalization: Except for manufacturer, product, or trademark names, capitalization is used strictly

to assist reader of specification text in scanning text for key words (for quick recall). No emphasis on or relative importance is intended where capitalization is used.

C. Imperative language: Is used generally in specifications. Except as otherwise indicated,

requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities which must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted, by others.

D. Section Numbering: Is used to facilitate cross-reference in Purchase Order Documents. Sections are

placed in Project Manual in numeric sequence; however, numbering sequence is not complete, and listing of sections at beginning of Project Manual must be consulted to determine numbers and names of specification sections in Purchase Order Documents.

E. Page Numbering: Pages are numbered independently for each section. The section number is shown preceded by the project number and followed by the page number at the bottom of each page, to facilitate the location of text. The project number is given to identify the project, for which specification was written, should the section become separated from the Project Manual.



01 41 00 - 5

F. Specifying Methods: The techniques or methods of specifying to record requirements varies throughout text, and may include “prescriptive, “open-generic descriptive”, “compliance with standards”, “performance”, or a combination of these. The method used for specifying one unit of work has no bearing on requirements for another unit of work.

G. Abbreviations: The language of Specifications and other Purchase Order Documents is of the

abbreviated type in certain instances and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual work abbreviations of a self-explanatory nature have been included in texts. Specific abbreviations have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of specification requirements with notations on drawings and in schedules. These are frequently defined in section at first instance of use. Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of the Purchase Order Documents so indicates. A list of typical abbreviations includes, but is not limited to the following trade associations and organizations. Refer to Drawings and other Purchase Order Documents for other abbreviations.

AA Aluminum Association AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Assn. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America AHA American Hardboard Association AHGA American Hotdip Galvanizers Association AI Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron & Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute ASA Acoustical Society of America ASA American Subcontractors Association ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants ASC Adhesive & Sealant Council, Inc. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Professional Engineers ASPI American Wood Preserver's Institute ASTM ASTM International AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWS American Welding Society BIA Brick Institute of America BRI Building Research Institute CRA California Redwood Association CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute DHI Door and Hardware Institute EPA Environmental Protection Agency FTI Facing Tile Institute FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association



01 41 00 - 6

GA Gypsum Association HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association IBC International Building Code ICBO International Conference of Building Officials ICC International Code Council IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers JSMA Joint Sealer Manufacturers Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NAMM National Association of Mirror Manufacturers NBLP National Bureau of Lathing & Plastering NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Assn. NESC National Environmental Systems Contractors NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFPA National Forest Products Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NOMMA National Ornamental Metal Manufacturers Assn NPVLA National Paint, Varnish and Lacquer Assn. NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Assn. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Assn., Inc. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America PI Perlite Institute, Inc. PCA Portland Cement Association RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute RVFC Rubber and Vinyl Floor Council SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SFPA Southern Forest Products Association SHLMA Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturing Assn. SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. UBC Uniform Building Code UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. VBI Venetian Blind Institute VFI Vinyl Fabrics Institute WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WRCLA Western Red Cedar Lumber Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association 1.6 DRAWING SYMBOLS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols used on drawings are those symbols recognized in the construction industry for purposes indicated. Where not otherwise noted, symbols defined by “Architectural Graphic Standards”, published by the American Institute of Architects (AIA) and John Wiley & Sons, Inc., latest edition. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner (or Owner’s Representative) for clarification before proceeding.



01 41 00 - 7

B. Mechanical/Electrical Drawings: Graphic symbols used in Mechanical/Electrical Drawings are generally aligned with symbols recommended by American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). Where appropriate, those symbols are supplemented by more specific symbols as recommended by other recognized technical organizations, including, but not limited to American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American Society of Professional Engineers (ASPE), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) and similar organizations. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner (or Owner’s Representative) for clarification before proceeding.

1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Color, Texture, or Pattern Requirements: 1. When color, texture, or pattern is specified, the item, product, or material shall be furnished

in the specified color, texture, or pattern, as applicable. 2. When more than one (1) approved manufacturer is named in the Specifications, Contractor

may select any of the approved manufacturers and submit the full range of colors, textures, and patterns (standard and special) available of that manufacturer for the Owner’s review and selection.

3. When the term “match existing”, or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order Documents, it means that the sample must match the Owner’s existing work in every respect as to color, texture, and pattern, as applicable.

4. When the term “match Owner’s approved sample”, or any derivative thereof appears in the Purchase Order Documents, it means that the Owner (or Owner’s Representative) has selected a sample which must be matched in every respect as to color, texture, and pattern, as applicable.

5. When an item or product is specified of a manufacturer for which only one (1) color, texture, or pattern is available, and a color, texture, or pattern other than that one is specified, Contractor shall bring it to the attention of the Owner (or Owner’s Representative) for a decision prior to proceeding with the work. Do not proceed with the work until Owner has approved the color, texture, and pattern, as applicable.

6. When an item or product is specified of a manufacturer for which no color, texture, or pattern is specified, and colors, textures, and patterns are available, Contractor shall bring it to the attention of the Owner and submit the full range of colors, textures, and patterns (standard and special) available of that manufacturer for the Owner’s review and selection. Do not proceed with the work until Owner has selected and approved the color, texture, and pattern, as applicable.

7. When due to the nature of the item, product, or material, i.e. face brick, tile pavers, natural stone, etc, Contractor shall submit sample or samples which exhibits the full range of characteristics (colors, i.e. lights and darks, as well as textures, and patterns) for which the item, product, or material is available. The Owner will select the color, texture, and pattern, as applicable, from those available and request a sample panel exhibiting the approved characteristics. The approved color range, texture, and pattern, as applicable will then become the standard for which all work on the project will be judged. Owner will be final judge as to having performed work in conformance with approved characteristics.

8. Under no circumstances are colors, textures, patterns, or any other characteristics for which an item, product, or material are available to be selected by anyone other than the Owner or his authorized representative.

9. Non-conforming work shall be removed from the site and replaced with new conforming work at no additional expense to Owner.

C. Plumbing Line Protection:

1. Placing or washing materials, including, but not limited to the following, down any plumbing line or fixture is strictly forbidden. a. Concrete, cement, sludge, mortar, grout, plaster, or any other cementitious material b. Paint, paint thinner, turpentine, kerosene, gasoline, oil, or any other petroleum or

hazardous products.



01 41 00 - 8

2. Cleaning painting equipment, including brushes in new or existing plumbing fixtures is strictly prohibited.

3. If requested, Contractor shall certify that all affected plumbing lines and fixtures are clean , free flowing and running. Plumbing lines and fixtures damaged as a result of any of the above shall be repaired or replaced at no expense to Owner. Contractor shall bear responsibility and all costs of fines, penalties, and legal fees attributed to violations as levied by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Fasteners:

1. Unless specifically indicated or directed otherwise, all fasteners in work exposed to view, shall be concealed in the finished work.

2. No fasteners shall show through or telegraph through exposed face of finished work and all finished surfaces shall be free of all evidence of the existence of fasteners.

3. Fasteners shall be spaced to accurately and rigidly secure work in place. 4. If not shown or otherwise required or recommended by manufacturer, standard, or code

authorities having jurisdiction, fastener spacing shall not exceed 12 inches on center. 5. Non-conforming work shall be removed from the site and replaced with new conforming work

at no additional expense to Owner.

E. Exposed Metal Work: 1. Unless specifically indicated or directed otherwise, all exposed metal work shall be flat with all

surfaces free of distortions, oil canning, waves, dents, scratches, weld marks, and other surface defects detrimental to good appearance or function.

2. All steel exposed to exterior weather or moisture, either exposed or concealed in work, shall be hot dip galvanized, phosphate treated for paint retention and shop prime painted.

3. Non-conforming work shall be removed from the site and replaced with new conforming work at no additional expense to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used



QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00 - 1

SECTION 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Quality Assurance: Requirements for material and product quality and control of installation. B. Tolerances C. References and Standards D. Testing Laboratory Services E. Inspection Services F. Manufacturers' field services

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 45 23 – Testing and Inspecting Services B. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures C. The Work of this Section shall be included as a part of all Sections of Work, whether referenced therein

or not. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. Unless specifically noted otherwise, perform all Work shown, mentioned, or reasonably inferred and comply with all work restrictions.

B. Many of the requirements specified elsewhere are included herein for reference and convenience.

Where a conflict occurs between the Contract Documents, either within themselves or each other, the more stringent requirement or the most expensive combination of materials and workmanship shall prevail.

C. Contractor shall:

1. perform Work in accordance with the General Conditions, as specified herein, and with the quality control requirements of each Specification Section;

2. perform Work in the highest quality workmanship, unless specified otherwise; 3. join materials with a uniform and accurate fit so they meet with neat straight lines, free of

smears, overlaps or irregularities, as applicable to the work; 4. install all exposed materials appropriately level, plumb, and at accurate angles as shown and

flush with adjoining materials; 5. attach materials with sufficient strength, and with number and spacing of fasteners and

attachments that will not fail until materials joined are broken or permanently deformed; 6. use concealed fasteners, unless shown or directed otherwise.



1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturer’s instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect/Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the

manufacturer. G. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,

vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.5 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of Products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract

Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing Products in place.

1.6 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner-Contractor Agreement

except where specific date is established by code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect/Engineer before proceeding. E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of

Architect/Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents.

F. Refer to Section 01 41 00, Codes, Regulations and Standards, for additional information concerning

applicable reference and standards requirements. 1.7 TESTING SERVICES

A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform testing.



B. The independent firm will perform tests and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer, Owner, or authority having jurisdiction.

C. Testing and source quality control may occur on or off the project site. Perform off-site testing as

required by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner. D. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor,

indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.

E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage,

safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations

requiring services, or as specified in individual specification sections. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required.

F. Testing does not relieve Contractor to perform Work to contract requirements. G. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the

same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer. Payment for re-testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price.

H. Refer to Section 01 45 23, Inspection and Testing Laboratory Services, for additional information

concerning testing, and submittal procedures and requirements for Testing Reports. 1.8 INSPECTION SERVICES

A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform inspection.

B. The independent firm will perform inspections and other services specified in individual specification

sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer, Owner, or authority having jurisdiction. C. Inspecting may occur on or off the project site. Perform off-site inspecting as required by the

Architect/Engineer or the Owner. D. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor,

indicating inspection observations and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.

E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish safe access and assistance by incidental labor as requested.

1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services, or as specified in individual specification sections.

F. Inspecting does not relieve Contractor to perform Work to contract requirements.

G. Refer to Section 01 45 23, Inspection and Testing Laboratory Services, for additional information concerning inspections, and submittal procedures and requirements for Inspection Reports.

1.9 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as required, and to initiate instructions when necessary.



B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer and Owner.

C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are

supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Refer to Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, for additional information concerning submittal

procedures and requirements for Manufacturers Field Reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or

attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to

applying new material or substance in contact or bond.


Kubala Engineers Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project Project No. P2119500SP Gonzales Independent School District

STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICE

01 45 23 - 1

SECTION 01 45 23 – STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. The testing laboratory shall make all inspections and perform all tests in accordance with the building code, local authorities, ASTM specifications and the Contract Documents.

B. The testing laboratory shall provide as a part of the project’s close-out documents or as required by any regulatory authority, all appropriate signed and sealed Special Inspection Certificates whose purpose would be to provide consistency and direction for compliance with the referenced Building Code. These Special Inspection Certificates shall confirm that that all work requiring special inspection has been adequately performed, and the special inspections have been made by an individual or firm that is qualified to make special inspections per the referenced Building Code.

C. Materials and workmanship not meeting the required standards are to be removed and replaced. Replacement and subsequent testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

D. Testing, inspection, and certifications specified in other sections of these Specifications shall be paid by the Owner, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Inspection by the laboratory shall not relieve the Contractor or Fabricator of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply, unless noted otherwise.

B. ACI 311 – ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection

C. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete

D. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and a referenced standard, the Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.



01 45 23 - 2


A. Testing Laboratory shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM E543.

B. Testing Laboratory shall be insured against errors and omissions by a professional liability insurance policy having a limit of liability not less than $500,000.

C. Testing Laboratory shall be under the direction of a Registered Engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and having at least five years experience in inspection and testing of construction materials.

D. Laboratory staff monitoring concrete work shall be ACI certified inspectors.

E. Laboratory staff performing structural steel inspection shall be currently certified AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI), in accordance with the provisions of AWS QCI, "Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors". The inspector may be supported by assistant inspectors who may perform specific inspection functions under the supervision of the inspector. Assistant inspectors shall be currently certified AWS Certified Associate Welding Inspectors (CAWI). The work of the assistant inspectors shall be regularly monitored by the inspector, generally on a daily basis.

F. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

1.5 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings as required to coordinate work with the Contractor and address quality control issues.

B. Test samples of design mixes submitted by Contractor.

C. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of services.

D. Perform specified inspecting, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.

E. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non conformance of Work or Materials.

G. Perform all inspections and tests in accordance with building code requirements for "Special Inspection" whether or not such inspections are specified in the Contract Documents.

H. Testing Laboratory shall write a letter at the completion of the project, signed and sealed by a registered engineer in the state of the project, summarizing the inspections



01 45 23 - 3

performed, the dates they were performed, and whether the observed construction complied with the Contract Documents.

1.6 LABORATORY REPORTS

A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of laboratory reports to Architect, Engineer, Owner and to Contractor.

B. Include: 1. Date issued 2. Project title and number 3. Name of inspector 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection 5. Identification of product and specifications section 6. Location in the Project 7. Type of inspection or test 8. Date of test 9. Results of tests 10. Conformance with Contract Documents

1.7 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY

A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work, except where such approval is specifically called for in these specifications.

C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. See technical sections of these specifications for specific requirements.

B. Deliver to the laboratory, without cost to the Owner, adequate samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested.

C. Advise laboratory sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow laboratory to complete any required checks or tests and to assign personnel for field inspection and testing as specified.

D. Provide facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test samples on project site for the first 24 hours and also for subsequent field curing as required by ASTM specifications C31.



01 45 23 - 4

E. Provide incidental labor and equipment as required to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining and handling samples at the site and in accessing work for inspection.

F. Furnish concrete mix designs, in accordance with ACI 301, section 3.9, made by an independent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier. Where mix designs are required, the laboratory shall be selected and paid by the Contractor.

G. Provide current welder certifications for each welder to be employed.

H. Furnish fabrication and erection inspection of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter 6.

I. Prequalification of all welding procedures to be used in executing the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIER DRILLING

A. A representative of the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer shall provide the services specified in this section.

B. The laboratory representative shall make continuous inspections to determine that the proper bearing stratum is obtained and that shafts are clean and dry before placing concrete.

C. The laboratory shall furnish complete pier log showing the diameter, top and bottom elevations of each pier, whether or not casing is required, bell size (if required), actual penetration into bearing stratum, and elevation of top of bearing stratum.

3.2 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

A. Inspect all concrete reinforcing steel prior to placing of concrete for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved shop drawings. All instances of noncompliance shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Contractor for correction. If uncorrected by the Contractor, they shall be listed in the report.

B. Observe and report on the following: 1. Number and size of bars 2. Bending and lengths of bars 3. Splicing 4. Clearance to forms including chair heights 5. Clearance between bars or spacing 6. Rust, form oil, and other contamination 7. Grade of Steel 8. Securing, tying and chairing of bars



01 45 23 - 5

9. Excessive congestion of reinforcing steel 10. Installation of anchor bolts and placement of concrete around anchor bolts 11. Fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies, including visual

inspection of all welds. 12. Visually inspect studs and deformed bar anchors on embedded assemblies for

compliance with Contract Documents

C. Provide a qualified, experienced inspector to inspect reinforcing steel. Inspector shall have a minimum of three years experience inspecting reinforcing steel in projects of similar size.

3.3 REINFORCING STEEL MECHANICAL SPLICES

A. Each mechanical splice shall be visually inspected to ensure compliance with the ICBO Reports and the manufacturer's published criteria for acceptable completed splices.

B. Special emphasis shall be placed on inspection of the end preparation of each bar to be spliced, as required by the ICBO report.

C. Reports on each mechanical splice shall indicate location of the splice, size of bars spliced, and whether splice is accepted or rejected. Reasons for rejection shall be shown on each report.

3.4 CONCRETE INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Secure composite samples of concrete at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C172.

B. Mold and cure specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. The test cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then carefully transported to the laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C31.

C. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two specimens shall be tested 7 days, two specimens shall be tested at 28 days for strength acceptance. A spare cylinder shall be made and kept for a 56-day break if the 28-day break does not meet strength requirements. If the plans require 56-day break (such as for mass concrete), two samples shall be tested at 56 days for acceptance.

D. Make one strength test (four or five cylinders) for each: 1. 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each mix design placed in one day. 2. OR, for each 5000 sq. ft. of slab area placed in one day. 3. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 25 cu. yds., the

strength tests may be waived by the Architect/Engineer, if in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

E. Make one slump test for each set of cylinders following the procedural requirements of ASTM C143 and ASTM C172. Make additional slump tests whenever the consistency of the concrete appears to vary. Do not permit placement of concrete having measured slump outside the limits given on the drawings, except when approved by the Architect. Slump tests corresponding to samples from which strength tests are made shall be reported with the strength test results. Other slump tests need not be reported.



01 45 23 - 6

F. Determine total air content of air entrained normal-weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C231.

G. Determine air content and unit weight of lightweight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C173 and ASTM C567.

H. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test and one test for each concrete load discharged when air temperature is 80 degrees F. and above.

I. Monitor the addition of water at the jobsite and the length of time the concrete is allowed to remain in the truck before placement. Report any significant deviation from the approved mix design and the project requirements to the Architect, the Contractor, and the Concrete Supplier.

J. Monitor the slump and air content of the concrete. If the measured slump or air content of air entrained concrete falls outside the specified limits, a check test shall be made immediately on another portion of the same sample. In the event of a second failure, the concrete shall be considered to have failed to meet the project requirements and specifications and shall be rejected.

K. The testing laboratory shall certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered (or placed), amount of water added and the time at which the cement and aggregate was dispensed into the truck, and the time at which concrete was discharged from the truck.

L. Laboratory reports shall contain the following information: 1. Class of concrete and specific location. 2. Specified strength of concrete. 3. Air temperature. 4. Batch time. 5. Specified time that discharge of concrete must be completed, based on air

temperature. 6. Time concrete is placed. 7. Amount of water withheld at the plant for latter addition at the project site (Note that

the total amount of water shall not exceed the maximum water/cement ratio for the approved mix design).

8. Amount of water added at the site. 9. Allowable slump range on the approved mix design. 10. Slump. 11. Maximum and minimum allowable concrete temperature on the approved mix

design. 12. Temperature of the concrete mix. 13. Air content range on the approved mix design. 14. Air content. 15. Statement that concrete is in compliance with the project documents and the

approved mix designs.

M. Evaluation and Acceptance: 1. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of

all sets of three consecutive strength test results are equal to or exceed the



01 45 23 - 7

specified strength and no individual test result (average of two cylinders) is below the specified strength by more than 500 psi.

2. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements of "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings," ACI 301 have been met.

N. Observe the placing of all concrete, except site work. Observe and report on placing method, consolidation, cold joints, length of drop and displacement of reinforcing. Report deficiencies to the Contractor immediately for corrective action. Inspections may be reduced to a periodic basis when all procedures have been deemed satisfactory by the laboratory.

O. Comply with ACI 311, "Guide For Concrete Inspection" and "ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection" (SP-2).

P. Inspect the application of curing compound and monitor all curing conditions to assure compliance with Specification requirements. Report curing deficiencies to the Contractor immediately and submit a report to the Architect.

3.5 MASONRY

A. Inspection 1. Provide a qualified inspector to inspect all structural masonry work.

a. Inspect masonry for compliance in accordance with the “Level 1 or 2 Special Inspection” provisions of the building code. Refer to the contract documents regarding which level of special inspections is required.

2. In combination with inspections required by the building code, inspect the following: a. Preparation of masonry prisms for testing. b. Placement of reinforcing. c. Cavities to be grouted (prior to grouting and prior to closing cleanouts). d. Mortar mixing operations, including proportion of materials and method of

measuring materials (materials should be measured with a mixing box and not a shovel).

e. Bedding of mortar for each type of unit and placing of units. f. Grouting operations. g. Condition of units before laying for excessive absorption.

3. Provide report of each inspection.

B. Field Compressive Tests for Grout: 1. Secure composite samples of grout at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 1019. 2. Mold and cure three specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C

1019. Supervise the curing protection provided (by others) for test specimens in the field and the transportation from the field to the laboratory. The test specimens shall be stored in the field 24 to 48 hours and then be carefully transported to the laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C 1019.

3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 1019. Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and one specimen shall be tested at 7 days for information.

4. Make one strength test (three specimens) for each 10 cubic yards of grout poured but not less than one strength test for each 5000 square feet of wall area.



01 45 23 - 8

C. Prism Tests: 1. Build prisms at the jobsite using the same materials and methods as being used for

the wall construction. Store prisms in a place where they will be undisturbed for two days and have approximately same curing conditions as masonry construction. After 48 hours, move prisms to the laboratory and test in accordance with ASTM C1314.

2. Make prism tests in advance of operations using materials under same conditions, with the same bonding and construction methods as is being used for the structure. When building prisms, moisture content of the units at time of laying, consistency of mortar and width and thickness of mortar joints shall be same as used in the structure.

3. Build prisms of hollow masonry units the same width as unit by 16" long by 16" high. Apply mortar to face shells only. Do not fill hollow core with grout. Compute value of ultimate net compressive strength, by dividing ultimate load by net face shell area of masonry units.

4. Cure and test prisms in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C1314. Test five specimens of each type of masonry unit before delivering material to the jobsite and submit results for approval. During construction, test three specimens of each type of masonry unit for each 5000 square feet of wall placed.

5. The prisms shall be tested after 28 days but may be tested at seven days provided the relationship between seven and 28 day strengths has been established for the materials used prior to the start of construction.

6. When the average strength of a set of prisms falls below the specified compressive strength (f'm), the masonry corresponding to the test shall be deemed unacceptable. In such a case, notify the Architect and Contractor immediately.

3.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Inspect all structural steel during and after erection for conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings.

B. Field Inspection 1. Proper erection of all pieces. 2. Proper installation of all bolts, including the checking of calibration of impact

wrenches used with high strength bolts. 3. Plumbness of structure and proper bracing. 4. Field Painting. 5. Visual examination of all field welding. 6. Ultrasonic testing of all penetration welds. 7. Installation of field welded shear studs. 8. Measure and record camber of all beams upon arrival and before erection for

compliance with the specified camber. Measure lying flat with web in horizontal position. Members outside specified camber tolerance shall be returned to the shop for remedial work.

C. Qualification of Welders: Fabricator and erector shall provide the testing laboratory with names of welders to be employed in the work, together with certification that welders have passed qualification tests within the last year using procedures specified in the AWS D1.1. Testing laboratory shall verify all welder's qualifications.



01 45 23 - 9

D. Inspection of shop and field welding shall be "verification inspection," in accordance with Section 6 of AWS D1.1 and as follows: 1. Visually inspect the welding of all shop fabricated members and note the location of

all cover plates, connectors, bearing stiffeners, splices, and fillet welds for proper return around ends and check for seams, folds, and delamination.

2. Ultrasonically test all penetration welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3. Inspect surfaces to be welded. Surface preparations, fit-up and cleanliness of

surface shall be noted. 4. The welding inspector shall be present during alignment and fit-up of members

being welded and shall check for correct surface preparation of root openings, sound weld metal, and proper penetration in the root pass. Where weld has not penetrated completely, the inspector shall order the joint to be chipped down to sound metal or gouged out and rewelded. Root passes shall be thoroughly inspected for cracks. All cracks shall be gouged out and rewelded to two inches beyond each end of crack.

5. The inspector shall check that all welds have been marked with the welder’s symbol. The inspector shall mark the welds requiring repairs and shall make a reinspection. The inspector shall maintain a written record of all welds. Work completed and inspected shall receive an identification mark by the inspector.

6. The testing laboratory shall advise the Owner and the Architect of any shop and/or field conditions which, in his opinion, may require further tests and examination by means other than those specified. Such further tests and examinations shall be performed as authorized by the Owner and the Architect.

7. The Owner reserves the right to use ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to verify the adequacy of all welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall be as specified in AWS D1.1.

E. Inspection of bolted construction shall be in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" and as follows: 1. All bolts shall be visually inspected to ensure that the plies have been brought into

snug contact. 2. High strength bolting shall be inspected in accordance with Section 9 of the AISC

"Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. 3. For all high strength bolts, unless specifically noted on the Drawings to require only

"snug-tight" installation, the inspector shall observe the required jobsite testing and calibration and shall confirm that the procedure to be used provides the required tension.

4. For slip critical connections, inspect the contact surfaces for compliance with specifications prior to bolting.

F. Inspection of stud welding shall be in accordance with Section 7.8 of AWS D1.1 and as follows:

G. A minimum of two shear studs shall be welded at the start of each day’s production period in order to determine proper generator, control unit and stud welding setting. These studs shall be capable of being bent at 45 degrees from vertical without weld failure. 1. When the temperature is below 32 degrees Fahrenheit, one stud in each 100 shall

be tested after cooling. Studs shall not be welded below zero degrees Fahrenheit or when the surface is wet due to rain, snow, or ice. If a stud fails, two new studs shall pass the test before resumption of the welding.



01 45 23 - 10

2. Visually inspect studs for compliance with the Contract Documents. Check number, spacing, and weld quality. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that a sound weld or a full 360-degree fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud, such stud shall be struck with a hammer and bent 15 degrees off perpendicular. Studs failing this test shall be replaced.

3.7 OPEN WEB JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS

A. Inspect all joists either in the plant or at the jobsite for conformance with specified fabrication requirements. Check welded connections between web and chord, splices, and straightness of members. Inspection at the plant may be performed by the manufacturer’s qualified QC personnel.

B. Inspect installation of joists at the jobsite. Check connections to supporting members, chord extensions, number of rows of bridging, and bridging connections for conformance with the Contract Documents and referenced standards.

C. Check welder qualification certificates for field welding operators.

3.8 STEEL FLOOR DECK

A. Field Inspection shall consist of the following: 1. Check types, gauges and finishes for conformance with the Contract Documents

and shop drawings. 2. Examination of proper erection of all metal deck, fastenings, reinforcing of holes,

deck reinforcing, miscellaneous deck supports, hanger tabs, shear studs, deck closures, painting or other coating.

3. Certification of welders. 4. Field welded shear studs used to fasten metal floor decking to supporting steel shall

be inspected and tested as described in the structural steel section of this specification section.

3.9 STEEL ROOF DECK

A. Field inspection shall consist of the following: 1. Checking types, gauges, and finishes for conformance with the Contract Documents

and Shop Drawings. 2. Examination for proper erection of all metal deck, including fastenings at supports

and sidelaps, reinforcing of holes, and miscellaneous deck supports. 3. Certification of welders. 4. Visual inspection of at least 20 percent of all welds.

3.10 SPRAYED FIREPROOFING

A. Verify that applied thickness, density, and bond strength of sprayed fireproofing meets fire rating requirements of approved design.



01 45 23 - 11

B. Verify that installation meets fire rating requirements of approved design.

C. Inspect and test for thickness as follows: 1. Test 20 percent of structural frame columns and beams in each building level. 2. Test 10 percent of beams other than structural frame in each building level. 3. Test one slab per each 5000 square feet of building area.

D. Inspect and test for density on slabs, beams, and columns. Perform one of each test for each 10,000 square feet of building area.

E. Inspect and test for bond strength, one test for beams and one test for slabs for each 10,000 square feet or area.

F. Inspection and test procedures shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E605 and E736.

3.11 EXPANSION BOLT INSTALLATION

A. Inspect the drilling of each hole and installation of each expansion bolt for compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Verify the installation torque for each expansion bolt for compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.12 TESTING OF NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Make one strength test for every 15 base plates grouted and for every 15 bags of grout used in joints between members.

B. Each test shall consist of four cubes, two to be tested at seven days, and two at 28 days, made and tested in accordance with ASTM C109, with the exception that the grout shall be restrained from expansion by a top plate.

3.13 EXCAVATION


B. Review geotechnical parameters and assumptions used in the development of calculations and drawings for retention systems, including lateral design forces, rock wedge stability analysis, rock bolt lengths and spacing, and surcharge effects.

C. Observe the excavation process, the exposed faces of the excavation and the installation of retention systems. Check for compliance with the Contract Documents and make alternative recommendations as may be required to suit field conditions.

D. Review required submittals as they pertain to geotechnical requirements.



01 45 23 - 12

E. Check the adequacy and accuracy of the Contractor's monitoring program, equipment, procedures, and measurements related to movements of the excavated face and adjacent structures.

F. Immediately report any observed unsafe conditions. Request additional shoring, bracing, or rock bolting where judged to be necessary as the excavation progresses.

3.14 WATER PRESSURE INJECTION OR LIMESLURRY PRESSURE INJECTION

A. The representative of the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer shall make continuous observations throughout the injection operations as per the geotechnical report.

B. The representative of the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer may propose to perform additional tests if required to properly evaluate the injected soil. The representative of the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer shall evaluate the results of the tests to determine the acceptability of the injected areas and to determine if additional injections are required.

3.15 FILLING AND BACKFILLING


B. The Contractor shall make available to the laboratory, adequate samples of each fill and backfill material from the proposed sources of supply not less than 10 days prior to the start of the work.

C. Laboratory shall analyze samples as required to provide a soil description and to determine compliance with quality requirements. Perform the following tests: 1. Test for liquid limit in accordance with ASTM D423. 2. Test for plastic limit of soils and plasticity index of soils in accordance with ASTM

D424. 3. Tests for moisture density relations of soil in accordance with ASTM D698 or D1557,

as applicable.

D. Furnish a report for each individual test and state whether sample conforms to specified requirements or reasons for nonconformance.

E. Inspect under slab drainage material and placement for compliance with specified gradation, quality and compaction.

F. Make in-place compaction test for moisture content, moisture-density relationship, and density of fill material after compaction to determine that backfill materials have been compacted to the specified density. Number of tests shall be as follows: 1. One test for each 5000 square feet of area of each lift placed under floor slab.

Stagger test locations in each lift from those in the previous lift. Perform a minimum of three tests for each lift.

2. One test for each 150 linear feet, or portion thereof, of each lift placed against foundation walls, with locations staggered from those in the previous lift.



01 45 23 - 13

3. One test of each lift placed below any isolated footing, and every 100 linear feet under continuous footings, with locations taken on a different side from that in the lift below.

3.16 TILT-UP PANELS

A. Concrete Reinforcing Steel and Embedded Metal Assemblies: Inspect in accordance with the Concrete Reinforcing Steel and Embedded Metal Assemblies section of this Specification.

B. Concrete Inspection and Testing: Perform in accordance with the Concrete and Inspection and Testing section of this specification.

C. Inspection of Tilt-up concrete during erection: 1. Inspect members for cracks, spalls and other deficiencies after erection. 2. Inspect erection of tilt-up members for placement tolerances, and to ensure that

connections, bearing lengths, welding and grouting conform to the Contract Documents.

3.17 POST-TENSIONING

A. Verify certification of calibration of jacking equipment used in post-tensioning operations.

B. Observe and report on placement and anchorage of tendons immediately prior to concreting.

C. Provide a qualified, experienced inspector to observe the stressing and elongation measurement of each tendon. Inspector shall have a minimum of five years experience inspecting post-tensioning operations.

D. The Contractor shall log and submit detailed reports of the stressing and elongation of each tendon. The laboratory representative shall observe the recording of information by the Contractor and make such spot checks as necessary to verify the accuracy of the post tensioning reports.

E. Receive and review final stressing and elongation reports prepared by the contractor. Compare the actual and required elongation of each tendon and the actual and required load on each tendon. Grant permission to cut tails of tendons which are within the specified tolerance, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, and submit reports of those which are not within the specified tolerance to the Architect for further evaluation.

F. Observe and report on grouting of tendons noted to be bonded.

G. Reports shall be submitted to the Architect within 48 hours after stressing.

H. The post-tensioning subcontractor shall provide a letter at the completion of the project, signed and sealed by a registered engineer in the state of the project, stating that the post-tensioning work was completed in accordance with the contract documents. The post-



01 45 23 - 14

tensioning subcontractor shall review the stressing records and certify that the required forces shown on the contract documents have been provided.

3.18 FOOTING EXCAVATIONS

A. A representative of the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer shall inspect each footing excavation to determine that the proper bearing stratum is obtained and that excavations are properly clean and dry before the concrete is placed.



TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES

01 45 23.1 - 1

SECTION 01 45 23.1 - TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements and qualifications including but not limited to: 1. Professional testing and laboratory services. 2. Accessories necessary for the completion of testing and laboratory services.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality assurance and quality control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality assurance and quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality assurance and quality control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

C. A qualified independent testing laboratory and/or geotechnical engineering service selected and paid by Owner. 1. The Owner will pay for the initial laboratory services of materials that comply with the

requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall pay for testing and retesting of materials that do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. Inspecting agency shall perform inspections and tests in accordance with the rules and regulations of the building code, local authorities, Specifications of ASTM, and the Contract Documents.

E. Materials and workmanship found not in compliance with required standards or performance obligations shall be removed and replaced. Replacement and subsequent testing shall be at Contractor’s expense.

F. Where terms “Inspector” and “Laboratory” are used, it is meant and in reference to an officially designated and accredited inspector of the testing laboratory or geotechnical service engaged by Owner.

G. Laboratory inspections shall not relieve the Contractor or Fabricator of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with the Contract Documents.

H. Contractor or Fabricator shall cooperate with the testing laboratory in matters pertaining to the Work.



01 45 23.1 - 2

I. Contractor to address deficiency and failed reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, documented according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM E534; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program. 3. Testing agencies shall be insured against errors and omissions by a professional liability

insurance policy having a minimum limit of liability of $500,000.00.

B. Inspection and testing services the of testing agency shall be under the direction of a Registered Engineer licensed in the State of Texas, charged with engineering managerial responsibility, and having a minimum of five (5) years engineering experience in inspection and testing of construction materials.

C. Concrete Inspectors: Inspecting personnel monitoring concrete Work shall be ACI certified inspectors.

D. Structural Steel: Primary inspectors performing structural steel inspection shall be currently certified AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI), in accordance with the provisions of AWS QCI, Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. 1. Inspector may be supported by assistant inspectors who perform specific inspection

functions under the direct supervision of the Primary Inspector. Assistant inspectors shall be currently certified AWS Certified Associate Welding Inspectors (CAWI). Work of assistant inspectors shall be monitored daily by the inspector.

E. Testing Equipment: Equipment shall be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 12 months by devices of accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.

F. Referenced Standards: Latest adopted edition of standards referenced apply to the Work. In the event of conflict between the Contract Documents and referenced standards, the Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between Contract Documents and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Refer to the individual specification sections for specific requirements.



01 45 23.1 - 3

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

3. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform the quality control services. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

4. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

5. Where quality control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality control service.

6. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

7. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

8. Associated Responsibilities and Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: a. Provide access to the Work. b. Delivery of samples to testing laboratory, without cost to Owner, in adequate

quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

c. Advise laboratory and Architect sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow laboratory to complete required inspections or tests and to assign personnel for field inspection and testing as specified.

d. Provide facilities for storage and curing of concrete test samples on site for the first 24 hours and for subsequent field curing required by ASTM C31.

e. Incidental labor, facilities, and equipment necessary to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining and handling samples at the site.

f. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.

g. Provide concrete mix designs in accordance with ACI 301 Section 3.9 made by an independent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier. Where mix designs by an independent testing laboratory are required, select and pay for laboratory.

h. Obtain required inspections or approvals of the building official. Inspection requests and notifications required by building code are responsibility of the Contractor.

i. Provide current welder certificates for each welder employed. j. Provide fabrication and erection inspection and testing of welds in accordance with

AWS D1.1, Chapter 6. 1) Use prequalification of welding procedures in executing the Work.

k. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

9. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of payment responsibility of the original tests or inspections, provide quality control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work failing to comply with the Contract Documents or Code requirements.

C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.



01 45 23.1 - 4

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

D. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and quality control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.5 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF LABORATORY PERSONNEL

A. A representative of the testing laboratory, who has reviewed and is familiar with the project and specifications, shall participate in preconstruction conferences. The representative shall coordinate material testing and inspection requirements with the Contractor and its subcontractors consistent with the planned construction schedule. The laboratory representative shall attend conferences required or requested to address quality control issues.

B. Laboratory personnel shall inspect and test materials, assemblies, specimens, and Work performed, including design mixes, methods and techniques and report the progress to the Architect.

C. If material or Work fails to meet requirements of Contract Documents, laboratory inspector shall notify the Construction Manager, Architect, Engineers, supplier or subcontractor providing or preparing the materials or Work being tested of such failure.

D. Laboratory personnel shall not perform the Work of the Contractor or act as foremen or superintendents. Work will be inspected as it progresses, but failure to detect defective Work or materials shall not prevent later rejection when a defect is discovered.

E. Laboratory personnel are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release the requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept portions of Work, except where approval is specifically specified in the Specifications.

F. Comply with building code requirements for Special Inspections.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality control service.



01 45 23.1 - 5

C. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

D. Submit copies of reports of each inspection and test: 1. Owner, Program or Project Manager, Architect, and each Engineer or outside consultants

regarding their particular phase of the project: One copy each. 2. Construction Manager and Contractor: Two copies each.

E. In addition to furnishing a written report, notify Construction Manager and Contractor verbally of uncorrected conditions or failures to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents, and immediately fax and email corresponding report to the Architect and Engineer.

F. At completion of each trade or branch of Work requiring inspecting and testing, submit a final certificate attesting to satisfactory completion of Work and full compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Submit copies of test results sealed by a Registered Engineer to municipal authorities having jurisdiction, as required.

1.7 TESTING LABORATORY GUIDELINES AND PROCEDURES

A. Technicians scheduled to perform specific testing services must be qualified to review and perform other services that overlap, i.e. earthwork, foundation inspections, rebar inspection, and concrete when scheduled concurrently at the site.

B. Technician time for services performed will be reimbursed at a regular time rate. Compensation at the overtime rate will be considered for hours over eight hours spent at the site on a single day, field testing services performed on a Saturday or Sunday, and field services performed on a recognized holiday.

C. There shall be a three hour minimum for each scheduled testing service. Vehicle charges will be included on a $25.00 per trip basis.

D. Cylinder pick up will be controlled by the technician performing test on a scheduled pick up day. If there are no testing services scheduled, the cylinder pick up fee is $40.00 on week days and $50.00 on weekends and holidays with no technician or vehicle charge.

E. The Contractor shall bear the responsibility of scheduling the testing services. The Contractor and the testing laboratory shall assume full responsibility to coordinate the testing services.



01 45 23.1 - 6

Cancellations or failed test shall be reimbursable to the Owner by the responsible party for the cancellations or failure of a test or service.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 5. Deficiency log.

B. Maintain log at site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

A. Testing services shall include, but not be limited to those specified below or which are necessary or required during course of construction to ascertain specification compliance and which may be deemed necessary by Architect, Engineer, or Owner to ensure the quality of the Work.

B. The Owner reserves the right to add to or delete any or all inspection and testing specified, excluding testing required by the applicable building codes.

C. If conflicts arise between Drawings and Specifications, notify Architect immediately. The most stringent requirements shall dictate procedure.

3.3 TESTING OF EARTHWORK

A. Testing Services (As specified or required): 1. References (As applicable for tests required):

a. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1) D698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3) 2) D2922, Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In Place

By Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 3) D4318, Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity

Index of Soils b. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

1) T89, Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils 2) T90, Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils 3) T99, Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5 lb) Rammer

and a 305-mm (12-in) Drop 4) T238, Density of Soil and Soil Aggregates In Place By Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth) 2. Perform sieve analysis to develop grain size distribution curves for materials to be used

for subgrade, fill under slab on grade, and backfills. 3. Establish the moisture density relation of soils to be used as fill using the method best

suited to the type of fill material.



01 45 23.1 - 7

4. Determine moisture content of all fill materials before placement and advise Contractor when it is or is not suitable to achieve required compaction.

5. Determine Liquid Limit in accordance with ASTM D4318 or AASHTO T89, Plastic Limit in accordance with ASTM D4318, and Plasticity Index in accordance with ASTM D4318 of all fill material,

6. Perform one in place density test for each 4,000 square feet (445 square yards) of existing subgrade material.

7. Perform Moisture-Density curve in accordance with ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99 for one type of fill material. If the original choice of material does not meet the specifications, the Contractor shall pay for additional testing.

8. Perform in place density tests of each lift of compacted fill at locations adequate to evaluate the degree of compaction of all fill areas. Conduct one test for each 4,000 square feet (445 square yards) of each lift of compacted fill.

9. Perform testing at a frequency of one in-place density and moisture test for each 75 lineal feet or less of utility trench, with a minimum of three tests per lift

B. Reports: Submit reports with the following information: 1. Type and condition of soil at footing bottoms. 2. Level of water table in the excavated areas. 3. Grain size distribution of fill materials (average of three tests). 4. Moisture density test results. 5. In place density test results with moisture content and relative density of each layer of

compacted fill. Include with in place density test results, a plan showing location of each test.

6. Notify Architect by telephone within one hour of the discovery of the following conditions and follow up telephone notification with written report. a. Materials used, or degree of soil compaction not meeting specified requirements. b. Frost and freeze protection requirements for excavation bottoms not being

complied with. c. Water in excavations which is not being removed prior to Work being performed in

excavation.

3.4 INSPECTION OF PIPED SITE UTILITIES

A. Laboratory representative shall observe and report on the following: 1. Proper alignment and grade of trenches. 2. Pipe bedding and supports. 3. Pipe, joints, jointing material, and thrust blocks prior to installation of pipe. 4. Installation of pipe and joints. 5. Testing of piped utilities performed by Contractor.

3.5 PAVING

A. Testing Services: Perform field tests for moisture density properties: 1. Provide field testing of the subgrade as specified. 2. Paving Subbase: Provide one field test for every 7,500 square feet of area of crushed

limestone or caliche subbase. 3. Lime Treated Subgrade: Provide one field test for every 7,500 square feet of area of lime

treated subgrade for content of lime and subgrade compaction. 4. Cement Soil Stabilization: Provide one field test for every 7,500 square feet of area of

cement stabilized subgrade for content of cement and subgrade compaction.

3.6 PIER DRILLING OPERATION

A. A representative of a qualified geotechnical laboratory shall provide services specified.



01 45 23.1 - 8

B. Laboratory representative shall make continuous inspections to determine that proper bearing stratum is obtained and utilized for bearing and that shafts are properly clean and dry before placing concrete.

C. Laboratory shall furnish complete pier log showing the diameter, top and bottom elevations of each pier, casing required or not required, actual penetration into bearing stratum, elevation of top of bearing stratum, volume of concrete used, and deviations from specified tolerances.

D. Laboratory representative shall make continuous inspections of drilled pier construction to check the following: 1. Verify soundness of bearing stratum and desired penetration. 2. Verify pier dimensions and reinforcing used. 3. Monitor condition of hole and removal of water and loose material from bottom. 4. Monitor placement of concrete and use of tremie or pumps. 5. Monitor the extraction of casing, if used.

E. Request probe holes when deemed necessary to confirm safe bearing capacity.

3.7 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

A. Inspect concrete reinforcing steel prior to placing concrete for compliance with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings. Noncompliance with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Contractor for correction and, if left uncorrected, reported to the Architect.

B. Laboratory representative shall observe and report on the following: 1. Number and size of bars. 2. Bending and lengths of bars. 3. Splicing. 4. Clearance to forms, including chair heights. 5. Clearance to sides and bottom of trench if soil formed. 6. Clearance between bars or spacing. 7. Rust, form oil, and other contamination. 8. Grade of steel. 9. Securing, tying, and chairing of bars. 10. Excessive congestion of reinforcing steel. 11. Installation of anchor bolts and placement of concrete around such bolts. 12. Fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies, including visual inspection of

all welds. 13. Visually inspect studs and deformed bar anchors on embedded assemblies for

compliance with Contract Documents. Check number, spacing and weld quality. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that a sound weld or a full 360 degree fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud or bar, such stud or bar shall be struck with a hammer and bent 15 degrees off perpendicular and then bent back into position. Anchors failing this test shall be replaced.

C. Provide a qualified, experienced inspector to inspect reinforcing steel. Inspector shall have a minimum of three years’ experience inspecting reinforcing steel in projects of similar size.

3.8 CONCRETE INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Receive and evaluate proposed concrete mix designs submitted by Contractor. If mix designs comply with Drawings and Specifications, the laboratory shall submit a letter to the Architect certifying compliance. Mix designs not complying with Drawings and Specifications shall be



01 45 23.1 - 9

returned by the laboratory as being unacceptable. Check the proposed mixes for proportions, water cement ratio and slump in accordance with ACI 613 and 318.

B. Comply with ACI 311 Guide For Concrete Inspection and ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection (SP-2).

C. Sample and test concrete placed at the site in accordance with ASTM C172. Each sample shall be obtained from a different batch of concrete on a random basis.

D. Test concrete: 1. Mold and cure five specimens from each sample.

a. For each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof of structural building concrete; and b. For each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof of nonstructural concrete and site

Work paving and sidewalks. c. Laboratory cure two cylinders in accordance with ASTM C192. d. Field cure remaining cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31.

2. Two specimens shall be tested at seven days for information, two shall be tested at 28

days for acceptance.

E. Deviations from the requirements of ASTM Specifications shall be recorded in the test report. Test concrete specimens in accordance with ASTM C39.

F. Specimens for pumped concrete shall be taken at the discharge end of pumping equipment.

G. Supervise curing and protection provided for test specimens in field, and transportation from the field to laboratory. Test cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then carefully transported to laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C31.

H. Make one strength test (four cylinders) of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day.

I. Make one slump test for each set of cylinders following procedural requirements of ASTM C143 and ASTM C172. Make additional slump tests whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary. Slump tests corresponding to samples from which strength tests are made shall be reported with strength test results. Other slump tests need not be reported.

J. Determine total air content of air entrained normal weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C231.

K. Determine air content and unit weight of lightweight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C173 and ASTM C567.

L. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test.

M. Inspect each batch of concrete, monitor addition of mixing water to assure uniform consistency from truck to truck. Check mixing form mixers before mix begins to set and within time limits set forth in ASTM C94. 1. Monitor addition of water and high range water reducer to concrete at job site and length

of time concrete is allowed to remain in truck during placement.

N. Testing agency shall furnish and maintain a competent inspector at the mixing plant at the start of each day’s mixing. Inspector shall examine concrete materials for compliance with Specifications and approved mix design, weighing and measuring devices, proportioning and mixing of materials, water and cement content of each batch, general operation of the plant, and transportation of concrete to jobsite. Inspector shall verify that amount of free surface moisture



01 45 23.1 - 10

contained in fine and course aggregate has been properly accounted for in the concrete mixing to achieve required consistency and water cement ratio.

O. Testing laboratory shall monitor addition of water to concrete at the jobsite and the length of time concrete is allowed to remain in the truck before placement. Inspector shall compare mixture with criteria on the approved mix design and report any significant deviation to the Architect, Contractor and concrete supplier. Do not permit addition of water which will exceed maximum water/cement ratio for the mix as given on the approved mix design.

P. Observe placing of concrete, except nonstructural slabs on grade and site Work. Observe and report on placing method, consolidation, cold joints, length of drop, and displacement of reinforcement. Report deficiencies to Contractor immediately for corrective action. Inspections may be reduced to a periodic basis when all procedures have been deemed satisfactory by the laboratory.

Q. Test reports shall include but no be limited to the following information: date of concrete placement, concrete mix identification number or proportion of ingredients, truck ticket number, time test was made, time of batching, location of each placement, slump, unit weight, water content (microwave test) and air content of concrete sampled and date and results of strength test.

R. Report promptly to Architect all details of reasons for rejection of any and all quantities of concrete. Give all information concerning locations of the concrete pours, quantities, date of pours, and other pertinent facts concerning concrete represented by the specimens.

S. Testing laboratory shall certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered (or placed), amount of water added and time at which cement and aggregate were dispensed into the truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from the truck.

T. Evaluation and Acceptance: 1. If measured slump, or air content of air entrained concrete, falls outside specified limits, a

check test shall be made immediately on another portion of the same sample. In the event of a second failure, concrete shall be considered to have failed to meet the requirements of the specifications, and shall not be used in the structure.

2. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of sets of three consecutive strength tests results are equal to, or exceed, specified strength and no individual test result (average of two cylinders) is below specified strength by more than 500 psi.

3. Completed concrete Work will be accepted when requirements of ACI 301 Chapter 18 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings have been met.

U. Concrete Test Reports: Reports shall be made and distributed immediately after respective tests or inspections are made. 1. Where reports indicate deviations from Contract Documents, they shall also include a

determination of the probable cause of deviation and where applicable, a recommendation for corrective action.

V. Furnish a statistical analysis for each class of concrete placed on the project in accordance with ACI 214 and ACI 318. Information shall be updated and distributed once a month as directed by the Architect. Information shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Strength tests at 7 days of one cylinder. 2. Strength tests at 28 days of two cylinder averages. 3. 28 day moving average strength tests of last three test groups. 4. Standard deviation and coefficient of variation based on 28 day strength tests. 5. Average strength and number of 28 days tests for most recent month.



01 45 23.1 - 11

W. Test Footings (Shafts) (Piers) (Caissons): Same diameter and type specified for footings, placed in same manner. Accepted test footings may be used in the Work.

X. Noncompliant Test Reports: Fax test reports indicating noncompliance immediately to each party on the test report distribution list. Copies shall be on different colored paper.

Y. Inspect application of curing compound and monitor curing conditions to assure compliance with specification requirements. Report curing deficiencies to the Contractor immediately and submit a written report to the Architect.

3.9 TESTING OF NONSHRINK GROUT

A. Make one strength test for all plates grouted and for all grout used in joints between members.

B. Each test shall consist of four cubes, two tested at 7 days and two at 28 days, made and tested in accordance with ASTM C109, with the exception that grout shall be restrained from expansion by a top plate.


A. Inspect structural steel during and after erection for compliance with Contract Documents and shop drawings. Review and report on fabricator’s quality control procedures and capabilities.

B. Field Inspection: 1. Proper erection of pieces. 2. Proper touch up painting of shop primed structural steel exposed to view or in crawl

space. 3. Proper installation of bolts. 4. Plumbness of structure and proper bracing. 5. Proper field painting. 6. Initial inspection of welding process and periodically thereafter as necessary. 7. Visual examination of completed welds. 8. Ultrasonic testing of penetration field welds. 9. Installation of field welded shear studs. 10. Inspect shop fabricated members, upon arrival at the site, for defects incurred during

transit and handling. 11. Measure and record camber of beams upon arrival and before erection for compliance

with specified camber. Measure lying flat with web horizontal. Return members outside specified camber tolerance to shop for correction.

C. Qualifications of Welders: Fabricator and erector shall provide the testing laboratory with names of welders employed on Work, along with certification that each welder has passed qualification tests within the past 12 months, using procedures covered in AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel. Verify welder qualifications.

D. Inspection of field welding shall include: 1. Visually inspect fillet welds for size, soundness, and proper return around ends. Inspect

seams, folds, and delaminations. 2. Visually inspect welds for proper repair of painting. 3. Ultrasonically test penetration welds in accordance with ASTM E164. 4. Inspect surfaces to be welded. Note surface preparations, fit up, and cleanliness of

surface. Verify electrodes for size, type, and condition. 5. Welding inspector shall be present during alignment and fit up of members being welded,

and shall verify for correct surface preparation of root openings, sound weld metal, and proper penetration in the root pass. Where weld has not penetrated completely,



01 45 23.1 - 12

inspector shall order the joint to be chipped down to sound metal, or gouged out, and rewelded. Thoroughly inspect root passes for cracks. Gouge out cracks and rewelded to 2 inches beyond each end of crack.

6. Inspector shall verify that welds have been marked with welder’s symbol and shall mark welds requiring repairs and reinspection. Inspector shall maintain a written record of welds. Work completed and inspected shall receive an identification mark by the inspector. Identify unacceptable material and Work identified by word reject or repair marked directly on the material.

7. Testing agency shall advise the Owner and Architect of any shop and/or field conditions which may require further tests and examination by means other than those specified. Additional tests and examinations shall be performed as authorized by the Owner and Architect.

8. Owner reserves the right to use ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to verify adequacy of welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall be as specified in AWS D1.1.

9. Weld quality to comply with the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Manual of Steel Construction.

10. Determine percentage of weld tested by the number of welds that fail the initial testing. 11. Reweld and retest welds that fail until the welds pass. Test two additional welds for every

weld failure.

E. Inspect bolted construction in accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings: 1. Visually inspect bolts ensuring that plies have been brought into snug contact. 2. Inspect high strength bolt in accordance with Section 9 of the Specifications for Structural

Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

F. Inspect stud welding in accordance with Section 7.8, of AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code: 1. Weld at least two shear studs at the start of each production period to determine correct

generator, control unit, and stud welder setting. The studs shall be capable of being bent 45 degrees from vertical without weld failure.

2. When the temperature is below 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), test one stud in each 100 after cooling. Do not weld studs at temperatures below 0 degrees F or when surface is wet with rain or snow. If stud fails in the weld, two new studs shall pass the test before resumption of welding.

3. Visually inspect studs for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Verify number, spacing, and weld quality. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that a sound weld or a full 360 degree fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud, that stud shall be struck with a hammer and bent 15 degrees off perpendicular in the direction away from the missing weld. Studs failing test shall be replaced.

3.11 REINFORCING STEEL MECHANICAL SPLICES

A. Inspection and Observation Services: 1. Visually inspect and report on completed condition of each mechanical splice of

reinforcing steel. 2. Visually inspect each mechanical splice to ensure compliance with the ICC-ES Reports

and the manufacturer's published criteria for acceptable completed splices. 3. Place special emphasis on the inspection of the end preparation of each bar to be spliced

required by the ICC-ES Report.

B. Reports: Submit reports to Architect: 1. Submit copies of manufacturer's published criteria for acceptable completed splices prior

to observing mechanical splices. 2. Reports on each mechanical splice shall indicate location of the splice, size of bars

spliced, and acceptability or rejection of splice. Indicate reasons for rejection on each report.



01 45 23.1 - 13

3.12 OPEN WEB JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS

A. Inspect joists at jobsite for compliance with specified fabrication requirements. Verify welded connections between web and chord, splices, and straightness of members.

B. Inspect installation of joists at jobsite. Check connections to supporting members, chord extensions, number of rows of bridging, and bridging connections for compliance with Contract Documents and referenced standards.

C. Verify welder qualification certificates for both shop and field welding operators.

3.13 METAL FLOOR DECK

A. Field inspection shall consist of: 1. Verifying types, gauges and finishes for compliance with Contract Documents and shop

drawings. 2. Examine composite floor deck exposed to crawl space for damage to galvanizing due to

welding or construction activities. Repair galvanized composite floor deck in accordance with the specifications.

3. Examine the erection of metal deck, fastenings, reinforcing of holes, deck reinforcing, miscellaneous deck supports, hanger tabs, shear studs, deck closures, painting or other coating.

4. Certification of welders. 5. Inspect and test field welded shear studs used to fasten metal floor decking to supporting

steel as specified for structural steel.

3.14 METAL ROOF DECK

A. Field inspection shall consist of: 1. Verify types, gauges and finishes for compliance with Contract Documents and shop

drawings. 2. Examine the erection of the metal deck, including fastenings at supports and side laps,

reinforcing of holes, and miscellaneous deck supports. 3. Certification of welders. 4. Visual inspection of at least 25 percent of welds.

3.15 SPRAYED FIREPROOFING

A. Verify applied thickness, density, and bond strength of sprayed fireproofing meets fire rating requirements of approved design.

B. Verify installation complies with fire rating requirements of approved design.

C. Inspect and test for thickness: 1. Test 25 percent of structural frame columns and beams in each building level. 2. Test 10 percent of beams other than structural frame in each building level. 3. Test one slab per 5,000 square feet of building area.

D. Inspect and test in accordance procedures of ASTM E605 and ASTM E736.

3.16 EXPANSION BOLT INSTALLATION

A. Inspect drilling of each hole and installation of each expansion bolt for compliance with Contract Documents and shop drawings.



01 45 23.1 - 14

B. Verify installation torque for each expansion bolt for compliance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.17 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE FILL

A. Inspection and Observation Services (As required): 1. Inspection of roof deck prior to start of Work. 2. Inspection during installation of insulation and lightweight insulating concrete fill Work to

ascertain compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Observation of base ply fastener pull tests performed by Contractor to ascertain minimum

withdrawal resistance of 40 pounds per fastener.

B. Testing Services (As required): 1. References (As applicable for tests required):

a. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1) C177, Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties By Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus

2) C495, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete

3) C578, Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

2. Test EPS insulation board for thermal insulation value in accordance with ASTM C177. 3. Test lightweight insulating concrete fill in accordance with ASTM C495 for:

a. Mix design compressive strength. b. Mix design wet and dry density range. c. Number of Tests:

1) One per 5,000 square feet. 2) Not less than one for each day’s Work.

4. Test EPS insulation board for density in accordance with ASTM C578.

3.18 TESTING OF ROOFING

A. Inspection and Observation Services (As required): 1. Inspection of roof deck prior to start of Work. 2. Inspect on site condition of stored roofing materials. 3. Inspection during roofing, roof insulation, and sheet metal Work to ascertain compliance

with Contract Documents. 4. Observation of roof test cuts performed by Contractor to ascertain that they are properly

made. 5. Observation of patching of roof test cuts to ascertain that they are properly made.

B. Testing Services (As required): 1. Perform dissection and analysis on cuts provided by Contractor to confirm number of

plies, bonding of plies, weight of bitumen and softening temperature to ascertain compliance with specifications.

3.19 MASONRY

A. Inspection and Observation Services: 1. Inspection of placement of reinforcement including condition, grade, size, location,

spacing, and lap splices. 2. Review mortar design mixes. 3. Inspection of laying, mortaring, and grouting of concrete masonry units and elements.



01 45 23.1 - 15

B. Testing Services: 1. References (As applicable for tests required):

a. ASTM International (ASTM) 1) C140, Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry

Units 2) C780, Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry 3) C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout 4) E447-97, Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Laboratory

Constructed Masonry Prisms.

2. Testing of Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): a. Preconstruction: Perform the following tests in accordance with ASTM C140.

1) Compressive Strength 2) Absorption 3) Weight 4) Moisture Content 5) Dimensions.

3. Mortar Tests:

a. Preconstruction: Perform the following tests in accordance with ASTM C780 on each type of mortar mix used on the Project.

b. 28 Day Compressive Strength c. Water Retention d. Construction: Perform 28 day compressive strength test in accordance with ASTM

C780 on each type of mortar mix used on the Project at the rate of one test per 2,000 square feet of masonry.

4. Refer to and include Work for reinforcing steel specified. 5. Grout Tests:

a. Preconstruction: Perform the following tests in accordance with ASTM C1019 on each type of grout mix used on the Project. 1) 28 Day Compressive Strength 2) Construction: Perform 28 day compressive strength test in accordance with

ASTM C1019 on each type of grout mix used on the Project at the rate of one (1) test per 2,000 square feet of masonry.

3) Prism Test: Perform preconstruction 28 day compressive strength test on concrete masonry walls in accordance with ASTM E447-97, Method B.

3.20 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 30.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality control services.

END OF SECTION 01 45 23.1


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities, including but not limited to: 1. Water service and distribution. 2. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water facilities. 3. Heating and cooling facilities. 4. Ventilation. 5. Electric power service. 6. Lighting. 7. Telephone service. 8. Waste disposal facilities. 9. Field office. 10. Storage and fabrication sheds. 11. Lifts and hoists. 12. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. 13. Environmental protection. 14. Pest control. 15. Enclosure fence. 16. Security enclosure and lockup. 17. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 18. Temporary partitions. 19. Fire protection. 20. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for water used and sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Moisture Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.



1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water damaged work.

3. Indicate sequencing of Work that requires water, such as sprayed fire resistive materials, plastering, and tile grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

C. Dust and HVAC Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust and HVAC control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 2. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 3. Waste handling procedures. 4. Other dust control measures.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S.

Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG), ICC/ANSI A117.1, and Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 2012.

B. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. Chain Link Fencing: Minimum 2 inch (50 mm), 0.148 inch (3.8 mm) thick, galvanized steel, chain link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8 inch (60 mm) OD line posts and 2-7/8 inch (73 mm) OD corner and pull posts.

C. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mils (0.25 mm) minimum thickness, with flame spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.

D. Dust Control Adhesive Surface Walk off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 inches by 60 inches (914 mm by 1624 mm).



E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

F. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Section 06 10 53.

G. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; Type X or Type C panels with tapered edges. Comply with Section 09 29 00.

H. Paint: Comply with requirements in Section 09 90 00.

I. Tarpaulins: Fire resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.

J. Water: Potable.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Contractor’s Field Offices: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. Provide elevated, stabilized concrete walkway from parking area to field offices.

B. Architect’s Field Offices: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. Provide elevated, stabilized concrete walkway from parking area to field offices.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter equipped portable units with four stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

C. Drinking Water: Containerized, tap dispenser, bottled water drinking water units, including paper cup supply. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 degrees F to 55 degrees F (7.2 degrees C to 12.7 degrees C).

D. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110V to 120V plugs into higher voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light.

E. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable.

F. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid propane gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.



2. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction. Clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 and install new filter with MERV 11 or greater.

G. Air Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA filter equipped portable units with four stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate facilities where they will serve project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 Summary of

Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. Install temporary service. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar

disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material.

2. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing Work, isolate the HVAC system in area where Work is to be

performed according to coordination drawings.



a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in Work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within Work area using HEPA equipped air filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust producing equipment. Isolate limited Work within occupied areas using portable dust containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA filter equipped vacuum equipment.

G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to

level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. Install electric power service underground unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools

and equipment. a. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power

cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length voltage ratio.

b. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V. c. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible

damage. Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or traffic areas.

d. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices. e. Provide 4 gang outlets, spaced so 100 foot (30 m) extension cord can reach each

area for power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet.

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common use facilities for use by construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. Provide dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.



3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer and printer/scanner in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. 1. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall. 2. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware,

phishing, and spam protection in a combined application. 3. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 1 terabyte, with automated backup software

providing daily backups.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.

Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and

paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas

according to Section 31 20 00. 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,

regrading, proof rolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent pavement until immediately before

Substantial Completion.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining

properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.



G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00.

H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and

equipment" and not temporary facilities.

I. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted.

J. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.

K. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities to the satisfaction of Owner and Architect.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction

activity do not enter or cross tree or plant protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during

construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and

sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed

during removal.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

F. Pest Control: Engage pest control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin. provide site enclosure fence to prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.



1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each Work day.

I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate

temporary enclosures.

L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor to ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate occupied areas occupied from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,

and fire retardant treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6 mil (0.14 mm) polyethylene sheet on

each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6 mil (0.14 mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire retardant treated plywood. Do not apply tape to finish floor surfaces. a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with

not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water dampened foot mats in vestibule.

3. Where fire resistance rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security

locks where openings are required. 6. Protect air handling equipment. 7. Provide walk off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire prevention and protection program for personnel at

Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished Work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.



B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high

organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform Work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Condition Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits and moisture control. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum

based products, which become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective and are to be removed and replaced.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion unless otherwise required and approved by Owner and Architect.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.



1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00".



General Source Controls 01 57 13 - 1

SECTION 01 57 13 - GENERAL SOURCE CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section describes erosion and sedimentation control and other control related practices, which shall be utilized during construction activities.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. No clearing and grubbing or rough cutting shall be permitted until erosion and sedimentation control systems are in place.

B. Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside

of dedicated construction area. Damages caused by construction traffic or others to erosion and sedimentation control systems shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, storing, hauling, and disposing of spoils, silt, and

waste materials as specified on the Drawings and in this or other Technical Specifications and in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations.

D. Contractor shall conduct all construction operation under this Contract in conformance with the

erosion control practices described on the Drawings, the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and this Section.

E. The Contractor shall install, maintain, and inspect erosion and sediment control measures and

practices as specified on the Drawings and in this and other Technical Specifications. F. Contractor shall employ protective measures to avoid damage to existing trees to be retained on

the project site.

3.2 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. When topsoil is called for as a component of another Section, the Contractor shall conduct erosion control practices described in this Section during topsoil placement operation.

B. When placing topsoil, maintain erosion and sedimentation control systems.

C. Maintain grades, which have been previously established on areas to receive topsoil. D. After the areas to receive topsoil have been brought to grade, and immediately prior to dumping

and spreading the topsoil, the subgrade shall be loosened by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least two (2) inches to permit bonding of the topsoil to the subsoil.



E. No sod or seed shall be placed on soil, which has been treated with soil sterilants until sufficient time has elapsed to permit dissipation of toxic materials.

3.3 DUST CONTROL

A. Dust control methods shall be implemented to control dust creation and movement on construction sites and roads and to prevent airborne sediment from reaching receiving stream or storm water conveyance system, to reduce on and offsite damage, to prevent health hazards, and to improve traffic safety.

B. Contractor shall control dust blowing by utilizing one or more of the following methods:

1. Mulches bound with chemical binders. 2. Temporary vegetative cover. 3. Spray-on adhesives on mineral soils when not used by traffic. 4. Tillage to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface. 5. Irrigation by water sprinkling. 6. Barriers using solid board fences, snow fences, burlap fences, crate walls, bales of hay, or

similar materials.

C. Dust control methods shall be implemented immediately whenever dust can be observed blowing on the project site.

3.4 KEEPING STREETS CLEAN

A. Contractor shall keep the streets clean of construction debris, dirt, and mud generated by construction vehicles and equipment. If necessary, to keep the streets clean, Contractor shall provide stabilized construction exits at construction, staging, storage, and disposal areas. A vehicle/equipment wash area (stabilized with coarse aggregate) may be installed adjacent to the location of stabilized construction exit, as needed. Wash water shall be released into a drainage swale or inlet protected by erosion and sediment control measures.

B. In lieu of or in addition to stabilized construction exits, Contractor shall shovel and/or sweep the

pavement to the extent necessary to keep the street clean. Water hosing or sweeping of debris and mud off the street into adjacent areas is not allowed.

3.5 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

A. Maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment shall be confined to areas specifically designated for that purpose. Such designated areas shall be located and designed so that oils, gasoline, grease, solvents, and other potential pollutants cannot be washed into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. These areas shall be provided with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid as well as solid waste. Maintenance areas shall be inspected and cleaned daily.

B. On the construction site where designated equipment maintenance areas are not feasible, care

shall be taken during each individual repair or maintenance operation to prevent potential pollutants from becoming available to be washed into streams or conveyance systems. Temporary waste disposal receptacles shall be provided.

3.6 WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL

A. Contractor shall formulate and implement a plan for the collection and disposal of waste materials on the construction site. The plan must designate locations for trash and waste receptacles and establish a collection schedule. Methods for ultimate disposal of waste shall be specified and carried out in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal health and safety regulations. Special provisions shall be made for the collection and disposal of liquid wastes and toxic or



hazardous materials. B. Receptacles and other waste collection areas shall be kept neat and orderly to the extent possible.

Waste shall not be allowed to overflow its container or accumulate for excessively long periods of time. Trash collection points shall be located where they will least likely be affected by concentrated storm water runoff.

3.7 WASHING AREAS

A. Vehicles such as concrete or dump trucks and other construction equipment shall not be washed at locations where the runoff will flow into a watercourse or storm water conveyance system. Special areas shall be designated for washing vehicles. These areas should be located where the wash water will spread out and evaporate or infiltrate directly into the ground, or where the runoff can be collected in a temporary holding or seepage basin. Wash areas shall have gravel or rock bases to minimize mud generation. These areas shall be completely cleaned up, have waste remains hauled off, and be stabilized and seeded after the area is no longer required.

3.8 STORAGE OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, CHEMICALS, ETC.

A. Sites where chemicals, cements, solvents, paints, or other potential water pollutants are to be stored, shall be isolated in areas where they will not cause runoff pollution.

B. Toxic chemicals and materials, such as pesticides, paints, and acids shall be stored in accordance

with manufacturers' guidelines. Groundwater resources shall be protected from leaching by placing a plastic mat, packed clay or other impervious materials on any areas where toxic liquids are to be opened and stored.

3.9 DEMOLITION AREAS

A. Demolition work, which generates large amounts of dust, shall be provided with dust control techniques to limit the transport of the airborne pollutants. However, water or slurry used to control dust shall not be allowed to run directly into watercourses or storm water conveyance systems. Methods of ultimate disposal of these materials shall be carried out in accordance with applicable local, state and federal health and safety regulations.

3.10 SANITARY FACILITIES

A. The construction site must be provided with adequate sanitary facilities for workers in accordance with Division 1 and applicable health regulations.

3.11 PESTICIDES

A. The use of pesticides shall be approved by the Owner prior to application. A one-week notice will be required of the Contractor.

B. Pesticides used during construction shall be stored and used in accordance with manufacturers'

guidelines and with local, state and federal regulations. Overuse of pesticides, which could generate contaminated runoff, shall be avoided and great care shall be taken to prevent accidental spillage. Pesticide containers shall never be washed in or near flowing streams or storm water conveyance systems.

3.12 PROTECTION OF TREES IN CONSTRUCTION AREAS

A. Heavy equipment, vehicular traffic, and stockpiles of construction materials, including topsoil, are not permitted within the dripline of any tree to be retained. Contractor shall avoid all contact with trees to be retained unless otherwise directed by the Owner or required by the work under this



Contract. B. Specimen trees shown on the Drawings shall be boxed or fenced. When called for in the Drawings,

tunnel under the root system for the installation of utility lines. C. Tree trunks, exposed roots, and limbs of the trees designated to be retained, which are damaged

during construction operations, will be cared for as prescribed by a forester or licensed tree expert at the expense of the Contractor.

3.13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate measurement or payment will be made for materials and labor performed under this section. Include all costs in the lump sum price, or in the unit price for Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.



FILTER FABRIC FENCE 01 57 13.13 - 1

SECTION 01 57 13.13 - FILTER FABRIC FENCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section describes the installation of erosion and sedimentation control filter fabric fences (FFF) utilized during construction. The filter fabric fences are to be used to contain pollutants from overland flow. This practice shall not be used in channelized flow areas.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The publications listed below forms a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). C. ASTM D-3786 - Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted Goods and

Nonwoven Fabrics - Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method. D. ASTM D-4632 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextile (Grab

Method). 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's catalogue sheets and other pertinent information on geotextile fabric. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FILTER FABRIC

A. Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. Geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction (ASTM D-4632), Mullen burst strength exceeding 200 psi (ASTM D-3786), and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140, with the appropriate opening size to be selected based on the grain size characteristics of the disturbed soil. Filter fabric material shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of six (6) months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. Representative Manufacturers: TenCrate Mirafi or preapproved equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Provide erosion and sedimentation control systems at the locations shown on the Drawings. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Drawings and set out in this Section.

B. No clearing and grubbing or rough cutting shall be permitted until erosion and sedimentation control

systems are in place.



C. Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of all erosion and sedimentation control systems as specified for each type of system. Unless otherwise directed, maintain the erosion and sedimentation control systems until the project area stabilization is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sedimentation control systems promptly when directed by the Owner. Discard removed materials as required by these Specifications.

D. Remove and dispose sediment deposits at the project designated spoil site. Sediment shall not be

allowed to flush into stream or drainage way. If sediment has been contaminated, it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local regulations.

E. Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside

of construction limits. Damages caused by construction traffic to erosion and sedimentation control systems shall be repaired immediately.

F. Contractor shall employ protective measures described in Section 01 57 19 - General Source

Controls to avoid damage to existing trees to be retained on the project site. Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in that Section.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

A. Provide filter fabric fence systems at locations shown on the Drawings in accordance with the Detail at the end of this Section or on the Drawings, entitled "Filter Fabric Fence". Filter fabric fence systems shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated.

B. Attach the filter fabric to 1-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and

embedded in the ground a minimum of 1 foot. If factory preassembled fence with support netting is used, spacing of the post may be increased to 8 feet maximum. The wooden stakes shall be installed at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff.

C. Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher so that the downward

face of the trench is flat and perpendicular to the direction of flow or for V-trench configuration as shown on the Detail. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench.

D. Filter fabric shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above

the natural ground.

E. The filter fabric should be provided in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the Silt Fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, the fabric should be spliced together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and sealed securely.

F. Inspect sediment filter fabric fence systems after each rainfall, daily during periods of prolonged

rainfall, and at a minimum once a week. Repair or replace damaged section immediately to restore the requirements of this Section. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches one-third of the height of the fence in depth or 6 inches, whichever is less.



END SECTION 01 57 13.13



SECTION 01 57 13.13 - FILTER FABRIC FENCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section describes the installation of erosion and sedimentation control filter fabric fences (FFF) utilized during construction. The filter fabric fences are to be used to contain pollutants from overland flow. This practice shall not be used in channelized flow areas.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions,

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The publications listed below forms a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.




A. Manufacturer's catalogue sheets and other pertinent information on geotextile fabric. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FILTER FABRIC

A. Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. Geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction (ASTM D-4632), Mullen burst strength exceeding 200 psi (ASTM D-3786), and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140, with the appropriate opening size to be selected based on the grain size characteristics of the disturbed soil. Filter fabric material shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of six (6) months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. Representative Manufacturers: TenCrate Mirafi or preapproved equivalent.


A. Provide erosion and sedimentation control systems at the locations shown on the Drawings. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Drawings and set out in this Section.

B. No clearing and grubbing or rough cutting shall be permitted until erosion and sedimentation control

systems are in place.



C. Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of all erosion and sedimentation control systems as specified for each type of system. Unless otherwise directed, maintain the erosion and sedimentation control systems until the project area stabilization is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sedimentation control systems promptly when directed by the Owner. Discard removed materials as required by these Specifications.

D. Remove and dispose sediment deposits at the project designated spoil site. Sediment shall not be

allowed to flush into stream or drainage way. If sediment has been contaminated, it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local regulations.

E. Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside

of construction limits. Damages caused by construction traffic to erosion and sedimentation control systems shall be repaired immediately.

F. Contractor shall employ protective measures described in Section 01 57 19 - General Source

Controls to avoid damage to existing trees to be retained on the project site. Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in that Section.


A. Provide filter fabric fence systems at locations shown on the Drawings in accordance with the Detail at the end of this Section or on the Drawings, entitled "Filter Fabric Fence". Filter fabric fence systems shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated.

B. Attach the filter fabric to 1-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and

embedded in the ground a minimum of 1 foot. If factory preassembled fence with support netting is used, spacing of the post may be increased to 8 feet maximum. The wooden stakes shall be installed at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff.

C. Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher so that the downward

face of the trench is flat and perpendicular to the direction of flow or for V-trench configuration as shown on the Detail. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench.

D. Filter fabric shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above

the natural ground.

E. The filter fabric should be provided in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the Silt Fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, the fabric should be spliced together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and sealed securely.

F. Inspect sediment filter fabric fence systems after each rainfall, daily during periods of prolonged

rainfall, and at a minimum once a week. Repair or replace damaged section immediately to restore the requirements of this Section. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches one-third of the height of the fence in depth or 6 inches, whichever is less.



END SECTION 01 57 13.13


REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 01 57 13.14 - 1

SECTION 01 57 13.14 - REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section describes the installation of erosion and sedimentation control of reinforced filter fabric barriers (RFB) which must be utilized during construction. Reinforced filter fabric barrier is to be utilized to retain pollutants from passing downstream in channelized flow areas.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. The publications listed below forms a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.




A. Manufacturer's catalogue sheets and other pertinent information on geotextile fabrics. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FILTER FABRIC

A. Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. Geotextile fabric shall have a minimum grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction (ASTM D-4632), Mullen burst strength exceeding 200 psi (ASTM D-3786), and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140, with the appropriate opening size to be selected based on the grain size characteristics of upstream disturbed soils. Filter fabric material shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of six (6) months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. Representative Manufacturers: Mirafi, Inc. or preapproved equivalent.

B. Provide woven galvanized steel wire fence with minimum thickness of 14 gauge and a maximum

mesh spacing of 6 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Provide erosion and sedimentation control systems at the locations shown on the Drawings. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section. No clearing and grubbing or rough cutting shall be permitted until erosion and sedimentation control systems are in place.


REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 01 57 13.14 - 2

B. Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of all erosion and sedimentation control

systems as specified for each type of system. Unless otherwise directed, maintain the erosion and sedimentation control systems until the project area stabilization is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sedimentation control systems promptly when directed by the Owner. Discard removed materials as required by these Specifications.

C. Remove and dispose sediment deposits at the project designated spoil site. Sediment shall not be

allowed to flush into stream or drainage way. If sediment has been contaminated, it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state and local regulations.

D. Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside

of construction limits. Damages caused by construction traffic to erosion and sedimentation control systems shall be repaired immediately. Contractor shall employ protective measures described in Section 01560 - General Source Controls to avoid damage to existing trees to be retained on the project site. Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in that Section.


A. Provide reinforced filter fabric barrier systems at locations specified on the Drawings in accordance with the Detail, found at the end of this Section or on the Drawings, entitled "Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier". Filter fabric barrier systems shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated.

B. Attach the woven wire support to steel fence posts (min. of 1.25 Ibs. per linear foot & Brinell

Hardness greater the 140) or 1-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 6 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 8 inches. Steel post shall be made of hot rolled steel, at least 4 feet long with Tee or Y-bar sections with the surface painted or galvanized. Provide safety caps on top of metal posts. The posts shall be installed at a slight angle toward the source of the anticipated runoff.

C. Trench in the toe of the reinforced filter fabric barrier with a spade or mechanical trencher so that

the downward face of the trench is flat and perpendicular to the direction of flow as shown on the Detail. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench.

D. Reinforced filter fabric shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36

inches above the natural ground. E. The filter fabric should be provided in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize

the use of joints. When joints are necessary, the fabric should be spliced together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and sealed securely.

F. Inspect sediment filter barrier systems after each rainfall, daily during periods of prolonged rainfall,

and at a minimum once a week. Repair or replace damaged section immediately to restore the requirements of this Section. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches one-third of the height of the barrier in depth or 6 inches, whichever is less.





STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXIT 01 57 13.15 - 1

SECTION 01 57 13.15 - STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section describes the installation of erosion and sedimentation control for stabilized

construction exits utilized during construction and prior to the final development of the site. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). C. ASTM D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextile (Grab


A. Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other pertinent information on geotextile fabric. B. Sieve analysis of aggregates conforming to requirements of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEPARATION GEOTEXTILE

A. Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. Geotextile fabric shall have a minimum grab strength of 270 psi in any principal direction (ASTM D-4632) and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140, with the appropriate opening size to be approved in the review process based on the characteristics of the disturbed material. Both the geotextile and threads shall be resistant to chemical attack, mildew and rot and shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of six months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. Representative Manufacturers: TenCrate Mirafi or preapproved equivalent.

2.2 COARSE AGGREGATES

A. Coarse aggregates shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, or combinations thereof. Aggregate shall be composed of clean, hard, durable materials free from adherent coatings, salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials, or organic and injurious matter.



B. Coarse aggregates shall conform to the following gradation requirements.

Sieve Size Percent Retained (Square Mesh) (By Weight)

2-1/2" 0 2" 0 - 20 1-1/2" 15 - 50 3/4" 60 - 80 No. 4 95 - 100


A. To keep the street clean of mud generated by construction vehicles and equipment, Contractor shall provide stabilized construction exits at the construction site, staging, parking, storage, and/or disposal areas. Such erosion and sediment control system shall be constructed in accordance with the Detail - Stabilized Construction Exit attached hereto or shown on the Drawings, and any additional requirements shown on the Drawings and set out in this Section.

B. No clearing and grubbing or rough cutting, other than as specifically directed by the Owner to allow

soil testing and surveying, shall be permitted until erosion and sedimentation control systems are in place.

C. Maintain existing erosion and sedimentation control systems located within the project site until

acceptance of the project or until directed by the Owner to remove and discard the existing system. D. Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of stabilized construction exists. Unless

otherwise directed, maintain the erosion and sedimentation control systems until the project is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sedimentation control systems promptly when directed by the Owner. Discard removed materials offsite.

E. Remove and dispose sediment deposits at the project designated spoil site. If a project spoil site

is not designated on the Drawings, dispose of sediment offsite at location not in or adjacent to stream or floodplain. Off-site disposal will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Sediment to be placed at the project site should be spread evenly throughout the site, compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into stream or drainage way. If sediment has been contaminated, it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state and local rules and regulations.

F. Equipment and vehicles of the Contractor, or on-site for his use, shall be prohibited from

maneuvering on areas outside of the construction limits. Damages caused by construction traffic to erosion and sedimentation control systems shall be repaired immediately.

G. Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control

practices described in the Section 01 57 13 - General Source Controls. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

A. Provide stabilized exits, entrances, access roads, parking areas, and other on-site vehicle transportation routes where shown on the Drawings.



B. Vehicles leaving construction areas shall have their tires cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto area roadways. When washing is needed to remove sediment, Contractor shall construct a truck washing area. Truck washing shall be done on stabilized areas, which drain into a drainage system protected by erosion and sediment control measures.

C. Details for stabilized construction exit are shown on the Detail herein or as shown on the Drawings.

Construction of other stabilized areas shall be to the same requirements. Roadway width shall be at least 30 feet and shall be sufficient for all ingress and egress to the site. Furnish and place geotextile fabric as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of coarse aggregate with underlaying soil. Exposure of geotextile fabric to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of fourteen days to minimize damage potential.

D. Roads and parking areas shall be graded to provide sufficient drainage away from stabilized areas.

Use sandbags, gravel, boards, or similar methods to prevent sediment from entering area roadways, receiving stream or storm water conveyance system.

E. The stabilized areas shall be inspected and maintained daily. Provide periodic top dressing with

additional coarse aggregates to maintain the required depth. Repair and clean out damaged measures used to trap sediment. All sediment spilled, dropped, washed, or tracked onto area roadways shall be remove immediately.

F. The length of the stabilized area shall be as shown on the Detail or as shown on the Drawings, but

not less than 50 feet in length. The thickness shall not be less than 8 inches. The width shall not be less than full width of all points of ingress or egress.

G. Stabilization for other areas shall have the same thickness, and width requirements as the

stabilized construction exit, except where specified otherwise on the Drawings. The aggregate shall be a compacted limestone base material, 8 inches in thickness, with an application of emulsified asphalt. The emulsified asphalt material shall be reapplied periodically following any regrading of the limestone surface.

H. Stabilized area may be widened or lengthened to accommodate truck-washing area as required by

the Contractor and approved by the Owner. I. Alternative methods of construction, when preapproved by the Owner, may include the following.

1. Cement Stabilized Soil - Compacted cement stabilized soil or other fill material in an application thickness of at least 8 inches.

2. Wood Mats/Mud Mats - Oak or other hardwood timbers placed edge to edge and across support wooden beams which are placed on top of existing soil in an application thickness of at least 6 inches.

3. Steel Mats - Perforated mats placed across perpendicular support members. 3.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate measurement or payment will be made for materials and labor performed under this Section. Include all costs in the lump sum price, or in the unit price for Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.



SECTION 01 57 26 - TEXAS POLLUTION DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM (TPDES) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This project is subject to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Texas Pollution Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) Construction Storm Water Discharge Regulations and Requirements. The Contractor will be required to execute a Notice of Intent (NOI) and implement the Pollution Prevention Plan included in the Contract Documents and comply with all reporting and inspection requirements set forth in the TPDES regulations.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and relevant Division 2 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation, implementation, maintenance, and inspection of storm water pollution prevention control measures including, but not limited to, erosion and sediment controls, storm water management plans, waste collection and disposal, off-site vehicle tracking and other practices described in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) Drawing, and as specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specifications.

B. Contractor shall present his plan for implementation of the SWPPP in a meeting with the

Owner/Architect/Engineer prior to start of construction. 1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate measurement or payment will be made for materials and labor performed under this section. Include all costs in the lump sum price.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS

A. The components shall consist of the control measures necessary to comply with the NPDES and The Clean Water Act. Example erosion and sediment control measure components are found on the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Drawing, and this or other Technical Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NOTICE OF INTENT / CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall execute, along with the Contract Documents, a Contractor/Subcontractor Certification, which shall identify the responsibilities for construction activity during the contract. Each Subcontractor’s responsibility with regard to the SWPPP shall be identified.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for signing the certification statement of the NOI.

C. A copy of the NOI shall be posted in a prominent place for public viewing at the project site. The

Contractor shall be responsible for execution of all documents and providing all inspections and certifications outlined in the SWPPP as necessary for compliance with federal, state and local guidelines.


D. The executed Notice of Intent shall be sent to:

BY REGULAR U.S. MAIL

Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Storm Water & General Permits Team; MC-228 P.O. Box 13087 Austin, Texas 78711-3087

3.2 RETENTION OF RECORDS

A. The Contractor shall retain a copy of the SWPPP from the date that it became effective to the date of project completion.

B. Contractor shall retain copies of all inspection and maintenance reports, as well as copies of all

modifications and adjustments to the SWPPP until the date of project completion. C. Contractor shall return to the Owner, all records stated above at the completion of the project.

Owner will retain all SWPPP records and data for a period of three (3) years from the date project completion.

3.3 REQUIREMENTS

A. The following notices are to be posted from the date that the SWPPP goes into effect until the date of final stabilization: 1. Copies of the Notice of Intent, submitted by the Owner and General Contractor, along with

the Project Description Form of the SWPPP, are to be posted at the construction site or at the Contractor's office in a prominent place for public viewing.

2. Notice to drivers of equipment/vehicles to stop, check, and clean tires for debris and mud before equipment/vehicles can enter traffic lanes are to be posted at every stabilized construction exit area.

3. Notice of waste disposal procedures are to be posted at a location onsite. 4. Notice of hazardous material handling and emergency procedures are to be posted with

the NOI on site. Copies of Material Safety Data sheets are to be kept at a location onsite that is clearly made known to all personnel.

5. A copy of the signed Certification forms included in this Section shall be kept at the construction site or at the Contractor's office.

B. Construction may not begin until 60 days after the NOI is filed.

C. Construction sites that will disturb 10 acres or more shall meet current numeric discharge limit

requirements.

D. If earth disturbance will be stopped for 14 days or more, the contractor must immediately stabilize the area using straw or hydraulic mulch, soil binders, erosion control blankets, or hydroseeding.

3.4 NOTICE OF TERMINATION

A. A Notice of Termination (NOT) of Coverage under the TPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Industrial Activity and storm water run-off from the construction activities does not cause sediment transport or erosion from the site. The A/E and inspector will make final determination of the final stabilization. Final stabilization is when all soil-disturbing activities at the site have been completed and when a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 85% of the cover for unpaved areas has been established. The Contractor will be required to maintain structural controls until this vegetative cover meets the above requirement.


3.5 ATTACHMENTS

For the current forms, visit the TCEQ’s website at: https://www.tceq.texas.gov/assistance/water/stormwater/sw-construction.html#tpdes.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1

SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. Definition: “Cutting and Patching” includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original undamaged condition, including original fire rating of fire rated construction. 1. Cutting and patching is performed for coordination of the work for access or inspection, to

obtain samples for testing, as indicated or required, to remove/replace defective work or work not conforming to the contract documents, to permit alterations to be performed, or for other similar purposes.

2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products or during the initial fabrication, erection, or installation processes is not considered to be “cutting and patching” under this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also not considered to be “cutting and patching”.

B. Refer to other Sections of these Specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and

limitations applicable to individual units of work. 1. Unless otherwise specified, requirements of this Section also apply to mechanical and

electrical work.


A. Visual requirements - Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building’s exterior or in its occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect’s opinion, result in lessening the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut and patchwork. Remove and repair or replace work judged by the Architect to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. All Sections of Work requiring cutting and patching, including electrical requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedural Proposal for Cutting and Patching - Where prior approval of cutting and patching is required, submit proposed procedures for this work well in advance of the time work will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the submittal. 1. Describe nature of the work and how it is to be performed, indicating why cutting and

patching cannot be avoided. Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of changes to existing work, including structural, operational, and visual changes as well as other significant elements.

2. List products to be used and firms including their qualifications that will perform the work. Also, provide cost proposals when applicable.

3. Give dates when work is expected to be performed. 4. List utilities that will be disturbed or otherwise be affected by work, including those that will

be relocated and those that will be disconnected or out-of service temporarily. Indicate how long utility service will be disrupted.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General - Except as otherwise indicated or as directed by Architect, use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to materials being cut and patched. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal or better performance characteristics. 1. The use of trade name and supplier’s name and address is to indicate a possible source

of the material or product. Product of the same type from other sources shall not be excluded provided they possess like physical and functional characteristics, except where specified as no substitutions allowed or where a material or product is specified as the basis of specification and no other approved manufacturers are listed.

2. Use materials, products, and devices to maintain integrity of fire rating of existing fire rated construction which comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before starting work, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding with the work. 1. Before the start of cutting work, meet at the work site with all parties involved in cutting and

patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict between the various trades. Coordinate layout of the work and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding with the work.

2. After uncovering work, examine conditions affecting installation of product or performance of work.

3. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary support to prevent failure of the work to be cut. B. Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse

weather conditions of that part of the Project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit, ducts, or wires serving the building, but

scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General - Employ only skilled workmen to perform the cutting and patching work. Except as otherwise indicated or as approved by Architect, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete the work without delay.

B. Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work.

Where possible, review proposed cutting and patching procedures with the original installer and comply with original installer’s recommendations. 1. In general, where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing

or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a Carborundum saw or core drill to insure a neat hole. Cut holes



and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Comply with requirements of other applicable sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling.

3. By-pass utility services such as pipe and conduit, before cutting, where such utility services are shown or required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned. Cut-off conduit and pipe in walls or partitions to be removed. After by-passing and cutting, cap, valve, or plug and seal tight remaining portion of conduit and pipe to prevent entrance of moisture, vermin, or other foreign matter.

C. Patching - Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified

tolerance, if any, for the work. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another finished area, patch and repair floor, wall, and ceiling surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. If necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance, remove existing floor and wall coverings or materials, and ceiling finish materials and replace with new materials. a. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire

unbroken surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and base coats.

4. Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through non-fire-rated floors and walls, and through finished surfaces.

D. Fire Rated Construction - Where cutting and patching is necessary in existing fire rated

construction, use sealant and other fire resistive materials, products, and devices as required and acceptable by the authorities having jurisdiction to repair, patch, and otherwise restore original fire rating and integrity of construction.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean area and spaces where work is performed or used as access to work. Remove completely: paint, mortar, cement, oils, putty, sealant, and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before painting or other finishes are applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original undamaged condition.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for environmental-protection measures during construction.

2. Division 02 Section “Structure Demolition” for disposition of waste resulting from demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

3. Division 02 Section “Selective Structure Demolition” for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

4. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry” for disposal requirements for masonry waste. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry” for disposal requirements for excess stone and stone waste.

5. Division 31 Section “Site Clearing” for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Salvage/Recycle Requirements: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous demolition and construction waste as possible including the following materials: 1. Demolition Waste:

a. Asphaltic concrete paving. b. Concrete. c. Concrete reinforcing steel.



d. Brick. e. Concrete masonry units. f. Wood studs. g. Wood joists. h. Plywood and oriented strand board. i. Wood paneling. j. Wood trim. k. Structural and miscellaneous steel. l. Rough hardware. m. Roofing. n. Insulation. o. Doors and frames. p. Door hardware. q. Windows. r. Glazing. s. Metal studs. t. Gypsum board. u. Acoustical tile and panels. v. Carpet. w. Carpet pad. x. Demountable partitions. y. Equipment. z. Cabinets. aa. Plumbing fixtures. bb. Piping. cc. Supports and hangers. dd. Valves. ee. Sprinklers. ff. Mechanical equipment. gg. Refrigerants. hh. Electrical conduit. ii. Copper wiring. jj. Lighting fixtures. kk. Lamps. ll. Ballasts. mm. Electrical devices. nn. Switchgear and panelboards. oo. Transformers.

2. Construction Waste: a. Site-clearing waste. b. Masonry and CMU. c. Lumber. d. Wood sheet materials. e. Wood trim. f. Metals. g. Roofing. h. Insulation. i. Carpet and pad. j. Gypsum board. k. Piping. l. Electrical conduit.

3. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: a. Paper. b. Cardboard. c. Boxes.



d. Plastic sheet and film. e. Polystyrene packaging. f. Wood crates. g. Plastic pails.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of the Work.

B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit three copies of report. Include the following information:

1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total

waste.

C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit three copies of calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

F. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts and invoices.

H. Qualification Data: For Waste Management Coordinator.

I. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.



C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project management and Coordination.” Review methods and procedures related to waste management including but not limited to the following:

1. Delete subparagraphs below if not required. If retaining, insert additional requirements to suit Project.

2. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management Coordinator.

3. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.

4. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.

5. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

6. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Include the following:

1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost

of collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged materials.



5. Revenue from recycled materials. 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type

of waste. 9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.

E. Forms: Prepare waste management plan on forms included at end of Part 3. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for operation,

termination, and removal requirements.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating

materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for controlling

dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste

until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated

materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver

or processor.



3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store

in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets

from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees at landfill facility. C. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed

of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PRE-CLOSEOUT MEETING A. Pre-Closeout Meeting: Schedule and convene Pre-Closeout Meeting with Owner and

Architect in accordance with Section 01 31 19, Project Meetings. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. The following items shall be completed before Substantial Completion will be granted:

1. Contractor’s Completion List (Punch List): Submit a thorough list of items to be completed or corrected, along with a written request for Substantial Completion and for review of the Work or portion of the Work. The Architect/Engineer’s Project Representative, at their discretion, may attend and assist in the preparation of the Contractor's Punch List.

2. Architect’s Supplemental Punch List: The Architect/Engineer, along with the Owner at the Owner’s discretion, will inspect the Work utilizing the Contractor's prepared Punch List, noting completed items and incomplete items, and will prepare a supplemental list of items that have been omitted or incomplete items that were not previously noted.

3. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit as described in paragraph 1.3. 4. Final Cleaning: Provide final cleaning and adequate protection of installed

construction as described in paragraph 1.6 and 1.7. 5. Starting of systems: Start up equipment and systems as described in paragraph 1.8. 6. Testing and balancing: Testing and balancing of systems must be performed and

completed by Owner’s forces, and the report submitted and accepted by Architect/Engineer and Owner, as described in the Contract Documents. Make adjustments to equipment as required to achieve acceptance.

7. Demonstrations: If required by individual specification sections or by Owner, provide demonstrations and instructions for use of equipment as described in paragraph 1.9.

B. Date of Substantial Completion: Complete or correct items identified on Punch List and

confirm that all items have been corrected prior to Architect’s re-inspection. Architect/Engineer, along with the Owner, will re-inspect the corrected work to establish the Date of Substantial Completion. Incomplete items remaining will be appended to the Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA G704). The Date of Substantial Completion represents day one (1) of the closeout period and represents the date of commencement of the Contractors correctional period and all warranty periods as described and required by the Contract Documents, except as amended in the Certificate of Substantial Completion and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

C. Certificate of Substantial Completion: When the Work or designated portion thereof is

substantially complete, Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion to be executed by the Owner and Contractor. Items on the appended Punch List shall be completed or corrected within the time limits established in the Certificate.



1.3 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. As a requirement for Substantial Completion, the final Operation and Maintenance Manual

shall be submitted to and reviewed and accepted by the Architect prior to issuance of the Certificate.

B. Prepare 3-ring D-slant binder cover and spline with printed title "OPERATIONS AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.

C. Submit one (1) copy of preliminary Operations and Maintenance Manuals to respective

consultants (Civil, MEP, Structural, etc.) for review of conformance with contract requirements prior to submitting final to Architect. Allow time for proper review.

D. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

E. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

F. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and Maintenance, arranged by system and subdivided by

specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Equipment start-up instructions e. Operating instructions. f. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. g. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Photocopies of warranties, certificates, and bonds. Submit originals with

Closeout Documents as specified below.

G. Submit one (1) final original and two (2) copies to Architect.

1.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Final Payment will not be authorized by the Architect until the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents, subject to the completion and acceptance of the following requirements and other applicable Contract requirements: 1. Close-out Documents as requested by the Architect. 2. Record Documents: Submit as described in paragraph 1.10. 3. Extra materials: Provide extra stock, materials, and products as described in

paragraph 1.11 when required by individual specification sections. 4. Locks: Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner.

Advise the Owner’s personnel of changeover in security provisions.



5. Temporary Facilities: Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction aids, and similar elements.

6. Warranties, Certificates and Bonds: Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents, certificates, and bonds from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers as described in paragraph 1.12.

7. Final Inspection and Acceptance by Architect is achieved as described in paragraph 1.13.

1.5 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare 3-ring D-slant binder cover and spline with printed title "CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. Submit one (1) original and two (2) copies.

B. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as

described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

C. The close-out documents shall be neatly organized and easily useable as determined by the Architect and Owner. Separate Close-out Documents binders from Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Documents identified as "affidavit" shall be notarized.

D. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each item description identified,

typed on white paper, in five (5) parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. All General Contractor’s vendors/suppliers and subcontractors that provided materials or performed any work related to this project must be listed on this form. Submit Final List of Subcontractors on Document AG.

2. Part 2: Closeout Documents and Affidavits, include the following: a. AIA G707 - Consent of Surety to Final Payment; b. AIA G706 - Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims; c. AIA G706A - Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens;

d. Subcontractor’s Release of Lien: Include contractors, subcontractor’s and direct material and equipment supplier’s separate final releases. Submit on attached Close-out Form “A” - Affidavit of Subcontractor’s Release of Lien.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Copy of Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA G704); b. Copy of All Permits; c. Copy of Final Utility Bill or letter of transfer; d. Copy of Certificate of Occupancy; e. Certification of Project Compliance: Submit on attached Close-out Form

“B”. Owner and Architect will initiate form and forward to Contractor for signature once Substantial Completion is established;

f. Hazardous Material Certificate: Submit on attached Close-out Form “C”. Affidavits from Contractor, Subcontractors and General Contractor’s vendors or suppliers stating that no hazardous materials/products have been used or installed in this project.

4. Part 4: Warranties, compile sequentially based on specification sections: a. General Contractor's Warranty: Submit on company letterhead as described

below. This Warranty shall state all sections of Work performed by General Contractor’s own forces, and warranty period for each section of Work;

b. Subcontractor’s Warranty: notarized and submitted on attached Close-out Form “D”. This Warranty shall state all sections of Work performed by the subcontractor and warranty period;

5. Part 5: Receipts:



a. Extra Stock: Provide original receipts for delivery of “Extra Stock” items as described below, (if applicable). Receipts must be signed by an authorized Owner’s representative.

b. Keys: Provide original receipts for delivery of “Keys”, (if applicable). Receipts must be signed by an authorized Owner’s representative.

E. In addition to the three (3) required close-out binders listed above, provide Architect with one

(1) separate binder for their records containing the following: 1. Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer,

Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers; 2. all MSDS sheets for the project; 3. all warranties from Contractor, subcontractors, direct suppliers, and manufacturers.

F. Failure to complete and close-out project after substantial completion may result in liquidated

damages being assessed to the Contractor. Refer to Conditions of the Contract for additional requirements and liquidated damages.

1.6 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project inspection and acceptance.

B. Clean interior and exterior glass, and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces, mop hard floor surfaces.

C. Remove smudges, marks, stains, fingerprints, soil, dirt, spots, dust, lint, and other foreign materials from finished and exposed surfaces

D. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to surface and material being cleaned.

E. Clean and replace filters of operating equipment as required by Contract Documents

F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

G. Clean site: sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

H. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from site.

1.7 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections until Work is accepted by Architect and Owner.

B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.



F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

1.8 STARTING OF SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer and Owner 48 hours prior to start-up of each item.

C. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.

D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer.

E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

F. Execute start-up under supervision of Contractors' personnel, and installer in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

G. When specified in individual specification sections or required by manufacturer, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. When specified in individual specification sections or required by Owner or Architect/Engineer, submit a written report in accordance with Section 01300, Submittal Procedures, that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1.9 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel a minimum of 48 hours prior to date of Final Completion in accordance with Owner’s requirements.

B. Demonstrate Project equipment instructed by qualified manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the Project and equipment.

C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six (6) months.

D. Utilize maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment.

F. Prepare and insert additional data in maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

G. Review and verify proper star-up and operation of equipment prior to scheduling

demonstrations with Owner.



1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Record Documents, as described in Section 01 78 39, shall be submitted at Project Closeout. Final Payment will not be authorized by the Architect until final review and acceptance by Architect and Engineers is achieved in accordance with the Owners requirements.

B. At the Contractors request, and with associated fee, Architect may provide electronic versions of the construction drawing and specification files for Contractors use, subject to the terms and conditions of Architects standard electronic document transfer agreement.

C. Submit reproducible to respective consultants (Civil, Structural, MEP, etc.) for review.

Consultant will mark-up corrections and return to Contractor for final revisions. Make final revisions prior to submitting to Architect. 1. Format: One (1) set blackline reproducibles and two (2) sets bluelines of approved

reproducibles. 2. In addition, provide the Owner with one (1) set of Record Drawings on a non-

rewritable CD in AutoCAD® latest release. 3. In PDF format on DVD media.

1.11 EXTRA STOCK, MATERIALS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Furnish extra stock, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain signed receipt from Owner’s authorized representative prior to final application for payment. Delivery of materials to or obtaining receipt from anyone other than Owner’s authorized representative may constitute breach of this requirement and may require delivery of additional materials at no cost to the Owner if original materials are misplaced.

C. Include signed receipts for delivery of extra stock and materials, including keys, with Closeout

Documents.

1.12 WARRANTIES, CERTIFICATES AND BONDS

A. Definitions: 1. Standard Product Warranties: preprinted written warranties published by individual

manufacturers for products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.

2. Special Warranties: written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide coverage of specific defects, or both.

B. The General Contractor's warranty shall be for a period of one (1) year following the date of

Substantial Completion, hereinafter called the one-year warranty period. The Contractors one-year general warranty shall include all labor, material and delivery costs required to correct defective material and installation. This warranty shall not limit the Owner’s rights with respect to latent defects, gross mistakes, or fraud.

C. The Contractor’s one-year warranty shall run concurrently with the one (1) year period for

correction of Work required under Paragraph 12.2 of the General Conditions.

D. In addition to the Contractors one-year warranty, Special Warranties as described in individual specifications sections, shall extend the warranty period for the period specified without limitation in respect to other obligations which the Contractor has under the Contract Documents.



E. Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor

of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve the suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

F. Warranty Requirements:

1. When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove, and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

2. When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or reconstruction, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

3. Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing defective Work regardless of whether the Owner ahs benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

4. Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

5. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or designated portion of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

G. Compile copies of each required warranty properly executed by the Contractor and the

subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. Co-execute warranties, certificates and bonds when required and include signed warrantees with Closeout Documents submitted to the Architect.

H. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and

bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

1.13 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT

A. Final Notice and Inspection: 1. When all items on the Punch List have been corrected, final cleaning has been

completed, and installed work has been protected, submit written notice to the Architect that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance.

2. Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect and Engineer will make final inspection.

B. Final Change Order: When the Project Closeout items described above are successfully

completed and the Work is found acceptable to Architect/Engineer and Owner, a Final Change Order will be executed. This Change Order will include any Allowance adjustments as required by the Contract Documents.

C. Final Application for Payment: When all the above items are successfully complete, submit to

the Architect a final Application for Payment and request for release of retainage.



D. Release of Retainage: Release of retainage will not be authorized by the Architect until Contractor completes all requirements for close-out to the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect as described herein.

1.14 TERMINAL INSPECTION

A. Immediately prior to expiration of the one (1) year period for correction of the Work, the Contractor shall inspect the work in the company of the Architect and the Owner. The Architect and the Owner shall be given not less than ten (10) days notice prior to the anticipated date of terminal inspection.

B. Where any portion of the work has proven to be defective and requires replacement, repair or

adjustment, the Contractor shall immediately provide materials and labor necessary to remedy such defective work and shall execute such work without delay until completed to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner, even if the date of completion of the corrective work may extend beyond the expiration date of the correction period.

C. The Contractor shall not be responsible for correction of work which has been damaged

because of neglect or abuse by the Owner nor the replacement of parts necessitated by normal wear in use.


END OF SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT FORMS – NEXT PAGE



CLOSE-OUT FORM “A”

SUBCONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIEN STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF GONZALES KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: , being first duly sworn, deposes and says: 1. That he / she is the of , the subcontractor

who supplied, installed, and /or erected the work described below, and that, he /she is duly authorized to make this Affidavit and Subcontractor Release:

Project: GONZALES HIGH SCHOOL PRACTICE FIELD TURF AND LIGHTING PROJECT Owner: GONZALES INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTIRCT Architect: PBK ARCHITECTS, INC. Work Performed: Specification Section(s): 2. That all work required under the subject subcontractor of the subject construction project has been

performed in accordance with the terms thereof, that all material men, sub-subcontractors, mechanics, and laborers have been paid and satisfied in full and that there are no outstanding claims of any character arising out of the performance of said subcontractor which have not been paid and satisfied in full.

3. That to the best of his / her knowledge and belief, there are no unsatisfied claims for damages

resulting from injury or death to any employees, sub-subcontractors, or the public at large arising out of the performance of said subcontract, or any suits or claims for any other damages of any kind, nature, or description which might constitute a lien upon the property of the Owner.

4. That he / she has received full payment of all sums due him / her for materials furnished and services

rendered by the undersigned in connection with the performance of said subcontract and has and does hereby release the Owner and the Architect and his consultants and the Contractor from any and all claims of any character arising out of or in any way connected with performance of said subcontract.

ATTEST (If Corporation) Name of Subcontractor Secretary (By) (Title) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

JURAT

STATE OF COUNTY OF Sworn to and subscribed before me on this day of , 20 . (Seal) (Notary Public Signature)



CLOSE OUT FORM “B”

CERTIFICATION OF PROJECT COMPLIANCE

Completion of this form is required under the provisions of §61.1036(c)(3)(F) TAC for all public school district construction projects. Instructions for completion of this form can be found on page 2.

1. PROJECT INFORMATION DISTRICT: GONZALES

INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT

Facility: ARCHITECT/ENGINEER:

Address: CONTRACTOR/CM:

City: CONTRACT DATE: DATE DISTRICT AUTHORIZED PROJECT:

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: 2. CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION The intent of this document is to assure that the school district has provided to the architect/engineer the required information and the architect/engineer has reviewed the School Facilities Standards as required by the State of Texas, and used his/her reasonable professional judgment and care in the architectural/engineering design and that the contractor has constructed the project in a quality manner in general conformance with the design requirements and that the school district certifies to project completion. 3. The District certifies that the educational program and the educational specifications of this facility along with the identified building code to be used have been provided to the architect/engineer. DISTRICT: BY: DATE: 4. The Architect/Engineer certifies the above information was received from the school district, and that the building(s) were designed in accordance with the applicable building codes. Further, the facility has been designed to meet or exceed the design criteria relating to space (minimum square footage), educational adequacy, and construction quality as contained in the School Facilities Standards as adopted by the Commissioner of Education, June 9, 2003, and as provided by the district. ARCHITECT/ENGINEER: BY: DATE: 5. The Contractor/CM certifies that this project has been constructed in general conformance with the construction documents as prepared by the architect/engineer listed above. CONTRACTOR/CM: BY: DATE:



6. The District certifies completion of the project (as defined by the architect/engineer and contractor). DISTRICT: BY: DATE: INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETION OF “CERTIFICATION OF PROJECT COMPLIANCE” FORM Section 1. Identify the following:

– name and address of the school facility – name of the school district – the Architect/Engineer and Contractor – the date of execution of the construction contract – the date that the school district authorized the superintendent to hire an architect/engineer – scope of the project.

Section 2. This section outlines the intent of the document. No action required. Section 3. This section is to be executed by the school district upon transmittal of the information (as listed) to the architect/engineer and is to remain in the custody of the school district throughout the entire project. Section 4. This section is to be executed by the architect/engineer upon completion of the plans and specifications and in conjunction with the completion of the plan review for code compliance (ref. 19 TAC §61.1033 or §61.1036, School Facilities Standards) and returned to the school district’s files. Section 5. This section is to be executed by the contractor upon substantial completion of the project and retained in the school district’s files. Section 6. This section is to be executed by the school district upon acceptance and occupancy of the project. NOTE: DO NOT SUBMIT THIS DOCUMENT TO THE TEXAS EDUCATION AGENCY. The school district will retain this document in their files indefinitely until review and/or submittal is required by representatives of the Texas Education Agency.



CLOSE-OUT FORM “C”

SUBCONTRACTOR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CERTIFICATE THE STATE OF TEXAS PROJECT: Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting

Project COUNTY OF GONZALES OWNER: Gonzales Independent School District ARCHITECT: PBK Architects, Inc. SPECIFICATION SECTION(S): __________________________ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he / she is the of ,the subcontractor / supplier who constructed or provided the section(s) of work referenced above, and that he / she is duly authorized to certify to the best of his / her information, knowledge, and belief no asbestos, lead or PCB containing products have been incorporated into the project. ATTEST (If Corporation) Name of Subcontractor / Supplier Secretary (By) (Title) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

JURAT

THE STATE OF COUNTY OF Sworn to and subscribed before me on this day of , 20 . (Seal) (Notary Public Signature)



CLOSE-OUT FORM “D”

SUBCONTRACTOR WARRANTY STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF GONZALES KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

, being first duly sworn, deposes and says: 1. That he / she is the Subcontractor (or the of

the subcontractor) who supplied, installed, and / or erected the work described below, and that, he / she is duly authorized to make this Subcontractor Warranty:

Project: GONZALES HIGH SCHOOL PRACTICE FIELD TURF AND LIGHTING PROJECT Owner: GONZALES INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTIRCT Architect: PBK ARCHITECTS, INC. Work Performed: Specification Section(s): 2. The undersigned Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment

furnished under the Contract are of good quality and new except where otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work is free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work conforms with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Subcontractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Subcontractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage.

3. In the event of failure of materials, products, or workmanship, during the specified warranty periods,

the Subcontractor shall take appropriate measures to assure correction or replacement of the defective items, whether notified by the Contractor, Owner or Architect.

4. The Subcontractor warrants the work performed for a period of months from the date of

Substantial Completion, except as follows:

ATTEST (If Corporation) Name of Subcontractor Secretary (By) (Title) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

JURAT STATE OF COUNTY OF Sworn to and subscribed before me on this day of , 20____. (Seal) (Notary Public Signature)

END OF CLOSEOUT FORMS


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including but not limited to: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings:

a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints. 2) Submit record digital data files and one sets of plots. 3) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three sets of prints. 2) Submit record digital data files and three sets of record digital data file plots. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information

were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic file of the Project Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic file and directory of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,

submit duplicate marked up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to the individual Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report monthly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.



1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT PROCEDURES

A. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect’s reference. 1. Do not use As Built Drawings and Specifications for Record Drawings and Specifications.

B. Recording Procedures: Update drawings and specifications on daily bases to record actual conditions. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until required information is accurately recorded.

C. Store Record Documents and samples apart from as built documents used for construction. 1. Label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with section number

listings in Table of Contents. Label each document PROJECT RECORD in neat, large, printed letters.

2. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry and legible condition. 3. Make Record Documents and samples available for inspection upon request of Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked up record prints. Show actual installation conditions where installation varies from that shown originally. a. Give attention to information on concealed elements difficult to identify or measure

and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross reference record prints to corresponding shop drawings or archive

photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked up record prints.



4. Mark record sets with erasable, red colored pencil. Use colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the

original Contract Drawings and annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.

2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for

use in recording information. a. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data

files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate

layers.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting

an alternate, substitution, or modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record

the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation PROJECT RECORD DRAWING in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS. d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. Indicate actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.



2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file and marked up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where

applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 RECORD SAMPLES

A. Record Samples: Determine with Architect and Owner which submitted Samples are to be maintained as Record Samples. Maintain and mark one set to indicate date of review and approval by Architect; note any deviations or variations between reviewed sample and installed product or material.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by the individual Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Include the following: 1. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Field test reports. 3. Inspection certificates and manufacturer's certificates. 4. Inspections by authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). 5. Documentation of foundation depths. 6. Special measurements or adjustments. 7. Tests and inspections. 8. Surveys. 9. Design mixes.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up miscellaneous record submittals. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 02 32 00 - 1

SECTION 02 32 00 - GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE FOUNDATION INVESTIGATION REPORT

A. The geotechnical report is as follows:

1. Subsurface Investigation: a. Entitled: Geotechnical Engineering Study

Gonzales ISD – Turf Practice Football Field Gonzales, TX 78629

b. Prepared for: Gonzales Independent School District c. Prepared by: TSI Laboratories Testing

B. The boring plans, results of laboratory tests, and description of stratum for each test hole are enclosed

in this Section. C. The Contractor is hereby advised to review the geotechnical report and visit the site to ascertain

the conditions affecting the work. In the event of discrepancies between the drawings, specifications and geotechnical report, the contractor shall bring to the attention of the architect for resolution. In the absence of a Geotechnical Report, discrepancies between Drawings and Specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution. Failure to review the geotechnical report and report discrepancies, between the geotechnical report, if any, and drawings and specifications, to the Architect will not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to perform the work required by such documents, at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.2 SOIL CONDITIONS

A. The conditions indicated in the report were known to exist at the location shown on the date the tests were performed; however, these boring logs are for the Contractor’s consideration only, and he shall visit the site and fully acquaint himself with the existing conditions and be prepared to complete all work required by the documents.




UNDER-SLAB VAPOR RETARDER 03 05 80 - 1

SECTION 03 05 80 - UNDER-SLAB VAPOR RETARDER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Products Supplied Under This Section 1. Vapor Retarder, seam tape, mastic, pipe boots, detail strip for installation under concrete

slabs.

B. RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-place Structural Concrete 2. Section 01 45 23 Structural Testing and Inspection

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E 1745-97 (2004) Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used

in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 2. ASTM E 154-88 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in

Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs 3. ASTM E 96-95 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 4. ASTM E 1643-98 (2005) Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders

Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring

Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control / Assurance 1. Full set of test results as per paragraph 8.3 of ASTM E 1745. 2. Manufacturer’s samples, literature 3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming and pipe boot installation.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Product Review 1. Request must be made 14 days prior to bid date to allow time for proper review. Reviews

will be at contractor’s expense. 2. Independent laboratory test results showing compliance with ASTM E 1745 Class A, a

permeance less than 0.01 Perms (grains/(ft2 *hr * in. Hg) before and after the mandatory conditioning tests ASTM E 154 Sections 8,11,12, and 13. (Woven, and recycled plastics are not permitted

3. Incomplete substitutions will not be accepted.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder (Performance based specification). When the specifications of different sections conflict, the contractor shall perform to the most restrictive provision. Vapor Retarder membrane must have the following properties. 1. Permeance as tested after mandatory conditioning (ASTM E 154 sections 8,11,12,13)

less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 *hr. * in. Hg)] 2. Other performance criteria

a. Strength: ASTM E 1745 Class A b. Thickness: 15 mils minimum

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Seam Tape 1. Tape must have the following qualities:

a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E 96, 0.3 perms or lower 2. Seam Tape

a. Manufacturer’s standard seam tape. b. Stego Crete Claw (for slabs on void boxes).

B. Vapor Proofing Mastic 1. Mastic must have the following qualities:

a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E 96 0.3 perms or lower

C. Pipe Boots 1. Construct pipe boots from vapor retarder material, pressure sensitive tape and/or mastic

per manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that subsoil is approved by architect or geotechnical firm 1. Level and tamp or roll aggregate, sand or tamped earth base.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install Vapor Retarder: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and ASTM E

1643-09. a. Unroll Vapor Retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the

pour. b. Lap Vapor Retarder over footings or seal to foundation walls. c. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape. d. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions. e. No penetration of the Vapor Retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and

permanent utilities.



f. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Retarder, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape.



CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 10 00 - 1

SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete formwork, for the following:1. Footings and/or piers.2. Foundation walls.3. Slabs-on-grade.4. Suspended slabs.5. Concrete toppings.6. Building frame members.7. Building walls.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 45 23 “Testing and Inspection Services”.2. Section 03 33 00 "Architectural Concrete".3. Section 03 30 00 “Cast In Place Concrete”.4. Section 03 20 00 “Concrete Reinforcing”.5. Section 03 47 13 “Tilt Up Concrete”.6. Section 03 38 16 “Unbonded Post Tensioned Concrete”.7. Section 03 53 00 "Concrete Topping".

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this section shall apply, unless notedotherwise.1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. ACI 117 – Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materialsb. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildingsc. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concreted. ACI 347 – Guide to Formwork for Concretee. ACI SP-4 – Formwork for Concrete.


A. Design and engineering of formwork, including shores, reshores, false work, bracing, and othertemporary supports as well as determining when temporary supports and bracing can safely beremoved after the specified curing time is the Contractor’s responsibility.

B. All components of the formwork shall be designed to support all loads imposed duringconstruction including weight of construction equipment, live loads, and lateral loads due towind and imbalance or discontinuity of building components.



C. If any post tensioned members exist on the project, the formwork supporting those elementsshall:1. It is essential to take into account the stressing sequence of post-tensioned concrete in

the design of the formwork. Any concrete element which is stressed can transfer itsweight off the form work to the supporting concrete element in which case the forms forthe supporting concrete element must be designed to support the entire load tributary ofthat element.

2. Forms shall be designed and constructed to permit movement during stressing, bothlifting and shortening of the concrete elements.

3. Formwork supporting beams and girders shall be designed to support the weight of thebeam or girder’s entire tributary area.

4. Formwork supporting post tensioned concrete elements shall not be removed until allconcrete supported by the formwork has been fully stressed, but in no case shall thecuring time before form removal be less than specified herein.

5. Design, engineering and production of shop drawings for the form work shall beperformed under the supervision of a professional engineer.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professionalengineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Shop drawings for layout ofpan type forms, if they exist on the project. Layout only - information and details about thesupport of these forms is not required, as it is the responsibility of the Contractor and hisregistered engineer1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping

formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

C. Manufacturer’s product data and installation instruction for propriety materials used in exposedconcrete work including form liners, release agents, form systems, ties, and accessories.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct thestructure.1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver form materials in manufacturer’s packaging with installation instructions.

B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected area to prevent deterioration from moisture ordamage.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified ConcreteFlatwork Technician. An experienced installer who has completed work similar in material,design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in constructionwith a record of successful in service performance.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Refer Section 01 45 23.



C. Layout and measurement of concrete forms and embedment’s, required for work, performed bya licensed surveyor employed by the contractor.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the ContractDocuments:1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete."2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of eachentity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:a. Contractor's superintendent.b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.d. Concrete subcontractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, andsmooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:a. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities notexceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resistplastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Permanent Metal Forms for Slabs: Deck material, gauge and rib pattern shall be as noted onDrawings.

E. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plasticconcrete loads without detrimental deformation.1. Pans shall be free of dents, irregularities, sag, rust or other deterioration.2. In areas permanently exposed to view, provide one piece units, manufactured to length

between beams or ribs, or segmented units with reinforced butt-joint splices.

F. Load-bearing Rigid Board Insulating Fill Under Slabs:1. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type X, 15 psi

minimum compressive strength, 1.30 lb./cu. ft. (21 kg/cu. m) .a. Owens Corning Insulating Systems, LLC, Toledo, OH 43659;

www.owenscorning.com.b. Thermal Resistance: (180-day real-time aging as mandated by ASTM C578,

measured per ASTM C 518 at mean temperature of 75F): R-5.0 per inch ofthickness, with 90% lifetime limited warranty on thermal resistance.



c. Blowing Agent Formulation: Zero ozone depleting.d. Install according to manufacturer’s recommended instructions.

2. Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Un-faced Flat Board Stock: Rigid, closed cell,expanded polystyrene (EPS) boards, UL certified, complying with ASTM C 578 Type VIII,15 psi minimum compressive strength .a. Insulfoam, a Carlisle Company, which is located at: 6004 N. Westgate Blvd. Suite

120 ; Tacoma, WA 98406; Toll Free Tel: 800-248-5995; Tel: 253-572-5111; Email:request info ([email protected]); Web: www.insulfoam.com

b. Blowing Agent Formulation: Zero ozone depleting.c. Install according to manufacturer’s recommended instructions.

G. Formwork Accessories1. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.2. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.3. Expansion-Contraction Joint Filler Material: Bonded fabric of thickness indicated on

Drawings composed of cellular fibers securely bonded together and uniformly saturatedwith asphalt complying with ASTM D 1751.

4. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bondwith, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequenttreatments of concrete surfaces.a. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

5. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforcedplastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and toprevent spalling of concrete on removal.a. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of

exposed concrete surface.b. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter

in concrete surface.c. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive damp

proofing or waterproofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structurecan support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.2. Class B, 1/4 inch3. Class C, 1/2 inch4. Class D, 1 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Providetop forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.



1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve requiredelevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screedstrips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formworkis inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced toprevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuouslocations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheadsrequired in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks andmaintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's writteninstructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining workthat is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Coordinate work ofother Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors,and other inserts that are attached to the formwork.1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings andBridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer faceof concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, andother conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.4. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, level and plumb.

Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that doesnot support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damagedby form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-daydesign compressive strength.



2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms withoutloosening or disturbing shores.

3. Determine compressive strength of in place concrete by testing representative field-curedtest specimens according to ACI 301.

B. Obtaining concrete compressive strength tests for the purposes of form removal shall be theresponsibility of the Contractor.

C. In the absence of cylinder tests, formwork shall remain in place until the concrete has cured at atemperature of at least 50 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Celsius) for the minimum cumulativetime periods given in ACI 347, Section 3.7.2.3. When the surrounding air temperature is below50 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Celsius), that time period shall be added to the minimumlisted time period.

D. Formwork for two-way conventionally reinforced slabs shall remain in place for at least theminimum cumulative time periods specified for one-way slabs of the same maximum span.Two-way conventionally reinforced slabs shall then be reshored until they attain the specified 28day strength.

E. Minimum cumulative curing times may be reduced by the use of high-early strength cement orforming systems that allow form removal without displacing shores. However, the Contractormust demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the early removal of forms will notresult in excessive sag, distortion or damage to the concrete elements.

F. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, orotherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Applynew form-release agent.

G. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concretesurfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring andreshoring.1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper shoring and reshoring. Locate andprovide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

C. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories todistribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or willinduce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement. Reshoresshall be located in the same position on each floor. No construction loads shall be placed onthe new construction until all supporting reshores have been installed.1. Extend shores or reshores from ground to top level in structure three stories or less in

height, unless noted otherwise.2. In structures over three stories in height, extend shores or reshores at least three levels

under the level being placed. Extend shores beyond the minimum number of levels ifrequired to ensure proper distribution of loads throughout the structure.

3. In crawl spaces or basement, shores or reshores shall extend to mud pads seated firmlyon the soil or to on grade construction.



D. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate andprovide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

E. Bottom tier of reshores shall remain in place until the supported concrete has attained at least85 percent of the specified 28-day compressive strength and construction loads in excess of 20psf have been removed but not less than 14 days.

3.5 REUSE OF FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be used in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, orotherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Applynew form release agent.

B. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concretesurfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, atlocations indicated or as approved by Architect.1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement throughsides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girderintersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, andgirders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Otherwise, locate joints beside piers integralwith walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened orpartially hardened concrete surfaces.

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed againsthardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioningconcrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints afterapplying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproofabrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cuttingaction will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete developsrandom contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slabjunctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, andother locations, as indicated.



1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finishedconcrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch belowfinished concrete surface where joint sealants are to be installed.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length isrequired, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricateor asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holesand defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specifiedlimits on formed-surface irregularities.1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged inan orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes anddefects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surfaceirregularities.1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be

covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete whereindicated:1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete

surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniformcolor and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbingprocess.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfacesadjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacentformed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacentunformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, andfinishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inchin one direction.1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated or to receive concrete floor toppings or to

receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small orinaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granulartexture.1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated or to receive trowel finish or to be covered with

fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.



3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment



WATERSTOPS 03 15 13 – 1

SECTION 03 15 13 - WATERSTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provision of waterstops embedded in concrete and spanning control, expansion, and/orconstruction joints to create a continuous diaphragm to prevent fluid migration.

B. Non-metallic waterstops for use in concrete joints subjected to chlorinated water, seawater, and many waterborne chemicals.

C. Non-metallic waterstops for use in concrete joints subjected to acids, bases, alcohols,oils, solvents or other chemicals.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. PVC WATERSTOP1. Corps of Engineers: CRD-C 572-742. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)3. Bureau of Reclamation: C-9024. Canadian General Standards Board: 41-GP-35M Types 1 & 35. ACI 350.2: Concrete Structures for Containment of Hazardous Materials

B. HYDROPHILIC WATERSTOP1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)


A. Store waterstops under tarps to protect from oil, dirt, sunlight, and premature exposureto water.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and fabrication drawings indicating placement of waterstops andshop fabrications.

B. Submit manufacturer’s test data for chemical resistance.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC WATERSTOPS FOR EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Provide flexible PVC (polyvinyl chloride) waterstop as manufactured by Greenstreak orapproved equal.

B. The PVC waterstop shall be extruded from an elastomeric plastic material of which thebasic resin is prime virgin polyvinyl chloride. The PVC compound shall not contain anyscrapped or reclaimed material or pigment whatsoever.

C. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.

D. Dimensions: 6 inch by 3/8 inch thick.

E. Performance Requirements as follows:

Property Test Method Required Limits Water absorption ASTM D 570 0.15% max Tear Resistance ASTM D 624 200 lb/in (35 kN/m) min. Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 638 350% min. Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 2000 psi min. Low Temperature Brittleness

ASTM D 746 No Failure @ -35o F

Stiffness in Flexure ASTM D 747 600 psi min. Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 1.45 max. Hardness, Shore A ASTM D 2240 79 +3 Tensile Strength after accelerated extraction

CRD-C 572 1850 psi min.

Elongation after accelerated extraction

CRD-C 572 300% min.

Effect of Alkalies after 7 days: Weight Change Hardness Change

CRD-C 572

between -0.10% / +0.25%+/- 5 points

2.2 CHEMICALLY RESISTANT FLEXIBLE WATERSTOP

A. Thermoplastic elastomeric rubber waterstops resistant to oil, solvents, and chemicalsas manufactured by Westec or approved equal.

B. Chemical resistance testing to be performed by independent ASTM certified laboratory.

C. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb

D. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick.

E. Performance requirements as follows:



Property Test Method Unexposed Value Tensile Strength ASTM D638 2000 psi Ultimate Elongation ASTM D638 450% 100% Modulus ASTM D638 1000 psi Shore A Hardness ASTM D2240 85 units Low Temp Brittleness ASTM D746 No Failure @ -70 F

F. Waterstop material should show less than +/- 30% change in material properties,including weight gain after 7-day exposure to selected chemicals, per ASTM D 471testing.

2.3 HYDROPHILIC WATERSTOP FOR NON-MOVING CONTRACTION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Provide hydrophilic rubber waterstop as supplied by Greenstreak, HYDROTITE profilestyle number (fill in profile style number).

B. The waterstop shall be a combination of chloroprene rubber and chloroprene rubbermodified to impart hydrophilic properties.

C. The waterstop shall have a delay coating to inhibit initial expansion due to moisturepresent in fresh concrete.

D. Performance Requirements as follows:

Chloroprene Rubber Property Test Method Required Limits Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 1300 PSI min. Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 412 400% min. Hardness (Shore A) ASTM D 2240 50 +/- 5 Tear Resistance ASTM D 624 100 lb/inch min.

Modified Chloroprene (Hydrophilic) Rubber Property Test Method Required Limits Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 350 PSI min. Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 412 600% min. Hardness (Shore A) ASTM D 2240 52 +/- 5 Tear Resistance ASTM D 624 50 lb/inch Expansion Ratio Volumetric

Change - Distilled Water @ 70o F

3 to 1 min.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. PVC and Chemically Resistant Waterstops1. Provide factory made waterstop fabrications for all changes of direction,

intersections, and transitions leaving only straight butt joint splices for the field.



2. Provide hog rings or grommets spaced at 12 inches on center along length of waterstop.

3. Provide Teflon coated thermostatically controlled waterstop splicing irons for field butt splices.

4. Splices to be free from defects.

B. Hydrophilic Waterstops 1. Provide Greenstreak 7300 two component epoxy gel to secure HYDROTITE to

rough, wet (or dry) concrete. 2. Provide LEAKMASTER single component hydrophilic sealant to secure

HYDROTITE to rough, dry concrete. 3. Provide cyanacrylate adhesive (super glue) for all splices. 4. Provide LEAKMASTER as addition to cyanacrylate adhesive at all splices for

added insurance (Optional).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. PVC and Chemically Resistant Waterstops 1. Field butt splices shall be heat fused welded using a teflon covered

thermostatically controlled waterstop splicing iron at approximately 380 degrees F. Follow approved manufacturer recommendations.

2. Lapping of waterstop, use of adhesives, or solvents shall not be allowed. 3. Center waterstop in joint and secure waterstop in correct position using hog rings

or grommets spaced at 12” on centers along the length of the waterstop and wire tie to adjacent reinforcing steel.

4. Install in longest lengths practicable. 5. Ensure steel reinforcing bars do not interfere with proper position of waterstop. 6. Clean concrete joints of dirt and construction debris prior to second pour of

concrete. 7. Cut waterstop ends with miter guide and circular saw to ensure good, full contact

at joints. 8. At expansion joints, keep center bulb unembedded at joint centerline.

B. Hydrophilic Waterstop 1. Cut coil ends square (or at proper angle for mitered corners) with shears or sharp

blade to fit splices together without overlaps. 2. Splices shall be sealed using cyanacrylate adhesive (super glue) and

LEAKMASTER (LEAKMASTER is optional). 3. Seal watertight any exposed cells of HYDROTITE using LEAKMASTER. 4. Follow approved manufacturer written recommendations. 5. Install in longest length practicable.

C. Hydrophilic and PVC Intersections 1. Maintain continuity of waterstops at all intersections and transitions. 2. Joinery between PVC and HYDROTITE shall be sealed using LEAKMASTER. 3. Follow approved manufacturer written recommendations.

D. Retrofit Waterstop



1. Prepare existing concrete by grinding away irregularities. Clean concrete toensure good epoxy bond.

2. Apply continuous bed of epoxy to concrete 1/8 inch thick.3. Embed retrofit waterstop in uncured epoxy.4. Mechanically fasten waterstop to concrete using stainless steel batten bars and

anchor bolts staggered 6 inches OC max. Use batten bars on top and bottom.5. Tool continuous layer of epoxy over batten bars and bolts to protect from

corrosion.6. Use expansion joint filler at moving joints to minimize shear stresses.

E. Concrete Placement at Waterstop1. Carefully place concrete without displacing waterstop from proper position.2. Thoroughly and systematically vibrate concrete around waterstop to obtain

impervious, void free concrete in vicinity of joint and to maximize intimate contactbetween concrete and waterstop.

3. After first pour, clean un-embedded waterstop leg to ensure full contact ofsecond pour concrete.



CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 – 1

SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General

1.2

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete reinforcement, for the following:1. Footings and/or piers.2. Foundation walls.3. Slabs-on-grade.4. Suspended slabs.5. Concrete toppings.6. Building frame members.7. Building walls.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 45 23 “Testing and Inspection Services”.2. Section 03 10 00 “Concrete Forming and Accessories”.3. Section 03 30 00 “Cast In Place Concrete”.4. Section 03 47 13 “Tilt Up Concrete”.5. Section 03 38 16 “Unbonded Post Tensioned Concrete”.6. Section 04 22 00 “Concrete Unit Masonry”.7. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving".8. Section 31 63 29 "Drilled Concrete Piers".

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this section shall apply, unlessnoted otherwise.1. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

a. ACI 117 – Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction andMaterials.

b. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildingsc. ACI 315 – Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcementd. SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual

2. American Welding Society (AWS)a. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code

3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)a. CRSI – Manual of Standard Practiceb. CRSI 63 – Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars



c. CRSI 65 – Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports,Specifications and Nomenclature.

B. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)a. ASTM-A185: Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,

Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.b. ASTM-A663: Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant

Quality, Mechanical Properties.c. ASTM-A615: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.d. ASTM-A675: Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought,

Special Quality, Mechanical Properties.e. ASTM-A706: Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and

Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.f. ASTM-A775: Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel

Bars.g. ASTM-A884: Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Wire and Welded

Wire Reinforcement.

C. In the case of conflict between the Contract Documents and a reference standard, theContract Documents shall govern. In the case of a conflict between the ContractDocuments and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.



B. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending,and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrupspacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanicalconnections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement,according to ACI 315 “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.”1. Do not reproduce the structural drawings for use as shop drawings.

C. Bar Supports: Submit manufacturer’s product information for bolsters, chairs, spaces,and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and weldedwire fabric.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency, installer, and fabricator as indicated herein.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:1. Steel reinforcement and accessories.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Refer Section 01 45 23.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed reinforcinginstallation work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Projectand whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in serviceperformance.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: An experienced fabricator who has completed reinforcingfabrication work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Projectand whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in serviceperformance.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance withAWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives ofeach entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including thefollowing:a. Contractor's superintendent.b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.d. Concrete subcontractor.


A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to preventbending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings, if any, on steel reinforcement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half ofpreconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 or Grade 75 as indicated on Drawings,deformed.

C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars for bars to be welded: ASTM A 706, Grade 60 for #6and smaller bars, Grade 75 for #7 and larger bars, deformed.

D. Add the following paragraph below for stainless-steel reinforcement. Retain one of twooptions for reinforcement type.



E. Stainless-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 955, Grade 60, [Type 304] [Type 316L],deformed.

F. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184, fabricated from ASTM A 615, Grade 60 or ASTM A 706,deformed bars, assembled with clips.

G. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn .

H. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.

I. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawnsteel wire into flat sheets.

J. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with endssquare and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacturebar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manualof Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact

forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unlessotherwise indicated. Do not use wood, brick, or other unacceptable materials.

2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."Combined tolerances for formwork, reinforcing fabrication, and reinforcing placementshall not permit a reduction in specified concrete cover of reinforcing steel. In case offabricating errors, do not re-bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that willinjure or weaken material. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall meet followingrequirements for fabricating tolerances:1. Sheared length: Plus or minus 1 inch.2. Depth of truss bars: Plus 0, minus ½ inch.3. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties, and spirals: Plus or minus ½ inch.4. Other bends: Plus or minus 1 inch.

B. For bars with end bearing splice couplers, bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces,within 1.5 degrees of a right angle to axis of bars and shall be fitted within 3 degrees offull bearing after assembly.



2.4 DOWEL BAR ANCHORS/SPLICERS

A. A. Provide dowel bar anchors and threaded dowels designed to develop, both in tension and compression, 125% of the minimum ASTM specified yield strength of the dowel bars, as evidenced by published I.C.B.O. test reports. Unless otherwise indicated, anchors shall be furnished with ACI standard 90 degree hooks. Dowels shall be furnished by anchor supplier. The following dowel splicing systems are acceptable. 1. Richmond Screw Anchor “Dowel Bar Splicer”2. Erico “Lenton Form Saver”3. Dayton Barsplice “Grip-Twist”

2.5 MECHANICAL SPLICES

A. A. Provide mechanical splices designed to develop, both in tension and compression, 125% of minimum ASTM yield strength of the smaller bar being coupled, as evidenced by published I.C.B.O test reports. The following bar splicing systems are acceptable. 1. Erico “Cadweld C-Series”2. Erico “Lenton”3. Dayton Barsplice “Bar Grip”4. Dayton Barsplice “Grip Twist”

2.6 METAL ANCHORAGE AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Shapes and Plates: Conform to ASTM A36, “Specification for Structural Steel”.

B. Headed Stud Anchors: Headed studs welded by full fusion process, as furnished byTRW Nelson Stud Welding Division.

C. Welding Electrodes: AWS 5.5, Series E70.

D. Welded Deformed Bar Anchors: Welded by full fusion process, as furnished by TRWNelson Stud Welding Division.

E. All metal assemblies exposed to earth, weather or moisture, including exposure to acrawl space environment, shall be hot dip galvanized.

2.7 FABRICATION OF METAL ACCESSORIES AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel items in the shop. Shearing, flame cutting, andchipping shall be done carefully and accurately. Holes shall be cut, drilled, or punchedat right angles to the surface of metal and shall not be made or enlarged by burning.Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges. Welded construction shallconform to AISC “Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of StructuralSteel for Buildings,” and AWS D1.1. Welding shall be done by AWS certified welders.

B. Welding of deformed bar anchors and headed stud anchors shall be done by full fusionprocess equal to that of TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division of KSM Welding ServicesDivision, Omark, Ind. A minimum of two headed studs shall be tested at start of each



production period for proper quality control. Studs shall be capable of being bent 45 degrees without weld failure.

C. Welding of reinforcement shall be done in strict accordance with AWS requirements,using recommended preheat temperature and electrode for type of reinforcement beingwelded. Bars larger than No. 9 shall not be welded. Welding shall be performedsubject to the observance and testing laboratory. Under no circumstances is ordinaryreinforcing (ASTM A615) to be welded.

D. Coatings, where required, shall be applied after fabrication and prior to castingconcrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoiningwork that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for SteelBuildings and Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings inouter face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels,shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder

before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materialsthat would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locateand support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Donot tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spacedto minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one meshspacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in eitherdirection. Lace overlaps with wire.



F. Provide minimum concrete covering for reinforcement as shown in the Structural General Notes.

G. Place bars to following tolerances: 1. Clear distance to formed surfaces: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 2. Minimum spacing between bars: Minus 1/4 inch. 3. Top bars in slabs and beams:

a. Members 8 inches deep or less: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. b. Members between 8 and 24 inches deep: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. c. Members more than 24 inches deep: Plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within 2 inches. 5. Length of members: Plus or minus 2 inches.

H. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. If moved more than one bar diameter, or enough to exceed above tolerances, resulting arrangement of bars subject to approval.

I. Support reinforcement and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction loads or placing concrete beyond tolerances indicated.

J. Unless permitted by Engineer, do not bend reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: See Section 01 45 23.

B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2


SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concretematerials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:1. Footings.2. Foundation walls.3. Slabs-on-grade.4. Suspended slabs.5. Concrete toppings.6. Building frame members.7. Building walls.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 45 23 “Structural Testing and Inspection Services”.2. Section 03 20 00 "Concrete Forming and Accessories".3. Section 03 10 00 "Concrete Reinforcing".4. Section 03 11 31 “Void Forms”.5. Section 03 15 13 “Waterstops”.6. Section 03 05 80 “Under-slab Vapor Barrier – Retarder”.7. Section 03 47 13 “Tilt Up Concrete”.8. Section 31 63 29 “Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts”.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this section shall apply, unlessnoted otherwise.1. ACI 301 – Specification for Structural Concrete.2. ACI 302 – Guide for Concrete Floor Slab Construction.3. ACI 304 – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.4. ACI 305 – Hot Weather Concreting.5. ACI 306 – Cold Weather Concreting.6. ACI 308 – Guide to Curing Concrete.7. ACI 309 – Guide for Consolidating Concrete.8. ACI 311 – ACI Manual for Concrete Inspection.9. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.10. ACI 347 – Guide to Concrete Formwork.



11. ACI 207 – Mass Concrete.12. ACI 211.1 – Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,

Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.13. ACI 211.2 – Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural

Lightweight Concrete.14. ACI 212.3 – Chemical Admixture for Concrete.15. ACI 212.4 – Guide for the use of High Range Water Reducing Admixtures in

Concrete.16. ACI 214 – Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete.17. ACI 303 – Guide to Cast in Place Architectural Concrete Practice.18. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual of Standard Practice”.

B. In the case of conflict between the Contract Documents and a referenced standard, theContract Documents shall govern. In the case of a conflict between the ContractDocuments and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more ofthe following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, groundgranulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance withrequirements.



B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture include the following information. Submitalternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions,weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.1. Each proposed mix design shall be accompanied by a complete standard

deviation analysis based on at least 30 consecutive strength tests, or by threelaboratory trial mixtures with confirmation tests.

2. Proportions of cement, fine, and coarse aggregate, and water.3. Design strength.4. Maximum slump.5. Air Content.6. Maximum water / cement ratio.7. Maximum and minimum concrete temperature that is acceptable at time of

placement for which the manufacturer can guarantee the strength of theconcrete.

8. Type cement and aggregates.9. Type and quantities of all admixtures.10. Air dry density and splitting tensile strength for lightweight concrete determined in

accordance with ASTM 330.11. Type, color, and quantities of integral coloring compounds, where applicable.12. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Refer Section 03 20 00.



D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Refer Section 03 10 00.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.


C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Floor and slab treatments. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Semi rigid joint filler. 9. Joint-filler strips. 10. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious

expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed

Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: See Section 01 45 23.



1. Contractor’s responsibility to testing laboratory. a. Furnish all labor and materials as required to assist testing agency in

obtaining, making and handling samples at the jobsite. b. Advise the Owner’s Testing Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations

to allow adequate time for the assignment of testing personnel. c. Furnish and maintain adequate facilities for proper curing of concrete test

specimens on the project site in accordance with ASTM C31.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

G. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. for slab-on-grade and 100 sq. ft. for formed

surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor.


A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings, if any, on steel reinforcement.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. See Section 03 10 00.



2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES


2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the

following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. Carbon content shall not exceed 3

percent by volume. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years of satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches, 1 inch, or 3/4 inch nominal as

indicated on Drawings for specific uses. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that contain not more than 0.05 percent water soluble chloride ions. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.



5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

C. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. ChemMasters. b. Davis Colors. c. Dayton Superior Corporation. d. Hoover Color Corporation. e. Lambert Corporation. f. QC Construction Products. g. Rockwood Pigments NA, Inc. h. Scofield, L. M. Company. i. Solomon Colors, Inc.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Polyolefin macro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1 to 2-1/4 inches long. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. 3M; Scotchcast Polyolefin Fibers 2". b. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Tuf-Strand SF. c. FORTA Corporation; FORTA FERRO. d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Strux 90/40. e. Nycon, Inc.; XL. f. Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 650. g. Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber MS or MS10.

2.7 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS

A. Selection of Proportions: Proportions of ingredients for concrete mixes shall be determined by a qualified concrete supplier in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301.

B. Required average strength above specified strength: Determination of required average strength above specified strength shall be based on the standard deviation record of the production facility in accordance with ACI 301. Calculation of standard deviation of compressive strength results shall be made in accordance with ACI 214. If a suitable record of strength tests is not available, proportions shall be selected on the basis of laboratory trial batches to produce an average strength greater than the strength f’c by the amount defined in ACI 301.



2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS


2.9 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

A. Slip-Resistive Emery Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, non-glazing, abrasive, crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials with 100 percent passing No. 8 sieve. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Emery. b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Emery Tuff Non-Slip. c. Lambert Corporation; EMAG-20. d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Grip It. e. Metalcrete Industries; Metco Anti-Skid Aggregate.

B. Slip-Resistive Aluminum Granule Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of not less than 95 percent fused aluminum-oxide granules. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Alox. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Frictex NS. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Grip It AO.

2.10 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. VOC Content: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus. b. ChemTec Int'l; ChemTec One. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Intraseal. d. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Titan Hard. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; LIQUI-HARD. k. Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver. l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Duro-Nox. m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Buff Hard. n. US SPEC, Division of US Mix Products Company; US SPEC Industraseal. o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS Clear.



C. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Advanced Floor Products; Retro-Plate 99. b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; FGS Hardener Plus. c. QuestMark, a division of CentiMark Corporation; DiamondQuest Densifying

Impregnator Application.

2.11 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,

Class B, dissipating. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.



g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE WB 30C.

h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. i. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR. l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin. n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear. o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB. q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 1315. b. ChemMasters; Polyseal WB. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315 WB. d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315 WB. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond

Clear VOX; LusterSeal WB 300. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion. g. Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal. h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. i. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30. j. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30. k. Right Pointe; Right Sheen WB30. l. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 31 Percent E. m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315.

2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.12 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion and Isolation Joint Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semi-rigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.



E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.13 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,

conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according

to ASTM C 109.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,

and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as

recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according

to ASTM C 109.

2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed

mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of Portland cement, which would otherwise be used, as indicated in Structural General Notes.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in

concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high

temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.



3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.15 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Grout shall be prepackaged, non metallic, and non gaseous. It shall be non-shrink when tested in accordance with ASTM-C1107 Grade B or C at a fluid consistency (flow cone) of 20 to 30 seconds. Thirty-minute-old grout shall flow through the flow cone after slight agitation, in temperatures of 40 degrees to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Grout shall be bleed free and attain 7,500 psi compressive strength in 28 days at fluid consistency. Certified independent test data required. Approved products include the following: 1. “Euco NS” by Euclid Chemical Company 2. “Masterflow 713” by Master Builders.

2.16 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as indicated in Structural General Notes:


A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.18 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery

time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK




3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS


3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES


3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS/BARRIERS



A. See Section 03 20 00

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.

Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.



7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and

finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch

below finished concrete surface where joint sealants are specified or otherwise indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures

to mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design

pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.



2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Do not permit concrete to drop freely any distance greater than 10’-0” for concrete containing a high range water reducing admixture or 5’-0” for other concrete. Provide chute or tremie to place concrete where longer drops are necessary. Do not place concrete into excavations with standing water. If place of deposit cannot be pumped dry, pour concrete through a tremie with its outlet near the bottom of the place of deposit.

F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly

worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-

textured surface plane, before excess bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for

three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

H. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled

mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.



3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES


3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and/or to receive concrete floor

toppings or to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated and/or to receive trowel finish and to be

covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and/or exposed to view or to be

covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated or where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming

with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened slip-resistivegranules over

surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface.



2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and

water to expose slip-resistive granules.

3.11 Concrete Floor Finish Tolerances

A. Interior Finish Floor surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155, "Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F-Number System." The following values apply before removal of shores. Levelness values F(L) do not apply to intentionally sloped or cambered areas, nor to slabs poured on metal deck or precast concrete. 1. Exposed, vinyl tiled, or thin-set tiled floors: Specified overall values of flatness,

Ff =35; and levelness, Fl =25; with minimum local values of flatness, Ff =24; and levelness, Fl =17.

2. Carpeted floors, floors under concrete toppings, thickset tile and terrazzo: Specified overall values of flatness, Ff =25; and levelness, Fl = 20; with minimum local values of flatness, Ff =17; and levelness, Fl =15.

B. Floor Elevation Tolerance Envelope: 1. The acceptable tolerance envelope for absolute elevation of any point on the slab

surface, with respect to the elevation shown on the Drawings, is as follows: a. Slab-on-Grade, or Slab-on-Void Construction: +/- 3/4" b. Top surfaces of formed slabs measured prior to removal of supporting

shores: +/- 3/4" c. Top surfaces of all other slabs: +/- 3/4" d. Slabs specified to slope shall have a tolerance from the specified slope of

3/8" in 10'-0" at any point, up to 3/4" from theoretical elevation at any point.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.



3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days

with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover

concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-

retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound

without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written



instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturers written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants

and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms;

rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Polished Concrete Floor Treatment: Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs to match accepted mockup. 1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth and to

depth required to reveal aggregate to match approved mockup. 2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing

sequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive coats.

3. Continue polishing with progressively finer grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level to match approved mockup.

4. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations.

5. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.

C. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.15 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.



3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids

more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,

popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface

finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-



inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.


A. Testing and Inspecting: See Section 01 45 23. 1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 2. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not

comply with the Contract Documents.

3.18 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.



CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 1

SECTION 04 22 00 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Concrete masonry units (CMU).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU: Concrete masonry unit.

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

C. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.4 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 45 23 - Testing and Inspecting Services.

B. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. Steel masonry lintels.

C. Section 07 11 00 – Bituminous Dampproofing.

D. Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation.

E. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

F. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coatings.

G. All Sections of Work built-in, adjacent to, or applied to unit masonry Work.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM)1. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron & Steel Hardware.2. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.3. A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement.4. A706 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement.5. C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.6. C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and

Related Units.7. C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.8. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.9. C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.10. C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.11. C331 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.12. C332 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete.13. C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.14. C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.15. C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.



16. C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.

17. C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 18. D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and

Waterproofing. 19. D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving

and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 20. E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.


A. Where requirements of this Section are in conflict with requirements noted on the Structural Drawings, the Structural Drawings shall take precedence. Refer to Structural Drawings for information on load-bearing CMU walls.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where indicated or required, provide materials and construction which are identical to assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing in compliance with ASTM E119 by U.L. or other recognized testing and inspection organization or by other means, acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

C. Masonry Cleaning: Workers shall have minimum 5 years of masonry cleaning experience, and shall be approved by cleaner manufacturer prior to application of cleaning material, and shall meet with cleaner manufacturer for demonstration and instruction s for use of product prior to application.

D. Perimeter Walk-Around: Daily perimeter walk-around the exterior side of the masonry by the GC and or masonry Subcontractor at the end of each Work day as a visual inspection looking for obvious issues or flaws concerning colors, finishes, workmanship, protection of Work.

E. Source Limitations: 1. For Masonry Units: Obtain masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend

within the accepted ranges for those characteristics, from one (1) manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces.

2. For Mortar and Grout Materials: Brands of cementitious materials and admixtures, and the source of supply of sand and aggregates shall remain the same throughout the Work where exposed to view and where not scheduled to receive a subsequently applied finish, i.e. parging, painting, etc., unless directed otherwise in writing by the Architect.

3. Contractor’s Responsibility: Contractor performing Work of this Section shall be responsible for coordinating with others performing Work which is built-in or adjacent to unit masonry Work.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories.

B. Sample Panel(s):

1. Do not start masonry until Architect has approved samples. 2. Sample panel shall be 6 feet long by 8 feet high showing selected color range and texture,

bonding, joint shape, and quality of workmanship. Include a expansion joint, and any specialty details, such as reveals, soldier courses, etc. Include mock-up of installation of thru-wall flashing at foundation sill and lintel above openings, window jambs and sills.

3. A separate panel for each type of masonry used is required. Sample panel(s) shall remain at the jobsite until all masonry is completed.

Installed materials shall be visible and integrated into adjacent materials. 4. Brace and support as required to withstand structural wind loads.



C. Certification: Submit manufacturer’s affidavit that materials used in Project contain no asbestos.

D. Mortar and Grout Mix Designs: Submit two (2) copies of proposed mortar and grout mix designs to Owner's testing laboratory.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination.

1.9 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately

72 inches (1800 mm) long by 72 inches (1800 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include a sealant filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in each mockup. b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup.

Make opening approximately 12 inches (300 mm) wide by 16 inches (400 mm) high.

c. Include through wall flashing installed for a 24 inch (600 mm) length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup, with a 12 inch (300 mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing).

d. Include each type of masonry on one face of interior unit masonry wall mockup.

2. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing surface.

3. Clean one/half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of

mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

6. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.10 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Materials and installation of masonry shall be subject to testing and inspection by an independent testing laboratory. Such tests and inspections shall not relieve Contractor of responsibilities for providing materials and procedures which comply with Contract Documents. Promptly remove and replace materials which do not comply.

B. Owner will select Inspection and Testing Laboratory and will pay for all Work required by Inspection and Testing Laboratory.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver and store materials in dry protected areas off ground. Keep free of stain or other damage before, during and after installation. Replace any damaged material at no cost to Owner.



B. During freezing weather, protect masonry units with tarpaulins or other suitable material. Keep free of stain or other damage before, during and after installation. Replace damaged material at no cost to Owner.

C. Protect reinforcement and accessories from elements.

1.12 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Cold Weather Protection: 1. No masonry shall be laid when the temperature of the outside air is below 40 degrees F,

unless protection measures are employed and pre-approved by the Architect. 2. Protection measures for cold weather erection include maintaining space and masonry unit

temperatures of at least 40 degrees F for 48 hours prior to and after erection.

B. Hot Weather Protection:

1. When the mean daily temperature exceeds 100 degrees F or exceeds 90 degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, fog spray all newly constructed masonry until damp, at least three (3) times a day until the masonry is three (3) days old.

1.13 BRACING OF MASONRY DURING ERECTION

A. All masonry shall be adequately braced at all times during erection.

1.14 COORDINATION

A. Openings and chases for heating, plumbing, electrical ducts, pipes, and conduits shall be built into masonry walls as required. Provide for installation of bolts, toggles, flashings, beams, anchors, hangers, nailing strips, wall plugs, and frames as required. Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for installation of their Work to avoid cutting and patching. Coordinate installation of steel reinforcement for reinforced masonry. Coordinate placement of concrete in masonry beams, lintels, soffits, and pilasters.

B. Contractor performing Work of this Section shall be responsible for and coordinate with Work of Section 07 11 00, Dampproofing Above Grade and all Sections of Work built-in, adjacent to, or applied to unit masonry Work.

1.15 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one (1) year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship.

B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Noticeable deterioration of unit or mortar finish. 2. Chalking or dusting excessively. 3. Changing color in irregular fashion. 4. Cracking or spalling. 5. Releasing from substrate. 6. Staining or discoloring, including efflorescence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Specifications are based on products of manufacturers named within the specifications. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing products equal to those specified and comply with requirements of Division 1



regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU/Block) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide products of one of the following: a. Best Block Construction Materials formerly known as Headwaters Concrete

Products/Boral Concrete Products. b. Texas Building Products, Inc. c. Revels Block & Brick Co., Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU/Block): 1. Type/Sizes:

a. Exterior exposed block: Regular Smooth face units with 8 inch by 16 inch face dimensions as shown on drawings or required, 4 inch, 6 inch, and 8 inch depths as indicated on drawings. 1) Color: Architect to select from manufacturers full range or noted on Drawings.

2. Integral Water Repellant (In exterior exposed CMU): “Dry-Block Block Admixture” integral

water repellant admixture as manufacturer by Grace Construction Packaging (gcp), or equal.

3. Specification: Comply with ASTM C90 (Class D-2 (2 hour) and Class B-4 (4 hour)) block at rated walls). a. Aggregate: Lightweight in accordance with ASTM C331.

4. Curing: Rotary kiln process. 5. Provide bullnose units at all outside corners. 6. Provide bond beams, control joints, jambs, lintels, soaps, cap blocks, and fillers to match

and compliment block units as shown or required.

B. Mortar: 1. Materials: (Unless stated otherwise on Structural Drawings)

a. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. b. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, TYPE “N”, typical. Use TYPE “S” for load-bearing

masonry. c. Aggregate: Sand conforming to ASTM C144. d. Water: Clean and potable. e. Admixtures For Mortar:

1) General: Do not use calcium chloride 2) Concrete Masonry Units: Spectrum Mortar Color or Architect approved equal. 3) Integral Water Repellant (In mortar of exterior exposed CMU): “Dry- Block

Mortar Admixture” integral water repellant admixture as manufacturer by Grace Construction Packaging (gcp) or equal. Note: Water repellent block admixture and mortar admixture are not interchangeable.

2. Mix Design: (Proportions by volume) (Unless stated otherwise on Structural Drawings) a. Typical, Non-load bearing masonry

1) Type: ASTM C270, Type “N.” 2) Proportions: 1 part cement, 1 part hydrated lime and 6 parts sand to provide a

compressive strength of 750 psi in 28 days. Do not use calcium chloride. b. Load bearing structural masonry

1) Type: ASTM C270, Type “S.” 2) Proportions: 1 part cement, 1/2 part hydrated lime and 4-1/2 parts sand to

provide a compressive strength of 1800 psi in 28 days. Do not use calcium chloride.

C. Grout:



1. Materials: (Unless stated otherwise on Structural Drawings) a. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, TYPE “S.”

b. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. c. Water: Clean and potable

d. Aggregates: 1) Course aggregate shall conform to ASTM C404. 2) Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C144.

2. Mix Design: (Unless stated otherwise on Structural Drawings)

a. Comply with ASTM C476 to provide a compressive strength of 2,500 psi in 28 days, unless noted otherwise. Do not use calcium chloride. 1) Fine Grout: Fine grout conforming to ASTM C476 and consisting of 1 part

Portland cement, 0 to 1/10 part lime and 2-1/4 to 3 parts sand by volume. 2) Course Grout Mix: Course grout conforming to ASTM C476 and consisting of

1 part Portland cement, 0 to 1/10 part lime and 2-1/4 to 3 parts sand, and 1 to 2 parts course aggregate.

D. Reinforcement, Anchors and Tie Systems:

1. General: Reinforcement used in all wythes shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-2.

2. Approved Manufacturers include the following: a. Heckmann Building Products b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc c. Wire-Bond

3. At solid multiple wythe masonry walls and single wythe masonry walls, (Interior partitions) use #9 gauge truss type reinforcing. Pre-fab corners and tees shall be used at all wall corners and intersections; width shall be two (2) inches less than nominal thickness of walls. Hohmann & Barnard "120 Truss-Mesh" at single wythe; "230 Ladder-Tri-Mesh" at multiple, or Architect approved equal.

4. At Double Wythe Cavity Walls with Insulation Board: Use Hot-dipped galvanized, #9 gauge truss type with 3/16 inch adjustable pintle wall ties. Width of truss reinforcement shall be 2 inches less than the nominal thickness of wall. 3/16 inch wall tie double eye sections welded at 16 inches o.c. extended as required for insulation thickness. Pre fab corners and tees shall be used at all wall corners and intersections. Hohmann & Barnard "270 Ladder Eye-Wire", or Architect approved equal.

5. At Masonry Anchored to Steel Spandrel Beam and Columns: Hot-dipped galvanized, No. 315 Anchor and No. 316 Pintle Tie manufactured by Heckmann Building Products, Inc., or Architect approved equal. Anchors detailed on Structural Drawings supersede.

6. Control Joint Anchor: Equal to Heckmann Building Products, Inc. No. 351 Anchor. 7. Corrugated Wall Tiles: Not acceptable under any circumstances.

E. Block Insulation:

1. Rigid Core Inserts: a. Type: “U” shaped insulation inserts conforming to ASTM C578, replacing Federal

Specification (FS) HH-I-524C, Type I, specification for Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

b. Sizes: As required for 6 inch, 8 inch, 10 inch, and 12 inch blocks as shown or required.

c. Approved Product/Manufacturer: Korfil Insulation Inserts manufactured by Concrete Block Insulating Systems (CBIS), West Brookfield, MA; (800) 628-8476, or Architect approved equivalent.

F. Precast Concrete U-Lintels (Contractors Option to site built masonry lintels) 1. Concrete Materials:

a. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or III, gray color.



b. Aggregates: ASTM C33. c. Water: potable d. Admixtures: Shall not contain calcium chloride or chloride ions

2. Reinforcing:

a. Deformed Reinforcement: ASTM A615 Grade 40 or 60. b. Prestressing Strand: ASTM A416 270 ksi LL.

3. Fabrication:

a. Unless specified otherwise, conform to PCI MNL-116. b. U-lintel units 14 feet in overall length and shorter shall be made of concrete with a

minimum strength of 3500 psi at 28 days. c. U-lintel units exceeding 14 feet in overall length shall be made of concrete with a

minimum strength of 6000 psi at 28 days and shall be prestressed concrete. d. Units shall be sand block finish except prestressed, 6 inch wide, and 12 inch wide U-

lintels shall be smooth form finished. e. Tolerances shall be per PCI MNL-116 f. Minor patching in plant is acceptable provided structural adequacy of units is not

impaired

4. Acceptable Product/Manufacturer: Cast-Crete High Strength Precast Concrete U-lintels as manufactured by Cast-Crete, Tampa, FL (800) 999-4641, and locally distributed by Headwaters, (713) 365-9077.

G. Miscellaneous Materials: (As shown or required)

1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2. Forms: Form grade plywood with wood studs and wales as required. 3. Shores: Patented shores of design and manufacture sufficient to safely support imposed

loads. 4. Premolded Filler: Fibrous mastic strips containing 35 percent to 50 percent asphaltic

impregnation, ASTM D1751. 5. Flashing Cement: "Nerva-plast" cold setting mastic manufactured by Nervastral, Inc., or

Architect approved equal. 6. Building Felt: No. 15 asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D226. 7. Dovetail Anchors: 16 gauge galvanized dovetail corrugated masonry anchor, 1 inch x 3-1/2

inch manufactured by Heckman Building Products, Inc., Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, or Architect approved equal.

8. Steel Shapes and Plates: As shown on drawings and specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

9. Headed Stud Anchor: Welded by full-fusion process as furnished by TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division, or Architect approved equal.

10. Bolts: ASTM A307. Furnish with carbon steel washers. 11. Deformed Bar Anchors: Welded by full-fusion process as furnished by TRW Nelson Stud

Welding Division, or Architect approved equal. 12. Reinforcing Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706. 13. Cavity Drainage Protection: 2 inch thick by 10 inch high by 5 feet long recycled polyester/

polyethylene mesh, trapezoidal-shaped, continuous at foundation, at heads above openings, and shelf angles as indicated on drawings. Provide Mortar Net™ manufactured by Mortar Net Solutions, Burns Harbor, IN; (800) 664-6638, or Architect approved equal.

14. Masonry Color: Iron oxide pigment conforming to ASTM C979 in color(s) selected by Architect, shall be inert, stable to atmospheric conditions, sunfast, weather resistant, alkali resistant, water insoluble, and free of fillers and extenders, as manufactured by ChemSystems, Inc., Davis Colors, Solomon Grind-Chem Service, Inc., or Architect approved equal.



15. Weep Hole Vents: Injection molded vent made from flexible polyvinyl chloride in an offset "T" shape, inserted in head joints, the slotted leg of the vent allows air to pass in and out allows water to weep out and prevents water from penetrating in manufactured by Williams-Goodco, Phone: 800-521-9594 or 248-643-6400 or Email: [email protected]. Weep hole vents shall be sized to match masonry (may require custom sizing).

2.3 MASONRY STRENGTH

A. Ultimate compressive strength of masonry as required by design and determined by prism tests shall not be less than 1,800 psi, unless stated otherwise in Structural Drawings.

2.4 MASONRY CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Detergent Cleaner: Bucket and brush hand cleaning method, BIA Technical Notes 20.

B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. PROSOCO, Inc. c. AHI Supply.

C. The following products based on AHI Supply TexClean products are intended as a guide only and does not preclude the contractors use of equal products by listed manufacturers. Consult manufacturer prior to application for any questions or inconsistencies.

Substrate Color/Type Cleaning Solution

Brick Red Tex Clean Masonry Cleaner

Light Tex Tral Masonry Cleaner

Dark Tex Tral Masonry Cleaner

Pavers Tex Clean Masonry Cleaner

Glazed Tex Tral Masonry Cleaner

CMU Split Face Tex Tral Masonry Cleaner

Burnished/Ground Face Tex Tral Masonry Cleaner

Architectural

Concrete Natural Color/Smooth Tex Tral Masonry Cleaner

Textured Tex Clean Masonry Cleaner

Stone Construction Cast Stone Tex Tral Masonry Cleaner

Arriscraft Tex Tral Masonry Cleaner

Limestone (Unpolished) Tex Tral Masonry Cleaner



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS AND SHORES

A. Provide forms and shores sufficiently strong and rigid as required to support soffits, beams, and lintels during construction.

B. Build forms to conform to shape, line, and dimension of masonry members as detailed, substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, grout or concrete. Properly brace or tie together so as to maintain position and shape.

3.2 PREPARATION OF MATERIALS

A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Where cutting is required, masonry shall be cut with a sharp masonry saw. 2. Ensure concrete masonry units to receive sand fill are ready for filling and cutouts are

protected from material spillage.

B. Mortar and Grout: 1. Use suitable containers for material measurement. Measuring sand by the shovel is not

acceptable. 2. Thoroughly machine mix a minimum of five (5) minutes after all materials are in mixer. 3. Consistency will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout. 4. Use within 2-1/2 hours of initial mixing. 5. Mortar or grout shall not be used if curing has progressed to yield a stiff consistency.

C. Reinforcement:

1. Reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and other coatings that would reduce the bond.

2. Cut accurately to length and bend by such methods as will prevent injury to the material. 3. Straighten out kinks or bends.

D. Flashing:

1. Locations: Install in exterior walls to divert moisture within walls to exterior surfaces. 2. Bed Joints: Coordinate Work with Division 4, Masonry. Install flashings between two (2)

thin layers of masonry mortar without increasing thickness of mortar joint. Keep outer edge of flashing material back from face of masonry.

3. Adjacent Work: Protect Work by masking, covering, or other precautionary methods. Remove protection when no longer necessary.

4. Separate copper flashing from dissimilar materials. 5. Protect membrane flashing from overexposure to direct sunlight.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Do not use chipped or cracked concrete masonry units (CMU), where exposed to view. 2. Use masonry saws to cut and fit exposed units. 3. Exposed masonry at exterior corners shall be solid units. 4. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections which might puncture or

otherwise damage flashing material. 5. Place through-wall flashing as follows:

a. Place on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. b. Provide at steel columns and beams in exterior masonry walls and elsewhere as

indicated on the drawings or required. c. Install asphalt laminated copper membrane as base flashing at all exterior cavity

walls below weep holes.



d. Install at material transitions inside exterior cavity walls, roof edge/exterior wall transitions, masonry joints (control/expansion) inside exterior cavity walls, exterior wall sill/weep conditions, exterior door and window frame perimeters, roof deck/exterior wall transitions, exterior wall penetrations (i.e. pipe, conduit, ducts, etc.). Provide membrane at all joints, holes, gaps or openings to ensure a continuously sealed building envelope.

6. Lay masonry units plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately spaced within

allowable tolerances. 7. Do not furrow bed joints. 8. Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course; toothing is not permitted. 9. Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 10. If units are displaced after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean joints and units and re-lay

with fresh motor. 11. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry:

a. Remove loose masonry units and mortar b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh mortar. B. Metal Door Frames: Fill jamb frames solid with mortar. Build in anchors.

C. Lintels and Bond Beams: Provide reinforced unit type, except where steel lintels are shown. Use reinforcing bars as shown on the drawings. Completely fill in lintel block and bond beams with grout. Provide 8 inch bearing at end of lintels.

D. Corners: Connect corners with No. 9 galvanized wire tie using one tie for each 4 inches of nominal wall thickness.

E. Partition Tops: Allow space at top of horizontal spanning walls for compressible joint back-up and

sealant as specified in Sealant section. Anchor top of walls to deck or structure.

F. Mortar Beds: 1. Place mortar in a manner which will result in the development of adequate bond between

the masonry and the reinforcement. 2. Lay units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints in all courses. 3. Provide sufficient mortar on ends of masonry unit to fill head joints. 4. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent masonry units in

place. 5. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in place. 6. Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to set,

remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar.

G. Mortar Joints and Patterns: 1. Lay CMU in running one-half (1/2) bond pattern, unless noted otherwise. 2. Provide flush joints where concealed from view and where dampproofing is scheduled. 3. Provide standard concave tooled joint where masonry is exposed to view for CMU,

typically. 4. All mortar joints to be of consistent size. 5. Provide soldier courses where indicated, refer to the elevations. 6. All horizontal joints shall be concave tooled joint at face of units, unless noted otherwise. 7. Provide raked joints at all exposed burnished cmu locations.

H. Reinforcement, Anchor and Tie Systems:

1. General: a. Completely embedded in mortar or grout.



b. All reinforcement consisting of bars or wire 1/4 inch or less in diameterembedded in the horizontal mortar joints shall have no less than 5/8 inch mortarcoverage from the exposed face.

c. Veneer anchors at exterior sheathed covered metal stud exterior walls shall beattached on outside face of sheathing using cadmium plated sheet metal screws.Spacing shall be same as stud spacing o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c.vertically.

d. At intersection of all perpendicular masonry walls provide two (2) vertical rows ofladder type reinforcing at 16 inches o.c. vertically.

e. Weld veneer anchors to structural steel in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations. Touch-up steel shop paint and galvanized coating on anchorwith touch-up primer and finish coats to match damaged coating in accordancewith manufacturer’s recommendations.

f. In cavity walls with CMU back-up, embed truss type horizontal reinforcement withintegral adjustable pintle wall ties every 16 inches o.c. vertically.

g. Splices in reinforcement: Splices may be made only at such points and in suchmanner that the structural strength of the member will not be reduced. Lappedsplices shall be eight (8) inches. Welded or mechanical connection shall developthe strength of the reinforcement.

h. Corrugated strap ties shall not be used as veneer anchors at exterior or wheresubject to moisture. Their use in interior, dry conditions are acceptable.

i. Place joint reinforcement in the first two (2) bed joints above and the first two (2)bed joints below masonry openings. Extend extra reinforcing two (2) feet beyondjambs.

j. Provide masonry ties at floor and roof decks as indicated.

I. Flashing:1. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for mechanically fastened installation with a

termination bar.2. Application Guidelines - Install flashing at the following locations:

a. Membrane Flashing: material transitions inside exterior cavity walls, roofedge/exterior wall transitions, masonry joints (control/expansion) inside exteriorcavity walls, exterior door and window frame perimeters, roof deck/exterior walltransitions, exterior wall penetrations (i.e. pipe, conduit, ducts, etc.). Providemembrane at all joints, holes, gaps, or openings to ensure a continuously sealedbuilding envelope. Utilize primer on substrates as instructed by manufacturer.

b. Copper Flashing: At all horizontal wall flashing, including (but not limited to)exterior wall sill/weep conditions, exterior door and window head/weepconditions, masonry wall cap flashing and masonry wall base flashing.

3. Apply substrate primer as instructed by membrane manufacturer to suit condition.4. On Horizontal Surfaces: The flashing shall be laid in a slurry of fresh mortar and topped

with a fresh full bed of mortar. The flashing shall be cut flush with the exterior face of thewall after being left exposed for inspection purposes only. Flashing shall be carriedthrough the wall, turned up where possible to facilitate drainage through the weepholes,then carried upward across the cavity a minimum of six (6) inches. Flashing will then besecured in back wall with termination bar.

5. On Vertical Surfaces: Surfaces receiving the flashing shall be sufficiently spotted withasphalt mastic to hold in place until masonry is set. Secure in back wall with terminationbar.

6. Foundation Sill Dampproofing: The flashing for foundation sills shall be laid in a slurry offresh mortar and topped with a fresh full bed of mortar. The flashing shall be cut flushwith the exterior face of the wall after being left exposed for inspection purposes only.Flashing shall be sloped across the cavity and turned up the wall a minimum of ten (10)inches and secured to back wall with termination bar. Where sill and column meet,flashing shall be brought up a minimum of ten (10) inches up the column.



7. Thru-Wall Flashing: Shall be cut flush with the exterior face of the wall after being left exposed for inspection purposes only. Carry flashing through the wall, turned up where possible to facilitate drainage through the weepholes, then carried upward across the cavity a minimum of six (6) inches, unless noted otherwise, and secure in back wall with termination bar.

8. Heads and Sills: Flashing for heads and sills shall be cut flush with the exterior face of the wall after being left exposed for inspection purposes only. Flashing shall be carried through the wall and upward across the cavity a minimum of six (6) inches, unless noted otherwise. Head flashing shall be carried six (6) inches beyond both end of the steel lintel. Both head and sill flashing shall be turned up at the sides to form a pan. All corners shall be folded, NOT CUT. Install weepholes.

9. Spandrels: Spandrel flashing shall start from the outside toe of the shelf angle, go up the face of the beam and then through the wall, turned up on the inside not less than two (2) inches. Install weepholes.

10. Parapet or Coping: Flashing for parapets or coping sills shall be laid in a slurry of fresh mortar and topped with a fresh full bed of mortar. Flashing shall be cut flush with the exterior face of the wall after being left exposed for inspection purposes only. Weepholes shall be installed immediately on top of the flashing.

11. Lengths: Install flashings without longitudinal joints within walls, if possible. If required materials are not available in a single width, join by lapping material minimum two (2) inches and seal joint throughout its length with adhesive.

12. End Joints: Avoid end joints in flashing. When end joints are necessary, lap flashing minimum six (6) inches and seal joint continuously with adhesive.

13. Penetrations: Where anchors, pipes, and inserts penetrate flashing, make opening in flashing snug and seal with adhesive.

14. Reglet Termination: Insert wedge into place and seal carefully with adhesive 15. Termination Bar: Install flashing with termination bars in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Provide 3 coursing at all termination bars, typical. 16. Top Coat: After flashing material is in place (except in masonry joints where bond and

mortar is required) trowel full 1/8 inch protective coating or mastic on all flashing faces.

J. Laying Masonry: Lay units plumb, level, and true to line with full head and bed joints. Butter ends of masonry with sufficient mortar to fill head joints. Do not furrow bed joints. Slope top of bed joint toward center of wall to minimize amount of mortar forced into grout space. Remove mortar, protruding from joints into grout space, before pouring grout.

K. Reinforcing Bars: 1. Hold vertical bars in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding eight 8

feet-0 inches with a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch from masonry and not less than one (1) bar diameter between bars.

2. When a foundation dowel is not in alignment with a vertical block cell or pilaster, slope it not more than one (1) horizontal in six (6) vertical to bring it into proper alignment before grouting.

3. Place horizontal reinforcing bars in continuous masonry courses, consisting of bond-beam or trough block units, and solidly grout in place.

4. Use straight reinforcing bars except for bends around corners and where bends or hooks are detailed on plans.

5. Lap reinforcing steel 40 bar diameters minimum where spliced and wire together.

L. Grouting: Where detailed place grout in reinforced masonry beams, walls, columns, and pilasters. All cells and spaces containing reinforcing bars shall be filled with grout. Wherever possible grouting shall be done from inside face of masonry. Exercise extreme care to prevent grout from staining face of masonry. Immediately remove any spilled grout from face and top of masonry. 1. Prior to grouting clean space so that all spaces to be filled with grout do not contain

mortar projections greater than 1/2 inch, mortar droppings or other foreign material.



Grout shall be placed so all spaces designated to be grouted shall be filled with grout and grout shall be confined to those specific spaces.

2. Grout materials and water content shall be controlled to provide adequate fluidity for placement, without segregation of constituents and shall be mixed thoroughly.

3. Between grout pours a horizontal construction joint shall be formed by stopping all wythes at the same elevation and with grout stopping a minimum of 1-1/2 inches below a mortar joint, except at top of wall. Where bond beams occur, stop grout pour a minimum of 1/2 inch below top of masonry.

4. Reinforcement shall be placed prior to grouting. Bolts shall be accurately set with templates or by approved equivalent means and held in place to prevent movement.

5. Segregation of grout materials and damage to masonry shall be avoided during the grouting process. Adequately brace masonry to prevent displacement or cracking during grouting operations.

6. Grout shall be consolidated by mechanical vibrator during placing, before loss of plasticity, in a manner to fill grout space. Grout pours greater than 12 inches shall be reconsolidated by mechanical vibration to minimize voids due to water loss. Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be mechanically vibrated, or puddled.

7. Grout shall not be handled nor pumped utilizing aluminum equipment. 8. Size and height limitations of grout space or cell shall be as follows:

GROUT TYPE

GROUT POUR MAX.

HEIGHT (FEET)

LEAST CLEAR DIMENSIONS

CLEANOUTS REQUIRED

Width of Grout Space (In.)

CMU Cell Dim.

Dims. (In. x In.)

Fine 1 3/4 1-1/2 x 2 No Fine 5 1-1/2 1-1/2 x 2 No Fine 8 1-1/2 1-1/2 x 3 Yes

Coarse 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 x 3 No Coarse 5 2 2-1/2 x 3 No Coarse 8 2 3 x 3 Yes

a. Clear dimension is the cell or grout space width less mortar projections. b. Grout space width shall be increased by the horizontal projection of the

diameters of horizontal bars within the cross section of the grout space.

9. Place grout in lifts not exceeding 8 feet-0 inches.

M. Concreting: Supervise placing of concrete in cores of masonry beams and lintels and over masonry soffits where structural concrete is detailed. Report discrepancies or procedures which may adversely affect performance of masonry Work.

N. Sealant Joints:

1. Allow for sealant joints around outside perimeters of exterior doors, window frames and other wall openings.

2. Uniform depth: 3/4 inch. 3. Uniform width: As shown on the drawings but not less than 1/4 inch. 4. Provide sample for Architect’s approval. 5. Refers to drawing for locations and details of accent joints.

O. Movement Joints (Expansion Joints and Control Joints):

1. Locate expansion and control joints as shown on drawings, or if not shown, comply with the following: a. General:



1) Vertical expansion joints shall be placed in the wythe and control joints shall be placed in the concrete masonry wythe, although they do not necessarily have to be aligned.

2) Mortar and joint reinforcement shall not bridge movement joints. 3) Mortar joints which stop at the expansion joint cavity shall be struck flush

with the masonry unit, producing a continuous flat surface for the sealant to adhere to.

b. Vertical Expansion Joints: 1) Locate expansion joints on long straight walls without openings

maximum 25 feet-0 inches. 2) Locate expansion joints at the corner of walls perpendicular to one

another. In instances, where the joint is not desired at the corner, the expansion joint shall be located within 10 feet-0 inches of the corner in either wall, but not necessarily both. The spacing of expansion joints around a corner shall not exceed the spacing of expansion joints in a straight wall. For example, if the spacing between expansion joints on a straight wall is 25 feet-0 inches, then the spacing of expansion joints around a corner could be 10 feet-0 inches on one side of the corner and 15 feet-0 inches on the other side. Joint reinforcement may be added around wall corners to provide added tensile strength to the corner, but joint reinforcement shall not bridge the expansion joint.

c. Offsets and Setbacks: 1) Locate expansion joints at 10 feet-0 inches maximum on one side of the

offset or setback. The spacing of expansion joints around an offset or setback shall not exceed the spacing of expansion joints in a straight wall. See expansion joints at corners of perpendicular walls to one another above for example of spacing.

d. Openings (Doors and Windows): 1) Locate vertical expansion joints along the edge or jamb of the opening of

windows and doors. Single opening windows and doors under 6 feet-0 inches in width shall have expansion joint on one (1) side of the edge or jamb of the opening as determined by the Architect, unless shown otherwise on drawings. Windows and doors 6 feet-0 inches and over in width shall have expansion joints on both sides of the edge or jamb of the opening.

2) Where masonry above an opening is supported by shelf angles attached to the structure, a vertical expansion joint shall be located alongside the opening, continuing through the horizontal support.

3) Where masonry above the opening is supported by loose lintels (unattached to the structure), special detailing and construction is required. If the expansion joint runs along side the opening, the loose steel lintel shall be allowed to expand independently of the masonry. To accomplish this, form a slip plane with flashing located above and below the angle. A backer rod and sealant shall be installed in front of the toe of the angle, and space shall be left at the end of the angle. Thus, a pocket will be formed which will allow movement of the steel angle within the masonry. If the joint cannot be built in this manner, then the vertical expansion joint shall not be located alongside the opening, but rather, with Architect’s prior approval, the joint shall be located halfway between the openings.

e. Intersections and Junctions:



1) Locate expansion joints at intersections of masonry walls and walls which serve different functions. If the masonry is not required to be bonded at the intersection, an expansion joint shall be incorporated. Walls which intersect at other than right angles are also vulnerable to cracking at the intersection.

2) Locate expansion joint to separate adjacent walls of different heights to avoid differential movement, especially if the difference is very large.

f. Parapets:

1) All vertical expansion joints shall be carried through the parapets. 2) Additional expansion joints shall be halfway between those running full

height, unless the parapet is reinforced. These additional expansion joints shall continue down to a horizontal expansion joint, or continue to the base of the wall.

g. Horizontal Expansion Joints: 1) Locate horizontal expansion joints at shelf angles supporting masonry.

h. Control Joints: 1) Locate CMU control joints directly over concrete slab control joints. 2) Whenever possible, lay out CMU so that control joint will coincide with

CMU module (25 feet-0 inch maximum spacing between control joints), unless noted otherwise on drawings.

3) Locate control joints at structural columns to isolate movement from continuing or intersecting walls and columns.

4) Install backer rod and sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb:

1. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and at rises: a. 1/4 inch in 10 feet (1:480). b. 3/8 inch in 20 feet (maximum). c. 1/2 inch in 40 feet (1:960).

2. For external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4 inch in 20 feet (maximum). b. 1/2 inch in 40 feet (1:960).

B. Maximum variation from level:

1. 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet. 2. 1/2 inch in 40 feet (1:960).

3.5 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SHORES

A. Do not remove shores and forms under reinforced masonry beams, lintels, and soffits until members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other super imposed loads. Providing that sufficient curing has taken place, leave forms and shores in place as follows: 1. Beam and lintels: Minimum ten (10) days.

B. Allow 16 hours to elapse after completion of masonry columns and walls before placing floor or

roof construction loads on them. Allow an additional 48 hours before applying concentrated loads such as trusses, girders, and beams.



3.6 REPAIRING, POINTING AND CLEANING

A. All holes in exposed masonry shall be pointed, and defective joints shall be cut out and re-pointed with mortar.

B. Before applying any cleaning agent to the entire wall, it shall be applied to a sample wall area of

approximately 20 square feet, in a location approved by Architect. No further cleaning Work may proceed until the sample area has been approved by Architect, after which, the same cleaning materials and method shall be used on remaining wall area. Sash, metal lintels and other corrodible parts shall be thoroughly protected. Clean all exposed surfaces of new masonry of excess mortar, efflorescence, stains, and job dirt, using materials specified. 1. Clean from bottom up; prevent cleaning materials and rinse water from contacting non-

cementitious materials. 2. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, product

data, and container label instructions. 3. Mix materials in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions; do not dilute unless

permitted by manufacturer. 4. Prevent overspray, wind drift, and splash onto surfaces not to be treated. 5. No high pressure washers are permitted. 6. Low pressure spray for wetting and rinsing is permitted. Pressure should be in the range

of 400-1000 psi. Equipment should produce 6-8 gallons of water per minute using a 15-40 degree fan tip (no fan tip less than a 15 degree is allowed).

7. No metal tools or wire brushes are allowed for cleaning of masonry. Use a waste piece of same masonry material for scraping of installed material.

3.7 REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED WORK

A. Imperfect or damaged Work, or any material damaged or determined to be defective before final completion and acceptance of the entire job, shall be satisfactorily replaced at Contractor's expense and in conformity with all requirements of drawings and specifications. Removal and replacement of masonry Work shall be performed in such a manner as not to impair the appearance or strength of the structure in any way.

3.8 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION

A. Clean up all debris caused by Work of this Section, keeping the area clean and neat at all times.

B. Cover all unfinished Work at night against the elements with plastic sheeting, building paper, heavy canvas or other material approved by Architect to prevent water from entering cavities.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING

A. Inspection and Testing Laboratory services shall be in accordance with Section 01 45 23, Testing and Inspecting Services.




SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General

1.2


SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Concrete masonry units.2. Mortar and grout.3. Steel reinforcing bars.4. Masonry joint reinforcement.5. Ties and anchors.6. Embedded flashing.7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths

at 28 days.1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area

compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method)according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing

agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials thatfail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to

ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to

ASTM C 109 for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, andASTM C 91 for air content.

3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according toASTM C 1019.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing

bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of ConcreteReinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other specialapplications.



C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Decorative CMUs, in the form of small-scale units. 2. Pre-faced CMUs. 3. Colored mortar. 4. Weep holes/vents.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. CMUs. 2. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup

constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and

calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Pre-blended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property

specification. Test according to ASTM C 109 for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.



B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

E. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for each type of unit masonry construction in sizes

approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 2. Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels adjacent and parallel to

existing surface. 3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant

membrane. 4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from

the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover

securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for

at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.



C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by

spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with

painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain

from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or

coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature

is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,

headers, bonding, and other special conditions. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed

units and where indicated. 1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture

that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal

dimensions.



4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample.

5. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.

2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following: B. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density

classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than CMUs.

C. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout shall be extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement and hydrated lime

containing no other ingredients. E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,

compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural

sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints, less than 1/4-inch-thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent

passing the No. 16 sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to

produce required mortar color. I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture

complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

K. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

L. Water: Potable. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 or ASTM A 996, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.

1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.



3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter or as indicated on Drawings. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter or as indicated on Drawings. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter or as indicated on Drawings. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee

units]. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type

with single pair of side rods. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153,

Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel,

with ASTM A 153, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip

galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry

face, made from 0.187-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or

horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and

attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel.

3. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8-inch-wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch made from 0.075-inch-thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch of masonry face.

D. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4-inch-thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153] [Epoxy

coating 0.020 inch thick. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of dimensions indicated.



B. Post-installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical/adhesive anchors unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times

the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as indicated on Drawings. Include accessories, adhesives, primers, and seam tapes as applicable.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane, or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817.

b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Portland cement-lime mortar. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be

exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre-blended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.



1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet

walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or] paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi except where indicated on Drawings.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions

detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After

installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2-inch or minus 1/4-inch.

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2-inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4-inch in a story height or 1/2-inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:



1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet, 1/4-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet, 1/4-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet, 3/8-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8-inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2-inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses

by more than 1/8-inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus

3/8-inch or minus 1/4-inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus

or minus 1/8-inch.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform

joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.



1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches or less on center unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.

4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed

joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course

on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting

course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with

sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with

clear water. 2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8-inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2-inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet

walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners,

returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.



3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces

structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than inch wide between masonry and structural

steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of

control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at

joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.

4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FLASHING

A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that

could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

4. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric



sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2-inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2-inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

7. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed

masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained

enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for

grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of

site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of

grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion

thereof. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140

for compressive strength.



F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

G. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.

3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic

scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned

for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 1

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2


SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Structural steel.2. Prefabricated building columns.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 45 23 "Testing and Inspection Services".2. Section 05 12 13 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing".3. Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking".4. Section 13 34 19 "Metal Building Systems".

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Codeof Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as"SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns,beams, and braces and their connections.

C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows:1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6 with flanges thicker than 1 1/2 inches.2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches.3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches.

D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as"Protected Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elementsto protected zones are limited.

E. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significantdegradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System andwhich are indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings.



1.4 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this section shall apply, unless noted otherwise. 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”. 2. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," including the "Commentary"

and the Supplements thereto, as issued. 3. AISC "Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel”. 4. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings”. 5. ASTM A 6 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates,

Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use”. 6. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code. 7. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural

Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". 8. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Load and Resistance

Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts”.

9. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council), Painting Manuals, Volumes 1 and 2. 10. UL Fire Resistance Directory.

B. In the case of conflict between the Contract Documents and a reference standard, the Contract Documents shall govern. In the case of a conflict between the Contract Documents and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.


A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and

AISC 360.

B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

C. Construction: System as indicated on Drawings.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent

data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.



4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

5. Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds. 8. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include

structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. At full penetration welds, Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.


A. Submit the following informational submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For qualified installer, fabricator, and testing agency. 2. Welding certificates. 3. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. 4. Product Test Reports: For the following:

a. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

b. Direct-tension indicators. c. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. d. Shear stud connectors. e. Shop primers.

5. Source quality-control reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1, P2, or P3 as applicable for exposure or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-

critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.



E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion,

damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency

observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. W-Shapes: 60 percent. 2. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: 60 percent. 3. Plate and Bar: 25 percent. 4. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent.



5. Steel Pipe: 25 percent.6. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent.

B. W-Shapes: Refer Structural General Notes.

C. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: Refer Structural General Notes.

D. Plate and Bar: Refer Structural General Notes.

E. Corrosion-Resisting Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 588,Grade 50.

F. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: Refer Structural General Notes.

G. Steel Pipe: Refer Structural General Notes.1. Weight Class: See Plans.2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.

H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steelstructural bolts.1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type

with plain finish.

B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers (All bolts located in CrawlSpace): ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts.1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating.2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type

with mechanically deposited zinc coating finish.

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1,heavy-hex or round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splinedends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.1. Finish: Plain or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, where required.

D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.

E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, See Anchor Bolt Schedule on Drawings forGrade.1. Configuration: Straight.2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel.4. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.5. Finish:

a. General Condition – Plainb. Crawl Space - Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.



F. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.

G. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.

H. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

I. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to plane of expansion joint while resisting movement within plane of expansion joint. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amscot Structural Products Corp. b. Fluorocarbon Company Limited. c. R.J. Watson Bridge & Structural Engineered Systems. d. Seismic Energy Products, L.P.

2. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and PTFE or mirror-finished stainless steel. 3. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than 0.05. 4. Design Load: Not less than 5,000 psi . 5. Total Movement Capability: 2 inches.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Primer (General): Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, non-asphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Primer (Crawl Space Steel): Tnemec Perimeprime Series 394.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20.

2.4 GROUT

A. Refer Section 03 30 00.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.



3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected.

4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting

shop-priming operations.

B. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in final approved Shop Drawings. 1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for

delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other effects.

3. Camber structural steel members where indicated. The camber specified is the camber that is measured in the field with the beam on its side so that the beam weight has no effect. During shipment and handling, cambered members shall be supported in a way that will not result in loss of camber.

4. Camber tolerance a. Beams 50 feet and less; plus or minus 1/2 inch. b. Beams greater than 50 feet; plus or minus 1/2 inch, except tolerance can

be increased 1/8 inch for each 10 feet or fraction thereof in excess of 50 feet.

c. Contact engineer for members outside specified camber tolerance. Provide engineer with a list of beam locations and actual measured camber amounts. Submit an engineered shoring plan, if requested, that will allow the beam to deflect to the horizontal position after concrete placement without overloading the framing below.

5. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations.

6. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.

C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in

AWS D1.1.

D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.



H. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on approved shop drawings. 1. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated

to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes

by burning.

I. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Base plates hole sizes for anchor bolts may be oversized to facilitate erection: 1. Bolts 3/4 inch to 7/8 inch diameter: 1/2 inch oversize. 2. Bolts 1 inch to 1 1/2 inch diameter: 3/4 inch oversize. 3. Bolts over 1 3/4 inch diameter: 1 inch oversize.

J. Base Plate Washers: Sizes shall be as follows: 1. 3/4 inch diameter Bolts: 2 inch diameter x 1/4 inch thick 2. 7/8 inch diameter Bolts: 2 1/2 inch diameter x 5/16 inch thick 3. 1 inch diameter Bolts: 3 inch diameter x 3/8 inch thick 4. 1 1/4 inch diameter Bolts: 3 inch diameter x 1/2 inch thick 5. 1 1/2 inch diameter Bolts: 3 1/2 inch diameter x 1/2 inch thick 6. 1 3/4 inch diameter Bolts: 4 inch diameter x 5/8 inch thick 7. 2 inch diameter Bolts: 5 inch diameter x 3/4 inch thick

K. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. 1. Remove blemishes by filling, grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to

cleaning, treating, and shop priming. 2. Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC’s

"Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel" for architecturally exposed structural steel.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, Pretensioned, or Slip critical as required or indicated

on Drawings.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8, where required, for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment

of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.



2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing)

excluding crawl space steel. Crawl space steel shall be primed regardless of whether it is to receive fireproofing.

5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

D. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

E. Crawl space steel to be primed to a DFT between 2.5 and 3.5 mils.

F. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, non-asphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

G. GALVANIZING

H. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will

function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural steel frame and located

in exterior walls.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Refer Section 01 45 23. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being

fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and

other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until

cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations, to elevations indicated, and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and

plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow it to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.



2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, Pretensioned, or Slip critical as indicated on

Drawings.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8 for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of

temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel

smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment

of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.


A. Testing Agency: See Section 01 45 23.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.



1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.



STEEL FLOOR DECKING 05 31 00 - 1

SECTION 05 31 13 - STEEL FLOOR DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2


SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Composite floor deck.2. Electrified cellular floor deck.3. Noncomposite form deck.4. Noncomposite vented form deck.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 45 23 “Testing and Inspection Services”.2. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete".3. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing".4. Section 05 21 00 “Steel Joist Framing”

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents. Thelatest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this section shall apply, unlessnoted otherwise.1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code2. AWS D1.3 – Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel3. SDI – Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, Cellular

Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution.4. SSPC – Painting Manual5. UL – Fire Resistance Directory6. ICBO – Product Evaluation Reports


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels,

pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to otherconstruction.




A. Submit the following informational submittals: 1. Welding certificates. 2. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck. 3. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed

by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

4. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners. 5. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. 6. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Refer Section 01 45 23.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the

listings of another qualified testing agency.

C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."



2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.3. CMC Joist & Deck.4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.5. Cordeck.6. DACS, Inc.7. Epic Metals Corporation.8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.11. Roof Deck, Inc.12. Verco Manufacturing Co.13. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

B. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised patternribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary forComposite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum sectionproperties indicated, and with the following:1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: As indicated in Structural General Notes.2. Profile Depth: As indicated on plan.3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated in Structural General Notes.4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.

2.3 ELECTRIFIED CELLULAR FLOOR DECK A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productindicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:1. CMC Joist & Deck.2. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.3. Cordeck.4. HH Robertson Floor Systems; a CENTRIA company.5. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.6. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.7. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.8. Verco Manufacturing Co.9. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

C. Source Limitations for Electrified Cellular Floor Deck: Obtain cellular floor-deck unitsand compatible electrical components, such as preset inserts, activation kits, aftersetinserts, service fittings, header ducts, and trench header ducts, from singlemanufacturer.

D. Electrified Cellular Floor Deck: Fabricate steel-sheet cellular floor-deck panels,consisting of a ribbed top section welded to a lower flat-bottom sheet with interlocking



side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck" in SDI Publication No. 31. Fabricate deck to the minimum section properties, width of panel, number and area of cells per panel indicated, and the following: 1. Cellular Deck Type: Composite.2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc

coating.3. Profile Depth: As indicated on plan.4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thicknesses; Deck Unit/Bottom Plate: As indicated in

Structural General Notes.5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.6. Factory punch holes, of size and arrangement indicated, into each deck cell at

preset inserts and header duct locations.

2.4 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.3. CMC Joist & Deck.4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.5. Cordeck.6. DACS, Inc.7. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.8. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.9. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.10. Roof Deck, Inc.11. Valley Joist; Subsidiary of EBSCO Industries, Inc.12. Verco Manufacturing Co.13. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

B. Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet non-composite form-deckpanels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite SteelForm Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated,and with the following:1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 80

minimum, with top and underside surface shop primed with manufacturer'sstandard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.a. Color: Manufacturer's standard Gray.

2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 80, G90 zinccoating.

3. Profile Depth: As indicated on Plan.4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated in Structural General Notes.5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.6. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.



2.5 NONCOMPOSITE VENTED FORM DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.3. CMC Joist & Deck.4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.5. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.6. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.7. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.8. Roof Deck, Inc.9. Verco Manufacturing Co.10. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

B. Noncomposite Vented Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed- and vented-steel sheetnoncomposite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentaryfor Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following:1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 80, G60 zinc

coating.2. Profile Depth: As indicated on Plan.3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated in Structural General Notes.4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.5. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.6. Vent Slot Area: Manufacturer's standard vent slots providing 1.5 percent open

area.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that complywith requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material andfinish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, ofsame material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDIPublication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth unless otherwise indicated onDrawings.



G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.

I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.

J. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

K. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.

L. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

M. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. 1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of

abutting panels.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.



F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated on Drawings. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location where deck is 22

gage or less.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel

screws. 2. Mechanically clinch or button punch only with concrete filled decks. 3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Butted.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Revise "Floor-Deck Closures" Paragraph below to suit Project. Sealing cellular deck openings, butt joints, and junctions with trench headers with tape is not included in this Section. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.

F. Electrified Cellular Floor Deck: Install cellular floor system with deck assembled from units indicated. 1. Coordinate layout and installation of trench headers, preset inserts, duct fittings,

and other components specified in Section 260539 "Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems" with installation of electrified cellular metal floor deck.



G. Install piercing hanger tabs at 14 inches apart in both directions, within 9 inches of walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION

A. The composite steel deck shall be connected to the supporting steel beams by welding the shear/headed stud connectors through the deck as indicated in the drawings. Contractor to verify the attachment of the deck to the supporting member after the headed stud is welded. Improper amperage may cause burn through around the stud and the deck may not be adequately attached to the supporting deck.

B. Where shear/headed stud connectors are not specified, the metal deck shall be attached to the supporting steel with 3/4-inch diameter puddle welds at a maximum spacing of 12 inches.

C. Where the specified shear/headed stud connector spacing exceeds 12 inches, provide 3/4-inch diameter puddle welds between shear/headed stud connectors to maintain a maximum deck connection of 12 inches.

D. Where deck units abut side to side or end to end over a supporting member provide 3/4-inch diameter puddle welds on each deck unit at a maximum spacing of 12 inches.

E. Shear/Headed Stud Connectors: Field weld shear/headed stud connectors through deck to supporting frame according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer’s written instructions. Located connectors as indicated in the drawings. Remove and discard arc shields after welding shear/headed stud connectors.

3.5 DECK AND FLOOR DEFLECTION

A. The metal deck is designed to deflect up to 3/4-inch.

B. Uncambered steel beams are designed to be within code required deflection limits (Span/240). Cambered steel beams are designed to have a final deflected shape of less than 1/2-inch. Due to field tolerances and camber tolerances, these design limits may be slightly exceeded.

C. The contractor shall account for any additional concrete required due to these deflected shape tolerances.


A. Testing Agency: Refer Section 01 45 23.

B. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.



3.7 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom

surfaces of deck exposed to view.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



STEEL ROOF DECKING 05 31 00 - 1

SECTION 05 31 23 - STEEL ROOF DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2


SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Roof deck.2. Acoustical roof deck.3. Noncomposite vented roof deck.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 45 23 “Testing and Inspection Services”2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing".

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents. Thelatest adopted edition of all standard referenced in this section shall apply, unlessnoted otherwise.1. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code2. AWS D1.3 – Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel3. SDI – Design Manual4. SSPC – Painting Manual5. UL – Fire Resistance Directory6. ICBO – Product Evaluation Reports7. FM – Roof Assembly Classifications

B. In the case of conflict between the Contract Documents and a referenced standard, theContract Documents shall govern. In the case of a conflict between the ContractDocuments and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:



1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements: 1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners. 2. Acoustical roof deck.

D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Refer Section 01 45 23.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation

to maintain insulation free of moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."



B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testingagency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the

listings of another qualified testing agency.

C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half ofpreconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice forthe Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.3. CMC Joist & Deck.4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.5. Cordeck.6. DACS, Inc.7. Epic Metals Corporation.8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.11. Roof Deck, Inc.12. Valley Joist; Subsidiary of EBSCO Industries, Inc.13. Verco Manufacturing Co.14. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with"SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31,and with the following:1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40

minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitiveprimer.a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.


3. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS),Grade 40, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer'sstandard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Deck Profile: As indicated on plan.5. Profile Depth: As indicated on plan.6. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated in Structural General Notes.7. Span Condition: Triple span or more.8. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.



2.3 ACOUSTICAL ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.3. CMC Joist & Deck.4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.5. Cordeck.6. DACS, Inc.7. Epic Metals Corporation.8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.11. Roof Deck, Inc.12. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

B. Acoustical Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, tocomply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDIPublication No. 31, and with the following:1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40

minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitiveprimer.a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.


3. Deck Profile: As indicated in Structural General Notes.4. Cellular Deck Profile: As indicated in Structural General Notes.5. Profile Depth: As indicated in Structural General Notes.6. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated in Structural General Notes.7. Design Uncoated-Steel Thicknesses; Deck Unit/Bottom Plate: As indicated in

Structural General Notes.8. Span Condition: Triple span or more.9. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.10. Acoustical Perforations: Deck units with manufacturer's standard perforated

vertical webs.11. Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard pre-molded roll or strip of

glass or mineral fiber.a. Factory install sound-absorbing insulation into cells of cellular deck.

2.4 NONCOMPOSITE VENTED ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.3. CMC Joist & Deck.4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.5. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.6. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.



7. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.8. Roof Deck, Inc.9. Verco Manufacturing Co.10. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

B. Noncomposite Vented Roof Deck: Fabricate ribbed- and vented-steel sheetnoncomposite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentaryfor Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following:1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40, G60 zinc

coating.2. Profile Depth: As indicated in Structural General Notes.3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated in Structural General Notes.4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.5. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.6. Vent Slot Area: Manufacturer's standard vent slots providing 1-1/2.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that complywith requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material andfinish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, ofsame material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDIPublication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth unless otherwise indicated.

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of samematerial, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, withfactory-punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.

I. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material andfinish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

J. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same materialand finish as deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inchminimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.



K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

L. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasteners shall provide diaphragm shear and uplift resistance equal to or greater

than welding indicated herein and on Drawings.



3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: As indicated on Structural Plans. 2. Weld Spacing: As indicated on Structural Plans. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location if deck gauge is

lighter than 22 gauge.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals shown on Structural Plans: 1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel

screws. 2. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld or mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space welds or mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld or fastener at each corner. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or

mechanically fasten.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise

indicated.


A. Testing Agency: See Section 01 45 23.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.



3.5 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom

surfaces of deck exposed to view.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 1

SECTION 05 40 00 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Exterior nonload bearing wall framing.2. Soffit framing.3. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.


A. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.

B. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.


A. Delegated Design: General Contractor shall engage a qualified professional engineer, licensedin the State of Texas, to design cold formed steel framing.

B. Structural Performance: Delegated design engineer shall provide cold-formed steel framingdesigns capable of withstanding all code required design loads within limits and underconditions indicated on the construction documents and within this specification.1. Design Loads: Designs shall be capable of withstanding the worst case loading as

indicated on the Structural Drawings, and/or as required by the locally adopted BuildingCode. The design shall cover the worst case loading in all instances.

2. Coordinate the requirements on the Structural and Architectural Drawings with therequirements of this Section. If a conflict exists, notations on the Structural Drawings takeprecedence.

3. The following document governs the Work, except where more restrictive items arespecified:a. AISI Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members Wind Load

Minimum Design Loads for exterior and/or load bearing and/or soffit applications:1. As required by code officials having jurisdiction.2. Deflection: 1/600 for clear simple spans3. Deflection: 1/300 for cantilever conditions and roof parapets4. Gauge: 16 gauge minimum, unless noted otherwise.

b. Minimum Design Loads for interior and/or exterior suspended furr-downs with amaximum vertical drop on either side of 5’-0” or greater:1. As required by code officials having jurisdiction.2. Deflection: 1/600 for clear simple spans3. Deflection: 1/300 for cantilever conditions and roof parapets4. Gauge: 20 gauge minimum, unless noted otherwise.5. It is a common practice for studs with thinner than 20 gauge to be crimped

and/or ribbed to increase the strength of the overall stud cross section forvarious loading applications. These studs are typically noted by manufacturer



as “Equivalent” to a thicker gauge. These “Equivalent” type studs are not allowed in a vertically suspended application with greater than 5’-0” of vertical wall drop, 20 Gauge is the minimum thickness allowed for these applications.

4. Welding Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordancewith AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure".

5. Studs, tracks, channels, and other light gauge framing members shall conform torequirements of ASTM C955.

6. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated fora fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governingregulations, provide units that have been approved by governing authorities that havejurisdiction.

7. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside theinsulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure,connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effectswhen subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 degrees F (67degrees C).

8. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for constructiontolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure:a. Upward and downward movement of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

9. Design exterior nonload bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflectionwithout regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

C. Cold Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.2. Wall Studs: AISI S211.3. Headers: AISI S212.4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data for cold formed steel framing product and accessories includingfactory applied primers.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout, spacings, sizes, thickness, and types of cold formed steelframing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.1. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,

bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.2. Shall bear the seal of a Registered Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Texas.

C. Supplementary Design Details: The general design is presumed adequate to permit compliancewith the specified performance. Provide engineering calculations and shop drawings tosupplement the general design. Calculations shall bear the seal of a Registered ProfessionalEngineer, licensed in the State of Texas. Calculations and shop drawings must show design willwith stand wind loading commiserate with class and rating of the project.


A. Regulatory Requirements:1. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

a. AWS D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code - Steel.b. AWS D1.3/D1.3M Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.c. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: “AISI Specification Provision for Screw Connections.”



2. Comply with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members and Standard for Cold Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions. a. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are

indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

3. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119; testing by a UL. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Indicate design designations from UL Fire Resistance Directory.

4. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of cold formed metal framing components with minimum five years documented experience.

5. Install system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

6. Install system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

7. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements and galvanized-coating thickness

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the State of Texas and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated in material, design, and extent. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and

structural data.


A. Protect cold formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 4. Marino\WARE. 5. Mill Steel Framing. 6. SCAFCO Corporation. 7. The Steel Network.

2.2 EXTERIOR NONLOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: C shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges: 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm), and

0.0966 inch (2.45 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). 3. Section Properties: Refer to the Drawings.



B. Steel Track: U shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm), and

0.0966 inch (2.45 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. b. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. c. Marino\WARE. d. SCAFCO Corporation. e. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. f. Steel Network, Inc. (The). g. Steeler, Inc.

D. Single Deflection Track: Single, deep leg, U shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure: 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm), 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), 0.0677

inch (1.72 mm), and 0.0966 inch (2.45 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for one story structures and 1 inch (25

mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Double, deep leg, U shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges

designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure: a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm), 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm),

0.0677 inch (1.72 mm), and 0.0966 inch (2.45 mm). b. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for one story structures and 1

inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated: a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm), 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm),

0.0677 inch (1.72 mm), and 0.0966 inch (2.45 mm). b. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for one story structures and 1

inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.

F. Drift Clips: Bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

2.3 SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Exterior Soffit Frame: C shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges: 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)] [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) minimum.

2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.



B. Provide accessories of appropriate thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated:1. Supplementary framing.2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.3. Web stiffeners.4. Anchor clips.5. End clips.6. Foundation clips.7. Gusset plates.8. Stud kickers and knee braces.9. Joist hangers and end closures.10. Hole reinforcing plates.11. Backer plates.

C. Anchors, Clips, and Fasteners:1. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot dip process according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M.2. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with allowable load or

strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greaterthan or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted bya qualified testing agency.

3. Power Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculatedaccording to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined bytesting per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

4. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion resistant coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.a. Head Type: Low profile head beneath sheathing.

5. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

D. Miscellaneous Materials:1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or ASTM A 780.2. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout

containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, andplasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluidconsistency and 30 minute working time.

3. Shims: Load bearing, high density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of coldformed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.

4. Sealer Gaskets: Closed cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected fromstandard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and withconnections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI specifications and standards,manufacturer written instructions, and specified requirements.1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.3. Fasten cold formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framingmembers is not permitted.a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw

penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.



B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erectionstresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximumallowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)

from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements ofsheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirementsfor installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementaryframing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire resistive materials, remove only as much as necessary to completeinstallation of cold formed framing without reducing thickness of fire resistive materials belowrequired thickness to obtain fire resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire resistivematerials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load bearing wall bottom track andthe top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure auniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top offoundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.

3.3 ERECTION

A. General:1. Track Anchors: Install anchors maximum 4 feet - 0 inches on center; design anchors and

spacing to carry live, dead and wind loads.2. Track Splices: Provide channel inserts or weld track splices.3. Erection: Install members plumb, level, and in a true plane.4. Fastenings: Make assembly rigid and secure, with welds free of voids and burnouts.

B. Install metal framing systems in accordance with stud manufacturer's printed instructions.

C. Runner Tracks:1. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs.2. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs.3. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer, except do not exceed 24 inches

on center for nail or power-driven fasteners, nor 16 inches on center for other types ofattachment.

4. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.5. Tracks shall be anchored to structural steel prior to installing sprayed on insulation.



6. Provide Deflection Track (DT), at top of stud walls at floor or roof above, typically. Allowfor 1/2 inch movement of primary structure. Do not attach studs directly to DeflectionTrack.

7. Vertical Deflection Clips: Provide manufacturer’s standard bypass and head clips,capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primarystructure

D. Secure studs to top track and bottom runner track by means of approved self-drilling screws orwelding at both inside and outside flanges of 14 gauge or heavier material. Screws and weldsshall be of sufficient size to insure strength of connection. All welding shall comply withAmerican Welding Society "Specification for Welding Sheet Steel in Structures."

E. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls orwarped surfaces and similar requirements.

F. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends ofstiffeners to supporting structure. Use Zee clips as specified above. Weld "Z" shaped clips tostructural members as shown on drawings. Maximum 2 feet on center vertical.

G. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in the metal framing system wherever wallsor partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim andfurnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type ofsupplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with the stud manufacturer'srecommendations and industry standards in each case, considering the weight or loadingresulting from the item supported.

H. Frame wall openings with extra studs, equal to the number of studs interrupted by wallopenings, placed at each side of wall openings. Install runner tracks and jack studs above andbelow wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with shoes or by welding, and space jack studssame as full-height studs of the wall. Secure stud system all around to wall opening frame in themanner indicated.

I. Install bracing/bridging in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and design conditions.

J. Touch up field welds and damaged galvanized coating, except touch up of field cut studs is notrequired.

K. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the jointwith components of stud system.

L. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, space (vertical distance) at no more than 54 incheson center. Weld at each intersection.



METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:1. Miscellaneous metal items and their related components which are not necessarily

individually described shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the intent of thedrawings and specifications and as required to complete the Work.

2. The Work of this Section is governed by Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel, except wheremore stringent requirements are contained herein or on the Structural Drawings. If aconflict exists, notations on the Structural Drawings take precedence.

B. Requirements including but not limited to:1. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Comparable Product: Product demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or whereindicated as a produce substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristicsthat equal or exceed those of specified product.


A. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movementsresulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures bypreventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, andother detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materialsdue to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F (67 degrees C), ambient; 180 degrees F

(100 degrees C), material surfaces.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit data for miscellaneous metal fabrications and paint, coatings, and groutaccessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing the fabrication and erection of each metalfabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications andtheir connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data, for information only, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineerresponsible for their preparation.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: Submit manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.




A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Building Code: Comply with applicable requirements of the IBC for metal fabrications. 2. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

a. AWS D1.2/D1.2 M Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. b. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for

welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

B. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project for a minimum of 5 years, with a record of successful in service performance, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.8 STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING

A. Store metal fabrications in a dry, well ventilated, weathertight place. Deliver and handle so as to prevent any type of damage to the fabricated Work.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other Work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.10 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. As scope and performance documents, the Drawings and Specifications do not necessarily in-dicate or describe all the work required for the performance and completion of the Work. Con-tracts will be let on the basis of such documents with the understanding that the Contractor shall furnish and install the items required for proper completion of the Work without adjustment to price or schedule. Work shall be of sound, quality construction and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the inclusions of adequate labor and materials to cover the proper and timely fabrication and installation of the miscellaneous metal items indicated, described, or im-plied.

B. As a performance specification, the criteria for the solution of structurally sound miscellaneous

metal items indicated on the Drawings or specified herein are the sole purpose of defining the design intent and performance requirements. The details shown are intended to emphasize the acceptable profiles and performance requirements for this Project. To avoid any misunder-



standing or lack of interpretation, the Contractor is hereby advised that the responsibility for the miscellaneous metal items are totally his and that designs and resolutions proposed in the Con-tractor’s shop drawings, structural calculations, and related documentation shall be demon-strated throughout the Work and warranty period specified or required.

C. Design proposal submissions which follow exactly the details indicated on the Drawings, will not

relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the design, fabrication, erection, or performance of the Work of this Section.

D. In the event of a controversy over the design, the decision of the Architect will take precedence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches (41 mm by 41 mm). 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B. with G90

(Z275) coating; [0.108 inch (2.8 mm) nominal thickness. 3. Cold Formed Metal Channels: Flange edges returned toward web and with 9/16 inch

(14.3 mm) wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. 4. Width of Channels: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). 5. Depth of Channels: Indicated on Drawings. 6. Metal and Thickness: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural

quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108 inch (2.8mm) nominal thickness.

7. Finish: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

C. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

D. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

E. Aluminum Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

F. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

G. Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

H. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Universal primer, organic zinc rich primer, complying with

SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat. Provide 10-99 (red) or 10-09 (gray) by Tnemec Company.

2. Universal Shop Primer: Fast curing, lead and chromate free, universal modified alkyd primer and compatible with topcoat. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc rich primer.



3. Water Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel and compatible with topcoat.

4. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

5. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with SSPC-Paint 12, containing no asbestos fibers, or cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187 ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

6. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

7. Concrete Materials and Properties: Composed of ASTM C150 Type I Portland cement, ASTM C33 sand and coarse aggregates and potable water to produce a low slump mix suitable for placement. Grade coarse aggregate from 1/8” with at least 95 % passing a 3/8” sieve and not more than 10% passing a No. 8 sieve. Fill shall be proportioned to provide a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a

radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

2. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing Work.

3. Form exposed Work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 4. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

5. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed

fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

6. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

7. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

8. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

9. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 inch by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 mm by 38 mm), with a minimum 6 inch (150 mm) embedment and 2 inch (50 mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports necessary to complete the Work and which are not a part of the structural framework.



1. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. a. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. b. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

2.3 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3mm) maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5mm).

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5mm).

D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch (3mm) in 48 inches (1.2m).

E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5mm) in 48 inches (1.2m).

2.4 FINISHES

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surfaces.

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41. 1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.



4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6mm) per story, noncumulative.

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6mm).

C. Maximum Out of Position: 1/4 inch (6mm).

3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil (0.05 mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 90 00.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



PRE-ENGINEERED STEEL PAN STAIRS 05 51 13 - 1

SECTION 05 51 13 - PRE-ENGINEERED STEEL PAN STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete stair fill.

B. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous framing and stair safety nosings.

C. Section 09 90 00 - Paintings and Coatings.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Conform to the following reference standards as applicable to the Work:1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).3. ASTM International (ASTM).

a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless.c. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI

Tensile Strength.d. A1011, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High Strength Low-Alloy and High Strength Low-Alloy with ImprovedFormability.

4. American Welding Society (AWS).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:1. Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include

details of joints, attachments, and clearances.2. Submit design calculations for the materials and their connections designed by the

Contractor, prior to or with the shop drawings. Calculations shall bear the seal of aRegistered Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Texas. Shop drawingscontaining connections for which calculations have not been received will be returnedunchecked as an incomplete submittal. Design Calculations will be retained for theArchitect’s file, and will not be approved or returned.



1.7 DOCUMENT PRECEDENCE

A. The Work of this Section is governed by Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel, except where morestringent requirements are contained herein or on the Structural Drawings. Requirements andnotations on the Structural Drawings supersede conflicting requirements of this Section.


PRE-ENGINEERED STEEL PAN STAIRS

05 51 13 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: For pre-engineered stairs and rails shall have a minimum of ten (10) years

experience and employ a licensed engineer to design these stairs. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes, Bars, and Plates: ASTM A36 rolled to the tolerances of ASTM A6. B. Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36. D. Pipe: ASTM A53, standard weight black steel pipe, sizes indicated on the Drawings. E. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011, commercial quality, hot rolled, U.S. Standard gauges listed are for

field fabricated stairs, pre-engineered stairs fabricated from sheet steel of gauge recommended by stair manufacturer. 1. Pan Treads and Risers: 12 gauge. 2. Landings and Platforms:

a. Thickness: 28 gauge. b. Corrugation Depth: 9/16 inch minimum. c. Moment of Inertia: 0.010 inches4 d. Section Modulus: 0.035 inches3 e. Provide heavy duty checkerplate where indicated.

F. Concrete Stair Fill: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

G. Safety Stair Nosings: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

2.3 SHOP PRIMER SYSTEM A. Minimum Preparation: Remove loose mill scale, loose rust, and other foreign materials to the

standards SSPC. B. Acceptable Primers: Any primer that meets Federal or SSPC specifications for use over the

specified preparation. Three such primers are FS TT-P-86 Type I or II, SSPC-Paint 4-64 T or FS TT-P-636D iron oxide zinc chromate alkyd primer with a thickness of 2.0 mils minimum dry film.

C. Temporary Protection performance:

1. Length of Protection: Minimum of six (6) months exposed at job site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Design and fabricate steel pan stairs and railings to sizes and details indicated on the Drawings.

Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. Construct Work true to lines, planes, and design with tight, close fitting joints.

B. Form metal pan treads, risers, and platforms to profiles and depths indicated in Drawings. Nest

tread sections into riser sections without exposed connections. Reinforce underside of metal pans with properly sized angle or tee stiffeners spaced to eliminate bouncing and springing action. Provide all necessary supports whether indicated or not.


PRE-ENGINEERED STEEL PAN STAIRS

05 51 13 - 3

C. Assemble railings in longest practicable lengths to hold field splices to a minimum. Make changes

in direction with closely fitted joints to attain uniform dimensions of members. D. Provide anchors, bolts, expansion devices, and miscellaneous accessory items necessary for

installation. E. Where fastenings other than welds are used for connections, countersink and finish flush with

exposed surface. F. After fabrication, paint entire assembly with specified primer. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install pre-engineered stairs in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Any shimming required to correct elevation shall be added below the first riser. Shimming in excess of one (1) inch will not be acceptable.

C. Concrete fill materials for metal pan treads, landings and platforms are specified in Section 03 30

00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

D. Install safety stair nosings as shown and specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. All rough carpentry items including, but not limited to:1. Wood blocking for support of items supported on or recessed into wood framing or

requiring wood blocking for support, including but not limited to casework, TV mounts,marker boards, metal shelving, toilet partitions, toilet accessories and window blinds,door strikes, wall stops, wall panels.

2. Miscellaneous framing items and plywood sheathing.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. All Sections of Work supported on or recessed into wood framing or requiring wood blocking forsupport, such as wall trim, wall cabinets, handrails, lockers, toilet compartments, toilet and bathaccessories, markerboards, tackboards, projection screens, fire extinguisher cabinets, etc., asapplicable to the Project.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data on wood treatment materials.

1.5 STANDARDS AND GRADING

A. All lumber used structurally shall be graded and marked with grade and trademark of a lumbergrading organization approved by the Architect, except that a certification of grade from such agrading organization may be accepted in lieu of grade and trademarks when approved byArchitect. Trademark of manufacturer shall also appear on each piece.

B. Each piece of plywood used structurally shall carry the American Plywood Association trademark.

C. Grading Rules: Conform with all applicable requirements of American Lumber Standards"Simplified Practice Recommendations R-16" and to grading rules of manufacturer's associationunder whose rules the lumber is produced.

D. Reference Standards: Conform with all requirements.1. U.S. Dept. of Commerce Product Standards (PS).2. American Plywood Association (APA).

a. Standards and Construction Guide.

3. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA).a. Standards, as they apply.

4. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)a. "Quality Standards."

5. National Woodwork Manufacturers’ Association (NWMA).a. Standards.



6. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). a. Manual.


A. Lumber: 1. Treated No. 2, S4S Southern Yellow Pine, #1 kiln dried.

a. Comply with NWMA Standards b. Use for blocking, stripping, grounds, cants and miscellaneous wood items in

contact with concrete, or exposed to the weather.

2. No. 2, S4S Southern Yellow Pine: Use for framing, blocking, stripping and miscellaneous concealed interior lumber not exposed to concrete, or moisture, when FRS lumber is not required by building code.

3. Fire Retardant No, 2, S4S Southern Pine: Refer to Fire Retardant Treatment below. Use for framing, plates and blocking in all walls and partitions where required by building code or noted on drawings.

B. Plywood:

1. General: Comply with APA Standards. 2. APA A-D, Group 1 Interior used where appearance of only one side is exposed to view

for interior locations. Use for wall liner at MDF/IDF closets and telephone boards in mechanical and telephone rooms. 3/4 inch thick unless required or shown otherwise. Paint per Section 09 91 00.

3. Exterior plywood, Group 1, APA rated sheathing. Use where miscellaneous plywood is exposed to concrete, weather, or at roof construction as sheathing.

4. Fire Retardant Treated Plywood: Refer to Fire Retardant Treatment below. Use when required by building code or noted on drawings.

5. Underlayment: If shown or required, APA rated Sturdi-floor, exterior grade, tongue and groove edges.

6. APA C-D, Interior DFPA grade-use at mechanical rooms, electrical closets, etc, where wall mounted panels are required for equipment.

C. Rough Hardware:

1. Nails, Spikes, and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations: Size and type to suit application. Do not use to resist “pull-out” loads.

2. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit application. Galvanize for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood. Plain finish for other interior locations.

3. Fasteners: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry and concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel.

D. Wood Treatment:

1. Preservative Treatment (Concealed Conditions): a. Micronized Copper Quaternary (MCQ): Pressure impregnate preservative to net

retention of 0.25 lbs./cu.ft., in plant licensed by manufacturer in accordance with the following standards: 1) Preservative Treatment Standard: AWPA P5. 2) Structural Lumber Treatment Standard: AWPA C31. 3) Plywood Treatment Standard: AWPA C9.

b. Brush two (2) coats of preservative on bored or sawn surfaces of treated lumber.



c. Provide Quality Mark Stamp on treated wood for identification and will not be concealed by paint.

d. Fasteners: Metal fasteners in contact with preservative treated wood shall be G-90 galvanized, minimum, or stainless steel in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. No uncoated steel shall come in contact with preservative wood.

e. ACQ and CCA preservatives not permitted. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Osmose “MicroPro” Smart Sense; or Architect

approved equal.

2. Fire Retardant Treatment: a. Lumber shall be pressure-impregnated with non-combustible fire retardant

chemicals in accordance with U.L. FRS Fire Hazard Classification. All lumber must be dried following treatment in accordance with AWPA Standard C20.

b. Plywood shall be pressure-impregnated with non-combustible fire retardant chemicals in accordance with U.L. FRS Fire Hazard Classification. All plywood must be dried following treatment in accordance with AWPA Standards C27.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wood Framing: 1. Framing and blocking shall be accurately cut and fitted true to line and levels, avoiding

shims and wedges. 2. Wood blocking for wall mounted accessories to be fire retardant. 3. Steel plate installed at location of door hardware impact, 12 inch x 12 inch, where

hardware could strike wall. Refer to Division 5. 4. All interior wood blocking shall be fire resistant. 5. All interior wood blocking shall be exterior grade fire resistant. 6. Spiking and nailing shall be done using largest size spikes and nail practicable. 7. Unless otherwise shown, use 2 inch by 4 inch wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c. with 4

inch face perpendicular to direction of wall or partition. Provide single bottom plate and double-top plates 2 inches thick by width of studs.

8. Bolt nailers and blocking to steel, masonry or concrete members with bolts or proportionate strength of members attached from each end, except as otherwise noted on plans.

9. Provide blocking, bucks and framing as necessary and for other trades as required. 10. Drill lumber accurately for bolts and fit all bolts with suitable washers. 11. Perimeter wood blocking to be attached 2’-0” staggered with 1/2” galvanized bolts

through both nailers. 12. Screws are to be used for perimeter edge nailers. No nailing permitted.

B. Plywood:

1. Install plywood over framing in accordance with instruction of American Plywood Association Construction Guide Form No. E30C.

2. Install underlayment plywood as shown in accordance with instructions of American Plywood Association. Space panel joints and edges 1/32 inch. Fill and sand panel edge joints, surface roughness, and damaged or open areas. Nail with 4d ring-shank nails spaced at six (6) inches at edges and eight (8) inches in field each way.


PBK Sports Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project Project No. P2119500SP Gonzales Independent School District Gonzales Independent School District

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 00 - 1

SECTION 07 11 00 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Cold applied, emulsified asphalt dampproofing.2. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source fromsingle manufacturer. Provide protection course and auxiliary materials recommended in writingby manufacturer of primary materials.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weatherconditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' writteninstructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:1. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.2. Henry Company.3. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.1. Permeability, perm-inch: 0.10.2. Cured Film Properties:

a. Flammability: No flash.b. Firm set, hours, maximum (50 percent RH, 70+ degrees F).c. Heat test, 212 degrees: No blistering or sagging.d. Flexibility, @ 180 degrees F arc, 2 inch mandrel, @ 32 degrees F: No cracking,

resistant to water, no blistering, no re-emulsification after thorough curing.e. Direct flame test: No flame.

C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.



E. Auxiliary Materials: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing. 1. Emulsified Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as

recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. Asphalt Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I. 3. Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex modified repair mortar of type recommended in

writing by dampproofing manufacturer. 4. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or

mineral reinforced asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt saturated fibrous liners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and conditions affecting performance of bituminous dampproofing work. 1. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.

B. Proceed with application after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and correcting unsatisfactory conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Mask or protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to the dampproofing work; fill voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any, as recommended in writing by prime material manufacturer.

C. Surface Preparation, Masonry: Remove dust, dirt, old loose or scaling coatings from surface prior to coating. Seal cracks, joints, penetrations, and splits and repaired with 4 inch (25mm) wide glass fabric scrim tape embedded dampproofing. 1. Dampen dusty or porous masonry surfaces with water. Prime masonry and metal

surfaces with recommended primer. 2. Obtain approval of Architect must for surface preparation and sealing of cracks, joints

and other penetrations prior to the application of dampproofing.

D. Surface Preparation, Sheathing: Prep joints and penetrations in exterior sheathing in accordance with sheathing manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; cover with asphalt coated glass fabric.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection. 2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth

surface and uninterrupted coverage.



B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished grade line to top of footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing. 1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not

extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 2. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes

in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.

C. Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and items that penetrate inner wythe. 1. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that

interrupt inner wythe. 2. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto shelf angles supporting veneer.

D. Where dampproofing interior face of above grade, exterior concrete and masonry walls, continue dampproofing through intersecting walls by keeping vertical mortar joints at intersection temporarily open or by dampproofing wall before constructing intersecting walls.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Dampproofing: 1. Concrete Foundations and Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply two brush or spray coats at

not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.6 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat.

2. Masonry Backup for Brick Veneer Assemblies: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).

3. Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).

4. Interior Face of Exterior Concrete Walls: Where above grade and indicated to be furred and finished, apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).

B. Protection Board: Install protection course over completed and cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing material and protection course manufacturers' written instructions for attaching protection course. 1. Support protection course over cured coating with spot application of adhesive type

recommended in writing by protection board manufacturer. 2. Install protection course within 24 hours of installation of dampproofing (while coating is

tacky) to ensure adhesion.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.



COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 14 00 - 1

SECTION 07 14 00 - COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirement including but not limited to:1. Polyurethane waterproofing.2. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of waterproofing including construction details,material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating

substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and extent of waterproofing.1. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and

outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C. Qualification Data: Submit installer’s qualification data.

D. Field quality control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity having minimum 5 years documented experience and employsinstallers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials from single sourcefrom single manufacturer.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition

and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special detailsand sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, andprotection and repairs.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substratetemperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.1. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds

85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above dewpoint.

2. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditionsare imminent during application and curing period.



B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Written warranty signed by manufacturer in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING

A. Single Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M and coal tar free. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; (800) 526-1072. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. (800) 527-7092. c. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company; (800) 527-9948. d. ITW Polymers Sealants North America (formerly Pacific Polymers, Inc.). e. Neogard; a division of Jones-Blair, Inc. f. W.R. Meadows, Inc. ; (800) 542-7665. g. Tremco.

B. Single Component, Reinforced, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M and coal tar free. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. c. Urethane Polymers International, Inc.

2.2 TWO COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING

A. Two Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M and coal tar free. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following: a. ITW Polymers Sealants North America (formerly Pacific Polymers, Inc.). b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. c. Gaco Western LLC. d. Urethane Polymers International, Inc. e. Tremco.

2.3 LATEX RUBBER WATERPROOFING

A. Two Component, Unreinforced, Latex Rubber Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M; coal tar free. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following: a. GCP Applied Technologies (formerly Grace Construction Products).

2. Hydrostatic Head Resistance: 65 feet (20 m) minimum; ASTM D 5385.

B. Two Component, Reinforced, Latex Rubber Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M; coal-tar free.



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. GCP Applied Technologies (formerly Grace Construction Products).

2. Hydrostatic Head Resistance: 197 feet (60 m) minimum; ASTM D 5385.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with one another and with waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Primer, sealer, or surface conditioner; factory formulated acrylic latex, polyurethane, or epoxy recommended by manufacturer compatible with waterproofing membrane.

C. Sheet Flashing: 50 mil (1.3 mm) minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene. 1. Adhesive: Contact adhesive.

D. Membrane Reinforcing Fabric: Fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric, recommended weight for type of waterproofing.

E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.

F. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing; ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25 or greater; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications and Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure complying with requirements of Section 079200; and recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions. 1. Backer Rod: Closed cell polyethylene foam.

2.5 PROTECTION COURSE

A. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral reinforced asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Soprema, Inc. b. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

2. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch (6 mm), nominal,

elsewhere. 3. Adhesive: Rubber based solvent type recommended in writing by waterproofing

manufacturer.

B. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced on one side with plastic film, nominal thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm), with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) according to ASTM D 1621 and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent according to ASTM C 272. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The).

C. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced on both sides with plastic film, nominal thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm), with compressive strength of



not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) according to ASTM D 1621 and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent according to ASTM C 272. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Kingspan Insulation. b. Owens Corning.

D. Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation with continuous surface skins on both faces intact, unfaced; ASTM C 578, Type X, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

E. Protection Course: Molded-polystyrene board insulation, ASTM C 578, Type I, 0.90-lb/cu. ft. (15-kg/cu. m) minimum density, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum thickness.

2.6 MOLDED SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Faced, Molded Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needle punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21 mm) sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 gpm to 18 gpm per ft. (112 to 220 L/min. per m). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. American Hydrotech, Inc. b. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. d. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company. e. GCP Applied Technologies (formerly Grace Construction Products). f. Insulation Solutions, Inc. g. Polyguard Products, Inc. h. Urethane Polymers International, Inc.

B. Nonwoven Geotextile Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needle punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21 mm) sieve laminated to one side of the core, without a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 gpm to 18 gpm per ft. (112 to 220 L/min. per m). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. American Hydrotech, Inc. b. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. d. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company. e. GCP Applied Technologies (formerly Grace Construction Products). f. Insulation Solutions, Inc. g. Polyguard Products, Inc. h. Soprema, Inc. i. Urethane Polymers International, Inc. j. W. R. Meadows, Inc. k. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company.

2.7 INSULATION

A. Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board insulation according to ASTM C 578, shiplap edged. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:



a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Kingspan Insulation. d. Owens Corning. e. T. Clear Corporation, a subsidiary of Fin Pan Inc.

2. Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 3. Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

2.8 INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS

A. Unfaced, Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded polystyrene board insulation according to ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The).

B. Unfaced, Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded polystyrene board insulation according to ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning.

C. Geotextile Faced, Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded polystyrene board insulation according to ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue and groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels faced with a nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Owens Corning. b. T. Clear Corporation, a subsidiary of Fin Pan Inc.

PART 3 - GENERAL

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the work. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in

writing by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing

by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

B. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids.

D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. 1. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine aggregate

according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, or form release agents. Remove remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.

E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS, PENETRATIONS, AND CORNERS

A. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.

B. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT

A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker on sealant surface, beneath preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate along each side of joint and apply a single thickness of preparation strip

at least 6 inches (150 mm) wide along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.

3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 898/C 898M and ASTM C 1471.

B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

C. Apply primer over prepared substrate unless otherwise instructed in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.



1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with a dry film thickness of 90 mils (2.25 mm).

2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.

(9.3 sq. m).

E. Reinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other suitable application method. 1. Apply first coat of waterproofing, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and apply second

coat of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain a seamless reinforced membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with an average dry film total thickness required by manufacturer to achieve specified warranty.

2. Apply reinforced waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.

(9.3 sq. m).

F. Cure waterproofing, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application and curing.

G. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. For horizontal applications, install protection course loose laid over fully cured

membrane. 2. For vertical applications, set protection course in nominally cured membrane, which will

act as an adhesive. If membrane cures before application of protection course, use adhesive.

3.6 MOLDED SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or another method that does not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install board insulation or protection course before installing

drainage panels.

3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of projections and penetrations.

B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

3.8 INSULATION DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of projections and penetrations.

B. Ensure that drainage channels are aligned and free of obstructions.



C. On vertical surfaces, set insulation drainage panels in adhesive or tape applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation drainage panels according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections: 1. Testing agency shall verify thickness of waterproofing during application for each 600 sq.

ft. (56 sq. m) of installed waterproofing or part thereof. 2. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in

ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. a. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) with a minimum depth of 1 inch

(25 mm) and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (50 mm) of clearance from top of sheet flashings.

b. Flood each area for 24 hours. c. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until

waterproofing installation is watertight.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components and to furnish daily reports to Architect.

C. If test results or inspections show waterproofing does not comply with requirements, remove and replace or repair the waterproofing as recommended in writing by manufacturer, and make further repairs after retesting and inspecting until waterproofing installation passes.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C. Protect installed board insulation or drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

D. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

E. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.



WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00 - 1

SECTION 07 19 00 - WATER REPELLENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditionsand Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Penetrating water repellent treatment for masonry and concrete surfaces.2. Film forming water repellent treatments for masonry and concrete surfaces.3. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.


A. Performance: Water repellents shall meet the following performance requirements as determined bytesting on standard substrates representing those indicated.

B. Water Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours for treatedcompared to untreated specimens when tested according to the following:1. Cast Stone: ASTM C 1195.2. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140.3. Clay Brick: ASTM C 67.4. Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco): ASTM D 6532.

C. Water-Vapor Transmission: Comply with one or both of the following:1. Maximum 10 percent reduction water-vapor transmission of treated compared to untreated

specimens, according to ASTM E 96/E 96M.2. Minimum 80 percent water-vapor transmission of treated compared to untreated specimens,

according to ASTM D 1653.

D. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum 90 percent reduction in leakage rate oftreated compared to untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 514/E 514M.

E. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water repellent performance after 2500 hours of weatheringaccording to ASTM G 154 compared to water repellent-treated specimens before weathering.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data including include performance data, DFT per coat, spreading rate,number of coats for each type of substrate, application procedures, and available colors.


A. Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.


A. Limitations: Proceed with application when existing and forecasted weather and substrateconditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions andwarranty requirements:1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days.



2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies. 3. Ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) and below 100 degrees F (37.8

degrees C) and will remain so for 24 hours. 4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate surface temperature is above 40 degrees F (4.4

degrees C) and below 100 degrees F (37.8 degrees C). 5. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours. 6. Not less than 24 hours have passed since surfaces were last wet. 7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or

surfaces not intended to be treated.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Written warranty signed by manufacturer in which manufacturer and applicator agree to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS

A. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 20 percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. W.R. Meadows; (800) 342-5976. b. Advanced Chemical Technologies, Inc.; (405) 843-2585. c. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; (800) 526-1072. d. Dayton Superior; (281) 590-6670. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; (800) 321-7628. f. PROSOCO, Inc.; (800) 255-4255. g. Tnemec, Inc.; (816) 483-3400. h. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; (888) 839-2661.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's

requirements. Check moisture content in minimum of three representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer.

2. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent.

3. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent.

B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica containing or siliceous minerals.

C. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. New Construction and Repairs: Allow concrete and other cementitious materials to age before application of water repellent, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Cast Stone and Concrete Unit Masonry: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other

substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents according to ASTM E 1857.

2. Clay Brick Masonry: ASTM D 5703. 3. Natural Stone: ASTM C 1515. 4. Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco): ASTM E 1857.

C. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation.

D. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured.

E. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water repellent work may precede sealant application if sealant adhesion and compatibility

have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used.

B. Apply coating of water repellent on surfaces to be treated using 15 psi (103 kPa) pressure spray with a fan type spray nozzle, roller, or brush to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated. 1. Precast Concrete and Cast Stone: At Contractor's option, first application of water repellent

may be completed before installing units. Mask mortar and sealant bond surfaces to prevent water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces. Remove masking after repellent has cured.

C. Apply second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.


A. Testing of Water Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when water repellent is being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample water repellent

material being used. Samples of material delivered to site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Architect.



B. Coverage Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested. 2. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Architect.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.



THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Extruded polystrene foam board2. Polyisocyanurate foam plastic board.3. Thermal insulation.4. Glass fiber blanket.5. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Comparable Product: Product demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or whereindicated as a produce substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristicsthat equal or exceed those of specified product.


A. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry.

B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

C. Section 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceiling Panels.

D. Division 23 – Mechanical: Duct Insulation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data and installation instructions for each type of insulation productspecified.

B. Samples: Six (6) inch x six (6) inch piece of rigid insulation for Architect’s approval.

C. Certifications:1. Manufacturer’s certification of compatibility of rigid insulation with dampproofing mastic.2. Manufacturers affidavit that materials used in Project contain no asbestos.


A. Regulatory Requirements:1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing and inspecting organization. a. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84.

1) Flame Spread Index: Maximum 25.2) Smoke Developed Index: Maximum 450.



b. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. c. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

2. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) 255 Test of Surface Burning Characteristics

of Building Materials. 3. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 723 Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

B. Cellulose Insulation Manufacturer: Manufacturer having minimum 5 years documented experience and ISO 9002 Certified. 1. Manufacturer shall provide independent laboratory follow up inspection services of

Underwriters Laboratory and Factory Mutual. Label each bag accordingly.

C. Cellulose Insulation Applicator: Applicator having minimum 5 years documented experience and licensed by manufacturer.

D. Single Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of Work.

E. Environmental Requirements: Manufacture extruded polystyrene with HCFC or other CFC free blowing agents. Mark insulation boards and packages with manufacturer's name and product designation. Unmarked boards and packages will be rejected. 1. Wherever possible, provide boards from manufacturers who recycle insulation materials.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam plastic board insulation: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and

concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project

site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each

area of construction.


A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.

B. Sequence Work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS

A. Specifications are based on any of the manufacturers listed below, with their product in parenthesis for the particular insulation application. Other manufacturers not listed must have a



minimum of five (5) years’ experience manufacturing products meeting or exceeding the specifications and comply with Division 1 regarding substitutions to be considered.

2.2 EXTRUDED POLYSTRENE FOAM BOARD

A. Extruded, Polystyrene Foam Board: ASTM C578, Type IV. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. Owens Corning. c. Comparable product.

2.3 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM PLASTIC BOARD

A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced: ASTM C 1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Hunter XCI c. Dupont. d. Owens Corning. e. Firestone Building Products. f. Rmax, Inc.

2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.

2.4 THERMAL INSULATION

A. Thermal Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I. with maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.

2. Thickness/R- Values (minimum):

a. 3-1/2 inches/ R-11 where shown on the Drawings. b. 6 inches/ R-19 where shown on the Drawings.

2.5 GLASS FIBER BLANKET

A. Glass Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway Company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.



2.6 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches

(50 mm) square. 2. Spindle: Coppercoated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in

diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.

B. Adhesively Attached, Angle Shaped, Spindle Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. Angle: Formed from 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick, perforated, galvanized carbon steel

sheet with each leg 2 inches (50 mm) square. 2. Spindle: Copper coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in

diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.

C. Insulation Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter. 1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations: a. Crawl spaces. b. Ceiling plenums. c. Attic spaces.

D. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 2 inches (50 mm) between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.

E. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame spread and

smoke developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

C. Asphalt Coating for Cellular Glass Block Insulation: Cutback asphalt or asphalt emulsion of type recommended by manufacturer of cellular-glass block insulation.

D. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.

B. Foam in Place Insulation: Verify that substrates are clean, dry, and free of substances that are harmful to insulation. 1. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer

to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.

B. Board Insulation: Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and has not been exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. 1. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions

and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 2. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,

widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

C. Batt Insulation (Thermal and Sound): Walls: Insulation shall be friction fit between studs and provide full coverage where indicated on Drawings. Insulation shall be tight within spaces n partitions, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions and tight to items passing through partitions. Wall areas above ceiling: At side wall insulation in ceiling cavity, install adhesive-mounted impaling devices with metal caps at 2 feet-0 inches vertically and at four (4) inches from each side of blankets horizontally. Install blankets with four (4) foot dimension running vertically on spikes, keeping blankets tight to exterior wall without crushing into each other.

D. Cavity Wall Insulation: Foam Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall

ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 20 00 - "Unit Masonry." 2. Cellular Glass Board Insulation: Install with closely fitting joints using attachment method

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Framed Construction: Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.



5. For metal framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

6. For wood framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of

adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.

7. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum

volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

F. Curtain Wall: Install board insulation in curtain wall construction according to curtain wall manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within

window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated on Drawings between insulation and glass.

2. Install insulation to fit snugly without bowing.

G. Reflective Insulation: Install sheet reflective insulation according to ASTM C 727. 1. Install sheet radiant barriers according to ASTM C 1744. 2. Install interior radiation control coating system according to ASTM C 1321.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26-1

SECTION 07 27 26 – FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Fluid-applied air barrier membrane in exterior wall assemblies.2. Materials to bridge and seal the following air leakage pathways and gaps:

a. Connections of the walls to the roof air barrier.b. Connections of the walls to the foundation air barrier.c. Seismic and expansion joints.d. Openings and penetrations of window frames, storefront, curtain wall and

mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems.e. Barrier precast concrete and other envelope systems.f. Door frames.g. Piping, conduit, duct and similar penetrations.h. Masonry ties, screws, bolts and similar penetrations.i. All other air leakage pathways in the building envelope.


A. Material Performance: Provide air barrier materials which have an air permeance not to exceed0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds persquare foot (0.004 cfm / ft2 @ 1.57 psf), when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178(unmodified).

B. Provide materials with a water vapor permeance [Water method (Procedure B)] of 10 US permsor greater, determined in accordance with ASTM E96.

C. Assembly Performance: Provide a continuous air barrier in the form of an assembly that has anair leakage not to exceed 0.04 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressuredifferential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.04 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf) when tested in accordancewith ASTM E2357. The assembly shall accommodate movements of building materials byproviding expansion and control joints as required. Expansion / control joints, changes insubstrate and perimeter conditions shall have appropriate accessory materials at suchlocations.1. The air barrier assembly shall be capable of withstanding combined design wind, fan and

stack pressures, both positive and negative on the envelope without damage ordisplacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure.

2. Fluid applied air barriers shall not displace adjacent materials in the air barrier assemblyunder full load.

3. The air barrier assembly shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barriermaterials of adjacent assemblies, allowing for the relative movement of assemblies dueto thermal and moisture variations, creep, and anticipated seismic movement.

D. Connections to Adjacent Materials: Provide connections to prevent air leakage at the followinglocations:1. Foundation and walls, including penetrations, ties and anchors.2. Walls, windows, curtain walls, storefronts, louvers or doors.


FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26-2

3. Different wall assemblies, and fixed openings within those assemblies.4. Wall and roof connections.5. Floors over unconditioned space.6. Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints.7. Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations.8. Seismic and expansion joints.9. All other potential air leakage pathways in the building envelope.


A. Refer to Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals: Submit in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: Submit evidence of current Contractor accreditation and Installercertification under the Air Barrier Association of America’s (ABAA). Submit accreditationnumber of the Contractor and certification number(s) of the ABAA Certified Installer(s).

C. Product Data: Submit material Manufacturer’s Product Data, material Manufacturer'sinstructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, temperature and other limitationsof installation conditions, Technical Data, and tested physical and performance properties.1. Submit letter from primary air barrier material Manufacturer indicating approval of

materials that are proposed to be used that are not currently listed in the accessoriessection of this specification for that Manufacturer’s material.

2. Include statement from the primary air barrier material Manufacturer that the materialsused in their air barrier assembly which will be used to adhere to the underlying substrateare chemically compatible to the substrate material.

D. Samples: Submit clearly labeled samples, three (3) inch by four (4) inch minimum size of eachmaterial specified.

E. Shop Drawings of Mock-Up: Submit Shop Drawings of proposed mock-ups showing plans,elevations, large-scale details, and air barrier transitions and terminations.

F. Field Test Results of Mock-Up: Submit test results of air leakage test and water leakage test ofmock-up in accordance with specified standards, including retesting if initial results are notsatisfactory.

G. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of air barrier assembliesand details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope assemblies and materials,membrane counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in the construction will be bridged,how inside and outside corners are negotiated, how materials that cover the materials aresecured with air-tight condition maintained, and how miscellaneous penetrations such asconduits, pipes, electric boxes and similar items are sealed.

1. Include VOC content of each material, and applicable legal limit in the jurisdiction of theproject.

2. Include statement that materials are compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use.3. Include required values for field adhesion test on each substrate in accordance with

ASTM D4541 (modified), using a type II pull tester.

H. Compatibility: Submit letter from primary material Manufacturer stating that materials proposedfor use are permanently chemically compatible and adhesively compatible with adjacent


FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

07 27 26-3

materials proposed for use. Submit letter from Manufacturer stating that cleaning materials used during installation are chemically compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use.


A. Air Barrier Installer Qualifications: Air barrier Subcontractor(s) shall be accredited at the time of bidding and during the complete installation period by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA). 1. Fluid-applied membrane air barrier Installer(s) shall be certified in accordance with the

requirements outlined by ABAA. Installers shall have their photo identification air barrier certification cards in their possession and available on the project site, for inspection upon request.

B. Manufacturer: Obtain primary ABAA Evaluated Materials from a single ABAA Evaluated

Manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing specified fluid-applied membranes. Obtain secondary materials from a source acceptable to the primary materials Manufacturer.

C. Accredited Laboratory Testing for Materials: Laboratory accredited by International Accreditation Service Inc. (IAS), American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA), or the Standards Council of Canada (SCC).

D. VOC Regulations: Provide products which comply with applicable regulations controlling the use of volatile organic compounds.

E. Preconstruction Meeting: Convene a minimum of two weeks prior to commencing Work of this Section. Agenda shall include, at a minimum, construction and testing of mock-up, sequence of construction, coordination with substrate preparation, air barrier materials approved for use, compatibility of materials, coordination with installation of adjacent and covering materials, and details of construction and chemical/fire safety plans. Attendance is required by the Fluid Applied Air Barrier System Manufacturer’s field representative, representatives of related trades including covering materials, substrate materials and adjacent materials.

F. Mock-Ups: Build mock-up representative of primary air barrier assemblies and glazing

assemblies including backup wall and typical penetrations as acceptable to the Architect. Mock-up shall be dimensioned no less than eight (8) feet long by eight (8) feet high and include the air barrier materials and air barrier accessories proposed for use in the exterior wall assembly. Mock-ups shall be suitable for field testing as specified in AAMA 502 and AAMA 503. Mock-ups shall be suitable for testing as specified in the following paragraph.

G. Mock-Up Tests for Air and Water Infiltration: The testing of the mock-up for air and water

infiltration in accordance with AAMA 501.2 (hand wand field testing), If deficiencies are found, the air barrier Contractor shall reconstruct mock-up at their cost for retesting until satisfactory results are obtained. Deficiencies include air leakage beyond values specified, uncontrolled water leakage, unsatisfactory workmanship.

H. Air Barrier Assembly Testing: Verify air barrier assembly testing by the material Manufacturer

by visiting the ABAA website to ensure an ASTM E2357 test has been completed and to obtain results. Visit the ABAA website for the reported air barrier assembly leakage rate and illustrations or CAD details which includes the methods in which the assembly test mock-ups shall be assembled.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with material Manufacturer's name, product, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.



07 27 26-4

B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and

within temperature range required by material Manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight and other sources of ultra-violet light.

C. Handle materials in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temperature: Install fluid-applied air barrier material within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by material Manufacturer. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate.

B. Field Conditions: Do not install air barrier in snow, rain, fog, or mist. Do not install air barrier when the temperature of substrate surfaces and surrounding air temperatures are below those recommended by the Manufacturer.

C. Sequencing: Do not install air barrier material before the roof assembly has been sufficiently installed to prevent a buildup of water in the interior of the building.

D. Compatibility: Do not allow air barrier materials to come in contact with chemically incompatible materials.

E. Ultra-violet exposure: Do not expose air barrier materials to sunlight longer than as recommended by the material Manufacturer.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Material Warranty: Provide Manufacturer’s standard product warranty, for a minimum 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Subcontractor (approved by ABAA and Manufacturer) Installation Warranty: Provide a two (2) year installation warranty from date of Substantial Completion, including all accessories and materials of the air barrier assembly, against failures including loss of air tight seal, loss of watertight seal, loss of attachment, loss of adhesion and failure to cure properly.


A. Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barrier: Use regular, high temperature or low-temperature

formulation depending on site conditions, within temperature ranges specified by Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. BASF Corporation: Enershield HP, Finestop RA, Senershield R, Acrostop R and

Sonowall FT R. Thickness for products are as specified by Manufacturer. www.wallsystems.basf.com: a. AIR BARRIER MATERIAL PROPERTIES:

1) Air permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 0.0000

cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.0000 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), at 10 mils (wet) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 1004 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of



07 27 26-5

area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (1004 ng/(Pa·s·m2) / 17.6 US perms) at 10 mils (wet) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method – unmodified).

b. AIR BARRIER ACCESSORY MATERIALS:

1) Fabric Reinforcement: Sheathing fabric to be saturated with BASF Fluid-

Applied Membrane for use at sheathing joints, penetrations and window rough openings.

2) Flashing and Transition Membrane: WS Wrap polyester-faced 30-mil self-adhesive membrane or WS Membrane 20-mil self-adhesive membrane.

3) Water-based Primer for Self-Adhesive Membranes: WS Flashing Primer. 4) Mastics: As recommended by Manufacturer.

2. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing: Fire-Resist Barritech VP at 60 mils thick (wet). www.carlisle-ccw.com:

a. AIR BARRIER MATERIAL PROPERTIES:


cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.0002 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), at 65 mils (wet), when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 817 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (817 ng/(Pa·s·m2) / 14.295 US perms) at 60 mils (wet) [40 mils (dry)] when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method – unmodified).


1) Detail Flashing: Fire-Resist 705 FR. 2) Counter-flashing for Metal Wall Flashings: Fire-Resist 705 FR. 3) Water-Based Primer for Detail Flashing: CCW-702 WB. 4) Solvent-Based Primer for Detail Flashing: CCW-702 or CCW-702 LV. 5) Solvent-Based Aerosol Primer for Detail Flashing: CAV-GRIP. 6) Reinforcing Fabric: DCH Reinforcing Fabric. 7) Glass Mat: LiquiFiber-W. 8) Termination Mastic: SURE-SEAL Lap Sealant. 9) Fill Compound: CCW-201 or CCW-703 V.

3. Dow Corning: DefendAir 200 at 15 mils thick (dry). www.buildabetterbarrier.com: a. AIR BARRIER MATERIAL PROPERTIES:


cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.0010 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), [0.0049 liters per square meter per second under a pressure differential of 75 Pa (0.0049 L/(s·m2) @ 75 Pa)] at 15 mils (dry), when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 1387.7 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (1387.7 ng/(Pa·s·m2) [24.26 US perms] at 15 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method – unmodified).



07 27 26-6


1) Solvent-Based Primer: Dow Corning® DefendAir Primer 2) Sealants: Dow Corning® 791 Silicone Weatherseal Sealant, Dow Corning®

756 SMS Silicone Sealant, Dow Corning® 795 Silicone Building Sealant, Dow Corning® 758 Silicone Weather Barrier Sealant

3) Transition Membrane for details and terminations: Dow Corning® 778, Dow Corning® Silicone Transition Strip

4) Flashing at Transition Membrane: Dow Corning® Silicone Transition Strip 5) Counterflashing for Masonry Through-Wall Flashings: Dow Corning® Silicone

Transition Strip 6) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: Dow Corning® 778 7) Substrate Joint Treatment: Dow Corning® 791 Silicone Weatherseal Sealant

4. Dryvit Systems, Inc: Backstop NT at 12mils thick (dry). www.dryvit.com:

a. AIR BARRIER MATERIAL PROPERTIES: 1) Air permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being

0.000118 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.000118 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), [0.0006 liters per square meter per second under a pressure differential of 75 Pa (0.0006 L/(s·m2) @ 75 Pa)] at 12 mils (dry), when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 1810 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (1810 ng/(Pa·s·m2) [31.65 US perms] at 20 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method – unmodified).


1) Transition Membrane for details and terminations: Dryvit AquaFlash and

AquaFlash Mesh 2) Reinforcing / Joint Tape: Dryvit Grid Tape 3) Flashing at Transition Membrane: Dryvit AquaFlash 4) Substrate Joint Treatment: Dryvit Grid Tape with Backstop NT

5. DuPont Building Innovations: Tyvek Fluid Applied WB at 25 mils thick (wet), 25 mils thick

(dry). www.Weatherization.Tyvek.com:

a. AIR BARRIER MATERIAL PROPERTIES: 1) Air permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 0.0002

cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.0002 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), at 25 mils (dry), when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 1384 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (1384 ng/(Pa·s·m2) / 24.23 US perms) at 25 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method – unmodified).




07 27 26-7

1) Solvent Based Primer for Flashing, Transition Strip and Detail Membranes: 3M High Strength 90; Denso Butyl (used with self-adhered membranes only).

2) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: DuPont recommended through-wall flashing.

3) Sealants, Mastics, Adhesives and Tapes: DuPont Sealant for Tyvek Fluid Applied System; DuPont Tyvek Flashing and Joint Compound; fiberglass mesh tape.

4) Transition, Termination, and Detailing Membrane: DuPont StraightFlash, or DuPont Tyvek Flashing and Joint Compound (60mil).

5) Penetrations and Termination Sealant: DuPont Sealant for Tyvek Fluid Applied System.

6) Window Flashing Membrane: DuPont Tyvek Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound, or DuPont Tyvek Fluid Applied Flashing – Brush Formulation, or DuPont StraightFlash with DuPont FlexWrap.

7) Joint Treatment: None (≤ 1/16” gaps); DuPont Tyvek Flashing and Joint Compound (≤ 1/4” gaps); DuPont Tyvek Flashing and Joint Compound w/ fiberglass mesh tape (≤ 1/2” gaps); DuPont StraightFlash (≤ 1” gaps).

6. Grace Construction Products: Perm-A-Barrier VP, 90 mils thick (wet), 45 mils thick (dry).

www.na.graceconstruction.com:


cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.0004 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), at 69 mils (wet), when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 741.6 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (741.6 ng/(Pa·s·m2) / 12.9 US perms) at 40 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method – unmodified).


1) Membrane for details and Terminations: Bituthene Liquid Membrane. 2) Water-Based Primer for Flashing, Transition Strip and Detail Membrane:

Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer or Perm-A-Barrier Primer Plus. 3) Solvent-Based Primer for Flashing, Transition Strip and Detail Membrane:

Bituthene Primer B-2 and Bituthene Primer B2 LVC or Bituthene Primer B2. 4) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: Perm-A-Barrier Wall

Flashing. 5) Sealants, Mastics, Adhesives and Tapes: As recommended by Grace

Construction Products. 6) Transition Membrane: Perm-A-Barrier Detail Membrane, Perm-A-Barrier

Aluminum Flashing and Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. 7) Penetrations and Termination Sealant: Bituthene Liquid Membrane and as

recommended by Grace Construction Products. 8) Window Flashing and Detail Membrane: Perm-A-Barrier Detail Membrane,

Perm-A-Barrier Aluminum Flashing and Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. 9) Joint Sealant: Refer to Technical Letter 1 for details on compatible

waterproofing sealants.

7. Henry Company: Air Bloc 31 MR at 90 mils (wet). www.henry.com:




07 27 26-8


cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.00024 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), at 87 mils (wet) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).



1) Transition Membrane: Blueskin SA and Blueskin SALT for low-temperature

applications. 2) Water-Based Primer for Transition Membrane: Aquatec Primer. 3) Solvent-Based Primer for Transition Membrane: Blueskin Adhesive. 4) Solvent-Based Aerosol Primer for Transition Membrane: Blueskin Spray Prep. 5) Counter-flashing for Masonry Through-Wall Flashing: Blueskin TWF. 6) Sealant: HE 925 BES Sealant. 7) Reinforcing Tape: HE 183 Yellow Glass Fabric. 8) Mastics, Adhesives and Tapes: Henry 570-05 Polybitume.

8. Henry Company: Air Bloc 33 MR at 100 mils (wet), 58 mils thick (dry). www.henry.com:


cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.0016 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 (unmodified).



1) Transition Membrane: Blueskin SA and Blueskin SALT for low-temperature

applications. 2) Water-Based Primer for Transition Membrane: Aquatec Primer. 3) Solvent-Based Primer for Transition Membrane: Blueskin Adhesive. 4) Solvent-Based Aerosol Primer for Transition Membrane: Blueskin Spray Prep. 5) Counter-flashing for Masonry Through-Wall Flashing: Blueskin TWF. 6) Sealant: HE 925 BES Sealant. 7) Reinforcing Tape: HE 183 Yellow Glass Fabric. 8) Mastics, Adhesives and Tapes: Henry 570-05 Polybitume.

9. Pecora USA: Pecora XL-Perm ULTRA VP by Pecora USA at 9 – 12 mils (dry).

www.pecora.com:


cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57



07 27 26-9

pounds per square foot (0.00024 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), 0.0012 liters per square meter per second under a pressure differential of 75 Pa (0.0012 L/(s·m2) @ 75 Pa)] at 12 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 727.01 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (727.01 ng/(Pa·s·m2) [12.71 US perms] at 9 mils - dry when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method – unmodified).


1) Sealants: 890NST Silicone Sealant, AVB Silicone Sealant 2) Transition Membrane for details and terminations: XL Span 3) Flashing at Transition Membranes: XL Flash Liquid Flashing & Joint Filler 4) Counter-Flashing for Masonry Through-Wall Flashings: XL Flash Liquid

Flashing & Joint Filler 5) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: XL Flash Liquid Flashing &

Joint Filler 6) Substrate Joint Treatment: XL Flash Liquid Flashing & Joint Filler, 890 NST

Silicone Sealant, AC-20 Latex Sealant, AVW-920 Latex Sealant, Dynatrol I-XL-345 Tru White STPU Sealant

10. PROSOCO, Inc.: Cat 5 at 12 - 15 mils (wet). www.prosoco.com:



cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.00018 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 1015 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (1015 ng/(Pa·s·m2) / 17.71 US perms) at 12 – 15 mils (wet) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method – unmodified).


1) Water-Based Primer: PROSOCO R-GUARD GypPrime for cut gyp board

edged in rough openings. 2) Sealants: PROSOCO R-GUARD AirDam for interior perimeter seal in window

installations. 3) Counter-flashing for Masonry Through-Wall Flashings: PROSOCO R-GUARD

Joint and Seam Filler followed by PROSOCO R-GUARD FastFlash. 4) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: PROSOCO R-GUARD Joint

and Seam Filler followed by PROSOCO R-GUARD FastFlash. 5) Substrate Joint Treatment: PROSOCO R-GUARD Joint & Seam Filler for

sheathing seams, PROSOCO R-GUARD Joint & Seam Filler covered by PROSOCO R-GUARD FastFlash in rough opening.

11. Protecto Wrap: Protecto Wall Liquid Air Barrier VP by at 10 mils (dry).

www.protectowrap.com:




07 27 26-10

1) Air permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 0.00086 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.000864 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), 0.0043 liters per square meter per second under a pressure differential of 75 Pa (0.0043 L/(s·m2) @ 75 Pa)] at 10 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).



1) Water-Based Primer: Universal Water Based Primer. 2) Solvent-Based Primer: BT Primer. 3) Solvent-Based Aerosol Primer: Protecto-Tak Spray Adhesive. 4) Sealants: Protecto Wall Board to Baord Joint Sealant. 5) Transition Membrane for details and terminations: Protecto Wall Transition

Tape. 6) Solvent-Based Primer for Flashing, Transition Strip and Detail Membrane: BT

Primer. 7) Water-Based Primer for Flashing, Transition Strip and Detail Membrane:

Universal Water Based Primer. 8) Substrate Joint Treatment: Protecto Wall Board to Board Joint Sealant.

12. Sika Corporation: Sikagard 520 Liquid Applied Vapor Permeable Air Barrier at 30 mils (dry). www.sika.com:



cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.0014 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), at 30 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).



1) Water-Based Primer: Sikagard 530. 2) Solvent-Based Primer: Sikagard 510. 3) Termination Mastic: Sikaflex 11FC. 4) Sealants: Sikaflex 11FC. 5) Transition Membrane for details and terminations: SikaMultiSeal 515. 6) Reinforcing / Joint Tape: SikaMultiSeal 515. 7) Counterflashing for Masonry Through-Wall Flashings: SikaMultiSeal Plus. 8) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: SikaMultiSeal Plus. 9) Substrate Joint Treatment: Sikaflex 11FC.

13. Sika Corporation: Sikagard 530 Liquid Applied Vapor Permeable Air Barrier at 30 mils (dry). www.sika.com:



07 27 26-11

a. AIR BARRIER MATERIAL PROPERTIES: 1) Air permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being <

0.0001 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (< 0.0001 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), at 20 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).



1) Water-Based Primer: Sikagard 530. 2) Solvent-Based Primer: Sikagard 510. 3) Termination Mastic: Sikaflex 11FC. 4) Sealants: Sikaflex 11FC. 5) Transition Membrane for details and terminations: SikaMultiSeal 515. 6) Reinforcing/Joint Tape: SikaMultiSeal 515. 7) Counterflashing for Masonry Through-Wall Flashings: SikaMultiSeal Plus. 8) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: SikaMultiSeal Plus. 9) Substrate Joint Treatment: Sikaflex 11FC.

14. Sto Corp: Emerald Coat at 20 mils (dry). www.stocorp.com:


1) Air permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being

0.000024 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.00024 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), [0.00020 liters per square meter per second under a pressure differential of 75 Pa (0.00020 L/(s·m2) @ 75 Pa)] at 20 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).


b. AIR BARRIER ACCESSORY MATERIALS: 1) Joint and Rough Opening Treatments: Sto Gold Fill with StoGuard Mesh,

StoGuard Rapid Seal with StoGuard Mesh, Sto EmeraldCoat with SToGuard Fabric, StoGuard Tape

2) Joint Reinforcements: StoGuard Mesh, StoGuard Fabric, StoGuard RediCorner

3) Transition Membranes: Sto Gold Fill with StoGuard Mesh, StoGuard RapidSeal or StoGuard RapidSeal with StoGuard Mesh, Sto Emerald Cost with StoGuard Fabric, StoGuard Tape

4) Water-Based Primer for use with Flashing Transition: StoGuard



07 27 26-12

15. STS Coatings: Wall Guardian FW-100-A (Acrylic-based component) 40 mils (wet), 20 mils (dry). www.wallguardian.com:



cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.0001 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), at 20 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).



1) Water-Based Primer for Flashing, Transition Strip and Detail Membrane:

None. 2) Solvent-Based Primer for Flashing, Transition Strip and Detail Membrane: BP-

40 Primer for use with UT-40 Universal Tape. 3) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: Gorilla Flash VF-1000. 4) Mastics: None. 5) Adhesives and Tapes: Universal Tape UT-40, a butyl based tape and Great

Seal LT-100, a low voc elastomeric sealant for deflection joints and details. 6) Transition Strip: Universal Tape, UT-40. 7) Termination Mastic: Great Seal LT-100. 8) Window Flashing and Detail Membrane: Universal Tape UT-40.

16. TK Products: TK-AirMax 2103 at 40+ mils (wet). www.tkproducts.com:



cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.00097 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), 0.00492 liters per square meter per second under a pressure differential of 75 Pa (0.00492 L/(s·m2) @ 75 Pa)] at 40 mils (wet) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 857 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (857 ng/(Pa·s·m2) [15.0 US perms] at 20 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method – unmodified).


1) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: TK-Climate Flash, TK-Butyl

Bond, TK-SS Flashing, TK-TWF-18 2) Caulk: TK-Super Seal 3) Adhesives and Tapes: TK-AirMax 2200 All Weather Flashing (TK Products),

TK Air Max 2203 Caulk, TK-AirMax 2201 Red Sheathing Facing Tape (Venture Tape, a 3M Company), 3M All-Weather Flashing Tape 8067 (3M Company), VentureStop VB 400 (Venture Tape, a 3M Company), Venture-1585 CW-2 Red Sheating Facing Tape (Venture Tape, a 3M Company)



07 27 26-13

4) Transition Membranes: TK-Climate Flash, TK-Butyl Bond, TK-SS Flashing, TK-TWF-18

5) Reinforcing / Joint Tape: TK-Climate Flash, TK-Butyl Bond, TK-SS Flashing, TK-TWF-18

6) Termination of Caulk: TK-AirMax Caulk 2203 (TK Products), Manus-Bond 75AM (Manus Products, Inc.)

7) Flashing (Counter) for Masonry at Through-Wall Flashings or Transition Membranes: TK-Climate Flash, TK-Butyl Bond, TK-SS Flashing, TK-TWF-18

17. TK Products: TK-AirMax 2104 at 40+ mils (wet). www.tkproducts.com:



cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.0008 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), at 40+ mils (wet) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).



1) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: TK-Climate Flash, TK-Butyl

Bond, TK-SS Flashing, TK-TWF-18. 2) Caulk: TK-Super Seal. 3) Adhesives and Tapes: TK-AirMax 2200 All Weather Flashing (TK Products),

TK Air Max 2203 Caulk, TK-AirMax 2201 Red Sheathing Facing Tape (Venture Tape, a 3M Company), 3M All-Weather Flashing Tape 8067 (3M Company), VentureStop VB 400 (Venture Tape, a 3M Company), Venture-1585 CW-2 Red Sheating Facing Tape (Venture Tape, a 3M Company).

4) Transition Membranes: TK-Climate Flash, TK-Butyl Bond, TK-SS Flashing, TK-TWF-18.

5) Reinforcing / Joint Tape: TK-Climate Flash, TK-Butyl Bond, TK-SS Flashing, TK-TWF-18.

6) Termination of Caulk: TK-AirMax Caulk 2203 (TK Products), Manus-Bond 75AM (Manus Products, Inc.)

7) Flashing (Counter) for Masonry at Through-Wall Flashings or Transition Membranes: TK-Climate Flash, TK-Butyl Bond, TK-SS Flashing, TK-TWF-18.

18. W.R. Meadows, Inc.: Air-Shield LMP, at 90 mils (wet), 45 mils (dry).

www.wrmeadows.com:

a. AIR BARRIER MATERIAL PROPERTIES: 1) Air permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being

0.000096 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot (0.000096 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf), [0.00048 liters per square meter per second under a pressure differential of 75 Pa (0.00048 L/(s·m2) @ 75 Pa)] at 20 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 (unmodified).

2) Water vapor permeance for this material has been tested and reported as being 400 nanograms of water vapor passing through each square meter of area per second for each Pascal of vapor pressure differential (400



07 27 26-14

ng/(Pa·s·m2) [12.0 US perms] at 30 mils (dry) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 (water method – unmodified).


1) Water-Based Primer: None required for Air Shield LMP. 2) Solvent-Based Primer: None required for Air Shield LMP. 3) Solvent-Based Aerosol Primer: None required for Air Shield LMP. 4) Termination Mastic: Pointing Mastic or BEM. 5) Transition Membrane for details and terminations: Air Shield. 6) Reinforcing/Joint Tape: Reinforcing Fabric HCR. 7) Flashing at Transition Membrane: Air Shield Thru-Wall Flashing. 8) Counter-flashing for Masonry Through-Wall Flashings: Air Shield Thru-Wall

Flashing. 9) Through-Wall Flashings or Shelf Angle Flashings: Air Shield Thru-Wall

Flashing. 10) Solvent-Based Primer for Flashing, Transition Strip and Detail Membrane:

Mel-Prime VOC. 11) Water-Based Primer for Flashing, Transition Strip and Detail Membrane: Mel-

Prime WB. 12) Substrate Joint Treatment: Air Shield Joint Filler.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Transition Membrane Between Air and Vapor Barrier Membrane and Roofing and Other Adjacent Materials: Comply with both air barrier Manufacturer’s recommendations and roofing material Manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Provide primers, glass fabric scrim tape, mastic, and other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation as instructed by the air barrier system Manufacturer or required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. The ABAA Certified Air Barrier Contractor shall examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which the air barrier assembly will be installed, with ABAA Certified Installer present, for compliance with requirements. 1. Confirm site access logistics and scheduling requirements, including but not limited to

use of scaffolding, lifts and staging. 2. Verify that surfaces and conditions are suitable prior to commencing Work of this section.

Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3. Ensure that the following conditions are met:

a. Surfaces are sound, dry, even, and excess mortar and / or other contaminants. b. Inspect and confirm substrates to be smooth and without large voids or sharp

protrusions. Inform General Contractor if substrates are not acceptable and need to be repaired by the concrete Subcontractor.

c. Inspect and confirm masonry joints to be reasonably flush and completely filled, and ensure all excess mortar accumulated on masonry ties has been removed. Inform General Contractor if masonry joints are not acceptable and need to be repaired by the masonry Subcontractor.

d. Masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar, and all excess mortar sitting on masonry ties has been removed.



07 27 26-15

4. Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263 and take suitable measures until substrate passes moisture test.

5. Verify sealants are compatible with membrane proposed for use. Perform field peel-adhesion test on materials to which sealants are adhered.

6. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using air and vapor barrier over substrate prior to proceeding.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to material Manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application. 1. Ensure that penetrating work by other trades is in place and complete. 2. Prepare surfaces by brushing, scrubbing, scraping, grinding or compressed air to remove

loose mortar, dust, oil, grease, oxidation, mill scale and other contaminants which will affect adhesion of the fluid-applied membrane.

3. Wipe down metal surfaces to remove release agents or other non-compatible coatings using clean sponges or with a material chemically compatible with the primary air material.

B. Prime substrate for installation of sheet membrane transition strips if recommended by material

Manufacturer and as follows: 1. Prime masonry, concrete substrates with conditioning primers. 2. Prime glass-fiber surfaced gypsum sheathing an adequate number of coats to achieve

required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. 3. Prime wood, metal, and painted substrates with primer. 4. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations

through air barrier at protrusions.

C. Prime substrate for application of sheet membrane transition strips as recommended by Manufacturer and as follows: 1. Prime masonry, concrete substrates with conditioning primer. 2. Prime glass-fiber surfaced gypsum sheathing an adequate number of coats to achieve

required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. 3. Prime wood, metal, and painted substrates with primer. 4. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations

through air and vapor barrier and at protrusions.

D. Prime substrate for installation of fluid-applied air barrier if recommended by material Manufacturer based on project conditions.

E. Protection from spray-applied materials as recommended by material Manufacturer and as follows: 1. Mask and cover adjacent areas to protect from over-spray. 2. Ensure any required foam stop or back up materials are in place to prevent over-spray

and achieve complete seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barrier: Install air barrier accessories and fluid-applied membrane air barrier material to provide continuity throughout the building envelope in a shingle fashion. Install materials in accordance with material Manufacturer's instructions and the following



07 27 26-16

(unless Manufacturer recommends other procedures in writing based on project conditions or particular requirements of their recommended materials): 1. Install veneer anchors as per air barrier Manufacturer installation sequencing. 2. Apply treatment to exterior gypsum joints and screw heads as per air barrier material

Manufacturer. 3. Apply primer for transition material at the rate instructed by the air barrier material

Manufacturer for 1 inch beyond terminating edge of transition membrane. Allow primer to set / cure completely before transition strip application.

4. Position subsequent sheets of transition material so that membrane overlaps the membrane sheet below by a minimum of 2 inches, unless greater overlap is recommended by the material Manufacturer. Ensure transition membrane is securely sealed onto substrate with roller.

5. Overlap horizontally adjacent pieces of transition material a minimum of 2 inches, unless greater overlap is recommended by the material Manufacturer. Roll all areas of transition strip including seams with roller.

6. Seal around all penetrations with termination mastic / sealant, membrane counterflashing or other procedure in accordance with material Manufacturer’s instructions, ensuring chemical compatibility amongst adjoining materials.

7. Connect air barrier in exterior wall assembly continuously to the air barrier of the roof, to concrete below-grade structures, to windows, curtain wall, storefront, louvers, exterior doors, other intersection conditions and transitions from wet cavity to dry cavity and seal penetrations using accessory materials in accordance with the material Manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Provide transition material at changes in substrate plane (with bead of sealant / mastic, membrane counter-flashing or other material recommended by material Manufacturer) under membrane to eliminate all sharp 90 degree inside corners and to make a smooth transition from one plane to another.

9. Provide mechanically fastened non-corrosive metal sheet or other Manufacturer approved transition material to span gaps greater than 1 inch in substrate plane and to make a smooth transition from one plane to the other. Transition membrane shall be installed continuously from air barrier material onto sheet metal maintaining 2 inch overlap on both edges.

10. Lap transition material over top edge of through-wall flashing and head-flashing. 11. Provide backup for the membrane to accommodate anticipated movement or use other

Manufacturer approved transition material at deflection and control joints. 12. Provide transition material to joint assemblies at expansion and seismic joints. 13. Provide backup for the fluid applied air barrier to accommodate anticipated movement at

deflection and control joints as recommended by material Manufacturer. 14. Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along membrane seams at reverse lapped seams,

rough cuts, and / or as otherwise recommended by the material Manufacturer. 15. Seal top edge of the self-adhered membrane to substrate with termination mastic at end

of each working day. 16. Inspect installation prior to enclosing assembly and repair punctures, damaged areas and

inadequately lapped seams with a patch of membrane lapped as recommended by material Manufacturer.

17. Install primer for fluid-applied air barrier if instructed by material Manufacturer. 18. Install fluid-applied membrane using equipment and methods recommended by

Manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness as required by the material Manufacturer. 19. Do not allow materials to come in contact with chemically incompatible materials. 20. Do not expose membrane to sunlight / ultraviolet light longer than as recommended by

the Manufacturer.




07 27 26-17

A. Owner’s Inspection and Testing: Cooperate with Owner’s testing agency as applicable. Allow access to work areas and staging. Notify Owner’s testing agency in writing of schedule for Work of this Section to allow sufficient time for testing and inspection. Do not cover Work of this Section until testing and inspection is accepted.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Representative Review: Contractor is not to commence any work other than staging until contact and meeting with the Manufacturer’s Field Representative on site. The Manufacturer’s Field Representative is to visit the jobsite a minimum of four (4) times to review work processes and / or work completed prior to work commencement, at 10% completion, at 50% completion and prior to the Work being covered by finish materials.

3.5 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect air barrier materials from damage during installation and the remainder of the

construction period, according to material Manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Coordinate with installation of materials which cover the air barrier assemblies, to ensure

exposure period does not exceed that recommended by the air barrier Manufacturer.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by Manufacturer of affected construction and acceptable to the primary material Manufacturer.



METAL WALL PANELS 07 42 10 - 1

SECTION 07 42 10 - METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Concealed fastened metal wall panels as part of the assembly.2. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of Texas withexperience in the design of metal composite wall panels as part of curtainwalls and aluminumstorefront systems to design and coordinate the cladding assembly using performancerequirements and design criteria indicated.

1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Modular Metal Panel System: Rainscreen design consisting of dry seal joinery designed,attachment system components, and associated necessary to minimize water penetration andinduce air circulation in the space behind the panel system. Moisture weeping trim at panel basedetails allows water to drain out of the system.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data including construction details, material descriptions, dimensions ofindividual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings prepared by manufacturer or manufacturer’s authorizeddealer. Include full elevations showing openings and penetrations. Include details of each conditionof installation and attachment. Provide details at a minimum scale 3-inch per foot of all required trimand extrusions needed for a complete installation.1. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements.2. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with modular metal panel

system installation.

C. Samples:1. One (1) ft long sample of each listed panel, including clips (if applicable) & fasteners2. Minimum 2” x 4” chip of specified finish.

D. Qualification Information: For Installer and Installer’s field supervisor.

E. Warranty: Manufacturer’s sample warranty as specified.

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. All panels shall be delivered with appropriate packaging to provide protection against transportationdamage. Materials damaged in shipping or storage shall not be used.


METAL WALL PANELS

07 42 10 - 2

B. Store all materials and accessories above ground on well-skidded platforms. Store under waterproof covering. Provide proper ventilation to panels to prevent condensation build-up between panels.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work with installation of associated metal flashings and manufactured roof panels.

B. General contractor shall coordinate with all subcontractors including masonry, waterproofing

membrane, sheathing work, and framing to ensure walls are plumb and ready to accept fasteners and panel systems.

C. Pre-construction meeting required with owner and architect. Representatives from all associated trades shall attend to coordinate arrival, delivery, and installation of products and materials.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the work specified herein for five (5) years against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or non-conforming materials or workmanship.

B. Provide a manufacturer’s twenty (20) year finish integrity warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Berridge Manufacturing Company. Other manufacturers may bid this project provided they comply with all requirements of this specification. Product listed is considered basis of design and owner shall not be responsible for any costs resulting from change of manufacturer including sizes, trim pieces, structural, or system components. Manufacturers listed below who produce equivalent products to those specified are approved for use on the Project. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience manufacturing products meeting or exceeding the specifications and comply with Division 1 requirements regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. Alucoil North America LLC. 2. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. 3. Citadel Architectural Systems, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Metal Wall Panel (MP-1): 1. Materials:

a. Prefinished Sheet Material: 24 gauge thick Galvalume® steel sheet, minimum yield 50,000 PSI, roll formed in continuous lengths, ASTM A792.

b. Finish: Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 Fluoropolymer coating, applied by the manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side shall be coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 finish supplier. Color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s available colors. Interior surface finish shall be manufacturer’s full range of colors.

c. Touch-up Paint: Paint burns, scars, welds, and damaged and rusted surfaces with cold galvanizing paint in accordance with ASTM A780. Acceptable Products include ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound or Galvilite manufactured by ZRC



Worldwide, Marshfield, MA; Galvax Zinc-rich Cold Galvanizing Coating manufactured by Alvin Products, Inc., Lawerence, MA; or paint complying with military specification MILP-21035A, Type I or II.

d. Strippable Film: Shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect thefinish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must beremoved before installation.

e. Accessories:1) Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 00.2) Cold Formed Metal Framing: As specified in Section 05 40 00.3) Girts, Sub-girts, purlins: 16 gauge minimum thickness (55,000 psi

minimum yield thickness) galvanized steel, with Stainless Steel screws tomeet application.

4) Fasteners: long-life, corrosion resistant screws supplied or instructed bypanel manufacturer to suit application spaced according to ULrequirements, color matched to match metal panel color.

5) Clips, miscellaneous fasteners: galvanized steel as supplied or instructedby panel manufacturer.

6) Metal Trim, closures, and flashing: Exposed adjacent flashing shall be thesame material and finish as panel system.

7) Separate dissimilar metals with asphalt-saturated building felt or abituminous coating to prevent galvanic action.

8) Dampproofing: refer to section 07 11 00.

2. Profile/Dimensions: 7/8 inch thick panel 16 inch coverage width, in continuouslength up to 40 feet-0 inches, with interlocking design with concealed fasteners.

3. Approved Product/Manufacturer: ‘HR-16’ Panel manufactured by Berridge Manufacturing Co., Houston, TX; (800) 231-8127, or Architect approved equal.

C. All Cold-Formed Metal Framing for Metal Wall Panels to be designed by a TexasLicensed Profession Engineer per spec. Section 05 40 00, Professional Engineer

E. Accessories:1. Zees: 16 gauge minimum thickness galvanized steel, 2 inch rise minimum, or as required

to align with existing conditions.2. Sub-Girt Fasteners: Stainless Steel screws to meet application.3. Concealed Fasteners: Stainless Steel screws supplied or recommended by panel

manufacturer to suit application.4. Metal Trim at Siding Panels: 0.060 inch thick pre-finished aluminum sheet, matching finish

type and color of siding panels.5. Closures: 0.060 inch thick aluminum sheet, mill finish.6. Separate dissimilar metals with asphalt-saturated building felt or a bituminous coating to

prevent galvanic action.7. Air Barrier: High temperature air barrier. Re: 07 26 00.8. Polyisocynurate: Shall comply with NFPA 285 & ASTM G 2357 & ASTM E 331.

Thickness shall be 2-inch.9. Access Panels: Refer to 08 31 13 Specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION OF MODULAR METAL PANEL SYSTEM

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withrequirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and otherconditions affecting performance of the Work.



1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structuralpanel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerancesrequired by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing orblocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal compositematerial wall panel manufacturer.a. Verify that air or water resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or

backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite materialpanels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal compositematerial panels before installation.

C. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel supportmembers and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel asrequired by manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within installedtolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and locationlines as indicated, and within 1/8 inch (3 mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment ofmatching profiles.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field testsand inspections.

B. Water Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly directed by Architect for waterpenetration according to AAMA 501.2.

C. Manufacturer Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to test andinspect completed metal composite material wall panel installation, including accessories.

D. Metal composite material wall panels are considered defective if they do not pass test andinspections.

E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determinecompliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as metal composite materialpanels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installationinstructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finishedsurfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a cleancondition during construction.


METAL WALL PANELS

07 42 10 - 5

B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2


SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Control and expansion joints on exposed surfaces.2. Perimeter joints between wall surfaces and frames of doors and openings.3. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.4. Joints indicated or as necessary.5. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.


A. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry.

B. Section 08 80 00 – Glazing.

C. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies

D. Section 09 30 13 – Ceramic Tiling.

E. Section 09 30 16 – Quarry Tiling.

F. Section 09 30 19 – Porcelain Tiling.

G. Division 23 – Mechanical Sections.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM)1. C717, Standard Terminology of Building seals and Sealants.2. C793, Standard Test Method for Effects of Accelerated Weathering on Elastomeric Joint

Sealants.3. C794, Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.4. C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.5. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.6. C1193, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

B. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI)1. The Processional’s Guide.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data for each joint sealant product. Submit written certification frommanufacturers of sealants attesting products are suitable for use indicated, verified through inhouse testing laboratory.



1. Written certification from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that products comply with specification requirements and suitable for use indicated verified through manufacturers testing laboratory within the past 36 months or since most recent reformulation, whichever is most recent. a. Complete instructions for handling, storage, mixing, priming, installation, curing

and protection of each type of sealant. b. Manufacturer's letter, clearly indicating proposed lot numbers of each sealant

supplied and expiration date sequence. c. Instructions for handling, storage, mixing, priming, installation, curing, and

protection of each type of sealant.

2. Recycled Content: a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of preconsumer and postconsumer

recycled content per unit of product. b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of

product included in project. c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of

recycled content product in the assembly by weight. d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of

recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly.

3. Local/Regional Materials: a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery;

indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate

distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials;

include materials cost only. d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or

manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per unit of product.

4. VOC Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for sealants. Indicate VOC limits of the product. Submit MSDS highlighting VOC limits.

5. Submit environmental data in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM E2129 for products provided under work of this Section.

B. Certificates and Reports: 1. Product Certificates: Manufacturer's product certificate for each kind of joint sealant and

accessory. 2. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each

sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. 3. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. 4. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,

indicating the following: a. Materials forming joint substrates and sealant backings have been tested for

compatibility and adhesion with sealants. b. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and

substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

5. Preconstruction Field Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified.

6. Field Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.




A. Installer Qualifications: Firm having minimum 5 years documented experience and specializing in the installation of sealants. 1. Exposed sealant work (sealants used for air and weatherseals external to curtain wall

systems at perimeter, metal panel to panel joints) shall be performed by a single (i.e. one) firm specializing in the installation of sealants who has successfully produced work comparable to project.

2. Concealed sealant work (sealants which are internal to metal framed curtain wall systems, skylights, and providing an air seal) shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor providing erection of the respective system.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Pre-construction Field Adhesive Testing: Prior to installation of building sealants, field

test their adhesion to joint substrates in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Perform test in locations indicated by Architect. Perform test for each type of building sealant and each substrate as required by Architect. If required by Architect, arrange for tests to be performed with sealant manufacturer’s representative present. Follow-up review by Architect and manufacturer may be required to observe sealant performance over time and may result in re-application of sealant or replacement.

3. Test according to SWRI Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion in peel, and indentation hardness.

D. Environmental Requirements: 1. Toxicity/IEQ: Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous

materials. a. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers complying with

limits for VOC content for SCAQMD when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1) Sealants: 250 g/L. 2) Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3) Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

b. Sealants containing aromatic solvents, fibrous talc, formaldehyde, halogenated

solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, chromium and their compounds, are not permitted.

E. Cleaning: Facade sealants that have collected dirt at the time of Substantial Completion shall be cleaned over the entire facade prior to acceptance by the Owner. 11 months after final completion of the building, if the sealant joints show dirt, they shall again be cleaned over the entire façade.


A. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer written instructions to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the followingconditions:1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C).2. When joint substrates are wet. Should joints or backing materials become wet, remove

and replace backing material with new.

B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths areless than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminantscapable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES


B. In addition, refer to information above concerning Field Adhesive Testing.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replaceelastomeric joint sealant work which has failed to provide a weathertight system within specifiedwarranty period.1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Warranties: Written warranties (weatherseal and stain resistance), signed by sealantmanufacturer agreeing to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that fail to provideairtight and watertight joints, or fail in adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, stain resistance,weather resistance, durability, or appear to deteriorate in manner not specified in themanufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranties specified exclude deterioration or failure of sealants from:1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design

or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer'swritten specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or outside agents.4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and related materials compatible with oneanother and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as stated bysealant manufacturer’s published data, and as substantiated by the manufacturer for eachapplication through testing.



B. Liquid Applied Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and requirements indicated for each liquid applied sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

C. Stain Test Response Characteristics: For sealants in contact with porous substrates, provide nonstaining products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and do not stain porous joint substrates.

D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

E. Colors: For fully concealed joints, provide standard color of sealant that has the best overall performance characteristics for the application shown. For exposed joints, match adjacent surface. For exposed joints, submit color samples to architect for approval, from manufacture’s full line of standard colors.

F. Manufacturer’s Representative: Use sealant produced by manufacturer who agrees to send a qualified technical representative to site upon request for the purpose of rendering advice concerning the recommended installation of manufacturer’s materials.

G. Sealants: Self leveling compounds for horizontal joints in pavements and nonsag compounds elsewhere except as shown or specified.

H. Silicone Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT, M, A and O. 1. Use: Precast Concrete Joints between metals, glass and plastics (Two part silicone

sealants). 2. Properties: Performance: Nonstain, nonbleed, nonstreaking to sealed and adjacent

substrates. The minimum pli value after 7 day immersion shall not be less than 13 when tested in strict accordance with ASTM C794 Adhesion and Peel.

3. Cure System and Oil Content: Neutral Cure System specifically manufactured with controlled oil content to eliminate oil migration into sealed substrates and residue rundown over and onto adjacent substrates.

4. Product and Manufacturer: a. Dow Corning; 756 Silicone Building Sealant - HP with Additive or MasterSeal 121

by Masters Builders Solutions or Sikasil by Sika Corporation

I. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Use: Precast Concrete Joints between metals, glass and plastics (Single component

sealants). 2. Properties: Performance: Nonstain, nonbleed, nonstreaking to sealed and adjacent

substrates. 3. Cure System and Oil Content: Neutral Cure System specifically manufactured with

controlled oil content to eliminate oil migration into sealed substrates and residue rundown over and onto adjacent substrates.

4. Product and Manufacturer: a. Master Builders Solutions b. ; Omniseal 50. c. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS, 791, 795, 995 as applicable. d. GE Advanced Materials, Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800, SilPruf NB SCS9000,

SilPruf SCS2000, or UltraPruf II SCS2900 as applicable. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995.

J. Polyurethane Sealants: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT, M, A and O. 1. Use: Typical Wall and Floor Joints (Two part polyurethane sealants). 2. Properties: Performance: Nonstain, nonbleed, nonstreaking to sealed and adjacent

substrates.



3. Products and Manufacturers: a. Masters Builders Solutions; MasterSeal NP 2. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex 2c NS or Sikaflex

2c NS TG as applicable.

K. Two Part Polyurethane Sealants: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50; use NT, M, A and O. 1. Use: Typical Wall and Floor Joints (Two Part Polyurethane Sealants). 2. Properties: Performance: Nonstain, nonbleed, nonstreaking to sealed and adjacent

substrates. The minimum pli value after 7 day immersion shall not be less than 13 when tested in strict accordance with ASTM C794 Adhesion in Peel.

3. Products and Manufacturers: One of the following: a. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM 7200. b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c NS TG. c. Masters Builders Solutions; NP 2.

L. Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, Substrate uses G, A, and O; and containing fungicide for mildew resistance; acid curing. 1. Use: Joints at toilet fixtures, toilet room countertops and vanities, wet areas, and janitor

closet mop receptor to wall transition. 2. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. Master Builders Solutions; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning; 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant. c. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS 1700.

M. Latex Sealant: Nonelastomeric, one part, nonsag, paintable latex sealant that is recommended for exposed applications on the interior. Complying with ASTM C 834, Type OP (opaque sealants): 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone. b. Masters Builders Solutions; MasterSeal.

N. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

O. Sealant Backing: Provide sealant backings that are nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing,

nonextruding backings of flexible plastic foam complying with ASTM C 1330, and of type indicated below. Select shape and density of cylindrical sealant backings in consultation with the manufacturer for proper performance in specific condition of use in each case.

2. Type C: Closed cell polyethylene foam material with surface skin, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state; one of the following: a. HBR Closed Cell Backer Rod; Nomaco, Inc. b. MasterSeal 920 Closed-Cell Backer-Rod; Master Builders Solutions.

P. Weep and Vent Tubes: Clear plastic (PVC) tubing, minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) inside diameter, and length required to extend between exterior face of sealant and open cavity



behind. At window and curtain wall systems, where required by system designer, provide gutter termination of tube with preformed nipples suitable for sealing to gutter.

Q. Miscellaneous Materials:1. Primer: Material recommended, as verified through compatibility and adhesion testing, by

joint sealant manufacturer for the substrates indicated to be sealed.2. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capableof staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, andformulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

3. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants andwhich will not stain nor mar the finish of surface adjacent to joints to which it is applied.

4. Cork Joint Filler: Resilient and nonextruding, ASTM D1752, Type II.5. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene, TFE fluorocarbon, or plastic tape recommended by

sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint fillermaterials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealantfailure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements for jointconfiguration, installation tolerances, and conditions affecting sealant performance. Proceedwith installation after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants tocomply with the recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and requirements:1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates interfering with adhesion of joint sealant,

including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved forsealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), existing joint sealants, oil,grease, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of tile and similar porous joint substratesurfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination ofthese methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bondwith joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations byvacuuming or blowing out joints with oil free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of tile, and other nonporous

surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, orleave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming (Elastomeric Sealants Only): Prime joint substrates where recommended inwriting by joint sealant manufacturer, based on prior testing and experience. Apply primer tocomply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoiningsurfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or bycleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after toolingwithout disturbing joint seal.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Silicone Glazing Sealants: Refer to Section 08 80 00.

B. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products andapplications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

C. Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealantsapplicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and atposition necessary to produce cross sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relativeto joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Trim for tight fit around

obstructions or elements penetrating the joint.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that become wet before sealant application and

replace with dry sealant backings.4. Install bond breaker tape behind sealants where backings are not used between sealants

and back of joints.

E. Weeps and Vents: Install weeps and vents into joints at the same time sealants are beinginstalled. Locate weeps and vents spaced recommended by sealant manufacturer and thewindow and curtain wall fabricator and erector. Do not install weeps and vents at outsidebuilding corners. Do not install vents at horizontal joints immediately below shelf angles, sills,and through wall flashings.

F. Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques resulting in sealants directly contacting andfully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration,and providing uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allowoptimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at same time sealant backings areinstalled.1. Apply sealants in depth in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

recommended general proportions and limitations.2. Apply elastomeric sealants, in joints not subject to traffic or abrasion, to a depth equal to

50% of the joint width, but not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) and not more than 1/2 inch (13mm).

3. Apply nonelastomeric sealants to a depth approximately equal to the joint width.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning orcuring begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform, beads to eliminate air pockets; and toensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants fromsurfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to the profile shown, or if none is shown, tool slightlyconcave.1. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.2. Provide a slight wash on horizontal joints where horizontal and vertical surfaces meet.3. Against rough surfaces or in joints of uneven widths avoid the appearance of excess

sealant or compound by locating the compound or sealant well back into joint whereverpossible.

H. Installation of Preformed Silicone Sealant System:1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant

system.2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with

preformed silicone sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a



bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch (6 mm) inside masking tape.

3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.

4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife.

I. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer written recommendations.


A. Field Adhesion Testing: Field test exterior wall joint sealant adhesion to joint substrates: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer field adhesion hand pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.



3.5 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

A. Indoor Air Quality: Provide temporary ventilation during work. Coordinate interior application of sealants with interior finishes schedule.


A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

B. Protect joint sealants during and after curing from contact with contaminating substances and from damage so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1

SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Provide items shown on the drawings and specified, including, but not limited to the following:1. Standard and fire rated hollow metal doors2. Hollow metal frames for doors, sidelites, transoms, and windows.3. Louvers and vision lites in steel doors, if shown or required.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry.

B. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing.

C. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.

D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing in doors, sidelites, transoms, and windows.

E. Section 09 90 00 - Paintings and Coatings.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)1. A115.IG, Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.2. A224.1, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for

Steel Doors & Frames.3. A250.8, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.4. A250.11, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.

B. ASTM International (ASTM)1. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.2. A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated

by the Hot-Dip Process.3. A1008, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-

Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, SolutionHardened, and Bake Hardenable.

4. A1011, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength.

5. C1363 - Standard Test Method for the Thermal Performance of Building Materials andEnvelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.

6. E283 – Standard Test Method for Determining the rate of Air Leakage Through ExteriorWindows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across theSpecimen.


HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 11 13 - 2

7. E413 - Standard Classification for Rating Sound Insulation

C. Federal Specification (Fed Spec) 1 Fed Spec C578 Bead Fusion Test.

D. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) 1. HMMA 802 - Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

2. HMMA 810 - Hollow Metal Doors. 3. HMMA 830 - Hardware Preparation and Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

4. HMMA 840 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 5. HMMA 850 - Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors & Frames. 6. HMMA 890 - Technical Summary of Hollow Metal by HMMA.

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 80, Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 2. 252, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

F. Steel Door Institute – Current Standards 1. Technical Data Series.

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. Building Materials Directory. 2. Listing and Labeling. 3. 10B and 10C, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 4. 1784, Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

H. Intertek Testing, Services (Warnock Hersey, Inc. (WHI)) 1. Listing and Labeling.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's standard details and catalog data demonstrating compliance with

specifications and referenced standards. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate complete schedule in detail for each steel door and frame using the same reference number for details and openings as those on the Contract Drawings. If any door is not by the steel door manufacturer only the door opening number should be shown along with the type of door (wood, plastic laminate faced, etc.).

2. Show details of construction, installation, connections, anchors, hardware reinforcement, hardware preparation, louvers, and floor and threshold clearances.

C. Samples are required from non-Steel Door Institute members:

1. 12 inch x 12 inch sample of a fire-rated and non-rated door, cut from corner of door, showing door construction.

2. 12 inch x 12 inch sample of each type of door louver specified or required, showing louver construction.

3. 6 inch long sample of a fire-rated, non-rated frame, and each type of glass stop specified or required, showing corner and construction.

D. Certificates: 1. Manufacturer’s certification that oversized openings are in compliance with specifications.



08 11 13 - 3


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: If other than a manufacturer listed under Paragraph 2.1 is proposed for use on the Project, it shall be a company specializing in the manufacturer of steel doors and frames of the type specified for this Project with a minimum of five (5) years experience.

B. All steel doors and frames shall be by a single manufacturer, shop drawings to be submitted with

manufacturer’s insignia which is being supplied.

C. Furnish steel doors and frames to meet current ANSI/Steel Door Standards.

D. ANSI/SDI-A250.13 (2003) Testing and Rating of Sever Windstorm Resistant Components for Swing Door Assemblies.

E. ASTM E 330-97, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

F. Comply with ASTM E 283 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies:

1. Fire-Rated Door, Panel, Frame, and Fire Window Construction: Shall conform to ASTM E2074, NFPA 252, or UL 10B, as applicable, and acceptable to the code authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Fire-Rated Door Construction: a. Not withstanding any other requirements of this Specification, provide gauge of

metal, method of construction, hardware preparation, reinforcement, and placement, glass opening size, and other specifics required to obtain the specified or required label. The label shall contain the fire resistance rating (20 minute, 45 minute, 1 hour, 1-1/2 hour, 3 hour, etc.) and the designation (A, B, C, D, or E). Doors with “B” Label shall be 1-1/2 hour.

b. Fire-rated doors used in a stairway enclosure, shall be so constructed so that the maximum transmitted temperature shall not exceed 450 degrees F above ambient temperature at the end of 30 minutes of the Standard Fire Exposure Test and shall be so noted on the label.

3. Fire-Rated Openings: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire-rated class shown or required by

code authorities having jurisdiction. a. Units shall be identical to assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have

been determined in accordance with requirements specified under Paragraph C, 01, above, and shall be labeled and listed by UL, WHI, or other inspection and testing agency acceptable to the code authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Fire-rated steel doors, panels, frames, and fire windows shall bear permanent labels attesting to fire resistance. At stairway enclosures, provide units listed for 450 degree F maximum temperature rise rating for 30 minutes of exposure.

c. Oversized openings shall be constructed in accordance with all applicable requirements for labeled door construction.

d. Fire rated door assemblies with gaps in excess of 1/8 inch between door and frame will not comply with NFPA 80.

e. Locate label on hinge side of doors and frames so that when door is closed, label is not visible.



08 11 13 - 4

f. Caution shall be taken to ensure that labels are not removed, damaged or painted over.

g. Glass panes shall not exceed sizes allowed whether indicated or not on the drawings.

B. Wind Loads: Provide hollow metal and door hardware assemblies approved by the Texas

Department of Insurance, including anchorage, capable of withstanding windload design pressures which are calculated for this project by a registered Architect or Engineer and is part of the construction documents per the Texas Department of Insurance, authorities having jurisdiction and the International Building Code Design Loads per section 1609.

C. Hurricane-Resistance Test Performance: Provide hollow metal and door hardware approved

assemblies that pass large missile-impact tests, as required by Texas Department of Insurance systems location above grade, and cyclic-pressure tests according to testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Impact Resistance: Hollow metal with approved door hardware assemblies must satisfy

the Texas Department of Insurance’s criteria for protection from windborne debris in both the Inland 1 zone and the Seaward zone. The assemblies must have passed the large missile impact test (which equates to Missile Level D specified in ASTM E 1996-02). The assemblies may be installed at any height on the structure as long as the design pressure rating for the assemblies is not exceeded. These assemblies will and do not need to be protected with an impact protective system when installed in areas where windborne debris protection is required.


A. Refer to Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination. 1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the Work of this Section with Work in which hollow metal Work is installed.

B. Coordinate hardware installation with opening construction. Door hardware is specified in Section 08 71 00.

C. Coordinate doors, frames, and windows with glazing specified in Section 08 80 00.

D. Coordinate doors and frames with painting specified in Section 09 91 00.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as follows: 1. In manufacturer's original, clearly labeled, undamaged containers or wrappers. 2. Containers or wrappers shall list the name of the manufacturer and product.

B. Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with

the scheduled time of installation.

C. Protect products from moisture, construction traffic, and damage. 1. Store under cover in a clean, dry place, protected from weather and abuse. 2. Store in a manner that will prevent rust or damage. 3. Store doors in a vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation. 4. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters. 5. Should containers or wrappers become wet, remove immediately.



08 11 13 - 5

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one (1) year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or non-conforming materials and workmanship.

B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Use of incorrect materials in opening 2. Incorrect labeled components installed within opening. 3. Noisy, rough or difficult operation 4. Failure to meet specified quality assurance requirements.


A. Manufacturers listed below whose products meet or exceed the specifications are approved for use on the Project. Other manufacturers must comply with Paragraph 1.5, A, Manufacturer Qualifications, must manufacture equivalent products to those specified and comply with requirements of Division 1 regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. CECO Door Products, an Assa Abloy company. (888-264-7474). 2. Curries Company, an Assa Abloy company. (641-423-1334). 3. Deansteel Mfg. Co.; (210) 226-8271. 4. Door Pro Systems, Inc., (713) 462-0860. 5. Mesker Door Inc.; (256) 851-6670. 6. Pearland Industries; (713) 434-9898. 7. Pioneer Industries, Inc.; (309) 856-6000. 8. Republic Builders Products Company; (800) 733-3667. 9. Steelcraft Mfg. Co., an Allegion company; (513) 745-6400.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Requirements, all frames to be manufactured of commercial quality, stretcher leveled flatness, cold rolled steel per ASTM-A1008 general requirements. Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM-A1011. Exterior frames and interior frames where shown on drawings or required in damp, moist, humid, and wet areas, i.e., toilets, locker rooms, showers, etc., to be manufactured of commercial quality, stretcher leveled flatness, cold rolled steel and galvannealed to 'A-60' minimum coating weight standard per ASTM-A653 and A924, with coating weight of not less than 0.60 ounce per square foot (0.30 ounce per square foot per side).

2.3 FRAME FABRICATION

A. Minimum Gauges: 1. Interior Openings:

a. Less than 4 feet-0 inches in Width: 16 gauge. b. 4 feet-0 inches in Width and greater: 14 gauge.

2. Exterior Openings: 14 gauge

B. Design and Construction:

1. Frames shall be custom made, welded units with integral trim of sizes and shapes shown on approved shop drawings. Hinge jambs that butt adjacent 90 degree walls shall have at



08 11 13 - 6

least four (4) inch wide frame face to assure the door trim will not strike the wall prior to the door opening at least 90 degrees. Frame profile shall match wall thickness where practical, i.e., 4-3/4 inch at 4 inch CMU, 6-3/4 inch at 6 inch CMU, and 8-3/4 inch at 8 inch CMU. At masonry wall openings, fabricate frames to suite masonry opening with 2 inch head member.

2. Frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects, warp and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their length.

3. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as shown on approved shop drawings. 4. Corner joints, including face and inside corners, shall have contact edges closed tight, with

trim faces mitered and continuously welded, and stops butted. The use of gussets shall not be permitted. Face of frame shall be ground smooth. Knockdown (KD) frames are not permitted.

5. Minimum depth of stops shall be 5/8 inch, except at fire windows where minimum depth of stops shall be 3/4 inch.

6. Frames for multiple openings shall have mullion and rail members which are closed tubular shapes having no visible seams or joints. Joints between faces of abutting members shall be securely welded and finished smooth. Mullions shall be key locked removable type. Keys shall be master keyed to Owner’s Best system.

7. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inch and wider with mortise/butt type hinges only at top hinge location to deter against hinge reinforcement sag.

8. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gage strap for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 8 Door Hardware.

9. Provide countersunk flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops; provide security head screws at exterior locations.

10. Provide A60 Galvannealed coating at frames in restrooms and locker rooms with showers/Jacuzzi, clean areas such as kitchen rooms.

11. Electrical Knock Out Boxes: Factory weld 18 gage electrical knock out boxes to frame for electrical hardware preps; included but not limited to electric thru wire hinges, electrical raceways, door position switches, electric strikes, jamb mount card readers, and magnetic licks as noted in door hardware sets in Division 8 - Door Hardware. a. Electrical knock out boxes are required at door position switches, electric strikes,

card readers, and middle hinge locations for all exterior locations regardless of electrical hardware specified in Division 8 - Door Hardware.

b. Provide electrical knock out boxes with ¾-inch knockouts. c. Conduit to be coordinated and installed in field from middle hinge box and strike

box to door position box. d. Electrical knock out boxes to comply with NFPA requirements and fit electrical door

hardware as specified in hardware sets in Division 8 Finish Hardware. e. Electrical knock out boxes for continuous hinges should be located in the center of

the vertical dimension on the hinge jamb. f. Provide field installed conduit per Division 28 section for standardized plug

connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires as required for electrified door hardware specified in hardware sets in Division 8 Door Hardware. Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.

12. Hardware Reinforcements: a. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully template

mortised hardware in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by Section 08 71 00. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only.

b. Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:



08 11 13 - 7

1) Hinge and pivot reinforcements (1-1/4 inch x 10 inch minimum size): 7 gauge.

2) Strike reinforcements: 12 gauge. 3) Flush bolt reinforcements: 12 gauge. 4) Closer reinforcements: 12 gauge. 5) Reinforcements for surface-mounted hardware, hold-open arms, surface

panic devices: 12 gauge.

13. Floor Anchors: Minimum 14 gauge, securely welded inside each jamb, with holes for floor anchorage.

14. Jamb Anchors: a. Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with adjustable jamb

anchors of the T-Strap type. Anchors shall be not less than 16 gauge steel. The number of anchors provided at each jamb shall be as follows: 1) Frames up to 7 feet-6 inch height - Three (3) anchors 2) Frames 7 feet-6 inch to 8 feet-0 inch height - Four (4) anchors 3) Frames over 8 feet-0 inch height - One (1) anchor for each 2 feet or

fraction thereof in height.

b. Frames for installation in wood or metal stud partitions shall be provided with steel anchors of suitable approved design, not less than 16 gauge thickness, securely welded inside each jamb as follows: 1) Frames up to 7 feet-6 inch height - Four (4) anchors 2) Frames 7 feet-6 inch to 8 feet-0 inch height - Five (5) anchors 3) Frames over 8 feet-0 inch height - Four (4) anchors plus one (1) additional

for each 2 feet or fraction thereof over 8 feet-0 inches.

c. Frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel shall be provided with anchors of suitable design as shown on approved shop drawings.

15. Dust Cover Boxes: Shall be of not less than 26 gauge steel and shall be provided at all mortised hardware items. Eight (8) inch CMU walls with face brick shall have dual offset jamb anchors.

16. Steel Spreader: Shall be provided on all frames, temporarily attached to bottoms of both jambs for bracing during shipping and handling.

17. Loose Glazing Stops: Shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than 20 gauge, butted at corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws. Loose stops at exterior frames shall be placed on the interior side of the frames.

18. At sound rated door openings and at masonry openings, coat inside of frame profile with corrosion resistant coating to minimum thickness of 1/16 inch.

C. Frame Color: Field painted under Section 09 90 00 to match face of door.

2.4 DOOR FABRICATION

A. Minimum Gauges: 1. Interior Doors: 0.047 inch or 18 gauge (16 gauge for high frequency doors). 2. Exterior Doors: 0.059 inch or 16 gauge (14 gauge for windstorm rated doors).

B. Design and Construction:

1. Types: Doors shall be custom fabricated, of types and sizes shown on approved shop drawings, and shall be seamless face construction with no visible seams or joints on vertical edges with fully welded seams free from blemishes and defects.Thickness: Shall be



08 11 13 - 8

1-3/4 inch, unless specifically noted or shown otherwise. 2. Exterior Doors: Provide doors with 22 gage steel z-channels placed at 6 inches apart with

foamed in place polyurethane core, with a thermal insulation calculated R factor of 11.01 per ASTM C518 Standards.

3. Fabrication: a. Doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage and buckle. b. Corner bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius for gage of metal

used. c. Provide 22 gauge steel stiffeners spaced maximum six (6) inches on center and

extending full height of door. d. Fill interior with noncombustible fiberglass insulation. Use mineral board filler as

required for labeled doors. e. Faces shall be joined at vertical edges of door by a continuous weld extending full

height of door. Welds shall be ground, filled and dressed smooth to provide a smooth flush surface.

f. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending full width of door and spot weld to both faces. Exterior doors shall have an additional flush closing channel at top and bottom edges. Openings shall be provided in the bottom closure channel at top and bottom edges. Openings shall be provided in the bottom closure of exterior doors to permit the escape of entrapped moisture.

g. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gage strap for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 8 - Door Hardware.

h. Electrical Raceways: Provide raceways for standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires as required for electrified door hardware specified in hardware sets in Division 8 - Door Hardware. Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.

i. Doors within in wet or humid areas shall have a top cap and solid foam interior core to prevent internal moisture accumulation and galvannealed.

j. Edge profile shall be provided on both vertical edges of door as follows: 1) Single-Acting Swing Doors: Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches.

k. Hardware Reinforcements:

1) Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully template hardware, in accordance with the approved hardware schedule and templates provided by Section 08 71 00. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, doors shall have reinforcing plates only.

2) Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: a) Hinge & pivot reinforcements: 7 gauge b) Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders,

concealed or surface-mounted closers: 12 gauge.

4. Glass Moldings and Stops: Loose stops shall be not less than 20 gauge steel, with butt corner joints, secured to frame opening by countersunk screws. Snap-on attachments will not be acceptable.

5. Louvers: Shall be inverted "V" blade, sightproof type, unless noted otherwise. 6. Edge Clearances:

a. Between Door and Frame at Head and Jambs: 1/8 inch. b. At DoorSills with No Threshold: 5/8 inch to 3/4 inch above finished floor. c. At DoorSills with Threshold: As required to suit threshold. d. Between Meeting Edges of Double Doors: 1/8 inch.

C. Finish:



08 11 13 - 9

1. Shop paint steel (whether galvanized or ungalvanized) stops and accessories as follows: a. Clean surfaces free of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.

b. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of an approved baked-on rust-inhibitive primer paint to provide a minimum 0.5 mil dry film thickness.

2. Field painted under Section 09 90 00.

2.5 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for openings requiring fire protection ratings as scheduled and to comply with NFPA 80. Such doors and frames shall be constructed as tested and approved by UL, WHI, or other nationally recognized testing agency having a factory inspection service and approved by code authorities having jurisdiction and shall bear the appropriate permanent label.

B. If any door or frame scheduled to be fire-rated cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of

its size, design, hardware or other reason; the Architect shall be so advised before fabrication work on that item is started.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Separate dissimilar metals. Protect against galvanic action.

B. Frames: 1. Anchorage and Connections: Secure to adjacent construction. Where practical, interior

door frames shall be flush with the pull side wall to minimize or eliminate the reveal and allow full 180 degree door swing.

2. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and install labeled frames in accordance with NFPA 80.

3. Frame Spreader Bars: Leave intact until frames are set perfectly square and plumb and anchors are securely attached.

4. Remove hardware, with the exception of prime-coated items, tag box, and reinstall after finish paint Work is completed. Do not remove or paint over labels on labeled frames.

C. Doors: 1. Install hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. 2. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and install labeled doors in

accordance with NFPA 80. 3. Adjust operable parts for correct function. 4. Remove hardware, with the exception of prime-coated items, tag, box, and reinstall after

finish paint Work is completed. Do not remove or paint over labels on labeled doors. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects.

B. Clean and restore soiled surfaces.

C. Remove scraps and debris, and leave site in clean condition.



GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 13 - 1

SECTION 08 44 13 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GeneralConditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls.2. Perimeter sealant.3. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.


A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete: Weld plates embedded in concrete for attachmentof anchors.

B. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing: Steel attachment members.

C. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.

D. Section 08 80 00 – Glazing.

E. Section 09 90 00 – Paintings and Coatings: Field painting of interior surface of infill panels.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of Texas withexperience in the design of curtainwalls and aluminum storefronts to design glazed aluminumcurtain walls using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Provide curtain wall assembly, storefront system, and windows by a single source and tested asa combined single assembly.

C. System Description: Curtainwall assembly fabricated from aluminum stick framed system withexposed interior and exterior metal framing. Design system to allow for installation tolerances,expansion and contractor of adjacent materials and joint design.1. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not identify or solve thermal or structural movement,

glazing, anchorage, or moisture disposal. Details establish basic dimension of unit, sightlines, and profiles of members.

2. Glass, sealants, and interior finishes do not contribute to framing member strength,stiffness, or lateral stability.

3. Design and fabricate glazing systems for interior glazing.4. Design perimeter conditions to allow for installation tolerances, expansion and

contraction of adjacent materials, and sealant manufacturer's recommended joint design.5. Design attachments to address site conditions, expansion, and contraction movements to

eliminate possibility of loosening, weakening, or fracturing connection between units andbuilding structure or between units themselves.

6. Allow for expansion and contraction due to structural movement without detriment toappearance or performance.



7. Design system to drain to exterior face of wall, water entering joints and condensationoccurring within system by drain holes and gutters of adequate size to evacuate waterwithout infiltration to interior or the top of lower lites of glass.

8. Design metal faces to be visually flat under lighting conditions.9. Design interior dense EPDM wedge gasket with sealed corners, with maximum 30%

compression when glazed, to create a water and air seal.10. Design rigid isolators to maintain flatness of face caps and provide thermal break

between exterior and interior members.11. For stresses placed on structural silicone sealants, maintain sealant manufacturer's

recommended maximum.12. Not Permitted: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement,

thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, orfracturing of attachments or components of system.

D. Performance Criteria: Coordinate with Section 084100 for performance criteria, fabrication, anderection standards. Provide curtain wall assemblies to meet or exceed performancerequirements:1. Design and fabricate curtain wall to withstand the operating loads without measurable

permanent deflection. Limit deflections to provide the normal degree of rigidity required toavoid glass breakage, air infiltration, and objectionable results of excessive flexibility.

2. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structureincluding, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, anddeflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

3. Failure also includes the following:a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.b. Glass breakage.c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.e. Failure of operating units.

E. Structural Loads:1. Wind Loads: Design, fabricate, and install framing system to withstand the maximum

inward and outward wind pressures required by IBC.a. Basic Wind Speed: Refer to Structural Drawings.b. Exposure Category: Refer to Structural Drawings.c. Risk Category: Refer to Structural Drawings.

2. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure:a. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction

perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for eachindividual glazing lite or 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches(4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individualglazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less.

b. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2mm), whichever is smaller.1.) Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) clearance between

framing members and operable units.

c. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point:1.) Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus

1/4 inch (6. 35 mm) for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m) or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m).

d. Do not permit permanent deformation (set) in metal framing Work. Permanentdeformation, fastener, weld, or gasket failure, component breakage or



disengagement shall not occur under wind loading equal to 1.5 times the wind loads (positive or negative). Permanent deformation shall be taken as deflection without recovery exceeding 1/1000 times span.

F. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

G. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa) and 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested

according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft. (720 Pa).

I. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at

dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft. (720 Pa).

2. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior.

J. Interstory Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated. 1. Design Displacement: Indicated on Drawings. 2. Test Performance: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type

when tested according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

K. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of

not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.23 W/sq. m x K) as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than [0.35] [0.40] [0.45] <Insert value> as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC certified condensation resistance rating of no less than [15] [25] [35] [45] as determined according to NFRC 500. Excessive condensation is defined as the accumulation of uncontrolled condensate flowing from the curtain wall at any location, or visible ice, frost, or water on more than 5% of the area of any module of the exterior wall.

L. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332: 1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission (OITC) Class: Minimum [26] [30] [34].

M. Sound Transmission: Provide window wall and storefront systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having sound transmission characteristics of:



1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 31 standard and 37 laminated STC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.

N. Windborne Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile impact and cyclic pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4. 1. Small Missile Test: For glazed openings located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade.

O. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F (67 degrees C), ambient; 180 degrees F (100

degrees C), material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,

anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal

surface temperature of 180 degrees F (82 degrees C). b. Low Exterior Ambient Air Temperature: 0 degrees F (minus 18 degrees C).

P. Structural Sealant Joints: 1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing. 2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi (138 kPa).

Q. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural sealant glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no

sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate

from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

R. Design Modifications: Submit design modifications necessary to meet performance requirements and field coordination. 1. Variations in details or materials shall not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or

strength of components, nor shall variations cause excessive stress, or deflections, to building structural frame.

2. Maintain general design concept without altering size of members, profiles, and alignment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Combined Submittals: Combine submittals for exterior curtainwall and storefronts into a single submission. Submit combined shop drawing which has been reviewed, annotated, and coordinated by each of the principal exterior cladding subcontractors. 1. As an indication of review, and as a condition of acceptance by the Architect, provide

combined submittal with a cover sheet clearly indicating the signatures of the Contractor and each exterior cladding subcontractor.

2. Coordinate curtainwall, storefronts and entrances, windows, ACM, and window wall submittals.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer technical data for each type of product, including construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.



C. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, sections, full size details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full size isometric details of each vertical to horizontal intersection of glazed

aluminum curtain walls, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. f. Thermal breaks. g. Interface with building construction.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor

barriers. 4. Indicate glazing details, methods, locations of various types and thickness of glass,

emergency breakout locations, and internal sealant requirements. 5. Indicate locations of exposed fasteners and joints for Architect's acceptance.

D. Fabrication Sample (Mock Up Drawings): Submit drawings for field mockup of each vertical to horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12 inch (300 mm) lengths of full size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

E. Delegated Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for the preparation.

F. Structural Calculations: Submit sealed copies of structural calculations indicating complete compliance with the specified performance requirements. Submit calculations prepared, signed, and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas.

G. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project. 2. Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency for each mockup

test. 3. Record Drawings: Record drawings prepared from as built drawings of preconstruction

laboratory mockups showing changes made during preconstruction laboratory mockup testing.

H. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and components from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC certified energy performance values for each glazed

aluminum curtain wall.

I. Reports: Submit the following: 1. Product Test Reports: Submit report for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 2. Quality Control Program: Program developed specifically for Project, including fabrication

and installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality control reports.

3. Source quality control reports.



4. Field quality control reports.

J. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data to include in maintenance manuals.

K. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural sealant glazed curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase quality control program.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Building Code: Comply with applicable requirements of IBC with Austin amendments for

building cladding. 2. Energy Code: Comply with applicable provisions of the IECC. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.

4. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements.

a. U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).

b. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Useable Building and Facilities. c. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 2012.

5. Welding Standards: Welding shall be performed by skilled and qualified mechanics.

Welding shall be performed in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel and AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.

6. Federal Standard 16 CFR 1201, Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials, published in Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). a. Comply with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, wherever

requirements conflict the more stringent shall be required. Obtain approvals from authorities.

b. As a minimum provide safety glazing complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.

7. Structural Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of structural sealant glazed curtain walls.

8. Energy Performance Standards: NFRC for minimum standards of energy performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.

B. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator specializing in the fabrication of aluminum framed window wall and window systems and components, having minimum 10 years documented experience, and with sufficient production capacity, organized quality control and testing procedures, and published written and illustrated installation manuals, to produce and install the entrance assemblies required.

C. Installer Qualifications: Firm that specializes in the erection of aluminum framed window wall, storefront, and window systems, having minimum 10 years documented experience, and approved or certified by manufacturer/fabricator. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for curtainwall, storefront, and window

systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufactured units in systems similar to those indicated.



a. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally licensed to practice in the State of Texas, experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of heavy glass storefront and entrance system similar to those indicated in material, design, and extent.

D. Laboratory Mockup Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025.

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025.

F. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

G. Structural Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of curtain wall assemblies.

H. Source Limitations: Obtain components of curtain wall system, including framing, entrances, and accessories, from single manufacturer.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.

J. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Perform testing on mockups according to specified requirements. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


K. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockups: 1. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform

testing on preconstruction laboratory mockups. 2. Build preconstruction laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel,

products, and methods of construction that will be used at Project site. a. Size and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. b. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when

preconstruction laboratory mockups will be constructed and tested.

3. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Program: Test preconstruction laboratory mockups according to requirements. Perform the following tests in the following order: a. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 50 percent of positive test load. b. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. c. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. d. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: AAMA 501.1. e. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 percent of positive and negative test loads. Repeat

the following:



1) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.2) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.

f. Interstory Drift: AAMA 501.4 at 100 percent of design displacement. Repeat thefollowing:1) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.2) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.

g. Vertical Interstory Movement: AAMA 501.7. Repeat the following:1) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.2) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.

h. Thermal Cycling: According to AAMA 501.5. Repeat the following:1) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.2) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.

i. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 and 150 percent of positive and negative test loads.Repeat the following:1) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.2) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.

L. Laboratory Mockup Testing: Curtain wall mock up testing shall include components of fixedwindow units, glazed framing including captured mullions and SSG mullions, and storefrontunits in mock up.1. Laboratory Mockup Testing: Provide mockups as specified for testing. Verify required

mockup submittals are reviewed and have received final approval from the Architect priorto construction of the mockups.a. Laboratory testing mockups are used as a standard for judging visual and

performance acceptability of the Work for the project. Replace unsatisfactoryWork as directed. Provide personnel to construct exterior wall mockups who willbe the same personnel who will be performing and supervising the actual Work.Simulate actual construction conditions as accurately as possible in every way.Provide extra materials necessary to replace any which fail during tests. Cut glassused in mockups to the minimum tolerances expected in the final exterior wallinstallation.

b. Size: As shown but not less than the requirements of AAMA Standard 501 andASTM E 331 Section 9. Provide larger mockup(s) if the proposed exterior walldetails create a condition requiring a larger mockup(s) for proper evaluation andtesting. Provide mockups at wall testing facility complete with glass, aluminumframing, metal panels, anchors, connections, flashings, sealants, and joint fillers asaccepted on the mockup shop drawings. Do not take special precautions or usetechniques that do not represent those to be used on the Work.

c. Laboratory Testing: Notify the Architect of the readiness of the mockups forpreliminary and final testing. Do not begin the testing program without thepresence of the Owner's representative and the Architect.1) Preliminary Test: Conduct single static pressure test at 50 percent of the

maximum Wind Pressure followed by a single test for water penetration at50 percent of the pressure specified.a) The preliminary test is purposely limited to a single event. No interim

or repeat preliminary testing for Contractor benefit or correction ofsystems shall be permitted.

2) Preform tests of the mockup(s) in accordance with the standards except asmodified, in the order listed, and in accordance with the specifiedperformance criteria. Tests 1 and 5 shall be conducted at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75Pa) and 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa), respectively. Tests 2, 3, and 6 shall be



conducted at 12 lbf/sq. ft. (600 Pa) for 1 cycle, maintaining the test pressure for 15 minutes. a) Test 1 (For Air Infiltration): ASTM E 283. Extraneous air leakage

(tare) shall be limited to 10 percent or less of the net air leakage through the exterior wall assembly as provided under ASTM E 283. Provide pressure taps as required within the test chamber to ensure uniform stratification of design test pressure across the exterior wall assembly.

b) Test 2 (For Water Penetration - Uniform Static Pressure): ASTM E 331.

c) Test 3 (For Water Penetration - Dynamic Pressure): AAMA 501.1. d) Test 4 (For Structural Performance): ASTM E 330, Method B, test to

.5, and 1.0 times the wind pressure, during test. Deflection readings shall be taken at end connections and midspans of main framing members, at intersections of framing members and at midspans of glass holding members, glass, and panels. Take readings for both positive and negative loading. If failure occurs through glass breakage prior to achieving 1.5 times the maximum wind pressure, replace glass and repeat test. Two successive failures of the same light or panel not otherwise attributable to inherent glass defects will be considered unacceptable. Further tests shall be suspended until deficiencies are corrected, which may include increasing the stiffness of glass holding members and/or adjustment of the glazing details.

e) Test 5 (Retest for Air Infiltration): ASTM E 283. Extraneous air leakage (tare) shall be limited to 10 percent or less of the net air leakage through the exterior wall assembly as provided under ASTM E 283. Provide pressure taps as required within the test chamber to ensure uniform stratification of design test pressure across the exterior wall assembly.

f) Test 6 (Retest for Water Penetration, Uniform Static Pressure): ASTM E331.

g) Test 7 (For Structural Performance): ASTM E 330, Method B, except conduct test to 1.5 times the maximum wind pressure. Record pressures and deflections at 1.5 times the wind pressure, during test.

h) Test 8 (For Live Load Deflection Performance): AAMA 501.4 Modified. Test for live load deflection by applying vertical load to the frame supporting the mockup specimen, so as to induce a deflection in the mockup equivalent to the live load deflection identified on the drawings at the location the mockup is simulating. The load shall be applied and released through ten (10) cycles. Visually inspect mockup specimen after each displacement.

i) Test 9 (Exterior Window Maintenance Equipment Test): Perform concentrated load testing on the exterior wall maintenance tie back equipment attached to the exterior wall framing. Apply outward, inward, and side-loading of a magnitude and for a duration as required to comply with the authorities having jurisdiction for window washing equipment. There shall be no failure or gross permanent distortion of the tie back equipment or any part of the exterior wall framing.

j) Test 10 (For Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance): At the completion of Test 9, carefully disassemble the glass, glazing, and metal framing components and reassemble them as a mockup, and test the mockup, in accordance with AAMA 1503.1.

d. Corrective Measures: Correct deficiencies in mockups observed during testing and repeat tests as required to show compliance with performance standards.



Deficiencies requiring repair or modification to mockup(s) require complete retesting of mockup(s) beginning with the specified Preliminary Test unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 1) The Owner will pay the cost of the first mock up test. The cost of

subsequent tests and retesting is the responsibility of the contractor. TheContractor shall bear costs for additional retesting until compliance withperformance standards is accomplished.

2) Incorporate corrective measures indicated by the test report into the finalexterior wall assemblies after review by the Architect.


A. Identify components of curtainwall Work after fabrication by marks clearly indicating location inthe building. Package components to protect components from damage during shipping andhandling.

B. Storage on Site: Store units, components, and materials in clean, dry location, away fromuncured concrete, masonry Work, sprayed on fireproofing Work, and construction activities.Cover with nonstaining waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting to permitcirculation of air inside the covering.

C. Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise care to avoid damage to finishes of metals orbreakage of glass.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements beforefabrication so curtainwall Work is accurately designed, fabricated, and fitted to the structure.Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with constructionprogress to avoid delaying the Work. Use Contractor’s lines and benchmarks as a basis formeasurements.1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating curtainwalls without fieldmeasurements. Coordinate supporting structure construction to ensure actualdimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Assembly Warranty: Written warranty signed by manufacturer, Contractor, and Installer in whichthe manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain wall thatdo not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specifiedwarranty period.1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure to meet performance requirements.b. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.c. Glass breakage due to defective design.d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.e. Deterioration of metals and materials beyond normal weathering.f. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.g. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering.h. Failure of insulating glass.i. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.j. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.



B. Finish Warranty: Written warranty signed by manufacturer in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer/Product: Kawneer North America, 1600 Series or equivalent product from list of approved manufacturers. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience manufacturing products meeting or exceeding the specifications and comply with Division 1 requirements regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. Arcadia, Inc. 2. Bruce Wall Systems Corporation. 3. CMI Architectural. 4. EFCO Corporation. 5. EXTECH/Exterior Technologies, Inc. 6. Oldcastle Building Enclosure. 7. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 8. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions. 9. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC. 10. Tubelite Inc. 11. U.S. Aluminum; a brand of C.R. Laurence. 12. Unitized Systems LLC. 13. Waltek & Company Limited. 14. Wausau Window and Wall Systems; Apogee Wausau Group. 15. YKK AP America, Inc.

B. Framing Members: Extruded or formed aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced necessary to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on two sides and structural sealant

on two sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Finish: Powder coat finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Either factory or field fabricated system.

C. Aluminum Curtain Wall System: Kawneer Co., Inc., 1600 Series or equivalent product from list of approved manufacturers: 1. Structural Properties:

a. Limit the dead load deflection of horizontal members supporting glass to 1/175 of the clear span with a 1/8 inch maximum deflection.

b. Limit the deflection of any member in a direction parallel to the plane of the wall and of any corner mullion in both parallel and perpendicular directions to a max-imum of 25 percent of the glass bite dimension and maintain a minimum of 1/8 inch clearance between the member and the edge of the glass, panel, or other component.

c. Limit the wind load deflection of any member to 1/240 plus 1/4 inch of the clear span, based on “pinned” ends.



d. Limit the wind load deflection of corner mullions to the span as specified above, with the specified pressure acting on one face of the building with no pressure acting on the adjacent face, or 1/2 the specified pressure acting on one face of the building with 1/2 the specified suction acting on the adjacent face, whichever is the greatest.

e. No wall element shall sustain permanent deflection of glass breakage under maximum design load.

f. The panels and their connections shall accommodate movements of the struc-ture resulting from lateral forces. Provide connections with sufficient ductility to preclude brittle failure, at or near, welds.

D. Framing Sizes: 2-1/2 inches x 6-3/4 inches where indicated on the drawings. Miter ends of horizontals to form segmented curve at commons

E. Pressure Caps: Aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing with snap on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.

F. Brackets and Reinforcements: High strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

G. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Zinc rich, corrosion resistant primer complying with SSPC-

PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

3. Carbon Steel: ASTM A36.

2.2 ENTRANCES

A. Entrances: Comply with Section 08 41 00.

2.3 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00.

B. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with Section 08 80 00.

C. Glazing Sealants: Recommended by manufacturer.

D. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in curtainwall assembly indicated. 1. Color: Architect to select from manufacturer’s full range of colors.



E. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural sealant, weatherseal sealant, and structural sealant glazed curtainwall manufacturers for this use. 1. Color: Match structural sealant.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system.

B. Anchors: Three way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot dip galvanized cast iron, malleable iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Corrosion resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6. Provisions for safety railings mounted between mullions at interior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible. 8. Components curved to indicated radii.

D. Fabricate components to resist water penetration: 1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation

occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.



2. Pressure equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier atinterior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and vented toexterior.

E. Curtainwall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear block system.

F. Factory Assembled Frame Units:1. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.2. Prepare surfaces that are in contact structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.3. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.4. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.5. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify locations according to Shop Drawings.


A. Powder Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating,and applying and baking finish.1. Color and Gloss: Selected by Architect.


A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures,sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, adjoining construction, structural support, anchorage, andconditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and conditions affectingperformance of the Work.1. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.

Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and built incomponents to ensure weathertight window wall installation.

2. Notify Architect in writing, of dimensions, or conditions, found which prevent properexecution of the window wall Work, including specified tolerances.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's writteninstructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to,cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation with building enclosure Work.



B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing curtain wall, accessories, and othercomponents. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer'swritten instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.1. Do not install damaged components.2. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.3. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.4. Remove loose particles present or resulting from fabrication or field cutting and drilling by

blowing out joints with oil free compressed air, or by vacuuming joints.5. Remove protective coatings, oils from cutting and drilling operations, and residue on

metallic surfaces with solvents that leave no residue.6. Do not allow solvent to air dry without wiping. Use lint free towels for wiping of surfaces.

Wipe metal surfaces with IPA (isopropyl alcohol) or xylene unless otherwise required bycompatibility and adhesion testing results. Seal joints watertight. Clean excess jointsealants from finished surfaces.

7. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolyticdeterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

8. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimizedistortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.

9. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.10. Set components within erection tolerances with uniform joints. Place components on

shims and fasten to supporting substrates using bolts and similar fasteners.11. Do not erect components that are warped, deformed, bowed, dented, defaced, or

damaged and impair strength or appearance. Remove and replace members damagedin process of erection.

12. Coat concealed surfaces of dissimilar materials, and ferrous metal components, withheavy coating of bituminous paint, zinc rich primer or separation in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations. Where aluminum components will contact concrete ormasonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

13. Do not burn, cut into or field drill holes or slots in building framing member without writtenacceptance of the structural engineer.

C. Metal Protection:1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installingnonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by paintingcontact surfaces with bituminous paint.

D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framingmembers, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

F. Permanently fasten to building structure with manufacturer recommended attachments andshims to permanently fasten system to building structure. Securely anchor components andunits in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. Set sillmembers in bed of sealant. Set other members with internal sealants and baffles to provideweathertight construction.

G. Water Drainage: Compartmentalize each light of glass using joint plugs and silicone sealant todivert water to the horizontal weep locations. Locate weep holes in the horizontal pressureplates and covers to divert water to the exterior of the building.

H. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weatherstripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.



I. Glazing: Install glazing gaskets and sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions without exception; including surface preparations. Refer to Section 088000. 1. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's

written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

J. Insulation and Fire Stopping: Refer to Section 07 21 00 and Section 07 84 00, respectively.

K. Weatherseal: Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7

mm) over total length. 5. Tolerances are not accumulative.


A. The Owner reserves the rights to engage an independent testing and inspection agency to verify the adequacy of the Contractor’s quality control. Obtain inspections from representative of the Owner’s independent testing and inspection agency. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements.

B. Test Area: Perform tests on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls.

C. Field Quality Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls. 1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by

Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing but not

more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.45 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

3. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 0.67

times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa), and shall not evidence water penetration.



D. Structural Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, Hand Pull Tab (Destructive), Appendix X2.

E. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional Work with specified requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to factory finished exposed surfaces.

B. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.

C. Immediately remove deleterious material from surfaces of aluminum.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that window wall Work will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.



ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 00 - 1

SECTION 08 51 00 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Aluminum windows for exterior locations.2. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.

1.3 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440:

B. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.30

C. Windborne Debris Impact Resistance: Capable of resisting impact from windborne debris basedon testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testinginformation in ASTM E 1996 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product, including construction details, materialdescriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles,hardware, and finishes for aluminum windows.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens,operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealantinstallation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm)in size.

D. Samples: For aluminum windows and components required, showing full range of color variationsfor finishes, and prepared on Samples of size indicated below:1. Exposed Finishes: 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm).

E. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualifiedtesting agency.

G. Field quality control reports.


A. Regulatory Requirements:1. Energy Code: Provide window units compliant with the IECC with Texas amendments,



2. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. a. Window Certification: AAMA certified with label attached to each window.

3. Texas Department of Insurance, Windstorm Regulations; provide products listed in the

Product Evaluation Index and having a current report number. 4. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements.

a. U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).

b. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Useable Building and Facilities. c. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS).

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer having minimum 5 years documented experience who is capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting the performance by test reports and calculations.

C. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated

with the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching. 3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with other

exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchoring, flashing, weeping, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.

5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty signed by Manufacturer in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and

air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.



d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.

2. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide impact resistant window products by one of the following: 1. Arcadia, Inc. 2. EFCO Corporation. 3. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 4. Peerless Products, Inc. 5. Wausau Window and Wall Systems; Apogee Wausau Group. 6. Winco Manufacturing Co.

B. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Horizontal sliding.

C. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an integral,

concealed, low conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal to metal contact.

D. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. 1. Kind: Fully tempered.

E. Windborne Debris Impact Resistant Insulating Glass: ASTM E 2190, factory assembled sealed glass unit units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary

sealants. 2. Spacer: Aluminum with black, color anodic finish. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both. 4. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 6. Outdoor Lite: Low E tinted float glass, impact resistant laminated glass. 7. Interspace Content: Air. 8. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.

F. Hardware: Provide hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

G. Horizontal Sliding Window Hardware:



1. Sill Cap/Track: Extruded aluminum track with natural anodized finish of dimensions and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior.

2. Locks and Latches: Allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only.

3. Roller Assemblies: Low friction design.

H. Weather Stripping: Provide full perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.

I. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. For

application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Integral Ventilating System/Device: Where indicated, provide weather-stripped, adjustable, horizontal fresh air vent, with a free airflow slot, full width of window sash by approximately 1 inch (25 mm) when open, complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. Equip vent bar with an integral insect screen, removable for cleaning.

B. Dividers (False Muntins): Provide extruded aluminum divider grilles in designs indicated for each sash lite. 1. Type: Permanently located between insulating glass lites. 2. Pattern: Indicated on Drawings. 3. Profile: Selected by Architect.

C. Subsills: Thermally broken, extruded aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on Drawings.

D. Column Covers: Extruded aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

E. Interior Trim: Extruded aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

F. Panning Trim: Extruded aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

G. Receptor System: Two piece, snap together, thermally broken, extruded aluminum receptor system that anchors windows in place.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.

D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.

E. Provide water shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration.

F. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for



movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.

G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

2.4 FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work.

B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.

C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.

D. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.



D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested

work complies with or deviates from requirements.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: 1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be

performed according to AAMA 502. 2. Air Infiltration Testing:

a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated.

b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one decimal place.

3. Water Resistance Testing: a. Test Pressure: Two/thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance with

AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated. b. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration.

4. Testing Extent: Three mockup windows of each type as selected by Architect and a

qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured.

5. Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502.

C. Windows will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.

B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.



GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditionsand other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Impacted resistant glass.2. Glazing sealants.3. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Thickness: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating glass unit.


A. Delegated Design: Design glass panels including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualifiedprofessional engineer lawfully licensed in the State of Texas, using performance requirements anddesign criteria indicated.

B. Installed Glazing: Design glazing systems to withstand normal thermal movement and wind andimpact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to thefollowing: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remainwatertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and underconditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.1. Design Wind Pressures: Indicated on Drawings.2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to

ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on the Drawings.b. Basic Wind Speed: As indicated on the Drawings.c. Importance Factor: 1.0.

3. Exposure Category: C.4. Design Snow Loads: Indicated on Drawings.5. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part of

the glass.6. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees

from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001.7. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center of glass

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch(25 mm), whichever is less.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified,as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2

3. For insulating glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite.

4. U-Factors: Center of glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center of glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product including recommended installation and cleaning procedures.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass required. Prepare samples from same material to be used for Work.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thickness for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Delegated Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Product Certificates: Submit glass product certificates required by Code. 1. Glass Manufacturer Certificate: The glass manufacturer shall submit a letter certifying it has

reviewed the glazing details proposed for the project, including the use of gaskets and sealants, and that each product furnished is recommended for the application shown and compliance with the Code.

F. Thermal Stress and Wind Load Analyses: Submit the following from the glass manufacturer: 1. Thermal stress analysis for each exterior glass unit type, each building elevation. The analysis

shall clearly indicate the expected service temperature ranges and the effects of partial and full shading on the glass. a. Attach to the thermal stress analysis a statement from the glass manufacturer that based

upon this analysis that the resulting thermal stresses will not reduce the specified statistical probability of breakage.

2. Wind load analysis for each glass unit type, each building elevation. The analysis shall indicate the statistical probability of breakage at the design wind pressure does not exceed the specified statistical probability of breakage.

G. Product Test Reports: Submit test reports for insulating glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Glazing Sealants: Provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within

previous 36 month period. 2. Glazing Sealants: Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Building Code: Comply with applicable requirements of the IBC for glazing. 2. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with

certification label of the SGCC or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3

a. As a minimum provide Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 (Consumer Product Safety Commission Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials, published in the Code of Federal Regulations) and ANSI Z97.1.

b. Permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council.

3. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

4. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product organizations. a. GANA: Glazing Manual. b. IGMA: SIGMA TM-3000 Vertical Glazing Guidelines. c. GANA: Laminated Glazing Reference Manual. d. AAMA: AAMA GDSG-1 Glass Design for Sloped Glazing. e. AAMA: TIR A7 Sloped Glazing Guidelines. f. IGMA for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001 Guidelines for Sloped Glazing. g. IGMA for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000 North American Glazing Guidelines for

Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use.

5. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 listed and labeled by UL for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

6. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. a. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated.

7. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat

strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass necessary to comply with performance requirements. a. Where heat strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat strengthened float glass

or fully tempered float glass necessary to comply with performance requirements. b. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating Glass Units with Sputter Coated, Low E Coatings: Insulating glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated glass manufacturer.

C. Installer Qualifications, Glazer: Experience entity having minimum 5 years documented experience and who employs glass installers certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

D. Installer Qualifications, Decorative Film: Experience entity having minimum 5 years documented experience in the installation of glass films.

E. Source Limitations for Glass and Glass Accessories: Obtain each type of glass and glass accessories from a single source.

F. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

G. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

H. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

I. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 08 41 13 to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4


J. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant

products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective

measures including the use of specially formulated primers.

K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

D. Exercise exceptional care to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage/deterioration to coating on glass.

E. Comply with insulating glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside

limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C).

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous with decorative glass by field measurements before fabrication.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Written warranty, executed by glass manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace glass units that fail in materials and workmanship or deteriorate within warranty period. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to decorative glass manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Insulating Glass: Written warranty signed by manufacturer in which manufacturer agrees to replace insulating glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Glass:

a. Cardinal Glass Industries. b. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard. c. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. d. Pilkington North America. e. Viracon.

B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.

C. Adhered Backing: Adhered scrim backing to ceramic coated surface; provide backed units identical to materials which, while possibly developing cracks and fissures, show no shear nor develop any openings large enough for the unobstructed penetration of 3 inch diameter sphere when tested by approved independent testing laboratory: 1. Mount test specimens consisting of 3 glass assemblies, 34" x 76" (plus zero or minus 3/16

inch), for testing as specified in ANSI Z-97.1. 2. Expose specimens to 100 cycles of the following conditions:

a. 1 hour at 0 degrees F, ambient humidity. b. 3 hours increase from 0 degrees F to 140 degrees F, 95 to 100 percent relative humidity. c. 1 hour at 140 degrees F, 95 to 100 percent relative humidity. d. 3 hours decrease from 140 degrees F to 0 degrees F, ambient humidity.

3. Break glass by springloaded prick punch at midpoint of either vertical edge. 4. After breaking glass, subject it to pressure of 4 lbf per sq. ft. for 5 minutes to simulate wind

load. 5. Inorganic Opacifier: Provide polyethylene opacifier where no insulation and other backing

material is applied directly to spandrel glass. Use polyester where direct attachment does occur.

6. Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing fallout resistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048.

2.2 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating Glass Units: Factory assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6

B. Performance Properties: 1. Basis of Design Product: SNX51/23 as manufactured by Guardian Sunguard. 2. Outboard-Inboard Substrate: Clear-Clear. 3. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 5. Interspace Content: Air. 6. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 maximum. 9. Light to Solar Gain (LSG): 2.31.

C. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary sealants. 1. Spacer: Aluminum with black, color anodic finish. Thermally broken aluminum. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Technoform

Glass Insulation NA, Inc. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

D. Fire Protection Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire protection ratings indicated, based on positive pressure testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9, including the hose stream test, and complying with NFPA 80. For ratings 60 minutes or greater, glazing shall meet the test requirements of ASTM E119 or UL 263.

E. Fire Protection Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire protection rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating manufacturer's name; test standard; whether glazing is permitted to be used in doors or openings; if permitted in openings, whether or not glazing has passed the hose-stream test; whether or not glazing meets 450 degrees F (250 degrees C) temperature rise limitation; and the fire resistance rating in minutes.

2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants compatible with one another and with other materials in contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

C. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Selected by Architect.

D. Glazing Sealant: Neutral curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Sika Corporation.

E. Glazing Sealant: Neutral curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. d. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. e. Pecora Corporation. f. Polymeric Systems, Inc. g. Sika Corporation.

F. Glazing Sealant: Neutral curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. d. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. e. Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company. g. Sika Corporation.

G. Glazing Sealant: Acid curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Dow Corning Corporation. d. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. e. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Polymeric Systems, Inc. h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company. i. Sika Corporation.

H. Glazing Sealants for Fire rated Glazing Products: Neutral curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.

2. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Selected by Architect.

I. Back Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

J. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2 AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full

bead of liquid sealant.

K. Miscellaneous Glazing Accessories: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 1. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 2. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5. 3. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 4. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking). 5. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

6. Perimeter Insulation for Fire Resistive Glazing: Product approved by testing agency listed and labeled fire resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire protection rating indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass

framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F (67 degrees C), ambient; 180 degrees F (100

degrees C), material surfaces.

2. Edge and Surface Conditions: Comply with the recommendations of AAMA Structural Properties of Glass for clean cut edges, except comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Exposed Glass Edges and Surface Condition: Finish edges flat with an arrissed edge profile (small bevel of uniform width not exceeding 1.5 mm at an angle of approximately 45 degrees to the surface of the glass) with polished (surface is reflective in appearance similar to the major surface of the glass) surface.

B. Cutting: Wheel cut or sawed edges and seamed at manufacturer's option. For site cut glass, provide glass 2 inches (50.8 mm) larger than required in both dimensions to facilitate cutting of clean cut edges without the necessity of seaming or nipping. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade heat treated glass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.



GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 1. Comply with manufacturer instructions for wiping of surfaces immediately before application of

primers. 2. Wipe metal surfaces with IPA (isopropyl alcohol) unless otherwise required by compatibility

and adhesion testing results.

B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install pieces improperly sized or with damaged edges, scratches, abrasion, or evidence damage. Remove labels from glass immediately after installation.

C. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units so exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

D. Seal vent (breather or capillary) tubes in insulating glass units in accordance with insulating glass manufacturer written recommendations.

3.3 GLAZING

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install

correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 10

J. Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. 1. Square cut wedge shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets as recommended by gasket

manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

K. Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, the exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. 1. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes

to make tapes fit opening. 2. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. 3. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. 4. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. 5. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. 6. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting

dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

7. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

L. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. 1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. 2. Installation with Drive in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3. Installation with Pressure Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

4. Install gaskets to protrude past face of glazing stops.

M. Sealant Glazing (Wet): Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. 1. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 2. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

N. Structurally Glazed Units: Set full height continuous structural gaskets/spacers to vertical mullions. Set glass units with void between edge of units and head/sill channel, but with units fully within head/sill rebate so as to provide a proper bite. 1. Align glass unit edges over vertical mullion continuous structural gasket/spacers and secure

with manufacturers recommended temporary cleats. 2. Structurally seal glass unit to vertical mullions with specified one part structural silicone sealant.

Tool structural silicone flush in alignment to mullion face and perpendicular to face of interior glass light; remove excess structural silicone from glass and metal substrates.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 11

3. After full cure of structural silicone sealant remove temporary cleats. Immediately seal holes left in the vertical mullions caused by temporary cleats.

4. Insert and shape weatherseal joint backer rods, or gaskets, into vertical void between glass units and at a proper depth to receive silicone weatherseal sealant.

5. Place silicone weatherseal sealant into void and tool flush with adjacent exterior glass light faces; remove excess sealant from glass and metal substrates.

O. Erection Tolerances: 1. Maximum Deviation from Vertical: 1/8 inch in any story and 1/4 inch in any 45 foot run. 2. Maximum Deviation from Horizontal: 1/8 inch in any 30 foot run. 3. Maximum Deviation from True Alignment: 1/32 inch for any two (2) abutting units. Allow no

edge projections. 4. Maximum Joint Gap: 1/32 inch.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If contaminating substances come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as

recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

PART 4 – SCHEDULE

4.1 GLAZING SCHEDULE

A. G-11 Insulated, Impact Resistant Glass: Low-e 1-5/16 inch thick insulating large missile impact resistant laminated safety glass comprised of two (2) 1/4 inch thick glazing quality glass lites, laminated to each side of a clear 0.090 inch thick polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer in accordance with ASTM E1996, separated by a 1/2 inch air space, with a 1/4 inch thick glazing quality clear tempered float glass exterior lite. Glass shall be as tested for hurricane impact in the aluminum manufacturer's framing system.



RESILIENT BASE 09 65 13 - 1

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Rubber base2. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product including manufacturer’s installationinstructions.

B. Samples: Sample of Base Selected or Color Chart if none selected.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit for inclusion in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Entity having minimum 5 years documented experience who employsworkers competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seamingmethod indicated.


A. Store base and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambienttemperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50degrees F (10 degrees C) or more than 85 degrees F (29 degrees C). Store floor tiles on flatsurfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70degrees F (21 degrees C) or more than 85 degrees F (29 degrees C), in spaces to receive floortile during the following time periods:1. 48 hours before installation.2. During installation.3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within rangerecommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) or more than 95degrees F (35 degrees C).

C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after installation.



1.7 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish extra materials matching products installed and packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Resilient Base: 1 percent of quality installed or 2 full unopened containers, whichever is

greater.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Basis of Design (B-1 & 2): Roppe. Other manufacturers are subject to compliance with requirements or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Flexco Floors. 2. Johnsite, a division of Tarkett Group. 3. Mannington Commercial.

B. Rubber Base: ASTM F1861. 1. Material: Rubber, vulcanized, Type TS, Group I, Styles A and B. 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Topset cove; minimum 100 foot coil, cut to length required. 4. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 5. Color: Refer to the Drawings. 6. Height: 4 inches, unless indicated otherwise. 7. Outside Corners: Job formed. 8. Inside Corners: Job formed.

C. Adhesives: Water resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified

for other work and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.

B. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions. Installation of resilient flooring and accessories indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Immediately before installation, sweep clean substrates to be covered by resilient base.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing flooring. Scribe and cut flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.



B. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

C. Resilient Base: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned. 2. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of

resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 5. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 6. Job Formed Corners:

a. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length.

b. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. c. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with

returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length. 1) Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.



LUXURY VINYL TILE FLOORING 09 65 23 - 1

SECTION 09 65 23 – LUXURY VINYL TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Luxury vinyl floor tile.2. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.


A. Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product including manufacturer’s installationinstructions.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways,enclosing partitions, built in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: Full size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.1. Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT) flooring: 18 inch by 18 inch (460 mm by 460 mm) tile in each color

selected and 12 inch long piece of base material in each color selected for approval.

D. Product Schedule: Submit for floor tile using same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit for inclusion in maintenance manuals.

F. Reports: Certified Moisture Testing Results.


A. Regulatory Requirements:1. Fire Test Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.a. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.b. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 per ASTM E 662 or NFPA

258.

2. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements.a. U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board Americans with

Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).b. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Useable Building and Facilities.c. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 2012.



B. Installer Qualifications: Entity having minimum 5 years documented experience who employs workers competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

C. Contractor is required to achieve the specified concrete moisture content prior to installation of all flooring materials or use a flooring manufacture approved moisture barrier prior to installation of all flooring products. Contractor shall provide certified moisture testing results per ASTM F2170 (Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes) to Architect and Owner prior to floor installation. Acceptable moisture content of concrete sub floor shall be within approved manufacture limits or lower prior to installation.

D. Source Limitations: 1. Tile: Obtain floor products of same type and color or finish from one source or producer.

Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

2. Setting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or more than 85 degrees F (29 degrees C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) or more than 85 degrees F (29 degrees C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) or more than 95 degrees F (35 degrees C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Where demountable partitions, cabinets, and similar items are indicated for installation on top of resilient tile flooring, install tile before these items are installed.

F. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.

G. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified herein for twenty (20) years against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship.

B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Damaged tile, including broken or chipped edges. 2. Loose or missing tile. 3. Noticeable deterioration or discoloring of tile or grout.

1.9 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish extra materials matching products installed and packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. LVT Flooring: 1 percent of quality installed or 2 full unopened containers, whichever is

greater.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Basis of Design Product: Tarkett Company. Other manufacturers are subject to compliance with requirements. 1. Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT):

a. Gerflor. b. Karndean. c. Aspecta. d. Armstrong. e. Mohawk. f. Mannington. g. Patcraft.

B. Luxury Solid Vinyl Tile (LVT-1): 1. Basis of Design: Unveil #0601V as manufactured by Tarkett Company. 2. Class: Class III, Printed film vinyl plank. 3. Type: B, embossed surface. 4. Thickness: 3 mm. 5. Size: 9 inch x 35 inch nominal. 6. Construction: 30 mil. direct glue, heavy commercial LVT. 7. Colors: Architect to select from manufacturer’s full range of colors. 8. Location: Refer to the Drawings. 9. Pattern: Brick Install.

C. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex modified, portland cement based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

D. Adhesives: High-strength, high-track type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated for quick dry time.

E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified

for other Work and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.

B. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions. Installation of resilient flooring and accessories indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 95 percent relative humidity level.

5. Bond Test: Bond 3' x 3' panels spaced 50 feet apart throughout subfloor area. After moisture test proves floor acceptably dry, install panels using adhesive. If panels are securely bonded after 72 hours, subfloor is sufficiently clean of foreign materials for satisfactory installation of resilient flooring.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials

into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing flooring. Scribe and cut flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built in furniture including



cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

B. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

C. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one/half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

D. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.

E. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

F. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

H. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

I. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

J. Floor Tile: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. 1. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor

offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one/half tile at perimeter. a. Lay tiles square with room axis unless pattern indicated for an area.

2. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence

as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.

K. Resilient Accessories: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. 1. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.



B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. Apply two coat(s).

E. Sealers and Finish Coats: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient terrazzo floor tile surfaces before applying liquid cleaners, sealers, and finish products. 1. Sealer: Apply two base coats of liquid sealer. 2. Finish: Apply two coats of liquid floor finish.

F. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

G. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Before cleaning, strip protective floor polish. 2. Reapply polish to floor surfaces to restore protective floor finish according to flooring

manufacturer's written recommendations.



PAINTINGS AND COATINGS 09 90 00 - 1

SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTINGS AND COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed items and surfaces.2. Field preparation and painting of factory primed metal products and fabrications.3. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply.1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at

an 85 degree meter.2. Eggshell refers to low sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when

measured at a 60 degree meter.3. Semigloss refers to medium sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when

measured at a 60 degree meter.4. Full gloss refers to high sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at

a 60 degree meter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit technical data and information for block fillers, primers, paints, andcoatings, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coatingmaterial proposed for use.1. Indicate manufacturer's instructions for special surface preparation procedures, substrate

conditions requiring special attention.2. Material List: Provide inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material

and cross reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify eachmaterial by manufacturer's catalog number, series, and general classification.

B. Samples: Submit for each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and

primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit untilrequired sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sampleas to location and application.

3. Submit samples on following substrates for review of color and texture only:a. Concrete: Provide two 4 inch square samples for each color and finish.b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4" x 8" samples of masonry, with mortar joint in

the center, for each finish and color.c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12 inch square samples of each color and material

on hardboard.d. Ferrous and Nonferrous Metals: Provide two 4 inch square samples of flat metal

and two 8 inch long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.



C. Product List: Submit list of including each paint system, color, and location of application. Use same product and location designations indicated in Finish Schedule.

D. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams “Custodian Project Color and Product Information” report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with Finish Schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Manual Safety Data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touchup procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with Federal and local toxicity and air quality regulations and with Federal

requirements on content of for heavy metals including but not limited to: lead and mercury. Do not use solvents in paint products that contribute to air pollution.

2. Performance and Durability: a. ASTM D 16 – “Standard Test Method for Load Testing Refractory Shapes at

High Temperatures.” b. ASTM D 2486 – “Standard Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Interior Wall

Paint.” c. ASTM D 2805 – “Standard Test Method for Hiding Power of Paints by

Reflectometry.” d. ASTM D 4828 – “Standard Test Method for Practical Washability of Organic

Coatings.” e. ASTM D 3363 – “Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.”

B. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual having minimum 5 years documented experience in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply waterborne paints when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F (10 degrees and 32 degrees C).

B. Do not thin or add water to waterbased paints, including waterbased alkyds.

C. Weather Conditions: 1. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the

temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. 2. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

3. Minimum Application Temperatures for Water based Paints: Between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).



D. Apply solvent thinned paints when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 degrees F. and 95 degrees F (7 degrees F and 35 degrees C). 1. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) for

interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. 2. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are

enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods.

E. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles (860lx) measured midheight at substrate surface.

F. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual, other code required labels, or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Written warranty signed by the manufacturer and the installer in which the manufacturer and installer agree to repair or replace paint and primers that fail within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Flaking or delamination of paint with the substrate. b. Rust, scale, similar imperfections due to improper surface preparation. c. Thinning or watering of paint beyond that considered acceptable of paint

manufacturer. d. Failure to achieve dry film thickness (DFT) recommended by manufacturer for

each coat in a paint system. e. Deterioration or loss of color of paint beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 2 percent, but not less than 1 gallon (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Basis of Specifications: Sherwin Williams paints. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide first quality, 100% acrylic, commercial or industrial products of one of the specified manufacturers. Residential products are not permitted. 1. Proprietary Names: Paint Schedule is based on a single manufacturer for convenience.

Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that named products are required to the exclusion of comparable products of specified manufacturers. Furnish product technical data, including per cent solids by weight and volume; VOC content limits and emissions data; and certificates of performance for comparable paint products of specified manufacturer.

2. Paint Products: a. PPG Industries, Inc. b. Sherwin-Williams Co.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide each paint system including block fillers, primers, and finish coats, that are compatible with one another and with substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best quality commercial paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. Residential quality paint products are not permitted.

D. Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products complying with limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain components restricted by the EPA.

E. Accessories: Materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.

F. Patching Materials: Latex filler compatible with paint systems.

G. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke to engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. 1. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If

paint materials have already been delivered to site, samples may be taken at the site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

2.3 COLORS A. Colors shall be as selected by Architect. Different colors may be selected for each room,

and more than one (1) color may be selected in each room.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and conditions affecting performance of the work.

B. Test substrates after repairing and cleaning substrates but prior to application of paint and coatings. 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows: a. Concrete: 12 percent. b. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. c. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.



2. Test cementitious and plaster cement/stucco for alkalinity (pH).

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify joints are taped and finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify plaster has fully cured. Verify existing plaster is in good condition and can receive new paint coating.

E. Spray Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify surfaces are dry.

F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. 1. Verify previously painted surfaces can be stripped to bare substrate, repaired if

necessary, and prepared to receive new paint system consisting of primer and two top coats at a minimum. a. Note: If previously painted surfaces have failed to accept new paint systems,

determine cause of failure and take corrective measures to ensure each surface accepts new paint system. Failure of new paint system is not permitted.

G. Commence paint and coating application after correcting unsatisfactory conditions and surfaces are dry. Application of coating indicates applicator’s acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 ITEMS TO RECEIVE PAINT

A. Generally, all new items that are normally painted in any typical building, including but not limited to the following list: 1. All ferrous metal 2. All exterior galvanized metal 3. All exterior wood 4. All interior wood 5. All prime coated hardware 6. All exposed pipe, plumbing, ductwork, conduit, outlet boxes and electrical cabinets,

excluding those located in mechanical rooms. 7. Aluminum and copper items, unless noted otherwise. (Painting of exposed pipe, including

copper, brass, galvanized and black iron pipe and fittings, is included.) 8. All metal grilles, except aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. 9. All exposed gypsum board surfaces, including all mechanical rooms. 10. Sealants of types which should not be painted and to which paint will not adhere. 11. Aluminum, stainless steel, nickel and chrome plated piping and fittings. 12. Miscellaneous other items which normally require painting or are scheduled to be

painted. 13. Consult plans, finish schedule, details and specifications for other trades as all items

usually field painted or finish will be considered as part of the Contract. 14. All exposed mechanical equipment and electrical equipment. 15. Traffic lanes and parking spaces including fire lanes and crosswalks. 16. Rolling doors. 17. Bollards. 18. Loose lintels. 19. Wood Fiber Decks. 20. Refer to MEP specifications for additional items to receive paint.

B. Accessible Parking Space for pavement:

1. “No Parking” painted on any access aisle adjacent to the parking space. 2. Letter height at least 12 inches and a stroke width of at least two inches. 3. Centered within each access aisle adjacent to the parking space.



C. All work where a coat of material has been applied must be inspected and approved by Architect before application of succeeding specified coat, otherwise no credit for coat applied will be given. Notify Architect when a particular coat has been completed for inspection and approval. Apply coats of material in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications except where requirements of these specifications are in excess of manufacturer's requirements. Paint all sight exposed pipe and plumbing only after all mechanical work and tests have been completed.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Coordination of Work: Review work in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. Notify Architect of anticipated problems when using materials specified over substrates primed by others. 1. Preprimed Substrates: Inspect existing conditions in which primers are factory applied to

ensure compatibility of the total system for each substrate. Notify Architect of anticipated problems when using the materials specified over factory primed or preprimed substrates.

2. Existing Painted Surfaces: Inspect previously painted surfaces to ensure compatibility of the existing paints with new paint system for each substrate. Notify Architect of anticipated problems.

3. Correct defects and clean surfaces affecting bond with paint system. Remove existing paints exhibiting loose surface defects showing signs of rust, scale, or delamination.

4. Seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface applied protection before surface preparation and painting 1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items

that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface applied protection before surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

2. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface applied protection if any.

3. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

4. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive paint according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers, existing paint or coating, or remove and reprime.

5. Correct defects and clean surfaces affecting bond with paint or coating system. Remove existing coatings exhibiting loose surface defects. Seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

C. Cleaning: Before applying paint or surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 1. Remove incompatible primers, including factory applied primers, and reprime substrate

with compatible primers or apply barrier coat as necessary to produce paint systems indicated.

2. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.



4. Galvanized Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

5. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.

D. Mildew and Mold Removal: Remove mildew and mold by high power washing (pressure range of 1500 to 4000 psi) with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. If substrate is too soft for high power washing, scrub substrate with solution. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

E. Protective Coverings: Provide protections for duration of the work, including covering furnishings and decorative items. Protect and mask adjacent finishes and components against damage, marking, overpainting, and injury. Clean and repair or replace damage caused by painting.

F. Renovated Surfaces: Clean surface free of loose dirt and dust. Except at gypsum board surfaces, remove existing paint and coatings to bare substrate and prepare substrates to receive new paint system. Test substrate to verify it will bond with primer and receive new paint system without failure. If test fails, clean surface to base substrate and apply barrier coat. Retest to verify surface will accept new paint system. 1. Remove surface film preventing proper adhesion and bond. 2. Wash glossy paint with a solution of sal soda and rinse thoroughly. 3. Remove loose, blistered, and defective paint and varnish; smooth edges with sandpaper. 4. Clean corroded iron and steel surfaces. 5. Repair and blend into portland cement plaster. 6. Prime bare surfaces. 7. Tone varnished surfaces with stain bringing to uniform color. 8. If existing surfaces cannot be put in acceptable condition for finishing by customary

cleaning, sanding, and puttying operations, notify Owner and do not proceed until correcting unsatisfactory conditions.

G. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC recommendations. 1. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according

to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. 2. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat

before priming. 3. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire

brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

H. Galvanized Ferrous Metal Substrates: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum based solvents leaving surface free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Shop Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop primed surfaces.

J. Aluminum Substrates: Clean surfaces to remove oil, grease, surface oxidation, and contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 Solvent Cleaning. Lightly abrade surface with a nonmetallic pad.

K. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.



L. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

M. Pipe Covering and Insulation: Clean to remove loose, foreign, and objectionable material before applying sealing coat.

N. Preparation of Substrates for Wallcovering: Prime and seal substrate with release coat in accordance with wallcovering manufacturer's recommendations for substrate. 1. Assure compatibility with product of wall covering manufacturer. 2. Fill indentations in substrate and prime with opaque white primer before applying release

coat. 3. Apply release coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

O. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign

materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required

during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Do not use thinners for water based paints. 4. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where

multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. 1. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built in fixtures,

grilles, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

2. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 3. Provide finish coats compatible with primers. 4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

5. Paint exposed surfaces. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. a. Field painting of exposed surfaces include bare and covered pipes and ducts

(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory applied final finish.

b. Areas visible when permanent or built in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, and similar components are in place.

c. Extend coatings in areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through

registers or grilles. 7. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar

hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 8. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. Do not paint over labels of independent



testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

9. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

10. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

11. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 12. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used. 13. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Items not to Receive Paint: Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

C. Applicators: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or applicators recommended by manufacturer. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate

size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool recommended by

manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size recommended by

manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Measure film thickness on magnetic surfaces by use of Elcometer thickness gauge and

on nonmagnetic surfaces by pit gauge or Tooke Gauge.

E. Application: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application

method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished after removing rust and scale and priming or touching up surface sand if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

3. If undercoats, stains, or conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried and cured to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. 1. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and

electrical components and paint separately. 2. Prime and paint uninsulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed

ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, heat exchangers, tanks, ductwork, conduit, switchgear, and paintable insulation except where items are prefinished.



3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.

4. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment.

5. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering.

6. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

7. Concealed Members: Wherever steel and metal parts to receive paint are built into and concealed by construction, paint as specified for exposed parts so finish painting is complete before members are concealed.

G. Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: Painting is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. 1. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and

electrical components and paint separately. 2. Prime and paint uninsulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed

ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, heat exchangers, tanks, ductwork, conduit, switchgear, and paintable insulation except where items are prefinished.

3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.

4. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment.

5. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering.

6. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply prime coat, recommended by manufacturer, to material required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or defects due to insufficient sealing.

J. Finish Coats: Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance without bleed through. 1. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a

smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or surface imperfections is not acceptable.

2. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats.

K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.



L. Touch Up: Touch up marred, scraped, and blemished areas of surfaces which were factory primed or previously coated. 1. Prepare and touch up scratches, abrasions, and blemishes and remove foreign matter

before proceeding with succeeding coats. 2. Touch up marred, scraped, and blemished areas of factory primed or previously coated

surfaces. 3. Feather touch up coating overlapping minimum 2 inches onto adjacent unblemished

areas producing smooth, uniform surface. 4. As soon after erection and installation as possible, touch up fasteners, welded surfaces

and surroundings, field connections, and areas on which shop coat has been abraded or damaged with specified primer before corrosion and other damage occurs from exposure.


A. Dry Film Thickness (DFT) Testing: Tests for dry film thickness may be determined by using a Tooke Scale and microgroover, an electronic scanner, or the Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. It is of the upmost importance to the client that the site remains in a safe, clean, and well maintained condition. At the end of each day, leave the site ready to use by staff and students. Protect staff and students and the learning environment throughout the work.

B. Cleanup: At the end of each day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and discarded paint materials from site. After completion of painting work, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. Provide Wet Paint signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. After related work is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

E. At completion of painting activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

F. Waste Management: Legally dispose of unused paint and paint containers in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and environmental regulations.

PART 4 - SCHEDULES

A. The following is a schedule of typical painted items and does not specifically include every item that is to receive paint but should establish type and quality of finish for all items normally included in a complete paint job.



B. Exterior Surfaces: Note: Exterior surfaces are divided into two (2) different categories, based upon color and level of graffiti resistance required. System 1 will be used when standard earthtone colors or neutral colors are specified, and System 2 will be used when bright colors (primary reds, yellows, and oranges) are specified and/or when a graffiti resistant coating is required. 1. Galvanized Metal:

a. Surface Preparation: Acid etch galvanized surfaces that have not weathered at least six (6) months prior to beginning painting operations.

b. Primer: One (1) coat Pro-Cryl Pro Industrial Universal Primer (B66W310) c. Finish: Two (2) coats Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic (B66W300)

2. Parking Line and Driveway Paint: Hotline Waterborne Yellow (TM2153) (meets Federal Specification (FS) TTP-1952-F).

3. All piping in mechanical rooms shall be painted in their entirety, in the following colors: a. Gas lines: Orange b. Domestic cold water: White c. Domestic hot water: Pink d. Heating hot water: Red e. Condenser water: Green f. Chilled water: Blue

C. Interior Surfaces:

1. Galvanized Metal: a. Primer: One (1) coat Pro-Cryl Pro Industrial Universal Primer (B66W310) b. Finish: Two (2) coats Pro Industrial Performance Acrylic – Semi-Gloss.

2. Galvanized Metal: (Use for metal hand rails)

a. Primer: One (1) coat Pro-Cryl Pro Industrial Universal Primer (B66W310) b. Finish: Two (2) coats Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Semi-Gloss,

B53-1150.

3. Gypsum Wallboard: a. Primer: One (1) coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer (B28W2600). b. Finish: Two (2) coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel (B20W2651 Series).

Alternate:

a. Primer: One (1) coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer (B28W2600). b. Finish: Microbicidial Paint: Paint Shield (EPA# 64695-1).

1) Substitutions must meet EPA #64695-1.

4. Primer Concrete and CMU: (Enamel): a. One (1) coat Loxon Block Surfacer (A24W00200). b. Finish: Two (2) coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss (B31W2651

Series).

5. CMU: (Epoxy):

a. Primer: Two (2) coats Heavy Duty Block Filler (B42W46) b. Finish: Two (2) coats Pro Industrial Waterbased Epoxy, Eg-Shel (B73 Series).

1) Location: Kitchens, bathrooms, and laboratories.

D. Paint Types: Refer to the Drawings.



GRAPHICS 10 14 00 - 1

SECTION 10 14 00 - GRAPHICS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:1. Panel signs.2. Cast character letters.3. Accessories necessary for a complete installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of signage.

B. Signage Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication and installation details and attachments to otherWork.1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories.2. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,

and layout for each sign at least half size.

D. Certifications: Submit letter of certification from manufacturer that installer and manufacturer isin compliance and meets specified requirements.

E. Samples:1. One (1) actual sample of panel sign with specified finish.


A. Regulatory Requirements:1. Building Code/City Code: Comply with building code and local ordinances for exterior

signage.2. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements.

a. U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board Americans withDisabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) 2010.

b. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Useable Building and Facilities.c. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 2012.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer has minimum 5 Years documented experience in themanufacture of signage and who employs installers and supervisors trained and approved ininstallation methods for each type of signage.

C. Thermal Movements: For exterior fabricated channel dimensional characters, allow for thermalmovements from ambient and surface temperature changes.1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F (67 degrees C), ambient; 180 degrees F (100

degrees C), material surfaces.


GRAPHICS 10 14 00 - 2


A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices and electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Written warranty signed by manufacturer in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: South Texas Graphics; (713) 467-4499. Other manufacturers shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing products meeting or exceeding those specified and shall comply with Division 1 requirements for substitutions in order to be considered. 1. Aria Signs; (713) 259-3737. 2. A.R.K. Ramos Architectural Signage Systems; (405) 235-5505. 3. InPro Corporation (IPC); (800) 222-5566. 4. Mountain Commercial Graphics; (713) 996-6634. 5. ProWorx Architectural Signage; (713) 666-3131. 6. Riot Creative Imaging; (713) 988-9200. 7. Stanley Signature Signs; (281) 395-6106. 8. The Southwell Co.; (210) 223-1831.

B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.

C. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

D. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

E. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).

F. Plastic Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3, general purpose HGS grade, 0.048-inch (1.2-mm) nominal thickness.

G. Vinyl Film: UV resistant vinyl film of nominal thickness indicated, with pressure sensitive, permanent adhesive on back; die cut to form characters or images indicated and suitable for exterior applications.


GRAPHICS 10 14 00 - 3

H. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated.

I. Accessories: 1. Fasteners and Anchors: As necessary for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive

and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: a. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. b. Exposed Metal Fastener Components: Fabricated from same basic metal and

finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of

sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Adhesive: Recommended by sign manufacturer. 4. Two Face Tape: High bond, foam core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick, with adhesive

on both sides. 5. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.2 SIGNAGE

A. General:

1. Constructed of one (1) or two (2) high pressure laminate in colors selected by Architect / Owner, laminated to an 1/8” inch thick acrylic backer.

2. Signage shall have radius or square corners with square cut edges painted a color as selected by Architect / Owner.

3. Demarcation lines, if any, can be raised 1/32” inch to match copy or engraved and infilled with a color as selected by Architect / Owner.

4. Signs shall comply with all state and federal codes, including but not limited to, the 2012 ADA and TAS requirements.

5. Refer to drawings for details of types, dimensions, colors, graphic layouts and mounting/height specifications.

B. Room Numbers, Symbols, Lower or Secondary Copy, and Pictograms:

1. Copy shall be matte finished acrylic, raised /32” inch of a color contrasting to the face laminate.

2. Characters and pictograms shall be chemically welded to the acrylic backing, through the face laminate, to assure permanent adhesion.

3. Room numbers and restroom copy shall be copy shall be accompanied by Grade II Braille by means of ‘VisiTouch DuraDot System’. Glass or metallic ‘DuraDots’ shall have

.059 inch surface diameter with body of sphere pressure secured below face laminate. Routed boxes or glued on dots are not acceptable.

4. Secondary copy shall be a minimum of 5/8” inch high, matte finished acrylic, raised 1/32” inch san serif font.


GRAPHICS 10 14 00 - 4

5. Acceptable ADA compliant fonts are Arial, Helvetica, Optima, Futura as selected by Architect, in all caps.

C. Restroom Pictograms:

1. Pictograms shall appear on a minimum 6” inch, unobstructed square.

D. Window (Slotted) Signs:

1. Window / Slotted signs shall be open at both ends for changeable insert provided by Owner. Window shall be a non-glare Lexan acrylic lens, with an exposed color laminate behind in color as selected by Architect/Owner.

E. Fasteners and Accessories:

1. 1/8” inch thick, double-sided foam tape of type recommended to suite application and commercial grade silicone sealant.

2. Back-up plates shall be supplied, when shown or required, for signage mounted on glass.

F. Provide all materials required for a complete installation.

G. Approved manufacturers:

1. Signage:

a. Basis of Design: South Texas Graphic Specialties, Inc. Houston, TX 713.467.4499.

b. Refer to 2.1.A. of Section 10 14 00 for approved manufacturers.

2. Plastic Laminate:

a. WilsonArt International, Temple, TX 800.433.3222

b. Nevamar Company, LLC, Shelton, CT 877.726.6526

c. Formica, 1.800.367.6422

d. Pionite, Shelton, CT 203.925.1556

H. Cast Characters: Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles: 1. Character Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Character Height: Indicated on Drawings. 3. Finishes:

a. Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: Color to match school colors and logo. b. Overcoat: Baked on clear coating.

4. Mounting: Concealed studs. 5. Typeface: Selected by Architect.

I. Field Applied, Vinyl Character Sign: Prespaced characters die cut from 3 mil to 3.5 mil (0.076 mm to 0.089 mm) thick, weather resistant vinyl film with release liner on the back and carrier film on the front for on site alignment and application.


GRAPHICS 10 14 00 - 5

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allen Markings. b. APCO Graphics, Inc. c. Mohawk Sign Systems. d. Seton Identification Products.

2. Size: Indicated on Drawings. 3. Substrate: Indicated on Drawings.

J. Door Vinyl Numbers: 1. Composition: 11 inch x 13 inch white background with 8 inch black reflective numbering

located on the transom above and outside door. 2. Material: Vinyl. 3. Font: Arial. 4. Sequence: Start at main entry working clockwise. The Main Entry is door number 1, then

next clockwise is 2, and so on. 5. Locations: At multiple doors, add one TWO door sign and number in the vicinity. Do not

number doors that cannot access the rest of the building.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Provide sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble

signs and assemblies as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.

5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing Work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

7. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing.

B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify brackets as necessary. 1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked enamel or powder coat finish to

match sign background color color unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


GRAPHICS 10 14 00 - 6

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.

E. Aluminum Finishes: 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 2. Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film

thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage Work. Verify sign support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign

surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.

Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. a. Comply with all applicable accessibility requirements for mounting height and

location of each sign.

4. Before installation, verify sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that impair installation.

5. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Mounting Methods: 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.


GRAPHICS 10 14 00 - 7

2. Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned.

3. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other direct mounting methods are impractical. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach signs to plate using method specified above.

C. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.



FOOTBALL, SOCCER, OR TRACK SCOREBOARD 11 66 46.1 - 1

SECTION 11 66 46.1 - FOOTBALL SCOREBOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. Exterior single-sided LED Football, Soccer or Track Scoreboard with control center.

B. Responsibility of Coordination: Coordinate the work specified herein with the work specified inother sections including electrical requirements in Division 16.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:1. Manufacturer’s schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations for manufacturer scoreboard,

control, and accessories as specified.2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and operations manual.

B. Shop Drawings: submit face layout, dimensions, electrical wiring diagrams, structural support andmounting. Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and install procedures. Include detailsof joints, attachments, and clearances.

C. Samples: Submit full range of colors, lettering styles, and finishes available for Architect’sselection.

D. Design Details: The general design is presumed adequate to permit compliance with the specifiedperformance. Provide engineering calculations to supplement the general design of the foundationand scoreboard support structure. Calculations shall bear the seal of a Registered ProfessionalEngineer, licensed in the State of Texas.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the work specified herein as follows:1. Scoreboards shall be guaranteed for five (5) years against becoming unserviceable or

causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconformingmaterials and workmanship.

2. LED digits shall be guaranteed for ten (10) years against defects in materials.3. No charge for time or materials used by others in making repairs will be paid by

manufacturer.

B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following:1. Loose or missing parts2. Severe deterioration of finish3. Faulty operation, including, but not limited to burned out LED lamps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer’s listed below who produce equivalent products to those specified are approved foruse on the Project with Architect’s approval. Manufacturers other than those listed must have aminimum of five (5) years’ experience manufacturing equivalent products to those specified andcomply with Division 1 requirements regarding substitutions to be considered.



1. Daktronics, Inc., Brookings, South Dakota 2. The Spectrum Corporation, Houston, Texas 3. Nevco, Greenville, Illinois

B. Specifications are based on Model 11120 C3 of The Spectrum Corporation, Houston, Texas; (713)

944-6200 or (800) 392-5050, website: spectrumscoreboards.com. 2.2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Scoreboard designed for outdoor use. Scoreboard shall be ELT listed for UL Standards 48 and 1433, FCC compliant, and NEC complaint. Scoreboard shall have the following displays: 1. 99:59 Minute Clock/Timer 2. HOME and VISTOR Score 3. DOWN 4. TO GO 5. BALL ON 6. QUARTER 7. Possession Indicators

2.3 GENERAL INFORMATION

A. Dimensions: 8’ x 20’ x 5 B. Power requirements: 120 VAC, 3.04 AMPS C. Shall have a Premium Polyurethane Finish D. Select from stock colors or match to a E. Scoreboards functionality shall include: F. 99:59 Minutes/Seconds Clock counts up or down

Segment Timer capable Track timing to 1/100 second Home score 0-99 with programmable Celebration “Flash” feature Visitor score 0-99 Down 1-4 To Go 0-99, reset to 10 yards BALL ON 1-50 Quarter 1-4 Automatic Clock reset and quarter advance Instant reset and posting for all digits

2.4 CONSTRUCTION

A. Scoreboard face: .080 Aluminum with premium polyurethane finish B. Scoreboard back: .050 mill finish aluminum

2.5 DIGITS

1. Digit Size: 30” Clock, 24” Scores, 21” All Others (LED

Digits) 2. Digit Color: Red Clock, All Others Amber

2.3 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper scoreboard installation.




A. Confirm scoreboard location and number as indicated in the drawings. Confirm mounting structure is completely cured and prepared for scoreboard.

B. Install specified units in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Erect units plumb and level, with power supply coordinated with the electrical Division.

C. Install each scoreboard on framing and supports as indicated on drawings. Refer to Section 03 30

00, Cast-In-Place Concrete for concrete footings of scoreboard posts as shown or required. Refer to Section 05 50 00, Miscellaneous Metals for steel items incidental to framing and support of scoreboards as shown or required. Mounting structure is the responsibility of the manufacturer.

C. Test scoreboards and accessories to ensure all are preforming accurately. Adjust each scoreboard

for proper function. Replace broken lamps, faulty control elements, and damaged parts. D. Provide controller hook-ups in first riser of telescoping bleachers specified in Section 12 66 13 or

as indicated.

E. Clean and touch-up any exposed areas.



OUTDOOR FOOTBALL EQUIPMENT 11 68 33 - 1

SECTION 11 68 33 - OUTDOOR FOOTBALL EQUIPMENT CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Football Goal Posts

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures.

Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. 1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination by all contractors and equipment manufacturers/suppliers for the work of this section shall be performed without delays or damage to parts of any work.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified for three (3) years against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship.


A. All materials shall be approved and installed in accordance with University Interscholastic League (UIL) and the National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) football rules/regulations (latest edition).

2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. A manufacturer listed whose product meets or exceeds the specifications is approved for use on the Project. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing products equivalent to those specified and comply with Division 1 requirements regarding substitutions to be considered.

2.3 FOOTBALL GOAL POSTS

A. Competition and Practice Field Football Goal Posts: 1. (30’ High School) All aluminum goal post having a main standard (gooseneck) 10-feet in

height above the playing surface with an 8-foot offset, a crossbar being 23 feet-4 inches in width, and uprights being 30-feet in height. The main standard (gooseneck) shall be 6”


OUTDOOR FOOTBALL EQUIPMENT 11 68 33 - 2

diameter Schedule 40 aluminum, the crossbar shall be 6” diameter Schedule 40 aluminum includes patented AdjustRight® feature, and the uprights shall be fabricated of Extruded 6061-T6 Aluminum Tube (4” O.D.) with rigid wire loop welded to upper end. The aluminum goal post shall be a plate mount style gooseneck with stainless steel hardware. The manufacturer shall supply all necessary hardware including anchor bolts for installation, including an access frame kit to go around the plate mount for future access. The frame kit shall come with a split cover for goal post installed and a solid cover for goal post removal. The goal post shall be powder coated white or yellow as directed by the owner.

Paint goal posts prior to installation using Sulfur Yellow “DS311Y57” fluorescent yellow paint or Reflective White “ZS211W48” white paint as manufactured by ProTech Powder Coatings or approved equivalent fluorescent yellow or white paint. Paint shall be applied to goal posts in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for paint system, utilizing all recommended primers, sealers, etc.

Approved manufacturer/product: Sportsfield Specialties Inc. Model No. GP830HSPL- Base Plate Mount High School Football Goal Post System, Model No. GPAFIT access frame kit with infill retainer system, Model No. GPAFITC full cover plug.

2. Provide safety pad to wrap around the main standard gooseneck as recommended by goal

post manufacturer to suit application. The goal post pad shall have a minimum 18” outside diameter, be 6 feet in height, and be constructed of a dense polyurethane foam core. The pad shall be covered with a heavy coated vinyl with polyester scrim (18 oz. per square yard). Custom digitally printed graphics available upon request.

B. Approved manufacturer/product: Sportsfield Specialties Inc., GPPR round football goal post pad.

GPPRDG- custom digitally printed graphic round football goal post pad. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and in locations shown on drawings or as directed by Owner/Consultant.

B. Football Goal Posts: Goal posts and foundations shall be installed and assembled in accordance

with manufacturer’s requirements.



OUTDOOR SOCCER EQUIPMENT 11 68 43 - 1

SECTION 11 68 43 - OUTDOOR SOCCER EQUIPMENT CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Soccer Goals

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures.

Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. 1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination by all contractors and equipment manufacturers/suppliers for the work of this section shall be performed without delays or damage to parts of any work.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified for three (3) years against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship.


A. All materials shall be approved and installed in accordance with NCAA rules and regulations (latest edition).

2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. A manufacturer listed whose product meets or exceeds the specifications is approved for use on the Project. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing products equivalent to those specified and comply with Division 1 requirements regarding substitutions to be considered.

2.3 SOCCER GOALS

A. Portable Soccer Goals: 1. Aluminum soccer goal (provide two) being 8-foot high by 24-foot wide by 8-foot deep, with

the front frame being 4” round-faced aluminum tubing. a) Soccer goals shall be powder coated with color being “White”.

2. Approved Product/Manufacturer:


OUTDOOR SOCCER EQUIPMENT 11 68 43 - 2

a) Sportsfield Specialties Inc. Model SG4950, UCS Model 900-8025, SportsEdge Model SE2B3806, or approved equivalent.


A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and in locations shown on drawings or as directed by Owner/Consultant.



OUTDOOR TRACK AND FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 63 - 1

SECTION 11 68 63 - OUTDOOR TRACK AND FIELD EQUIPMENT

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section.

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pole Vault BoxB. Long Jump/Triple Jump Take-Off System

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures.Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination by all contractors and equipment manufacturers/suppliers for the work of this sectionshall be performed without delays or damage to parts of any work.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified for three (3) years against becoming unserviceable or causing anobjectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials andworkmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

2.2

MATERIALS

All materials shall be approved and installed in accordance with UIL/NFHS rules and regulations (latest edition).

APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. A manufacturer listed whose product meets or exceeds the specifications is approved for use onthe Project. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience manufacturingproducts equivalent to those specified and comply with Division 1 requirements regardingsubstitutions to be considered.

2.3 POLE VAULT BOX

A. Provide stainless steel vault box to meet UIL/NCAA/IAAF standards. The vault box form shall bemade of 13-gauge, 304 stainless steel. Contractor shall make a plug for the vault box using thesame synthetic materials as the running track surface.


OUTDOOR TRACK AND FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 63 - 2

B. Approved Product/Manufacturer: Sportsfield Specialties Inc. Model TFPV002SS, UCS Model 725-2595, or approved equivalent SportsEdge Model SE504.

2.4 LONG JUMP/TRIPLE JUMP TAKE-OFF SYSTEM

A. Provide Take-Off Board Tray System to include foundation tray, take-off board, blanking lid and plasticine insert to meet UIL/NFHS standards.

B. Approved Product/Manufacturer: Sportsfield Specialties Inc. Model TFLT008SS-SYN-BL, UCS Model 519-2300, or approved equivalent SportsEdge Model SE43501.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and in locations shown on drawings oras directed by Owner/Consultant.



SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61 - 1

SECTION 12 36 61 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Conditions of the Contract and Division 01, as applicable, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Solid polymer countertops with sinks 1. Solid-surface-material countertops

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Indicate product description, fabrication information, and compliance with specified

performance requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples: 1. Submit minimum 2 inches by 2 inches samples. Indicate full range of color and pattern

variation for Architect’s selection. 2. Submit 12 inch long by 4 inches wide sample in color and pattern selected and approved

by Architect. Approved sample will be retained as standards for work.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions. Include in project close-out documents.


A. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Variation in Component Size: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.

B. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer of solid polymer manufacturer.

C. Mock-Up(s): 1. Prior to final approval of shop drawings, erect one full-size mock-up of each component

at project site for Architect review. 2. Rework or remake mock-up until accepted; remove rejected units from project site.

Acceptable mock-ups shall remain as part of finished work.

D. Provide all solid polymer fabrications from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver components to project site when areas are ready for installation. Store components indoors prior to installation.

B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the work specified herein for 15 years against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from both defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship.

B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Shrinking, warping, cracking, chipping, splitting, or deteriorating excessively. 2. Becoming loose from substrate. 3. Inadequate color depth

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Specifications are based on Corian manufactured by E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company; (800) 426-7426, or Architect approved equal. Listed manufacturers whose products meet or exceed those specified are approved for use on this Project. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing equivalent products to those specified and comply with Division 1 requirements regarding substitutions to be considered.

1. LG HiMacs 100% Acrylic Solid Surface manufactured by LG Chem; Peoria, AZ

2.2 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS (SS-1)

A. Material, General: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.

1. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch shall be repairable by sanding and polishing.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Tensile Strength: 5,500 psi, minimum, ASTM D638

2. Flexural Strength: 11,424 psi, minimum, ASTM D790

3. Color Stability: No change, 100 hours minimum, NEMA LD3.1

4. Abrasion Resistance: No loss of pattern, NEMA LD3.1

5. Flame Spread / Smoke Development: Class I/Class A, ASTM E-84

C. Countertops with Sinks:

1. Material: 1/2 inch thick countertop of solid polymer material.

2. Edge Details: As indicated on the drawings.

3. Sink: Drop-in sink shown on drawings and specified in Division 15.

4. Fabrication: Provide counter complete with backsplash of size shown on the drawings.

5. Color/Finish: Shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full line of colors.



2.3 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS

A. Joint Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, nonporous joints, with chemical bond.

B. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant, FDA/UL recognized silicone sealant in color-matching or clear formulations.

C. Sink/bowl Hardware: Manufacturer’s approved bowl clips, inserts and fasteners.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and solid polymer manufacturer requirements.

B. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive, joints inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 2 inch wide reinforcing strip of solid polymer material under each joint.

C. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all cutouts, then sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.

D. Finish all surfaces uniformly, matte: Gloss rating of 5-20.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product installation details.

B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands clean when making joints.


A. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants, and other stains. Components shall be clean on Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Protect surfaces from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. Repair or replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to architect's satisfaction and invoice for the cost of repairs; before repairs are made, cost estimates are subject to architect's approval.

3.3 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

A. Provide Care and Maintenance information to Owner upon completion of Project.

B. Review maintenance procedures and warranty details with the Owner upon completion of project.



ANGLE FRAME BLEACHERS 13 34 17 - 1

SECTION 13 34 17 - ANGLE FRAME BLEACHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Design and fabrication of continuous angle frame bleachers.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)1. Specifications for Aluminum Structures.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.2. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products.3. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile

Strength.

C. American Welding Society (AWS).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified

requirements.2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Manufacturer's shop drawings sealed by a registered professional engineer indicating

location, size, details, and quantity of all steel, aluminum, and wood components.

C. Samples: Include color charts showing Manufacturer's full range of colors for Architect’s selection.


A. Codes and Standards: Design, fabrication, and installation shall be in accordance with UniformBuilding Code, adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum ten (10) years’ experience in the design and manufactureof bleachers of type specified for this Project.

C. Installer Qualifications: Employ persons trained by Manufacturer and experienced in theinstallation of bleachers.

D. Welders: AWS certified.


ANGLE FRAME BLEACHERS

13 34 17 - 2

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the work specified herein for one (1) year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from both defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. Bleachers erected by the Owner and inspected by Manufacturer’s personnel are covered under this warranty.

B. Damage resulting from abnormal use, vandalism, or incorrect installation (if installed by other

than authorized installer of the manufacturer) is not applicable.


A. Manufacturers listed whose products meet or exceed the specifications are approved for use on the Project. Other manufacturers must have minimum of ten (10) years’ experience manufacturing products meeting or exceeding the specifications and comply with Division 1 requirements regarding substitutions to be considered. 1. Pre-Engineered Aluminum Bleachers and Aluminum Seating

a. American Grandstands, Inc.; (214) 638-7007. b. Southern Bleacher Co.; (800) 433-0912. c. Sturdisteel Co.; (800) 433-3116.

B. Specifications are based on Silver Edition Non-Elevated Series manufactured by Southern

Bleacher Co.; (800) 433-0912.

2.2 ANGLE FRAME BLEACHERS

A. Football: Straight stand. Refer to Drawings. 1. Rise and Depth Dimensions: Refer to Drawings. 2. Framework: Prefabricated angle bleacher frames are spaced at 6-foot (max.) intervals and

connected by crossbraces. 3. Seats: Nominal 2 x 10 anodized aluminum plank with 2 x 10 anodized end caps. 4. Treads: Two nominal 2 x 11 mill aluminum planks with 2 x 11 anodized end caps. 5. Risers: Nominal 1 x 6-1/2 anodized aluminum riser plank beginning at Row 2; two 1 x 6-

1/2 aluminum riser plank on top row. 6. Guardrailing: Two lines of aluminum rail with chain link 42 inches above seat on both sides

of bleacher and across back of bleacher. 7. Aisle: Aisle to be provided with 34” high handrail and intermediate rail at approximately 22”

above tread. Handrails with rounded ends are discontinuous to allow access to seating through a 24” wide space. Aluminum tread nosing of contrasting color on aisle steps.

8. Wheelchair Area: 6 ft. wide for two wheelchairs (36 inch each) and 36 inch for single.

B. Design Loads: 1. Live Load: 100 psf gross horizontal projection. 2. Perpendicular Sway Load: 10 plf of seat plank. 3. Lateral Sway Load: 24 plf of seat plank. 4. Live Load for Seat and Tread Planks: 120 plf. 5. Guardrail Loads:

a. Vertical: 100 plf. b. Horizontal: 50 plf.

C. Handicap Provision: Incorporate ramps and wheelchair spaces within bleacher system in

accordance with local code requirements and ADA.


ANGLE FRAME BLEACHERS

13 34 17 - 3

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Framework: 1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A36. Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with

ASTM A123. 2. Aluminum: Aluminum alloy 6061-T6, mill finish.

B. Extruded Aluminum:

1. Seat Planks and Riser Planks: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6, clear anodized 204R1, AA-M10C22A31, Class II.

2. Tread Planks: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6, mill finish. C. Guardrail: Aluminum clear anodized pipe, 1.66 1-5/8 inches O.D with galvanized chain link. D. Chainlink: 9 gauge galvanized steel, Knuckle-Knuckle.

E. Accessories:

1. Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, galvanized or cadmium plated. 2. Hold-Down Clip Assembly: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6. 3. Channel End Caps: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6, clear anodized 204R1, AA-M10C22A31,

Class II. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install angle frame bleachers complete in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved shop drawings. (Optional installation provided by manufacturer's trained crews.)



METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19 - 1

SECTION 13 34 19 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a single-story, single-span, single slope, rigid-frame-type pre-engineeredmetal building of the nominal length, width, eave height, and roof pitch indicated.1. Exterior walls are covered with field-assembled wall panels attached to framing members

using exposed fasteners. Endwalls are not expandable.2. Roof system consists of the manufacturer's standard standing-seam insulated roof.3. Manufacturer's standard building components and accessories may be used, provided

components, accessories, and complete structure conform to design indicated andspecified requirements.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:1. Concrete floor and foundations and installation of anchor bolts are specified in Division 03

Section "Concrete Work."2. Sealants and caulking are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealers."3. Finish hardware and provisions for masterkeying are specified in Division 08 Section "Door

Hardware."

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Engineer, design, fabricate and erect the pre-engineered metal building system towithstand loads from winds, gravity, structural movement including movement thermally induced,and to resist in-service use conditions that the building will experience, including exposure to theweather, without failure.1. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that

produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA's "DesignPractices Manual."

B. Design Loads: Basic design loads, as well as auxiliary and collateral loads, are indicated on thedrawings.1. Basic design loads include live load, wind load, and seismic load, in addition to the dead

load.

C. Structural Framing and Roof and Siding Panels: Design primary and secondary structuralmembers and exterior covering materials for applicable loads and combinations of loads inaccordance with the Metal Building Manufacturers Association's (MBMA) "Design PracticesManual."1. Structural Steel: Comply with the American Institute of Steel Construction's (AISC)

"Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings"for design requirements and allowable stresses.

2. Light Gage Steel: Comply with the American Iron and Steel Institute's (AISI) "Specificationfor the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" and "Design of Light Gage SteelDiaphragms" for design requirements and allowable stresses.

3. Welded Connections: Comply with the American Welding Society's (AWS) "StandardCode for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" for welding procedures.



D. Building Accessories: Provide metal building system accessories that comply with the following criteria: 1. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with the Steel Door Institute's SDI-100 for types,

styles, and design requirements and with ANSI A115 for hardware preparation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data consisting of metal building system manufacturer's product information for building components and accessories.

C. Shop drawings for metal building structural framing system, roofing and siding panels, and other metal building system components and accessories that are not fully detailed or dimensioned in manufacturer's product data. 1. Structural Framing: Furnish complete erection drawings prepared by or under the

supervision of a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Include details showing fabrication and assembly of the metal building system. Show anchor bolts settings and sidewall, endwall, and roof framing. Include transverse cross-sections.

2. Roofing and Siding Panels: Provide layouts of panels on walls and roofs, details of edge conditions, joints, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Include transverse cross-sections.

3. Building Accessory Components: Provide details of metal building accessory components to clearly indicate methods of installation including the following: a. Personnel doors: Provide elevations and details of each type of door and frame,

including anchors and reinforcement; show location and installation requirements for door hardware. Provide schedule of doors and frames using the same reference numbers for details and openings as those indicated on the drawings; include complete hardware schedule.

b. Overhead Coiling Service Doors: Provide fully dimensioned details of construction, including 1/4-inch scale elevations of door units and not less than 3/4-inch scale details showing door curtain, guides, counterbalance, and method of operation.

c. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale. Provide details of ventilators, louvers, gutters, downspouts, and other sheet metal accessories at not less than 1-1/2-inch scale showing profiles, methods of joining, and anchorages.

D. Wiring diagrams from the manufacturer of motor operated overhead service doors detailing power, signal, and control systems differentiating clearly between field-installed and manufacturer-installed wiring.

E. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts or chips showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for metal roofing and siding panels with factory-applied finishes.

F. Samples for verification purposes of roofing and siding panels. Provide sample panels 12-inch long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, battens, fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories.

G. Installer certificates signed by metal building manufacturer written certification certifying that the installer complies with requirements included under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. TDI Windstorm Requirements: Basic design wind speed requirements for construction in the designated catastrophic areas along Texas Gulf coast.



1. Inland I Zone: Resist 120 mph, 3-second gust.

I. Professional engineer's certificate prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located, verifying that the structural framing and covering panels meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to erect the pre-engineered metal building who has specialized in the erection and installation of types of metal buildings systems similar to that required for this project and who is certified in writing by the metal building system manufacturer as qualified for erection of the manufacturer's products.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide pre-engineered metal buildings manufactured by a firm experienced in manufacturing metal buildings systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and have a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain the metal building system components, including structural framing, wall and roof covering, and accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of the pre-engineered metal building system. Metal building systems having equal performance characteristics with deviations from indicated dimensions and profiles may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance. The burden of proof for equality is on the proposer.


A. Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation damage.

B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accumulations will drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Roofing and Siding Panel Finish Warranty: Furnish the roofing and siding panel manufacturer's written warranty, covering failure of the factory-applied exterior finish on metal wall and roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period for factory-applied exterior finishes on wall and roof panels is 20 years

after the date of Substantial Completion.

B. Weathertightness: 1. The entire roof system including all roof panels, flashings, curbs, interior gutters, etc. shall

be warranted by the manufacturer against leaks for a period of 20 years.



2. The warranty shall be issued to the Owner by the Manufacturer at time of entire Project Substantial Completion.

3. The warranty shall guarantee the entire roof system and associated work against defective materials and workmanship of installation.

4. The roof system shall include roof insulation, flashing, metal work, labor, and material shall be guaranteed against failure of workmanship and materials. Repair of the system by the manufacturer, including materials and labor, shall be done at no cost to the Owner for duration of warranty period.

C. Roofing Contractor: Jointly with any subcontractors employed by him, shall guarantee the work required and performed under this contract will be free from defects in workmanship and materials, and that the building will be and remain waterproof for a five (5) year warranty period, after the Architect accepts the work as substantially complete. The warranty shall be in approved notarized written form, to obligate the Contractor, and subcontractors, to make good the requirements of the warranty. The warranty will be held jointly with the Bonding Company for the first two (2) years and the manufacturer for the remaining three (3) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal building systems that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following: 1. A & S Building Systems, Inc.; (800) 274-2100. 2. Alliance Steel; (800) 624-1579. 3. American Buildings Co., a Nucor Company; (281) 380-6161. 4. American Steel Building Co., Inc.; (800) 511-3670. 5. Anchor Metal Building Systems. 6. Behlen Manufacturing Co.; (402) 564-3111. 7. Bigbee Steel Buildings, Inc.; (256) 383-7322. 8. Ceco Building Systems, an NRCI Building Systems Company; (800) 474-CECO. 9. Dean Steel Buildings, Inc., (844) 739-DEAN. 10. Garco Building Systems, an NRCI Building Systems Company; (800 941-2291. 11. Kirby Building Systems, Inc.; (662) 323-8021. 12. LMB Steel Structures, Inc. 13. MBCI, an NCI Building Systems company. 14. Mesco Metal Buildings Corp. 15. NCI Group, Inc.; (281) 897-7788. 16. Package Steel Buildings Corp.; (800) 225-7242. 17. Rigid Global Buildings; (281) 443-9065. 18. Southern Structures, Inc. 19. Space Master Buildings. 20. Star Buildings Division, H. H. Robertson Co. 21. Varco-Pruden Buildings.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Shapes: Comply with ASTM A 36 or A 529.

B. Steel Tubing or Pipe: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, ASTM A 501, or ASTM A 53.

C. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: Provide 42,000 psi minimum yield strength. Comply with ASTM A 529, ASTM A 570, or ASTM A 572.

D. Steel Members Fabricated by Cold Forming: Comply with ASTM A 1011, Grade 50.



E. Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 366 or ASTM A 568.

F. Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 568 or ASTM A 569.

G. Structural Quality Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A 446 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525. Grade to suit manufacturer's standards.

H. Bolts for Structural Framing: Comply with ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325 as necessary for design loads and connection details.

I. Vapor Barrier: Vinyl film. 1. Retainer Strips: 26-gage (0.0179-inch) formed galvanized steel retainer clips colored to

match the insulation facing. 2. Shall be either a vinyl film (3.2 mil thickness) or vinyl reinforced polyester (VRP) film (3 mil

approximate thickness). Vinyl reinforced polyester facing is recommended when air temperatures of 30 degrees F or below are anticipated during shipment or erection.

3. Shall have an Underwriters’ Laboratories flame spread rate of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.

4. Shall have a water vapor transmission value of 1.00 perms for vinyl film facing and 0.02 perms for VRP facing.

5. Color: Shall be white. 6. Width: Shall be 78 inches so as to provide a 3-inch tab projecting beyond each side of the

fiberglass blanket.

J. Paint and Coating Materials: Comply with performance requirements of the federal specifications indicated. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, compliance with compositional requirements of federal specifications indicated is not required.

1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead-free, universal primer, selected by the manufacturer for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. Comply with FS TT-P-645.

2. Shop Primer for Galvanized Metal Surfaces: Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer selected by the manufacturer for compatibility with substrate. Comply with FS TT-P-641.

2.3 STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Rigid Frames: Fabricate from hot-rolled structural steel shapes. Provide factory-welded, shop-painted, built-up "I-beam"-shape or open-web-type frames consisting of tapered or parallel flange beams and tapered columns. Furnish frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly.

1. Provide length of span and spacing of frames indicated. Slight variations in length of span and frame spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard.

2. Provide rigid frames at endwalls where indicated.

B. Primary Endwall Framing: Provide the following primary endwall framing members fabricated for field-bolted assembly:

1. Endwall Columns: Manufacturer's standard shop-painted, built-up factory-welded "I"-shape or cold-formed "C" sections, fabricated from 14-gage (0.0747-inch) steel.

2. Endwall Beams: Manufacturer's standard shop-painted "C"-shape roll-formed sections fabricated from 16-gage (0.0598-inch) steel.



C. Secondary Framing: Provide the following secondary framing members:

1. Roof Purlins, Sidewall and Endwall Girts: "C"-or "Z"-shaped sections fabricated from 16 gage (0.0598-inch) shop-painted roll-formed steel. Purlin spacers shall be fabricated from 14-gage (0.0747-inch) cold-formed galvanized steel sections.

2. Eave Struts: Unequal flange "C"-shaped sections formed to provide adequate backup for both wall and roof panels. Fabricate from 16-gage (0.0598-inch) shop-painted roll-formed steel.

3. Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8- by 1-5/8 inch angles fabricated from 16-gage (0.0598-inch) shop-painted roll-formed steel.

4. Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 14-gage (0.0747-inch) cold-formed galvanized steel sections.

5. Secondary endwall structural members, except columns and beams, shall be the manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from 14-gage (0.0747-inch) cold-formed galvanized steel.

D. Wind Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing using 1/2 inch diameter threaded steel rods; comply with ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade D. Locate interior end bay bracing only where indicated.

E. Bolts: Provide shop-painted bolts except when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels. Provide zinc-plated or cadmium-plated bolts when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels.

F. Shop Painting: Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow procedures of SSPC-SP3 for power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP7 for brush-off blast cleaning, and SSPC-SP1 for solvent cleaning.

1. Prime structural steel primary and secondary framing members with the manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer.

2. Prime galvanized members, after phosphoric acid pretreatment, with manufacturer's standard zinc dust-zinc oxide primer.

2.4 ROOF AND WALL PANEL COMPONENTS

A. Metal Roof Panels: 1. Panel Profile: Two (2) inch high by 3/4 inch wide rib by 16 inch wide, striated concealed

fastener panel. 2. Metal Roof System: Vertical leg, concealed fastener, standing seam, utilizing male and

female rib configurations, with factory applied hot-melt mastic in female rib, continuously locked together by an electrically powered mechanical seaming device during installation.

3. Gauge: Minimum 24 gauge (UL 90 rated) 4. Substrate: Galvalume® steel sheet, Grade “D” minimum yield of 50,000 PSI. 5. Clips: Two (2) piece floating clip, 18 gauge base, 24 gauge top, with factory applied

mastic, with two (2) fasteners to structural. Comply with FM 1-90 requirements. 6. Texture: Striations. 7. Finish: Premium fluorocarbon coating produced with Kynar 500® (20 year warranty) in

color selected by Architect from manufacturer's available colors. 8. Touch-up Paint: ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound manufactured by ZRC Chemical

Products, Quincy, MA; Galvax Zinc-rich Cold Galvanizing Coating manufactured by Alvin Products, Inc., Lawerence, MA; or paint complying with military specification MILP-21035A, Type I or II.

9. Approved Product / Manufacturer SuperLok® architectural structural (double-lock) standing seam metal roof system manufactured by MBCI, Houston, TX; (281) 445-8555, or Architect approved equal.



B. Metal Wall Panels (MWP-1) 1. Panel Profile: One and one quarter (1 ¼”) inch high by 26 36 inch wide, exposed fastener

panel. 2. Gauge: 24 gauge 3. Substrate: Galvalume Plus® steel sheet, Grade “D” minimum yield of 50,000 PSI. 4. Texture: Striations 5. Finish: Premium fluorocarbon coating produced with Kynar® 500 (20 year warranty) in

color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

C. Metal Wall/Soffit Panels (MWP-2) 1. Panel Profile: One and one-half (1-1/2) inch high by 12 inch wide, flush face concealed

fastener panel. 2. Gauge: 24 gauge 3. Substrate: Galvalume Plus® steel sheet, Grade “D” minimum yield of 50,000 PSI. 4. Texture: Striations 5. Finish: Premium fluorocarbon coating produced with Kynar® 500 (20 year warranty). 6. Basis of Design Color: Sherwin Williams’ Fully Purple, Color Number 6983 or comparable

product approved by Architect. 7. Approved product manufacturer: FW 120-2 Metal Wall Panel Manufacturer by MBCI,

Houston, TX or Architect approved equal.

D. Light transmitting panels (SL): 1. Basis of Design: MBCI HW-18DIS, or comparable product approved by Architect. E. Metal Liner Wall Panel (MLP-1):

1. Panel Profile: One (1) inch high by 12 inch wide, flush face concealed fastener pane 2. Gauge: 24 gauge 3. Substrate: Galvalume Plus® steel sheet, Grade “D” minimum yield of 50,000 PSI. 4. Texture: Striations 5. Finish: Premium fluorocarbon coating produced with Kynar® 500 (20 year warranty).

6. Color: Architect to select color. Refer to the Drawings for color locations. 7. Basis of Design: FW-120-2 by MBCI or comparable product approved by Architect. 2.5 ROOF ACCESSORIES

A. Eave Gutters: Roll-formed 24 gauge steel sheet in 10 foot or longest practical length, with gutter straps, fasteners and joint sealant. Snap-on gutter straps shall be provided for ease in erection at a maximum spacing of 5 feet-0 inches. Design of the gutter will permit rapid installation or removal after roof and wall sheets are in place. Gutter shall screen the eave ends of roof sheets from view. No portion of the gutter will protrude under the roof panels. Color shall be Sherwin Williams’ Fully Purple, Color Number 6983 or comparable product approved by Architect.

B. Downspouts: Shall be 24 gauge steel sheet in 10 foot or longest practical length, rectangular

shaped with 16 gauge boot to 6’-0” above finished grade. Downspouts shall have a 45 degree elbow at the bottom and shall be supported by attachment to the wall covering at 10 feet maximum spacing. Color shall be same as wall panels.

2.9 SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide coated steel sheet metal accessories with coated steel roofing and siding panels.

B. General: Provide aluminum sheet metal accessories with aluminum roofing and siding panels.

C. Metal Fasica: Provide color to be fully purple #6983 by Sherwin Williams (SW).



D. Gutters: Form in 8-foot-long sections, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Size in accordance with SMACNA. Join sections with riveted and soldered or sealed joints. Provide expansion-type slip joint at center of runs. Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches on center, constructed of same metal as gutters. Provide bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. 1. Finish: Powder coated. Fully purple #6983 by Sherwin Williams (SW).

E. Downspouts: Form in 10-foot-long sections, complete with elbows and offsets. Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 5 feet on center in between. Finish to match wall panels.

F. Roof Ventilators: Provide low-profile, ridge-type circular gravity roof ventilators, size and spacing indicated. Furnish with matching base, bird screen, hood, flashing, closures, and fittings. Finish to match roof panels.

1. Provide directional revolving-type gravity roof ventilators. 2. Provide stationary revolving-type gravity roof ventilators. 3. Reinforce and brace units, with joints properly formed and edges beaded to be watertight

under normal positive pressure conditions. Mount ventilators on square-to-round bases designed to match roof pitch and roll-formed to match corrugation profile of roof panels.

4. Provide bird screens of 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch galvanized steel or aluminum mesh. 5. Provide pull-chain-operated, spring-loaded disc-type damper, with fusible link connection.

G. Wall Louvers: Provide louvers, size and design indicated, of 18-gage (0.0478-inch) steel. Fold or bead blades at edges, set at an angle that excludes driving rains, and secure to frames by riveting or welding. Finish to match wall panels. 1. Provide vertical mullions for louvers 4 feet and more in width, with one mullion for each 4

feet of width. 2. Provide flanges on interior face of frames where air intake or exhaust louvers are indicated

to be connected with mechanically operated dampers or metal ductwork. 3. Provide 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch galvanized steel mesh bird screens in rewirable frames on

exterior face of louvers. Secure with clips to ensure ease of removal for cleaning and rewiring. Fabricate screens and frames of same type metal as louvers.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. General: Design prefabricated components and necessary field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and disassembly.

1. Fabricate components in such a manner that once assembled, they may be disassembled, repackaged, and reassembled with a minimum amount of labor.

2. Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.

B. Structural Framing: Shop-fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with base plates, bearing plates, and other plates required for erection, welded in place. Provide holes for anchoring or connections shop-drilled or punched to template dimensions. 1. Shop Connections: Provide power riveted, bolted, or welded shop connections. 2. Field Connections: Provide bolted field connections.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level base plates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use a nonshrinking grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than 7 days after placement.

B. Purlins and Girts: Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fascias. Locate and space wall girts to suit door and window arrangements and heights. Secure purlins and girts to structural framing and hold rigidly to a straight line by sag rods.

C. Bracing: Provide diagonal rod or angle bracing in roof and sidewalls as indicated. 1. Movement-resisting frames may be used in lieu of sidewall rod bracing, to suit

manufacturer's standards. 2. Where diaphragm strength of roof or wall covering is adequate to resist wind forces, rod or

angle bracing will not be required.

D. Framed Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical Work. Securely attach to building structural frame.

3.2 ROOFING AND SIDING

A. General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. Protect factory finishes from damage. 1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Provide weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with

rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather.

B. Standing-Seam Roof Panel System: Fasten roof panels to purlins with concealed clip in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install clips at each support with self-drilling fasteners. 2. At end laps of panels, install tape calk between panels. 3. Install factory-calked cleats at standing-seam joints. Machine-seam cleats to the panels to

provide a weathertight joint.

C. Wall Sheets: Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete and elsewhere as necessary for waterproofing. Handle and apply sealant and backup in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten panels with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.

Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. Fasten window and door frames with machine screws or bolts. When building height requires two rows of panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over wall panels at eave height.

2. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

3. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.



D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Install gutters, downspouts, ventilators, louvers, and other sheet metal accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting. Adjust operating mechanism for precise operation.

E. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames straight, plumb, and level. Securely anchor frames to building structure. Set units with 1/8-inch maximum clearance between door and frame at jambs and head and 3/4-inch maximum between door and floor. Adjust hardware for proper operation.

F. Overhead Coiling Doors: Set doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust moving hardware for proper operation.

G. Thermal Insulation: Install insulation concurrently with installation of roof panels in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with both sets of tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor barrier. Locate insulation on underside of roof sheets, extending across the top flange of purlin members and held taut and snug to roofing panels with retainer clips. Install retainer strips at each longitudinal joint, straight and taut, nesting with roof rib to hold insulation in place.

H. Cleaning and Touch-Up: Clean component surfaces of matter that could preclude paint bond. Touch up abrasions, marks, skips, or other defects to shop-primed surfaces with same type material as shop primer.

I. Translucent Panels: Attach plastic panels to structural framing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Provide end laps of not less than 6 inches and side laps of not less than 1-1/2 inch

corrugations for translucent roofing panels. 2. Align horizontal laps with adjacent roofing panels. 3. Seal intermediate end laps and side laps of translucent panels with translucent mastic. 4. Clean panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


LEAF Engineers Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project Project No. P2119500SP Gonzales Independent School District

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 1

SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 – GENERAL



B. SECTION 22 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULT FOR PLUMBING

C. SECTION 22 05 16 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

D. SECTION 22 05 29 – PLUMBING PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

E. SECTION 22 05 48 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

F. SECTION 22 05 48.13 – VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Provide a complete sanitary drainage system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories.2. Sanitary Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information,

component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material andequipment.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit frequency of treatment required forinterceptors. Include spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps andequipment.


A. Perform Work in accordance with the plumbing code.




A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Products and materials listed herein are for references of approved materials.

B. Unless noted otherwise, the contract documents (schedule sheet) will specify the products and materials that are to be used for this project.

2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BELOW GRADE

A. PVC Pipe 1. Provide a complete system of solid wall schedule 40 PVC DWV piping with

solvent welded joints. 2. Solvent welded joints shall conform to IAPMP installation standards IS-9. 3. Provide tracer wire at all under slab piping and wire terminate at building exit.

Wire to be 12AWG, green insulation, and copper conductor. Provide cast junction box flush with finished grade permanently labeled “Tracer Wire”. Extend wire from exit point around all non-metallic piping to properly line, coordinate installation with Civil contractor.

4. Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D 1784, AST D 1785, ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 3311, and NPS standard 14 & 61.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Coordinate the exact location of all floor drains with architectural drawings prior to rough-in. Ensure drains are located at low point(s) of floor slope.

C. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

3.2 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Verify connection size, location, and invert as indicated on Drawings.

B. Establish minimum separation from other services piping in accordance with code.

C. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.

D. Install with a uniform slope of not less than 1/4 of an inch per foot.



E. Install pipe on prepared bedding of bank sand, minimum of 2” depth on bottom of trench up to centerline of pipe.

F. Route pipe in straight line.

G. Excavation: 1. Excavate trenches for underground piping to the required depth to ensure two (2)

foot minimum coverage over piping. 2. Cut the bottom of the trench or excavation to uniform grade. 3. Lay out alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Assure that proposed

route of pipe will not interfere with building foundation before any cutting is begun. Should interference be found, contact the Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

H. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill shall not be placed until the work has been inspected, tested, and

approved. Complete backfill to the surface of natural ground or to the lines and grades shown on drawings. Except where special materials are requested, use suitable friable soils from other excavation as backfill material. Do not use peat, silt, muck, debris or other organic materials. Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified in Division 2.

2. Compacting Backfill. Place material in uniform layers of prescribed maximum thickness and wet or dry the material to optimum moisture content. Compact with power-driven tampers to the prescribed density. Place regular backfill in eight (8) inch maximum layers, loose measure. Compact to not less than 95% of maximum soil density as determined by ASTM D-698 Standard Proctor.

3. PVC-piping shall be installed per the requirements of ASTM D 2321, which details the trench width per pipe size, bedding depth, backfill and compaction, as well as other factors. Calculating maximum burial depths for flexible piping requires the use of external loading software, additional information and free software is available at www.uni-bell.org.

4. Restoration. Compact backfill, where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks, and similar areas, to a condition equal to the adjacent undisturbed earth, and restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operation.

I. Disposal of excess material: 1. Remove excess excavation material or material unsuitable for backfill. Excess

material can be spread on grade, or shall be removed from site as directed by Owner/Architect.

J. Provide tracer wire for all piping routed below slab locate wire leads in accessible location for use in future line trouble shooting.

3.3 RODDING SEWERS

A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out after completions of the installation.

B. This Work shall be done, as part of the contract, to make certain that all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter, which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned. Rodding operations shall be witnessed by Owner’s field representative. Submit a certificate of completion to owner.




A. Separate trenches for water lines, sanitary, storm, and gas piping.

B. Piping shall be labeled along entire length; indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturers name, and country of origin.

C. Piping and fittings resting on ground is unacceptable. Keep products covered. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings.

D. Foreign pipe and fittings unacceptable.

E. Prior to cover up water pipe, sanitary pipe, and gas piping shall be pressure tested. Tests shall be witnessed by consultant and owner. Notify owner 48 hours prior to test. Test shall be witnessed by client plumbing technician.

F. The inside of all sanitary lines shall be video recorded with a camera and witnessed by owner to first outside manhole. Provide tape and/or DVD upon closeout of project. If any obstructions are found they shall be removed and the line shall be videoed again to show the blockage has been cleared.

G. For additions and renovations, use camera to locate routing of underslab lines.

H. Upon completion of the sanitary piping system, the contractor shall notify engineer and owner to observe a smoke test of the system. Smoke testing shall be performed on sanitary piping system twice during construction.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide all work for mechanical, plumbing and fire protection systems required in theproject to be properly installed, tested, and performing their intended function.


A. Perform all work in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable codes,specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations,nationally accepted codes.

B. All materials and distribution, and utilization equipment shall be UL Listed.

C. All equipment and materials shall be new, unused and of United States Domesticmanufacture unless approved otherwise by engineer or owner.

D. Eliminate any abnormal sources of noise that are considered by the Architect or Engineernot to be an inherent part of the systems as designed without additional cost to theOwner.

1.4 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Coordinate the work of this division with all other divisions to ensure that all componentsof the mechanical, plumbing and fire protection system will be installed at the proper timeand fit the available space.

B. Locate and size all openings in work of other trades required for the proper installation ofthe mechanical, plumbing and fire protection system components.

C. Make all mechanical, plumbing and fire protection connections to all equipment furnishedby this division and as required by any other division.

D. Electrical wiring, control equipment and motor starters indicated on the electricaldrawings, except items otherwise specifically noted, shall be furnished, and installed bythe electrical trades. Items of electrical control equipment specifically mentioned to befurnished by the mechanical trades, either in these specifications or on the mechanicaldrawings, shall be furnished, mounted, and wired by this trade unless where otherwisespecified in Division 26 or noted on the electrical drawings to be by the electrical trades.All wiring shall be in accordance with all requirements of the electrical Sections of thesespecifications.

E. Any changes or additions required by specific equipment furnished shall be the completeresponsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment. All controllers furnished withmechanical equipment shall have overload protection in all phases. It shall be theresponsibility of each subcontractor furnishing motors and devices to advise Electrical



Contractor of exact function of systems to assure proper type of starter with correct number auxiliary contacts for proper operation of the system.

F. The mechanical trades shall coordinate with the electrical contractor to ensure that all required components of control work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of such coordination.

G. The design of the electrical systems is based on the mechanical equipment scheduled and shown on the drawings. Where changes or substitutions are made that involve additional electrical work (larger-size motors, larger number of motors, additional wiring of equipment, etc.), the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for added cost and coordination with the electrical subcontractor. The mechanical contractor shall pay the electrical trades for the cost of the additional work and materials except for changes by addendum.

H. Motor control equipment which is furnished loose under Division 23 shall be delivered to the Electrical Contractor at the site for custody, erection in place, and wiring as specified.

I. Smoke detection systems will be furnished and installed under Division 26 – electrical. Coordinate locations with Electrical Contractor.

1.5 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings are schematic in nature but show the various components of the systems approximately to scale and attempt to indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of the building. Determine exact locations by review of equipment manufacturer's data, by job site measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing all Contract Documents. The size of the mechanical, plumbing and fire protection equipment indicated on the Drawings may be based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other listed manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment that the Contractor proposes to furnish will fit in the space. The drawings are not intended to show exact locations of pipes and ducts, or to indicate all offsets and fittings or supports, but rather to indicate approximate layout.

B. The mechanical, plumbing and fire protection Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic in

character and cannot show every connection in detail in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of ordinances and also structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. Work shall be installed to avoid crippling of structural members. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted.

C. When the mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire protection Drawings do not give exact

details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit, and ducts, physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with the proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Exposed piping and ductwork are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets and their location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas.



1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide shop drawings and complete product data as indicated in each specification section.

B. Coordination Drawings: Using the mechanical ductwork shop drawings as a basis,

provide a composite set of AutoCAD drawings in which the major mechanical, plumbing and fire protection equipment, ductwork and piping are superimposed on the architectural reflected ceiling plan and structural framing plan. Include spot elevations of bottom of steel along with finished ceiling height. Prepare at 1/8-inch scale or larger, one drawing per building area. Provide 1/4-inch scale enlargements of locations where special attention to rough-in dimensions as required to ensure all systems will fit within the available space. Obtain approval of coordination drawings prior to duct fabrication and mechanical system hanger rough-ins.

C. Shop Drawings will be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following

categories:

1. Reviewed: No further submittal action is required. Submittal to be included in O & M Manual.

2. Revise and Resubmit: Contractor to resubmit submittal as indicated in

comments section of Engineer's Submittal Cover Letter. 3. Rejected: Contractor to resubmit new submittal when alternate or substitution is

not approved and be required to furnished product named in Specification and or Drawings.

4. Furnish as Corrected: Contractor to submit letter verifying that required

corrections noted on Engineer's Submittal Cover Letter have been received and complied with by manufacturer. If equipment on site is not in compliance with corrections noted, contractor shall be responsible for the cost of removing and replacing equipment.

D. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without Submittal review and

approval will be removed and replaced with specified equipment at Contractor's expense. E. Provide a specification review that consists of a copy of related specification section with

notations indicating compliance or deviation with each element of specification.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS OF PRODUCTS

A. The products described in the Proposal Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. The materials and equipment named in, and the procedures covered by these specifications have been selected as a standard because of quality, particular suitability, or record of satisfactory performance. It is not intended to preclude the use of equal or better materials or equipment provided that same meets the requirements of the particular project and is approved in an Addendum as a substitution prior to the submission of proposals.

B. No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of proposals unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect and Engineer at a minimum of seven (7) business days prior to the date for receipt of proposals. Each such request shall include a specification line by line review annotated to certify compliance, the name of the manufacturer and model, material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a



complete description of the proposed substitute including dimensional drawings, cutsheets, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. The Engineers decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final.

C. If the Engineer approves any proposed substitution prior to receipt of proposals, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Offerors shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.

D. The Engineer and Owner reserve the right to disapprove the use of any manufacturer

who in their judgment is unsuitable for use on the Project and that decision will be final.

E. Availability of specified items: 1. Verify prior to submittal of Proposal that all specified items will be available in

time for installation during orderly and timely progress of the work.

2. In the event specified items will not be so available, notify the Architect / Engineer prior to receipt of Proposals. Submit Request for Substitutions in accordance with this section.

3. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractor’s failure to pursue the work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

4. Costs of delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays

could have been avoided by the Contractor, will be back-charged as necessary and shall not be borne by the Owner.

F. A request constitutes a representation that Offeror:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds

quality level of specified product.

2. Will provide same warranty for Substitution as for specified product, except when inability to provide specified Warranty is reason for request for substitution as described above.

3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.

4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.

5. Will reimburse the Owner and pay for all costs, including Architect/Engineer’s

redesign and evaluation costs resulting from the use of the proposed substitution, or for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities having jurisdiction.

G. No substitutions will be considered after the Award of Contract.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements and each specification

section.



1.9 INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS A. Where field conditions prohibit the installation of the mechanical, plumbing or fire

protection system components within the available space as indicated on drawings, the Contractor shall prepare a sketch to the minimum 1/8-inch scale, clearly depicting the conflict along with an alternate installation arrangement that satisfies the design intent of the documents without incurring additional cost.

B. Obtain written approval of proposed interference resolution prior to proceeding with

alternate installation.


A. Equipment listed below shall be factory wrapped by the manufacturer prior to shipment to prevent damage due to weather and road debris during transportation and thereafter while in storage awaiting installation. Protection of the complete unit from rusting and water migration must be handled as best suits the circumstances. Store in a place protected from construction traffic and weather.

B. Contractor shall adequately protect equipment such as but not limited to: Chillers, Air

Handling Units, Fan coil Units, Roof top Units, Air Terminal Units, Boilers, Pumps, Air Devices, exhaust fans, variable frequency drives, ductwork, duct insulation, piping insulation, hydronic piping, air duct accessories, unit heaters, etc. from damage after delivery to the project. Equipment shall be completely covered and secured with heavy tarpaulins, drop cloths or other protective coverings as required to protect from inclement weather, moisture, chemicals, construction traffic, plaster, paint, mortar and/or dirt. Do not cover with plastic materials and trap condensate and cause corrosion. Protective covering is in addition to the manufacturer’s original factory packaging; original factory packaging shall not be deemed as acceptable protection of equipment.

C. Do not deliver equipment to the project site until progress of construction has reached the

stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather will be rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. Limit shipment of bulk and multi-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.

D. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

E. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory covers in place until startup of machine.

1.11 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide electric motors, control panels, certain control and safety devices and control wiring when specified or required for proper operation of electrical systems associated with mechanical equipment specified in Division 23.

B. Electrical materials and work provided shall be in accordance with Division 26.

C. Notify Architect/Engineer in writing 14 days before bids are due if it is necessary to increase horsepower of any motors or change any electrical requirements listed or shown. After this period, costs incurred because of changes shall be assumed by the responsible Contractor.



1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Mechanical equipment with factory assembled and/or attached electric equipment shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) listed as an assembly when such listing is available from UL and shall meet the latest edition of the National Electrical Code.

B. Unless otherwise specified, the electrical supply being furnished is a 460-volt, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 hertz source. No neutral connection is available from the 460-volt source. The manufacturer shall include any transformers for equipment requiring other voltages (277volt, 220-volt, 120-volt, 24 volt, etc.).

C. Electric Motors: 1. For each piece of equipment requiring electric drive, provide a motor having

started and running characteristics consistent with torque and speed requirements of the driven machine.

2. Manufacturers furnishing motors shall verify motor horsepower with the

characteristic power curves of driven equipment on shop drawings. 3. Each motor shall be furnished in accordance with Section 23 05 13 - Common

Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. 4. Contractor shall verify electrical characteristics of each motor with electrical

drawings. 5. Motors which are shipped loose from equipment shall be set by supplying

subcontractor. 6. Alignment of motors factory coupled to equipment and motors field coupled to

equipment shall be rechecked by millwright after all connections (belt drives, gear drives, impellers, piping, etc.) have been completed and again after 48 hours of operation in designed service.

7. Where possible, motors shall be factory mounted.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OWNER INSTRUCTION - GENERAL

A. Installing Contractor shall coordinate and provide on-site Owner training for all new equipment by factory trained specialists for all Mechanical and Plumbing equipment in two (2) separate training meetings. One (1) training session shall be prior to Owner’s acceptance and occupancy, and the other training session shall occur (30) thirty days later. Sign-in sheets are required for both meetings and shall be included in close out submittals.

B. Use Operation and Maintenance manuals and actual equipment installed as basis for instruction.

C. At conclusion of on-site training program have Owner personnel sign written certification they have completed training and understand equipment operation. Include copy of training certificates in final Operation and Maintenance manual submission.



D. Refer to individual equipment specifications for additional training requirements.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 1

SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipe hangers and supports.2. Hanger rods.3. Inserts.4. Sleeves.5. Mechanical sleeve seals.6. Formed steel channel and angle.7. Equipment bases and supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping andEquipment.

2. Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection.


A. Provide line-by-line specification review annotated to certify compliance or deviation.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for thefollowing: include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers.2. Metal framing systems.3. Pipe stands.4. Equipment supports.

D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe and riser supporthangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze,multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:

1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Welding certificates.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

B. Protect from weather, construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply Firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees Fahrenheit.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of Firestopping materials.

C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Furnish one (1) year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with plans and specification, provide one of the

following:

1. Carpenter & Paterson Inc. 2. Flex-Weld, Inc. 3. Globe Pipe Hanger Products Inc. 4. Michigan Hanger Co. 5. B-Line Systems 6. Carpenter & Patterson Inc. 7. Anvil International 8. Piping Technology & Products 9. Grinnell

B. Hydronic Piping: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split

ring.

2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes two (2) inches and larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 inches to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.



4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes six (6) inches and larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.

5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Galvanized Steel channels with welded spacers

and hanger rods.

6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes six (6) inches and larger: Galvanized Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron rollers.

7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes three (3) inches and smaller: Cast iron hooks.

8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes four (4) inches and larger: Welded galvanized steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

9. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes six (6) inches and larger: Welded galvanized steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast-iron roll.

10. Vertical Support: galvanized Steel riser clamp.

11. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

12. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes four (4) Inches and smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes six (6) inches and larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

14. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon steel ring.

15. Hydronic Piping shall not have support brackets welded to hydronic piping.

C. Roof Mounted Hydronic Piping:

1. Refer to Division 7 –for hanger requirements and approved manufacturers.

2.2 HANGER RODS

A. Hanger Rods: Hot dipped galvanized, mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.

2.3 INSERTS

A. Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes through fire rated or non-fire rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.



B. Sleeves for Pipes through Rated or Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

E. Sealant: Refer to Section 07 92 00 - Building Sealants.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with plans and specification, provide

one of the following: 1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. 2. NMP Corporation

B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

2.6 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL AND ANGLE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with plans and specification, provide one of the following:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. 2. B-Line Systems 3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division 4. Unistrut Corp.

B. Product Description: Galvanized 14 gage thick steel angle and galvanized 12 gage thick

steel channel with holes 1-1/2 inches on center. Metal framing system for equipment support.

C. All channel members and angles shall be hot-dipped galvanized and fabricated from structural grade steel and conform to applicable ASTM specifications.

D. Structural members to be loaded within manufacturers design limitations and published data.

2.7 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide vibration isolation in accordance with Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic

Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

B. Verify openings are ready to receive Firestopping/Firesafing.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of Firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.

E. Do not drill or cut structural members.

F. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.


A. All structural steel used to fabricate supports shall conform to ASTM A36.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. In accordance with Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. In accordance with Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES

A. In accordance with Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection.

3.7 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe four (4) inches and larger.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

3.8 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.1

B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

C. Install hangers with minimum 1/2-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

E. Use hangers with 1-1/2-inch minimum vertical adjustment.



F. Support vertical piping at every other floor.

G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports.

L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of pipe insulation. Refer to Section 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation.

3.9 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves at all piping and ductwork penetrations of interior walls and slabs. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

D. Extend sleeves through floors two (2) inches above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

E. Extend sleeves through walls two (2) inches each side.

F. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with Firestopping insulation and caulk. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

G. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

3.10 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING

A. Install material at all fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items.

B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of Firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.

C. Apply Firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating.

D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.

E. Fire Rated Surface:

1. Seal opening at floor, wall, and partition as follows:

a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of one (1) inch on both sides of building element.



b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of one (1) inch void between sleeve and

building element.

c. Pack void with backing material.

d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated.

F. Non-Rated Surfaces:

1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall and partition floor as follows:


b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of one (1) inch void between sleeve and building element.

2. Install escutcheons, floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-

fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling.

3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing

device to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

4. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations. Apply sealant to both sides of

penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 3.11 INSTALLATION - ACCESS DOORS

A. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls, cleanouts, and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screwdriver cam locks. Minimum size to be 12 inches x 12 inches in walls only for hand access and 24 inches x 24 inches minimum for all ceilings for maintenance access.

B. All access doors located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel.

C. Access Doors:

1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect and with trim styles and

color coordinated with surface to be installed in.


A. Inspect installed Firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.



3.13 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.14 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

3.15 PIPE HANGERS

A. Minimum hanger rod size shall be ½”.

B. Maximum hanger rod spacing shall not exceed 10’-0” on center for pipe sizes 2” and above. Do not exceed 7’-0” hanger spacing for pipes sizes less than 2” diameter.

C. For trapeze supports provide a minimum of (2) two ½” hanger rods at each end of trapeze for a total of (4) four for pipes 10” or larger.

D. Beam clamps are not acceptable.



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 1

SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Vibration isolation for building mechanical systems.


1. Section - 23 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loops For HVAC Piping2. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

C. Mason Industries model numbers are listed for identification only.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with plans and specification, provide one of thefollowing:

1. Mason Industries2. Kinetics Noise Control3. Amber / Booth4. VMC5. Vibration Eliminator


A. It is the intent of this specification to provide vibration isolation supports for all equipment,piping and ductwork as may be required to prevent transmission of vibration to thebuilding structure. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to select and install vibrationisolators which will enable the noise criteria standards to be met, to the extent that thenoise can be controlled by the vibration isolators.

B. All vibration isolation devices, including auxiliary steel bases and pouring forms, shall bedesigned and furnished by a single manufacturer or supplier.

C. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled, spring type vibration isolators shall be used for allequipment driven by motors of 0.5 HP and larger. Deflections as tabulated are minimumsand it shall be the responsibility of the isolation manufacturer to determine the amount ofspring deflection required for each isolator to achieve optimum performance in order toprevent the transmission of objectionable vibrations and meet the noise criteriareferenced herein.

D. Unless otherwise noted, equipment driven by motors 0.25 HP and smaller shall beisolated by means of Type ND elastomeric mounts or Type HD elastomeric hangersproperly sized for 0.35-inch deflection.

E. All elastomeric isolators shall be of high-quality synthetic rubber with anti-ozone and anti-oxidant additives.


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 05 48 - 2

F. Design and treat vibration isolators for resistance to corrosion. Furnish phosphatized steel components with epoxy powder paint coating. Components exposed to the weather shall be epoxy powder paint coated or hot-dipped galvanized. Furnish zinc electroplated nuts, bolts, and washers. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag and primed with zinc-chromate or metal etching primer.

G. Isolators for equipment installed outdoors shall be designed to provide adequate restraint due to normal wind conditions and to withstand wind loads of 30 lbs/sq.ft. Wind loading shall be applied to all exposed surface of the isolated equipment in order to identify worst case load.

H. Air handling equipment subjected to excessive horizontal air thrust operating at three (3) inches S.P. shall be furnished with Type WBI/WBD isolated thrust resisters to limit displacement to 1/4 inch.

I. Height savings brackets used with isolators having 2.5-inch deflection or greater shall be of the precompression type to limit exposed bolt length.

J. All spring isolators shall be completely stable in operation and shall be designed for not less than 50 percent reserve deflection beyond actual operating conditions. All spring isolators must be completely stable in operation and have a Kx/Ky ratio of at least 1:1.

K. All isolation materials and flexible connectors shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be selected and certified using published or factory certified data. Any variance or non-compliance with these specification requirements shall be corrected by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Manufacturer may purchase other manufactured products in order to meet this specification and shall guarantee outsourced product as a single point of responsibility. Outsourced products must be identified as such in the submittal for approval.

L. The contractor and manufacturer of the isolation and equipment shall refer to the isolator schedule which lists isolator types and isolator deflections.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load on each. Indicate assembly, materials, thickness, dimensional data, and layout as well as connection details.

C. Product Data: Submit schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. Submit catalog information indicating materials and dimensional data. All steel bases and concrete inertia bases shall be completely detailed. Include clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators.

D. Design Data: Submit calculations indicating maximum room sound levels are not exceeded.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and setting dimensions. Indicate installation requirements maintaining integrity of sound isolation.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify isolators meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate vibration isolation installation is complete and in accordance with instructions. Provide a copy of field report to Architect/Engineer.



23 05 48 - 3


A. The vibration isolation manufacturer, or qualified representative, shall be responsible for providing such supervision as may be necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall also inspect vibration isolation in units with factory provided isolation in order to confirm scheduled deflection and isolator type is in accordance with this specification. Upon completion of the installation and after the system is put into operation, the manufacturer, or representative, shall make a final inspection and submit his report to the Architect and Engineer in writing certifying the correctness of installation and compliance is in accordance approved submittal data.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three (3) years experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPES

All vibration isolators described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Specification 1.3 of this section.

A. Type WSW: Two layers of 3/8-inch thick neoprene pad consisting of square waffle

modules separated horizontally by a 16-gauge galvanized shim. Where the load bearing area of the equipment is not the same size/shape as the load bearing area/shape of the pad, load distribution plates, minimum ¼” thick galvanized steel, shall be utilized to ensure the load bearing capacity of the pad is maximized. Pads shall be sized for approximate deflection of 0.12 inch to 0.16 inch.

B. Type ND: Neoprene mountings shall have minimum static deflection of 0.35 inch. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered and have friction pads both top and bottom. Bolt holes on the bottom and a tapped hole with a mounting bolt and washer shall be provided. Steel rails shall be used above the mountings under equipment such as small vent sets to compensate for the overhang. Where the load bearing area of the equipment or support structure is not the same size/shape as the load bearing area/shape of the pad, load distribution plates, minimum ¼” thick galvanized steel, shall be utilized to ensure the load bearing capacity of the pad is maximized.

C. Type SLF: Spring isolators shall be free-standing and laterally stable without any

housing and complete with a steel-washer-reinforced molded neoprene cup of 1/4-inch neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Installed and operating heights shall be equal. The ratio of the spring diameter divided by the compressed spring height shall be no less than 0.8. Springs shall have minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height.

D. Type SLR: Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in

Specification 2.1 C, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 4

housings will be bolted or welded in position under outdoor equipment, there must be an internal isolation pad in addition to the friction pad on bottom.

E. Type HD: Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4-inch-thickneoprene element. The neoprene element shall have neoprene bushings projectingthrough the steel box. In order to maintain stability, the boxes shall not be articulated asclevis hangers.

F. Type 30N: Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4-inch-thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring as described in 2.1 C, seated in asteel-washer-reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and thecup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. In order to maintainstability, the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers, nor the neoprene elementstacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall belarge enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30-degree arc from side to sidebefore contacting the cup bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shallinclude a hanger drawing showing the 30-degree capability.

G. Type PC30N: Hangers shall be as described in Specification 2.1 F, but they shall beprecompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic up stopto keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shallbe designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after installation is completeand the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by meansof a scale. Submittals shall include a drawing of the hanger showing the 30-degreecapability.

H. Type WBI/WBD: Horizontal thrust restraints shall consist of a spring element in serieswith a neoprene molded cup, as described in paragraph 2.1 C, with the same deflectionas specified for the mountings or hangers supporting the unit. The spring element shallbe designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allowfor a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnishedwith a rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the ductwork orthe equipment and the structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerlineof thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit.

I. Type SLR-MT: Restrained air spring mountings shall be manufactured with upper andlower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible DuPont Kevlar reinforcedneoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve amaximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air springs shall be designed for a burst pressurethat is a minimum of three times the published maximum operating pressure. Restrainedair springs shall be within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent airspring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking duringerection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operatingheights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch {12mm} shall be maintained aroundrestraining bolts and between the housing and the air springs so as not to interfere withthe air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Airspring systems shall be connected to a supplementary air supply compressor (suppliedwith the air spring system) through a Mason Industries air spring control panel andequipped with three leveling valves to maintain level within plus or minus 0.125". Airspring mounts are to be located between the supporting steel and the roof or the grillageand dunnage as shown on the drawings when there is no provision for direct mounting.Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests performed by anindependent lab or acoustician.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



23 05 48 - 5

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Isolators shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer. Isolate all mechanical equipment 0.5 hp and over per the isolation schedule and these specifications.

3.2 PIPING ISOLATION

A. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: All pumped water, pumped condensate, and refrigerant piping size 1-1/4 inch and larger within mechanical rooms and on pipe size 2 inch and larger outside mechanical rooms shall be isolated. Outside equipment rooms this piping shall be isolated for the greater of 50 feet or 100 pipe diameters from externally isolated equipment. For the first 3 support locations from externally isolated equipment provide Type 30N hangers or Type SLF floor mounts with the same deflection as equipment isolators. All other piping within the equipment rooms shall be isolated with the same specification isolators with a 1” inch minimum deflection. Install piping hangers at regular intervals according to the pipe hanger schedule. Where floor supports are required, provide sufficient spring capacity to absorb expansion and contraction of piping, and yet to permit piping to function as a floating system. Size hangers for 200 percent rated load. Coordinate selection of piping supports with equipment supports to accommodate expansion and contraction without creating excessive stresses at equipment connections.

B. Pipe Riser Isolation: All vertical pipe risers 1-1/4 inch and larger, where specifically

shown and detailed on riser drawings shall be fully supported by Type SW SLF isolators with brackets. Refer to details on Drawings. Steel spring deflection shall be 3/4 inch minimum. In locations where added deflection is required due to pipe expansion/contraction, the spring deflection shall be a minimum of 4 times the anticipated deflection change. Springs shall be selected to keep the riser in tension. Wall sleeves for take-offs from riser shall be sized for insulation O.D. plus two times the anticipated movement to prevent binding. Provide Type SWS wall sleeves. In addition to submittal data requirements previously outlined, riser diagrams and calculations shall be submitted for approval. Calculations must show anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on the building structure, and spring deflection changes. Submittal data shall include certification that the piping system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the design proposed.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for the installation and load application of vibration isolation materials and products. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation or shipment.

B. Locate isolation hangers as near the overhead support structure as possible. C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly on isolators. Shim units

as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. D. Install isolated inertia base frames and steel bases on isolator units as indicated so that a

minimum of one (1) inch clearance below base will result when supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation.

E. Install Work in accordance with ASME B31.9. F. Install flexible pipe connectors to equipment supported by vibration isolation. Provide line

size flexible connectors.



23 05 48 - 6

G. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately

adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end.

H. Refer to Section 23 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping. I. Contractor shall install load distribution plates provided by vibration isolation

manufacturer on WSW type isolators. Plates shall be aligned with isolation pad.

EQUIPMENT ISOLATION SCHEDULE

EQUIPMENT

LOCATION ELEVATED STRUCTURE

SLAB ON GRADE

ISOLATOR TYPE

MINIMUM DEFLECT

ION (Inches)

BASE

(1) TYPE

ISOLATOR TYPE

MINIMUM DEFLECT

ION (Inches)

BASE

(1) TYPE

AIR HANDLING UNITS (NOTE 2) FLOOR MOUNTED TO 15 HP 20 HP & OVER SUSPENDED UP TO 15 HP 20 HP & OVER HIGH PRESSURE FAN SECTION (NOTE 1) UP TO 30 HP 40 HP & OVER

SLF SLF

30N

PC30N

SLF/WBI

SLF/WBI

0.75 1.5

1

1.75

1.5 2.5

- - - -

RBMK RBMK

SLF SLF

30N

PC30N

SLF/WBI

SLF/WBI

0.75 0.75

1 1

0.75 1.5

- - - -

RBMK RBMK

AIR COOLED CONDENSERS UP TO 50 TONS OVER 50 TONS

SLR SLR

0.75 1.5

(1) (1)

WSW WSW

0.15 0.15

- -

Notes: 1. Provide steel base type WF if equipment requires base frame or does not include integral base rail for

vibration isolation. 2. Provide WSW isolator type with load distribution plate for floor mounted AHU’s that are internally

isolated. Isolation deflection and type specified refers to factory isolation requirements.



IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Nameplates.2. Stencils.3. Pipe markers.4. Labels.5. Pipe painting (if required)


1. Section 09 91 00 - Painting and Staining.

C. Color scheme for identification must be coordinated with district standards. Color schemespecified is bases of design if required for project. Contractor shall confirm paintingrequirements with Architect/District.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.2. District Standards for identification and color scheme.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding formechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number,location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, specialprocedures, and installation.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Identify painting requirements as directed by Architect/District. Contractor to confirm ifpainting of piping is required for project. Contractor shall provide primer coat on un-insulated outdoor condenser water piping as a minimum.


A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems andaccessories.



B. Conform to ANSI / OSHA Pipe Marking Specifications.

C. Specification is not limited to manufacturers listed. Substitutions are allowed in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements and Division 23, Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three (3) years experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with plans and specification, provide one of the following:

1. Craftmark Identification Systems. 2. Safety Sign Co. 3. Seton Identification Products. 4. Almetek Industries.

B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light

contrasting background color.

2.2 STENCILS



B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1. Up to two (2) inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2-inch-high letters.

2. 2-1/2 to six (6) inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: one (1) inch high letters.

3. Over six (6) inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters.

4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.

C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 00 Paintings and Staining, semi-gloss enamel, colors, and lettering size in conformance with ASME A13.1.

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Plastic Pipe Markers:



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with plans and specification, provide one of the following:

a. Craftmark Identification Systems. b. Safety Sign Co. c. Seton Identification Products. d. Almetek Industries.

2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with plans and specification, provide one

of the following:

a. Craftmark Identification Systems. b. Safety Sign Co. c. Seton Identification Products. d. Almetek Industries.

2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

2.4 LABELS



B. Description: Laminated Mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification and bar code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 91 00 Paintings and Staining for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 91 00 Paintings and Staining.

B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.



E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain or 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper wire. Tags shall be numerically sequenced with all valves of each system type grouped together.

F. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor pipe markers.

G. Identify air handling units with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags.

H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

I. Identify insulated piping, concealed, or exposed indoor with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4-inch diameter and smaller. Use plastic pipe UV protected markers on exterior piping. Identify service and flow direction. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification at every 20 feet on center for straight runs including risers and drops. Locate identification adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of wall or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

J. Identify un-insulated piping with plastic pipe markers. Locate identification at every 20 feet on center for straight runs including risers and drops. Locate identification adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of wall or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards OR as specified in District Standards:

B. PIPE PAINTING: 1. All piping exposed to view in conditioned spaces shall be painted as indicated or

as directed by the Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections and painting requirements with Architect/District prior to installation.

2. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red.

3. All outdoor un-insulated piping shall be painted with primer as a minimum.

4. All piping located in mechanical rooms and outdoor piping shall be painted as indicated in Painting Schedule. Painting requirement must be confirmed by contractor.



CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 00 - 1

SECTION 23 22 00 - CONDENSATE PIPING

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section Includes: Pipe and pipe fitting materials, joining methods and pipe insulationfor the following systems:

1. Condensate equipment drains and overflows.


1. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment:Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports and fire stopping forplacement by this section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.

2. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

3. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint PressureFittings.

4. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.

5. ASME B31.1 – Power Piping.

6. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.

7. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

8. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and BrazingQualifications.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

2. ASTM A234 - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steeland Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.

3. ATM A536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

4. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.


CONDENSATE PIPING

23 22 00 - 2

5. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air

Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.

C. American Welding Society:

1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing.

B. Provide unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems.

D. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.


A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes. Indicate schematic layout of refrigeration system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes.

C. Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials and fittings. Submit manufacturers catalog information.

D. Design Data: Indicate pipe sizes. Indicate pipe sizing methods. Indicate calculations used.

E. Test Reports: Indicate results of refrigerant leak test and acid test.

F. Welders’ Certificate: Include welders’ certification of compliance with ASME Section IX.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Installer Qualifications:


CONDENSATE PIPING

23 22 00 - 3

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and that certification is current.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

E. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years experience.

F. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three (3) years experience approved by manufacturer.

G. Design piping systems under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location.

H. All pipe and accessories shall be of United States domestic manufacture.


A. In accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

C. Protect piping from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system Protect.

D. Contractor shall adequately protect material from damage after delivery to the project. Piping shall be completely covered and secured with heavy tarpaulins, drop cloths or other protective coverings as required to protect from inclement weather, moisture, chemicals, construction traffic, plaster, paint, mortar and/or dirt. Do not cover with plastic materials and trap condensate and cause corrosion. Protective covering is in addition to the manufacturer’s original factory packaging. Original factory packaging shall not be deemed as acceptable protection of equipment.

E. Do not deliver Piping to the project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather will be rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. Limit shipment of bulk and multi-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.


CONDENSATE PIPING

23 22 00 - 4

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WELDING

A. Welding Procedures: Conform to latest recommendations of American Welding Society

and Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.1, and current edition. Welding and stress relieving procedures shall conform to Appendix, Section VI, and “Standard Qualifications for Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators."

B. Locations for Welding: Welding shall not be permitted within occupied area of the building. When the building or a portion of the building is in use as a permanent occupancy welding shall be permitted only in areas physically separated from occupied spaces by fire rated or non-combustible walls to deck or on completely gutted and unoccupied floors.

C. Fire Protection and Smoke Venting: The Contractor shall provide all manpower and equipment required to protect the building structure and site occupants, other Contractors, etc., from hazards and to remove welding fumes from the building conform to the latest requirements of NFPA 51B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B).

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following:

A. Anvil International, Inc. B. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. C. Victaulic Company.

C. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

A. Stadler-Viega.

2. Housing: Copper. 3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 5. Minimum 200-psig (1379-kPa) working-pressure rating at 250 deg F (121 deg C).

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Seamless galvanized steel with plain ends; schedule 40, 0.375-inch wall.


CONDENSATE PIPING

23 22 00 - 5

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150.

E. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

A. Capitol Manufacturing Company. B. Hart Industries International, Inc. C. Jomar International Ltd. D. Matco-Norca, Inc. E. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. F. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. G. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

A. Standard: ASSE 1079. B. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. C. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.5 PIPING INSULATION

A. High density factory molded fiberglass insulation with factory applied all service, and reinforced vapor retarder jacket. Provide with a factory applied pressure sensitive tape closure system and matching butt strips. 1” thick for all pipe sizes and locations.

1. Thermal conductivity “k” of 0.23 of Btu-in / hr-sq.ft. Degree F at 75-degree mean

temperature.

2. Maximum jacket permeance shall be 0.02.


CONDENSATE PIPING

23 22 00 - 6

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

A. Johns Manville. B. Owens Corning C. Knauf. D. CertainTeed

C. Aluminum Jacket: General Requirements: Provide aluminum jacketing for all condensate drain piping located outdoors.

A. Jacket for piping shall be 0.016-inch-thick type 3105 aluminum with factory applied one mil polykraft moisture barrier.

B. Fitting covers shall be factory made 0.024-inch type 1100 aluminum to match pipe covering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry

seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints.

H. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.


CONDENSATE PIPING

23 22 00 - 7

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.

B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.

C. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls, and floors. Refer to Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

D. Install piping free of sags and bends.

E. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Ensure that all pipe and fitting surfaces over which insulation is to be installed are clean and dry.

B. Ensure that insulation is clean, dry and in good mechanical condition with all factory-applied vapor or weather barriers intact and undamaged. Wet, dirty, or damaged insulation shall not be acceptable for installation.

C. Ensure that pressure testing of piping and fittings has been completed prior to installing insulation.

D. Install all insulation materials and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that it will serve its intended purpose.

E. Install insulation on piping subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, and acceptance tests.

F. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. Butt insulation joints firmly to ensure complete, tight fit over all piping surfaces.

G. Maintain the integrity of factory-applied vapor barrier jacketing on all pipe insulation, protecting it against puncture, tears, or other damage. All staples used on cold pipe insulation shall be coated with suitable sealant to maintain vapor barrier integrity.

H. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

I. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

J. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

K. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.


CONDENSATE PIPING

23 22 00 - 8

L. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.

M. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

N. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

O. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

P. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

R. For insulation application where vapor retarder are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

S. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

T. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarder is indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.



PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 81 13 - 1

SECTION 23 81 13 - PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART I -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged terminal air-conditioners.


1. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping andEquipment: Product requirements for vibration isolation for placement by thissection.



B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operatingcharacteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data interms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motorrequirements, and electrical characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to otherwork.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, requiredclearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of eachfield connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shownand coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Refrigerant specialties.2. Evaporators.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged terminal air-conditioners units to includein emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of sleeve and electrical rough-ins.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three (3) years experience approved by manufacturer.


A. Equipment shall be factory wrapped by the manufacturer prior to shipment to prevent damage due to weather and road debris during transportation and thereafter while in storage awaiting installation. Protection of the complete unit from rusting and water migration must be handled as best suits the circumstances. Store in a place protected from construction traffic and weather.

B. All equipment shall remain in manufacturer’s protective shipping wrap during construction. Openings must remain protected and covered during construction. If protective wrap has been damaged, the contractor shall provide additional protective wrap as directed by engineer.

C. Contractor shall adequately protect equipment from damage after delivery to the project. Equipment shall be completely covered and secured with heavy tarpaulins, drop cloths or other protective coverings as required to protect from inclement weather, moisture, chemicals, construction traffic, plaster, paint, mortar and/or dirt. Do not cover with plastic materials and trap condensate and cause corrosion. Protective covering is in addition to the manufacturer’s original factory packaging. Original factory packaging shall not be deemed as acceptable protection of equipment.

D. Do not deliver equipment to the project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather will be rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. Limit shipment of bulk and multi-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.



E. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

F. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory covers in place until startup of machine.

1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall furnish one (1) year manufacturer parts and labor warranty. Warranty

shall begin from date of Certificate of Substantial Completion. Warranty start date from shipment or startup will not be acceptable.

B. In addition to full machine parts, labor and refrigerant, the warranty shall include miscellaneous materials, travel time, incidental expenses, normal freight/shipping, refrigerant, oils, lubricants, belts, filters, insulation and any expenses related to service calls required to diagnose and correct warranty issues.

C. The manufacturer shall provide factory certificates for each unit listing as a minimum the model, serial number and warranty information as specified above. Payment to contractor may be held if warranty certificates are not provided in a timely manner.

D. All warranty work shall be performed by factory direct service technician. Warranty work shall not be performed by installing mechanical contractor.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Spare materials shall be provided by equipment manufacturer and not by the installing mechanical contractor or “by others”. 1. Filters: Furnish two (2) sets for each unit. One set at substantial completion and

a final set for owner storage. All Filters shall be labeled according to size and unit it serves and protected with polyester fabric at all times during construction. Final attic stock set shall be delivered to Killeen ISD Maintenance in protective wrapping. All air filtration during construction and testing and balancing shall be by installing mechanical contractor.

PART 2 –PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS


1. GREE 2. AMANA 3. Trane 4. Johnson Controls

2.2 UNIT CHASSIS:

A. Provide a heavy gauge steel slide-out chassis containing all unit components. 2.3 WALL SLEEVE:



A. Wall sleeve shall be a one-piece sleeve, U-channel reinforced for added strength, for wall

installations. It shall be fabricated from 18 galvanized steel and finished with baked enamel same as the unit enclosure and shall include outside grille. Finish on sleeve shall be baked-on epoxy-resin enamel. Outside grille shall be mounted in sleeve from inside room. Finish on outside grille shall be either anodized aluminum or baked-on epoxy-resin enamel.

2.4 COMPRESSOR

A. Compressor shall be rubber shock mounted and internally spring mounted for quiet

operation and vibration isolation. Compressor shall be in a hermetically sealed steel case and sprayed with black epoxy paint.

2.5 COIL

A. Evaporator and condenser coil shall have copper tubing as the primary surface and aluminum fins for the secondary surface. A capillary restrictor shall be the metering device for the refrigeration system.

B. Coils shall be factory tested to 300 psig.

2.6 FANS

A. Evaporator and condenser fans shall be direct driven each with its own motor. Evaporator fan shall be centrifugal type and condenser fan shall be propeller type with a slinger ring for condensate removal.

2.7 ELECTRIC HEATING

A. Electric heaters shall be installed. Heating elements shall be Nichrome wire exposed

directly to the air stream. Thermal time delay relay shall bring the elements on and off in sequence with a time delay between each element. Circuit breakers shall provide overload and short circuit protection. Safety devices shall consist of limit controls and thermal cut-off safety fuses. Heaters shall be U.L. listed.

B. Supplemental electric heat shall be locked-out above 35 degrees F ambient and shall be

controlled to maintain space temperature below that point.

2.8 AIR FILTERS

A. Cleanable throwaway filters and filter rack shall be provided. 2.9 INSULATED ENCLOSURE

A. Cabinet shall be a single, enclosed, weatherproof casing constructed of 18-gauge galvanized steel and finished with baked enamel. Indoor air section of unit shall be fully insulated to prevent sweating and muffle sounds. Condensate drain fitting shall be provided. Openings shall be provided for power connections. Front panels shall be removable for service access.

B. Discharge grille shall be integral part of the unit casing.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Provide a unit mounted thermostat and fan switch. Set point selected and read from



outside without removing the cover.

B. Provide a wiring harness of adequate length to connect the remote thermostat to the control module. The contractor shall install the unit per the manufacturer’s wiring diagrams.

2.11 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. The following components shall be factory wired in the heat pump units:

5. Compressor contactor suitable for accepting copper wire power supply 6. 24-volt control transformer. 7. Blower relay. 8. Field wiring terminal strips and junction box. 9. High pressure and low temperature safety switches with a common reset relay. 10. Time delay relay to limit cycling. 11. Low ambient temperature compressor lock-out

B. The manufacturer shall provide all safety and control interlocks that are necessary for

satisfactory operation of the heat pump. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and the plans and specifications. The manufacturer shall provide a field service representative at the jobsite on initial start-up. This representative shall inspect and report to the Engineer on the following:

1. Electrical characteristics of the heat pumps in heating and cooling mode 2. Operation of safety controls

3.2 TEST

A. Check for leaks, adjust for scheduled air and water quantities, and perform manufacturer's recommended service.

3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing and after completing startup service, clean units externally and internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, comb coils, drain pans, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1

SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide all work for electrical systems required in the project to be properly installed, tested and performing their intended function.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work included under this Section consists of providing all labor, materials, supervision, and construction procedures necessary for the installation of the complete electrical systems required by these specifications and/or shown on the drawings of the contract.

B. The Contract Drawings are shown in part diagrammatic intended to convey the scope of work, indicating the intended general arrangement of equipment, conduit, and outlets. Follow the drawings in laying out the work and verify spaces for the installation of the materials and equipment based on the dimensions of actual equipment furnished. Whenever a question exists as to the exact intended location of outlets or equipment, obtain instructions from the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with the work.


A. Installers shall have at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required by the project. All equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation.

B. Perform all work in accordance with the latest edition of the national electrical code, and local codes.

C. All electrical materials and distribution, and utilization equipment shall be UL Listed.

D. All equipment and materials shall be new and unused and of United States Domestic manufacture unless approved otherwise by engineer or owner.

E. Eliminate any abnormal sources of noise that are considered by the architect not to be an inherent part of the electrical systems as designed.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The design, manufacture, testing, and method of installation of all equipment and materials furnished under the requirements of this specification shall conform to all codes, standards and regulations, etc. found in the front end of specifications:

B. The latest adopted edition by the local and state inspection authorities of all standards and specifications listed in front end shall apply.

C. Furthermore, the electrical work shall be in accordance with all applicable National and State Standards, and Local Codes and Building Ordinances. The electrical work shall merit the approval of the enforcing authorities having jurisdiction.



1.5 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical materials and equipment for the entire project shall meet the requirements specified under the Contract Section of this specification.

B. Equipment and fixtures shall be connected to provide circuit continuity in accordance with applicable Codes whether or not each piece of conductor, conduit, or protective device is shown between such items of equipment or fixtures and the point of circuit origin.

C. The electrical work includes the installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished by others. Verify all connection details.

D. All equipment over 50 pounds shall be provided with adequate lifting means.

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Coordinate the work of this division with all other divisions to ensure that all componentsof the electrical system will be installed at the proper time and fit the available space.

B. Locate and size all openings in work of other trades required for the proper installation ofthe electrical system components.

C. Make all electrical connections to all equipment furnished by this division and any otherdivision.

D. Make all electrical connections from all 120 volt and greater dampers and switches toassociated exhaust fan(s) furnished by any other division.

1.7 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings are schematic in nature, but show the various components of the systemsapproximately to scale and attempt to indicate how they are to be integrated with otherparts of the building. Determine exact locations by review of equipment manufacturer'sdata, by job site measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and byreviewing all Contract Documents. The size of the electrical equipment indicated on theDrawings may be based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While otherlisted manufacturers will be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor todetermine if the equipment that Contractor proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Thedrawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit and wire, or to indicate allwire terminators, connectors, conduit fittings, boxes or supports, but rather to indicatedistribution, circuitry, and control.

B. The Electrical Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic in character and cannot showevery connection in detail or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to therequirements of ordinances and also structural and architectural conditions. TheContractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinatethe separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work.Work shall be laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspendedceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed.Work shall be installed to avoid crippling of structural members. All exposed work shall beinstalled parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted.

C. When the mechanical and electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to theelevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, physically arrange the systems to fit in the spaceavailable at the elevations intended with the proper grades for the functioning of the



system involved. Exposed conduit is generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets and their location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Specification Review:1. Include a paragraph-by-paragraph written specification review for each product

listed requiring a submittal. Denote any proposed deviations from specifications.2. All submittals shall be sent to the Owner for final review by the Owner or Owner’s

representative.

B. Submittals shall be submitted in a 3-ring binder with a tab for each specification section requiring a submittal. Submittal shall be complete and arranged in numerical order and contain all product data, test reports, details, diagrams, etc. as specified in each specification section. Partial submittal submittals will be returned un-reviewed. Submittals for long lead or pre purchase items can be submitted for review in a separate binder with the approval of the Architect/Engineer. Full size shop drawings can be submitted separately but must be submitted at the same time as binder. Submittals can also be submitted electronically in PDF format but must be complete and arranged as noted above. Partial submittals will not be reviewed and will be returned un-reviewed.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided according to Division 1 requirements. In general, during the time of the contract, and before substantial completion of the electrical installation, submit to the Architect/Engineer three (3) copies of descriptive literature, maintenance recommendations (from the equipment manufacturer), data on initial operation, wiring diagrams, performance curves, engineering data and tests, operating procedures, routine maintenance procedures, and parts lists for each item of electrical equipment installed under this contract and submit all manufacturer's guarantees and warranties.

D. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall furnish shop drawing portfolios and proper transmittal forms for all materials, equipment, and lighting fixtures to be incorporated in the work in accordance with the General Conditions and all other applicable Conditions.1. Shop drawings on component items forming a system or that are interrelated shall

be submitted at one time as a single submittal in order to demonstrate that the items have been properly coordinated and will function properly as a system. A notation shall be made on each shop drawing submitted as to the item's specific use, either by a particular type number referenced on the drawings or in the specifications, by a reference to the applicable paragraph of the specifications, or by a description of its specific location. The shop drawings shall be organized and bound into sets with each set collated.

2. The Architect/Engineer shall have the final authority as to whether the equipment or material submitted is equal to the specified item. Proposed substitutions may be rejected for aesthetic reasons if felt necessary or desirable. In the event the proposed substitutions are rejected, the Contractor shall furnish the specified item.

1.9 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Do all work required to maintain electrical services to the Owner occupied portions of thebuilding during construction.



B. No connection to existing services or utilities shall be made without Owner's knowledge

and permission. All such connections shall be planned and scheduled to minimize the length of service interruption required. Request for shutdown shall be made to Owner at least two (2) weeks in advance and shall be accompanied by detailed written schedule of activities during shutdown and list of materials required for connection and renewal of service. It shall be understood that all such service interruptions shall be made at the Owner's convenience, not the Contractor's. No increase in contract amount will be allowed for reasons of premium time, inefficiency of operations or other considerations not calculated in original bid.

C. All items removed shall be stored on-site. Schedule a review of the items with the

Owner. Remove from site all items the Owner does not choose to keep. Deliver Owner designated items to Owner's storage facility.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's

identification. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical

damage, by storing in original packaging.

C. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

A. Provide allowance in bid for five 20A/1p circuits of 100 feet in length from source for miscellaneous needs during the course of construction. Include one duplex receptacle per circuit, all associated labor and all necessary accessories (conductor, conduit, supports, etc.) required for proper installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT

A. Starters, switches, receptacles, pull boxes, etc. shall be located to provide easy access for operation, repair and maintenance. If the devices listed above are concealed, access doors shall be provided.

3.2 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.

C. When performing work on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced and trained in similar operations.

D. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.



E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing utilities with the Owner and Utility Companies prior to commencing excavation work. The drawings and survey data of the contract documents indicate the available information on the existing power and communication services, and on new services to be provided to the project by utility companies. Accuracy of this information is not assured.

3.4 ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. The Contractor shall provide all material and pay all fees required by the local utility company for the connection of the new electrical service as shown on the plans. The Contractor shall also meet all equipment requirements of the local utility company. The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials for construction of the temporary electrical service and shall coordinate all details with the local utility company.

3.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE

A. The telecommunications services to the building are as indicated on the drawings. Arrange all service details with the local telecommunications companies and pay all costs and fees assessed to the project. All work shall be in accordance with the local telecommunications companies’ standards and subject to their approval. Coordinate the installation of service entrance equipment with the telecommunications companies prior to the start of construction.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching of holes in building construction which are required for the passage of electrical work. Cutting and patching shall conform to the requirements of Division 1 and, if applicable, Division 2 of these specifications.

B. Cutting of structural framing, walls, floors, decks and other members intended to with stand stress is not permitted.

3.7 PAINTING, FINISHING

A. Painting of electrical work exposed in occupied spaces, except mechanical and electrical machine rooms and maintenance/service spaces; and work exposed on the exterior of the facility is specified and performed under other divisions of these specifications.

B. Factory finishes, shop priming, and special protective coatings are specified in the individual equipment specification sections.

C. Where factory finishes are provided on equipment and no additional field painting is specified, all marred or damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished so as to leave a smooth, uniform finish at the time of final inspection.

3.8 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A Contractor shall perform all excavation and backfilling necessary to install the required electrical work. Coordinate the work with other excavating and backfilling work in the



same area. Except as indicated otherwise, comply with the applicable sections in Division 31 of these specifications, excavation filling and backfilling (for structures) to 5' outside the building line, and exterior utilities sections for beyond 5' from the building line.

B Landscape work, pavement, flooring and similar exposed finish work that is disturbed or damaged by excavation shall be repaired and restored to their original condition by the Contractor.

3.9 CONDUITS AND SUPPORT, GENERALLY

A Conduits, except electrical conduits run in floor construction, shall be run parallel with or perpendicular to lines of the building unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Electrical conduits shall not be hung on hangers with any other service, unless specifically approved by the Engineer. Electrical conduits shall be hung above all other service pipes. Hangers on different service lines running close to and parallel with each other shall be in line with each other and parallel with, or perpendicular to, the lines of the building. Exact location of electric outlets, piping, ducts, and the like shall be coordinated to avoid interferences between lighting fixtures, piping, ducts, and similar items.

3.10 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish and install panels for access to junction boxes and similar items where no other means of access, such as a readily removable, sectional ceiling is shown or specified.

B. Panels shall not be less than 12-inches by 16-inches in size. Larger panels shall be furnished where required. Panels in tile or other similar patterned ceilings shall have dimensions corresponding to the tile or pattern module.

C. Access panels shall be flush type and of all steel construction, with a No. 16 gauge wall or ceiling frame for masonry or plaster and a No. 14 gauge panel door. Doors shall be secured with concealed hinges and flush locks of either the cylinder type or approved, positive acting, screwdriver operated type. Doors for wall panels may be secured with suitable clips and countersunk screws. Panels shall be painted with a rust-inhibitive primer at the factory. Panels in rated wall shall also be rated.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Install and connect all appliances and equipment as specified and indicated for this project, in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Furnish and install complete electric connections and devices as recommended by the manufacturer or required for proper operation

3.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the electrical work with work of the different trades so that: 1. Interferences between mechanical, electrical, architectural, and structural work,

including existing services, will be avoided. 2. Within the limits indicated on the drawings, the maximum practicable space for

operation, repair, removal and testing of electrical and other equipment will be provided.

3. Pipe, conduits, ducts, and similar items, shall be kept as close as possible to ceiling, walls, and columns, to take up a minimum amount of space. Pipes, conduits, ducts, and similar items shall be located so that they will not interfere with the intended use of other equipment.



B. Furnish and install, without additional expense to the Owner, all offsets, fittings and similar items necessary in order to accomplish the requirements of coordination.

C. Before any sleeves or inserts are set, or any electrical equipment or foundations are installed, prepare and submit for approval composite coordination drawings for all equipment rooms, and other areas in which work of two or more trades or subcontractors is to be installed and in which the probability of interference exists. Drawings shall show the work of all trades covered, shall be drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/2" = 1'-0", and shall show clearly in both plan and elevation that all work can be installed without interference.

D. Any work installed prior to approval of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Subsequent relocations required to avoid interference’s shall be made without additional expense to the Owner.

3.13 OWNER INSTRUCTION

A. Provide on-site Owner training for all new equipment.

B. Use Operation and Maintenance manuals and actual equipment installed as basis for instruction.

C. At conclusion of on-site training program have Owner personnel sign written certification they have completed training and understand equipment operation. Include copy of training certificates in final Operation and Maintenance manual submission.

3.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Contractor shall provide the Owner with as-built drawings for all electrical systems as described in these specifications and/or shown on the Drawings.



LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide a complete system of building wire and cable to all electrical loads.


A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows: 1. Provide stranded conductors for all wiring. 2. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. 4. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet 5. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. 6. Copper.

B. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only Type THHN/THWN insulation, in

raceway.

C. Branch Circuit Conductors: No branch circuit conductors are allowed in any slab or under slab on grade unless specifically indicated on drawings.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electric wire and cable products of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B. Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring work similar to that required for this project.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wire, cable and connectors.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards pertaining to wire cable and connectors.

C. UL Labels: Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors which have been UL-listed and labeled.

D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA/Insulated Cable Engineers Association Standards pertaining to materials, construction and testing of wire and cable.

E. ANSI/ASTM: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM standards pertaining to construction of wire and cable.

F. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of IEEE standards pertaining to wire and cable.



G. NECA Compliance: Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Specification Review: Provide a complete item by item, line by line specification review indicating compliance with the specifications and note any deviations from the specification with reason for deviation

B. Submit manufacturer's data on electric wire and cable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire 2. The Okonite Company 3. Diamond Wire & Cable Co. 4. General Cable Co. 5. Advance Wire and Cable, Inc.

B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

C. Conductor: Copper.

D. Insulation: NFPA 70; Type THHN/THWN insulation for feeders and branch circuits.

2.2 WIRE, CABLE, AND CONNECTORS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide wire, cable and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for the installation.

B. WIRE: 1. All conductors shall be 600-volt and shall be copper with insulation of the

following types, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or in these specifications.

2. For dry locations, provide Type THHN conductors. Conduit sizes are based on type THHN wire.

3. For damp or wet locations, provide Type THWN conductors. 4. Provide Type THWN conductors for service entrance cabling or feeders direct

buried, or installed in underground raceways. Provide Type THWN conductors for branch circuit conductors installed in underground raceways.

5. No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 AWG, except that wiring for signal and pilot control circuits may be No. 14 AWG, and pre-manufactured fixture whips for light fixtures may be No. 14 AWG. a. Use preinsulated connectors 3M Company "Scotchlok," or Ideal

Industries, Inc. "super nut," for splices and taps in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller. All other twist-on connectors must be reviewed by the



Architect prior to installation. Use this type of connector for factory-made splices in fixtures or equipment.

b. Pressure indent type connectors must be submitted to the Architect for review.

c. Tape all splices and joints with vinyl plastic tape manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company. Use sufficient tape to secure insulation strength equal to that of the conductors joined.

d. Keep splices in underground junction boxes to an absolute minimum. Where splices are necessary, use resin pressure splices and resin splicing kits manufactured by the 3M Company, St. Paul, Minnesota, to totally encapsulate the splice. Arrange the splicing kit to minimize the effects of moisture.

6. Connect wire No. 6 AWG and larger to panels and apparatus by means of approved lugs or connectors.

7. All wire shall be stranded. 8. Connectors of the porcelain cup type with or without metal inserts shall not be

used, including all splices in fixtures which are made in advance by the fixture manufacturer. Splices in wire No. 8 AWG and larger shall be made with approved solderless lugs. If any type of pressure indent type connector is proposed for use on any size conductor, it shall be specifically submitted for approval prior to use.

9. Wire sizes shown are minimum based on code requirements, voltage drop and/or other considerations. Larger sizes may be installed at the Contractor's option to utilize stock size, provided conduit sizes are increased where necessary to conform to the National Electrical Code. Sizes of wires and cables indicated or specified are American Wire Gage (Brown and Sharpe).

2.3 TYPE MC CABLE

A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC 2. Southwire

B. Product Description: A fabricated assembly of insulated conductors in a flexible metallic enclosure.

C. Comply with NEC 320.

D. Support, provide separate support to structure for all Type MC cable, spacing not exceeding three (3) feet and at each junction box.

E. Provide an insulated green grounding conductor in all Type MC cable.

F. Acceptable Use: Install, at Contractor’s option, only for service to light fixtures above accessible ceilings, limit length to six (6) feet whips from accessible junction box to light fixtures.

G. Provide insulated throat fittings at all terminations of Type MC cable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.



B. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.

3.2 EXISTING WORK

A. Remove exposed abandoned wire and cable, including abandoned wire and cable above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces where removed cables pass through building finishes.

B. Disconnect abandoned circuits and remove circuit wire and cable. Remove abandoned boxes when wire and cable servicing boxes is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes not removed.

C. Provide access to existing wiring connections remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or install access panel.

D. Extend existing circuits using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install electric cables, wires and connectors as indicated in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface.

C. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except within outlet or junction boxes. Junction boxes may be utilized wherever required.

D. Splicing: No splicing or joints will be permitted in either feeder or branch circuits except at outlet or accessible junction boxes.

E. Wire shall not be installed in raceways until the concrete work and plastering is completed and all conduits in which moisture has collected have been swabbed out. Insulation resistance to ground shall not be less than that approved by NEC. Eliminate splices wherever possible.

F. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. Compound must not deteriorate conductor insulation.

G. Prior to energization, check cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, and for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected.

H. Bury a continuous, pre-printed, bright colored plastic ribbon cable marker with each underground cable, regardless of whether conductors are in conduit. Locate each directly over cables 12" below finished grade.

I. Conductor Installation: Install all conductors in a single raceway at one time, insuring that conductors do not cross one another while being pulled into raceway. Leave sufficient cable at all fittings or boxes and prevent conductor kinks. Keep all conductors within the allowable tension and exceeding the minimum bending radius. Multiple circuits will be allowed to be run in the same conduit provided that there are no phase conductors of the



same phase in the conduit and each circuit has a dedicated neutral and dedicated ground. Sharing of the neutral and ground will not be allowed.

J. Conductor Support: Provide conductor supports as required by the code and recommended by the cable manufacturer. Where required, provide cable supports in vertical conduits similar to OZ Type C.M.T., and provide the lower end of conduit with OZ Type KVF ventilators.

K. Conductor Termination: Provide all power and control conductors that terminate on equipment or terminal strips, with solderless lugs or fork and flanged tongue terminals. Provide T and B "sta-kon" tongue terminal. This type conductor termination is not required when the equipment is provided with solderless connectors.

L. Many circuits are shown on the drawings to be provided with dedicated neutral and ground conductors. Carefully review circuiting and the electrical abbreviations and symbols legend and provide the number of conductors indicated.

M. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions.

N. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

O. Identify and color code wire. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

P. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections: 1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no

perceptible temperature rise. a. MDF/IDF room branch circuits: All branch circuits shall be dedicated and

unspliced. Provide dedicated branch circuit 20 or 30 amperes, #10 and or #12 wire, unspliced from wiring device all the way back to the overcurrent device. Do not share ground with any other circuit.

b. Computer branch circuits: All branch circuits shall be dedicated. Provide dedicated branch circuit 20 amperes, #10 and or #12 wire from wiring devices all the way back to the overcurrent device. Do not share neutral with any other circuit.

c. Kitchen branch circuits: All branch circuits for 125 volt, single phase, 15 and 20 ampere receptacles shall be dedicated. Provide dedicated branch circuit 20 amperes, #10 and or #12 wire from wiring devices all the way back to the overcurrent device. Do not share neutral or ground with any other circuit.

3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

4. Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.

5. Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.

6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.

3.4 WIRE COLOR

A. COLOR CODES FOR CONDUCTORS FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS



Wire Sizes #10 and Smaller:

Use Continuous Color Coded Insulation (Note 01)

Wire Sizes #6 and Smaller:

Use Continuous Color Coded Insulation (Note

02) System/Phase

A B C N G IG

120/208 Black Red Blue White Green Green/Yellow Stripe

120/240 Black Orange Blue White w/color stripe

(Note 03)

Green Green/Yellow Stripe

277/480 Brown Purple Yellow Gray Green Green/Yellow Stripe

Table Notes: 1. Wire size #8 and larger, black conductors with color marking tape at each

termination and where accessible; colors as noted above. 2. Wire sizes #4 and larger, black conductor with green marking tape at each

termination and where accessible. 3. Provide white (no stripe) insulation when 120/208V system is not present at this

installation.

B. Neutral Conductors: White. When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number and provide color coding at each junction box containing more than one neutral.

C. Branch Circuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely

color coded.

D. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase.

E. Ground Conductors: For 6 AWG and smaller: Green. For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction boxes.

3.5 GROUPING OF CIRCUITS

A. Limit the number of current carrying conductors per conduit to 6. Neutrals serving computer receptacle branch circuits shall be counted as current carrying. Grounds shall not be counted.

B. Grouping of different voltages is not allowed.

C. Grouping of conductors of the same phase in not allowed.

D. Provide metal box sizes per NEC Table 314.16 (A).

E. Provide conduit per NEC Annex C.

F. Neutrals serving branch circuits shall not be shared. Provide dedicated neutral per circuit.



3.6 POWER LIMITED CIRCUIT INSTALLATION

A. Provide a complete system of raceway and covered junction boxes for all power limited circuits installed exposes in finished spaces and spaces without a ceiling.

B. Provide raceway for all power limited circuit wiring within wall cavities and above sheet rock, plaster and other “hard” (non-lay-in) ceiling types of construction.

C. Labeling: Provide label on all junction boxes. 1. Provide permanent labeling with indelible black marker, in neat, legible print

indicating the system wiring name.



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide a continuous low-impedance grounding system for the entire electrical wiring system.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial

Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic

Equipment. 3. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 241

pertaining to electrical grounding.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to materials and installation of electrical grounding systems, associated equipment and wiring. Provide grounding products which are UL listed and labeled.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard Nos. 467 and 869 pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding.

E. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 142 and 241 pertaining to electrical grounding.

F. Utility: Grounding shall be done so as to comply with all applicable grounding requirements and rules of the serving utility.

G. NECA Compliance: Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation."


A. Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes: 1. Metal underground water pipe. 2. Metal building frame. 3. Concrete-encased electrode. 4. Rod electrode. 5. Plate electrode.

B. Applications of grounding work in this Section include the following: 1. Underground Metal Piping 2. Underground Metal Water Piping 3. Metal Building Frames 4. Ground Rods 5. Separately Derived Systems 6. Service Equipment 7. Enclosures



8. Equipment

C. Requirements of this Section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Specification Review: Provide a complete item by item, line by line specification review indicating compliance with the specifications and note any deviations from the specification with reason for deviation.

B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.


A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled.

B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors, terminals and fittings, of types and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, ground rods and plate electrodes, whose products have been of satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three years.

C. Installer: Qualified with at least three (5) years’ experience on projects with electrical grounding work similar to that required for this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide grounding products of one of the following:

A. B-Line Systems

B. Burndy Corporation

C. Crouse Hinds

D. Copperweld Inc.

E. Erico Inc.

F. Electrical Components Div.; Gould Inc.

G. General Electric Supply Co.

H. Ideal Industries, Inc.

I. O-Z Gedney Co.

J. Thomas and Betts Corp.

K. VFC

L. Western Electric Co.



2.2 GROUNDING SYSTEMS:

A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including but not limited to cables/wires, connectors, terminals, ground rods/electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE and established industry standards for applications indicated.

2.3 CONDUCTORS:

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC requirements.

B. Material: Stranded copper.

C. Foundation Electrodes: #2 AWG.

D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor bare.

E. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor bare.

2.4 BONDING JUMPER BRAID:

A. Provide copper braid tape, constructed of 30 gage bare copper wires and properly sized for indicated applications.

2.5 FLEXIBLE JUMPER STRAP:

A. Provide flexible flat conductor, 480 strands of 30 gage bare copper wire; 3/4" wide, 9-1/2" long; 48,250 cmil. Protect braid with copper bolt hole ends with hole sized for 3/8" dia. bolts.

2.6 BONDING PLATES, CONNECTORS, TERMINALS AND CLAMPS:

A. Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications.

2.7 GROUND RODS:

A. Provide copper-clad steel, 3/4" dia. x 10'.

2.8 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING CONNECTION ACCESSORIES:

A. Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, and bonding straps as recommended by accessories manufacturers for types of service indicated.

B. UL Listed for grounding applications.



C. Description: Brass connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation.

2.9 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Cadweld by Erico, Inc.

B. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components.

2.10 GROUNDING BUSSES

A. When indicated, provide copper ground busses on walls in areas where special grounding needs will arise. Bus shall consist of copper bar as follows: 1. Ground bar cross section of nominal four (4) inches by 1/4 inch; 24 inches length. 2. Drill to accommodate NEMA Pattern D 2-hole compression lugs for ground wires

to be installed. Leave remainder of bar for future drilling by owner. 3. Copper compression lugs to connect conductors to the bar. Lugs shall be 2-hole

type for double bolting to ground bar. 4. Install all bolts for compression with top and bottom steel washers plus a

Belleville spring washer between top washer and bolt head. 5. Grounding electrode conductor(s) shall be fusion-welded on buss (and not

lugged on). 6. Mounting Free air, no enclosure required. Install Harger WBKT-1 brackets to

mount bar to wall. Isolate copper bar from mounting brackets with Harger 4200-Seriess two (2) inch insulators.

7. Fasten clear pexiglass cover on standoff bolts over ground bar. Engrave cover "GROUND BUS". Cover by Harger Lightning Protection, Inc., or approved equal.

8. Ground bar assembly shall be Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. GBI Series (800-842-7437, www.harger.com), Erico, Inc. (800-248-9353) or approved equal.

2.11 DRIVEN ELECTRODE ACCESS WELL AND COVER

A. Eight (8) inch diameter concrete pipe with belled end.

B. 24 inches long or longer to reach ground and set flush in grade.

C. Provide cast iron cover with "GROUND" embossed on top.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Inspection: Installer must examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding connections are to be made and notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.

B. General: Install electrical ground systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of the NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions.



C. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding systems with other work.

D. Grounding and bonding of electrical installations and specific requirements for systems, circuits and equipment required to be grounded shall be accomplished for temporary and permanent construction.

E. Provide a separate green equipment ground conductor in all electrical raceways to effectively ground all fixtures, panels, receptacles, controls, motors, disconnect switches, exterior lighting standards and noncurrent carrying metal enclosures. The ground wires shall be connected to the building system ground. NEC Table 250-95 shall be used to size the ground conductor if the size is not shown on the drawings.

F. To satisfy the "effective grounding" requirements of the NEC the path to ground from circuits, equipment, and conductor enclosures shall be permanent and continuous and shall have ample carrying capacity to conduct safely any currents liable to be imposed on it, and shall have impedance sufficiently low to limit the potential above ground and to facilitate the operation of the overcurrent devices in the circuit.

G. At the service entrance equipment, bond the utility neutral, building neutral and building ground conductor to a common ground bus (or ground lug). Connect the ground bus to the building domestic cold water pipe with a grounding conductor and an approved clamp and connector. Install the grounding conductor in exposed PVC conduit and make connections readily accessible for inspection. The point of connection to the water service shall be as near the building entrance as possible. Provide a copper wire shunt of the same size as the ground conductor around the water meter and clamp to the water pipe with bronze fittings. Bond the water pipe to the structural steel system of the building and reinforcing bars in footings when such building construction occurs.

H. In addition to the requirements for service entrance grounding listed above, provide a supplemental grounding electrode consisting of driven ground rods (three 10 foot x 3/4 inch copper-clad steel ground rods).

I. Clean the contact surfaces of all ground connections. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, and surface contaminants at connection points.

J. Where separately derived systems occur, ground the system to a grounding electrode acceptable to the code.

K. Install metallic raceways mechanically and electrically secure at all joints and at all boxes, cabinets, fittings and equipment. At the point of electrical service entrance, bond all metallic raceways together, with a ground conductor, and connect to the system ground bus. Bond all boxes as specified for equipment.

L. Receptacles: Permanently connect the ground terminal on each receptacle to the green ground conductor.

M. Motors: Connect the ground conductor to the conduit with an approved grounding bushing, and to the metal frame with a bolted, solderless lug.

N. Provide a flexible ground strap (No. 6 AWG) at each flexible duct connection to air handlers, exhaust fans, and supply fans. Install straps to preclude vibration.

O. Provide necessary ground connections to telephone service entrance equipment. Verify requirements with the local telephone company.



3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.3 EXISTING WORK

A. Modify existing grounding system to maintain continuity to accommodate renovations.

B. Extend existing grounding system using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NEC Article 250. Properly bond the system neutral to the system grounding electrode conductor at the main service entrance equipment. All other neutral busses, bars, etc. on the service voltage system shall be isolated from ground. This system shall be the solid grounded type.

B. Bond all ground electrodes together to form the grounding electrode system including metal underground water pipe, metal frame of the building or structure, concrete encased electrodes, ground ring, rod and pipe electrodes and plate electrodes.

C. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.

D. Install grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing.

E. Install a green equipment grounding conductor in all feeders and branch circuits, minimum size per NEC Table 250.122.

F. Transformers: Ground as a separately derived source. 1. Where transformer secondary includes a neutral, the neutral shall be bonded to

the equipment enclosure and connected to the system ground conductor. 2. Size bonding jumper per NEC Table 250.66. 3. Grounding conductor shall be in raceway and shall be bonded to nearest

available point of interior metal water piping system.

G. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and fountain structures.

H. Concrete-Encased Electrode (NEC 250-52): 1. Concrete-encased electrode also known as the "Ufer ground" consisting of either

a min. 1/2” continuous reinforcing bar or bare copper conductor not smaller than a #4AWG. Electrode to be installed in min 2” of concrete and located horizontally within a portion of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth and located at the building periphery nearest the electrical service. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, the designated footings are the perimeter building corners plus perimeter footings.

I. Made Electrode: 1. Triple Ground Rod: Provide a building ground rod and bond it to the electrode

system. The building ground rod shall consist of three ground rods, arranged in an equilateral triangular pattern located at least five (5) feet outside an exterior



building wall or as otherwise directed. Space 15 feet apart and drive into the earth to a point two (2) feet below finished grade to top of rods. Grounding electrode conductor shall form a continuous loop around rods, and conductor shall be properly bonded to each rod by a fusion weld similar to "Cadweld".

2. Extend grounding electrode conductor from this ground rod(s) to the grounded service conductor (neutral) in the building main switchboard at an accessible point on the ground bus per NEC 250-24.

3. Install grounding electrode conductor of 3/0 Copper.

J. Main Bonding Jumper: Shall be sized in accordance with Section 250-66, if not indicated on the drawings, and installed within the same enclosure as the point of bonding of the system neutral service entrance.

K. Grounding Busses: 1. Provide a copper bus bar where indicated on Drawings. Provide grounding

electrode conductor and connection to the grounding electrode system. AWG No. 2 minimum.

2. Provide in each IDF and MDF room. 3. Provide at each CATV / MATV head-end mounting board. 4. Provide at each building communications rack. 5. Provide at each sound reinforcement equipment rack.

L. Water Pipe Electrode: A ten (10) foot minimum length of electrically continuous underground metal water pipe. Bond around insulating joints or sections, insulating pipe, and water meters to make pipe electrically continuous.

M. Metal Building Frame NEC 250-52. 1. The structural steel or other metal frame of the building. Effectively ground the

steel structural columns to the ground ring grounding electrode conductor. 2. Cadweld #2 AWG bare copper cable to base of steel column. Route bonding

jumper down through column blockout in building floor slab, excavate under grade beam, and extend out to the ground ring. Cadweld jumper (also called "stinger") or install Burndy Hyground™ Type YGHP-C hydraulic compression connector onto ground ring. Install a ground rod at each point where a stinger from a building steel column lands on the ground ring.

N. Fuel Gas Piping: 1. Each above ground portion of a gas piping system upstream from the equipment

shutoff valve shall be made electrical continuos and bonded to the building grounding electrode system, as required in NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code.

2. Gas piping shall not be used as a grounding electrode.

O. Outdoor Lighting Poles: 1. All metallic outdoor poles and luminaries on metallic or non-metallic lighting poles

shall be grounded by bonding in an approved manner to the circuit grounding conductor. In addition to this, bond pole to a #8 bare copper wire which shall also be bonded to a ground rod. Install the ground rod adjacent to the pole base with the top driven at least two (2) feet below grade.

3.5 OTHER GROUNDING SYSTEMS:

A. General Check the drawings for special grounding system or grounding requirements.

B. Telephone and data equipment grounding connections: 1. Bond each telephone and data equipment ground (buss type or grounding



conductor type) at each telephone terminal board and data rack back to the service entrance grounding electrode system with a bare #6awg ground wire.

3.6 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. General: Make a firm bond between all enclosures, equipment and metallic raceway system. Grounding conductors shall be continuous from origin to termination and properly bonded with lugs at both ends. The metallic raceway systems shall be made up properly to form a grounding path that has an impedance back to the main system ground that is as low as can be practically obtained.

B. Over 250 Volts: Provide locknuts and/or listed fittings per NEC 250-97 for bonding of metal raceways in all circuits of over 250 Volts to ground. In case of oversized, concentric or eccentric knockouts, comply with NEC 250-92(B). The use of snap-in, wedge-type, or pivot-type connectors is prohibited.


A. Grounding Tests: 1. Test the electrical system after installation is complete. Inspect and test for stray

currents, unintended ground shorts, and proper physical condition of grounding system. Correct any deficiencies and re-test to verify satisfactory installation.

2. Provide written test report to document all findings, test values, work done and certification of grounding system.

3. Use true-RMS meters for all voltage and current measurements. 4. Test telecommunications grounding riser to verify continuity. 5. Check all isolated ground receptacles for correct polarity. 6. Test all sub panels of separately derives systems to verify subpanel neutral is

isolated from ground. 7. Verify continuity and isolation of audio system ground bus and grounding riser. 8. Perform ground resistance and continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142. 9. When improper grounding is found on receptacle, check receptacles in entire

project and correct. Perform retest. 3.8 TEST WELLS

A. Install test well for designated outdoor driven ground rods. Set tops of well flush with finished grade. Provide mechanical connector for ground rod inside test well so that rod can be disconnected from ground ring or other grounding electrode system for testing. 1. Designated Ground Rods:

a. One (1) at triple ground rod for press box and sports lighting service.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Sleeves. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. 6. Firestopping relating to electrical work. 7. Firestopping accessories. 8. Equipment bases and supports.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.


A. Firestopping: Conform to Building Code and UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load

capacity.


A. Perform Work in accordance with the Building Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.



2. Electroline Manufacturing Company 3. O-Z Gedney Co. 4. Appleton

B. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads.

C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.

D. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten.

E. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.

F. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F. Self locking.

2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. 2. B-Line Systems 3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division 4. Unistrut Corp.

B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.

2.3 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for raceway Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for raceway Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.

C. Sleeves for raceway Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL Listed.

D. Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.

2.4 SPRING STEEL CLIPS

A. Product Description: Mounting clamp, and screw.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. 2. NMP Corporation

B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.



2.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products . 6. Specified Technology, Inc.

B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Multiple component silicone

elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Multiple component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated

compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber

stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with

incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.

6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain.

7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.

2.7 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES

A. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.

B. General: 1. Furnish UL Listed products. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.

C. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or

ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal

consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.

3.2 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Anchors and Fasteners:



1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors or preset inserts as required.

2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners or welded fasteners as required.

3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors as required.

4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners as required.

5. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors or preset inserts as required. 6. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.

B. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe

over four (4) inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide

through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.

C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC.

D. Do not fasten supports to suspended ceiling support system, pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.

F. Supports: 1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon

head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts.

2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and

panelboards one (1) inch off wall. 4. Support vertical conduit at every floor.

3.3 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING

A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.

B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.

C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating.

D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.

E. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.

F. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.



G. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at all rated floors and walls as follows:



c. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL Listed fire resistive silicone compound to

meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where cable tray, bus, or conduit, penetrates fire rated surface, install

firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated floors and walls as follows:



c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install escutcheons where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied

spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling.

3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to size of conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Exterior watertight entries: Provide mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Interior conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.

C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

E. Extend sleeves through floors and walls one (1) inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.



RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes conduit and tubing, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and

Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box

Supports. 4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box

Supports. 5. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel

Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

C. UL Compliance and Labeling: 1. Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway

systems; and provide products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled. Each length of raceway shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories label.

D. NEC Compliance: 1. Comply with NEC requirements which are applicable to the construction and

installation of raceway systems

E. NECA Compliance: 1. Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation".


A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.

B. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide weather resistant, cast metal junction and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Boxes shall be sealed to prevent air and water infiltration through the building envelope.

C. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel intermediate metal conduit on electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.



D. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.

E. In Slab or Under Slab on Grade: No branch circuit raceway is allowed in any slab or under slab on grade unless specifically indicated on drawings.

F. Types of raceways in this Section include the following:

1. Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Intermediate metal conduit. 4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. 5. Rigid metal conduit. 6. PVC Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 7. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of device specified.


A. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.

B. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under other Divisions.

B. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. Refer to Architectural elevations and equipment specifications and coordinate device locations prior to electrical rough-in.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT

A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied 2. Wheatland 3. Republic 4. Cantex 5. Western



6. Prime 7. or approved equal.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.

D. All conduit shall be made in the U.S.A. and bare the “Made in USA” label.

E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. All fittings shall be made in the U.S.A. and bare the “Made in USA” label.

F. Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT): All EMT fittings shall be steel not die-cast metal. All conduit stub-ups above ceiling for low voltage and data to be provided with insulating bushing.

G. Flexible Metal Conduit (Flex): Conduit fittings shall be steel. Provide plastic anti-short bushing for all flex fittings. Comply with NEC 348.

H. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Shall be same as flexible metal conduit specified above except Article 350 in NEC.

I. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized rigid steel with additional external coating for 40 mil polyvinyl chloride jacket (PVC). Conforming to UL Standard 6. ANSI C80.1 and NEMA Standard No. RN.1. 1. Manufacturer:

a. Ocal Inc. b. Perma Cote Industries c. Rob-Roy Industries d. or Approved equal.

J. PVC-Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: PVC and fittings that are listed per the UL Standards.

Comply with NEMA Standard TC-2.

K. Nonmetallic Multi Duct: Provide nonmetallic multi duct that is UL Listed. 1. Type: four (4) inches schedule 40 PVC outer duct, four 1.25 inch ducts of ribbed

polyethylene. Duct shall have six (6) inch deep end bell on one end, spigot on the other end.

2. Multi Duct shall have gaskets to seal the inside and outside walls of the inner duct.

2.2 ENCLOSURE

A. Pull Boxes, Junction Boxes, Cabinets, and Wireways: Provide pull boxes, junction boxes, wireways, and cabinets wherever necessary for proper installation of various electrical systems according to the National Electrical Code and where indicated on the Drawings.

B. Minimum Size: That size shown on the drawings, as required for the specific function, or as required by the National Electrical Code, whichever is larger.

C. Construction: 1. Indoors in Dry Areas and Not Buried in Slab: Code gage steel - NEMA 1

construction - sides formed and welded, screw covers unless indicated hinged cover or door on drawings. Hinged doors shall be similar to panelboard doors



with the same type locking device. Knockouts shall be factory made or formed O-Z Gedney Type PB or approved equal.

2. Outdoors or Indoors in Wet Areas and Not Buried in Slab: Same as specified above for indoor except provide NEMA 3R (designated by 3R or RT) unless indicated or specified to be NEMA 4 (designated by 4 or WP) or other type rating.

3. Indoors Buried in Slab: Watertight, galvanized cast iron in floors on or below grade, otherwise concrete tight stamped steel.

4. Outdoors Buried in Earth: Watertight, galvanized cast iron with a six (6) inch reinforced concrete envelope, polymer concrete casting similar to Strongwell "Composolite" (www.strongwell.com; former MMG Quazite) or precast concrete type manufactured by Brooks Product, Inc brand for Oldcastle Precast, Inc. (713-991-2400). Precast box shall have appropriate structural rating for intended use. Install on a level poured concrete base to provide a solid bearing surface. Provide a bolted cast iron traffic cover with foundry-cast marking "Electrical", "Communications" or "Telephone" as applies. Top of enclosure shall be one (1) inch above finished grade in earth. Top of enclosure shall be flush with finished pavement.

2.3 WIREWAY

A. Manufacturers: 1. Legrand 2. Hoffman 3. Hubbell 4. Eaton 5. Erico 6. Schneider Electric

B. Product Description: General purpose.

C. Size: As determined by Contractor in accordance with NEC 376.

D. Cover: Screw cover.

E. Connector: Slip-in.

F. Fittings: Lay-in type.

G. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish.

2.4 OUTLET BOXES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Carlon 3. Crouse-Hinds 4. Hubbell 5. Thomas & Betts / Steel City

B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

6. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.

7. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.

C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer.



D. Wall Plates: As specified in Section 26 27 26.


A Install electric raceways where indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,

applicable requirements of the NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and complying with recognized industry practices.

B Raceways embedded in concrete or in earth below floor slabs shall be rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or rigid schedule 40 PVC conduit. Rigid PVC conduit shall be provided with rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit elbows when the raceway system exits the concrete topping or earth to a min. of 12 inches above finished floor or grade. Where multiple raceways are embedded in concrete, raceways shall be properly spaced and supported in trench with raceway spacers/supports in accordance with N.E.C. Raceways shall be inspected by the AHJ and Engineer prior to backfilling of trench with concrete.

C All underground raceways not embedded in concrete shall be embedded in not less than six inches of sand with a minimum cover of 3 three inches of sand on top and all sides. Rigid PVC conduit shall be provided with rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit elbows when the raceway system exits the concrete topping or earth to a min. of 12 inches above finished floor or grade. Where multiple raceways are installed underground, raceways shall be properly spaced in trench with spacers prior to backfilling of trench with sand. Install underground warning tape minimum twelve inches above top of raceways.

D Electrical metallic tubing shall not be embedded in concrete or installed in earth.

E Aluminum conduit shall not be embedded in concrete, or installed in earth.

F Rigid heavy wall Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be installed in earth and concrete only.

G Raceways in outside walls or in refrigerated areas shall be rigid steel conduit, or intermediate metal conduit.

H Provide rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit for exposed raceways from floor to eight feet above the floor in mechanical rooms and in areas designated on the plans.

I Rigid galvanized steel conduit or galvanized intermediate metal conduit shall be used where conduit is exposed to weather.

J Conduits in hazardous locations shall conform to the National Electrical Code. Rigid galvanized

steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit shall be used in hazardous locations. PVC conduit shall not be used in hazardous areas.

K Rigid metal, intermediate metal, electric metallic tubing or PVC conduit where allowed in other section 3.1 paragraphs shall be used for feeders and branch circuits.

L Flexible metal conduit may be used to connect light fixtures in accordance with NEC requirements. Provide flexible metal conduit for connections to motors, transformers, generators, and other equipment subject to vibration. Length of flexible conduit shall be a minimum of one foot for conduit diameters up to 1-1/2". A minimum of 3" of flexible conduit shall be added for every 1/2" increase in conduit diameter. Flexible metal conduit installation shall be kept to a minimum in connecting other electrical equipment items.



M Sealtight, flexible conduit shall be used where the flexible conduit may be subject to moist or

humid atmosphere, corrosive atmosphere, subject to water spray and subject to dripping oil, grease or water.

N Conduits shall be 3/4" diameter, minimum. Raceway sizes shown on the drawing are based on type THHN/THWN copper conductors.

O Type Material: Except as noted otherwise all conduit shall be steel. 3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.

3.3 EXISTING WORK

A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.

C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when

raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.

D. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring

access. Modify installation or provide access panel.

E. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.

F. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.

3.4 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY

A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 25 29.

C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

E. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to

complete wiring system.

F. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

G. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.

H. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel

specified in Section 26 05 29.

I. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for



temporary supports

J. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

K. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29.

L. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.

M. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.

N. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab and Above Grade: 3/4 inch.

O. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.

P. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees Fahrenheit.

Q. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.

R. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

S. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe

nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.

T. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp

and wet locations and to cast boxes. U. Provide accessible "seal-off" fittings for all raceways entering or leaving hazardous areas,

entering or leaving refrigerated areas and as otherwise required by the National Electrical Code.

V. Where conduits penetrate the roof seal, they shall be installed in curbs provided for

mechanical equipment. When this is not possible, suitable pitch pockets, lead flashing, or approved fittings shall be provided. Details for special conduit installations shall be as shown on the drawings.

W. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit

bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than two (2) inch size.

X. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. Y. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses

expansion joints.

Z. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.

AA. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

BB. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.

CC. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.



DD. Provide tracer wire on all underground raceway outside building slab 12” below grade.

3.5 RACEWAY TYPES

A. The following raceway types are to be used in the following locations: 1. Underground: Concrete encased schedule 40 PVC or concrete encased rigid

galvanized steel. 2. Under Slab on Grade: Schedule 40 PVC. 3. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Rigid galvanized steel. 4. Wet and Damp Locations: Rigid galvanized steel. 5. Exposed or Concealed Dry Locations, Indoors: EMT, IMC, or rigid galvanized

steel. 6. All underground electrical wire, 208 volts or greater shall be in red concrete two

(2) inches thick on all sides. Encasement not required under building slabs, parking lots or other paved surfaces. Red dye may not be applied to the top of the concrete.

7. Transformers and Motors: 24 inch flexible metal conduit to equipment. 8. Kitchens and outdoor motor and transformer connections: Liquidtight flexible

metal conduit for all exposed raceway. 9. Cooling Towers: PVC coated rigid galvanized steel within 50 feet of tower.

3.6 INSTALLATION - BOXES A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated

on Drawings and as approved by the Architect. B. Adjust box location up to ten (10) feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended

purpose.

C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26. D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas

only.

E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

F. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

G. Support boxes independently of conduit. Provide rigid support to structure for all junction

boxes. Mount junction boxes within 18” of finished ceilings to facilitate future access. Locate junction boxes to allow ready access to junction box covers without removing any equipment.

H. All outdoor boxes and/or boxes installed in exterior wall that penetrates building envelope

shall be UL listed for wet location service. Boxes shall be sealed to prevent air and water infiltration through the building envelope.

I. Provide rigid support to structure for all junction boxes.

J. Provide rigid support to structure for all conduit within 3 feet of each junction box and a

maximum spacing of 10 feet.

K. Install junction boxes above ceilings in accessible location with no obstructions. Locate



within 18 inches of finished ceiling to facilitate easy access.

L. For all flexible whips to light fixtures provide wire support at mid-length of whip to structure above with UL listed conduit support clip.

M. Provide outlet boxes to meet depth requirement of Architectural walls. Refer to

Architectural Spec Section 09 21 16. 3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

3.11 ABOVE CEILING JUNCTION BOXES

A. Labeling: Provide label on all above ceiling junction boxes. 1. Provide permanent labeling with indelible black marker, in neat, legible print

indicating the panelboard name, branch circuit number(s) and voltage of conductors within the junction box. Junction boxes used for emergency power circuits to be painted red.



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 53 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Underground Warning Tape. 3. Lockout Devices.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical identification, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and standards: Comply with the following: 1. National Electrical Code, NFPA No. 70. 2. NEMA standards applicable to the product provided. 3. UL standards applicable to the product provided.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Panduit Corp. 2. American Labelmark Co. 3. Markal Corp. 4. Calpico, Inc. 5. Ideal Industries, Inc.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color.

B. Emergency Power panels and Equipment: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on RED background.

C. Letter Size: 1. 1/4 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.

D. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch.

2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Description: four (4) inch wide plastic tape, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.



26 05 53 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.

B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. Each nameplate shall identify the

name of the equipment served, voltage, and circuit number. On electrical switchboards and panelboards include panel name, amp rating, voltage, phase and number of wires.

2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished

locations. 6. Install nameplates for the following:

a. Switchboards b. Panelboards c. Transformers d. Service Disconnects

1) Enclosed Switches e. Motor Control Centers f. Stand-alone Motor Controllers g. Generators h. Contactors

C. Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit,

raceway, or cable six (6) to eight (8) inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches; install a single line marker.

2. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway.

D. Printed Panelboard Directory: 1. Provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and

identification of items controlled by each individual breaker for that panel. Contractor to coordinate the exact room names and number with Owner prior to filling out panel directory.

2. Copy in Owner’s Manual.

3.3 ELECTRICAL DEVICES

A. Labeling: Provide label on all outlets.



26 05 53 - 3

1. Provide permanent clear adhesive labeling with black letters indicating the branch circuit number(s) as indicated on plans. (panel designation-circuit number).

3.4 ABOVE CEILING JUNCTION BOXES

A. Labeling: Provide label on all above ceiling junction boxes. 1. Provide permanent labeling with indelible black marker, in neat, legible print

indicating the panelboard name, branch circuit number(s) and voltage of conductors within the junction box.

3.5 ARC FLASH WARNING LABEL

A. Install ARC flash warning label on switchboards, panel boards and motor control centers, etc. requiring examination, adjustments, servicing or maintenance while energized shall be field marked to warn persons of arc flash hazards in accordance with 2017 NEC articles 110.16 and 110.21. Marking shall be located so as to be clearly visible to qualified persons before servicing or maintenance.



SHORT CIRCUIT COORDINATION STUDY AND ARC FLASH STUDY 26 05 73 - 1

SECTION 26 05 73 - SHORT CIRCUIT COORDINATION STUDY AND ARC FLASH STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. The electrical contractor shall provide an engineering analysis, short

circuit/coordination study with protective device evaluation and arc flash hazard study as described herein.

B. The studies shall be submitted to the Design Engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to release of equipment for manufacture. If formal completion of the studies may cause delay in equipment manufacture, approval from the Engineer may be obtained for a preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of device ratings and characteristics will be satisfactory.

C. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system from the

normal power source or sources, and emergency / standby sources, down to and including the smallest circuit breaker in the distribution system (for short circuit calculations). Normal system connections and those which result in maximum fault conditions shall be adequately covered in the study.

D. The firm should be currently involved in high- and low-voltage power system evaluation. The study shall be performed, stamped and signed by a registered professional engineer in the State of Texas. Credentials of the individual(s) performing the study and background of the firm shall be submitted to the Design Engineer for approval prior to start of the work. A minimum of five (5) years experience in power system analysis is required for the individual in charge of the project.

E. The firm performing the study should demonstrate capability and experience to

provide assistance during start up as required.

F. The study and assessment shall be performed based on SKM’s Dapper, Captor and PowerTool software

Included are the following topics: PART 1 - GENERAL Scope Related Work Quality Assurance Data Collection for the Study Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION Short Circuit and Coordination Study Field Settings Arc Flash Hazard Study 1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference standards listed in the IEEE “Buff Book”, latest edition.



1.4 DATA COLLECTION FOR THE STUDY

A. The contractor shall provide the required data for preparation of the studies. The engineer performing the system studies shall furnish the contractor with a listing of the required data immediately after award of the contract.

B. The contractor shall expedite collection of the data to assure completion of

the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to release of the equipment for manufacture.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Specification Review: Provide a complete item by item, line by line specification

review indicating compliance with the specifications and note any deviations from the specification with reason for deviation.

B. THIRD PARTY QUALIFICATIONS 1. Submit qualifications of individual(s) who will perform the work to Design

Engineer for approval prior to commencement of the studies.

C. DRAFT REPORT 1. Submit a draft of the study to Design Engineer for review prior to delivery

of the study to the Owner. Make all additions or changes as required by the reviewer.

D. FINAL STUDY REPORT

1. Provide studies in conjunction with equipment submittals to verify equipment ratings required.

2. The results of the power system study shall be summarized in a final

report. Six (6) bound copies of the final report shall be submitted. Provide two (2) copies in PDF format of the study, so that it can be more easily stored and shared. Also, provide 2 copies (on CD) of the report in MS word, and 2 copies (on CD) of the one-line diagram in CAD format.

The report shall include the following sections:

I. Overview II. Short Circuit Study

SC-1 Purpose SC-2 Explanation of Data SC-3 Assumptions SC-4 Analysis of Results SC-5 Recommendations SC-6 DAPPER Fault Analysis Input Report

III. Protective Device Coordination Study PDC-1 Purpose PDC-2 Explanation of Data PDC-3 Assumptions PDC-4 Analysis of Results PDC-5 Recommendations (Including NEC 700-27 Requirement) PDC-6 CAPTOR Results PDC-7 Example Drawings

IV. Arc Flash Study ARC-1 Purpose



ARC-2 Explanation of Data ARC-3 Assumptions ARC-4 Analysis of Results ARC-5 Recommendations ARC-6 SKM Arc Flash Evaluation Report

V. Prioritized Recommendations and Conclusions VI. Appendices APP-1 DAPPER One-line Diagrams APP-2 AutoCAD One-line Diagrams APP-3 SKM Protective Device Summaries APP-4 Reference Data APP-5 Sample Work Permit Form APP-6 Copy of Warning Labels, including study date The above sections shall include the following items in detail: • Obtain available fault current from the local utility company. • Short circuit studies shall evaluate the available fault current at each bus (each change of

impedance), including all three-phase motors. • Coordination study recommendations for relay settings, breaker settings, and motor

protection settings.

• Coordination study shall include protective devices settings to achieve selective coordination for the following systems as required by the National Electrical Code:

o NEC 517 – Healthcare Facilities o NEC 620 – Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Moving Walks, Platform Lifts and Stairway

Chairlifts o NEC 700 - Emergency Systems o NEC 701 – Legally Required Standby Systems o NEC 708 – Critical Operations Power Systems

• Overcurrent devices shall be selectively coordinated with supply side overcurrent protective devices for the period of time that the faults duration extends beyond 0.1 seconds.

• Recommendations for improving the coordination and/or load distribution, as well as ground

fault requirements. • Arc flash values for two normal cases to define the highest values (low short circuit and high

short circuit). • Arc flash values for two maintenance cases, which define the arc flash values available at the

equipment that would be available if the instantaneous trip of the upstream circuit breaker is set at a minimum value. This is recommended if someone has to work on live equipment.

• IEEE standard one-line diagram with equipment evaluation and circuit breaker setting forms

that clearly define the system data and are easy to interpret. • Recommendations to reduce the arc flash incident energy in all areas that require class2 and

higher PPE. • Prioritized report summarizing all recommendations from this study. This shall include

observed NEC code violations and their corrective action.



• The contractor shall provide a one-line diagram that meets IEEE/ANSI standard 141,

mounted on 24” x 36” (minimum) Styrofoam backboard. This one-line diagram shall be mounted in each electrical room.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY

A. The short circuit, coordination, and arc flash hazard studies shall be performed using SKM Dapper, Captor and PowerTool for Windows software packages. In the short circuit study, provide calculation methods and assumptions, the base per unit quantities selected, one-line diagrams, source impedance data including power company system characteristics, typical calculations, and recommendations. Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties for an assumed 3-phase bolted fault at each supply switchgear lineup, unit substation primary and secondary terminals, low voltage switchgear lineup, switchboard, motor control center, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panelboard, and other significant locations throughout the system. Provide a ground fault current study for the same system areas, including the associated zero sequence impedance data. Include in tabulations fault impedance, X to R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor contribution, short circuit KVA, and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

B. In the protective device coordination study, provide time-current curves

graphically indicating the coordination proposed for the system, centered on conventional, full-size, log-log forms. Include with each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered by that particular curve sheet. Include a detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics. Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings.

C. Include on the curve sheets power company relay and fuse characteristics,

system medium-voltage equipment relay and fuse characteristics, low-voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device characteristics, pertinent transformer characteristics, pertinent transformer characteristics, pertinent motor and generator characteristics, and characteristics of other system load protective devices. Include at least all devices down to largest branch circuit and largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center, and main breaker in branch panelboards.

D. Include all adjustable settings for ground fault protective devices. Include

manufacturing tolerance and damage bands in plotted fuse characteristics. Show transformer full load and 150, 400, or 600 percent currents, transformer magnetizing inrush, ANSI transformer withstand parameters, and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting the maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.

E. Select each primary protective device required for a delta-wye connected

transformer so that its characteristic or operating band is within the transformer



characteristics, including a point equal to 58 percent of the ANSI withstand point to provide secondary line-to-ground fault protection. Where the primary device characteristic is not within the transformer characteristics, show a transformer damage curve. Separate transformer primary protective device characteristic curves from associated secondary device characteristics by a 16 percent current margin to provide proper coordination and protection in the event of secondary line-to-line faults. Separate medium-voltage relay characteristic curves from curves for other devices by at least a 0.4-second time margin.

F. Include complete fault calculations as specified herein for each proposed and

ultimate source combination. Note that source combinations may include present and future supply circuits, large motors, or generators as noted on drawing one-lines.

G. Utilize equipment load data for the study obtained by the Contractor from

contract documents, including contract addendums issued prior to bid openings.

H. Include fault contribution of all motors in the study. Notify the Engineer in

writing of circuit protective devices not property rated for fault conditions.

I. Provide settings for the chiller motor starters or obtain from the mechanical contractor, include in the study package, and comment.

J. When an emergency generator is provided, include phase and ground

coordination of the generator protective devices, to meet NEC 700.27 requirements. Show the generator decrement curve and damage curve along with the operating characteristic of the protective devices. Obtain the information from the generator manufacturer and include the generator actual impedance value, time constants and current boost data in the study. Do not use typical values for the generator.

K. Evaluate proper operation of the ground relays in 4-wire distributions with more

than one main service circuit breaker, or when generators are provided, and discuss the neutral grounds and ground fault current flows during a neutral to ground fault.

L. For motor control circuits, show the MCC full-load current plus symmetrical and

asymmetrical of the largest motor starting current to ensure protective devices will not trip major or group operation.

3.2 FIELD SETTINGS

A. The Contractor shall engage the manufacturer’s service group or alternatively a qualified independent testing firm to perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the approved short circuit study, protective device coordination study and arc flash hazard study.

B. Necessary field settings of devices and adjustments and minor modifications to

equipment to accomplish conformance with the approved short circuit and protective device coordination study shall be carried out by the manufacturer’s service group at no additional cost to the owner.



3.3 ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY

A. As part of the short circuit and coordination study, arc flash hazard study shall be

included. The study shall include the following:

1. Determine and document all possible utility and generator/emergency sources that are capable of being connected to each piece of electrical gear. Calculations shall be based on highest possible source connection.

2. Calculations to conform to National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

70E – 2003 calculation standards. All incident energy units shall be calculated in calories per square centimeter.

3. Provide recommended boundary zones and personal protective

equipment (PPE) based on the calculated incident energy and requirements of NFPA 70E-2003 for each piece of electrical gear.

4. Electrical Contractor shall provide labeling as required by OSHA based

upon the results of the arc flash hazard study. At a minimum, the labeling shall contain the following information: PPE level, Flash Hazard Boundaries, Flash Protection Boundary, and Shock Hazard Boundaries such as Limited Approach Boundary, Restricted Approach Boundary, Prohibited Approach Boundary, and study date."



ENCLOSED SWITCHES, ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS

26 20 00 - 1

SECTION 26 20 00 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES, ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Conditions of the Contract Documents and Division 1 - General Requirements as applicable, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide all electrical distribution and motor control equipment and accessories required to distribute electrical power to all motors, outlets and systems requiring power.


A. New: Provide all new equipment. B. Single Manufacturer: All equipment of each type shall be the product of one manufacturer. C. UL: Equipment shall be UL listed. Service entrance equipment shall bear UL Service

Entrance label. D. NEC: Equipment and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code. E. Wet Locations: Equipment and enclosures installed outdoors and in wet locations shall be

approved for the purpose.

F. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Standard 1015-1997 (Blue Book) Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

1.4 LABELING

A. Nameplates and labeling shall be provided in accordance with Section 26 05 53. All feeders shall be labeled at the feeder device.

1.5 FINISHES

A. All equipment shall have a factory applied gray finish applied over a rust inhibiting treatment. Any items which have the finish marred shall be touched up or refinished to a new condition before final acceptance. This shall include, but shall not be limited to, sanding and properly removing rust or other contaminants and completely repainting equipment if damage is extensive. Overall acceptance is subject to approval of the Engineer.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Specification Review: Provide a complete item by item, line by line specification review

indicating compliance with the specifications and note any deviations from the specification with reason for deviation.

B. Provide complete product data for each equipment type. Provide electric service studies when required.



26 20 00 - 2

C. Submittal shall include written recommendation from manufacturer of settings for all electronic trip adjustment setting on all equipment furnished with adjustable trip settings. Contractor is responsible for adjusting all electronic trip settings per manufacturer recommendations.

D. Electrical connections to all equipment furnished by any other division shall be coordinated

with final approved equipment submittals from other divisions including but not limited to circuit breaker sizes, conduit sizes, wire sizes, fuse sizes, disconnect switch sizes and starter sizes that differ from those shown on the drawings prior to submitting Electrical Distribution Equipment submittal.


A. Unless indicated otherwise, all equipment in this section shall be provided from a single manufacturer. The product designations listed are to establish a level of quality. Acceptable manufacturers are, 1. Square D 2. Siemens 3. G.E. 4. Eaton - Cutler-Hammer

2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

A. General: Provide heavy duty enclosed switches similar to Square D Class 3100 Type HD.

B. Switch Interior: 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are visible when the switch is OFF and

the cover is open. 2. Lugs shall be front removable and UL Listed for 75 degrees Celsius conductors. 3. All current carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion. 4. Switches shall have removable arc suppressors to facilitate easy access to line side

lugs. 5. Switches shall have provisions for a field installable electrical interlock.

C. Switch Mechanism: 1. Switch operating mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break such that, during

normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started.

2. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. 3. Provisions for padlocking the switch in the OFF position with at least three padlocks

shall be provided. 4. The handle position shall travel at least 90 degrees between OFF and ON positions

to clearly distinguish and indicate handle position. 5. All switches shall have a dual cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional

opening of the switch cover when the switch is ON and prevent turning the switch ON when the cover is open. The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated override but the override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock.

D. Switch Enclosures: 1. Switch covers shall be attached with welded pin-type hinges.



26 20 00 - 3

2. The enclosure shall be finished with gray baked enamel paint which is electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphate pre-treated steel.

3. The enclosure shall have ON and OFF markings stamped into the cover. 4. The operating handle shall be provided with a dual colored, red/black position

indication, 5. All switches shall have provisions to accept up to three (3) 3/8 inch hasp padlocks to

lock the operating handle in the OFF position. 6. Tangential knockouts shall be provided to facilitate ease of conduit entry. 7. Interior Dry Locations: Type NEMA-1. 8. Exterior Locations: Type NEMA-3R. 9. Kitchen Locations: Type NEMA-4X Stainless steel.

E. Switch Ratings: 1. Switches shall be horsepower rated for ac and/or dc as indicated on the plans. 2. The UL Listed short circuit current rating of the switches shall be 200,000 rms

symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class J fuses. 3. Non-Fusible: 10,000 rms symmetrical amps.

F. Fuse Clips: NEMA FU 1, Class J fuses.

2.3 SINGLE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH ENCLOSURES

A. Product Description: Enclosed, molded-case circuit breaker conforming to NEMA AB 1, suitable for use as service entrance equipment where applied.

B. Circuit Breakers: Molded case, quick make, quick break, trip free, common thermal magnetic trip.

C. Ratings: Continuous current, poles as required, 480 volt system breaker shall interrupt short circuits up to 14,000 rms amps symmetrical; on 120/208 - 240 volt system, 10,000 amp rms symmetrical.

D. Enclosure: NEMA AB 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type NEMA-1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type NEMA-3R.

E. Nameplate: Provide a nameplate showing load served.

2.4 FUSES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussmann. 2. Little Fuse 3. Ferraz Shawmut

B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or as indicated on Drawings.

C. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.

D. Class J (Time Delay) Fuses 1. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1. 2. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage. 3. Dual-element, time delay ten (10) seconds (minimum) at 500 percent rated current.



26 20 00 - 4

E. Spares: Spare fuses shall be provided in the amount of ten (10) percent of each type and size installed. Replacement for fuses and limiters blown during construction shall not count as spares.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING:

A. General: All equipment shall be securely fastened in place.

B. Locations: In all cases mounting locations shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. This shall include providing suitable working clearances.

C. Concrete Pads: 1. Provide concrete in accordance with the Division of the Specifications for

that product. 2. Indoor concrete pads shall consist of a four (4) inch pad with beveled edges

extending two (2) inches beyond the perimeter of supported equipment. Switchboards, motor control centers, transformers greater than 15 KVA, and engine generators shall be installed on a pad. Refer to the drawings and the specifications for each piece of equipment to determine what other equipment shall be mounted on a pad.

3. All equipment, ground mounted outdoors, shall be mounted on a pad. Outdoor pads shall be minimum of one foot thick reinforced with #4 rebar one (1) foot on center each way. Size outdoor pads with at least four (4) feet working clearance in front of equipment and one (1) foot on all sides. Provide anchor bolts for pad-mounted equipment. Refer to Detail on drawings.

D. Wall Mounted Equipment: Wall mounted equipment shall be suitably positioned on the wall. Equipment mounted on exterior basement wall shall have unistrut channels between the wall and the equipment to prevent condensation problems. Where wall mounted equipment is specified, but a convenient wall not available, a suitable unistrut mounting stanchion anchored in concrete shall be provided. In lieu of this stanchion, small devices may be mounted on to the equipment served if approved by the equipment manufacturer.

E. Motor rated disconnects: Install disconnects in a vertical orientation with “off” in the down position.

3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. General: 1. Store all types of electrical power distribution equipment in a clean, heated building

affording appropriate physical protection. Control access to prevent unauthorized tampering with the equipment. However, equipment may be stored in other inside or outside environments under approved conditions.

2. Inspect equipment when received at Project site for shipping damage. Report as required by freight carrier to recover repair or replacement costs from the freight carrier in the event damage was sustained.

3. Covers are required unless indoor, ventilated storage conditions exist. Canvas tarpaulins or the equivalent are preferred over other coverings because they provide better humidity control and enclosure scuff protection. Where exposed to moisture, covers shall be waterproof.

4. The manufacturer's shipping skids shall be left on the equipment to provide structural support until the equipment is set in final resting place.


Master – 26 20 00 - 5

5. Refer to Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. Contractor shall furnish new equipment to replace any equipment that is exposed to weather or subjected to other deleterious effects of construction.

B. Approved Conditions for Equipment Storage:

1. General: Where storage conditions specified above are not available, indoor or outdoor storage shall comply with the following.

2. Switchboards, Motor Control and Other General Distribution and Utilization Equipment: a. Store metal-enclosed equipment in the upright position. Provide good

ventilation of the shelter and protection from dirt, moisture and physical damage.

b. Space heaters furnished with the equipment shall be connected to a continuous source of power of the proper rating. Where space heaters are supplied from auxiliary power transformers, care shall be taken that low-voltage heater circuits are properly isolated before power source connection to prevent inadvertent energizing of the auxiliary transformer and associated high-voltage primary wiring.

c. Ambient conditions may allow condensation inside waterproof covers. If condensation is occurring, temporary heaters or lamp banks shall be provided of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation.

d. Contractor shall ensure that equipment stored in shipping cases receives adequate ventilation to avoid mildew and prevent condensation.

C. Transformer

1. Indoor storage shall be provided for all transformers.

3.3 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT:

A. General: Provide for system performance testing as required by the National Electrical Code. Provide each ground fault relay, sensing device or ground fault protection system with instructions and a test form. The form shall be retained by those in charge of the building's electrical installation and be available to the authority having jurisdiction. The instruction content shall be as required by UL.

3.4 LABELING:

A. Nametag: Provide a nametag for each piece of distribution equipment; see Section 260553,

Electrical Identification.



LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00-1

SECTION 26 22 00 - LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, withcapacities up to 1000 kVA:

A. Distribution transformers.B. Buck-boost transformers.


A. Specification Review: Provide a complete item by item, line by line specification reviewindicating compliance with the specifications and note any deviations from the specification withreason for deviation.

B. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimumclearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size oftransformer indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each fieldconnection.

A. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Source quality-control test reports.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, andmaintenance manuals.


LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

26 22 00-2


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

A. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of power distribution transformers of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (20) years.

D. Installer: Qualified with at least three (5) years successful installation experience on projects with electrical power/distribution transformer work similar to that required for this project.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

G. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."

1.7 REFERENCES

A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of electrical power/distribution transformers.

B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the NEMA Std. Pub. Nos. TR1 and TR27 pertaining to power/distribution transformers.

C. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to power/distribution transformers.

D. ANSI/IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI/IEEE standards pertaining to power/ distribution transformers.

E. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Std. ST 20 "Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications".

F. ANSI/UL Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/UL 506 "Safety Standard for Specialty Transformers".

G. UL Labels: Provide distribution transformers that have been UL listed and labeled.



26 22 00-3


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

A. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. B. General Electric Company. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. D. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

A. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. B. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.



26 22 00-4

A. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.

A. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

A. Finish Color: Gray.

F. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.

G. Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.

H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

I. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

J. Energy Efficiency for LV Dry Type Transformers:

A. Complying with DOE 10 CFR 431 – 2016 Energy Efficiency Standard as follows:

Single-Phase KVA BIL

Efficiency

20-45 kV 46-95 kV ≥ 90 kV %

15 98.10 97.86 - 25 98.33 98.12 - 37.50 98.49 98.30 - 50 98.60 98.42 - 75 98.73 98.57 98.53 100 98.82 98.67 98.63 167 98.96 98.83 98.80 250 99.07 98.95 98.91 333 99.14 99.03 98.99 500 99.22 99.12 99.09 667 99.27 99.18 99.15 833 99.31 99.23 99.20

Three-Phase KVA BIL

Efficiency

20-46 kV 46-95 kV ≥ 90 kV %

15 97.50 97.18 - 30 97.90 97.63 - 45 98.10 97.86 -



26 22 00-5

75 98.33 98.13 - 112.50 98.52 98.36 - 150 98.65 98.51 - 225 98.82 98.69 98.57 300 98.93 98.81 98.69 500 99.09 98.99 98.89 750 99.21 99.12 99.02 1000 99.28 99.20 99.11 1500 99.37 99.30 99.21 2000 99.43 99.36 99.28 2500 99.47 99.41 99.33

B. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

K. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.

A. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.

B. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

L. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

A. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.

B. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. C. Shield Effectiveness:

a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.

b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.

c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

M. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

N. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.

O. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

P. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:

A. 9 kVA and Less: 40 dBA. B. 30 to 50 kVA: 45dBA. C. 51 to 150 kVA: 50dBA. D. 151 to 300 kVA: 55dBA. E. 301 to 500 kVA: 60dBA. F. 501 to 750 kVA: 62dBA. G. 751 to 1000 kVA: 64dBA



26 22 00-6

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."



26 22 00-7


A. Retain one of three paragraphs below that identify who shall perform tests and inspections. If retaining second option in first paragraph, or if retaining second or third paragraph, retain requirement for field quality-control test reports in "Informational Submittals" Article.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

D. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

E. Tests and Inspections:

A. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

F. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

G. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

A. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

B. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

C. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

H. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 TRANSFORMER VIBRATION ISOLATION:

A. Floor Mounted Transformers: Install on concrete housekeeping pad with Mason Indus-tries Type WM Neoprene Waffle pad, or equal. Provide Type WM isolation for elevated rack installation.

B. Wall Mounted Transformers: Install Mason Industries Type WM Neoprene Waffle pad

between the wall brackets and the wall.

C. Suspended Transformers: Install Mason Industries PC30 Pre-compressed spring hanger with neoprene isolator.



26 22 00-8

D. Floor Mounted Transformers Greater than 150 kVA: Install on Mason Industries, Inc, or equal, unhoused spring isolators with acoustical pad bonded to bottom. Isolators shall be undamped free-standing spring isolators sized for a minimum of two (2) inches of static deflection. The spring outside diameter shall be no less than 80 percent of the spring operating height. The spring shall have remaining travel to solid of no less than 50 per-cent of the static deflection. Provide a 1/4 inch neoprene friction pad bonded to the spring base. Bolt each vibration isolator unit to concrete pad, and bolt transformers to the vibration isolator units, using the leveling bolts and nuts provided with the unit.

3.6 TRANSFORMER VENTILATION:

A. Transformers with ventilating openings shall be installed so that the ventilating openings are not blocked by walls or other obstructions. The required clearances shall be clearly marked on the transformer.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.

C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1

SECTION 26 24 16 - ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A

B

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to the work of this Section.

This Section is a Division 26 "Basic Materials and Methods" section and is a part of each Division 26 section making reference to panelboards specified herein.


A Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes is indicated on the drawings and by schedules.

B Types of panelboards and enclosures in this Section include the following:

1. Distribution Panels2. Lighting and Appliance Panels

C Refer to other Division 26 sections for cable/wire, connectors and electric raceway work required in conjunction with panelboards and enclosures; not work of this Section.


A Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of panelboards and enclosures, of types, size and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.

B Installer: A firm of at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for this project.

1.4 REFERENCES

A Special Use Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special use, with UL markings indicating that special type usage. Panels identified or shown on the drawings for use as main service entrance equipment shall be labeled at the factory with "SERVICE ENTRANCE" type UL label.

B UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL safety standards pertaining to panelboards, accessories, and enclosures. Provide units which have been UL listed and labeled. UL standards are as follows:

1. Panelboards - UL672. Cabinets and Boxes - UL50

C NEC Compliance: Comply with the NEC as applicable to the installation of panelboards, cabinets, and cutout boxes.



D NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds. Pub. No. 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volt maximum)", Pub. No. 1 "Panelboards" and Pub. No. PB1.1, "Instruction for Safe Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rates 600 Volts and Less".

E NECA Compliance: Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation".

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A Specification Review: Provide a complete item by item, line by line specification review indicating compliance with the specifications and note any deviations from the specification with reason for deviation.

B Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each panelboard required. Include data substantiating that units comply with specified requirements.

C Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing accurately scaled layouts of enclosures and required individual panelboard devices, including but not limited to circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground fault circuit interrupters, and accessories.

1.6 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATINGS

A. General: All switchboards and panelboards shall be standard rated and marked with a maximum short circuit current rating unless otherwise noted. The equipment manufacturer shall have verified this rating with high-amperage testing. All short circuit current ratings are expressed as amperes RMS symmetrical at the applied voltage unless otherwise noted. All equipment shall withstand the specified level of fault current. All overcurrent devices shall interrupt the specified level of fault current.

B. Series Ratings: Series rated panels are not permitted without the approval of the Owner and

Engineer. Contractor shall provide coordination study and test results as part of the submittal for series rated panels. All series ratings shall be UL listed and derived from actual testing. A copy of the listing shall be included in the equipment submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products of one of the following:

a. Eaton - Cutler Hammer b. General Electric Corp. c. Square D Company d. Siemens

2.2 GENERAL

A Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, and which are designed and constructed in accordance with published product information. Provide solderless lugs, or connectors, in the correct number and size for conductors on



mains, on the load side of each branch, circuit, and on ground and neutral bars. Provide tin plated copper busses. Provide an insulated neutral bus (equal in size to the phase bussing) and a bonded equipment ground bus mounted at the opposite end of the structure from the mains and having numbered screw or lug terminals for connection of wires. Equip panels with the number of unit devices as required for a complete installation. Where more than one type of component meets the indicated requirements, selection is installer's option. Where types, sizes or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for applications indicated.

B Provide ground fault circuit interrupting type circuit breakers for all devices noted with a "GFI" subscript on the panelboard schedules for this project.

C Provide UL listed HACR type circuit breakers for all devices which serve heating, ventilating, or air conditioning equipment.

D Panelboards shall be provided with covers for surface or flush mounting as shown on the drawings, or as required for actual project conditions.

E Panelboards shall be constructed for top or bottom feeder service, as required by actual project conditions.

F All panels shall be marked with PPE level per NEC where fault current calculations have been done.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELS

A Lighting and appliance panelboards shall be Square D type NQOD, class 1630 (or equal) for 277/480 volt or 120/208 volt applications. All branch circuit breakers are to be quick-make, quick-break, trip indicating and common trip on all multi-pole breakers and shall be bolt-on type. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by breaker handle located between the "ON" and the "OFF" positions. Panelboards shall have distributed phase copper bussing throughout.

B Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard

C Panelboard Bus: Copper current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard;

D For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 173 percent rated, plated

copper, solid neutral.

E Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208-240/120 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards.

F Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits,

G Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit

breakers as indicated on Drawings. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

H Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 or Type 3R outdoors, Nema-4X stainless steel in kitchens.



I Cabinet Front: Safety dead front type with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

J Provide ground-fault circuit breaker for each heat trace branch circuit.

K Panelboards indicated to have thru-feed lugs shall be furnished with thru-feed lugs in all

sections of panelboard.

L Provide fully rated main circuit breaker type panelboards, where the short circuit rating of the complete panelboard assembly is determined by the lowest rated branch device. Provide panelboard interrupting ratings as noted on the drawings. The Contractor may, at his option, (if acceptable to the local Code Authority) provide main circuit breaker type panelboards where the short circuit rating of the complete panelboard is determined by the use of UL approved combinations of main and branch circuit breaker devices, and the rating of the complete panelboard assembly is as shown on the drawings.

M Provide fully rated main lug only type panelboards where the short circuit rating of the

complete panelboard assembly is determined by the lowest rated branch device. Provide panelboard interrupting ratings as noted on the drawings. The Contractor may, at his option, (if acceptable to the local Code Authority) provide main lug only type panelboards where the short circuit rating of the complete panelboard assembly is determined by the use of UL approved combinations of upstream devices and branch circuit breaker devices, and the rating of the complete panelboard assembly is as shown on the drawings.

N Panelboard boxes shall have 6-inch minimum gutters. Fronts are to be complete with door

and cylinder lock, with all locks keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable trim clamps, directory frames, and shall be equipped with a typewritten directory that identifies each circuit breaker by number and the equipment that the breaker serves. One additional blank directory card for each panel shall be furnished to the Owner.

O Panelboards shall be Underwriters' Laboratory listed and shall bear the UL label. The size of

the panelboard main disconnect device or main lugs, the rating and number of branch circuits, and the type of mounting shall be as shown on the drawings.

P All factory installed devices shall be re-torqued prior to energizing.

2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELS

Distribution panels shall be Square D I-Line Series (or equal) panels as indicated on the plans. Provide appropriate type of panels to meet specific project requirements. Panelboards shall have distributed phase copper bussing throughout.

A Product Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type panelboard.

B Panelboard Bus: copper current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings.

Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard.

C Continuous current rating shall be sufficient to protect wiring and equipment served.

1. Panels 400A and smaller, 35,000 amperes rms symmetrical. 2. Panels greater than 400A: 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical.



D Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. Breakers shall be 100% fully rated.

E Main Circuit Breaker:

1. When distribution panel has main circuit breaker, provide molded case circuit breaker with electronic trip unit. Current sensing to be true-rms. 100% fully rated.

2. Main breaker shall have minimum interrupting rating of 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical at applied voltage.

3. Electronic trip shall be Square D micrologic with adjustable long-time, short-time and instantaneous pick-up set points.

F Cabinet Front: Safety dead front type. Conform to NEMA 1; NEMA 3R if located outdoors.

G Circuit breakers shall be as specified for lighting panels unless indicated otherwise. Power panels shall have combination card holder and name-plate and shall be equipped with typewritten directories that identify all loads served and all spare circuits. Provide a copper ground bus in all power panel.

H Power panels shall be Underwriters' Laboratory approved and shall bear the UL label. Main

lugs and gutters shall be suitable for copper and aluminum wire. The size of the panelboard main protective device or main lugs, the size, type and the number of branch circuits and the type of mounting shall be as shown on the drawings.

1. Provide fully rated main circuit breaker type panelboards, where the short circuit rating of the complete panelboard assembly is determined by the lowest rated branch device. Provide panelboard interrupting ratings as noted on the drawings. The Contractor may, at his option, (if acceptable to the local Code Authority) provide main circuit breaker type panelboards where the short circuit rating of the complete panelboard is determined by the use of UL approved combinations of main and branch circuit breaker devices, and the rating of the complete panelboard assembly is as shown on the drawings.

2. Provide fully rated main lug only type panelboards where the short circuit rating of the complete panelboard assembly is determined by the lowest rated branch device. Provide panelboard interrupting ratings as noted on the drawings. The Contractor may, at his option, (if acceptable to the local Code Authority) provide main lug only type panelboards where the short circuit rating of the complete panelboard assembly is determined by the use of UL approved combinations of upstream devices and branch circuit breaker devices, and the rating of the complete panelboard assembly is as shown on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A General: Install panelboards and enclosures where indicated, in accordance with the manufacturers' written instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B Coordinate the installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work.



C Provide all required electrical connections within the enclosure.

D Fill out typewritten panelboard circuit directory cards upon completion of the installation work.



WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; device plates and box covers. All devices shall be installed in outlet boxes of required size and volume.


A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems which are intended to carry, but not utilize electrical energy.

C. Types of electrical wiring devices in this Section include the following:

1. Receptacles 2. Occupancy Sensors 3. Switches 4. Wall Plates


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B. Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for this project.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices.

B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide electrical wiring devices which have been UL listed and labeled.

C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general and specific purpose wiring devices. Standards WD-1 and WD-6.

D. NECA Compliance: Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation."

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit manufactures product data for all wiring devices intended to be used on project, indicate intended color and cover plate. Final color selections to be made by Architect.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All devices shall be suitable for use intended and have voltage and current ratings adequate for loads being served.

2.2 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

A. Pass and Seymour Corporation

B. Cooper

C. Hubbell, Inc.

D. Leviton, Inc.

E. Crouse Hinds

F. Wiremold

G. Lutron

2.3 WALL SWITCHES

A. Single Pole Switch, Toggle Style: 1. Leviton 1221 Series, 20A, 120/277V.

B. Double Pole Switch, Toggle Style: 1. Leviton 1222 or 3032 Series, 20A or 30A, 120/277V.

C. Three-way Switch, Toggle Style: 1. Leviton 1223 Series, 20A, 120/277V.

D. Four-way Switch, Toggle Style: 1. Leviton 1224 Series, 20A, 120/277V.

E. Indicator Switch, Toggle Style: 1. Leviton 1201 Series, 20A, 120/277V. Switch illuminated when load is on.

F. Locator Switch, Toggle Style: 1. Leviton 1221 Series, 20A, 120/277V. Switch illuminated when load is off.

G. Digital Time Switch: 1. Wattstopper TS-400 digital time switch with optional visual warning to flash lights

at 5 minutes and 1 minute prior to time-out.

H. Key lock switches: 1. Provide key lock switches for corridor lighting and other locations indicated on

electrical drawings. 2. 20 Amp rated. 3. 120/277 Volt ac rated. 4. Key-lock mechanism can only be turned ON or OFF with key. 5. Single pole: Leviton 1221-2KL or approved equal.



6. 3-Way: Leviton 1223-2kl or approved equal. 7. 4-Way: Leviton 1224-2kl or approved equal. 8. Provide 302 stainless steel wall plate for each switch. 9. Provide 2 keys on ring for each switch. 10. Include a brass tag on every key switch ring. Engrave tag; Example: “Hall East

Lights”. 11. Key all switches alike to match the owners standard key. Coordinate with School

District for key match.

I. Color: As selected by Architect.

2.4 OVERRIDE SWITCH

A. The manual override switch shall override the time switch or time clock controlling the interior lighting to allow not more than 2 hours of afterhours use in accordance with latest IECC requirements.

B. Override switch shall be located at a common entry point. See lighting drawings for location(s).

2.5 MOTOR RATED SWITCHES

A. Provide where a switch is indicated as a local disconnect for all mechanical and plumbing equipment.

B. Leviton MS Series.

2.6 WALL DIMMERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Lutron Vareo Series.

B. Product Description: Tap ON-OFF switch with side slide dimmer switch. Coordinate switch with lighting load interface requirements per manufacturer recommendations.

C. Body and Handle: Linear slide handle, color as selected by Architect.

D. Voltage: 120/277 volts rated.

2.7 RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: 1. Leviton 5362 Series, 20A/125V.

B. GFCI Receptacle: 1. Leviton 7899 Series, 20A/125V. 2. Provide GFCI receptacles for all receptacles on 120v circuits installed in

kitchens, restrooms and outdoors (including rooftops).

C. TAMPER-RESISTANT GFCI RECEPTACLE; 1. Tamper-Resistant duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault

current interrupter meeting the requirements of UL standard 943 Class A. Receptacles shall be as follows:

Hubbell GFR5362*TR Leviton X7899-*



Pass & Seymour 2095TR*, or approved equal. (* indicates color selection).

D. All devices shall be rated for a minimum of 20A unless otherwise noted. Provide 20 amp receptacles for single-receptacle branch circuits.

E. For locations where a quadruplex or fourplex is required, provide 2-duplex receptacles under common cover plate.

F. Color: 1. For general purpose receptacles color shall be as selected by Architect. 2. For receptacles on emergency power and/or life safety power color shall be RED. 3. For isolated ground receptacles color shall be ORANGE with GREEN triangle. 4. For receptacles on UPS power color shall be BLACK or color as determined by

Owner.

2.8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements: 1. All occupancy sensors shall be line voltage hardwired type; battery type shall not

be permitted. Low voltage sensors with power packs shall be allowed in area with an accessible and where indicated on the drawings.

2. Sensors shall use dual technology, passive infrared and passive acoustic sensing or passive infrared and ultrasonic sensing for detecting room occupancy.

3. Sensitivity shall be user adjustable or self-adjusting type. 4. The delay timer shall be adjusted within a range of 6 to 30 minutes by the

contractor in the field. The sensor shall have a test mode for performance testing. 5. The test LED shall indicate motion. 6. Line voltage sensors are acceptable, especially in exposed ceiling areas where

all wiring shall be installed in conduit, including low voltage cabling if power packs are used. Provide power pack as required for low voltage sensors.

7. See drawings for actual types of sensors. 8. Occupancy sensors and power packs shall have five year warranties.

B Wall Mounted (Wall Switch Type):

1. The unit shall fit in/on a standard single gang switch box. 2. Rated capacity: 600 watts minimum at 120 volts, 60 Hz; 1000 watts minimum at

277 volts, 60 Hz. 3. The sensor shall have two switches where dual-level lighting is required. The

switch shall have manual override for positive OFF and automatic ON. 4. The area of coverage shall be approximately 180 degrees by 35-40 feet.

C Ceiling Mounted:

1. The unit shall fit in/on a standard octagon box. All ceiling mounted sensors shall be installed to a box with ring and box support.

2. The coverage area shall be 360 degrees by approximately 15 feet radius when mounted at 9 foot height. The sensor shall have provisions, such as masking, to block out problem areas.

2.9 WALL PLATES

A. Type 302 Stainless Steel with matching mounting screws.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect abandoned circuits and remove raceway, wire, and cable. Remove abandoned boxes when connecting wire and cable is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for remaining abandoned boxes.

B. Maintain access to existing boxes and wiring connections remaining active and requiring access.

C. Extend existing circuits using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring devices as indicated in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work including painting, electrical boxes and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices and other work.

C. Testing: Test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity of connections. Test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

D. All outlets shall be located as shown on the drawings, except that where practicable; outlets shall be located in center of panels or trim or otherwise symmetrically located to conform with the structural layout. Outlets incorrectly installed shall be corrected. Damaged items or damaged finishes shall be repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.

E. Outlets shall be set plumb or horizontal and shall extend to the finished surface of the walls, ceiling or floor, as the case may be, without projecting beyond the same.

F. Outlets shall be installed with ground at top and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. Receptacles, switches, etc., shown on wood trim, cases or other fixtures shall be installed symmetrically; and, where necessary, shall be set with the long dimensions of the plate horizontal, or ganged in tandem.

H. Where dimmer switches are shown adjacent to standard switches, both shall be installed in separate back boxes with adequate space between so that neither cover plate requires cutting.

I. Where devices are shown near wall openings, coordinate location if corner guards are to be installed so that cover plates do not require cutting.

J. Where devices are shown mounted adjacent to one another on the drawings, provide multi-gang faceplates to cover all devices.

K. Route raceway and cable to meet Project conditions.

L. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.



M. Adjust box location up to ten (10) feet prior to rough-in when required to accommodate intended purpose.

N. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install boxes with minimum 24

inches separation.

O. Wet Locations: Wiring devices and their enclosures installed outdoors and in wet locations shall be approved for that purpose. Install “in-use” non-attended hinged cover for all receptacles installed outdoors.

P. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch.

Q. Occupancy Sensor Power packs used in return air plenum ceiling areas shall be UL listed for return air plenum.

R. Provide a minimum of 12’ of coiled cable for ceiling-mounted low voltage sensors with power packs.

S. Occupancy sensors shall be installed at locations indicated on the manufacturer’s submittal layout drawings. Sensors shall be located to prevent false “ON” tripping of the lights.

T. Occupancy Sensor Sensitivity Test: After the sensor has been energized for at least 15 minutes, walk to the middle of the room (if conference room) or sit at the normal desk position (if an office). Make no motion for 20 seconds. Move one arm up and down slowly. The test LED should blink.

U. Occupancy Sensor Time Delay Test: Set the time delay for 15 minutes. Walk into the room to activate the sensor then leave room. Sensor must turn lights off at approximately 15 minutes. Walk into the room again to reactivate the lights. Lights should activate within 1 second.

3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. As indicated on Drawings or if not indicated in accordance with the Architects instructions. All other telephone, Data, TV, etc. outlets shall be same as receptacle.

3.4 GANGED SWITCHES

A. Install permanent barrier between all 277 Volt light switches ganged into one outlet box.

B. Where multiple switches are grouped on one location, install switches under a one piece, multi-gang cover plate.

C. Other telephone, data, TV, etc. outlets shall be same as receptacle.

3.5 GFCI

A. Provide ground-fault circuit-interrupter type receptacles for all 15 and 20 amp receptacles shown on drawings in restrooms, kitchens and outdoors.

B. All receptacles installed and within 6 feet of the outside edge of sinks shall be GFCI type.



C. All receptacles installed in outdoor locations, garages, rooftops, and in other damp or wet locations shall be GFCI type with a weather-resistant (WR) rating.

D. All outdoor receptacles shall be provided with a non-attended “in-use” cover. Cover shall ensure that device and plug are not exposed to the weather conditions when in use.



SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) FOR LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 00 - 1

SECTION 26 43 00 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) FOR LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Section 26 43 00 – Surge Protective Devices, individually mounted and

switchboard mounted. Switchboards: Surge Protective Device integrated in switchboards.

1.2 REFERENCES A. IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)

AC Power Circuits,

B. IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits,

C. IEEE C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.

D. National Electrical Code: Article 285

E. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters

F. UL 1449, Fourth Edition, effective August 20, 2014 – Surge Protective Devices

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit capacity, dimensions, weights, details, and wiring configuration.

C. Submittals shall include UL 1449 4th Edition Listing documentation verifiable by visiting www.UL.com, clicking “Certifications” link, searching using UL Category Code: VZCA and VZCA2:

1. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) 2. Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) for all modes 3. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV) 4. I-nominal rating (I-n) 5. SPD shall be UL listed and labeled as Type 1 intended for Type 1 or Type 2

applications.

D. Upon request, an unencapsulated but complete SPD formally known as TVSS shall be presented for visual inspection.

E. Minimum of ten (10) year warranty Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and connection requirements.


A. List individual units under UL 1449 (Fourth Edition) and UL 1283 for type 2 locations.



B. Single manufacturer: All equipment of each type shall be the product of one manufacturer.

C. SPD shall comply with NEC Article 285 and shall be permanently marked with the short-circuit current rating of the device.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm with at least 15 years of experience in manufacturing of surge protective devices.

E. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.

F. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.

G. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC.


A. Accept equipment on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect equipment from damage by providing temporary covers until construction is complete in adjacent space.

C. Handle and store equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation and Maintenance Manuals. One (1) copy of this document to be provided with the equipment at time of shipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs)

A. Manufacturers: 1. ACT Communications (Basis of design) 2. Emerson Network Power 3. ASCO Power Technologies (APT) 4. Siemens 5. Square D 6. GE

B. Product Description: Surge protective devices for protection of AC electrical circuits.

C. Unit Operating Voltage: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Construction: 1. Finish: Factory finish of baked enamel. 2. Balanced Suppression Platform: Equally distribute surge current to Metal Oxide

Varistor (MOV) components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. Furnish surge suppression platform with equal impedance paths to each matched MOV.

3. Internal Connections: Hardwired with connections using low impedance conductors and compression fittings.



4. Safety and Diagnostic Monitoring: Equipped with standard overcurrent protection:a. Continuous monitoring of fusing system.b. Monitor individual MOV’s (including neutral to ground). Capable of

identifying open circuit failures not monitored by conventional fusingsystems.

c. Monitor for overheating in each mode due to thermal runaway.d. Furnish green and red solid state indicator light on each phase. Absence

of green light and presence of red light indicates which phases havebeen damaged. Fault detection activates flashing trouble light. Units notcapable of detecting open circuit damage, thermal conditions, and overcurrent will not be accepted.

5. Labeling: Permanently affix UL 1449 (Fourth Edition) suppression voltage ratingsand CSA to unit.

E. Types:1. Distribution panelboards, Lighting and Appliance Panelboards; locate as stand-

alone external. Component in housing adjacent to protected panelboard.

F. Protection Modes: For Wye configured system, furnish device with directly connectedsuppression elements between line-neutral (L-N), line-ground (L-G), and neutral-ground(N-G). For Delta configured system, furnish device with suppression elements betweenline to line (L-L) and line to ground (L-G).

G. Distribution, Lighting and Appliance Panelboards:1. Listing requirements: SPD shall bear the UL Mark and shall be Listed to most

recent editions of UL 1449 and UL 1283. “Manufactured in accordance with” isnot equivalent to UL listing and does not meet the intent of this specification.

2. Listing requirements: SPD and performance parameters shall be posted atwww.UL.com under Category Code: VZCA. Products or parameters withoutposting at UL.com shall not be approved. (To access UL Category Code click onCertifications in the left menu bar of UL’s home page. Type “VZCA” into theCategory Code search box and click Search.)

3. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled with 200kA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR).Fuse ratings shall not be considered in lieu of demonstrated withstand testing ofSPD, per NEC 285.6.

4. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 1 intended for use without need forexternal or supplemental overcurrent controls. Every suppression component ofevery mode, including N-G, shall be protected by internal overcurrent andthermal overtemperature controls. SPDs relying upon external or supplementaryinstalled safety disconnectors do not meet the intent of this specification.

5. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n) (verifiable at UL.com) forcompliance to UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780.

6. Standard 7 Mode Protection paths: SPD shall provide surge current paths for allmodes of protection: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G for Wye systems; L-L, L-G in Deltaand impedance grounded Wye systems

7. A dedicated breaker shall serve as a means of disconnect for distribution SPD’s.8. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:9. Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be:

a. Distribution applications:Minimum surge current capability of 150kA per phase 65KA per mode.

10. UL 1449 Listed Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) shall not exceed the following:VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G208Y/120V 800V 800V 800V 480Y/277V 1200V 1200V 1200V



UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) (verifiable at UL.com): Shall be at least 115% of nominal system voltage.

11. SPD shall include a serviceable, replaceable module (excluding Distribution). (Deletable note: Delete or adjust as appropriate.)

12. Service Entrance SPD shall have UL 1283 EMI/RFI filtering with minimum attenuation of -50dB at 100kHz.

13. SPD shall have a 20 year warranty. The manufacturer shall provide a full twenty (20) warranty from date of shipment against any part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions, field tested by certified manufacturers representative, UL Listing requirements and any applicable national, state or local electrical codes. Direct factory trained, ISO 9001:2000 certified employees must be available for 48-hour assessment. A 24-hour 800 number must be available to support warranty.

14. SPDs shall be equipped with the following diagnostics: a. Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator

per phase, and one red service LED. b. Audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function

(excluding branch). c. Form C dry contacts one normally open (NO) and one normally closed

(NC) for remote status monitoring. d. Dual Surge Counter, one resettable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify mounting area is ready for equipment.

B. Verify circuit rough-ins are at correct location.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. SYSTEM TESTING 1. Upon completion of installation, provide the start-up and testing services of a

factory-authorized and factory-trained local, technical service representative. The tests shall include:

2. Off-line Testing: Impulse injection to verify the system tolerances as well as verification of proper facility neutral-to-ground bond. Compare field test results to factory benchmark test parameters supplied with each individual unit.

3. On-line Testing: Verify that suppression and filtering paths are operating with 100% protection as well as verification of proper facility neutral-to-ground bond by measuring neutral-to-ground current and voltage and by visual inspection.

4. Voltage measurements from Line-to-Ground (L-G), Line-to-Neutral (L-N), Line-to-Line (L-L), and Neutral-to-Ground (N-G), taken at the time of the testing procedure.

B. DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING 1. Record results of field testing and compare to factory benchmark test parameters

supplied with each individual surge protective device. Indicate that the integrity of neutral-to-ground bonds were verified through testing and visual inspection, and that grounding bonds were observed to be in place.

2. Submit to the Owner’s representative and to the Architect/Engineer copies of the startup test results and the factory benchmark testing results for confirmation of proper suppression filter system function, as required by this section. Provide



the number of copies as required by Division One and the Electrical General Provisions section; and three copies where not otherwise specified.

C. The installing contractor shall install the parallel SPD with short and straight conductors as practically possible. The contractor shall twist the SPD input conductors together to reduce input conductor inductance. The contractor shall follow the SPD manufacturer’s recommended installation practices as found in the installation, operation and maintenance manual and comply with all applicable codes. When the SPD is installed external, lead lengths shall not exceed 24 inches.

D. Install in accordance with IEEE 1100.

E. Follow manufacturer suggested breaker size for SPD installations.

F. Install suppressors for panelboards adjacent to panel.

G. Install surge counter in face of switchboard when SPD is integral.

H. Include surge counter for stand-alone SPD.

I. Install with maximum conductor length of 24 inches. Install suppressor with internal fusing.

J. Provide 40 amp, 3 pole circuit breaker in panelboards to feed SPD.

END OF SCTION 26 43 00


INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 50 00 - 1

SECTION 26 50 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories. Provide all luminaries complete with all new lamps, completely wired, controlled, and securely attached to supports.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1. RoHS - Restriction of Hazardous Substances. Council of the European Union

(EC) Directive 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

2. LM-79-08 (or latest) - IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products.

3. LM-80-08 (or latest) - IES Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.

4. TM-21-11 (or latest) - IES Technical Memorandum on Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.

5. NEMA SSL 1-2010 (or latest) - Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS 1. Driver - the power supply used to power LED luminaires, modules, or arrays. 2. L70, L70, or L70% - The reported life of an LED component or system to reach 70%

lumen maintenance, or 70% of the LED’s original light output. This test is being developed by the IES and is currently described by TM-21-11.

3. LED’s - Broadly defined as complete luminaire with light emitting diode (LED) packages, modules, light bars or arrays, complete with driver.

4. LED luminaire failure - Negligible light output from more than 10 percent of the LED’s constitutes luminaire failure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

C. Photometric data for each luminaire, lamp and ballast. Include indications of all options and accessories as well as finish color.

D. In addition to above for LED fixtures submit the following: • Delivered lumens • Input watts • Efficacy • Color rendering index.

E. Specification Review: Provide a complete item by item, line by line specification review indicating compliance with the specifications and note any deviations from the specification with reason for deviation.


INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 50 00 - 2


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide luminaires listed by U.L. 2. Luminaires installed in outdoor areas unprotected from weather to be U.L. Listed

for wet locations. 3. Insulated ceilings: Luminaires installed into insulated ceilings shall be U.L. Listed

Type IC.

B. Certification: Certify that fixtures submittal have trim compatible with ceilings being installed.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide extra materials for Owners use. All parts shall be packaged in suitable carton.

B. Provide ten (10) percent spare lamps of each lamp type. Deliver to Owner in original packaging.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Product Description: Complete luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as scheduled.

B. All luminares shall be new and of specification grade.

C. Manufacturer nomenclature in fixture schedule or otherwise described on the Drawings is given only to show the general fixture series. Contractor shall provide fixture with all required accessories and mounting frame type.

D. Provide wire guard at fixtures in mechanical, electrical, and high abuse areas.

2.2 LED LUMINIARES

A. LED Luminaires shall meet all DesignLights Consortium® (DesignLights.org) Product Qualification Criteria. This does not require that the luminaire be listed on the DesignLights Consortium’s® Qualified Products List, but they must meet the Product Qualification Criteria. The technical requirements that the luminaire shall meet for each Application Category are:

• Minimum Light Output.

• Zonal Lumen Requirements.

• Minimum Luminaire Efficacy.

• Minimum CRI.

• L70 Lumen Maintenance.

• Minimum Luminaire Warranty of 5 years (not pro-rated) to include LED driver and all LED components.


INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 50 00 - 3

Additional requirements:

B. Color Temperature of 3000K-4100K for interior luminaires as listed in the Luminaire Schedule on the plans. The color temperature of exterior LED luminaires should not exceed 4100K (nominal).

C. Color Consistency: LED manufacturer shall use a maximum 3-step MacAdam Ellipse binning process to achieve consistent luminaire-to-luminaire color for interior luminaires. Exterior luminaires shall use a maximum 4-step MacAdam Ellipse binning process.

D. Glare Control: Exterior luminaires shall meet DesignLights Consortium’s® criteria for Zonal Lumen Distribution requirements or Backlight-Uplight-Glare (BUG) standards for exterior luminaires.

E. Luminaire shall be mercury-free, lead-free, and RoHS compliant.

F. Luminaire shall comply with FCC 47 CFR part 15 non-consumer RFI/EMI standards.

G. Light output of the LED system shall be measured using the absolute photometry method following IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 requirements and guidelines.

H. Luminaire shall maintain 70% lumen output (L70) for a minimum of 50,000 hours.

I. Driver shall have a rated life of 50,000 hours, minimum.

J. Lumen output shall not depreciate more than 20% after 10,000 hours of use.

K. Driver and LEDs shall be furnished from a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility.

L. Luminaire Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be a minimum of 80 for interior luminaires, and a minimum of 70 for exterior luminaires.

M. LED luminaire shall be thermally designed as to not exceed the maximum junction temperature of the LED for the ambient temperature of the location the luminaire is to be installed. Rated case temperature shall be suitable for operation in the ambient temperatures typically found for the intended installation. Exterior luminaires to operate in ambient temperatures of -20°F to 122°F (-29°C to 50°C).

N. LED driver shall have a minimum power factor (pf) of 0.9 and a maximum crest factor (cf) of 1.5 at full input power and across specified voltage range.

O. Luminaire shall operate normally for input voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10 percent.

P. Luminaire shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 20% at full input power and across specified voltage range.

Q. Wiring connections to LED drivers shall utilize polarized quick-disconnects for field maintenance.

R. All connections to luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation process.

S. Fuse Protections: All luminaires shall have built-in fuse protection. All power supply outputs shall be either fuse protected or be Polymeric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC)-protected as per Class 2 UL listing.

T. All luminaires shall be provided with knockouts for conduit connections.

U. The LED luminaire shall carry a limited 5-year warranty minimum for LED light engine(s)/board array, and driver(s).


INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 50 00 - 4

2.3 LED LUMINAIRES USED FOR EMERGENCY EGRESS LIGHTING:

A. The failure of one LED shall not affect the operation of the remaining LEDs.

2.4 EMERGENCY LED LUMINAIRE COMPATIBILITY WITH INVERTERS:

A. Emergency Inverters shall be sine-wave type or have written confirmation from the luminaire manufacturer that the luminaire will function with a square-wave inverter.

2.5 LED LUMINIARE DRIVERS:

A. LED dimming shall be equal in range and quality to a commercial grade incandescent dimmer. Quality of dimming to be defined by dimming range, freedom from perceived flicker or visible stroboscopic flicker, smooth and continuous change in level (no visible steps in transitions), natural square law response to control input, and stable when input voltage conditions fluctuate over what is typically experience in a commercial environment. Demonstration of this compliance to dimming performance will be necessary for substitutions or prior approval.

B. Ten-year expected life while operating at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

C. Driver must limit inrush current. 1. Base specification: Meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard of 430

Amps per 10 Amps load with a maximum of 370 Amps2 – seconds.

2. Preferred Specification: Meet or exceed 30mA2s at 277VAC for up to 50 watts of load and 75A at 240us at 277VAC for 100 watts of load.

D. Withstand up to a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A.

E. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10 percent line voltage input.

F. Total Harmonic Distortion less than 20% percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements at full output. THD shall at no point in the dimming curve allow imbalance current to exceed full output THD.

G. Driver must support automatic adaptation, allowing for future luminaire upgrades and enhancements and deliver improved performance:

1. Adjustment of forward LED voltage, supporting 3V through 55V.

2. Adjustment of LED current from 200mA to 1.05A at the 100 percent control input point in increments of 1mA

3. Adjustment for operating hours to maintain constant lumens (within 5 percent)

over the 50,000 hour design life of the system and deliver up to 20 percent energy savings early in the life cycle.

H. Driver must be able to operate for a (+/- 10%) supply voltage of 120V through 277VAC at 60Hz.


INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 50 00 - 5

I. Driver should be UL Recognized under the component program and shall be modular for simple field replacement. Drivers that are not UL Recognized or not suited for field replacement will not be considered.

J. Driver shall include ability to provide no light output when the analog control signal drops below 0.5 V, or the DALI/DMX digital signal calls for light to be extinguished and shall consume 0.5 watts or less in this standby. Control dead band between 0.5V and 0.65V shall be included to allow for voltage variation of incoming signal without causing noticeable variation in fixture to fixture output.

2.6 LIGHT QUALITY

A. Over the entire range of available drive currents, driver shall provide step-free, continuous dimming to black from 100 percent to 0.1 percent and 0% relative light output, or 100 – 1% light output and step to 0% where indicated. Driver shall respond similarly when raising from 0% to 100%

1. Driver must be capable of 20 bit dimming resolution for white light LED drivers or 15 bit resolution for RGBW LED drivers.

B. Driver must be capable of configuring a linear or logarithmic dimming curve, allowing fine grained resolution at low light levels

C. Drivers to track evenly across multiple fixtures at all light levels and shall have an input signal to output light level that allows smooth adjustment over the entire dimming range.

D. Driver and luminaire electronics shall deliver illumination that is free from objectionable flicker as measured by flicker index (ANSI/IES RP-16-10). At all points within the dimming range from 100-0.1 percent luminaire shall have:

1. LED dimming driver shall provide continuous step-free, flicker free dimming similar to incandescent source.

2. Base specification: Flicker index shall less that 5% at all frequencies below 1000 Hz.

3. Preferred specification: Flicker index shall be equal to incandescent, less that 1% at all frequencies below 1000 Hz.

2.7 CONTROL INPUT

A. 4-Wire (0-10V DC Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers 1. Must meet IEC 60929 Annex E for General White Lighting LED drivers 2. Connect to devices compatible with 0 to 10V Analog Control Protocol, Class 2,

capable of sinking 0.6 ma per driver at a low end of 0.3V. Limit the number of drivers on each 0-10V control output based on voltage drop and control capacity.

3. Must meet ESTA E1.3 for RGBW LED drivers

B. Digital (DALI Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers 1. Must meet IEC 62386

C. Digital Multiplex (DMX Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers 1. Must meet DMX / RDM: USITT DMX512A and ANSI E1.20 (Explore & Address) 2. Capable of signal interpolation and smoothing of color and intensity transitions

2.8 INSTALLATION

A. To be installed per manufacturers prescribed methods.


INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 50 00 - 6

B. Driver may be remote mounted up to 300 ft. (100 m) depending on power level and wire gauge.

2.9 EMERGENCY BATTERY PACKS

A. Provide Emergi-Lite FPSIU series, or approved equal, battery pack for fluorescent fixtures designated to have emergency battery back-up.

B. Fixture shall include lighted push button test switch installed in visible, accessible location adjacent to fixture.

C. Provide unswitched alternating current power source per manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Provide connection to local switch where indicated on drawings, connect such that fixture can be controlled on/off from local switch without discharge of battery.

E. For fixtures designated to have emergency battery pack and be on a contactor controlled circuit, provide unswitched alternating current source ahead of contactor and wiring as required to allow automatic on/off control from the contactor without discharge of battery and local on/off switching where indicated.

F. Battery pack shall provide min. 1400 lumen output for 90 minutes per 2’x4’ light fixture.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

1. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps, poles and accessories. 2. Extend existing luminaire installation using materials and methods compatible with

existing installation, or as specified. 3. Clean, repair and re-lamp all existing luminaires to remain or to be reinstalled.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other work.

C. Adjust and Clean: Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of the installation. Protect installed fixtures from damage during the remainder of the construction period.

D. Field Quality Control: Upon completion of the installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuits have been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with the requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

E. General: All luminaires shall have proper supports.


INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 50 00 - 7

F. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers.

G. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on Drawings.

H. Install surface mounted ceiling luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.

I. Chain Hung: Unless otherwise indicated all fluorescent fixtures in Mechanical, Electrical and Elevator Equipment Rooms shall be chain hung. See drawings for mounting heights. Verify exact mounting height with Architect before installing fixtures. Provide pendant hangers when equipment room has fire-resistive ceiling.

J. Suspended Ceilings:

1. All lighting fixtures installed in grid type suspended ceiling systems, shall be

positively attached to the ceiling system with clips that are UL listed for the application. In addition, a minimum of four (4) ceiling support system rods or wires shall be provided for each light fixture and shall be installed not more than six (6) inches from fixture corners. Provide two (2) No. 12 gage hangers from each fixture housing at opposite corners to the building structure above (wires may be installed slack). Light fixtures shall be supported directly from the structure above by UL listed and approved hangers. Light fixtures that are smaller than the ceiling grid shall be installed at locations indicated on the reflected ceiling plans, or shall be installed in the center of the ceiling panel and shall be supported independently by at least two metal channels that span and are secured to the ceiling system and supported from the building structure.

2. Suspended lighting fixtures shall be supported directly from the building structure without using suspended ceilings as support systems. Support systems shall be UL listed and approved for the specific installation. Where pendants or rods exceed 48 inches in length, brace support systems to limit swinging.

3. Where the lighting design indicates multi-level lighting where 3 lamps fixtures are

shown in a room, the outer 2 lamps will be switched from one switch and the center lamp will be switched from the other switch. Where 4 lamp fixtures are shown in a room, the outer 2 lamps will be switched from one switch and the center 2 lamps will be switched from the other switch. A similar multi-level lighting arrangement will be provided where 4-3 way switches are shown. Two ballasts must be used when dual level switching is shown.

4. Ceiling tiles shall not bear the weight of luminaires. Surface mount luminaires,

recessed downlights, light track, exit signs, etc. shall be supported by proper frames or other attachment to building structure above ceiling.

5. Luminaires shall be centered in ceiling tile.

6. Luminaire shall have flange or trim ring for closure of ceiling cutout or opening.

7. Fire-rated Ceiling Assembly: For Luminaires to be flush-mounted into a fire-rated

ceiling or surface mounted to a fire-rated ceiling, install with independent, secure support. Raceway, cable assemblies, boxes and fittings located above a fire-rated floor/ceiling or roof ceiling assembly shall not be secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly including the ceiling support wires. Provide an independent means of secure support. Independent support wires shall be


INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 50 00 - 8

distinguishable by color, tagging, or other effective means from those that are part of the fire-rated design.

K. Verify weights and recommended mounting methods of all luminaires with manufacturers. Furnish and install supports. All luminaires shall be supported independently of the outlet box.

3.3 LOCATIONS

A. Luminaires shown on the Electrical Drawings represent general arrangements only. Refer to Architectural Drawings and to Architect on jobsite for more exact locations. Coordinate location with all other trades before installation. Coordinate all light fixtures in Mechanical Rooms with the final installed piping and ductwork layouts. Adjust fixture mounting height and location if required so that light output is not obstructed by piping and ductwork.

3.4 FIRE INTEGRITY OF CEILING PENETRATIONS

A. Where ceiling is part of a fire-rated assembly, maintain integrity of that assembly with methods given in Section Electrical Hangers and Supports. Obtain ceiling system UL Fire Resistance Directory Design Number from Architectural Drawings.

3.5 AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT

A. General: All adjustable lighting units shall be aimed, focused, and locked by the Contractor under the supervision of the Architect/Owner. All aiming and adjusting shall be carried out after the entire installation is complete.

3.6 LAMPS

A. Clean all lamps after installation.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Lens: Clean lenses of all luminaires after space is finished and prior to project acceptance.

B. Louvers: Remove plastic bag from parabolic louver luminaires after space is finished and prior to project acceptance. Do not remove bags until luminaires have been cleared by the air-balance subcontractor.

3.8 RFI

A. Provide flexible braided metal electrical bonding strap from grounded housing to door frame of all fluorescent parabolic fixtures in designated rooms. Bonding strap shall be braided conductor designed for field installation to either long door side.



EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 1

SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.3. Poles and accessories.4. Luminaire lowering devices.5. Exterior luminaires with LED and driver.


1. Section 26 50 00 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exteriorsurfaces of buildings.

C. Basis of Design:

1. All exterior building mounted lighting and pole mounted site lighting shall be LED unlessotherwise noted on plans or in light fixture schedule.

2. All exterior pole mounted site lighting fixtures shall be mounted on 25’-0” tall poles foraccess by standard bucket truck.

3. All decorative pole mounted fixtures and decorative poles shall not exceed 15’-0” inheight.

4. Pole mounted site lighting to be installed within a parking lot, roadway or other area thatis subject to vehicle traffic shall be installed on a min. 36” high concrete base as designedby Structural Engineer.

5. Pole mounted site lighting to be installed in non-traffic area’s to be installed on a min.6”high concrete base as designed by Structural Engineer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. HID: High-intensity discharge.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 2

D. LED: Light emitting diode

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

G. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

H. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. Retain "Live Load" Paragraph below if Project includes pole-mounted walkways or service platforms.

B. Diesel Standard: 2000 (IBC) International Building Code. Section 1609 requires wind forces on structure to be determined by the provisions of ASCE 7.

C. Minimum Wind Speed: 100 miles per hour.

D. Metal poles shall comply with NEC 410-15(b).

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 3

10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved.

11. Anchor bolts for poles. 12. Manufactured pole foundations.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 3. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of

screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. 4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Samples: For products designated for sample submission in the Exterior Lighting Device Schedule. Each Sample shall include lamps and ballasts.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: two of each type and rating

installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Globes and Guards: two of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 4


A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches (300 mm) above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for pole mounted site LED Luminaires: [Ten] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for building mounted LED Luminaires: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Warranty Period for LED Driver: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

4. Warranty Period for HID Luminaires: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

5. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

6. Warranty Period for Color Retention: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

7. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than [three] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide product indicated on Drawings] [provide one of the products indicated on Drawings] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings].

2.2 LED LUMINAIRES

A. LED Luminaires shall meet all DesignLights Consortium® (DesignLights.org) Product Qualification Criteria. This does not require that the luminaire be listed on the DesignLights


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 5

Consortium’s® Qualified Products List, but they must meet the Product Qualification Criteria. The technical requirements that the luminaire shall meet for each Application Category are:

• Minimum Light Output.

• Zonal Lumen Requirements.

• Minimum Luminaire Efficacy.

• Minimum CRI.

• L70 Lumen Maintenance.

• Pole mounted fixtures Minimum Luminaire Warranty of 10 years (not pro-rated) to include all LED components. Warranty of 5 years on LED driver.

• Building mounted fixtures Minimum Luminaire Warranty of 5 years (not pro-rated) to include LED driver and all LED components.

Additional requirements:

B. Color Temperature of 3000K-4100K as listed in the Luminaire Schedule on the plans. The color temperature of exterior LED luminaires should not exceed 4100K (nominal).

C. Color Consistency: LED manufacturer shall use a maximum 3-step MacAdam Ellipse binning process to achieve consistent luminaire-to-luminaire color for interior luminaires. Exterior lumi-naires shall use a maximum 4-step MacAdam Ellipse binning process.

D. Glare Control: Exterior luminaires shall meet DesignLights Consortium’s® criteria for Zonal Lu-men Distribution requirements or Backlight-Uplight-Glare (BUG) standards for exterior luminaires.

E. Luminaire shall be mercury-free, lead-free, and RoHS compliant.

F. Luminaire shall comply with FCC 47 CFR part 15 non-consumer RFI/EMI standards.

G. Light output of the LED system shall be measured using the absolute photometry method follow-ing IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 requirements and guidelines.

H. Luminaire shall maintain 70% lumen output (L70) for a minimum of 50,000 hours.

I. Driver shall have a rated life of 50,000 hours, minimum.

J. Lumen output shall not depreciate more than 20% after 10,000 hours of use.

K. Driver and LEDs shall be furnished from a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility.

L. Luminaire Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be a minimum of 80 for interior luminaires, and a minimum of 70 for exterior luminaires.

M. LED luminaire shall be thermally designed as to not exceed the maximum junction temperature of the LED for the ambient temperature of the location the luminaire is to be installed. Rated case temperature shall be suitable for operation in the ambient temperatures typically found for the in-tended installation. Exterior luminaires to operate in ambient temperatures of -20°F to 122°F (-29°C to 50°C).

N. LED driver shall have a minimum power factor (pf) of 0.9 and a maximum crest factor (cf) of 1.5 at full input power and across specified voltage range.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 6

O. Luminaire shall operate normally for input voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10 percent.

P. Luminaire shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 20% at full input power and

across specified voltage range.

Q. Wiring connections to LED drivers shall utilize polarized quick-disconnects for field maintenance.

R. All connections to luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protec-tion in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation process.

S. Fuse Protections: All luminaires shall have built-in fuse protection. All power supply outputs shall be either fuse protected or be Polymeric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC)-protected as per Class 2 UL listing.

T. All luminaires shall be provided with knockouts for conduit connections.

U. The LED luminaire shall carry a limited 5-year warranty minimum for LED light engine(s)/board array, and driver(s).

Provide all of the following data on submittals:

• Delivered lumens

• Input watts

• Efficacy

• Color rendering index.

2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5

and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. 2. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 7

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors. b. Color: Match Architect's sample of [manufacturer's standard] [custom] color. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 8

colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color: Dark bronze or custom color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

O. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8,), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base

type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for

HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start or programmed start) for fluorescent

and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.4 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc (16 to 32 lx) and off at 4.5 to 10 fc (48 to 108 lx) with 15-second minimum time delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff.

1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10. 2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

2.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of [1.1] <Insert number> to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 9

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication unless otherwise indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches (65 by 130 mm), with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws.

E. Pole accessories to include handhole and cover, full matching anchor bolt cover, anchor bolt kit, template, washers and leveling nuts.

F. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

G. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.

H. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4-M.

I. Pole Delivery: Unwrap pole upon delivery to job site, unless otherwise instructed by pole manufacturer. Wrapped poles exposed to weather that show wrapper striping or other deterioration of finish shall be replaced at Contractor expense. Replacement shall be new pole or pole refinished at pole factory.

2.6 STEEL POLES

A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig (317 MPa); one-piece construction up to 40 feet (12 m) in height with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Pole Shape: Round, straight.

2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.

B. Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weathertight, 3-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm) handhole located at midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable support grip.

C. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

D. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.

E. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that of pole.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 10

F. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

G. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

H. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection.

3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.7 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Pole accessories to include handhole and cover, full matching anchor bolt cover, anchor bolt kit, template, washers and leveling nuts.

B. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 11

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches (1520 mm). 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet (3 m). 3. Trees: 15 feet (5 m) from tree trunk.

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space.

3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through

grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.

E. Embedded Poles with Tamped Earth Backfill: Set poles to depth below finished grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.

1. Dig holes large enough to permit use of tampers in the full depth of hole. 2. Backfill in 6-inch (150-mm) layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of

backfill is equal to or greater than that of undisturbed earth.

F. Embedded Poles with Concrete Backfill: Set poles in augered holes to depth below finished grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.

1. Make holes 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter larger than pole diameter. 2. Fill augered hole around pole with air-entrained concrete having a minimum compressive

strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) at 28 days, and finish in a dome above finished grade. 3. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through

concrete dome. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. 4. Cure concrete a minimum of 72 hours before performing work on pole.

G. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch (25 mm) below top of concrete slab.

H. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

I. Pole Base: Do not grout space between pole base plate and top of concrete pole foundation. Leave open to allow water to drain and for pole to breathe. If grout is recommended by pole manufacture in space between pole base plate and top of concrete pole foundation, provide grout with drain hole through grouting.

J. Poles shall be erected only with luminaire(s) or equivalent damping device, unless otherwise instructed by pole or luminaire manufacturer. Poles installed without luminaires are subject to increased modes of vibration.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 12

K. Do not level pole with shims; leveling nuts above and below pole baseplate provide flexible adjustment and long-term holding of pole position.

L. Provide anchor bolts and pole manufacturer's bolt template prior to concrete formwork for pole bases.

M. Minimum wire size for circuit tap inside pole shall be AWG #12.

N. Install pole base cover. Cover shall rest on top of concrete pole foundation and completely conceal air space under pole base plate.

3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.

B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 00 - 13

a. IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting Installations."

b. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations." c. IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations." d. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." e. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.



EXTERIOR ATHLETIC LIGHTING

26 56 68 - 1

SECTION 26 56 68 – EXTERIOR ATHLETIC LIGHTING Lighting System with LED Light Source PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work covered by this section of the specifications shall conform to the contract documents, engineering plans as well as state and local codes.

B. The purpose of these specifications is to define the lighting system performance and design standards for Gonzales High School using an LED Lighting source. The manufacturer / contractor shall supply lighting equipment to meet or exceed the standards set forth in these specifications.

C. The sports lighting will be for the following venues:

1. Football field 2. Track

D. The primary goals of this sports lighting project are:

1. Guaranteed Light Levels: Selection of appropriate light levels impact the safety of the players and

the enjoyment of spectators. Therefore, light levels are guaranteed to not drop below specified target values for a period of 25 years.

2. Environmental Light Control: It is the primary goal of this project to minimize spill light to adjoining properties and glare to the players, spectators and neighbors.

3. Cost of Ownership: In order to reduce the operating budget, the preferred lighting system shall be energy efficient and cost effective to operate. All maintenance costs shall be eliminated for the duration of the warranty.

4. Control and Monitoring: To allow for optimized use of labor resources and avoid unneeded operation of the facility, customer requires a remote on/off control system for the lighting system. Fields should be proactively monitored to detect luminaire outages over a 25-year life cycle. All communication and monitoring costs for 25-year period shall be included in the bid.

1.2 LIGHTING PERFORMANCE A. Illumination Levels and Design Factors: Playing surfaces shall be lit to an average target illumination

level and uniformity as specified in the chart below. Lighting calculations shall be developed and field measurements taken on the grid spacing with the minimum number of grid points specified below. Appropriate light loss factors shall be applied and submitted for the basis of design. Average illumination level shall be measured in accordance with the IESNA LM-5-04 (IESNA Guide for Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting Installations). Illumination levels shall not to drop below desired target values in accordance with IES RP-6-15, Page 2, Maintained Average Illuminance and shall be guaranteed for the full warranty period.

Area of Lighting

Average Target Illumination

Levels Maxi to Min

Uniformity Ratio Grid

Points Grid

Spacing

Football Field 50 foot-candles 2:1 72 30’ x 30’ Track 30 foot-candles 3:1 45 30’ x 30’

Sports pole F3 shall have (1) one light fixture at 30' aimed to Illuminate the parking lot.

B. Color: The lighting system shall have a minimum color temperature of 5700K and a CRI of 75.



26 56 68 - 2

C. Mounting Heights: To ensure proper aiming angles for reduced glare and to provide better playability, minimum mounting heights shall be as described below. Higher mounting heights may be required based on photometric report and ability to ensure the top of the field angle is a minimum of 10 degrees below horizontal.

# of Poles Pole Height

2 80’ 2 100’

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL LIGHT CONTROL

A. Light Control Luminaires: All luminaires shall utilize spill light and glare control devices including, but not limited to, internal shields, louvers and external shields. No symmetrical beam patterns are accepted.

B. Spill Light and Glare Control: To minimize impact on adjacent properties, spill light and candela values must not exceed the following levels taken at 3 feet above grade.

C. The first page of a photometric report for all luminaire types proposed showing horizontal and vertical axial candle power shall be provided to demonstrate the capability of achieving the specified performance. Reports shall be certified by a qualified testing laboratory with a minimum of five years of experience or by a manufacturer’s laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. A summary of the horizontal and vertical aiming angles for each luminaire shall be included with the photometric report.

1.4 Cost of Ownership

A. Manufacturer shall submit a 25-year Cost of Ownership summary that includes energy consumption, anticipated maintenance costs, and control costs. All costs associated with faulty luminaire replacement - equipment rentals, removal and installation labor, and shipping - are to be included in the maintenance costs.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data. PART 2 – PRODUCT 2.1 SPORTS LIGHTING SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION

A. Manufacturing Requirements: All components shall be designed and manufactured as a system. All luminaires, wire harnesses, drivers and other enclosures shall be factory assembled, aimed, wired and tested.

150’ from field edge Maximum Horizontal Footcandles .5 fc Vertical Footcandles 1 fc Candela 40,000 cd



26 56 68 - 3

B. Durability: All exposed components shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material and/or coated to help prevent corrosion. All exposed carbon steel shall be hot dip galvanized per ASTM A123. All exposed aluminum shall be powder coated with high performance polyester or anodized. All exterior reflective inserts shall be anodized, coated, and protected from direct environmental exposure to prevent reflective degradation or corrosion. All exposed hardware and fasteners shall be stainless steel, passivated and coated with aluminum-based thermosetting epoxy resin for protection against corrosion and stress corrosion cracking. Structural fasteners may be carbon steel and galvanized meeting ASTM A153 and ISO/EN 1461 (for hot dipped galvanizing), or ASTM B695 (for mechanical galvanizing). All wiring shall be enclosed within the cross-arms, pole, or electrical components enclosure.

C. System Description: Lighting system shall consist of the following:

1. Galvanized steel poles and cross-arm assembly.

2. Non-approved pole technology:

a. Square static cast concrete poles will not be accepted.

b. Direct bury steel poles which utilize the extended portion of the steel shaft for their foundation will not be accepted due to potential for internal and external corrosive reaction to the soils and long-term performance concerns.

3. Lighting systems shall use concrete foundations. See Section 2.4 for details.

a. For a foundation using a pre-stressed concrete base embedded in concrete backfill the concrete shall be air-entrained and have a minimum compressive design strength at 28 days of 3,000 PSI. 3,000 PSI concrete specified for early pole erection; actual required minimum allowable concrete strength is 1,000 PSI. All piers and concrete backfill must bear on and against firm undisturbed soil.

b. For anchor bolt foundations or foundations using a pre-stressed concrete base in a suspended pier or re-inforced pier design pole erection may occur after 7 days. Or after a concrete sample from the same batch achieves a certain strength.

4. Manufacturer will supply all drivers and supporting electrical equipment

a. Remote drivers and supporting electrical equipment shall be mounted approximately 10 feet above grade in aluminum enclosures. The enclosures shall be touch-safe and include drivers and fusing with indicator lights on fuses to notify when a fuse is to be replaced for each luminaire. Disconnect per circuit for each pole structure will be located in the enclosure. Integral drivers are not allowed.

b. Manufacturer shall provide surge protection at the pole equal to or greater than 40 kA for each line to ground (Common Mode) as recommended by IEEE C62.41.2_2002.

5. Wire harnesses complete with an abrasion protection sleeve, strain relief and plug-in connections for fast, trouble-free installation.

6. All luminaires, visors, and cross-arm assemblies shall withstand 150 mi/h winds and maintain luminaire aiming alignment.

7. Control cabinet to provide remote on-off control, monitoring, and entertainment features of the lighting system. See Section 2.3 for further details.

8. Manufacturer shall provide lightning grounding as defined by NFPA 780 and be UL Listed per UL 96 and UL 96A.

a. Integrated grounding via concrete encased electrode grounding system.

b. If grounding is not integrated into the structure, the manufacturer shall supply grounding electrodes, copper down conductors, and exothermic weld kits. Electrodes and conductors shall be sized as required by NFPA 780.The grounding electrode shall be minimum size of



26 56 68 - 4

5/8 inch diameter and 8 feet long, with a minimum of 10 feet embedment. Grounding electrode shall be connected to the structure by a grounding electrode conductor with a minimum size of 2 AWG for poles with 75 feet mounting height or less, and 2/0 AWG for poles with more than 75 feet mounting height.

D. Safety: All system components shall be UL listed for the appropriate application.

2.1 ELECTRICAL

A. Electric Power Requirements for the Sports Lighting Equipment:

1. Electric power: See electrical plans.

2. Maximum total voltage drop: Voltage drop to the disconnect switch located on the poles shall not exceed three (3) percent of the rated voltage.

B. Energy Consumption: The kW consumption for the field lighting system shall not exceed 73.

2.3 CONTROL

A. Instant On/Off Capabilities: System shall provide for instant on/off of luminaires.

B. Remote-mounted on/off/auto switch box that allows manual control to be in the press-box.

C. Lighting contactor cabinet(s) constructed of NEMA Type 4 aluminum, designed for easy installation with contactors, labeled to match field diagrams and electrical design. Manual off-on-auto selector switches shall be provided.

D. Dimming: System shall provide for 3-stage dimming (high-medium-low). Dimming will be set via scheduling options (Website, app, phone, fax, email).

E. Remote Lighting Control System: System shall allow owner and users with a security code to schedule on/off system operation via a web site, phone, fax or email up to ten years in advance. Manufacturer shall provide and maintain a two-way TCP/IP communication link. Trained staff shall be available 24/7 to provide scheduling support and assist with reporting needs.

The owner may assign various security levels to schedulers by function and/or fields. This function must be flexible to allow a range of privileges such as full scheduling capabilities for all fields to only having permission to execute “early off” commands by phone. Scheduling tool shall be capable of setting curfew limits.

Controller shall accept and store 7-day schedules, be protected against memory loss during power outages, and shall reboot once power is regained and execute any commands that would have occurred during outage.

F. Remote Monitoring System: System shall monitor lighting performance and notify manufacturer if individual luminaire outage is detected so that appropriate maintenance can be scheduled. The controller shall determine switch position (manual or auto) and contactor status (open or closed).

G. Management Tools: Manufacturer shall provide a web-based database and dashboard tool of actual field usage and provide reports by facility and user group. Dashboard shall also show current status of luminaire outages, control operation and service. Mobile application will be provided suitable for IOS, Android and Blackberry devices.



26 56 68 - 5

Hours of Usage: Manufacturer shall provide a means of tracking actual hours of usage for the field lighting system that is readily accessible to the owner.

1. Cumulative hours: shall be tracked to show the total hours used by the facility

2. Report hours saved by using early off and push buttons by users.

H. Communication Costs: Manufacturer shall include communication costs for operating the control and monitoring system for a period of 25 years.

I. Communication with luminaire drivers: Control system shall interface with drivers in electrical components enclosures by means of powerline communication.

2.4 STRUCTURAL PARAMETERS

A. Wind Loads: Wind loads shall be based on the 2015 International Building Code. Wind loads to be calculated using ASCE 7-10, an ultimate design wind speed of 120 and exposure category C.

B. Pole Structural Design: The stress analysis and safety factor of the poles shall conform to 2013 AASHTO Standard Specification for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals (LTS-6).

C. Foundation Design: The foundation design shall be based on soil parameters as outlined in the geotechnical report. If no geotechnical report is available, the foundation design shall be based on soils that meet or exceed those of a Class 5 material as defined by 2015 IBC Table 1806.2.


3.1 SOIL QUALITY CONTROL

A. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Owner if soil conditions exist other than those on which the foundation design is based, or if the soil cannot be readily excavated. Contractor may issue a change order request / estimate for the Owner’s approval / payment for additional costs associated with:

1. Providing engineered foundation embedment design by a registered engineer in the State of Texas for soils other than specified soil conditions;

2. Additional materials required to achieve alternate foundation;

3. Excavation and removal of materials other than normal soils, such as rock, caliche, etc.

3.2 DELIVERY TIMING

A. Delivery Timing Equipment On-Site: The equipment must be on-site 8-10 from receipt of approved submittals and receipt of complete order information.


A. Illumination Measurements: Upon substantial completion of the project and in the presence of the Contractor, Project Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Manufacturer's Representative, illumination measurements shall be taken and verified. The illumination measurements shall be conducted in accordance with IESNA LM-5-04.



26 56 68 - 6

B. Field Light Level Accountability

1. Light levels are guaranteed not to fall below the target maintained light levels for the entire warranty period of 25 years. These levels will be specifically stated as “guaranteed” on the illumination summary provided by the manufacturer.

2. The contractor/manufacturer shall be responsible for conducting initial light level testing and an additional inspection of the system, in the presence of the owner, one year from the date of commissioning of the lighting.

3. The contractor/manufacturer will be held responsible for any and all changes needed to bring these fields back to compliance for light levels and uniformities. Contractor/Manufacturer will be held responsible for any damage to the fields during these repairs.

C. Correcting Non-Conformance: If, in the opinion of the Owner or his appointed Representative, the actual performance levels including footcandles and uniformity ratios are not in conformance with the requirements of the performance specifications and submitted information, the Manufacturer shall be required to make adjustments to meet specifications and satisfy Owner.

3.4 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE

A. 25-Year Warranty: Each manufacturer shall supply a signed warranty covering the entire system for 25 years from the date of shipment. Warranty shall guarantee specified light levels. Manufacturer shall maintain specifically-funded financial reserves to assure fulfillment of the warranty for the full term. Warranty does not cover weather conditions events such as lightning or hail damage, improper installation, vandalism or abuse, unauthorized repairs or alterations, or product made by other manufacturers.

B. Maintenance: Manufacturer shall monitor the performance of the lighting system, including on/off status, hours of usage and luminaire outage for 25 years from the date of equipment shipment. Parts and labor shall be covered such that individual luminaire outages will be repaired when the usage of any field is materially impacted. Manufacturer is responsible for removal and replacement of failed luminaires, including all parts, labor, shipping, and equipment rental associated with maintenance. Owner agrees to check fuses in the event of a luminaire outage.

PART 4 – DESIGN APPROVAL 4.0 PRE-BID SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS (Non-Musco)

A. Design Approval: The owner / engineer will review pre-bid submittals per section 4.0.B from all the manufacturers to ensure compliance to the specification 10 days prior to bid. If the design meets the design requirements of the specifications, a letter and/or addendum will be issued to the manufacturer indicating approval for the specific design submitted.

B. Approved Product: Musco’s Light-Structure SystemTM with TLC for LEDTM is the approved product. All substitutions must provide a complete submittal package for approval as outlined in Submittal Information at the end of this section at least 10 days prior to bid. Special manufacturing to meet the standards of this specification may be required. An addendum will be issued prior to bid listing any other approved lighting manufacturers and designs.

C. All listed manufacturers not pre-approved shall submit the information at the end of this section at least 10 days prior to bid. An addendum will be issued prior to bid; listing approved lighting manufacturers and the design method to be used.



26 56 68 - 7

D. Bidders are required to bid only products that have been approved by this specification or addendum by the owner or owner’s representative. Bids received that do not utilize an approved system/design, will be rejected.



26 56 68 - 8

REQUIRED SUBMITTAL INFORMATION FOR ALL MANUFACTURERS (NOT PRE-APPROVED) 10 DAYS PRIOR TO BID

All items listed below are mandatory, shall comply with the specification and be submitted according to pre-bid submittal requirements. Complete the Yes/No column to indicate compliance (Y) or noncompliance (N) for each item. Submit checklist below with submittal.

Yes/ No Tab Item Description

A Letter/

Checklist

Listing of all information being submitted must be included on the table of contents. List the name of the manufacturer’s local representative and his/her phone number. Signed submittal checklist to be included.

B Equipment Layout Drawing(s) showing field layouts with pole locations

C On Field Lighting Design

Lighting design drawing(s) showing: a. Field Name, date, file number, prepared by b. Outline of field(s) being lighted, as well as pole locations referenced to the center of

the field (x & y), Illuminance levels at grid spacing specified c. Pole height, number of fixtures per pole, horizontal and vertical aiming angles, as well

as luminaire information including wattage, lumens and optics d. Height of light test meter above field surface. e. Summary table showing the number and spacing of grid points; average, minimum and

maximum illuminance levels in foot candles (fc); uniformity including maximum to minimum ratio, coefficient of variance (CV), coefficient of utilization (CU) uniformity gradient; number of luminaries, total kilowatts, average tilt factor; light loss factor.

D Off Field Lighting Design

Lighting design drawing showing initial spill light levels along the boundary line (defined on bid drawings) in footcandles. Lighting design showing glare along the boundary line in candela. Light levels shall be taken at 30-foot intervals along the boundary line. Readings shall be taken with the meter orientation at both horizontal and aimed towards the most intense bank of lights.

E Photometric

Report

Provide first page of photometric report for all luminaire types being proposed showing candela tabulations as defined by IESNA Publication LM-35-02. Photometric data shall be certified by laboratory with current National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program or an independent testing facility with over 5 years of experience.

F Performance

Guarantee

Provide performance guarantee including a written commitment to undertake all corrections required to meet the performance requirements noted in these specifications at no expense to the owner. Light levels must be guaranteed to not fall below target levels for warranty period.

G Structural Calculations

Pole structural calculations and foundation design showing foundation shape, depth backfill requirements, rebar and anchor bolts (if required). Pole base reaction forces shall be shown on the foundation drawing along with soil bearing pressures. Design must be stamped by a structural engineer in the state of Texas, if required by owner. (May be supplied upon award).

H Control & Monitoring

System

Manufacturer of the control and monitoring system shall provide written definition and schematics for automated control system. They will also provide ten (10) references of customers currently using proposed system in the state of Texas.

I

Electrical Distribution

Plans

Manufacturer bidding an alternate product must include a revised electrical distribution plan including changes to service entrance, panels and wire sizing, signed by a licensed Electrical Engineer in the state of Texas.

J Warranty Provide written warranty information including all terms and conditions. Provide ten (10) references of customers currently under specified warranty in the state of Texas.

K Project

References

Manufacturer to provide a list of ten (10) projects where the technology and specific fixture proposed for this project has been installed in the state of Texas. Reference list will include project name, project city, installation date, and if requested, contact name and contact



26 56 68 - 9

phone number.

L Product Information Complete bill of material and current brochures/cut sheets for all product(s) being provided.

M Delivery Manufacturer shall supply an expected delivery timeframe from receipt of approved submittals and complete order information.

N Non-Compliance

Manufacturer shall list all items that do not comply with the specifications. If in full compliance, tab may be omitted.

O Cost of

Ownership

Document cost of ownership as defined in the specification. Identify energy costs for operating the luminaires. Maintenance cost for the system must be included. All costs should be based on 25 Years

P

Environmental Light Control

Design

Environmental glare impact scans must be submitted showing the maximum candela from the field edge on a map of the surrounding area until specified candela value or less is achieved.

The information supplied herein shall be used for the purpose of complying with the specifications for Gonzales High School. By signing below, I agree that all requirements of the specifications have been met and that the manufacturer will be responsible for any future costs incurred to bring their equipment into compliance for all items not meeting specifications and not listed in the Non-Compliance section.

Manufacturer: _____________________________________ Signature: ____________________________________ Contact Name: ____________________________________ Date: ______/______/_____ Contractor: _______________________________________ Signature: _______________________________

2.2


LOCAL SOUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 51 23.40 -1

SECTION 27 51 23.40 - LOCAL SOUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 RELATED WORK

A. 26 05 00 – Grounding and BondingB. 26 05 29 – Electrical Hangers and SupportsC. 26 05 33 – Raceway and Boxes

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all materials, equipment, transportation and labor to achieve complete and fullyfunctional systems as shown or intended on drawings and in bid specifications.

B. All applicable equipment shall bear the UL label. All work shall be executed inaccordance with the National Electric Code (NEC), the Occupational Safety and HealthAct (OSHA) and all applicable State and Local codes, ordinances and regulations.

C. Refer to Section Division 26 (Electrical Division) for conduit raceway specifications andgeneral requirements.

D. Any discrepancy in quantity or part numbers between the drawings and the bidspecifications shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification during thebidding period. No allowance shall be made to the Contractor by reason of failure to havebrought said discrepancies to the attention of the Architect prior to award of contract.

1.4 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the local sounddistribution system to sell, install, and service the proposed manufacturer's equipment.The installing contractor shall have represented the manufacturer's product for at leastfour (4) years.

B. The installing contractor shall provide 24 hour, 365 days per year emergency service withfactory trained, state licensed service technicians.

C. The installing contractor must have a permanent office within a 75 mile radius of theproject site and be an approved dealer/integrator, of the proposed system, in the nearestmajor metropolitan area.

D. The installing contractor shall have been actively engaged in the business of selling,installing, and servicing systems in the surrounding area for at least ten (10) years.

E. The Contractor’s installation team shall have at least one member possessing a NICETLevel II, CTS-I or C-EST certification; additionally, at least one audio DSP programmercertified in HiQnet Audio Architect, Symetrix, Biamp Tisera, QSC Q-SYS or Dante.



F. Contractor shall have been in the commercial AVL (Audio, Video, Lighting) installation

industry for at least five years. Contractor shall have installed at least five systems of this type and comparable scale in educational facilities within the State of Texas. Contractor shall provide a list of successfully completed projects including completion dates within the past two years from the bid date of this project.

G. Should the local sound systems include Crestron or AMX hardware which requires programming, the Contractor shall provide a Certified Crestron Programmer or an AMX Certified Expert (ACE) Programmer to program, upload and debug the third party control systems.

H. All individuals installing the local sound distribution system must be employees of the proposing/installing entity and at least 25% of the installing staff shall have undergone a training class covering the installation and programming of local sound distribution systems. Current certification indicating the successful completion of the training course shall be available upon request at the project and submitted in the contractor’s product submittals.

I. The entity providing pricing to furnish and install the system specified within this

specification section and the physical installing entity of this system shall be one in the same. Absolutely no subcontracting on any portion of this system, by the system’s proposing entity, will be allowed.

J. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Reference Part 2 of this specifications for manufactures as specified. No other manufacturers will be accepted without submitting a formal request within no less than ten (10) day prior to the proposal date and if not officially approved via pre-proposal addendum.

E. Systems to be installed in the following areas:

1. Baseball Stadium Press Box. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Within fourteen (14) days of Notice to Proceed, the system installer shall furnish

the following in a single consolidated submittal: a. Permits: The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and provide

copies to the Owner/Architect/Engineer. b. Product Literature: Complete manufacturer’s product literature for all

cable, termination components, cable supports, cable labels, field devices, and other products to be used in the installation. In addition, whenever substitutions for recommended products are made, samples (when requested by the Owner/Designer) and the manufacturer’s supporting documentation demonstrating compatibility with other related products shall be included. The submittal shall have some type of distinguishing marker or pointer to indicated what specific product is to be provided

c. Construction Schedule: A time-scaled Construction Schedule, using PERT/CPM, indicating general project deadlines and specific dates relating to the installation of the cable distribution system.

d. Testing: Proposed Contractor system test result forms and a list of instrumentation to be used for systems testing.



e. Specification Compliance: A letter shall be provided stating, by section and subsection, that the system installer complies with the ENTIRE specification section. If the installer intends to deviate from any portion of the specifications, a detailed explanation of reason in which the installer would like to deviate shall be provided in addition to the specification compliance letter. NO DEVIATIONS SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE UNTIL THEY HAVE BEEN ACCEPTED BY THE PROJECT’S TECHNOLOGY CONSULTANT.

f. Certifications: The contractor shall submit all of the following certifications and the certifications must contain dates which are valid from the date of proposal and not expirer any sooner than 12 months after substantial completion of the project. 1) Manufacturer’s Authorized Dealer/Installer Certification as they

apply to any portion of this specification: This certification must be held by the proposing/installing contractor and state that the proposing/installing contractor is and authorized dealer/installer of the system specified within the project specifications. The certification must have been obtained by the office that is within a 75 mile radius of the project’s location.

2) Installer Certification: This certification must be held by at least 25% of the, on-site, staff and be made available at the site if requested by the owner, architect, and/or project’s technology consultant.

3) Licenses: This includes all licenses required by the state in which the work is being performed, the federal government, local authorities having jurisdiction, and any organization in that governs the specific system

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit the following items, for Owner review and approval, within twenty-eight

(28) days of notice to proceed: a. Proposed circuit routing and circuit grouping plan prepared by a system

registered designer. The designer’s certification must be current. Identifiable, separate routing shall be shown for both the station cabling and any backbone trunk cabling.

b. In addition to the cable routing, the submitted drawings shall indicate the following, even if the following is expected to be provided by the project’s electrical or general contractor: 1) Location of all control equipment and remote power sources 2) Locations of all field devices and outlets 3) Location of wall penetrations (all penetrations shall be sleeved

and contain protective bushings at both ends) 4) Location of sleeved wall pass-thru 5) Size of sleeve at each location installed 6) Quantity of cable passing through each sleeve 7) Location of drops in each room (quantity or labeling of drops are

not required in the submittal plans. Labeling shall be provided in the closeout plans and quantities shall be as per the contract documents, addendums, and issued changes. Each drop shall be labeled for the type of outlet that it is)

8) Conduit routing, size, quantity, and stub-up locations for all floor mounted outlets.



c. Drawing Compliance: A letter shall be provided stating that the system installer complies with the ENTIRE project drawing, including all general, keyed, and notes to contractor. If the installer intends to deviate from any portion of the specifications, a detailed explanation of reason in which the installer would like to deviate shall be provided in addition to the specification compliance letter. NO DEVIATIONS SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE UNTIL THEY HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE PROJECT’S TECHNOLOGY CONSULTANT.

C. Close-out Procedures: 1. Four (4) copies of the following documents shall be delivered to the

Architect/Engineer at the time of system acceptance. One (1) final copy of the same documents shall be delivered directly to the project’s Technology Consultant upon final closeout of the project. The closeout submittals shall include: a. Inspection and Test Reports: During the course of the Project, the

Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system to ensure that the materials supplied and the work performed, conform to contract requirements. The Contractor shall provide written documentation that indicates that materials acceptance testing was conducted as specified. The Contractor shall also provide documentation, which indicates that all cable termination testing was completed and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job completion.

b. Provide complete test reports for all cabling and devices that comprise system as outlined in this document.

c. Include the Name, address and telephone of the authorized factory representative with a 24-hour emergency service number.

d. The manual shall also include Manufacturer’s data sheets and installation manuals/instructions for all equipment installed and a list of recommended spare parts.

e. Generic or typical owner’s instruction and operation manual shall not be acceptable to fulfill this requirement.

f. An up-to-date record (“as-built”) set of approved shop drawing prints that have been revised to show each and every change made to the structure cabling system from the original approved shop drawings. Drawings shall consist of a scaled plan of each building showing the placement of each individual item of the technical cabling system equipment as well as raceway size and routing, junction boxes, and conductor size, quantity, and color in each raceway.

g. As-built Drawings shall include cable pathways, device locations with correct labeling, control equipment locations, remote power supply locations, cross connect locations, lightning protection locations, and MDF/IDF locations. The as-built drawings shall be prepared using AutoCad 2013 or later. Provide the Owner with electronic versions of the as-builts on CD media and (1) hard copy per binder.

h. All drawings must reflect point to point wiring, device address and programmed characteristics as verified in the presence of the engineer and/or the end user unless device addressing is electronically generated, and automatically graphically self-documented by the system.

i. A copy of the manufacturer’s warranty on the installed system. j. Any keys to cabinets and/or equipment and special maintenance tools

required to repair, maintain, or service the system. k. Operating and Maintenance Instructions for all devices within the system.

These instructions shall reflect any changes made during the course of construction, and shall be provided to the Owner, for their use, in a three-ring binder labeled with the project name and description. (4 copies)



l. Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Architect or owner, provide formal training sessions for the Owner’s operating personnel to include location, operation, and maintenance of all included systems and equipment. Minimum amount of training time shall be at least 8 hours and shall be broken up into two (2) hour sessions. Provide copies

m. Quick-start Guide for each system written with the assumption that the intended reader is technically inexperienced and unfamiliar with the facility. The Quick-start Guide shall be laminated and affixed to the inside of the front door of the system rack with appropriate mounting hardware. One copy of each individual system schematics printed in ARCH D (24x36) and laminated.

n. Two hard copy, paper sets of the as-installed (As Built) drawings in ARCH E1. Drawing sets shall be individually bound.

o. In addition to the hard copy close-out documentation, all close-out documentation shall be included, in pdf format, on the two, 8GB thumb drives.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The following manufacturers are listed within this specification. All products specified and associated with a specific manufacturer are to be provided as specified, no exceptions. 1. QSC 2. NetGear 3. SurgeX 4. K & M 5. Shure 6. Middle Atlantic 7. ProCo Sound 8. JBL 9. Tascam 10. Listen Technologies 11. Whirlwind 12. AtlasIED

2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Stadium Press Box Sound Reinforcement Systems

1. 1 qty. Middle Atlantic DWR 24-22 wall rack.

a. 1 qty. Middle Atlantic D3-LK, 3 RU locking drawer. i. 1 qty. Middle Atlantic FI-3, foam insert.

b. 1 qty. Middle Atlantic VFD-24. c. 5 sets of keys. d. Populate all unused spaces with blank panels.

2. 1 qty. Middle Atlantic PDLT-815RVA. Connect to SurgeX SEQ-1U (see #6)

3. 1 qty. QSC PLX2502 audio amplifier.

4. 1 qty. QSC Q-SYS CORE 110f audio DSP.



5. 1 qty. QSC TSC-55W-G2 touch panel installed on a 3RU, custom cut-out blank panel (black).

a. GUI shall be programmed to provide the following controls: i. Input select ii. Input Mute iii. Input Volume Up/Down iv. Zone 1 Volume Up/Down (Press Box Face Speakers) v. Zone 2 Volume Up/Down (Press Box Sides Speakers) vi. Any other control as directed by the Owner.

6. 1 qty. SurgeX SEQ-1U surge protected power sequencer.

a. Amplifier shall cycle ON last and OFF first.

7. 1 qty. Shure 522 table top, push to talk mic.

8. 2 qty. Shure SM58S microphone.

9. 1 qty. Shure SLX 24/SM58-G5 wireless system. a. 2 qty Shure G5 band U8, ½ wave antenna.

i. Install on Press Box face as intended on drawings. ii. Provide stainless steel wire guard to protect antenna from

damage.

10. 1 qty. Shure SLX 14/84-G5 wireless system. a. 1 qty. Shure WH20 headset microphone.

11. 1 qty. Shure UA221 passive antenna splitter.

12. 1 qty. Proco iRack audio input panel.

13. 4 qty. JBL Control 29AV-1 Speakers (black) – Weather resistant Version. Install

on Press Box as intended on drawings. Connect in 8 ohm, conventional mode.

14. 1 qty. Tascam CD-200BT, Bluetooth CD player.

15. 1 qty. Netgear FS108P. a. Install on 1 qty. Middle Atlantic UTR1 rack shelf.

16. 4 qty. Whirlwind MK425 XLR cable.

17. 2 qty. Whirlwind MST2R10 audio interface cable.

18. 2 qty. RDL DS-J3 audio input panel.

a. Engrave first panel: RCA as “Aux 1”, XLR as “Mic 1”, second panel: RCA as “Aux 2”, XLR as “Mic 2”.

19. 1 qty. Atlas IED DS-7E desk top mic stand.

20. Antenna Plate “W” and Assisted Listening Plate “H” a. ProCo WP1019 style STAINLESS STEEL. b. Install at locations as intended on drawings.



21. 1 qty. LT-800-216 Assisted Listening System Transmitter installed in Sound Rack.

a. 1 qty. LA-326 Rack Mount Kit. b. 1 qty. LA-124 antenna installed as intended on drawings.

i. Provide stainless steel wire guard to protect antenna from damage.

c. Provide a minimum of: i. 4 qty. LR-400-216 Receiver. ii. 4 qty. LA-166 Neck Loop.

d. Provide enough LR-400-216 Receivers to meet TAS and ADA standards as required by law.

e. Provide with each LR-400-216 Receiver: i. 1 qty. LA-164 Ear Speaker. ii. 1 qty. LA-361 AA Batteries.

f. 1 qty. LA-304 Signage. 2.3 WIRING

A. All system wiring shall be provided as specified, unless required differently by the manufacturer’s instruction and/or governing codes and local authorities. Provide plenum rated cable where required. 1. West Penn 454 #22 AWG twisted pair / shielded for Microphone and Line level

signals.

2. West Penn C208 #8 AWG twisted pair for low frequency speaker drivers.

3. West Penn 227 #12 AWG twisted pair for full range speakers.

4. West Penn 226 #14 AWG twisted pair for 70v sound reinforcement speakers.

5. Belden 9258 RG-8X coax cable for RF signal lines.

6. West Penn 4246 CAT6 cable for Local Sound/Video Network.

7. West Penn 4246F Shielded CAT6 cable for Digital Video.

B. Cables, wiring, and interconnect terminal strips to be logically, legibly, and indelibly labeled for immediate identification by a direct hot-stamp method or a factory stamped closed sleeve method as approved. Adhesive strip labels are acceptable only if sealed with transparent heat-shrinkable tubing to hold the marker in its position. Provide all wiring labeling information on schematic diagram in project record drawings. Labeling equal to Brady PM-1M “Porta Mark”, T&B heatshrink markers, or approved equal.

2.4 INSPECTIONS

A. General: Conformance to the installation practices covered above are to be verified when completed. In some cases, the Owner/ Designer may inspect before acceptance.

2.5 SOUND QUALITY AND COVERAGE

A. Ensure all systems are installed to provide uniform, balanced audio coverage throughout the intended listening area. Ensure there are no rattles, buzzes, hums, RF interference, electro-static interference or other audible audio anomalies while the systems are powered ON. The system shall power ON and OFF with no pops or clicks or any other acoustic anomaly.




A. Provide and install Sound Reinforcement Systems as required. All rack mounted equipment and their controls shall be labeled with 1/4” lamicoid strips engraved with 1/8” high block letters indicating device operation and level of control function. Verify exact location of equipment racks and remote source control panel with Architect prior to rough-in.

B. Coordinate final connection of power and ground wiring to equipment racks. Power and

ground wiring shall terminate inside equipment racks, and be hard wired directly to ground busses to ensure uninterrupted operation.

C. All equipment and enclosures described in this specification shall be permanently

attached to the structure and held firmly in place. Supports shall be adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least 3X the weight of the equipment or enclosure.

D. The process of equalizing and testing the Audio Sound System may necessitate moving

and adjusting certain component parts (ex. loud speakers). This shall be done at no additional cost to the owner.

E. Take precautions as necessary to prevent and guard against electromagnetic and

electrostatic noise interference.

F. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment. Isolate cables carrying signals at different levels and separate to restrict channel bleed-through the feedback oscillation in any amplifier section. Connect all loud speakers electrically in phase, using the same wire color code for speaker wiring throughout the project. Make all joints and connections with resin core solder or with approved mechanical connectors. Install three conductor individually wired ground 120 VAC stripline in each rack.

G. Keep wiring separated into four groups of conduit for microphone level circuits (level

below -20dBm), line level circuits (up to +30dBm), loud speaker circuits (above +30 dBm), and power circuits.

H. Locate wireless microphone system antennas and hearing assist system antennas at or

above ceiling or at bar joist height in areas without ceilings. Coordinate exact location with owner. Provide adequate protective guards. Adjust antenna location for best possible reception/transmission in area of coverage.

I. Provide hearing assist transmitter(s) and receivers for each sound reinforcement system.

The quantity of hearing assist receivers for each system shall be as required by federal and local laws and ordinance requirements.

3.2 CABLE

A. GENERAL 1. Single system cables may be grouped together in a common conduit or cable

support of adequate capacity to facilitate the ease of installation and prevent conductor or insulation damage.

2. Do not group conductors or cables of different systems in one common conduit or cable supports.



3. Install cables as recommended by the system manufacturer. Conductor quantities specified are minimum required. Conductors to be installed shall be coordinated with the system equipment supplier. Cables installed on exposed surfaces, in inaccessible locations, or underground shall be in conduit.

4. Cables installed above accessible ceiling spaces, may be installed without conduit. All cables not installed in conduit shall be plenum rated. Install cables that are not available with a plenum rating in conduit.

5. Cables installed in hollow wall spaces shall be installed in conduit to an accessible location.

6. Tag each circuit at each end and at each terminal with a separate tag indicating area served.

7. Color code wire in accordance with IPCEA standards. 8. Terminate speaker cables in junction box. 9. ALL LOCAL SOUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CABLE ON THE ENTIRE

PROJECT SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. B. Coordinate final connection of power and ground wiring to equipment racks. Power and

ground wiring shall terminate inside equipment racks, and be hard wired directly to ground busses to ensure uninterrupted operation.

C. Take precautions as necessary to prevent and guard against electromagnetic and electrostatic noise interference.

D. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment. Isolate cables carrying signals at different levels and separate to restrict channel bleed-through the feedback oscillation in any amplifier section. Connect all loud speakers electrically in phase, using the same wire color code for speaker wiring throughout the project. Make all joints and connections with resin core solder or with approved mechanical connectors. Install three conductor individually wired ground 120 VAC stripline in each rack.

E. Keep wiring separated into four groups of conduit for microphone level circuits (level below -20dBm), line level circuits (up to +30dBm), loud speaker circuits (above +30 dBm), and power circuits.

3.4 CABLE PATHWAYS

A. Cable Support:

1. All wire not installed inside conduit or a designated cable tray system shall be installed in a dedicated cable support system for the entire run of each cable. Including, but not limited to service loops.

a. Approved Cable Support Product: PANDUIT® Corporation J-MOD™ modular support system (sized appropriately for the number of wires being installed. Reference the manufacturer’s specifications for the suggested maximum cables per support size.

2. The approved cable support system shall be attached directly to the building steel at a serviceable height. In the event that the building steel is not 5’ of the finished ceiling, the contractor shall provide a dedicated threaded rod extending within 5’ of the finished ceiling and mount the J-MOD™ support hook to the treaded rod.

3. J-MOD™ cable support shall be installed at a maximum of 5’ on center. 4. All cable installed shall be attached to the J-MOD™ support system with plenum

rated Velcro and a plenum rated Velcro tie shall be installed between each J-MOD™ cable support to keep wires neatly bundled throughout the entire run.

5. ABSOLUTELY NO CABLE, NOT INSTALLED IN CONDUIT, WILL BE ALLOWED TO BE ATTACHED DIRECTLY TO THE BUILDING’S STEEL OR SUPPORTED IN ANY OTHER METHOD THAN THAT STATED ABOVE.



6. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH ALL OTHER TRADES ON THE PROJECT TO ENSURE THAT THE PATHWAY OF THIS SYSTEM DOES NOT INTERFERE WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE OTHER TRADES AND TO PREVENT THE INSTALLED PRODUCT OF OTHER TRADES FROM PUTTING STRAIN ON THE INSTALLED WIRING.

7. Do not route cable through webbing of structural steel.

B. Conduit / Raceway: 1. All wire shall be installed in an approved conduit/raceway system (except where

permitted by NEC and the local authority having jurisdiction). Maximum conduit "fill" shall not exceed 40% per NEC.

2. Conduit and raceway system shall be installed as specified under the general electrical section of the specifications, and per NEC.

3. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4" EMT. Install conduit per engineered shop drawings.

4. Systems utilizing open wiring techniques with low smoke plenum cable shall provide conduit in all inaccessible locations, inside concealed walls, all mechanical/electrical rooms, or other areas where wiring might be exposed or subject to damage.

5. All conduit ends shall have a protective bushing to prevent cable damage. BUSHINGS MUST BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO INSTALLING CABLE. CUTTING BUSHING TO INSTALL AROUND INSTALLED CABLES WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.

3.5 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. General

1. After completion of installation and start up procedures, commence a verification and testing sequence leading to final acceptance of the owner.

2. Submit for approval, a sample of the form on which the test will be reported. a. Identify project b. Signatures of participants and observers c. Results d. Description of adjustment or corrections of defective components. e. Date

3. Provide schedule of tests. Estimate dates of significant events. f. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the

Owner/Architect/Engineer. 4. Test, calibrate and adjust each device in the system 5. Verify operation of all specified functions. 6. Provide documentation of all tests and verifications as specified.

B. The following tests and adjustments shall be performed by the Contractor. All equipment required supplied by the Contractor. Follow EIA and TIA standards in performing tests. Record the results of these tests on project record drawings. Submit written results of tests to Architect prior to scheduled equalization and final inspection date. 1. Measure and record impedance of each speaker line terminating at equipment

racks at frequency of 1,000 Hz. with loud speakers connected to their respective lines.

2. Check system to ensure freedom from oscillations or stray RF pickup. Check inputs with no signal and with typical program material driving system to full output. Detect unwanted signals.

3. Provide (2) copies of all programming on Flash Drives for each system installed to the owner prior to substantial Completion.



3.6 OWNER INSTRUCTION

A. Provide a total of 8 hours, minimum of two sessions of instruction to the Owner designated user and maintenance personnel on the use and operation of the system. Instructing personnel shall be a competent engineer or technician familiar with the installed system. Instruction times shall be arranged by the Owner.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER

A. Upon completion of initial tests and delivery of all documents, diagrams, and project record drawings, notify the Architect in writing that the installation has been completed in accordance with the requirements of the specification and is ready for equalization and inspection by representatives of the Owner.

B. Acceptance testing will include operation by the Owner of each major system and other

components (microphones, consoles, racks, loud speakers, etc.) deemed necessary. Contractor will assist as necessary in this testing.

C. In the event the need for further adjustments or work becomes evident during acceptance

testing, the Contractor will continue his work until the system is acceptable, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.8 EXTRA WARRANTY PROVISIONS

A. Labor and materials provided under this section shall be warranted for not less than one (1) year after final acceptance of the work by the Owner. Defects occurring in labor or materials within the one year warranty are to be rectified by replacement or repair. This contractor, within the warranty period, is required to answer all service calls and requests for information within a 24 hour period and repair or replace any faulty items within a 24 hour period, without charge, including parts and labor.



CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 11 00 - 1

SECTION 31 11 00 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Protecting and preserving trees and vegetation designated to remain.

B. Clearing of site, including, but not limited to the removal of trees, shrubs, and vegetation which is not designated to remain, and brush, branches, logs, rock, debris, rubbish and other objectionable material from the entire project area.

C. Grubbing of site, including, but not limited to uprooting and removal of all stumps, roots, other

organics, etc. to their full depth from the project area and disking to a depth of nine (9) inches.

D. Removal and legal, satisfactory disposal of all material cleared and grubbed from the site. 1.2 PAYMENT


PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITIONS AT SITE A. Execute all work in an orderly and careful manner with due consideration for any and all surrounding

areas, planting or structures which are to remain. Periodically, water as required to allay dust and dirt. Protect any adjacent property and improvements from damage and replace any portions damaged through this operation.

B. Coordinate and comply with the following:

1. Geotechnical Report. 2. Local ordinances and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. The Contractor shall take proper precautions to protect adjacent or adjoining property from damage

caused by clearing and grubbing activities. All damage shall be repaired or replaced at Contractor’s expense.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits required by State and local governing

agencies. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL

A. All cleared and grubbed material becomes the property of the Contractor and shall legally and satisfactorily be removed and disposed of off-site. On-site burning will not be permitted.


CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 11 00 - 2

3.3 FINAL SITE PREPARATION

A. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., resulting from Work of this Section from the site. B. After clearing, grubbing and discing the project site, rake and pick the entire site to remove all

debris material.



WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 31 13 13.13 - 1

SECTION 31 13 13.13 - WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. Waste material disposal consists of disposal of trees, brush, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from operations such as clearing and grubbing, demolition, excavation, concrete placement and grading. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor is responsible for removal and disposal of waste material.


A. Specific products are not required. Use equipment and materials necessary to properly complete disposal of waste materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DISPOSAL AREA

A. Items noted on plans to be "removed" or “disposed” will be taken completely off the site. B. Concrete wash-out will become property of Contractor to be disposed of with other waste materials.

3.2 COMPACTION AND GRADING

A. Level off waste material to an elevation 12 inches below final grade. Place excess topsoil on waste material in a layer not less than 12 inches thick and compact to the density of the surrounding area.



EARTHWORK (UNDER PAVING AND SITE APPURTENANCES)

31 20 00 - 1

SECTION 31 20 00 – EARTHWORK (UNDER PAVING AND SITE APPURTENANCES)

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This section includes the furnishing of all plant, labor, equipment, materials and the performance of all operations required to complete the Earthwork indicated on the Drawings and specified herein, including the following: Clearing and Grubbing, Stripping, Excavation, Embankment, Borrow, Subgrade Preparation, Compaction and Finish Grading.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CLEARING & GRUBBING

A. This item shall consist of clearing the ground of all trees, brush, rubbish, and of grubbing the roadway, pavement areas, roadside ditches and/or outfall ditch right-of-way or other easements as designated within the limits of the project. The designated areas shall be cleared of stumps, brush, logs, rubbish, trees and shrubs, except such trees and shrubs and certain areas designated by the Engineer for preservation shall be carefully protected from abuse, marring or damage during construction operations. Continual parking and/or servicing of equipment under the branches of trees designated for preservation will not be permitted. Trees and shrubs designated for preservation, that must be pruned, shall be trimmed as directed by the Engineer and all exposed cuts over two (2) inches in diameter shall be treated with an approved material.

B. On areas required for paving, channel, or structural excavation, all stumps, roots, etc., shall be

removed to a depth of approximately 2-feet below the lower elevation of the excavation. On areas required for embankment construction, all stumps, roots, etc., shall be removed to a depth of approximately 2-feet below the existing ground surface. All holes remaining after clearing and grubbing shall be backfilled and compacted to ninety percent of Standard Proctor Density (ASTM Method D698) at a moisture content of between optimum and plus 3 percent of optimum as directed by the Engineer and the entire area bladed to prevent ponding of water and to provide drainage; except in areas to be immediately excavated, the Engineer may direct that the holes not be backfilled. On areas required for borrow sites and material sources, stumps, roots, etc., shall be removed to the complete extent necessary to prevent such objectionable matter becoming mixed with the material to be used in construction.

C. All cleared and grubbed materials shall be disposed of off site. Contractor shall be responsible for

obtaining any necessary disposal permits. The Contractor shall not bury any refuse on site. No burning shall be permitted unless specifically noted and permitted by local jurisdictions.

D. No separate measurement or payment will be made for furnishing all labor, materials, permits,

supervision, equipment and supplies required to complete all items of work specified for clearing and grubbing.

3.2 STRIPPING

A. Within the limits indicated, or in areas where existing grade is to be altered either by excavation or embankment, the Contractor shall strip existing topsoil to approximately 3-inches in depth, except that areas beneath foundations or structures shall be stripped to a minimum depth of 6-inches, and



31 20 00 - 2

may be stockpiled for future use or disposed of at the Contractor's expense. Stripping shall include the removal and disposal of scrap iron, rubbish, logs, abandoned utilities, signs, and any and all other debris, if within the project site or right-of-way, whether above or below existing grade. Stripping and excavation can take place in the same operation, provided the topmost material is suitable for use in future construction and provided it is not to be set aside for backfill or topsoil. The upper topsoil and debris to be stripped as noted above, shall be removed regardless of whether the site is to be excavated or receive embankment. Surface soil, not suitable for use in the future construction and any other unsatisfactory material shall be excavated, removed off the site and placed in designated spoil banks or shall otherwise be disposed of as directed by the Engineer in such a manner as not to create an unsightly or objectionable condition.

B. Stripping will not be paid for directly. Payment for stripping shall be subsidiary to excavation, borrow

or embankment. 3.3 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation shall consist of the required excavation within the project limits, the removal and proper utilization or disposal of all excavated materials; and the constructing, shaping and finishing of all earthwork on the entire project site, in conformity with the required lines, grades and typical cross sections, and in accordance with the specification requirements herein outlined. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in grading the site, uniformly widening embankment, flattening slopes, etc., or as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer will define suitable materials. Unsuitable excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall be known as waste and shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by the Contractor outside the limits of the site. Unsuitable material encountered below subgrade elevation, shall be replaced with material from the excavation, or with other suitable material.

B. No separate measurement or payment will be made for materials and labor performed under this

section. Include all costs in the lump sum price, including preparing ditches, trimming of slopes, disposal of surplus materials (wastage), preparation and completion of subgrade, shoulders, roadway, any necessary hauling and the furnishing of all labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

3.4 EMBANKMENT

A. This item shall govern for the placement and compaction of all materials obtained from the site, borrow, channels, structural and sewer excavation, including all underground utility excavation, used in the construction of project fill and/or embankment. Prior to placing any embankment, all stripping and/or clearing and grubbing operations shall have been completed on the excavation sources and areas over which the embankment is to be placed. Stump holes or other small excavations in the limits of the embankments shall be backfilled with suitable material and thoroughly compacted by approved methods before commencing embankment construction.

B. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, the surface of the ground of all unpaved areas, which are

to receive embankment, shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 4-inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with the new embankment as hereinafter specified and shall not exceed 8-inches in total depth. Where indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer, the surface of a hillside to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 4 inches, or cut into steps, benched or notched before embankment materials are placed. The embankment shall then be placed in layers, not to exceed 8-inches, as hereinafter specified, beginning at the low side in part width layers and increasing the widths as the embankment is raised. The material, which has been loosened, shall be recompacted simultaneously with the embankment material placed at the same elevation. Where embankments are to be placed adjacent to or over existing roadbeds, the roadbed slopes shall be plowed or scarified to a depth of not less than 4-inches and the embankment built up in successive layers, as hereinafter specified to the level of the old roadbed before its height is increased. The top of the



31 20 00 - 3

old roadbed shall be scarified and recompacted with the next layer of the new embankment. The total depth of the scarified and added material shall not exceed the permissible depth of layer.

C. Trees, stumps, roots, vegetation or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in the

embankment. D. Except as otherwise required by the plans, all embankment shall be constructed in layers

approximately parallel to the finished grade of the site or paving. Embankments shall be constructed to the grade established by the Engineer and completed embankments shall correspond to the general shape of the typical sections shown on the plans and each section of the embankment shall correspond to the detailed section or slopes established by the Engineer. After completion, the site shall be continuously maintained to its finished section and grade until the project is completed.

E. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a

layer in that position, but all such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken, and the embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, discing, or similar methods to the end that a uniform material is secured in each layer. Water required for sprinkling to bring the material to the moisture content necessary for maximum compaction shall be evenly applied and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to secure uniform moisture content throughout the layer by such methods as may be necessary.

F. After each layer of embankment or select material is complete, the Engineer will make tests as

necessary. If the material fails to meet the density specified, the course shall be reworked, as necessary, to obtain the specified compaction. Should the subgrade, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density or finish before the pavement is placed, it shall be recompacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. Excessive loss of moisture in the subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing or covering with a subsequent layer of asphaltic or other approved material. Embankment shall not be paid for directly, but shall be incidental to site excavation, channel excavation, construction of underground utilities, including all sewers, or borrow.

3.5 BORROW

A. Borrow shall consist of the required excavation, removal and proper utilization of materials secured from sources obtained by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Borrow shall be used only when shown on the bid form or directed by the Engineer and then only from approved sources. Borrow material shall come only from sources approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall provide samples of the fill material for testing and approval. In the event the material is not acceptable, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor shall find other sources. All fill material shall be free from organic matter and deleterious material.

B. No separate measurement or payment will be made for materials and labor performed under this section. Include all costs in the lump sum price. All work performed as required herein shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, for all materials, for all royalties and freight involved, for all hauling, delivery, spreading and compacting complete and in place and for all tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

3.6 SUBGRADE

A. The subgrade shall be brought to the lines, grades and typical cross section shown on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. Whenever unsuitable natural material is encountered and cannot be handled by the excavation or embankment requirements, then the following requirements shall apply. The unsuitable material shall be excavated to a depth deemed sufficient by the Engineer and the excavated material shall be disposed of off the jobsite at the expense of the Contractor. The excavated area shall be filled to its original level with suitable material meeting



31 20 00 - 4

the requirements of borrow. This imported material shall be compacted to 95-percent of standard proctor density, (ASTM Method D698) using a moisture content ranging from optimum to plus 3-percent above optimum. Soils shall not be compacted at less than the optimum moisture content.

B. After all holes and depressions are filled with approved material, the subgrade shall be brought up

to the lines and grades required and if it is not to be stabilized, it shall be compacted to 95-percent of standard proctor density, (ASTM Method D698), using a moisture content ranging from optimum to plus 3-percent above optimum. The subgrade, without stabilization, shall be compacted to a depth of 9-inches. The subgrade shall be kept free from all ruts and weak spots. Any ruts and weak spots that develop under traffic shall be repaired with suitable material as they develop.

3.7 COMPACTION

A. All fill material shall be placed in uniform layers, dried or moistened as required to obtain approximate optimum moisture content and rolled to a density of at least 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D-698. Compaction equipment shall be as hereinafter specified. The maximum thickness of uniform layers (loose measurements) shall be as follows: 1. If the Contractor elects to use a pneumatic tired roller, the thickness of each uniform layer

shall not exceed six (6) inches. 2. If the Contractor elects to use sheepsfoot rollers, the thickness of each uniform layer shall

not exceed eight (8) inches. 3. In locations where it is impractical to use the roller equipment, mechanical hand tampers

will be used, and the thickness of each uniform layer shall not exceed four (4) inches. The method used to secure the optimum moisture content will be the Contractor's responsibility. The compacting equipment and the method of compaction shall be such that a uniform density will be obtained over the entire area and depth of material being compacted. All fill material deposited in place by means of scrapers, dump trucks, draglines or other similar equipment shall be thoroughly broken up before being spread into the uniform layers. Rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the crowned sections or start longitudinally at the low side and proceed toward the high side of sloped areas, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) the width of the roller unit. Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different in length.

B. Excess loss of moisture shall be construed to exist when the soil moisture content is three (3)

percent less than optimum moisture.

C. An independent qualified Testing Laboratory either selected by or approved by the Owner or Engineer, for every 500 square yards of the compacted subgrade shall take density tests. The Testing Laboratory will furnish written reports covering results of all tests and inspections made. Reports will be made promptly to the Engineer, Contractor and Owner.

3.8 FINISH GRADING

A. Uniformly smooth grade all areas indicated on the drawings to be graded. The finish surface shall be not more than 0.05 feet above or below the established grade or approved cross section. All ditches and swales shall be properly graded so as to drain readily. Where existing grade is disturbed by the Contractor in areas not marked to be graded, the Contractor will regrade the disturbed area to its original grade at no additional expense to the Owner.



CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

31 23 00 - 1

SECTION 31 23 00 - CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section shall govern for all excavation required for the construction of sewers, sewer structures, pipe culverts, appurtenances and connections and for the backfilling around completed sewers to the level of the original ground, all in conformity with the locations, lines and grades shown on the plans or as given by the Engineer and in accordance with these specifications. This Section shall also govern for any necessary pumping or bailing and drainage and all sheathing and bracing of trench walls. Also governed by this Section are the cutting and restoration of pavement and base courses, the furnishing and placing of cement stabilized backfill, the hauling and disposing of surplus materials and the bridging of trenches and other provisions for maintenance of traffic or access as provided herein.


A. The Testing Laboratory’s representative will determine the moisture density relationship in accordance with ASTM D698 on material secured from the trench excavation. Samples secured from the cement stabilized sand supplier shall be blended with Portland cement in accordance with Section 31 23 23.16 - Cement Stabilized Sand Bedding and Backfill, and the moisture density relationship will be determined in accordance with ASTM D558.

B. The Testing Laboratory’s representative will determine the in-place density in accordance with

ASTM Methods D2922 or D1556. The minimum level of testing will consist of at least one test for each 200 linear feet of trench per lift of backfill.

C. At the completion of the project, all on site storm and sanitary sewer lines shall be cleaned out

using a hydraulic jet machine in the presence of the owner and engineer. After hydro-jetting storm and sanitary sewer lines, all segments shall be video tape recorded and tapes shall be furnished to the owner.

1.3 REQUIRED INSPECTIONS

A. The contractor is solely responsible for meeting with all inspecting authorities having jurisdiction over the project (to include, but not limited to: Water District, City, County, State and Federal) prior to construction. All required inspections shall be coordinated by the contractor prior to installation of the WORK. All WORK found to be deficient by the inspector(s) and WORK installed prior to notification of inspector(s) shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s sole expense.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONNECTIONS TO BUILDING GRAVITY SEWERS

A. Connections to building gravity sewers, to include roof drains and sanitary sewer connections shall be made with SCH 40 X SDR adapter couplings.

B. Fernco couplers are not allowed.



31 23 00 - 2

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION & TRENCH PREPARATION

A. Excavate trench to the alignment and depth required. Brace the trench and drain, as required, so that the work may be accomplished safely and efficiently. If necessary, install a dewatering system to provide a dry trench bottom. Pumps shall discharge into natural drainage channels or to drains. Shoring for excavations and trenches shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of OSHA Regulation 1926, Subpart P.

B. For pipes less than 30 inches in diameter, the minimum width of the trench shall be the width of the

outside barrel of the pipe plus 24 inches, the maximum width of the trench shall be the width of the outside barrel of the pipe plus 36 inches. For pipe 30 inches and larger, the minimum trench width shall be the width of the outside barrel of the pipe plus 32 inches, and the maximum width of the trench shall be the width of the outside barrel of the pipe plus 36 inches.

C. Side sloping or benching of the trench, where permitted, will begin at one foot above the top of the

pipe and will not encroach upon private property or endanger existing or future structures or underground utilities. Depth of trench, without sheathing or bracing shall comply with OSHA Regulation 1926.650.

D. The full width of the trench shall be excavated to a depth below the invert elevation of the pipe so

as to permit placing the bedding material specified on the attached drawings below the outside bottom of the pipe. Any additional depth excavated by the Contractor shall be replaced with an equal depth of cement-stabilized sand. The cost of this additional material, in place shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

E. Where necessary, excavations shall have sheathing and bracing to prevent caving. At these

locations, increase the trench width as required and leave the sheathing in place until the pipe has been laid and the backfill compacted to a depth of 2 feet over the pipe. All sheathing and bracing shall be designed to the requirements of OSHA Standard 1926, Subpart P (latest edition).

F. Sewers shall not be constructed, or sewer pipe laid in the presence of water. All water shall be

removed from the excavation sufficiently prior to the sewer placing operation to ensure a dry, firm bed on which to place the sewer and shall be maintained in such unwatered condition until all concrete and mortar is set. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing, pumping or by a well-point system as conditions warrant. There will be no separate pay for well pointing without the prior approval of the Engineer. Contractor shall include in base proposal all costs associated with de-watering, well pointing, stabilizing, etc. necessary to install all underground utilities.

G. In the event that the excavation cannot be dewatered to the point where the pipe subgrade is free

of mud, excessive wet soil, sand silt or clay with water, a seal slab shall be used in the bottom of the excavation. Such seal slab shall consist of a lean concrete mixture. The seal slab shall be a Class “D”, 5 sacks of cement per cubic yard with a minimum compressive strength of 1,750 P.S.I. at 7 days and 2,500 P.S.I. at 28 days. A precast seal slab may be used, provided that the joints of the seal slab do not occur at the joint of the pipe. Contractor shall have an option of using a three-day cylinder break test at no expense to the Owner.

H. For unstable conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing, and bracing, or where

groundwater is encountered, any additional excavation in width and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor’s expense. Portable trench boxes may be used in lieu of sheathing upon approval in writing by the Engineer. The trench box must be in accordance with OSHA Regulation 1926.650 (latest edition).

I. Use of the trench box does not relieve the Contractor of any liability for damages to person or

property. When a trench box is moved, the jointed pipe or in-place backfill shall not be disturbed.



31 23 00 - 3

J. All materials from excavation operations not required for backfilling, if considered suitable shall be placed in embankments or wasted, in accordance with Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork. All material not suitable for use in embankments will be declared surplus by the Engineer and shall become the responsibility of the Contractor to dispose of as he wishes. Such surplus material shall be promptly removed from the work following the completion of the portion of the sewer involved. No separate payment shall be made for disposal of this surplus material.

K. Unless otherwise specifically approved, Contractor shall use ladder or wheel-type trench-digging

machinery, except where hand methods must be employed to avoid damage to existing structures above or below ground, or where hand excavation is indicated.

L. Engineer may limit the amount of trench opened or partially opened at any time in advance of the

completed pipe laying operation and the amount of trench left unfilled. Open no more than 500 feet of trench at any one time.

3.2 PIPE LAYING

A. No pipe shall be laid in water or when the trench conditions or weather is unsuitable for such work, unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

B. Non-pressure concrete pipe shall be laid with the ends abutting and true to line and grade. Fit and

lay the pipe to form a smooth and uniform invert. Laying of pipe shall commence at the lowest point, so that the spigot ends point in the direction of flow. Lay cast iron pipe on firm earthen foundation with bell ends facing the direction of laying.

C. All other types of pipe shall be laid in accordance with the applicable provisions of this specification,

in accordance with the Special Provisions preceding this Subsection, or with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Cut cast iron pipe with wheel-type cutters or cold chisel. Flame cutting of cast iron pipe is not

allowed. Make cuts in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to pipe and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Field cutting of Polyvinyl Chloride shall be in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Minor deflections may be obtained in pipe joints. Contractor must obtain approval when the degree

of deflection is necessary to deflect from a straight line. Where necessary to make major deflections in concrete pipe, use sections of pipe with beveled ends for deflections not greater than five degrees. For deflections greater than five degrees, use fabricated fittings for concrete pressure pipe and use cast iron fittings for cast iron pipe.

F. When the pipe laying operation is halted, seal the open end of the pipe with a temporary plug. Plug

is to remain in place until the pipe laying operation re-commences. Standard plugs shall be inserted into bells of all dead-end pipe.

G. All underground pipe shall have a 12-gauge metallic tracer wire running the full length of the pipe.

Tracer wire shall be taped to the pipe at intervals not to exceed 15-feet using duct tape and terminate at each end above ground in a 2” PVC riser.

H. Pipe shall be installed with the labels facing upward. I. At the completion of the project, all on site storm and sanitary sewer lines shall be cleaned out

using a hydraulic jet machine in the presence of the owner and engineer. After hydro-jetting storm and sanitary sewer lines, contractor shall run video-camera through pipes and video-record each line segment in order to document proper installation.



31 23 00 - 4

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. As soon as practicable after completion of laying and jointing of pipe, backfill the trench. Not more than 200 feet of the trench shall be left open after laying the pipe.

B. Trenches shall be backfilled in accordance with drawing details and notes. Backfill material

selected from sewer trench excavation, or obtained from other sources, shall be free from stones, which will interfere with compaction and free of large lumps, which will not break down readily under compaction. Do not use material excavated in large lumps which will not break down or which cannot be spread in loose layers. Material excavated by trenching machine will generally be suitable for use as backfill. Cement stabilized sand shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 23.16 - Cement Stabilized Sand Bedding and Backfill.

C. When placing backfill in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the

trench, moisten if necessary and tamp in approximately 6-inch layers, thoroughly compacting under and on each side of the pipe to provide solid backing against the external surface of the pipe. Walking or working on the completed pipeline, except as necessary in tamping or backfilling shall not be permitted until the trench has been backfilled to at least 12-inches over the top of the pipe.

3.4 RESTORATION OF SURFACES

A. Replace or repair sidewalks, driveway culverts, inlets, curbing, gutters, shrubbery, trees, fences, sod and other like obstructions removed or disturbed, to the condition equivalent to that existing prior to commencement of this work. Use concrete having a compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi in 28 days for the replacement of curbing, gutters, inlets and sidewalks.

B. Use reasonable care in the removal and replacement of shrubbery and trees designated to be

replaced at original locations. Where at all possible, ditch alignment will be such as to minimize this work. The restoration of asphalt-topped flexible base and concrete streets shall be as specified under other items of the specifications.

3.5 CLEAN-UP

A. The Contractor shall remove from the site of the work and from public and private property temporary structures, rubbish, and waste materials, including excess excavated materials. The Contractor is responsible for disposing of all surplus earth. The pipe laying operation shall be temporarily suspended if the clean-up is falling behind as determined by the Engineer or Owner.

3.6 MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT




STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

31 23 16.16 - 1

SECTION 31 23 16.16 - STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This section describes the excavation for all structures except pipe sewers, the backfilling around completed structures and the disposal of all excess excavated material. All operations required for the proper completion of the excavation work, including sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering of excavations and compaction of backfill are included under this section.

1.2 PROTECTION

A. Before the start of earthwork operations, adequately protect existing structures, utilities, trees and shrubs and other permanent objects. Costs resulting from damage to permanent facilities due to negligence or lack of adequate protection will be charged to the Contractor. The Contractor will also be charged for damage to facilities scheduled for later removal or demolition if the damage sufficiently impairs proper operation to the extent that temporary replacement or repair is required.

1.3 PAYMENT

A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this section. Include the cost of such work in the bid form and specified in other sections of this work.

1.4 BLASTING

A. Blasting will not be permitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REGULAR BACKFILL

A. Where no other backfill is specified, use suitable soils from the excavation as backfill material. 2.2 SAND BACKFILL

A. Where sand backfill is specified, use reasonably clean bank sand from an approved source. The sand must be free from large lumps of clay, rubbish, organic matter or other deleterious substances. Not more than 12 percent by weight shall pass the 200-mesh sieve and the plasticity index shall not exceed 4.0. This backfill shall be placed a minimum of 18 inches wide around all below-grade structures.

2.3 FILTER MATERIAL BACKFILL

A. Where shown, use a mixture of concrete gravel and concrete sand. Proportion the mixture with two parts gravel to one-part sand by volume. Gravel and sand shall meet requirements of ASTM C 33. The maximum size of acceptable gravel is 1-1/2 inches.

2.4 CEMENT STABILIZED BACKFILL

A. Prepare a mixture of sand, cement and water.



31 23 16.16 - 2

B. Use washed river sand free from large clay lumps or unacceptable amounts of other foreign materials. The sand must not be darker than the standard color when subjected to a color test in accordance with ASTM C 40.

C. Required gradation of sand:

Screen Size Percent Retained 3/8-inch screen 0 percent 1/4-inch screen 0 percent - 5 percent 20 mesh screen 15 percent - 50 percent 100 mesh screen 80 percent - 100 percent

D. Use Type I cement conforming to ASTM C 150. E. Mix in a pug mill using not less than 1-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard (unless otherwise

specified) of mixture with sufficient water to hydrate the cement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation work shall be unclassified and includes removal of all types of materials encountered without exception. Make excavations to lines and grades indicated on drawings. Complete excavations within the tolerances specified. Perform all work in conformity with the rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act. 1. Shoring, Bracing, Dewatering: Provide shoring, bracing and dewatering of excavations

required to properly and safely complete the work as shown. Construct shoring and bracing to prevent the excavation from extending beyond specified or indicated limits and to protect workmen. Keep excavations dewatered by drainage, pumps or well points as necessary while work is in progress. Dewatering methods are subject to approval. Remove shoring, bracing and sheathing as excavations are backfilled in a manner to prevent injurious caving.

2. Pipe Trenches: Excavate by open cut methods. Make and maintain the sides of the trench as nearly vertical as practical. Provide shoring to maintain the sides of the trench in a vertical position and to protect workmen. Complete and shape the trench to provide free working space and to permit thorough tamping of backfill around the pipe. Grade trench bottoms accurately to provide uniform bearing on firm soil along the entire length of each pipe section. Remove rubbish, rock or debris encountered at grade to at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe. Reshape and compact the trench bottom. Working space measured from the outside of the pipe to the side of the trench must be at least 6 inches but not more that 24 inches. Provide bell holes where required for making proper connections at joints.

B. Structures Other than Pipes:

1. Wherever practicable cut all footing excavations to neat lines with a tolerance of minus 1 inch or plus 3 inches and place concrete to bear against earth sides. Cut all excavations a sufficient distance from walls, shafts or similar elements of structures to allow for placing and removing forms and for inspection. Make all excavations at a minimum slope of 1:1 with 3 feet cut outside of footing lines or wall lines except as shown or specifically authorized.

2. Carry all excavations to the elevations shown and to deeper levels as directed when suitable foundation soils are not encountered at plan depth. Remove all pockets of soft or otherwise unstable soils and replace with concrete or with suitable well compacted soil as directed.

3. Fill all unauthorized excessive excavation with concrete at no change in the contract sum.



31 23 16.16 - 3

4. Protect all open excavations from rainfall or excessive drying. Provide pumps and other equipment as required to keep excavations reasonably free of water at all times and completely free of water during placement of concrete.

5. Do not remove the last 4-inch depth of excavation for slabs or footing until reinforcing steel and concrete are ready to be placed.

6. For footings founded on rock, hard shale or similar material, remove all loose material. Clean and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped or serrated as directed. Clean out seams and fill with concrete at the time footing concrete is placed.

3.2 BACKFILL

A. Complete backfill to the surface of natural ground or to the lines and grade shown on drawings. Except where special materials are requested, use suitable soils from the excavation as backfill material. Do not use peat or other organic matter, silt, muck, debris or similar materials. Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified. 1. Backfill at Structures: Place backfill as promptly as practicable after completion of each

structure or portion of a structure. Do not, however, place backfill against concrete walls or similar structures until concrete has been cured at least seven days. Remove concrete forms before starting to backfill and remove shoring and bracing as the work progresses. Take care to prevent any wedging action of backfill against the structure. Step cut or serrate the slopes bounding the excavation as required to prevent wedging.

2. Backfilling of Pipe Trenches: a. Refer to appropriate paragraphs of SECTION 31 23 00 – CONSTRUCTION OF

UNDERGROUND UTILITIES. 3. Compaction of Backfill:

a. Refer to appropriate paragraphs of SECTION 31 23 00 – CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES.

3.3 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL

A. Dispose of excess or unsuitable material from the excavation off the job site.



CEMENT STABILIZED SAND BEDDING AND BACKFILL 31 23 23.16 - 1

SECTION 31 23 23.16 - CEMENT STABILIZED SAND BEDDING AND BACKFILL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cement stabilized sand to be used for backfilling and bedding as called for on the drawings, in other parts of the specifications, or as directed by the Engineer.

1.2 PERFORMANCE

A. The sand cement mixtures shall produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of one hundred pounds per square inch (100 psi) in forty eight hours, when compacted to ninety five percent (95%) of Standard Proctor density (ASTM Method D558), without additional moisture control and when cured in plastic bags at a temperature of 73.4º F at plus or minus 3º F and tested in accordance with ASTM D1633.

B. Random samples of the delivered product will be taken in the field at the direction of the Engineer

and tested at the Owners expense. 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cement shall be Type I Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150. Sand shall be clean durable sand containing not more than the following: 1. Deleterious Materials:

a. Clay lumps, when tested in accordance with ASTM C142 shall be less than 0.5 percent. Lightweight pieces, when tested in accordance with ASTM C123 shall be less than 5.0 percent. Organic impurities when tested in accordance with ASTM C40 shall not show a color darker than the standard color.

2. The plasticity index shall be six (6) or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. 3. Sand shall be free of organic matter and deleterious substances and shall meet the

following gradation requirement.

Square Sieve Size % Passing, By Weight 3/8" 100% No. 200 5 - 30%

4. Water shall be clean and clear, free of oils, acids, alkalis, organic matter or other

deleterious substances and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C1602. 2.2 SAND-CEMENT MIXTURE PRODUCT

A. The mixture shall consist of not less than 1.5 sacks of Portland cement per cubic yard (1.1 sacks per ton) of material mixture as placed. The mixture shall contain sufficient water to hydrate the cement.


CEMENT STABILIZED SAND BEDDING AND BACKFILL 31 23 23.16 - 2

B. The cement, sand and water shall be mixed in a pug mill type mixer, which meets the approval of the Engineer. It shall be mixed for a minimum period of two minutes per batch.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION

A. The sand cement mixture shall be placed in maximum eight (8) inch thick lifts, loose measure, and thoroughly rodded and tamped around the pipe, boxes, structures, and paving sections. Placement and compaction shall be performed in a manner that will thoroughly fill all voids without placing undue strain on or displacement of the structure.

B. Cement stabilized sand backfill below the top of sewers, manholes, inlets or other structures shall

be placed equally along all sides of the structure. Cement stabilized sand backfill/bedding shall be placed in a manner that will completely fill all voids in the trench. Should compaction be required to fill all voids in the areas described, hand operated tampers may be used.

C. Materials not placed and compacted within four (4) hours after mixing shall be rejected. Do not

place or compact sand-cement mixtures in standing or free water. D. Cement stabilized sand backfill/bedding that is placed in trench bottoms or all other locations

between the tops of sewer lines to the bottom of the subgrade, shall be compacted to a minimum of ninety five percent (95%) of Standard Proctor Density (ASTM Method D558), and shall apply to all areas of construction within the limits of the project.

E. In-place density tests shall be taken at each location, each day, to test the placement of

bedding/backfill material as directed by the Engineer. In-place densities shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D6938 or ASTM D1556.



LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE 31 32 13.19 - 1

SECTION 31 32 13.19 - LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This item shall consist of treating the subgrade, by the pulverizing, addition of lime, mixing and compacting the mixed material to the required depth and density, and in the amounts shown on the plans.

B. This item applies to natural ground, embankment, base or sub-base and shall be constructed to

the sections, lines and grades shown on the plans. The subgrade shall be stabilized with lime to a depth of at least 6-inches in the amount recommended by a materials engineering laboratory. The P.I. shall be determined by ASTM Method D4318.


A. The Testing Laboratory’s representative will determine the Moisture-Density Relationships in accordance with ASTM Method D698 on material secured from the roadway after stabilization with lime, for each type of material encountered.

B. The Testing Laboratory’s representative will determine the in-place density in accordance with

ASTM Method D2922 or D1556. The minimum level of testing will consist of at least three tests for each 1,000 feet per lane of roadway or 4,000 square feet (500 square yards) of embankment.


A. No separate measurement or payment will be made for materials and labor performed under this

section. Include all costs in the lump sum price. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lime for stabilization shall be classified as Type A- Hydrated Lime, or Type B- Commercial Lime Slurry, conforming to the requirements of Section 31 32 13.20 - Hydrated Lime and Lime Slurry.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Engineer prior to the beginning of construction operations. All machinery, tools and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime soil mixture free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his



work, to use the proper amount of lime, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the above requirements.

B. The subgrade shall be constructed and shaped to conform to the typical sections, lines and grades

as shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support, without displacement, the construction equipment at the density herein specified. Any wet or unstable materials below the secondary grade shall be corrected, as directed by the Engineer, by scarifying, adding lime, and compacting, or other methods until satisfactory stability is obtained. The cost of the repair of the secondary subgrade and any materials below the secondary subgrade is incidental to this Section.

C. The Contractor shall be required to proof-roll the subgrade, as directed by the Engineer, before

using the pulverizing machine and correct any soft areas that this rolling may reveal. D. Lime shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during

the same working day. The application and mixing of lime with the material shall be accomplished by the methods hereinafter described as "Dry Placing" or "Slurry Placing". When Type A, Hydrated Lime, is specified, the Contractor may use either method, unless otherwise noted on the plans.

E. When dry placing, the lime shall be spread by an approved spreader or by bag distribution at the

rates shown on the Bid Sheet, or as directed by the Engineer. F. The lime shall be distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to reduce the scattering of

lime by wind to a minimum. Lime shall not be applied when wind conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are such that blowing lime becomes objectionable to traffic or adjacent property owners. A motor grader shall not be used to spread the lime.

G. The material shall be sprinkled as directed by the Engineer, until the proper moisture content has

been secured. Where Type A, hydrated lime is specified and slurry placement is used, the Type A hydrate shall be mixed with water to form a slurry of the solids content designated by the Engineer. A minimum of two mixing passes will be required.

H. Where Type B, commercial lime slurry is to be used, it shall be of the minimum solids and purity for

the applicable grade being used. The distribution of lime shall be at the rates shown on the proposal form, or as directed by the Engineer. Proper application shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of the roadway, until the proper moisture and lime content has been secured. The distributor truck shall be equipped with an agitator, which will keep the lime and water in a uniform mixture.

I. The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved

equipment, and the mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Engineer, a homogenous friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, such that when all non-slaking aggregates retained on the 3/4-inch sieve are removed, the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM Method C136, from samples procured from the roadway.

TABLE I

Minimum Passing 1 3/4" sieve 100 Percent Minimum Passing 3/4" sieve 85 Percent

J. If gradation is achieved on the first mixing, no additional mixing is required. K. The soil lime mixture shall be sprinkled during the mixing operation as directed by the Engineer to

provide optimum moisture in the mixing. The subgrade shall be stabilized to a minimum depth of 6-inches and compacted to a minimum of 95-percent of standard proctor density (ASTM D698) at a moisture content of optimum to 3-percent above optimum.



L. During the interval of time between application and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of 6-hours, or more, or has had excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted for payment.

M. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing unless approval has been

obtained from the Engineer not to do so. The material shall be aerated and/or sprinkled as necessary, to provide the optimum moisture content. Compaction shall begin at the bottom and shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted.

N. The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved

equipment and the mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Engineer, a homogenous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from all clods or lumps. Materials containing plastic clays or other materials which will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of lime application, brought up to the proper moisture content and left to cure 48 to 96, hours as directed by the Engineer. During the curing period the material shall be kept moist as directed.

O. If a second mixing is required, the material shall be given a final mixing, using approved methods.

If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying, or the use of other approved pulverization methods, so that all non-slaking material retained on the 3/4-inch sieve is removed and the remainder of the material shall meet the gradation requirements outlined by Table I. After the second mixing has been completed, the material shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 3 days, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

P. The material shall be sprinkled and rolled, as directed by the Engineer. All irregularities,

depressions or weak spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or removing material as required and reshaping and re-compacting by sprinkling and rolling. The surface of the course shall be maintained and cured for a minimum of 3 days, prior to placing a base or surface course or until traffic is allowed to travel thereon.

Q. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the

plans shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. After each section is completed, tests as necessary will be made by the Engineer. If the material fails to meet the density requirements, it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading and the surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the plans and to the established lines and grades. Should the material, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density and finish before the next course is placed or the work is accepted, it shall be reprocessed and refinished at the expense of the Contractor.

3.2 FINISHING

A. After the final course of the lime treated subgrade has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the typical sections. The completed section shall then be finished by rolling as directed with a pneumatic tire or other suitable roller sufficiently light to prevent hair cracking. The completed section shall be moist, or emulsion cured until covered by base material, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. If the plans provide for the treated material to be sealed or covered by other courses of material, such seal or course shall be applied within 14 days after final mixing and compaction is completed, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.



LIME-FLYASH STABILIZED SUBGRADE 31 32 13.21 - 1

SECTION 31 32 13.21 - LIME-FLYASH STABILIZED SUBGRADE CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This item shall consist of treating the subgrade by the pulverizing, addition of lime flyash and/or flyash, mixing and compacting the mixed material to the required density. This item applies to natural ground and embankment and shall be constructed as specified herein and in conformity with the typical sections, lines and grades shown on the Plans.


A. The Materials Engineer will determine the Moisture-Density Relationship in accordance with ASTM Method D698, on material secured from the roadway. Samples shall be blended with Lime-Flyash in the laboratory for each type of material encountered.

B. The Materials Engineer will determine the in-place density in accordance with ASTM Method D2922

or D1556. The minimum level of testing will consist of at least three tests of 4,000 square feet (500 square yards) of subgrade.




A. Hydrated lime shall meet the requirements of ASTM C977 and SECTION 31 32 13.20 –

HYDRATED LIME AND LIME SLURRY of these Specifications. When Type B, commercial lime slurry, is specified, the Contractor shall select, prior to construction, the grade to be used and shall notify the Engineer in writing before changing from one grade to another.

B. Flyash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C618, Class C. Flyash shall also have a minimum

CaO content of 20 percent. C. Water shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation C94.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Machinery, tools and equipment for proper performance of the work shall be on the Project and approved by the Engineer prior to the beginning of construction operations.

B. All machinery, tools and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike

manner. C. Hydrated lime and flyash shall be stored and handled in closed, weatherproof containers until

immediately before distribution on the subgrade. If storage bins are used, they shall be completely enclosed. Materials in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground dampness.



D. If lime and/or flyash are furnished in trucks, each truck shall have a weight ticket from a certified

scale. E. If lime and/or flyash are furnished in bags, each bag shall bear the manufacturer's certified weight.

Bags varying more than five percent from that weight may be rejected and the average weight of the bags in any shipment, as shown by weighing 50 bags taken at random, shall not be less than the manufacturer's certified weight.

PART 3 – PRODUCTS 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

A. It is the primary requirement of this Specification to secure a complete course of treated material containing a uniform lime-flyash or flyash mixture free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth, and with a smooth surface and suitable for placing subsequent courses. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of lime and flyash, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the above requirements.

B. Before other operations are begun, the subgrade shall be graded, shaped, and compacted as

required to construct the lime-flyash or flyash treatment for materials in-place in conformance with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross sections shown on the Plans. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable material.

C. The subgrade shall be constructed and shaped to conform to the typical sections, lines and grades

as shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support, without displacement, the construction equipment at the density herein specified. Any wet or unstable materials below the secondary grade shall be corrected, as directed by the Engineer, by scarifying, adding lime and/or fly ash, and compacting, or other methods until satisfactory stability is obtained. The cost of the repair of the secondary subgrade and any materials below the secondary subgrade is incidental to this Section.

D. The Contractor shall be required to proof-roll the subgrade, as directed by the Engineer, before using the pulverizing machine and correct any soft areas that this rolling may reveal.

E. The Contractor shall be required to use a cutting and pulverizing machine that will remove the

subgrade material accurately to the secondary subgrade; and pulverize the material at the same time. He will not be required to expose the secondary grade nor windrow the material. However, the Contractor shall be required to roll the subgrade, before using the pulverizing machine and correct any soft areas that this rolling may reveal. This method will be permitted only where a machine is provided which will ensure that the material is cut uniformly to the proper depth and which has cutters that will plane the secondary grade to a smooth surface over the entire width of the cut.

F. The cost of the repair of the secondary subgrade and any materials below the secondary subgrade

is incidental to this item. G. When lime-flyash stabilization is required it shall be a two-phase operation, with the lime placed

and allowed to cure, before the flyash stabilization begins. H. Application of the lime and the subsequent curing shall be in accordance with SECTION 31 32

13.19 - LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE. After the subgrade has cured for the time required by that Specification, then flyash stabilization may begin. Flyash stabilization shall be in accordance with this Specification. Unless otherwise noted, the thickness of stabilization shall be 6-inches.



I. The machine will be of such design that a visible indication is given at all times that the machine is cutting to the proper depth.

J. Lime shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operation can be completed during

the same working day.

K. The sequence of application of lime and flyash, with the material, shall be accomplished by the methods hereinafter described as "Dry Placing", or "Slurry Placing". When Type A, hydrated lime is specified, the Contractor may use either method.

L. The lime or flyash shall be spread by a spreader or by bag distribution at the rate directed by the

Engineer. M. For dry placing, the lime or flyash shall be distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to

reduce the scattering of lime or flyash by wind to a minimum. Lime or flyash shall not be applied when wind conditions are such that blowing lime or flyash becomes objectionable to traffic or adjacent property owners. A motor grader shall not be used to spread the lime or flyash.

N. The materials shall be sprinkled until the proper moisture content has been secured. However,

initial mixing after the addition of lime or flyash will be accomplished dry or with a minimum of water to prevent lime and/or flyash balls.

O. For slurry placing, the lime or flyash shall be mixed with water in vehicles with approved distributors

and applied as a thin water suspension or slurry. P. Type B, commercial lime slurry, shall be applied with a lime percentage not less than that applicable

for the grade used. The distribution of lime and flyash shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper moisture and lime or flyash content has been secured. The distributor vehicle shall be equipped with an agitator, which will keep the lime or flyash and water in a uniform mixture.

Q. The mixing procedure shall be the same for "Dry Placing or "Slurry Placing", as hereinafter

described. R. The material shall be uniformly mixed by approved methods. If the soil binder lime mixture contains

clods, they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that when all non-slaking aggregates retained on the 3/4" sieve are removed, the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements when tested at the field moisture condition, or dry by laboratory sieves in accordance with ASTM Method C136.

Minimum Passing 1-3/4 sieve 100 percent Minimum Passing 3/4 sieve 85 percent

S. It is the intent of this Specification that lime and flyash shall be spread as directed by the Engineer. T. The amount of lime and flyash used shall be as directed by the Engineer. U. During the interval of time between application and mixing, hydrated lime or flyash that has been

exposed to excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted for payment. Spreading, mixing, compaction and finishing for lime-flyash stabilized subgrade should be completed during daylight hours of the same day.

V. If flyash only is to be used without lime, the following mixing procedures shall apply.



W. The raw material shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and the mixing continued until a homogeneous, friable mixture is obtained, free from all clods or lumps.

X. The flyash shall be distributed at a uniform rate and in such manner as to reduce the scattering of

flyash by the wind to a minimum. Flyash shall not be applied when wind conditions, are such that blowing flyash becomes objectionable to traffic or adjacent property owners. A motor grader shall not be used to spread flyash.

Y. The material and flyash shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved

equipment and the mixing continued until a homogeneous, friable mixture of materials is obtained, free from all clods or lumps. If the soil binder-flyash mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that when all nonslaking aggregates, retained on the 3/4" sieve are removed, the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements when tested at the field moisture condition or dry by laboratory sieves using ASTM Method C136:

Minimum Passing 1-3/4 sieve 100 percent

Minimum Passing 3/4 sieve 85 percent

Z. Flyash shall be applied only to such an area that all the operations can be continuous and completed in daylight.

AA. During the interval of time between application and mixing, flyash that has been exposed to the

open air for a period of 6 hours or more, or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted for payment. It is recommended that the mixing and compaction of flyash stabilized subgrade by completed within 2 hours in order to take advantage of rapid initial set characteristics.

BB. Mixing after the addition of flyash will be accomplished dry or with a minimum of water to prevent

flyash balls. CC. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after adding and mixing of the last stabilizing

agent and be completed within 6 hours. The material shall be aerated or sprinkled as necessary to provide the optimum moisture. Compaction shall begin at the bottom and shall continue until the entire depth of the mixture is uniformly compacted to 95 percent of standard proctor density (ASTM D698), to a minimum depth of 6 inches. In addition to the requirements it shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under the construction equipment. Throughout the entire operation the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown of the Plans and to the established lines and grades.

DD. After the final layer of the lime-flyash or flyash treated subgrade has been compacted, it shall be

brought up to the required lines and grades, and in accordance with the typical sections. EE. The resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and skinned by a power

grader to achieve final grade, removing all loosened stabilized material from the section. The surface shall be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller, adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling. If aggregate larger than a 3/4" screen is present in the mixture, one complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the skinning operation. Surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure to provide a dense, uniform surface, free of surface compaction planes. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at optimum during all finishing operations. Surface compaction and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce, in not more than 2 hours, a smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks, ridges or loose material conformity to the crown, grade and line shown on the Plans.



FF. After the lime-flyash or flyash treated course has been finished as specified herein, the surface

shall be protected against rapid drying by either of the following curing methods for a period of not less than 3 days or as directed by the Engineer. 1. Maintain in a thorough and continuously moist condition by sprinkling. 2. Apply an asphalt membrane to the treated course, immediately after same is completed.

The asphalt material for the membrane shall be MC-30. Asphaltic material shall meet the requirements of Item 300, Oils, Asphalts and Emulsions, of the TxDOT "Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges". The asphalt shall completely cover and seal the total surface of the base and fill all voids. If the Contractor elects to use this method, it shall be his responsibility to protect the asphalt membrane from being picked up by traffic.

GG. The asphalt membrane may remain in place when the proposed surface or other base courses are

applied. HH. Completed sections of lime-flyash or flyash treated material in-place may be opened immediately

to local traffic and to construction equipment and to all traffic after the curing period, provided the lime-flyash or flyash treated course has hardened sufficiently to prevent marring or distorting the surface by equipment or traffic, and after the minimum 3 day curing period. If the Plans provide for the treated material to be sealed or covered by other courses of material such seal or course shall be applied within 14 days after compaction unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Should the material, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density and finish before the next course is placed, it shall be reprocessed and refinished at the expense of the Contractor.



TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM

31 41 00 - 1

SECTION 31 41 00 - TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This item is for furnishing all labor and materials for installation and maintenance of a trench safety system.

B. For any trench excavation in materials other than solid rock, greater than five (5) feet in depth, or

where shown on the plans, the contractor shall provide a trench safety system. This trench safety system shall be in accordance with the appropriate requirements established in the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Safety and Health Regulations, Part 1926, Subpart P - "Excavations, Trenching and Shoring" (latest edition).

1.2 MEASUREMENT

A. Measurement of the "Trench Safety System" for gravity pipelines and boxes and for pressure pipelines shall be made by the linear foot of trench measured along the centerline of the trench.

1.3 PAYMENT


PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION Not Used



DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 31 63 29 - 1

SECTION 31 63 29 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2


SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Dry-installed drilled piers.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Unit prices are included in Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices."

B. Drilled Piers: Actual net volume of drilled piers in place and approved. Actual length,shaft diameter, and bell diameter if applicable, may vary, to coincide with elevationswhere satisfactory bearing strata are encountered. These dimensions may also varywith actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an independent testing andinspecting agency. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, basedon design dimensions for shafts and bells.1. Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers and, for each pier, the design

length from top elevation to bottom of shaft, extended through the bell, ifapplicable, and the diameter of shaft and bell.

2. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required forexcavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill,testing and inspecting, and other items for complete drilled-pier installation.

C. Trial Drilled Pier: Unit price as indicated for drilled pier, including backfilling.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures whencharacteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or othercircumstances warrant adjustments.1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, supporting,and placing.



D. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

E. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Other Informational Submittals: 1. Record drawings.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in drilled-pier work.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077, ASTM D 3740, and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

C. Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with ACI 336.1 unless modified in this Section.


A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier operations. 1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered

during excavation, adapt drilling procedure if necessary to prevent damage to utilities. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping services and facilities in operation without interruption. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.

B. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify all affected parties including Owner no fewer than five (5) days in advance

of proposed interruption of utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Owner's written permission.

C. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary

for drilled piers. 2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual.



D. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data. 1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with

Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer Section 03 20 00.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Refer Section 03 30 00 and Structural General Notes.

2.3 STEEL CASINGS

A. Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 283, Grade C, or ASTM A 36, carbon-steel plate, with joints full-penetration welded according to AWS D1.1.

B. Corrugated-Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 929, steel sheet, zinc coated.

2.4 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland cement according to ACI 301 limits as if concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals.

C. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. As indicated in Structural General Notes.


A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.



1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled-pier operations.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to bearing elevations regardless of character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. Obstructions: Unclassified excavation may include removal of unanticipated

boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for removal of obstructions.

2. Obstructions: Unclassified excavated materials may include removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. Payment for removing obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work will be according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

B. Prevent surface water from entering excavated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage facilities.

C. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of excavation. 1. Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane within 1:12 tolerance. 2. Remove water from excavated shafts before concreting.

D. Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Architect. 1. Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by

Architect. 2. Payment for additional authorized excavation will be according to Contract

provisions for changes in the Work.

E. Excavate shafts for closely spaced drilled piers and for drilled piers occurring in fragile or sand strata only after adjacent drilled piers are filled with concrete and allowed to set.



F. Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to prevent water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses; and to maintain stability of shaft walls. 1. Remove temporary casings, maintained in plumb position, during concrete

placement and before initial set of concrete.

G. Bells: Excavate bells for drilled piers to shape, base thickness, and slope angle indicated. Excavate bottom of bells to level plane and remove loose material before placing concrete.

H. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances. 1. If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective

construction. Submit design and construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding.


A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit.

D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting. Maintain minimum cover over reinforcement.

E. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final concrete placement.

F. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical damage and exposure to weather.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and approval of shaft by Owner's independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Construct a construction joint if concrete placement is delayed more than one

hour. Level top surface of concrete. Before placing remainder of concrete, clean surface laitance, roughen, and slush concrete with commercial bonding agent or with sand-cement grout mixed at ratio of 1:1.

B. Dry Method: Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement.



1. Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without striking reinforcement, place concrete with chutes, tremies, or pumps.

2. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete.

C. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain at least a 60-inch head of concrete above bottom of casing. 1. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing.

D. Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation.

E. Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from frost, freezing, or low temperatures that could cause physical damage or reduced strength. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators.

F. If hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of concrete at no more than 90 deg F.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Drilled piers. 2. Excavation. 3. Concrete.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Drilled-Pier Tests and Inspections: For each drilled pier, before concrete placement. 1. Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers

indicated have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths and bearing capacities will be determined by testing and inspecting agency. Final evaluations and approval of data will be determined by Architect.

D. Concrete Tests and Inspections: ASTM C 172 except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-

strength test but no fewer than one test for each concrete load. 2. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; 1 test hourly when air temperature is 40

deg F and below and 80 deg F and above, and 1 test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

3. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard 6-inch x 12-inch cylinders for each compressive-strength test unless otherwise indicated.



Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

4. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each drilled pier but not more than one set for each truck load. One specimen will be tested at 7 days, 2 specimens will be tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen will be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

5. If frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing will be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

6. If strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

8. Report test results in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. List Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests in reports of compressive-strength tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency will make additional tests of concrete if test results indicate that slump, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. a. Continuous coring of drilled piers may be required, at Contractor's

expense, if temporary casings have not been withdrawn within specified time limits or if observations of placement operations indicate deficient concrete quality, presence of voids, segregation, or other possible defects.

11. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

E. An excavation, concrete, or a drilled pier will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports for each drilled pier as follows: 1. Actual top and bottom elevations. 2. Actual drilled-pier diameter at top, bottom, and bell. 3. Top of rock elevation. 4. Description of soil materials. 5. Description, location, and dimensions of obstructions. 6. Final top centerline location and deviations from requirements. 7. Variation of shaft from plumb. 8. Shaft excavating method. 9. Design and tested bearing capacity of bottom. 10. Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout.



11. Ground-water conditions and water-infiltration rate, depth, and pumping. 12. Description, purpose, length, wall thickness, diameter, tip, and top and bottom

elevations of temporary or permanent casings. Include anchorage and sealing methods used and condition and weather tightness of splices if any.

13. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground, and means of control.

14. Bell dimensions and variations from original design. 15. Date and time of starting and completing excavation. 16. Inspection report. 17. Condition of reinforcing steel and splices. 18. Position of reinforcing steel. 19. Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays. 20. Elevation of concrete during removal of casings. 21. Locations of construction joints. 22. Concrete volume. 23. Concrete testing results. 24. Remarks, unusual conditions encountered, and deviations from requirements.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.



MILLING ASPHALT PAVEMENT

32 01 16.71 - 1

SECTION 32 01 16.71 - MILLING ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This item consists of milling existing asphalt surfacing and base course material to the lines and grades as shown on the drawings or established, by the Engineer.


A. No separate measurement or payment will be made for materials and labor performed under this section. Include costs in the lump sum price.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

A. The existing asphalt surfacing and base course material at points shown on the drawings or designated by the Engineer shall be milled off to the depth and width shown by the lines and grades on the drawings or established by the Engineer. The existing material to be removed shall be milled by means of rotary cutting blades, until it is broken into particles small enough to be easily removed. Prior to and after the milling process, all dirt and foreign material shall be removed from the pavement surface by power brooming or other approved methods.



PVC – GEOMEMBRANE LINER FOR TURF SYSTEMS

32 05 19.18 - 1

SECTION 32 05 19.18 - PVC - GEOMEMBRANE LINER FOR TURF SYSTEMS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and appurtenances required to complete the installation of all geomembrane, complete with appurtenances, as shown, specified or required by the Drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. D 618 Conditioning 2. D 751 Hydrostatic Burst Test, Section 33, Procedure A 3. D 792 Specific Gravity 4. D 882 Tensile Properties 5. D 1004 Standard Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting 6. D 1203 Volatile Loss 7. D 1204 Dimensional Stability 8. D 1239 Water Extraction 9. D 1790 Low Temperature Impact 10. D 4354-99 Standard Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing 11. D 4551 PVC Plastic Concealed Water Containment Membrane 12. D 4873-01 Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls

and Samples 13. D 5199-01 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Nominal Thickness of Geosynthetics 14. D 5321-92 (1997) Standard Test Method for Determining the Coefficient of Soil and

Geosynthetic or Geosynthetic and Geosynthetic Friction by the Direct Shear Method 15. D 5820-95 Standard Practice for Pressurized Air Channel Evaluation of Dual Seamed

Geomembranes 16. D 6214 Chemical Seam Evaluation 17. D 6243-98 Standard Test Method for Determining the Internal and Interface Shear

Resistance of Geosynthetic Clay Liner by the Direct Shear Method 18. D 6392-99 Standard Test Method for Determining the Integrity of Nonreinforced

Geomembrane Seams Produced Using Thermo-Fusion Methods 19. D 7176 Standard Specification for Non-Reinforced Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

Geomembranes used in Buried Applications. 20. D 7177 Standard Specification for Air Channel Evaluation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Dual

Track Seamed Geomembranes

B. Environmental Protection, Inc. 1. Quality Control Manual for Fabrication and Installation of PVC Geomembranes. January 1,

2006.

C. The most current version of the specified test method shall be followed by the MANUFACTURER, GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR or authorized testing laboratory.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Value – Property value representing the lowest individual allowable value obtained when tested according to the specified test method. This applies to individual readings, such as thickness; or where only one specimen is tested for the specified parameter.



32 05 19.18 - 2

B. Minimum Average Value – Property value representing the lowest allowable value for the average

of results for the specimens tested. C. Nominal Value – Property value that is representative of a measurable property, determined under

a set of prescribed test conditions, by which a product may be described. D. Lot - For the purposes of this project, a “Lot” will be defined as a single run of geosynthetic material

from the same production facility, where the tooling and raw materials of production have not changed during manufacturing.

E. Roll - A quantity geomembrane rolled up to form a single package as supplied from the

manufacturer F. Sheet - A part of the manufacture’s geomembrane material cut from the roll. G. Panel - A series of geomembrane sheets fabricated together to make a larger unit, as supplied by

a fabricator usually folded onto a pallet or folded then rolled on a core. H. Manufacturer - A company that takes raw materials and calendars or extrudes them into

geomembrane rolls I. Fabricator - a company that converts geomembrane rolls into panels J. Installer - a company that installs PVC geomembrane panels in field applications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER all items included in this Article. Submittals shall be provided as follows: 1. With the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR’s BID:

a. A project reference list documenting the experience of the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR on a minimum of 5 projects consisting of at least 10 million square feet of installed PVC geomembrane.

b. A copy of the Fabricator’s Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) Plan for the complete geomembrane fabrication process.

c. A schedule of operations, including means and methods of installation. d. The name of the fabricator of the geomembrane panels to be used for the project

and the proposed method of joining adjacent geomembrane panels.

2. At least 15 days prior to delivery of geomembrane to the site, unless otherwise noted below: a. Shop drawings, including proposed panel diagram and details of proposed work,

pipe boots, and details of sealing around all necessary geomembrane penetrations, to be submitted at least 15 days prior to delivery of geomembrane to the site. The panel diagram must depict and/or note the planned number and orientation of panels, the panel sizes, seam orientation, placement of seams in corners, treatment of tee seams and the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR’s preferred sequence of panel placement. The PVC panels shall be orientated in a manner that minimizes seams. The ENGINEER, prior to geomembrane installation must approve the panel diagram. The ENGINEER, in writing, prior to altering the installation, must approve proposed revisions to the panel diagram.

b. Geomembrane - Manufacturing Quality Control (MQC) data (Material Certifications) for the geomembrane to be delivered to the site. The reports shall include the quality control test results obtained during the manufacture of the material. In the event material is delivered to the site prior to the receipt of the MQC certificates, the material without certificates will be stored separately from the



32 05 19.18 - 3

material with certificates. Material with unacceptable MQC data will be segregated from approved material and shall be marked for rejection. The geomembrane will be rejected if it is found to have defects, rips, holes, flaws, deterioration or other damage deemed unacceptable by the ENGINEER.

c. Geomembrane Sample - Samples of the proposed geomembrane shall be sent to the OWNER for interface shear testing within 5 days after the OWNER makes such request. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the quantity and dimensions of the samples with the OWNER.

3. At least 15 days prior to installation:

a. Resumes of geomembrane crew; including, Supervisor, QC Manager, and Master Seamer. The resumes shall include prior experience in installing PVC geomembrane. Individual geomembrane crew members will be subject to the approval of the ENGINEER and OWNER.

b. A copy of the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR’s standard operating procedure (SOP) for operating an ATV on site, particularly with respect to specific uses of the ATV and the prevention of damage to materials.

c. Field tensiometer calibration certificate showing that the equipment to be used for shear/peel testing in the field as been calibrated by a qualified individual within the previous 6 months.

4. During Installation Submitted Daily:

a. Completed Subgrade Acceptance Form, as endorsed by the ENGINEER, prior to geomembrane deployment in any area.

b. Construction progress reports clearly showing geomembrane placed by date. c. Passing and failing test results for trial seams. d. Documentation of passing and failing destructive and nondestructive testing of

installed seams.

5. Within 5 days after completion: a. Summary and log of all field quality control work completed by the

GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR. b. Certification statement signed by the Supervisor that geomembrane installation is

complete and in accordance with these Specifications, with details of any changes or exceptions noted.

c. Statement of material and installation warranties.

B. The above-noted requirements shall apply to all shop-fabricated materials and those items specified for fabrication in the field.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall protect the work described in this Section before, during, and after installation, and shall protect the installed work specified in other Sections, as well as work completed by the OWNER.

B. Geomembrane labeling, shipment and storage shall follow ASTM D4551 as modified according to

this Specification. C. Product labels shall be placed on the top of panels such that they can be seen, clearly showing the

fabricator or supplier name, product description, panel number, and panel dimensions. D. Each panel of PVC shall include any additional information required to allow the ENGINEER to

relate that panel with the manufacturing quality control and raw material quality assurance documentation. Additionally, if any special handling is required, it shall be so marked on the outside surface of the wrapping.



32 05 19.18 - 4

E. During storage, the geomembrane shall be placed on a stable, relatively flat, dry, well-drained surface. The geomembrane pallets shall not be placed on objects that may cause deformation of the geomembrane panels. Adequate space shall be left between stored panels, such that panel labels can be examined. The geomembrane shall be protected from the following: 1. Site construction damage. 2. Chemicals that are strong acids or bases. 3. Flames, sparks, geomembrane temperatures in excess of 150° F. 4. Any environmental condition that might damage the geomembrane.

F. Panel numbers on partially used panels must be maintained such that each panel number can be

readily identified prior to deployment of the remaining portions of the panel. G. If the ENGINEER determines the geomembrane is damaged, the GEOSYNTHETICS

CONTRACTOR shall make all repairs and replacements in a timely manner, so as to prevent delays in the progress of the work.

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL

A. The geomembrane sheet shall consist of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resin in amounts greater than 50% of the total polymer content suitably compounded with plasticizers, stabilizers, additives, and pigments, to satisfy the physical property requirements.

B. The ENGINEER shall conduct conformance testing on the geomembrane. The GEOSYNTHETICS

CONTRACTOR shall, at no additional cost to the OWNER, provide whatever reasonable assistance the ENGINEER may require in obtaining samples for conformance testing. Geosynthetic material sampling frequency shall be in accordance with ASTM D4354, unless determined otherwise by the ENGINEER. A qualified laboratory with GAI-LAP accreditation shall conduct conformance testing.

C. Conformance testing will be at the expense of the OWNER, unless the tests show the material

does not comply with the Specifications, in which case the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall pay the cost of re-sampling and testing.

D. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the quality of the material

provided. Should any of the tests performed on the material yield unsatisfactory results, the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR will be responsible for replacing the material with satisfactory materials without delay to the project or cost to the OWNER.

2.2 GEOMEMBRANE

ASTM D7176 Standard Specification for Non-Reinforced Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Geomembranes used in Buried Applications.



32 05 19.18 - 5



32 05 19.18 - 6

*FTB = Film Tearing Bond *MD = Machine Direction *TD = Transverse Direction Notes: 1. Certified properties are tested by lot as specified in ASTM D-7176. 2. Metric values are converted from US values and are rounded to the available

significant digits. 3. Modifications or further details of test are described in ASTM D-7176. 4. Index properties are tested once per formulation as specified in ASTM D-7176.

A. Geomembrane Conformance Testing - The ENGINEER shall take samples of the geomembrane

panel for conformance testing. Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be three feet long by the roll width and shall not include the outer wrap. The ENGINEER or authorized representative shall mark the machine direction on the samples with an arrow. 1. Unless otherwise specified, conformance samples shall be taken at a rate of one per

100,000 square feet. An appropriate number of samples, as determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with ASTM D4354 will be taken. The ENGINEER will ship these samples directly to the CQA laboratory.

2. Geomembrane conformance samples selected by the ENGINEER may be tested for any properties specified in Article 2.3, but shall as a minimum be tested for the following:

3. Non-conforming material will not be used in the work. In the event nonconforming results are obtained from the laboratory, the nearest numbered rolls on each side of the non-conforming roll shall be sampled and tested for the full suite of conformance tests, until the extent of nonconformance is established, at no cost to the OWNER. The owner reserves the right to reject the lot of rolls at any stage of extended sampling and testing.



32 05 19.18 - 7

B. Interface Shear Testing - Interface shear strength testing of the geomembrane and related materials is the responsibility of the OWNER. The results must comply with the criteria determined by the OWNER, as specified in the Construction Drawings. All testing must meet the minimum requirements, and the analysis of those results must be completed by the ENGINEER prior to installation of the materials. Testing for geosynthetic to geosynthetic, or geosynthetic to soil interface, shall be conducted according to the current version of ASTM D 5321-92 (97). Testing for interfaces involving geosynthetic clay liner (GCL) shall be conducted according to the current version of ASTM D 6243-98.

2.3 FACTORY FABRICATION

A. All completed factory seams are 100% inspected. Factory seams will be visually inspected for full seam continuity over their full length. Any areas that do not meet the specified requirements shall be removed and repaired per section.

B. Destructive tests will be performed to verify that the seam strength requirements of the

specifications are met. Random samples shall be taken at a minimum of every 3,000 lineal feet of factory seam or once per factory panel fabricated, which ever is more frequent, and the following quality assurance tests will be performed on each sample: 1. Thickness 2. bonded seam strength (shear strength) 3. peel adhesion

C. The sample shall be cut into ten one-inch-wide specimens. Five peel and five bonded seam

specimens are removed. Five specimens shall be tested for bonded seam strength (bss) and five for peel adhesion. To be acceptable, the average of five test specimens for peel and the average of five test specimens for bonded seam strength must meet the minimum peak load requirements of factory seams as follows: 1. Bonded Seam Strength: One-inch strips cut with the weld centrally located are tested by

stressing the weld in a "shear" configuration. That is, the top sheet is stressed in relation to the bottom sheet in a direction away from the weld. A pass result occurs when the specimen averages meet the minimum peak load requirements stated in the contract (usually 80% of specified sheet strength). A failure occurs when the weld separates or the material breaks at a peak load less than the minimum requirements. The test result to be reported will be the average of the peak loads recorded for each of the five specimens.

2. Peel Adhesion: One-inch strips cut with the weld centrally located are tested by stressing the top sheet in relation to the overlapped edge of the lower sheet in an effort to peel the weld away. Each specimen will be peeled one inch along the seam length. A pass result occurs when the specimen meets the minimum peak load requirements stated in the contract. A failure occurs when the weld peels at a peak load less than the specification without film tearing bond. The test result to be reported is the average of the peak loads recorded for each of the four specimens.

D. Each test will be identified by panel serial number and the manufacturer's roll number. These tests shall be performed in the fabricator’s laboratory.

E. Prior to installation of the geomembrane at the site, the fabricator will provide to the ENGINEER,

copies of manufacturer material certifications and a copy of quality control test results for all panels to be supplied, verifying conformance with this specification and the requirements as represented in ASTM D 7176 specification. The location of any defects and repairs and all necessary retesting results will also be documented in the report.

F. When a seam sample is removed from the panel being fabricated the resulting hole will be repaired

with a patch with a minimum of a one-inch bonded area around the patch, and the patch will be rounded on all corners.



32 05 19.18 - 8

G. Factory fabricated geomembrane panels are packaged accordion folded on a sturdy wooden pallet designed for forklift truck access. Smaller panels (i.e., less than 500 lbs.) can be rolled on a fiber core and placed on a pallet.

H. All panels will be packaged with a protective, black stretch wrap or cardboard cover to protect the

panel from weather or shipping damage. 2.4 GEOMEMBRANE PENETRATION BOOTS

A. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall furnish all geomembrane penetration boots and other materials required for completion of the geomembrane installation. All geomembrane boots required for the project shall be factory prefabricated boots. The geomembrane shall be of the same thickness as the geomembrane panels.

B. Geomembrane penetrations are to be constructed only at the locations shown on the Plans. The

GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR is cautioned that no deviation in the quantity or configuration of geomembrane penetrations will be accepted without the advance written approval of the ENGINEER.

C. All penetrations through the geomembrane shall be thoroughly and securely sealed. The seal

between the geomembrane and the pipe shall be without any detectable leakage. D. In attaching the geomembrane penetration boot in the field, no field seams will be allowed in

locations or configurations that do not allow for Construction Quality Control testing. Visual observation is not considered a sole acceptable method for in-field quality control.

E. Where clamps, fasteners, gasket seals or sealants are used, the GEOSYNTHETICS

CONTRACTOR shall use only materials that are compatible with the geomembrane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE PREPARATION

A. All required grading, grooming and construction quality assurance (CQA) testing on any low permeability soil or GCL to be covered by the geomembrane shall be complete and accepted by the ENGINEER prior to geomembrane placement.

B. The surface to be covered by the geomembrane shall be cleared of sharp objects, angular stones,

sticks, or any materials that may contribute to punctures, shearing, rupturing or tearing of the geosynthetic materials. The geomembrane subgrade shall have a smooth, finished surface, free from pockets, holes, ruts, and discontinuities that, in the judgment of the ENGINEER, will cause bridging of the material. The subgrade shall be inspected for unsuitable areas or soft spots before the geomembrane is placed, and additional surface preparation will be required to eliminate any unsuitable areas as determined by the ENGINEER.

C. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall carefully and completely inspect the

subgrade surface immediately prior to the deployment of each geomembrane panel. No geomembrane shall be placed on unsuitable subgrade surface, or without the ENGINEER’s written approval. The ENGINEER and the GEOSYNTHETIC CONTRACTOR’s Quality Control (QC) inspector shall furnish their signatures on a Subgrade Acceptance Log prior to the installation of each panel or series of panels placed on a daily basis.

D. Under no condition shall the geomembrane be placed over standing water on the subgrade.

3.2 SEAMING METHODS



32 05 19.18 - 9

A. A six-inch-wide overlap must be cleaned of all dust, dirt or foreign debris no more than 30 minutes prior to welding. Only clean, soft rags will be used for cleaning. If mud has adhered to the sheet surface overlap area, it will be removed with clean water and allowed to dry prior to seaming.

B. During the cleaning operation, the sheet will be inspected for defective areas which must be

removed and/or repaired prior to seaming. The seaming operation requires a solid, smooth subsurface. Subsurface voids, hard nodules, rocks, soft areas, or unsuitable conditions will be removed or repaired prior to seaming during subgrade preparation.

C. Seaming cannot be conducted in the presence of standing water. Wet surfaces must be allowed to

dry. A slip sheet or seaming board may be used to lift the geomembrane above damp surfaces. If wind conditions contaminate the seaming area or displace the geomembrane sheets, temporary ballast and additional cleaning procedures will be required.

D. The geomembrane panels shall be joined utilizing approved seaming methods. Dual-track fusion

welding shall be the required method on all seams where it is feasible. Chemical welds shall be made only were approved by the ENGINEER.

E. All geomembrane surfaces that are to become a seam interface are to be free of dust, dirt, excess

moisture, or any other condition that may affect the quality of the seam. F. Seaming will not be allowed during rain or snowfall unless proper precautions are made to allow

the seam to be made on dry subgrade and geomembrane materials. If weather conditions are not satisfactory, panels will not be put into place. If panels are placed and pulled out, the installation crew will do what is necessary to finish or secure those individual panels that day.

G. The field seams shall be produced using one of the following methods:

1. Dual-Track Thermal Fusion Weld – All field seams shall be fused using Dual-Track Thermal Fusion Welding. A seam produced by melting the two intimate surfaces by running a hot metal wedge or hot air device between the surfaces, followed immediately by pressure to form a homogeneous bond. This seam has a center air channel for non-destructive testing of the seam. Panels to be seamed shall be overlapped sufficiently to allow proper destructive testing of seams. The CONTRACTOR shall mark the liner where the Dual-Track Fusion Welding machine settings are adjusted (including speed, temperature and pressure). Measurable setting values shall be indicated on the liner.

2. Chemical Fusion Weld – Chemical Fusion Welding shall only be used for repairs and detail work. All field seams will be a minimum of 2 inches wide. A sufficient amount of chemical fusion agent will be applied that, upon compressing the seam surfaces together, a thin excess of chemical fusion agent will be forced out. A high durometer rubber, nylon or steel roller will be used to compress the seam surfaces together until a bond is formed. Roller action will be at a parallel direction to the seam's edge so that excessive amounts of chemical fusion agent will be purged from between the sheets. Trapped chemicals should be rolled out of the seaming area. Care will be exerted in applying the chemical fusion agent. A continuous wet layer of chemical fusion agent is necessary to prevent a leak at the tie - in point between the last chemical fusion agent application and the next. If the chemical fusion agent, which is initially shiny when applied, takes on a dull filmy appearance, the interfaces may require a faster closing together or the ambient temperature is too high to continue seaming. The installer will monitor this condition at sheet temperatures over 105°F. At the completion of seaming, all rags, chemical containers, etc., will be properly removed from the geomembrane.



32 05 19.18 - 10

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. The number of panels to be deployed in any day will be limited to the number of panels which can be seamed that day. The geomembrane will be placed over the prepared surface in such a manner as to assure minimum handling.

B. Based on the approved geomembrane panel diagram and material certifications, the individual

panels will be numbered, and seams will be identified by using the panel numbers that create the seam. The PVC panels shall be installed in a manner that minimizes seams. Wherever possible longitudinal seams shall be oriented to be no greater than ten degrees from parallel with the direction of the slope. Cross seams (i.e., those seams which join the ends of contiguous panels) shall not be placed on any slope that exceeds a ten percent grade. All panels placed on slopes shall be cut no closer than five feet from the top of the slope or ten feet from the toe of slope. All seam overlaps shall be shingled in a downslope direction. In no case shall parallel seams be placed within five feet of the centerline of any leachate collection pipe.

B. During installation, and any other period of exposure of geomembrane, pedestrian and equipment

activity over the geomembrane shall be kept to a minimum and restricted to only that which is necessary for geomembrane construction.

C. Smoking is not permitted on the geomembrane. D. Construction workers shall take precautions not to damage the geomembrane surface.

Construction workers shall wear smooth-soled footwear, and exercise care not to drag tools across the geomembrane surface. All large tools are to have smooth base plates or shoes. Construction and landfill staff shall be informed of the restricted access to areas of geomembrane placement by use of barriers and signs posted as necessary.

E. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall perform all activities of geomembrane construction

in such a way as to avoid damage to the geomembrane. Any damage caused to the geomembrane by the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall be repaired or the material replaced at the expense of the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR.

F. No tracked or wheeled vehicles, other than low ground pressure ATVs as preapproved by the

ENGINEER, shall be permitted on the geomembrane prior to placement of adequate soil cover, as determined by the ENGINEER.

G. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall complete his work in a manner that will prevent water

or wind from getting under the partially installed geomembrane. This could include, but is not limited to, installing sandbags along the leading edges. Should excessive moisture become trapped below the geomembrane or should wind damage occur due to the negligence of the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR, the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR, at no extra cost to the OWNER, will be required to perform all work, including removing and replacing as much of the in-place geosynthetic material as the ENGINEER directs, to assure that the integrity of the geomembrane and the underlying subbase or geosynthetic clay liner (GCL) has not been compromised.

H. Seams shall be welded throughout the entire length of the panels during initial panel seaming. I. Sandbags or other approved ballast shall be used to prevent bridging or material movement in

areas such as toe of slope or near sumps. Ballast shall not be used to force the geomembrane into contact with the subgrade.

J. Special care shall be taken to prevent tensile stress in the geomembrane and geomembrane seams

in all corners and grade changes.



32 05 19.18 - 11

K. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall exercise his best judgment and care to provide sufficient slack in the PVC geomembrane.

L. The geomembrane shall not be installed when ambient or sheet temperatures are below 32° F,

when the sheet temperature exceeds 158° F, or when the air temperature is above 120° F unless the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR demonstrates, to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, that procedures can be implemented which will result in the proper installation and seaming of the geomembrane.

M. Adjacent geomembrane panels shall be allowed to reach essentially equivalent temperatures prior

to seaming to avoid development of fish mouths.

N. If fish mouths are created at the seam overlaps, they shall be cut to achieve a flat overlap. O. Geomembrane covering operations shall be performed in a manner that does not damage the

geomembrane lining system. Geomembrane covering operations shall be performed only in the presence of a Construction Observer such that the condition and cleanliness of the geomembrane is observed at the time the material is covered, and any effects of the covering operation on the geomembrane lining system can be observed.

P. Any use of ATV’s on the site must be pre-approved by the ENGINEER. The GEOSYNTHETICS

CONTRACTOR shall submit an S.O.P. describing how ATV’s are to be used, if at all, in the deployment of geomembrane at the site. As a minimum, the following shall apply: 1. Any damage resulting from the use of ATV’s, as determined by the ENGINEER, shall be

repaired according to Article 3.3, at no additional cost to the OWNER. If repeated repairs are required as the result of the use of ATVs operating on geosynthetic material, further use of ATVs will be prohibited.

2. Any and all ATV’s proposed to be used in the deployment of geosynthetics will be inspected by the ENGINEER. ATV’s which are found to be leaking oil or fuel, or which in any other way exhibit the potential to damage the lining system components, will not be permitted.

3. Any oil or fuel which leaks onto geosynthetic materials shall be thoroughly removed (cleaned) by the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR, or the geosynthetic material shall be replaced at the discretion of the ENGINEER, at no additional cost to the OWNER.

4. Re-fueling of ATVs on geosynthetic materials is prohibited. 5. ATVs shall have tires with low ground pressure, typically less than 5 psi, and shall have

shallow treads. 6. ATVs shall be operated by a single operator at speeds less than 5 mph. 7. Quick starts, stops, spinning wheels and sharp turns will not be permitted above any

geosynthetic material. 3.4 REPAIRS

A. All geomembrane panels and seams shall be examined by the ENGINEER for defects, holes, blisters, undispersed raw materials, and any sign of contamination by foreign matter. The geomembrane surface shall be clean at the time of examination. Each suspect location shall be repaired, and all repairs shall be non-destructively tested.

B. Damaged geomembrane shall be removed and replaced with acceptable geomembrane if damage

cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. C. Any portion of the geomembrane, or any portion of a seam exhibiting a flaw or failing a destructive

or non-destructive test, shall be repaired as follows: 1. Geomembrane patches shall be used for holes over 1/8 of an inch in diameter, tears, and

contamination by foreign matter. Patches shall be constructed of the same geomembrane and will be joined to the panel using adhesive or chemical fusion welding where possible.



32 05 19.18 - 12

2. Geomembrane patches or caps shall extend at least 6 inches beyond the edge of the defect or failed seam area, and all corners of material to be patched. The corners of the patch shall be rounded.

3. Geomembrane caps shall be used to repair failed seams that are left in place. Seams that fail destructive or non-destructive testing may also be removed and replaced if determined necessary by the ENGINEER.

PART 4 - FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM 4.1. GENERAL

A. Before installation begins, and weekly thereafter (more often if determined necessary by the ENGINEER) project coordination meetings shall be held with the designated representative of the EARTHWORKS CONTRACTOR, GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and OWNER in attendance to review the following information: 1. Progress of the work. 2. Adherence to the Specifications. 3. Adherence to the Construction Quality Assurance Program described in this Section,

including the timely submission of the pertinent forms. 4. Planned work and methods for the ensuing week, including estimate of time remaining to

completion of the work. 5. Problem resolutions to be implemented during the upcoming week.

B. All of the Forms specified and required must be submitted to the ENGINEER in a timely fashion. C. The OWNER and ENGINEER must approve any changes in the proposed method of work,

subcontractors to be utilized, geomembrane resin, or manufacturing in advance. D. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR assumes all responsibility relevant to providing an

acceptable product. 4.2. INSTALLATION QA/QC

A. The ENGINEER and GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall visually inspect all material to be included in the work and compare panel identification numbers with those on the certifications provided by the manufacturer to assure delivery of the appropriate material.

B. Damage to geomembrane during installation shall be repaired according to Article 3.4. If the

ENGINEER determines that any damage cannot adequately be repaired, the damaged material will be replaced.

C. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR will be required to conduct both destructive and non-

destructive testing on seams during the geomembrane installation, as part of the Construction Quality Control program. All trial and installed seam samples shall be tested.

D. Thermal Weld Trial Seams –

1. Trial seams shall be produced each day, at the start of each workday, after every four hours of continuous operation, after each break in seaming of 1 hour or more, after a break that results in equipment replacement or shutdown, and if the geomembrane temperature changes by more than 45°F. Trial seams shall be required each day for each piece of seaming equipment and each welding crew combination (including welding technician, seam cleaners and/or helpers). The trial seams will be performed on strips of geomembrane from approved rolls and shall be produced at the work location such that the conditions mimic those under which production seams will be made.

2. A trial seam shall be a minimum of 5 feet in length for self-propelled seaming devices, and a minimum of 3 feet for hand-held seaming devices. The material for the trial seam and the



32 05 19.18 - 13

test fixture for ma king the field tests shall be provided by the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR at no additional cost. One-inch-wide cutouts of the trial seams will be subject to shear and peel testing at the site. A minimum of 3 cutouts will be tested for shear, and a minimum of 3 cutouts will be tested for peel. The ENGINEER shall document the locus of break code for each specimen as shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4 of ASTM D6392-99, included at the end of this Section.

3. All trial seam specimens must be acceptable, or the trial seam will be repeated until all results from a given trial seam are found acceptable. If any trial seam fails at any time during the workday, the reason for the failure shall be resolved before any production seaming of the geomembrane by the subject equipment and crew. All trial seam welding and testing must be observed by the ENGINEER.

4. A trial seam specimen will be considered a failure if: a. In the shear test, the bonded thickness of the seam fails, or the material breaks at

a stress lower than specified. b. In the peel test, the two sheets comprising the seam separate at a peak stress

lower than specified. Should the ENGINEER, at any time during the installation, believe the production seaming process may not be performing adequately, he may, to avoid destructive sampling of the installed geomembrane, request additional trial seams. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR at no additional cost shall do this.

E. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall complete non-destructive testing of all seams along

their entire length, in the manner approved prior to installation, in the presence of the ENGINEER. The recommended test methods are as follows: 1. Pressurized Air Channel

a. All field seams made by a dual-track fusion welding device will be tested by applying air pressure within the air channel to a sealed length of seam and monitoring the pressure over time. The testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D 7177.

b. For the geomembrane, the initial inflation pressure shall be equal to or greater than the minimum according to ASTM D 7177. The minimum allowable pressure drops over a 30 second period shall be 5.0 psi.

c. A pressure gauge shall be inserted into the end of the air channel to check for continuity in the air channel. Alternately, the far end of the seam may be cut to relieve the air pressure. An audible rush of air shall serve as an indicator that the test represents the entire length of seam.

d. Air channels that do not hold the minimum specified air pressure shall be further inspected to identify the location and nature of any defects or unbonded sections of seam. The seam will then be repaired and retested. The ENGINEER may, at his discretion, require the entire questionable seam area to be capped or replaced.

2. Air Lance Testing a. The ENGINEER shall witness the testing, and the seam shall be clearly visible to

the ENGINEER and GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR during the test. Unbonded areas or defects shall be marked by the ENGINEER for repair by the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR.

b. The air lance will be capable of supplying 50 PSI through a 3/16-inch diameter nozzle. The air stream is directed at the upper edge of the seam no more that 2 inches from the seam edge. Any voids in the seam will be marked, repaired, and re-tested with the air lance. The testing technician and the inspector will mark each seam or repair with an indelible marker as accepted immediately after completion of final air lance testing.

F. All inadequate seams or portions thereof that fail the non-destructive testing shall be repaired in

accordance with this Specification and the method approved by the ENGINEER. Should differences of opinion between the GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER develop during



32 05 19.18 - 14

the installation relevant to seam integrity, the ENGINEER may, at his discretion, obtain samples of the seams in dispute for field and/or laboratory testing. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR will be responsible for patching the resulting void in accordance with the previously approved procedures at no additional cost to the OWNER.

G. Destructive Sample Collection - Samples of the in-place seams shall be cut from the installed

geomembrane at a minimum frequency of one sample per 500 linear feet of seam, excluding repair seam length. A minimum of one seam sample shall be obtained for each seaming machine/operator combination for each day, or as directed by the ENGINEER. The cutout sections shall be 12 inches wide by 40 inches long with the seam centered lengthwise. The sample size can be reduced to 30” if the CONTRACTOR does not elect to have a cutout section for their use. A 1-inch-wide specimen shall be cut from each end of the sample, and these two specimens shall be peel tested in the field in accordance with 4.2 G. The remaining sample shall be cut into 2 parts and distributed as follows: 1. One 12-inch by 18-inch sample to the ENGINEER for independent laboratory testing; and, 2. One 12-inch by 18-inch sample to the OWNER for archive storage. 3. The remainder of the sample shall be available for the CONTRACTOR if requested at the

time of sample collection.

H. The 12-inch by 18-inch laboratory sample will provide 5 specimens for shear testing and 5 specimens for peel testing. Specimens that will be subject to peel and shear testing shall be selected alternately from the sample. All peel tests shall be performed on the outer track of dual track fusion welds. The laboratory shall report the locus of break code for each specimen according to the definitions included in Figure 3 and Figure 4 of ASTM D 6392, included at the end of this Section. The laboratory sample will be considered acceptable only if all 10 specimens meet the minimum requirements. The specimen will be considered a failure if: 1. In the shear test, the bond of the seam fails, or the material breaks at a stress lower than

specified. 2. In the peel test, the two sheets comprising the seam separate at a peak stress lower than

specified. Complete peel separation of the seam is allowable. 3. In the shear or peel test, locus of break codes AD, AD-BRK, BRK, and SE are reported by

the ENGINEER.

I. If a sample fails destructive testing, the welding path must be retraced to intermediate locations at least 10 feet in each direction from the location of the sample that failed the test, and a second sample shall be taken for an additional field test. If the tracking samples pass, the seam must be reconstructed between the location of the two tracking samples and the original sampled location. If the tracking sample fails, this process must be repeated. The seam between 2 passing test locations shall be capped, the cap seams shall be nondestructively tested, and shall include one field peel and shear test location along the reconstructed seam.

J. The ENGINEER and GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall visually inspect all geomembrane seams.

K. All welds shall be observed for traces of deformation to the geomembrane panels. Any seams,

which in the opinion of the ENGINEER, have caused excessive deformation of the sheet, show signs of discoloration, exhibit thinning or stepping of the sheet, or show visual signs of overheating of the geomembrane panels, shall be repaired at no additional cost to the OWNER regardless of the result of any destructive testing on the seam. The deficient seam or portion thereof shall be cut out, the geomembrane panels again overlapped and seamed, or the questionable seam length shall be capped, as approved by the ENGINEER.

L. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall not place overlying materials on the installed

geomembrane until the ENGINEER has reviewed and accepted the written test results for the geomembrane to be covered. At a minimum, the predelivery testing, the daily log of trial seam results, laboratory destructive sample results, non-destructive test results, record drawings of the completed area, and approval of the seams in place will be reviewed.



32 05 19.18 - 15

M. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall provide a report to the OWNER and the ENGINEER

at the conclusion of the work which shall include the following: 1. The quality control tests used as specified and/or directed, including all requirements of

the Report section of the specified test method. 2. Complete description of field sampling procedure, number of test specimens, size of test

specimens. 3. Log of all Construction Quality Control work.

N. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs incurred by the OWNER

including, but not limited to, additional field and laboratory CQA testing resulting from greater than 5 percent of the CQA testing not meeting or exceeding the Specifications.

O. All seams that cannot be subjected to the required Construction Quality Control or Construction

Quality Assurance (CQA/CQC) testing shall be overlapped. 4.3. WARRANTY

A. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall issue a warranty on the installation of geomembrane for a minimum period of 1 year.

B. The GEOSYNTHETICS CONTRACTOR shall issue a warranty on the geomembrane material for

a minimum period of 20 years.



CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

32 11 23 - 1

SECTION 32 11 23 - CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This item shall consist of a foundation course for a surface course or for other base courses and shall be composed of a compacted flexible base course of crusher-run, broken limestone.


A. The Materials Engineer will determine the Moisture-Density Relationship in accordance with ASTM Method D1557 on material secured from the source of supply, or the Contractor.

B. The Materials Engineer will determine the in-place density in accordance with ASTM Methods

D2922 or D1556. The minimum level of testing will consist of at least three tests for each 1,000 feet per lane of roadway, or as recommended by the Materials Engineer.




A. The materials shall be obtained from approved sources, shall be crushed, and shall consist of durable particles of crushed aggregate, mixed with approved binding material. The crushed material shall have a minimum compressive strength of 45 psi at 0 psi lateral pressure and 175 psi at 15 psi lateral pressure using triaxial testing procedures. The crushed aggregate shall meet the following gradation when tested in accordance with ASTM Method C136.

Table I

Retained on Sieve Percent Retained Conforming to ASTM E11 By Weight

l-3/4" 0 7/8" 10 - 35% 3/8" 30 - 50% No. 4 45 - 65% No. 40 70 - 85%

B. The material passing the No. 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM Method D4318.

C. The liquid limit shall not exceed 35. The plasticity index shall not exceed 10 D. All material retained on the No. 40 sieve shall have a Los Angeles Abrasion percent of wear not

exceeding 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM Method C131. E. With prior written permission of the Engineer, additives may be used to meet the above

requirements.



32 11 23 - 2


A. The subgrade shall be prepared in accordance with Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork (Subsection 2.6 – Subgrade). Immediately before placing the base material, the subgrade shall be checked as to conformity with the grade and section. Any deviation in excess of one-half (1/2) inch in cross-section and in a length of sixteen (16) feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping and compacting by sprinkling and rolling. Sufficient subgrade shall be prepared in advance to insure satisfactory prosecution of the work.

B. The material for the first course shall be deposited on the subgrade in a lift not to exceed six (6)

inches in thickness. Material deposited upon the subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same day unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The material shall be sprinkled, if directed and shall then be bladed, dragged and shaped to the typical sections as shown on the plans. All areas and most of segregated coarse or fine material shall be corrected or removed and replaced with well graded material as directed by the Engineer. If additional binder is considered desirable or necessary after the material is spread and shaped, it shall be furnished and applied in the amount directed by the Engineer. Such binder material shall be carefully and evenly incorporated with the material in-place by scarifying harrowing, brooming or by other approved methods.

C. The course shall be sprinkled as required and compacted to the extent necessary to provide not

less than 95-percent of modified proctor density (ASTM D1557) at a moisture content ranging from optimum to three percent above optimum. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the flexible base shown on the plans shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. After each section of flexible base is completed, tests as necessary will be made by the Engineer. If the material fails to meet the density requirements, it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements. Throughout this entire operation the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical sections shown on the plans and to the established lines and grades. In that area on which pavement is to be placed, any deviation in excess of 1/4-inch in cross section and in length of 16-feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material as required, reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. Should the base course, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density or finish before the surface is complete, it shall be recompacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor.

D. Construction methods for succeeding courses shall be the same as prescribed for the first course.

Prior to placing the surfacing on the completed base, the base shall be dry cured to the extent directed by the Engineer.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The completed base course will be checked for determining acceptance as provided herein. Upon completion of compaction operations, the density of the completed course will be determined in accordance with ASTM Methods D2922 or D1556. A minimum of one density test will be taken per 1,000 linear feet per roadway, or as recommended by the Materials Engineer. The location of the test will be chosen randomly. If any density test is below requirements, two additional tests will be taken within 5-feet of the failing test location and the average of the three tests will be used as the value for the 1,000-foot location.

B. The density requirements as based on ASTM Method D1557, will be ninety-five percent (95%) of

the maximum density. If the density test value per 1,000-foot section is below ninety-five percent (95%), a price adjustment will be supplied as follows:



32 11 23 - 3

Percent of Contract Density Test Value Unit Price 95.0 and above 100 93.0 to 94.9 90 90.0 to 92. 75 Below 90 50 or remove* *At the option of the Engineer.

C. The completed base course will not vary from plan thickness in excess of the following tolerances.

Base course thickness deficiencies in excess of these tolerances shall be corrected, as specified herein, at the Contractor's expense.

Underthickness Overthickness

1 inch 1-1/2 inches

D. If an individual test exceeds allowable tolerances, two additional tests will be taken within 5-feet of the failing test location and the average of the three tests (rounded off to the nearest 1/4-inch) will be used as the value for that location. Any railing areas will be isolated for purposes of correction. Base course thickness deficiencies in excess of the foregoing tolerances shall be corrected as follows.

E. If no grade adjustments are permitted, thickness deficiencies shall be corrected by removing and

replacing the full depth of base course in deficient areas with one of the following materials:

1. Cement Stabilized Crushed Aggregate 2. Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete

F. If grade adjustments are permitted, the Contractor shall have the option of correcting thickness

deficiencies by furnishing and placing a supplemental layer of hot mix asphaltic concrete, for the full width of the base course, in lieu of removing and replacing deficient base course. The thickness of the supplemental layer of asphaltic concrete shall be as follows:

BASE COURSE THICKNESS CORRECTION

Minimum thickness of Supplemental

Underthickness Overthickness Asphaltic Concrete Inches Inches Inches 1/4 to 1-1/2 1-3/4 to 2 1 1-3/4 to 2 2-1/4 to 2-1/2 1-1/2 2-1/4 to 2-1/2 2-3/4 to 3 2 Over 2-1/2 Over 3 Remove and replace



“FREE-DRAINING STONE” BASE FOR SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM

32 11 23.23 - 1

SECTION 32 11 23.23 - “FREE-DRAINING STONE” BASE FOR SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. This specification covers the installation of a “free draining stone” base to provide a vertical drainage system beneath an infilled synthetic turf.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. 31 20 00 – Earthwork B. 31 23 00 - Construction of Underground Utilities C. 32 05 19.17 HDPE- Geomembrane HDPE Liner D. 32 05 19.18 PVC- Geomembrane PVC Liner

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor shall use an independent testing laboratory selected by the Owner to provide testing of the “free draining stone” base material.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the “free draining stone” base material to the Testing Laboratory for testing. The quantity of the “free draining stone” base material for testing to be determined by the Testing Laboratory.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The “free draining stone” base material used for placement around the subdrain system may be temporarily stored on a clean, hard surface to prevent contamination of the stone material. Stone material used for placement on the subgrade shall be delivered and back dumped onto the subgrade such that the delivery truck is not traveling on the subgrade itself. The stone material shall be pushed onto the subgrade by working off of previously placed material. Contractor shall sequence delivery of the stone material to minimize storage of the material on site.


A. “Free Draining Stone” Base 1. The “free draining stone” base material shall consist of clean washed gravel or crushed

stone. Soft limestone or other soft materials are not acceptable. The “free draining stone” base material shall not lose more than 12% by weight when tested for weathering stability based on ASTM C-88 sodium sulfate soundness test. The “free draining stone” base material shall be tested by the L.A. Abrasion test, ASTM C-131, with a percentage lost by weight not exceeding 40.

2. The “free draining stone” material shall have the following gradation as a guide for selection of material:



32 11 23.23 - 2

Sieve Size Percent Passing Base Stone Finishing Stone 1 1/2” 100 1” 95-100 1/2” 25-60 100 3/8” 40-75 #4 0-10 5-25 #8 0-5 0-10

3. The “free draining stone” material shall be checked for the following: a. Structural stability: D60/D10 5 and 1 D 2/30

------------ 3 D10 D60

b. Fragmentation shall be 100%. c. Separation of both stones: D85 of finishing stone

-------------------------- 2 D15 of base stone And 3 D50 of base stone --------------------------- 6 D50 of finishing stone

d. Drainage: Permeability of base stone 600 in/hr. (0.42 cm/sec.) Permeability of finishing stone 150 in/hr. (0.106 cm/sec.)

Porosity of both stones 25% (when stone is saturated and compacted to 95% max. density)

e. Depending on the type of stone used, other mechanical characteristics may be necessary for approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBDRAINS

A. The Contractor shall layout and excavate all of the trenches for the storm sewer system on the perimeter of the athletic field. The trenches shall be excavated to proper width and grade to allow for the placement of the geomembrane liner and “free draining stone” material in the trench. Trench walls shall be cut straight without sloughing of any material from the sidewalls. Bottom of the trenches shall be graded smooth and compacted to 95% maximum density ASTM D698. All excavated material for the storm sewer system shall be removed and the subgrade shall be cleaned, graded and amended as required to maintain the design elevations of the subgrade.

3.2 GEOMEMBRANE LINER

A. The geomembrane liner shall be installed the length of the playing field. A separate liner panel shall be used for each trench. End seams will not be allowed in the trench. Place liner in trench so that fabric at a higher elevation overlaps liner at a lower elevation to prevent free water from running underneath the liner in the event of a tear or hole. The geomembrane liner shall be installed in accordance with SECTION 32 05 19.17.

3.3 GRAVEL DRAINAGE - TRENCHES

A. With the geomembrane liner in place, the Contractor shall place initial “free draining stone” in the

perimeter storm sewer trench and then place the perforated storm sewer pipe to design grade and alignment, as specified and/or shown on the drawings.



32 11 23.23 - 3

B. After storm sewer pipe is in place and has been approved by Owner’s Representative, Contractor shall place “free draining stone” around the sides of the pipe and continue to fill the trench with the “free draining stone” to the elevation of the subgrade.

C. The Contractor shall install composite drains on top of the geomembrane liner in the pattern as

shown on the drawings. 3.4 “FREE DRAINING STONE” BASE AND FINISH COURSE

A. The Contractor shall inspect the surface of the geomembrane liner to assure there are no irregularities in elevation, wrinkles in the liner and that the surface is free of any debris.

B. The “free draining stone” shall be laid without damaging the subgrade, geomembrane liner or

composite drains by back dumping the stone material onto the geomembrane liner so as to keep the delivery trucks off the liner. Contractor shall use the proper equipment to push the stone material over the athletic field.

C. The “free draining stone” base and finish courses shall have a combined minimum thickness of 6-

inches at the centerline of the athletic field. The “free draining stone” base course shall be placed in maximum 6” lifts. The top 1 to 2-inches of the “free draining stone” base shall be a finishing stone of the gradation listed above. The “free draining stone” material shall maintain a moisture content of 90% to 110% of optimum moisture at all times. Contractor shall ensure the stone at the plant meets this requirement and shall maintain this moisture content while placing, grading and compacting the stone material. The “free draining stone” base and finish courses shall be compacted to 95% maximum density ASTM D698, and shall have a maximum deviation from design grade of +0” to -1/4” in 10’ feet when measured in any direction using a 10’ straight-edge.

D. After the “free draining stone” has been finished to grade, at the Owners option a minimum of five

(5) permeability tests shall be made at random locations on the “free draining stone” base in accordance with ASTM D3385 test methods.

E. If the “free draining stone” base fails to meet any of the design specifications, it shall be the

Contractor’s responsibility to restore at his expense, the materials to meet all requirements for permeability, cross-section, grade and density as outlined in the specifications. The “free draining stone” base shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative before the Contractor is allowed to install the synthetic turf.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL

A. All excess excavated material, debris or other objectionable material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the project site and legally disposed of at no cost to the Owner.



HOT MIX-HOT LAID ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 32 12 16 - 1

SECTION 32 12 16 - HOT MIX-HOT LAID ASPHALTIC CONCRETE

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section provides for furnishing and installing hot mix asphaltic concrete (HMAC) pavement. The material shall consist of a compacted mixture of coarse and fine aggregates and asphaltic cement. The paving will be constructed over compacted flexible base course.

1.2 WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. Place no asphaltic mixture, prime or tack coat, when the air temperature is below 45 degrees F. and falling. Materials may be placed after the air temperature is above 40 degrees F. and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade away from artificial heat. Place asphaltic mixtures only when weather conditions are suitable in the opinion of the engineer.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 32 11 23 – Crushed Aggregate Base Course 1.4 MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT



A. Mineral Aggregate. The mineral aggregate shall be composed of a coarse aggregate and a fine aggregate. Samples of coarse aggregate and fine aggregate shall be submitted in accordance with the methods prescribed in the Texas SDHPT Item 6 "Control of Materials" and approval of both material and of the source of supply must be obtained from the Engineer prior to delivery. 1. Combined mineral aggregate, prior to addition of asphalt, shall have a sand equivalent

value of not less than 45 when sampled and tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-203-F.

2. Mineral aggregate from each source shall meet the tests specified herein unless otherwise specified on the plans. a. Course Aggregate, General. The course aggregate shall be that part of the

aggregate retained on a No. 10 sieve and shall consist of clean, tough, durable particles. The aggregate shall be natural limestone and of uniform quality throughout. 1) The point of sampling for tests, Tests Method Tex-217-F (Part I and Part

II), will be after final processing at the mixing plant and prior to the addition of asphalt for weigh-batch and continuous plants and at the cold feed for the drum mix plants.

2) When the course aggregate is sampled during delivery to the plant, from the stockpile, or from the cold feed, the material removed when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-217-F (Part II, Decantation), shall not exceed 2 percent.



3) When the course aggregate is tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-217-F (Part I, Separation of Deleterious Material), the amount of organic matter, clay, loam or particles coated therewith or other undesirable materials shall not exceed 2 percent.

4) The coarse aggregate shall have an abrasion loss of not more than 40 percent by weight when subject to the Los Angeles Abrasion Test, Test Method Tex-410-A. Coarse aggregate from each source shall meet the abrasion requirement.

b. Fine Aggregate. The fine aggregate shall be that part of the aggregate passing the No. 10 sieve of uniform quality throughout as hereinafter specified. 1) Fine aggregate shall consist of durable particles, free from injurious foreign

matter. The plasticity index of that part of the fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve shall be not more than 6 when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-106-E. Fine aggregate from each source shall meet plasticity requirements.

c. Limestone Screenings. When limestone screenings are specified for use, or authorized by the Engineer, the screenings shall be the result of a crushing operation and meet the following grading requirements:

Percent by Weight Passing the 3/8" sieve................ 100 Passing the No. 10 sieve ........... 70-100 Passing the No. 200 sieve ......... 0 – 15

1) When authorized by the Engineer, limestone screenings containing particles larger than 3/8 inch may be used but only that portion of the material passing the 3/8 inch sieve shall be considered as fulfilling the requirements for screenings when a minimum percentage of screenings is specified for a particular mixture.

d. All mineral aggregate shall be sterile material. Aggregate with foreign matter or suspect of same shall be sterilized by treatment with a weed killer. Weed killer shall be compatible with continued use of material in asphaltic concrete mixture. Seed germination and subsequent growth in asphaltic concrete pavement constitutes unacceptable pavement and shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's sole expense.

B. Asphaltic Material. Provide moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated

to 347 degrees F., and which meets the requirements of the Texas ADHPT, Item 300 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions." 1. Material must not be cracked. 2. Grade of asphalt used will be designated by the Engineer after design tests have been

made. Only one grade of asphalt will be required, after grade is determined by test design for project.

3. Asphalt material for the tack coat shall be RC-70 or RC-250, and for the prime coat MC-70 or MC-250. Use SS-1 emulsion during the summer months.

C. Hot-Mix Asphaltic Concrete. 1. Design Mixes. Materials and design mixes will be subject to approval of the Engineer after

being tested in accordance with these specifications and current Texas Highway Department methods. Design mixes and tests for density and stability are the responsibility of the Contractor and must be made at his expense. Furnish test results to the Engineer. Furnish Testing Laboratory certificates certifying that asphaltic materials and aggregates comply with specified requirements.



2. Density and Stability Requirements. Density % Theoretical Density Stability % Min. Max. Optimum Not Less Than 95 99 96 35 Not More Than 60

3. Design mix shall contain anti-stripping agent. Quantity of anti-stripping shall be proven by mix design.

4. Evaluation of indirect tensile strength for stripping. Texas Highway Department Test Method 531-C. Minimum value of 70% of stripping ratio. Only for top 1-1/2 inch surface course.

D. Hot-Mix Asphalt Concrete Level-up Course - Type "B".

1. Grading Requirements for Aggregates.

Sieve Size Percent by Weight Passing 1" sieve 100 Passing 7/8" sieve 95 -100 Passing 5/8" sieve 75-95 Passing 3/8" sieve 60-80 Passing No. 4 sieve 40-60 Passing No. 10 sieve 27-40 Passing No. 40 sieve 10-25 Passing No. 80 sieve 3-13 Passing No. 200 sieve 1- 6 VMA % Minimum 12

2. Proportions for Asphaltic Material. Four (4) to eight (8) percent of mixture by weight is required.

E. Hot-Mix Asphalt Concrete Surface Course - Type "D".

1. Grading Requirements for Aggregates.

Sieve Size Percent by Weight Passing 1/2" sieve 100 Passing 3/8" sieve 85 -100 Passing No. 4 sieve 50-70 Passing No. 10 sieve 32-42 Passing No. 40 sieve 11-26 Passing No. 80 sieve 4-14 Passing No. 200 sieve 1-6 VMA % Minimum 14

2. Proportions for Asphaltic Material. Five (5) to eight (8) percent of mixture by weight is required.



F. Asphalt Patch Fillers. Court Patch Binder by California Products Corp. patching materials may be used for repairing minor "pockmark" or "skin" type repairs to surface, as well as filling in low areas no deeper than 1/2 inch as determined from surface test if approved by Turf Contractor/Installer. Patch fillers shall only be used on football field pavement.

G. Non-Woven Paving Fabric. The following fabrics may be used:

1. Petromat Engineering Paving Fabric by Propex 2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Type of Plant. Mixing plants must have capacity for continuously producing mixtures meeting specifications and must be approved by the Engineer. Either weight-batching type of continuous mixing type are acceptable. Regardless of the type, the plant must have satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, hot aggregate screens and bins, and dust collectors. Provide equipment to adequately supply materials in accordance with rated capacity of the plant and produce finished material within specified tolerances. The following equipment is considered essential: 1. Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device. 2. Dryer. 3. Screens. 4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales. 5. Mixer. 6. Asphalt storage and heating devices. 7. Asphalt measuring devices. 8. Truck scale (if used).

B. Bins. Separate aggregate into at least four bins so that uniform grading and asphalt content are

consistently produced in the completed mix. C. Spreading and Finishing Machine. The spreading and finishing machine shall be of a type

approved by the Engineer, shall be capable of producing a surface that will meet the requirements of the typical cross section and the surface test, when required and when the mixture is dumped directly into the finishing machine shall have adequate power to propel the delivery vehicles in satisfactory manner. The finishing machine shall be equipped with a flexible spring and/or hydraulic type hitch sufficient in design and capacity to maintain contact between the rear wheels of the hauling equipment and the pusher rollers of the finishing machine while the mixture is being unloaded. 1. The use of any vehicle which requires dumping directly into the finishing machine and

which the finishing machine cannot push or propel in such a manner as to obtain the desired lines and grades without resorting to hand finishing will not be allowed. Vehicles dumping directly or indirectly into the finishing machine shall be so designed and equipped that unloading into the finishing machine can be mechanically and/or automatically operated in such a manner that overloading the finishing machine being used cannot occur and the required lines and grades shall be obtained without resorting to hand finishing.

D. Automatic Screed Controls for Spreading and Finishing Machines. Asphaltic-concrete spreading and finishing machines shall be equipped with an approved automatic dual longitudinal screed control system and a transverse screed control system. The longitudinal controls shall be capable of operating from longitudinal grade references of a stringline or laser or matching shoe or ski. A matching shoe or ski shall be used only for adjacent paving lines. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment required for grade reference. It shall be maintained in good operating condition by personnel trained in the use of this type of equipment. The equipment shall be capable of constructing a finished surface within specified tolerances.



1. Surface Requirements. The automatic grade control device shall produce a finished surface meeting the requirements of the surface test on the items of work for which a spreading and finishing machine is required. Skin-patching on wearing surface course will not be permitted. Sections of pavement exceeding the minimum tolerance shall be corrected at the Contractors expense.

2. Construction Procedure. The grade reference used by the Contractor may be of any type approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall set control point for the finished profile. These points will be set on both sides of the course being laid, at intervals not to exceed 25 feet. The Contractor shall set the grade reference for the sensor of the automatic control to follow from the control points, and the grade reference shall have sufficient support so that the maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/8 inch per 25 feet.

E. Rollers. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have rolling equipment available on the

job to properly compact the paving mixture in place as required without delay to the lay down operation. Rollers provided shall meet the qualifications for their type as follows: 1. Pneumatic Tire Rollers. The rollers shall be acceptable medium pneumatic tire rollers

(Type B) conforming to the requirements of Texas High Department Standard Specification 1982, Item 213 Rolling (Pneumatic Tire). This roller shall only be used with Engineer's approval.

2. Two Axle Tandem Roller. This roller shall be an acceptable power driven tandem roller weighing not less than 8 tons.

3. Vibratory Steel-Wheel Roller. This roller shall be two-axle tandem roller and have a minimum weight of 6 tons. The compactor shall be equipped with amplitude and frequency controls and shall be specifically designed to compact the material on which it is used. It shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING FOR PAVEMENT TO RECEIVE TRACK SURFACING

A. Prior to commencing installation of the finished surface course and at the asphaltic concrete paving Contractor's initiative, a meeting will be called at the project site to review materials, installation procedures and coordination with the Track Surface Contractor. Meeting shall include Track Surface Contractor, Paving Contractor, the Engineer, and the Owner.

B. The surface course shall be laid in such a manner as to be compatible with requirements to install

the track surface material. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. The lime stabilized subgrade base shall be prepared and shaped in accordance with appropriate section of these specifications. Keep all unnecessary traffic off the stabilized subgrade.

3.3 PRIME COAT

A. Apply prime coat to the surface of the flexible base with an approved distributor at the uniform rate of 0.25 gal/sy. Allow sufficient time for prime to cure before starting paving operations.

3.4 TACK COAT

A. Apply tack coat to the surface of the asphaltic base course with an approved distributor at the uniform rateof 0.15 gal/sy. Thoroughly clean asphaltic base course surface and apply tack coat with an approved distributor at the uniform rate shown on the drawings.



3.5 LAYING

A. The asphaltic concrete mixture, heated and prepared as specified, shall be hauled to the work in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign materials. The mixture shall be laid only on approved surfaces free of all foreign materials. The mixture shall be at a temperature of 250 degrees to 350 degrees Fah. when laid. The mixture shall be placed in an approved spreading and finishing machine. Spreading and finishing machine shall have automatic screed controls and operate off of sensing devices establishing uniform grades. The mixture shall be spread into place in a uniform layer of such depth that after receiving ultimate compaction by rolling, finish grades and section will be met. Minimum allowable lift is 1-1/2 inches. Maximum allowable lift is 2 l/2 inches. Extreme care shall be taken to prevent depression at matching edges of each lay-down lanes.

3.6 ROLLING

A. Begin rolling while pavement is still hot and as soon as it will bear the roller without undue displacement or hair cracking. To prevent adhesion of surface mixture to the roller, keep wheels properly moistened with water. Excessive use of water will not be permitted.

B. Compress the surface thoroughly and uniformly with tandem rollers weighing from 8 to 10 tons.

Obtain subsequent compression by starting at the side and rolling longitudinally toward the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half width of the wheels. Make alternate trips slightly different in length. Continue rolling until no further compression can be obtained and all rolling marks are eliminated.

C. Use a tandem roller for final rolling. Double coverage with an approved pneumatic roller may be

acceptable after flat wheel or tandem rolling has been completed, but must be approved by Engineer.

3.7 HAND TAMPING

A. Along curbing and at other locations not accessible to rollers, compact the mixture thoroughly with a vibrating plate or roller compactor.

3.8 DENSITY

A. Compact the asphalt overlay to density not less than 95 percent of the laboratory density of a mixture composed of the same materials in like proportions. If density tests show paved section has a density less than 95 percent, additional rolling will be required until density requirements are obtained. All rolling shall be complete before the temperature of the in place mixture falls below 185 degrees F.

3.9 SURFACE TEST

A. Surface test shall be conducted within three days after final paving operations. Surface test shall be conducted by Paving Contractor, Track Surface Contractor and Engineer.

B. Completed surface shall be tested with 16 ft. straight-edge laid parallel to and transverse to the

longitudinal centerline of pavement. No deviation in excess of 1/8 inch per foot from the nearest point of contact will be permitted. The maximum ordinate measured from the face of the straight-edge must not exceed 1/4 inch at any point. Paving Contractor shall furnish approved straight-edge. Straight-edge shall be of such strength and rigidity that when supported at the ends, the center deflection will not be more than 1/8 inch.



C. In addition to straight-edge test, the completed surface shall be flooded with water by Contractor at the time of the joint inspection. Water trucks will not be allowed onto asphaltic concrete pavement. Low areas holding water after 30 minutes of elapsed time from application, shall be outlined and the area repaired as defective pavement or patched with approved asphalt patch filler material.

3.10 DEFECTIVE PAVEMENT

A. Pavement sections not meeting specified densities shall be replaced with new asphaltic material. Replace with new asphaltic concrete material pavement sections not meeting surface test requirements or having unacceptable surface texture. Patch asphalt overlay as outlined for repair sections in this specification. Removal and replacement of defective pavement will be done at no cost to Owner.

3.11 REPAIR SECTIONS FOR NEW ASPHALTIC PAVEMENT

A. Preparation for Repairs. Damaged new pavement or pavement not meeting density requirements shall be removed and replaced with new asphaltic concrete materials. Sawcut surface course the full thickness of the course. Cut in straight lines at a distance of at least 2 feet outside of the area to be removed. Area where pavement is removed shall be thoroughly cleaned and dry of moisture before tack coat and new asphaltic material is placed. Tack edges of existing asphalt pavement as well as base.

B. Laying. The asphaltic concrete mixture, heated and prepared as specified, shall be hauled to the

work in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign materials. The mixture shall be at a temperature of 250 degrees to 350 degrees F. when laid. The mixture shall be distributed by shovels or forms or satisfactory mechanical means. Broadcasting of the material will not be permitted. Mixture shall not be dumped into area where it is to be spread. Spread mixture into place in a uniform layer of such depth that after receiving ultimate compaction by rolling the finished surface will match the surface elevation of the adjacent pavement. Extreme care shall be used in placing mixture as depressed or humped areas shall not be allowed.

C. Rolling.

1. While hot and as soon as it will bear the roller without undue displacement or hair cracking the surface shall first be compressed thoroughly and uniformly with an acceptable power-driven tandem roller weighing not less than 8 tons.

2. Rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half of the width of the wheels. Rolling shall continue until no further compression can be obtained and all roller marks are eliminated.

3. The motion of the roller shall at all times be slow enough to avoid displacement of the hot mixture; and any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the roller or any other cause shall at once be corrected by the use of rakes and of fresh mixture where required. The roller shall not be allowed to stand on the completed pavement which has not cooled to normal atmospheric temperature. To prevent adhesion of the surfacing mixture to the roller, the wheel shall be kept properly moistened with water; but an excess of water will not be permitted. All equipment shall be in good condition, as the dropping of gasoline, oil, grease, or other foreign material on pavement shall be grounds for rejection.

D. Density. Compact the asphalt pavement section to density not less than 95 percent of the

laboratory density of a mixture composed of the same material in like proportions. If density tests show overlay has a density less than 95 percent, additional rolling will be required until density requirements are obtained. All rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature of in place material drops below 185 degrees F.



E. Surface Test. Extreme care shall be used in placing material so that repair section will not have a depressed or humped area when compared to adjacent pavement surfaces. Completed surface shall be tested with 10 foot straight-edge laid parallel to and transverse to longitudinal center line of pavement. No deviation in excess of 1/8 inch per foot from the nearest point of contact will be permitted. The maximum ordinate measured from the face of the straight-edge shall not exceed 1/8 inch at any point. Contractor shall furnish approved straight-edge. Straight-edge shall be of such strength and rigidity that when supported at the ends the center deflection will not be more than 1/8 inch.



ASPHALT SEAL COAT 32 12 36.13 - 1

SECTION 32 12 36.13 - ASPHALT SEAL COAT

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This application shall consist of a surface treatment composed of a single application of asphalt, covered with aggregate, for the sealing of existing pavements. Seal coats shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 60° F. and is falling but may be applied when the air temperature is above 50° F. and is rising; the air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Seal coats shall not be applied when the temperature of the roadway is below 60° F. Asphaltic material shall not be placed when general weather conditions in the opinion of the Engineer, are not suitable.




A. The asphaltic material used shall be AC-10 and shall meet the requirements of the Item, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions", as published in the Texas Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges", 2014 Edition or latest edition. The material shall be applied at an approximate rate of 0.35 gallons per square yard. Aggregate shall meet the requirements of the Item, Single Course Surface Treatment.


A. The area to be treated shall be cleaned of dirt, dust or other deleterious matter by sweeping or other approved methods. If found necessary by the Engineer, the surface shall be lightly sprinkled, just prior to the application of asphaltic material. Asphaltic material shall be applied on the cleaned surface by an approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the material in the quantity specified evenly and smoothly, under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the asphaltic material in all the heating equipment and in the distributor, for determining the rate at which it is applied, and for securing uniformity at the junction of two distributor loads. The distributor shall have been recently calibrated, and the Engineer shall be furnished an accurate and satisfactory record of such calibration.

B. After beginning the work, should the yield on asphaltic material appear to be in error, the distributor

shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer before proceeding with the work. C. Asphaltic material may be applied for the full width of the seal coat in one application. Asphaltic

material shall not be applied until immediate covering with the aggregate is assured.

D. Aggregate shall be immediately and uniformly applied and spread by an approved self-propelled continuous feed aggregate spreader, unless otherwise shown on the plans or authorized by the Engineer in writing. The aggregate shall be applied at the rate directed by the Engineer.


ASPHALT SEAL COAT 32 12 36.13 - 2

E. The entire surface shall be broomed, bladed or raked, as required by the Engineer and shall be

thoroughly rolled with the type or types of rollers specified. F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until the work is accepted

by the Engineer. All holes or failures in the seal coat surface shall be repaired by use of additional asphalt and aggregate and all fat or bleeding surfaces shall be covered with approved cover material in such a manner that the asphaltic material will not adhere to or be picked up on the wheels of vehicles.

G. Temporary stockpiling of aggregates on roadway will be permitted provided the stockpiles are

spaced not less than 1,000 feet apart and are so placed that they neither obstruct traffic nor interfere with roadway drainage. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper preparation of all stockpile areas before aggregates are placed thereon, including leveling and cleaning of debris necessary for protection of the aggregate to prevent any contamination thereof.

H. All storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling asphaltic

material shall be kept clean and in good operation condition at all times and they shall be operated in such manner that there will be no contamination of the asphalt with foreign material. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at the storage-heating unit at all times.

I. The Engineer will select the temperature of application that will permit application at the asphalt

within the limits recommended in the THD Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions". J. The Contractor shall load, haul, distribute and apply the stockpiled aggregate and clean up all

stockpiles.



CONCRETE PAVING

32 13 13 - 1

SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1, as applicable, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete paving, including, but not limited to parking lots, aprons, sidewalks, curbs, handicapped accessible ramps, approaches, and miscellaneous exterior concrete shown on drawings.

B. Traffic lane and parking space paint striping, including, but not limited to painting of curbs and

stenciling of signs stipulating FIRE LANES, NO PARKING and BUS LOADING areas, crosswalks, handicapped accessible parking spaces, and other areas shown on drawings or required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Precast concrete wheel stops, and accessories shown on drawings.


A. Where standards or requirements of this Section are in conflict with those noted on the Contract Drawings, or the Building Code, the more stringent requirements shall govern. Bring all conflicts and discrepancies to the attention of the Architect and do not start work until such conflicts and discrepancies are clarified and corrected. Failure to do so will not relieve the Contractor from performing the Work correctly at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1. M-90 2. M-213

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. 305, Hot Weather Concreting 2. 306, Cold Weather Concreting

C. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. A185, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

2. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

3. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 4. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 5. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement 6. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 7. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete 8. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 9. C881, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete 10. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 11. C979, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

D. Federal Specifications (FS)

1. TT-S-00227E, Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. TT-P-1952B, Traffic and Airfield Marking Paint, Water Emulsion Base


CONCRETE PAVING

32 13 13 - 2


A. Do not place concrete in contact with frozen earth. Do not commence concrete placement unless temperature is at least 35 degrees F and rising, or slabs until the temperature rises above 40 degrees F.

B. Discontinue concrete placement when air temperatures exceed 100 degrees F. C. Dispose of any concrete that exceeds 95 degrees F as determined by Architect in field. D. Do not place concrete during rain. E. Cold Weather Placing: Comply with ACI 306 to protect all concrete work from physical damage and

reduce strength caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. Place no concrete against frozen earth.

F. Hot Weather Placing: Prepare aggregates, mix water and other ingredients, and place, cure, and

protect concrete in accordance with the requirements of ACI 305. G. Do not apply traffic or zone marking paint on wet or damp surfaces or when rain is imminent. Do not

commence painting operations until material, air, and/or surface temperature and dew point are within paint manufacturer’s recommended application limits.

1.6 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Before starting any work under this section, make all required arrangements with testing agency. Provide testing laboratory with certified reports on proposed cements, aggregates mixing water and admixtures.

B. Lab shall review design mixes for each type of concrete using previously tested and approved

materials. C. The testing lab will proportion mixes by laboratory trial batch, using materials to be employed in the

work for each class of concrete required and reporting to Architect. 1. Concrete Compression Test - 7 day and 28 day 2. Concrete Slump Test 3. Concrete Air Content

D. Furnish certified reports of format shown herein of each proposed mix for each type of concrete at

least 30 days prior to start of installation of the Work of this Section. E. Furnish ready mix delivery tickets to field Architect upon request.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for concrete admixtures. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, accessories,

reinforcement, and clearances. Include concrete placement sequence schedule. C. Concrete Design Mix Reports:

1. One (1) for each type of concrete to be used.

D. Submit product data and shop drawings for ALL items to be installed. E. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.


CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 3

1.8 INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination

B. Required Participants:1. General Contractor Superintendent2. Placement and Finishing Foreman3. Concrete Supplier4. Testing Lab


A. No separate measurement or payment will be made for materials and labor performed under thissection. Include all costs in the lump sum price.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2. 1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers named within this Section are approved for use on the Project for the product for which they are specified. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience manufacturing the product specified and meet or exceed the specifications for that product. Substitution of products must be in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00, Submittals to be considered prior to proposal.

3. 2 MATERIALS

A. Formwork:1. General: Contractor may use any of the following formwork materials if material meets the

following and will not stain, or impart any undesirable texture, i.e. wood grain, where such texture would be objectionable in an exposed location.a. Wood Forms:

1) Plywood: PS 1, Douglas Fir or Spruce species.2) Medium Density Overlay (MDO): One (1) side grade; sound undamaged

sheets with clean, true edges.3) Lumber: Southern Yellow Pine species; No. 2 grade, with grade stamp

clearly visible.b. Prefabricated Forms:

1) Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gauge matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.

2) Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.

B. Metal Reinforcement:1. Bars:

a. Conform to ACI 315, latest edition.b. Comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed billet steel bars, unfinished, except

Number 3 bars shall comply with ASTM A615, Grade 40, deformed billet steel bars, unfinished.

2. Tie Wire: 16 gauge annealed.

C. Concrete Materials (Other than concrete for extruded curbs, unless noted otherwise)1. Cement: Type 1, ASTM C150, unless approved otherwise by Architect. Use one (1) brand

of cement for entire project.


CONCRETE PAVING

32 13 13 - 4

2. Concrete Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced and serviced by established, reputable manufacturer and used in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. a. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible

with other required admixtures. Provide one (1) of the following, or Architect approved equal: 1) Eucon AEA-92 and Eucon Air Mix 200 by The Euclid Chemical Company. 2) Sika AEA 14 by Sika Corp. 3) MasterAir AE or MasterAir VR by BASF Admixtures.

b. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A, and containing not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. Provide one (1) of the following, or Architect approved equal: 1) Eucon WR 75 or Eucon WR 91 by The Euclid Chemical Company. 2) Master Pozzolith 322 by BASF Admixtures. 3) Plastocrete 161 by Sika Corp.

c. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or Type G and containing not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. Provide one (1) of the following, or Architect approved equal: 1) Eucon 37 by The Euclid Chemical Company. 2) ViscoCrete by Sika Corp. 3) Master Rheobuild 1000 by BASF Admixtures.

3. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted.

4. Integral Color Pigment (Required for new concrete handicapped accessibility ramps): Mineral oxide, lightfast, lime-proof, water-resistant type conforming to ASTM C979. Color(s) shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color line. Provide one (1) of the following, or Architect approved equal: a. ChemSystems, Inc. b. Davis Colors c. New Riverside Ochre Co., Inc. d. Scofield Decorative Concrete by Sika Corp.

5. Color Stain (Required for existing concrete handicapped accessibility ramps): A penetrating acrylic concrete stain, designed for adding color to existing concrete. Color(s) shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color line. Provide H & C Silicone Acrylic Concrete Stain manufactured by Sherwin Williams, or Architect approved equal.

6. Aggregates: a. Comply with ASTM C33 b. Maximum size not larger than 1/5 of narrowest dimension between forms of the

member for which concrete is to be used. Not larger than 3/4 of minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars.

c. 1-1/2 inch maximum in paving slabs. 7. Strengths:

a. Five and a half (5.5) sack (shall contain no less than 5.5 sacks of Portland cement)/3,500 psi/28 days.

b. Strength recommendations on Drawings supersede when they are greater than specified here.

8. Water: Drinking quality. 9. Water - Cement Ratio (lb water per lb of Portland cement):

1) 0.52 Maximum 10. Slump:

a. Slump shall be 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch, unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. Joints: 1. Construction Joints and Expansion Joints: Refer to Paragraph on Accessories below. 2. Tooled Control Joint: Scored ¼-inch wide x 1/4 thickness of concrete in depth.


CONCRETE PAVING

32 13 13 - 5

E. Accessories:

1. Chairs and Spacers: Heavy-duty plastic-type sized to support all reinforcing steel to proper height directly on properly prepared and compacted subgrade. No sand cushion pads will be permitted. Provide chairs and spacers Series “B” by W.H.C. Products, Inc., E-Z Chair by Dayton Superior, MEDCO PC-4 by Meadow Burke, a CHR Company, GTI Bar Chair by General Technologies, Inc., or approved equivalent. Maximum spacing of chairs shall be 36-inches on center each way.

2. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete or absorb moisture. 3. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages, Fasteners: Sized as required, of

sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. 4. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C881, two (2) component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive

compound suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide one (1) of the following, or approved equal: a. Euco #452 Epoxy System or Euco #620 Epoxy System by The Euclid Chemical

Company. b. Sikadur Hi-Mod by Sika Corp.

5. Expansion Joints: a. Fiber Joint Filler: Pre-molded asphalt impregnated rigid fiber board. Comply with

AASHTO M-213. Use 3/4-inch-thick at expansion joints adjacent to extruded curbs, 1/2-inch-thick at perimeter of footings for ground-set items such as bollards and fence posts where such footings are incorporated into slabs; elsewhere as shown.

b. Wood Expansion Joints: Where indicated in the drawing provide construction clear heart grade redwood joints conforming to AASHTO M-90. Provide sizes indicated on drawings. Do not install adjacent to curbs.

c. Joint Sealant: Shall be a self-leveling silicone base, cold-applied joint sealing compound complying with DOWSIL 890-SL Silicone Joint Sealant as manufactured by Dow Silicones Corporation or approved equal.

6. Load Transfer Units: a. Light Duty (sidewalk): 3/4 inch thick clear heart redwood expansion joint form with

minimum one (1) inch deep removable top strip, 1/2 inch x 10 inch smooth steel reinforcing bars at 12 inches on center +/- with bond breaker sleeve on one (1) side, and 3/32 inch thick steel bar-support plates each side. Provide custom size as required for full depth of paving and sealant depth as required by sealant manufacturer.

b. Medium Duty (Auto) / Heavy Duty (truck/bus traffic): 3/4 inch thick redwood expansion joint form with minimum one (1) inch deep removable top strip, 3/4 inch by 18 inch steel reinforcing bars at 12 inches on center+/- with bond-breaker sleeve on one (1) side and 3/16 inch steel bar-support plates each side. Provide custom size as required for full depth of paving and sealant depth as required by sealant manufacturer.

F. Curing Compound: The compound shall conform to ASTM C309-1315, Type II (A.I.M. Regulations - VOC Compliant). Provide 1600 White by W. R. Meadows, Inc., or equal products by BASF Admixtures, Dayton Superior, or approved equal.

G. Other Materials: Provide all items required to complete work which is not specified, or which is not to

be provided by other trades. H. Extruded Concrete Curbs:

1. Materials: a. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. b. Aggregate: ASTM C33. c. Water: Clean, free of contaminating material.

2. Epoxy Adhesive: As specified under concrete materials above.



3. Concrete Mixing:a. Slump: No slump allowed.

4. Curing Compound: As specified under concrete materials above.

I. Traffic and Zone Marking Paint: (As shown on drawings or required)1. Type: chlorinated rubber paint conforming to the requirements of TT-P-115E. Sherwin

Williams product Setfast Chlorinated Rubber Zone Marking Paint TM5126 – White andTM5127 – Yellow or approved equal.

2. Stripe Size: Four (4) inches wide for traffic and parking lanes, unless noted otherwise.3. Colors:

a. Traffic and Parking Striping / crosswalks, directional arrows: White or as selectedby Architect.

b. Fire Lanes: All curbs at driveways adjacent to building shall be painted solid redwith white stenciled lettering to read “FIRE LANE, NO PARKING” in size andspacing required by authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor to verifyrequirements of local jurisdiction for fire lane striping.

c. Accessibility Handicapped Parking: Symbols and spaces shall be in size and colorin accordance with ADA and TAS authorities having jurisdiction.

J. Precast Concrete Wheel Stops: (As shown on drawings or required)1. Precast of 3,000 psi air-entrained concrete, approximately 6 inches high x 9 inches wide x 6

feet-0 inches long, with chamfered top corners and drainage slots underneath. Unit shallweigh minimum 190 lbs.

2. Anchor Rods: Two (2) No. 4 by 12-inch-long anchor rods located approximately 12 inchesfrom each end of wheel stop.

3. Epoxy Adhesive: As specified under concrete materials above.

K. ADA Detectable Warning Paver1. As produced by Pavestone or approved Equal.2. Color as approved by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Review approved mix designs with Architect in field.

B. Clean all mixing and transportation equipment; remove debris from forms; wet forms thoroughly;remove ice and other coatings from reinforcement which might hinder good bond; remove water fromplace of deposit; and check reinforcement.

C. Inspection: Examine all areas and conditions under which the Work of this Section will be performed.Correct any conditions detrimental to the approved completion of the work. Do not proceed until allsuch conditions are corrected.

D. If thickness of concrete pavement is not labeled on the drawings, the thickness shall be 6-inch thick.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Forms:1. Conform to the shapes, lines and dimensions of the members as shown on the drawings,

except as modified under the Earthwork Section of these specifications. Review depths withArchitect in field.

2. Care shall be taken to assure that formwork does not stain concrete surfaces.



3. Slab Block-Outs:a. Diamond configuration at paving drains, round or diamond configuration at bollards,

fence posts and the like.b. Coordinate with concrete joints, verify with Architect.

4. Slope exterior concrete slabs away from building and towards paving drains. Verify all slopeswith Architect prior to start of concrete pour.

5. Form Removal:a. Remove only after concrete has thoroughly hardened.b. Vertical forms for ground-supported slabs may be removed 24 hours after pour.

B. Reinforcing:1. Cleaning Reinforcement: Free from rust, scale, dirt, or other coatings which will destroy or

reduce the bond.2. Placing Reinforcement:

a. Place accurately and adequately secure in position.b. Bar reinforcement in all concrete slabs shall be held in proper locations by use of

plastic chairs spaced a maximum distance of 36 inches on center unless notedotherwise.

3. Coverage of Reinforcement: The metal reinforcement shall be protected by the thickness ofconcrete indicated on the plans.a. Three (3) inches: Concrete deposited against ground without use of forms.

b. Two (2) inches: Bars more than 5/8-inch diameter where concreteis exposed to the weather or exposed to the ground but placed in forms.

c. 1-1/2 inches: Bars 5/8-inch diameter where concrete is exposed tothe weather or exposed to the ground but placed in forms.

d. Two (2) inches: In slabs and walks on grade.e. 1-1/2 inches-1-3/4 inches from top: Paving

C. Joints:1. Construction Joints:

a. Shall occur at expansion joints.b. Use at cold joints in paving slabs.

2. Expansion Joints:a. Locate fiber joint filler type where walks and paving abut curbs and at perimeter of

slab infill. Joints shall be continuous and full depth and width of slab. Stop 3/4-inch-thick fillers 1/2 inch below top of paving and 1/2-inch-thick fillers 3/8 inch below topof paving for subsequent application of sealant cap; sealant to be applied to within1/8 inch of slab surface. Verify other locations with Architect where asphaltimpregnated fiber joint filler and sealant cap is to be used.

b. Locate redwood expansion joints at paving and walk expansion joints whereindicated, complete with load transfer units as specified herein and detailed. Jointsshall be continuous and full depth and width of slab. Except where detailed withoutsealant cap, stop expansion joints 1/2 inch below top of paving for subsequentapplication of sealant cap. Top surface of sealant shall be approximately 1/8 inchbelow top of adjacent concrete. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer’sinstructions. For applications where no sealant cap is to be applied, stop expansionjoints 1/8 inch below top of paving surface. Verify other locations with Architectwhere redwood expansion joint and sealer cap is to be used.

c. Install redwood expansion joints 5 feet either side of water lines under pavement.

3. Load Transfer Units: Install straight and true, and in accordance with manufacturer’sinstructions.

4. Tooled Joints:a. Steel tool all control joints, edges of expansion joints, and all exposed perimeter

edges to smooth bullnose, using an edger having a radius of 1/4 inch, as approved.


CONCRETE PAVING

32 13 13 - 8

b. Form control joints in uniform straight lines in locations indicated, but in no case greater than 5 feet apart, uniformly spaced.

D. Accessories: Install accessories and boxes, sleeves and other required devices furnished by other

trades. E. Concrete:

1. Conveying: a. Batching, mixing and Delivery Equipment: Use transit mixed concrete from

approved batching and mixing plant. Batch, mix, and transport concrete to the site in accordance with provision of ASTM C94.

b. Where colored concrete is shown or required, i.e. accessible ramps, use color pigment admixture in concrete. Mix color pigment into concrete in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to achieve integrally pigmented concrete in specified colors or as selected by Architect.

c. Handling concrete from point of delivery and transfer to conveying equipment and to location of final deposit as rapidly as practicable and by methods which prevent segregation and loss of mix materials.

d. Provide runways for wheeled conveying equipment from delivery point to location of final deposit.

e. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment, including chutes and tremies, free from hardened concrete, debris, water and other deleterious materials.

f. Pumps may be used only if they can pump the mix designed. Do not add fine aggregate or water to the mix to satisfy needs of a pumping device.

g. Use chutes or tremies for placing concrete where a drop of more than 6'-0" is required.

h. Addition of water on the job - The maximum water-cement ratio should never be exceeded. If all the water allowed by the specification has not been added at the start of mixing, it may be permissible to add the remaining allowable water at the point of delivery.

2. Concrete Placement, General:

a. Place concrete in compliance with practices and recommendations of ACI 304, and as specified herein.

b. Do not deposit concrete on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to form seams or planes of weakness within the section.

c. Sections between expansion joints shall be placed in continuous pours; construction joints in paving and walks other than at expansion joint locations will not be permitted.

d. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.

e. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to any procedure which might cause segregation.

f. Screed concrete which is to receive other construction to the proper level to avoid excessive skimming and grouting.

g. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by foreign materials.

3. Slab Placement: a. Moisten subgrade the evening before and immediately prior to placement of all

paving slabs. b. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits

of all expansion joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed using vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other methods acceptable to Architect.



c. Consolidate concrete during placement by use of the specified equipment,preferably with power driven floats of impact type, thoroughly working concretearound reinforcement and into corners.

d. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straight edge, and then strike off.e. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free from bumps and

hollows.f. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface; do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to

start of finishing operations.4. Extruded Curb Placement:

a. Install to detail in locations shown.b. Apply epoxy resin adhesive to paved surface prior to extruding curb.c. Machine extrude concrete to shape detailed on Drawings, as approved. Trowel form

concrete curbs in areas where machine cannot reach.d. Install pre-molded expansion joints where curbs meet poured-in-place concrete and

at 60 lineal feet maximum spacing; elsewhere where indicated.e. Cut crack control joints every 20 lineal feet and at beginning of curves with less than

five (5) foot radius.f. Hand trowel rough areas to a dense, uniform texture. Bevel curbs 45 degrees at

dead ends.g. Spray apply membrane forming curing compound after curb installation.h. Remove and replace curbs which crack; cut out chipped or cracked areas and

reinstall new extruded curbs.i. Remove excess concrete from paving surfaces.

F. Curing:1. General:

a. Protect all freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive hot or coldtemperature extremes. Start curing procedures on slabs immediately after finishingoperation.

b. Maintain curing procedures for seven (7) days at minimum temperature of 50degrees F.; if mean daily temperature drops below 40 degrees F. during this period,extend curing period an equal number of days or provide temporary heat oradditional protection to maintain specified minimum temperature of air in contact with concrete.

2. Curing Exterior Paving and Slabs: Spray paving, walks, curbs and other miscellaneous slabswith liquid membrane-forming compound specified above, applied at not less than themanufacturer’s specified and recommended rate.

G. Finishes:1. Spreading of dry cement for finishing is not permitted.2. Finish all exposed edges and joints with edging tools of 1/4 inch radius.3. Exterior Paving and Slabs:

a. Floating: Do not begin floating until bleed water sheen has disappeared or untilleveled material has stiffened sufficiently for power floating. After power floating, re-float by hand immediately to uniform, true, smooth, granular surface within thespecified tolerance.

b. Medium Broom Finish: Broom after floating and concrete is hard enough to retainscoring. Use a stiff fiber or wire broom. Broom perpendicular to direction of traffic,typically. Broom in opposite directions at sidewalk panels in a checkerboard patternor as indicated on drawings.

4. Handicapped Accessible Ramps: Slope surfaces as shown on drawings. Texture ramp byproviding raised, truncated domes on the surface of the ramp in accordance with TAS.1) New Concrete Ramps: Integrally color concrete in color selected by Architect from

manufacturer’s standard colors to provide contrasting color to that of adjacentconcrete.


CONCRETE PAVING

32 13 13 - 10

2) Existing Concrete Ramps: Stain concrete using specified concrete stain in color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors to provide contrasting color to that of adjacent concrete. a) Prior to applying any stain, existing concrete ramps shall be cleaned up of

all dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminates. b) Acid etch with 25 percent muriatic acid solution. c) Power wash at 3,000 psi. d) Water test to determine if water absorbs, thereby making it good to stain. e) Allow concrete to thoroughly dry. f) Apply stain in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Note: All colors must be approved by Architect prior to their use. Failure to do so,

may be cause for rejection of work and removal and replacement of work with new work at Contractor’s expense.

5. Miscellaneous Vertical Surfaces: Finish all vertical surfaces, including but not limited to curbs, risers, low walls and stringer, while concrete is strong enough to stay in place without forms yet green and able to be finished to a homogeneous appearance.

H. Traffic Lane, Parking Space, and Zone Paint Striping: (As shown on drawings or required)

1. Surface Conditions: Clean and dry, free from dirt, loose paint, oil, grease, wax and other surface contaminants which would affect paint bond.

2. Allow concrete surfaces to cure the minimum time recommended by the traffic marking paint manufacturer, but in no case less than 30 days prior to applying traffic marking paint.

3. Locate markings as indicated on drawings. Do not apply paint until layout is verified with Architect. Protect surfaces which are not to receive paint.

4. Mix paint and apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using skilled labor and proper mechanical equipment to produce uniform, straight lines without bleeding edges or runs.

5. Paint traffic, parking lanes, and accessibility handicapped parking lines as shown on drawings and to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

6. Paint curbs and stenciled signs for FIRE LANES, NO PARKING, and BUS LOADING areas, crosswalks, handicapped accessible parking spaces, and other areas shown on drawings or required by authorities having jurisdiction. Use proper type, style and size stencils for all numbers and lettering. Do not apply paint until layout is verified with Architect and/or authorities having jurisdiction. Protect surfaces which are not to receive paint.

I. Precast Concrete Wheel Stops: (As shown on drawings or required)

1. Surface Conditions: Clean and dry, free from dirt, loose paint, oil, grease, wax and other surface contaminants which would affect epoxy bond.

2. Locate wheel stops as indicated on drawings. 3. Predrill holes in concrete paving for anchor rods. 4. Secure wheel stops in 1/8-inch-thick x 3-inch-wide epoxy and drive anchor rods through

predrilled holes filled with epoxy grout.

J. ADA Detectable Warning Paver 1. Install per manufacturer’s details and requirements.


A. Inspection and Testing Laboratory: 1. Perform the appropriate tests upon notification by the Contractor.

B. Tolerances:

1. Slope as shown on drawings. 2. Paving sections containing “bird baths” greater than two (2) feet in diameter or 1/8-inch-deep

(regardless of size of area) will be removed and re-poured at Contractor’s expense.



3.4 PATCHING AND CLEANING

A. Clean exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete to approval ofArchitect.

B. Reinforce or replace all deficient work as directed by Architect and at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Clean all concrete and cement work on completion of this portion of the work.

3.5 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Imperfect or damaged work, as determined by the engineer, shall be satisfactorily replaced at theContractor’s expense and shall be in conformity with all the requirements of the Contract Documents.Removal and replacement of concrete work shall be done in such a manner as not to impair theappearance or strength of the structure in any way.

3.6 PENALTY FOR DEFICIENT PAVEMENT THICKNESS

A. It is the intent of this specification that the pavement be constructed in strict conformity with thethickness and typical sections shown on drawings. Where any pavement is found not soconstructed, the following rules relative to adjustment of payment for acceptable pavement and toreplacement of faulty pavement shall govern.

B. Prior to final acceptance, and if deemed necessary by the Engineer, the pavement will be cored bythe Testing Laboratory. Locations of core tests may be selected by the Engineer. Regular testingshall occur for every five hundred (500) square yards of placed concrete pavement and at randomlocations.

C. For the purpose of establishing an adjusted price for pavement, units to be considered separatelyare defined as 500 square yards of pavement.

D. One core will be taken at locations selected by the Engineer or at random in each unit and testedin accordance with ASTM Method C-174. When measurement of the core from any unit is notdeficient more than 0.2 inches from the plan thickness, full payment will be made.

E. If measurement of any core from any unit is deficient more than 0.2 inch but not more than 0.50inch from the plan thickness two additional cores will be taken from the unit and the average of thethree cores determined. The two additional cores will be taken such that the unit will be wellrepresented. If the average thickness of the three cores is deficient more than 0.2 inch but notmore than 0.50 inch from the plan thickness, an adjusted unit price as provided below, will be paidfor in these areas represented by these cores. At the option of the Engineer, additional cores maybe taken in the adjacent unit/units to determine if the deficiency of thickness continues across alllanes of pavement. If the deficiency if found to exist in one (1) or more adjacent units, adjusted unitprices as provided below will be paid for those adjacent units that are found to be deficient.

F. Price Adjustments: Concrete Pavement Deficiency

Deficiency in Thickness Determined by Cores (in inches)

Proportional Part of Contract Price Allowed (adjustment factor)

No deficient 1.0Over 0.00 through 0.20 1.0 Over 0.20 through 0.30 0.80 Over 0.30 through 0.40 0.72 Over 0.40 through 0.50 0.68

Over 0.50 0.50 or removal*


CONCRETE PAVING

32 13 13 - 12

*At option of the Engineer.

G. Any area of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 0.50 inch, but not more than 0.75 inch, shall be evaluated by the Engineer. If, in the judgement of the Engineer, the area of such deficiency should not be removed and replaced, there will be no payment for the area retained. If, in the judgement of the Engineer, the area of such deficiency warrants removal, the area shall be removed and replaced, at the Contractor's entire expense, with concrete of the thickness shown on the drawings. Any area found deficient in thickness by more than 0.75 inch shall be removed and replaced, at the Contractor's entire expense, with concrete of the thickness shown on the drawings.

H. No additional payment, over the contract price will be made for any pavement of a thickness

exceeding that required on the drawings. Also, planing of concrete pavement shall not be allowed.



PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13 - 1

SECTION 32 17 23.13 - PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This item shall govern for the materials, composition, manufacture, testing, and installation of alltraffic paint and related materials as covered herein.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data and shop drawings for ALL items to be installed.

B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.


A. No separate measurement for payment will be made for materials and labor performed under thissection. Include all costs in the lump sum price.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CONFORMANCE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS

A. Coatings shall conform, on a weight basis, to the composition requirements of the standard formula.No variation from the standard formula will be permitted except for replace of volatiles lost inprocessing, or those approved by the Engineer. The finished coatings shall conform with allrequirements stipulated for each standard formula, and, in addition, shall equal a Wet Standard incharacteristics such as color, drying, flow, settling, brush ability, can stability, hiding, etc.

B. Film characteristics such as gloss, hardness, light permanency, adhesion, etc., shall also conform.When testing for such conformity, the coating shall be applied and tested under parallel conditionswith the Wet Standard. The finished product shall be free of skins and foreign materials.


3.1 MILL TESTS AND TESTING

A. All paint contractors shall be required to furnish to the Owner a copy of certified Mill test report forall paint to be furnished and delivered. Testing shall be in accordance with TxDOT.

B. Raw materials and finished products which fail to meet any requirements of these specificationsshall be subject to rejection. Final acceptance or rejection shall be based on results of tests onsamples of raw materials and paint taken during production, and upon tests made on finished paintsprior to delivery. Approval of materials, as a result of preliminary testing prior to manufacture intofinished coatings, shall not be binding upon final approval or rejection. The judgment of theEngineer shall be final in all questions relative to conformance with the provisions of thesespecifications. 661.6 Manufacturing procedures, except when specified, shall be left to thediscretion of the contractor. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to ascertain that the rawmaterials and manufacturing procedures he proposes to use will produce a product meeting thespecification requirements.


PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13 - 2

3.2 SHIPMENT

A. Shipment shall be made in suitable, strong, well-sealed containers which not only meetspecifications and Federal requirements but are also sufficiently sturdy to withstand normalhandling to which shipments are subjected in transit. Finished coating containers and cases shallbe plainly and securely labeled with the name and the designation of the coating, order number,requisition number, batch number, date of manufacture, gross weight, and manufacturer’s name.Labeling shall be on the sides of container and cases. Labels must be sufficiently moisture-resistant to withstand outdoor storage for a minimum of one year.

B. When the finished product is palletized for shipment, the labels shall be to the outside for easyidentification. Once the finished product has been labeled properly, the label shall not be modifiedor changed in any manner without specific approval of the Engineer.

3.3 RAW MATERIALS

A. Raw materials for Traffic Painting shall adhere to Item 661 – Traffic Paint of the Harris CountyEngineering Department Year 2017 Specifications or latest edition.

3.4 INSTALLATION METHODS

A. All traffic paint applications shall meet the following requirements:1. Traffic paint shall be applied at the rate of one gallon of un-thinned paint per 105 square

feet of surface area.2. Traffic paint shall be applied in two (2) coats with each coat having a minimum thickness

of 15 mils, measured in a wet condition.3. Paint striping shall be applied and measured to ± 1/4" of the specified widths.

B. All traffic paint striping not meeting these requirements shall be "touched up", removed and/orcompletely restriped to these standards and in accordance with the drawings at no additional costto the Owner, as directed by the Engineer.

C. Where traffic buttons exist, the paint shall be applied to the pavement adjacent to, but not on thebuttons or markers, unless another method is specified.

D. Word and symbol markings on pavement shall be in accordance with "Pavement Word and SymbolMarkings" Section of the latest Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices of the TxDOT.

3.5 TESTING

A. When required, the contractor shall pay for and provide to the Engineer, a testing report performedby a local testing laboratory designated by the Engineer. The report shall verify that the raw andfinished materials to be supplied under this contract meet the requirements of this specification.

3.6 REJECTION

A. Materials and finished products which fail to meet any or all requirements of these specificationsshall be subject to rejection. All materials and finished products rejected by the Engineer, whetherin containers or applied to roadway surface shall be removed from the jobsite and replaced withmaterials meeting specifications and requirements and all costs of such removal and replacementshall be borne by the Contractor.



NYLON SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM-PADDED 32 18 23.22.1 - 1

SECTION 32 18 23.22.1 - NYLON SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM-PADDED

PART I – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipmentnecessary to install, in place, all synthetic turf and other materials as indicated on the plans andas specified herein. The installation of all new materials shall be performed in strict accordancewith these specifications, the manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with all details andshop drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitutions: Products other than those listed in Section 2.1.A. are acceptable if in compliancewith all requirements of these specifications. Submit alternate products with the bid proposal andprovide the following:1. Provide all specifications, product data, certification and required information for

proposed alternate. It is the responsibility of the bidder to prove that the productsubstitution is equal to or greater than the product specified.

2. Provide a 12’ x 12’ sample of the product substitution

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts, material safety data sheets (MSDS), brochures,

specifications, preparation and installation instructions and recommendations2. All supplied and installed materials and products will meet or exceed the minimum

specifications designated in this section. Sufficient data must be submitted to indicatecompliance with the Contract Documents

3. Submit instructions for installation.

C. Test Results: The following test results, certified by a licensed independent testing laboratory,shall be submitted as outlined below1. With the bid – Mandatory and minimum specifications as shown in Part 2. Bids not

meeting the minimum specifications will be rejected.

D. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for synthetic turf including, but notlimited to:1. Proposed locations of all seams in fabric surfacing. Show installation methods and

construction.2. Field lining and marking - Submit a complete scale and dimensional drawing of tufted-in

or painted field lines and marking boundaries. Include graphics for center logo artwork (ifrequired) for approval as well.

3. All submittals shall be provided within 14 days after Notice to Proceed



E. The Manufacturer / Installer shall provide the following samples of the artificial turf selected forthis project1. A 12-inch x 12-inch minimum sample of the exact synthetic turf system that is specified

for this project.

F. With the bid - Proof that the turf is manufactured in the United States of America. Foreign-madeturf products are not allowed. Bids including foreign materials will be rejected.

G. With the bid – Sample Warranty: The Contractor shall provide a warranty to the Owner thatcovers defects in materials and installation workmanship of the turf for a period of eight (8) yearsfrom the date of substantial completion. The turf manufacturer must verify that theirrepresentative has inspected the installation and that the work conforms to the manufacturer’srequirements and any written directives. The manufacturer’s warranty shall include general wearand damage caused from UV degradation. Other items that must be addressed include thefollowing:1. Acceptable uses for the field.2. Fading.3. Color match within specifications.4. Excessive fiber wear.5. Wrinkling and panel movement.6. Seam integrity.7. Drainage (through the turf only).Exclusions shall include the following:1. Vandalism2. Acts of God beyond the control of the Owner or the Manufacturer

H. Maintenance and Operations Data: At the completion of the project submit 3 complete sets, inmanual form, of all the manufacturer’s recommended procedures and materials for, but notlimited to general maintenance, line/marking installation, small repair procedures, cleaning, etc…

I. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of seams, drains, and other pertinentinformation in accordance with the General Requirements


A. Manufacturer Qualifications1. Shall own and operate its manufacturing plant in the United States. Plant must be

capable of extruding its own nylon fiber for the system. Plant shall also be capable oftufting the fibers into the backing.

2. Shall be experienced in the manufacture and installation of the specified type of syntheticturf for a minimum of five (5) years.

3. Shall have its own, in-house laboratory where samples of turf are retained and analyzed.Tests shall be performed at all levels of production from the extrusion process to thetufting process and through to the final stages before the turf is loaded onto the truck fordelivery.

B. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of the synthetic turf manufacturer forinstallation and maintenance is required for this Project.



1. Installation team shall be an established, experienced in the field installer, with aminimum of two years of experience with 15 foot wide tufted nylon materials. Installershall have installed a minimum of five (5) 100% glued down fields.

2. Installation team shall be certified, in writing, by the turf manufacturer, as competent inthe installation of the specified material, including seaming and proper installation of thepad, and gluing down the system

3. Site superintendent shall have at least five (5) installations similar to this type.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain synthetic turf through one source from a single manufacturer. AnyMaterials (including the fiber itself) manufactured outside of the United States are not acceptable.

D. All components and their installation method shall be designed and manufactured for use onindoor or outdoor athletic fields. The materials as hereinafter specified, should be able towithstand full climatic exposure, be resistant to insect infestation, rot, fungus and mildew; to ultra-violet light and heat degradation, and shall have the basic characteristic of flow-through drainageallowing free movement of surface run-off through the turf and directly into prepared granularbase and into the field drainage system.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weatherconditions permit synthetic turf work to be performed according to Contractor/Manufacturer’swritten instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICEA. Turf Installation Contractor shall train maintenance staff and/or contracted maintenance staff in

the use of the recommended maintenance equipment and provide maintenance guidelines to thefacility maintenance staff.

PART TWO – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Pre-Approved manufacturers:1. AstroTurf (Puregrass)2. SynLawn (SynRye 214)3. Hellas Construction (REAL GRASS)4. Alternate manufacturers are acceptable provided they meet and/or exceed all listed

requirements, qualifications and specifications.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Synthetic Turf System: A complete synthetic turf system consisting of 100% in-housemanufactured nylon fibers. Yarn cross-section shall be a nylon extruded diamond monofilament.Pile height shall be nominal 1-1/4” Fibers shall be tufted into a single sports caliber fabric matrixand coated with a mechanically applied Biocel™ Polyurethane 5mm foam pad.



1. The carpets’ primary backing shall be coated with an acrylic pre-coat and a 5mmBiocel™ Polyurethane foam pad weighing no less than 86 ounces per square yard.

2. The carpet shall be delivered in 15’ wide rolls. The rolls shall be of sufficient length to gofrom sideline to sideline. Head seams, other than at sidelines, will not be acceptable.

B. The pile surface shall provide good traction in all types of weather with the use of conventionalsneaker type shoes, composition mold sole athletic shoes, baseball spikes and screw-on footballspikes.

C. The pile surface shall be suitable for both temporary and permanent line markings using acrylicpaint, as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Adhesive for gluing turf system to the base shall be a one part, high green strength urethanewhich exhibits high tenacity. Glue shall be Nordot 34D-2 as provided by Synthetic Surfaces, Inc.,Scotch Plains, New Jersey, of preapproved equivalent.

E. All glue for gluing seams shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. Perimeter edge details required for the system shall be as detailed and recommended by themanufacturer, and as approved by the manufacturer.

2.3 FABRIC SURFACE

A. The pile surface shall resemble freshly mown natural grass in appearance, texture and color.

B. The pile surface shall be nominally uniform in length.

C. The entire system shall be resistant to weather, insects, rot, mildew and fungus growth and willbe non-allergic and non-toxic.

D. The synthetic turf system shall have a nominal fiber length of 1-1/4””.

E. Each roll shall be minimum 15’ wide.

F. All markings will be painted.

2.4 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

A. Yarn shall be proven athletic quality 100% nylon monofilament yarn designed specifically forindoor or outdoor use and stabilized to resist the effects of ultraviolet degradation, heat, foottraffic, water and airborne pollutants. Fiber MUST be extruded in-house. Fiber extruded byoutside manufacturers shall not be acceptable. The fabric shall possess the following minimumphysical characteristics. ASTM testing shall be provided with the bid and any products notmeeting the minimum physical characteristics will be rejected:

Pile Yarn Type Nylon extruded monofilament Yarn Melting Point >420 degrees FYarn Maximum Elongation > 30% nominal


NYLON SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM-PADDED

32 18 23.22.1 - 5

Pile Height 1-1/4” Stitch Gauge 3/8” Face Weight 56 oz. per square yard Fabric Width 15’ Fabric Construction Tufted Pad 8mm Polyurethane Foam Pill Burn Test Pass

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for visual installation tolerances. Proceed with installation only after satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Certification of prior work: The synthetic turf manufacturer and / or installation contractor shall perform a visual inspection of the field base onto which the synthetic turf system is to be installed and to examine the finished surface for required grade tolerances. After any discrepancies between the required materials, application and tolerance requirements noted have been corrected, the synthetic turf installer should submit a written certification of VISUAL acceptance of the base for installation of the synthetic turf system. Any tests other than VISUAL tests shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor or Landscape Architect.

C. Installation of all materials shall be performed in full compliance with approved project shop drawings. Only factory trained technicians skilled in the installation of athletic caliber synthetic turf systems, working under the direct supervision of the manufacturer’s supervisors, shall undertake the placement of the turf system. The designated Supervisory personnel on the project must be certified, in writing by the turf manufacturer as competent in the installation of these materials, including proper seaming for knitted systems.

D. All designs, markings, layouts and materials shall conform to all currently applicable NCAA rules and other standards and/or FIH standards that may apply to this type of synthetic grass installation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Inspect delivered field surface fabric and components immediately prior to installation. Any

damaged or defective items shall be rejected. Installed artificial system shall be inspected for, but not limited to, the following: 1. Uniformity of product and color 2. Surface bubbles 3. Field markings 4. Field Edge installation

B. Environmental Conditions: Weather conditions are important for the successful installation of the systems. No work under this section will proceed when: 1. Ambient temperatures are below 45 degrees F. 2. Material temperatures are below 45 degrees F. 3. Surfaces are wet or damp 4. Rain is imminent or falling.



5. Conditions exist or are imminent, which will be unsuitable to installation requirements ofthe systems specified herein. Humidity levels will be inside the limits recommended bythe adhesive manufacturer to obtain optimum bonding characteristics of the surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF THE SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM

A. The carpet rolls are to be glued directly onto the properly prepared base. Care is to be taken notto disturb the base.

B. All seams shall be glued using adhesive as recommended by the turf manufacturer. All workshall be such that the seams shall remain as required for the duration of the warranty period at aminimum. Seams shall be flat, tight and permanent with no separation or fraying.

C. The perimeter of the field shall be firmly secured to the edge anchors for the life of the warrantyand in accordance to project details.

3.4 FIELD LINING AND MARKINGS

A. General: A complete field “Lining, Marking and Field Boundary” system will be provided with theinstallation of the surfacing system specified herein. All markings shall be installed in accordancewith prior approved project Shop Drawings.

B. All markings will be painted.

C. Striping layouts shall be accurately surveyed by the Contractor before painting of field markings

3.5 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner three (3) copies ofMaintenance Manuals, which will include all necessary instructions for the proper care andpreventative maintenance of the synthetic turf system, including painting and striping.

B. The Contractor shall provide evidence that the turf can be plowed with conventional rubberbladed snow removal equipment.

C. The finished playing surface shall appear as mowed grass with no irregularities and shall affordexcellent traction for conventional athletic shoes.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Contractor shall provide the labor, supplies and equipment as necessary for final cleaning ofsurfaces and installed items. All usable remnants of new material shall remain the property of theOwner. The Contractor shall keep the area clean throughout the project and clear of debris.Surfaces, recesses, enclosures, etc… shall be cleaned, as necessary, to leave the work area in aclean, immaculate condition ready for immediate occupancy and use by the Owner.

END OF SECTION 32 18 23.22.1


INFILLED POLYETHLYLENE SLIT-FILM SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM 32 18 23.29 - 1

SECTION 32 18 23.29 - INFILLED POLYETHYLENE SLIT-FILM SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to install all synthetic turf asindicated on the plans and as specified herein. The installation of all new materials shall beperformed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and inaccordance with all approved shop drawings.

B. Perimeter edge details required for the system shall be as detailed and recommended by theManufacturer, and as approved by the Owner.

C. It is the intent of this Section that the Work shall include, but not be limited to:1. Sports field construction, and related materials and accessories shown on Drawings or

required to complete Work.2. Work shall be performed and warranted by a single source supplier/contractor.


A. Section 32 11 23.23 Free-Draining Stone Base for Synthetic Turf System

1.3 REFERENCES

A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition

B. ASTM Standard Test Methods:1. D1577 Standard Test Method for Linear Density of Textile Fiber2. D5848 Standard Test Method for Mass Per Unit Area of Pile Yarn Floor Covering3. D418 Standard Test Method for Testing Pile Yarn Floor Covering Construction 4. D1338 Standard Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings5. D1682 Standard Method of Test for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics6. D5034 Standard Test Method of Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics7. F1015 Standard Test Method for Relative Abrasiveness of Synthetic Turf Playing

Surfaces 8. D4491 Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity9. D2859 Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor

Covering Materials 10. F355 Standard Test Method for Shock-Absorbing Properties of Playing Surfaces. 11. F1936 Standard Test Method for Shock-Absorbing Properties of North American

Football Field Playing Systems as Measured in the Field 12. D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Modified Effort.

C. UIL, NFHS and/or NCAA rules/regulations, latest edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Prior to the Architect approval of a specified synthetic turf system, the Manufacturer shallspecify in writing that their turf system does not violate any other manufacturer's patents,patents allowed or patents pending.



C. Submit the following with the Proposal (if required): 1. Submit two (2) “dry” turf samples, 12”x12” in size, of the specified turf product,. 2. A letter and specification sheet certifying that the products of this section meet or

exceed specified requirements. 3. Certified copies of independent (third-party) laboratory reports on ASTM tests as

follows: a) Pile Height, Face Width & Total Fabric Weight, ASTM D418 or D5848 b) Primary & Secondary Backing Weights, ASTM D418 or D5848 c) Tuft Bind, ASTM D1335 d) Grab Tear Strength, ASTM D1682 or D5034 e) Pill Burn Test ASTM D2859 f) Flooring Critical Radiant Panel Test (Flame Spread) ASTM E-648

4. List of existing installations, including Owner representative and telephone number. 5. Lists providing specific contacts and telephone numbers of the following:

a) A minimum of 5 fields using the specified fiber and infill, in play for at least 5 years. These installations must have used the same manufacturer, product and company they are proposing for this field.

b) A list of a minimum of 5 UIL and/or NCAA sports fields (of the type of sports field; i.e.. football, soccer, etc.) installed by the company in play for at least 5 years.

c) A list of at least of 5 fields of 65,000 square feet or more in North America with the same manufacturer, product, and company, including the exact same fiber and infill system that is being proposed for this field that have been in play for at least 5 years. Provide owner contact names and numbers and dates of install.

6. Resume of Installation Supervisor who will be present on site during installation. 7. The Contractor and the turf Manufacturer (if different from the company) shall, if

requested by the Owner or Owner’s representative, provide a current audited company financial statement. The Owner shall put in writing that this information shall be held in confidence and not shared with third parties.

8. The Contractor and Turf Manufacturer (if different from the company) shall provide evidence that their turf system does not violate any other manufacturer's patents, patents allowed or patents pending.

9. The Contractor and the Turf Manufacturer (if different from the company) shall provide a copy of insured, non-prorated warranty and third party, non-cancelable insurance policy information, as detailed in these documents. The work cannot commence until the 8-year policy documentation is submitted and approved.

D. Prior to ordering of materials:

1. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings indicating: a) Field Layout. b) Field Marking Plan and details for the sport field(s) shall meet UIL, NFHS

and/or NCAA rules/regulations (latest edition). c) Roll/Seaming Layout. d) Methods of attachment, field openings and perimeter conditions.

2. The turf Manufacturer must submit the fiber manufacturer's name, type of fiber, face weight, pile height, and composition of fiber.

E. Prior to Final Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner:

1. Two (2) copies of Maintenance Manuals, which will include all necessary instructions for the proper care and preventative maintenance of the synthetic turf system, including painting and markings.

2. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of seams, drains or other pertinent information.

3. Warranty: Submit Manufacturer Warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with Manufacturer.



4. Warranty Insurance Policy Certificate must match or exceed the requirements outlined in the contract documents, be a minimum 8 year policy, be executed prior to Final Payment, and the Policy must be prepaid for full 8+ year term.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. The Turf Contractor and/or the turf Manufacturer: 1. Must be experienced in the manufacture and installation of this specific type of synthetic

infill turf system for at least 5 years with the same manufacturer, product and company they are proposing for this field. This includes the same pile fiber, the backing, the backing coating, and the installation method.

2. Must have at least 5 fields of 65,000 sq. ft or more of the exact specified material, including the infill material and fiber, in play for at least 5 years with the same manufacturer and company they are proposing for this field.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.

1. The Contractor must provide competent workmen skilled in this specific type of synthetic turf installation. Technicians must have installed specified type of turf system on at least 10 fields of 65,000 sq. ft. or more within the past 3 years.

2. The designated Supervisory Personnel on the project must be certified, in writing by the Turf Manufacturer, as competent in the installation of this material, including sewing/gluing seams and proper installation of the infill mixture.

3. The Manufacturer shall have a representative on site to certify the installation and Warranty compliance.

C. Prior to the beginning of installation, the Installer of the synthetic turf shall inspect the sub-base.

The installer will accept the sub-base in writing when the contractor provides test results for planarity and permeability that are following the synthetic turf manufacturer’s guidelines. The Installer shall have the dimensions of the field and locations for markings measured by a registered surveyor to verify conformity to the specifications and applicable standards. A record of the finished field as-built measurements shall be made. The final tolerance-to-grade of the base shall not exceed +¼ inch in ten feet in any direction.

D. The Contractor shall provide the necessary testing data to the owner that the finished field

meets the required shock attenuation, as per ASTM F1936. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver products to project site in wrapped condition. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures for additional warranty requirements. B. The contractor and Turf Manufacturer shall provide a Warranty to the owner that covers defects

in materials and workmanship of the synthetic turf system for a period of 8 years from the date of Substantial Completion. The turf manufacturer must verify that their onsite representative has inspected the installation and that the work conforms to the manufacturer’s requirements.

C. The Manufacturer’s Warranty shall include general wear and damage caused from UV

degradation. The warranty shall specifically exclude vandalism, and acts of God beyond the control of the owner or the manufacturer.



D. The Manufacturer’s Warranty must be supported by a third party, non-cancelable, non-prorated insurance policy for the full eight (8) year period. The policy must be from an A Best Rated company and be paid in full for the 8-year term.

E. The Contractor shall provide a Warranty to the owner that covers defects in the installation

workmanship, and further warrant that the installation was done in accordance with both the Manufacturer’s recommendations and any written directives of the Manufacturer’s onsite representative.

F. The synthetic turf for the football/soccer field must maintain an ASTM 355 G-max between 100-

160 for the life of the Warranty. The contractor shall pay for a third-party G-max testing upon completion of field installation. If at any point during the 8-year warranty period the field is G-Max tested and does not meet the specified requirements, the turf contractor and/or manufacturer shall reimburse the owner for the test cost and shall make the necessary improvements to the field to bring into the specifications.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. The Contractor will train the Owner's facility maintenance staff in the use of the Turf Manufacturer's recommended groomer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved manufacturers (turf systems) are as follows. All manufacturers turf system must meet the properties outlined in Section 2.2.: 1. AstroTurf – Rhino SF 46 (46-ounce face weight, 2.5” pile height) 2. FieldTurf - Classic HD (42-ounce face weight, 2.5” pile height) 3. FieldTurf – XD (59-ounce face weight, 2.5” pile height) 4. Hellas - Velocity (46-ounce face weight, 2.5” pile height) 5. Shaw – Momentum (46-ounce face weight, 2.5” pile height)

2.2 MATERIALS

A. The component materials of the synthetic turf system consist of: 1. A Carpet made of polyethylene fibers (slit-film) tufted into a fibrous, porous backing.

The fibers shall be a C8 grade polyethylene. 2. An Infill that is a controlled mixture of graded sand and rubber crumb that partially

covers the carpet. 3. Glue, thread, seaming fabric and other materials used to install and mark the artificial

grass field turf.

B. The installed artificial grass field turf shall be a slit-film fiber having the following properties:

Standard Property Specification ASTM D1577 Fiber Denier 10,800 nominal ASTM D1577 Fiber Thickness 130 microns ASTM D418/D5848 Pile Height 2” minimum ASTM D418/D5848 Pile Weight Ref. 2.1.A. ASTM D1335 Tuft Bind 8 lbs. (without infill) ASTM D1682/D5034 Grab Tear (width) >200 lbs/force ASTM D1682/D5034 Grab Tear (length) >200 lbs/force ASTM F1015 Relative Abrasiveness Index 20 ASTM D4491 Carpet Permeability >40 inches/hour ASTM D2859 Flammability (Pill Burn) Pass



ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux >.2 g/sq.cm. (Class B) ASTM F355/F1936 Impact Attenuation, Gmax 100 - 160 over field life (8+ years)

C. The Carpet shall consist of fibers tufted into a primary backing with a secondary elastomeric

coating. 1. The Carpet shall be furnished in 15’ wide rolls. Rolls shall be long enough to go from

sideline to sideline without splicing. The perimeter white line shall be tufted into the individual sideline rolls. Head seams, other than at sidelines, will not be accepted.

2. The Carpet’s primary backing shall be a composite fabric treated with UV inhibitors, consisting of multiple layers of woven polypropylene and non-woven polypropylene needle punched together to function as a single unit. The secondary back coating shall consist of an application of heat-activated urethane to permanently lock the fiber tufts in place.

3. The fiber shall be 10,800 denier, 130 microns thick, low friction, UV-resistant fiber measuring not less than 2 inches high (unless noted otherwise).

4. The fiber height specified above shall be an absolute minimum dimension as measured in place in the field with infill from the top of the backing to the top of the fibers.

D. The Infill materials shall be approved by the Manufacturer. The Infill shall consist of a resilient

layered granular system, comprising selected and graded dust-free silica sand and cryogenically ground (hammer-milled) or dust free ambient SBR rubber crumb.

E. Threaded and/or glued seams as well as the method and adhesives used for inlaid markings

shall be as recommended by the synthetic turf manufacturer. F. If the turf system being submitted is not able to meet the required G-max for the specified

warranty period, the turf manufacturer must install a shock pad shall as follows: 1. Factory made rubber shock pad (Regupol or equal), comprised of recycled SBR

granules bound by polyurethane under heat and pressure. Thickness shall be a minimum 10mm. Joints shall be seamed properly per the manufacturer’s recommendation. Provide detailed specifications with the proposal.

2. In situ SBR rubber granule pad bound by polyurethane (elastic layer). Polyurethane shall comprise at least 7% of the mix. Thickness of elastic layer pad, which must be installed using suitable equipment designed for the application (P700), shall be a minimum 19mm. System must include a percentage of gravel in the mix to provide sufficient weight and density). Provide detailed specifications with the Bid.

3. Porous, synthetic shock pad having a minimum thickness of 14mm, by Brock or preapproved equivalent.

4. Preapproved equivalent shock pad. 2.3 FIELD SWEEPER & FIELD GROOMER

A. Supply a field sweeper/groomer, which shall include a towing mechanism compatible with a field utility vehicle. The field sweeper/groomer shall be an “SMG TurfCare TCA1400” (or approved equivalent) Synthetic Sweeper/Groomer with 72” tow-behind magnet.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. The installation shall be performed in full compliance with approved Shop Drawings.

B. Only trained technicians, skilled in the installation of athletic caliber synthetic turf systems working under the direct supervision of the approved installer supervisors, shall undertake any cutting, sewing, gluing, shearing, topdressing or brushing operations.



C. The designated Supervisory personnel on the project must be certified, in writing by the turf

Manufacturer, as competent in the installation of this material, including sewing seams and proper installation of the Infill mixture.

D. All designs, markings, layouts, and materials shall conform to all currently applicable UIL,

NFHS and/or NCAA rules and other standards that may apply to this type of synthetic grass installation.

E. If an Elastic Layer shock pad system is required, it must be installed using proper paving

equipment (SMG P700, modified for the application), and the crew must be experienced in this application.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that all sub-base, drainage and leveling is complete prior to installation. B. The surface to receive the synthetic turf shall be inspected by the Installer, and prior to the

beginning of installation, the Installer must accept the sub-base in writing. The acceptance will depend on the contractor providing the installer with test results indicating that planarity and permeability are following the synthetic turf manufacturer’s written guidelines or recommendations. The surface must be perfectly clean as installation commences and shall be maintained in that condition throughout the process.

C. The compaction of the aggregate base shall also be accepted in writing by the Turf Installer,

and the surface tolerance-to-grade shall not exceed +1/4 inch over 10 feet. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the installation procedures outlined under this section. Any variance from these requirements must be accepted in writing, by the Manufacturer’s onsite representative, and submitted to the Architect/Owner, verifying that the changes do not in any way affect the warranty. Infill materials shall be approved by the Manufacturer and installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s standard procedures.

B. If a shock pad is required, the pad shall be Installed per these specifications and per the manufacturer’s installation procedures using only approved and suitable equipment and skilled technicians experienced in the installation of elastic layer or factory-made pads. In situ pads must be allowed to cure for a minimum 24 hours.

Repairs to an existing shock pad shall be performed per these specifications and per the

manufacturer’s installation procedures using only approved and suitable equipment and skilled technicians experienced in the installation of elastic layer. The shock pad repairs must be allowed to cure for a minimum 24 hours.

C. The carpet rolls are to be installed directly over the properly prepared aggregate base or shock

pad. Extreme care should be taken to avoid disturbing the aggregate base, both regarding compaction and planarity. It is suggested that a 2-5 ton static roller is on site and available to repair and properly compact any disturbed areas of the aggregate base.

D. The full width rolls shall be laid out across the field. Turf shall be of sufficient length to permit full

cross-field installation from sideline to sideline. No head or cross seams will be allowed in the main playing area between the sidelines. Utilizing standard state of the art sewing or glueing



procedures each roll shall be attached to the next. When all of the rolls of the playing surface have been installed, the sideline areas shall be installed at right angles to the playing field turf.

E. All seams shall be sewn using double bagger stitches and polyester thread or adhered using

seaming tape and high-grade adhesive (per the manufacturer’s standard procedures). Seams shall be flat, tight, and permanent with no separation or fraying.

F. Infill materials shall be applied in numerous thin lifts. The turf shall be brushed as the mixture is

applied. The infill material shall be installed to a depth determined by the Manufacturer, but not less than 75% the pile height of the turf. Should the infill depth ever fall below 70% the pile height of the turf during the 8-year warranty period, the turf contractor shall install new infill at his expense.

G. The Infill materials shall be installed to fill the voids between the fibers and allow the fibers to

remain vertical and non-directional. The Infill installation consists of a base layer of sand followed by a homogenous mixture of the sand and the cryogenically processed rubber. A final application of specifically sized cryogenically processed rubber completes the system.

H. Synthetic turf shall be attached to the perimeter edge detail in accordance with the

Manufacturer’s standard procedures using non-corrosive fasteners.

3.4 FIELD MARKINGS

A. The field will have the following lines and markings tufted or inlaid according to UIL, NFHS, and/or NCAA standards: 1. Football: as shown on the contract drawings and rendering. Color shall be white, except

where noted. a) Side lines b) End lines c) 5-yd lines d) Goal lines e) Orange Coach's box f) 12” White Football Boundary Line g) 60” Boundary Panel in White (see rendering) f) Numbers w/ arrows (numbers shall be shadowed in gray) g) 1-yd hash marks h) Tics i) Inbound hash marks j) Kickoff markings k) Center logo (see rendering) m) Endzone lettering (see rendering)

2. Soccer: Gray as shown on the contract drawings. a) All lines and markings.

3. Baseball/Softball: White as shown on the contract drawings. a) Batters Boxes b) Catchers Boxes c) Home Plate and Pitchers Plate Inlays d) 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Base Inlays e) 4” White basepaths between all bases

4. Refer to the turf renderings in the project manual. B. Standards

1. Standards; all lines and markings shall meet UIL, NFHS, and/or NCAA Standards for the State of Texas.

3.5 CLEANING



A. Protect installed turf from subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected turf surface. C. Contractor shall provide the labor, supplies, and equipment as necessary for final cleaning of

surfaces and installed items. D. All usable remnants of new material shall become the property of the Owner. E. The Contractor shall keep the area clean throughout the project and clear of debris. F. Surfaces, recesses, enclosures, etc., shall be cleaned as necessary to leave the work area in a

clean, immaculate condition ready for immediate occupancy and use by the Owner.



INFILLED MONOFILATMENT SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM

32 18 23.30 - 1

SECTION 32 18 23.30 - INFILLED MONOFILAMENT SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to install all synthetic turf as indicated on the plans and as specified herein. The installation of all new materials shall be performed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and in accordance with all approved shop drawings.

B. Perimeter edge details required for the system shall be as detailed and recommended by the

Manufacturer, and as approved by the Owner. C. It is the intent of this Section that the Work shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Sports field construction, and related materials and accessories shown on Drawings or required to complete Work.

2. Work shall be performed and warranted by a single source supplier/contractor. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 32 11 23.23 Free-Draining Stone Base for Synthetic Turf System 1.3 REFERENCES

A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition B. ASTM Standard Test Methods:

1. D1577 Standard Test Method for Linear Density of Textile Fiber 2. D5848 Standard Test Method for Mass Per Unit Area of Pile Yarn Floor Covering 3. D418 Standard Test Method for Testing Pile Yarn Floor Covering Construction 4. D1338 Standard Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings 5. D1682 Standard Method of Test for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics 6. D5034 Standard Test Method of Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics 7. F1015 Standard Test Method for Relative Abrasiveness of Synthetic Turf Playing

Surfaces 8. D4491 Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity 9. D2859 Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor

Covering Materials 10. F355 Standard Test Method for Shock-Absorbing Properties of Playing Surfaces. 11. F1936 Standard Test Method for Shock-Absorbing Properties of North American

Football Field Playing Systems as Measured in the Field 12. D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Modified Effort.

C. UIL, NFHS and/or NCAA rules/regulations, latest edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Prior to the Architect approval of a specified synthetic turf system, the Manufacturer shall

specify in writing that their turf system does not violate any other manufacturer's patents, patents allowed or patents pending.



32 18 23.30 - 2

C. Submit the following with the Proposal, if required: 1. Submit two (2) “dry” turf samples, 12”x12” in size, of the specified turf product. 2. A letter and specification sheet certifying that the products of this section meet or

exceed specified requirements. 3. Certified copies of independent (third-party) laboratory reports on ASTM tests as

follows: a) Pile Height, Face Width & Total Fabric Weight, ASTM D418 or D5848 b) Primary & Secondary Backing Weights, ASTM D418 or D5848 c) Tuft Bind, ASTM D1335 d) Grab Tear Strength, ASTM D1682 or D5034 e) Pill Burn Test ASTM D2859 f) Flooring Critical Radiant Panel Test (Flame Spread) ASTM E-648

4. List of existing installations, including Owner representative and telephone number. 5. Lists providing specific contacts and telephone numbers of the following:

a) A minimum of 5 fields using the specified fiber and infill, in play for at least 5 years. These installations must have used the same manufacturer, product and company they are proposing for this field.

b) A list of a minimum of 5 UIL and/or NCAA sports fields (of the type of sports field; ie. football, soccer, etc.) installed by the company in play for at least 5 years.

c) A list of at least of 5 fields of 65,000 square feet or more in North America with the same manufacturer, product and company, including the exact same fiber and infill system that is being proposed for this field that have been in play for at least 5 years. Provide owner contact names and numbers and dates of install.

6. Resume of Installation Supervisor who will be present on site during installation. 7. The Contractor and the turf Manufacturer (if different from the company) shall, if

requested by the Owner or Owner’s representative, provide a current audited company financial statement. The Owner shall put in writing that this information shall be held in confidence and not shared with third parties.

8. The Contractor and Turf Manufacturer (if different from the company) shall provide evidence that their turf system does not violate any other manufacturer's patents, patents allowed or patents pending.

9. The Contractor and the Turf Manufacturer (if different from the company) shall provide a copy of insured, non-prorated warranty and third party, non-cancelable insurance policy information, as detailed in these documents. The work cannot commence until the 8-year policy documentation is submitted and approved.

D. Prior to ordering of materials:

1. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings indicating: a. Field Layout b. Field Marking Plan and details for the sport field(s) shall meet UIL, NFHS,

and/or NCAA rules/regulations (latest edition). c. Roll/Seaming Layout d. Methods of attachment, field openings and perimeter conditions.

2. The turf Manufacturer must submit the fiber manufacturer's name, type of fiber, face weight, pile height, and composition of fiber.

E. Prior to Final Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner: 1. Two (2) copies of Maintenance Manuals, which will include all necessary instructions for

the proper care and preventative maintenance of the synthetic turf system, including painting and markings.

2. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of seams, drains or other pertinent information.

3. Warranty: Submit Manufacturer Warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with Manufacturer.



32 18 23.30 - 3

4. Warranty Insurance Policy Certificate must match or exceed the requirements outlined in the contract documents, be a minimum 8 year policy, be executed prior to Final Payment, and the Policy must be prepaid for full 8+ year term.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. The Turf Contractor and/or the turf Manufacturer: 1. Must be experienced in the manufacture and installation of this specific type of synthetic

infill turf system for at least 5 years with the same manufacturer, product and company they are proposing for this field. This includes the same pile fiber, the backing, the backing coating, and the installation method.

2. Must have at least 5 fields of 65,000 square feet or more of the exact specified material, including the infill material and fiber, in play for at least 5 years with the same manufacturer and company they are proposing for this field.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.

1. The Contractor must provide competent workmen skilled in this specific type of synthetic turf installation. Technicians must have installed specified type of turf system on at least 10 fields of 65,000 square feet or more within the past 3 years.

2. The designated Supervisory Personnel on the project must be certified, in writing by the Turf Manufacturer, as competent in the installation of this material, including sewing/gluing seams and proper installation of the infill mixture.

3. The Manufacturer shall have a representative on site to certify the installation and Warranty compliance.

C. Prior to the beginning of installation, the Installer of the synthetic turf shall inspect the sub-base.

The installer will accept the sub-base in writing when the contractor provides test results for planarity and permeability that follow the synthetic turf manufacturer’s guidelines. The Installer shall have the dimensions of the field and locations for markings measured by a registered surveyor to verify conformity to the specifications and applicable standards. A record of the finished field as-built measurements shall be made. The final tolerance-to-grade of the base shall not exceed +¼ inch in ten feet in any direction.

D. The Contractor shall provide the necessary testing data to the owner that the finished field

meets the required shock attenuation, as per ASTM F1936. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver products to project site in wrapped condition. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. See Section 01 77 99 – Closeout Procedures for additional warranty requirements. B. The contractor and Turf Manufacturer shall provide a Warranty to the owner that covers defects

in materials and workmanship of the synthetic turf system for a period of 8 years from the date of Substantial Completion. The turf manufacturer must verify that their onsite representative has inspected the installation and that the work conforms to the manufacturer’s requirements.

C. The Manufacturer’s Warranty shall include general wear and damage caused from UV

degradation. The warranty shall not be prorated. The warranty shall specifically exclude vandalism, and acts of God beyond the control of the owner or the manufacturer.



32 18 23.30 - 4

D. The Manufacturer’s Warranty must be supported by a third party, non-cancelable, non-prorated

insurance policy for the full eight (8) year period. The policy must be from an A Best Rated company and be paid in full for the 8-year term.

E. The Contractor shall provide a Warranty to the owner that covers defects in the installation

workmanship, and further warrant that the installation was done in accordance with both the Manufacturer’s recommendations and any written directives of the Manufacturer’s onsite representative.

F. The synthetic turf for the football/soccer fields must maintain throughout the 8-year warranty

period an ASTM F-355-10a, G-max of between 100-160. The contractor shall pay for a third party G-max testing of field upon completion of field installation. If at any point during the 8-year warranty period the field is G-Max tested and does not meet the specified requirements, the turf contractor and/or manufacturer shall reimburse the owner for the test cost and shall make the necessary improvements to the field to bring into the specifications.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. The Contractor will train the Owner's facility maintenance staff in the use of the Turf Manufacturer's recommended groomer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved manufacturers (turf systems) are as follows. All manufacturers turf system must meet

the properties outlined in Section 2.2.: 1. Hellas - Matrix Helix (44-ounce face weight, 2.5” pile height) 2. Shaw – Powerblade Pro (44-ounce face weight, 2.5” pile height)

2.2 MATERIALS

A. The component materials of the synthetic turf system consist of: 1. A Carpet made of polyethylene monofilament fibers tufted into a fibrous, porous

backing. The fibers shall be a C8 grade polyethylene. 2. An Infill that is a controlled mixture of graded sand and rubber crumb that partially

covers the carpet. 3. Glue, thread, seaming fabric and other materials used to install and mark the artificial

grass field turf. B. The installed artificial grass field turf shall be a slit-film fiber having the following properties:

Standard Property Specification ASTM D1577 Fiber Denier 10,800 nominal ASTM D1577 Fiber Thickness 260 microns ASTM D418/D5848 Pile Height 2” minimum ASTM D418/D5848 Pile Weight Ref. 2.1.A. ASTM D1335 Tuft Bind 8 lbs. (without infill) ASTM D1682/D5034 Grab Tear (width) >200 lbs/force ASTM D1682/D5034 Grab Tear (length) >200 lbs/force ASTM F1015 Relative Abrasiveness Index 20 ASTM D4491 Carpet Permeability >40 inches/hour ASTM D2859 Flammability (Pill Burn) Pass ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux >.2 g/sq.cm. (Class B)



32 18 23.30 - 5

ASTM F355/F1936 Impact Attenuation (Gmax) 100 - 160 over field life (8+ years)

C. The Carpet shall consist of fibers tufted into a primary backing with a secondary elastomeric coating. 1. The Carpet shall be furnished in 15’ wide rolls. Rolls shall be long enough to go from

sideline to sideline without splicing. The perimeter white line shall be tufted into the individual sideline rolls. Head seams, other than at sidelines, will not be acceptable

2. The Carpet’s primary backing shall be a composite fabric treated with UV inhibitors, consisting of multiple layers of woven polypropylene and non-woven polypropylene needle punched together so as to function as a single unit. The secondary back coating shall consist of an application of heat-activated urethane to permanently lock the fiber tufts in place.

3. The fiber shall be 10,800 denier, 260 microns thick, low friction, UV-resistant fiber measuring not less than 2 inches high.

4. The fiber height specified above shall be an absolute minimum dimension as measured in place in the field with infill from the top of the backing to the top of the fibers.

D. The Infill materials shall be approved by the Manufacturer. The Infill shall consist of a resilient

layered granular system, comprising selected and graded dust-free silica sand and cryogenically ground (hammer-milled) or dust free ambient SBR rubber crumb.

E. Threaded and/or glued seams as well as the method and adhesives used for inlaid markings

shall be as recommended by the synthetic turf manufacturer. F. If the turf system being submitted is not able to meet the required G-max for the specified

warranty period, the turf manufacturer must install a shock pad shall as follows: 1. Factory made rubber shock pad (Regupol or equal), comprised of recycled SBR

granules bound by polyurethane under heat and pressure. Thickness shall be a minimum 10mm. Joints shall be seamed properly per the manufacturer’s recommendation. Provide detailed specifications with the proposal.

2. In situ SBR rubber granule pad bound by polyurethane (elastic layer). Polyurethane shall comprise at least 7% of the mix. Thickness of elastic layer pad, which must be installed using suitable equipment designed for the application (P700), shall be a minimum 19mm. System must include a percentage of gravel in the mix to provide sufficient weight and density). Provide detailed specifications with the Bid.

3. Porous, synthetic shock pad having a minimum thickness of 14mm, by Brock or preapproved equivalent.

4. Preapproved equivalent shock pad.

2.3 FIELD SWEEPER & FIELD GROOMER

A. Supply a field sweeper/groomer, which shall include a towing mechanism compatible with a field utility vehicle. The field sweeper/groomer shall be an “SMG TurfCare TCA1400” (or approved equivalent) Synthetic Sweeper/Groomer with 72” tow-behind magnet.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. The installation shall be performed in full compliance with approved Shop Drawings. B. Only trained technicians, skilled in the installation of athletic caliber synthetic turf systems

working under the direct supervision of the approved installer supervisors, shall undertake any cutting, sewing, gluing, shearing, topdressing or brushing operations.

Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project

Documents

Transcript of Gonzales High School Practice Field Turf and Lighting Project